0% found this document useful (0 votes)

85 views1,103 pages

c02586087 PDF

Uploaded by

André Luis Boni Déo

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

85 views1,103 pages

c02586087 PDF

Uploaded by

André Luis Boni Déo

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 1103

3Com Switch 4200G Family

Command Reference Guide

Switch 4200G 12-Port

Switch 4200G 24-Port

Switch 4200G 48-Port

Switch 4200G PWR 24-Port

Product Version: V3.02.03

Manual Version:
6W101-20091210
www.3com.com

3Com Corporation
350 Campus Drive, Marlborough,
MA, USA 01752 3064
Copyright © 2006-2009, 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be
reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as translation,
transformation, or adaptation) without written permission from 3Com Corporation.
3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to
time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision or change.
3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty, term, or condition of any kind, either implied
or expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties, terms or conditions of merchantability,
satisfactory quality, and fitness for a particular purpose. 3Com may make improvements or changes in the
product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this documentation at any time.
If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation, it is furnished under a license
agreement included with the product as a separate document, in the hard copy documentation, or on the
removable media in a directory file named LICENSE.TXT or !LICENSE.TXT. If you are unable to locate a copy,
please contact 3Com and a copy will be provided to you.

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND

If you are a United States government agency, then this documentation and the software described herein are
provided to you subject to the following:
All technical data and computer software are commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense.
Software is delivered as “Commercial Computer Software” as defined in DFARS 252.227-7014 (June 1995) or
as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101(a) and as such is provided with only such rights as are
provided in 3Com’s standard commercial license for the Software. Technical data is provided with limited rights
only as provided in DFAR 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995) or FAR 52.227-14 (June 1987), whichever is applicable.
You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or
documentation contained in, or delivered to you in conjunction with, this User Guide.
Unless otherwise indicated, 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may
not be registered in other countries.
3Com and the 3Com logo are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation.
All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are
associated.

ENVIRONMENTAL STATEMENT
It is the policy of 3Com Corporation to be environmentally-friendly in all operations. To uphold our policy, we
are committed to:
Establishing environmental performance standards that comply with national legislation and regulations.
Conserving energy, materials and natural resources in all operations.
Reducing the waste generated by all operations. Ensuring that all waste conforms to recognized environmental
standards. Maximizing the recyclable and reusable content of all products.
Ensuring that all products can be recycled, reused and disposed of safely.
Ensuring that all products are labelled according to recognized environmental standards.
Improving our environmental record on a continual basis.

End of Life Statement

3Com processes allow for the recovery, reclamation and safe disposal of all end-of-life electronic components.

Regulated Materials Statement

3Com products do not contain any hazardous or ozone-depleting material.

Environmental Statement about the Documentation

The documentation for this product is printed on paper that comes from sustainable, managed forests; it is fully
biodegradable and recyclable, and is completely chlorine-free. The varnish is environmentally-friendly, and the
inks are vegetable-based with a low heavy-metal content.
About This Manual

Organization
3Com Switch 4200G Family Command Reference Guide is organized as follows:

Part Contents
Introduces the commands used for logging into the Ethernet
1 Login
switch and the commands used for configuring CLI.
Introduces the commands used for configuration file
2 Configuration File Management
management.
Introduces the commands used for configuring VLAN and
3 VLAN
voice VLAN.
4 Static Routing Introduces the commands used for configuring static routing.
5 Voice VLAN Introduces the commands used for configuring voice VLAN.
6 GVRP Introduces the GVRP-related commands.
7 Port Basic Configuration Introduces the port-related commands.

8 Link Aggregation Introduces the commands used for link aggregation.

9 Port Isolation Introduces the commands used for port isolation.
Introduces the commands used for configuring port security
10 Port Security-Port Binding
and port binding.
11 DLDP Introduces the commands used for DLDP.

12 MAC Address Table Introduces the commands used for MAC address forwarding
Management table management.
13 MSTP Introduces the STP-related commands.
14 802.1x and System Guard Introduces the 802.1x-related commands.
Introduces the commands used for AAA,
15 AAA
RADIUS,HWTACACS and EAD.
Introduces the commands used for centralized MAC address
16 MAC Address Authentication
authentication.
17 IP Address and Performance Introduces the commands used for IP Address and
Optimization Performance Configuration.
Introduces the commands used for DHCP snooping and DHCP
18 DHCP
Client.
19 ACL Introduces the ACL-related commands.
20 QoS-QoS Profile Introduces the commands used for QoS and QoS profile.
21 Mirroring Introduces the commands used for mirroring.
22 ARP Introduces the ARP-related commands.
23 Stack-Cluster Introduces the commands used for cluster management.
24 SNMP-RMON Introduces the SNMP-related and RMON-related commands.
25 Multicast Protocol Introduces the commands used for IGMP snooping.
26 NTP Introduces the NTP-related commands.
Part Contents
27 SSH Introduces the commands used for configuring SSH2.0.
28 File System Management Introduces the commands used for file system management.
29 FTP-SFTP-TFTP Introduces the FTP/SFTP/TFTP-related commands.
Introduces the commands used for configuring the information
30 Information Center
center.
31 System Maintenance and Introduces the commands used for system maintenance and
Debugging debugging.
32 VLAN-VPN Introduces the commands used for configuring the VLAN-VPN.
33 Remote-ping Introduces the Remote-ping related commands.
34 DNS Introduces the commands used for DNS configuration.
Introduces the commands used for Smart Link and Monitor
35 Smart Link-Monitor Link
Link.
36 IPv6 Management Introduces the commands used for IPv6 Management.
Introduces the commands used for PoE and PoE profile
37 PoE-PoE Profile
configuration.
38 PKI Introduces the commands used for PKI.
39 SSL Introduces the commands used for SSL.
40 Web Authentication Introduces the commands used for Web authentication.
41 LLDP Introduces the commands used for LLDP.
42 Access Management Introduces the commands used for Access Management.
43 UDP Helper Introduces the commands used for UDP Helper.
44 HTTPS Introduces the commands used for HTTPS.
Lists all the commands described in this command manual in
45 Appendix an alphabetic order. The parts and pages where the
commands are described are also given.

Conventions
The manual uses the following conventions:

Command conventions

Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.

italic Command arguments are in italic.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.

Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.
{ x | y | ... }
One is selected.
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and
[ x | y | ... ]
separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.
{ x | y | ... } *
A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
Convention Description
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and
[ x | y | ... ] *
separated by vertical bars. Many or none can be selected.
The argument(s) before the ampersand (&) sign can be entered 1 to n
&<1-n>
times.
# A line starting with the # sign is comments.

GUI conventions

Convention Description
<> Button names are inside angle brackets. For example, click <OK>.
Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside
[]
square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window.
Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example,
/
[File/Create/Folder].

Symbols

Convention Description
Means reader be extremely careful. Improper operation may cause
bodily injury.
Means reader be careful. Improper operation may cause data loss or
damage to equipment.

Means a complementary description.

Related Documentation
In addition to this manual, each 3com Switch 4200G documentation set includes the following:

Manual Description
3Com Switch 4200G Family Describe how to configure your 4200G Switch using the
Configuration Guide-V3.02.03 supported protocols and CLI commands.
Provide a summary of command line interface (CLI)
3Com Switch 4200G Family Quick
commands that are required for you to manage your
Reference Guide
Stackable Switch.
3Com Switch 4200G Family Getting This guide provides all the information you need to install
Started Guide and use the 3Com Switch 4200G Family.
3Com Switch 4200G 10G Interface Provide detailed descriptions of the 10G Interface
Module Installation Guide Modules used by 3Com Switch 4200G Family.
Contain the latest information about your product. If
3Com Switch 4200G Family Release
information in this guide differs from information in the
Notes
release notes, use the information in the Release Notes.
Obtaining Documentation
You can access the most up-to-date 3Com product documentation on the World Wide Web at this URL:
http://www.3com.com.
Table of Contents

1 Login Commands ······································································································································1-1

Login Commands ····································································································································1-1
authentication-mode ························································································································1-1
auto-execute command ···················································································································1-3
copyright-info enable ·······················································································································1-3
databits ············································································································································1-4
display telnet-server source-ip ········································································································1-5
display telnet source-ip····················································································································1-6
display user-interface ······················································································································1-6
display users····································································································································1-9
display web users ··························································································································1-10
free user-interface ·························································································································1-10
header ···········································································································································1-11
history-command max-size ···········································································································1-13
idle-timeout ····································································································································1-14
ip http shutdown ····························································································································1-15
lock ················································································································································1-16
parity ··············································································································································1-16
protocol inbound ····························································································································1-17
screen-length·································································································································1-18
send ···············································································································································1-19
service-type ···································································································································1-20
set authentication password··········································································································1-21
shell ···············································································································································1-22
speed ·············································································································································1-23
stopbits ··········································································································································1-23
telnet ··············································································································································1-24
telnet ipv6 ······································································································································1-25
telnet source-interface ···················································································································1-26
telnet source-ip ······························································································································1-26
telnet-server source-interface········································································································1-27
telnet-server source-ip···················································································································1-27
user-interface·································································································································1-28
user privilege level·························································································································1-29
CLI Configuration Commands···············································································································1-30
command-privilege level················································································································1-30
display history-command···············································································································1-33
super··············································································································································1-33
super authentication-mode············································································································1-34
super password ·····························································································································1-35

2 Commands for User Control ····················································································································2-1

Commands for Controlling Logging in Users ··························································································2-1
acl ····················································································································································2-1

i
free web-users·································································································································2-1
ip http acl ·········································································································································2-2
snmp-agent community ···················································································································2-2
snmp-agent group ···························································································································2-3
snmp-agent usm-user······················································································································2-4

ii
1 Login Commands

Syntax

authentication-mode { password | scheme [ command-authorization ] | none }

View

User interface view

Parameters

none: Specifies not to authenticate users.

password: Authenticates users using the local password.
scheme: Authenticates users locally or remotely using usernames and passwords.
command-authorization: Performs command authorization on TACACS authentication server.

Description

Use the authentication-mode command to specify the authentication mode.

z If you specify the password keyword to authenticate users using the local password, remember to
set the local password using the set authentication password command. Otherwise, AUX users
can log in to the switch successfully without password, but VTY users will fail the login. VTY users
must enter the correct authentication password to log in to the switch.
z If you specify the scheme keyword to authenticate users locally or remotely using usernames and
passwords, the actual authentication mode, that is, local or remote, depends on other related AAA
scheme configuration of the domain.
z If this command is executed with the command-authorization keyword specified, authorization is
performed on the TACACS server whenever you attempt to execute a command, and the
command can be executed only when you pass the authorization. Normally, a TACACS server
contains a list of the commands available to different users.
By default, the authentication mode is none for AUX users and password for VTY users.

For a VTY user interface, to specify the none keyword or password keyword for login users, make sure
that SSH is not enabled in the user interface. Otherwise, the configuration fails. Refer to the protocol
inbound command for related configuration.

1-1
To improve security and prevent attacks to the unused Sockets, TCP 23 and TCP 22, ports for Telnet
and SSH services respectively, will be enabled or disabled after corresponding configurations.
z If the authentication mode is none, TCP 23 will be enabled, and TCP 22 will be disabled.
z If the authentication mode is password, and the corresponding password has been set, TCP 23 will
be enabled, and TCP 22 will be disabled.
z If the authentication mode is scheme, there are three scenarios: when the supported protocol is
specified as telnet, TCP 23 will be enabled; when the supported protocol is specified as SSH, TCP
22 will be enabled; when the supported protocol is specified as all, both the TCP 23 and TCP 22
port will be enabled.

Examples

z Example of the password authentication mode configuration

# Configure to authenticate users using the local password on the console port, and set the
authentication password to aabbcc in plain text.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface aux 0
[Sysname-ui-aux0] authentication-mode password
[Sysname-ui-aux0] set authentication password simple aabbcc

After the configuration, when a user logs in to the switch through the console port, the user must enter
the correct password.
z Example of the scheme authentication mode configuration
# Configure the authentication mode as scheme for VTY users logging in through Telnet.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface vty 0
[Sysname-ui-vty0] authentication-mode scheme
[Sysname-ui-vty0] quit

# Specify domain system as the default domain, and set the scheme authentication mode to local for
the domain.
[Sysname] domain default enable system
[Sysname] domain system
[Sysname-isp-system] scheme local
[Sysname-ui-vty0] quit

# Configure the local authentication username and password.

[Sysname] local-user guest
[Sysname-luser-guest] password simple 123456
[Sysname-luser-guest] service-type telnet level 2

After the configuration, when a user logs in to the switch through VTY0, the user must enter the
configured username and password.

1-2
auto-execute command

Syntax

auto-execute command text

undo auto-execute command

View

VTY user interface view

Parameters

text: Command to be executed automatically.

Description

Use the auto-execute command command to set the command that is executed automatically after a
user logs in.
Use the undo auto-execute command command to disable the specified command from being
automatically executed.
By default, no command is configured to be executed automatically after a user logs in.
Normally, the telnet command is specified to be executed automatically to enable the user to Telnet to a
specific network device automatically.

z The auto-execute command command may cause you unable to perform common configuration
in the user interface, so use it with caution.
z Before executing the auto-execute command command and save your configuration, make sure
you can log in to the switch in other modes and cancel the configuration.

Examples

# Configure the telnet 10.110.100.1 command to be executed automatically after users log in to VTY 0.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface vty 0
[Sysname-ui-vty0] auto-execute command telnet 10.110.100.1
% This action will lead to configuration failure through ui-vty0. Are you sure?[
Y/N]y

After the above configuration, when a user logs onto the device through VTY 0, the device automatically
executes the configured command and logs off the current user.

Syntax

1-3
undo copyright-info enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the copyright-info enable command to enable copyright information displaying.

Use the undo copyright-info enable command to disable copyright information displaying.
By default, copyright information displaying is enabled. That is, the copyright information is displayed
after a user logs into a switch successfully.
Note that these two commands apply to users logging in through the console port and by means of
Telnet.

Examples

# Disable copyright information displaying.

********************************************************************************
* Copyright(c) 2004-2008 3Com Corp. and its licensors. All rights reserved. *
* Without the owner's prior written consent, *
* no decompiling or reverse-engineering shall be allowed. *
********************************************************************************

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] undo copyright-info enable

# After the above configuration, no copyright information is displayed after a user logs in, as shown
below.
<Sysname>

databits

Syntax

databits { 7 | 8 }
undo databits

View

AUX user interface view

Parameters

7: Sets the databits to 7.

8: Sets the databits to 8.

Description

Use the databits command to set the databits for the user interface.
1-4
Use the undo databits command to revert to the default databits.
The default databits is 8.

z This command takes effect on AUX user interfaces only.

z The databits setting on the terminal and that on the device user interface must be the same for
communication.

Examples

# Set the databits to 7.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface aux 0
[Sysname-ui-aux0] databits 7

display telnet-server source-ip

Syntax

display telnet-server source-ip

View

F : Current user-interface is active and work in async mode.
Idx : Absolute index of user-interface.
Type : Type and relative index of user-interface.
Privi: The privilege of user-interface.
Auth : The authentication mode of user-interface.
Int : The physical location of UIs.
Super: The Super authentication mode of UIs.
A : Authentication use AAA.
N : Current UI need not authentication.
P : Authentication use current UI's password.
S : Authentication use super password.

Table 1-1 display user-interface command output description

Filed Description
+ The user interface is in use.
The user interface operates in asynchronous
F
mode.
Idx The absolute index of the user interface
Type User interface type and the relative index
Tx/Rx Transmission speed of the user interface
Modem Indicates whether or not a modem is used.
Privi Available command level
Auth Authentication mode
Int Physical position of the user interface

1-7
Filed Description
The authentication mode used for a user to
switch from the current lower user level to a
higher level, including S, A, SA and AS.
S: Super password authentication
A: HWTACACS authentication
Super SA: Super password authentication is preferred,
with HWTACACS authentication being a backup
AS: HWTACACS authentication is preferred,
with super password authentication being a
backup
For details about the four authentication modes,
refer to the CLI part of the manual.
A The current user authentication mode is scheme.
N The current user authentication mode is none.
The current user authentication mode is
P
password.
S Super password authentication

# Display the summary information about the user interface.

<Sysname> display user-interface summary
User interface type : [AUX]
0:X
User interface type : [VTY]
1:UXXX X

1 character mode users. (U)

5 UI never used. (X)
1 total UI in use

Table 1-2 display user-interface summary command output description

Field Description
User interface type User interface type: AUX or VTY
0 and 1 represent the least absolute number for
AUX user interfaces and VTY user interfaces.
“U” and “X” indicate the usage state of an
interface: U indicates that the corresponding
0: X/1:UXXX X
user interface is used; X indicates that the
corresponding user interface is idle. The total
number of Us and Xs is the total number of user
interfaces that are available.
The number of current users, that is, the number
character mode users. (U)
of Us
The number of user interfaces not being used
UI never used. (X)
currently, that is, the number of Xs
The total number of user interfaces being used
total UI in use. currently, that is, the total number of users
currently logging in to the switch successfully

1-8
display users

Syntax

display users [ all ]

View

Any view

Parameters

all: Displays the user information about all user interfaces.

Description

Use the display users command to display the login user information about user interfaces, including
AUX user interfaces and VTY user interfaces.
If you do not specify the all keyword, only the user information about the user interface that is being
used is displayed.

Examples

# Display the user information about the current user interface.

<Sysname> display users
UI Delay Type Ipaddress Username Userlevel
+ 1 VTY 0 00:00:00 TEL 192.168.0.208 3

+ : Current operation user.

F : Current operation user work in async mode.

Table 1-3 display users command output description

Field Description
The numbers in the left sub-column are the absolute user interface
UI indexes, and those in the right sub-column are the relative user
interface indexes.
Delay The period (in seconds) the user interface idles for.
Type User type
Ipaddress The IP address from which the user logs in.
Username The login name of the user that logs into the user interface.
The level of the commands available to the users logging in to the
Userlevel
user interface
The information is about the current user interface, and the current
F
user interface operates in asynchronous mode.
+ The user interface is in use.

1-9
display web users

Syntax

display web users

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display web users command to display the information about the current on-line Web users
(management users that log in to the switch through the Web interface).

Examples

# Display the information about the current on-line Web users.

<Sysname> display web users
ID Name Language Level Login Time Last Req. Time
00800003 admin English Management 06:16:32 06:18:35

Table 1-4 display web users command output description

Field Description
ID ID of a Web user
Name Name of a Web user

Language Language a Web user uses

Level Level of a Web user
Login Time Time when a Web user logs in

Last Req. Time Time when the latest request is made

free user-interface

Syntax

free user-interface [ type ] number

View

User view

Parameters

type: User interface type, which can be AUX (for AUX user interface) and VTY (for VTY user interface).
number: User interface index. A user interface index can be relative or absolute.
z In relative user interface index scheme, the type argument is required. In this case, AUX user
interfaces is numbered AUX0; VTY user interfaces are numbered from VTY0 through VTY4.

1-10
z In absolute user interface index scheme, the type argument is not required. In this case, user
interfaces are numbered from 0 to 5.

Description

Use the free user-interface command to free a user interface. That is, this command tears down the
connection between a user and a user interface. Users of the manage level can use this command to
control use of other user interfaces.
Multiple users can log in to the system to configure the device simultaneously. In some circumstances,
when the administrator wants to make configurations without interruption from the users that have
logged in using other user interfaces, the administrator can execute the following commands to release
the connections established on the specified user interfaces.
Note that the current user interface that you are actively using for this command cannot be freed.

Examples

# The user logging in to the switch through AUX 0, and with the user level of 3 (manage level) releases
user interface VTY 0.
<Sysname> display users
UI Delay Type Ipaddress Username Userlevel
F 0 AUX 0 00:00:00 3
8 VTY 0 00:01:30 TEL 192.168.0.108 song 2

+ : Current operation user.

F : Current operation user work in async mode.
<Sysname> free user-interface vty 0
Are you sure you want to free user-interface vty0 [Y/N]? y
[OK]

After you perform the above operation, the user connection on user interface VTY0 is torn down. The
user in it must log in again to connect to the switch.

header

Syntax

header [ incoming | legal | login | shell ] text

undo header { incoming | legal | login | shell }

View

System view

Parameters

incoming: Sets the login banner for users that log in through modems. If you specify to authenticate
login users, the banner appears after a user passes the authentication. (The session does not appear in
this case.)
legal: Sets the authorization banner, which is displayed when a user enters user view.
login: Sets the login banner. The banner set by this keyword is valid only when users are authenticated
before they log in to the switch and appears while the switch prompts for user name and password. If a
user logs in to the switch through Web, the banner text configured will be displayed on the banner page.

1-11
shell: Sets the session banner, which appears after a session is established. If you specify to
authenticate login users, the banner appears after a user passes the authentication.
text: Banner to be displayed. If no keyword is specified, this argument is the login banner. You can
provide this argument in two ways. One is to enter the banner in the same line as the command (A
command line can accept up to 254 characters.) The other is to enter the banner in multiple lines (you
can start a new line by pressing Enter,) where you can enter a banner that can contain up to 2000
characters (including the invisible characters such as carriage return). Note that the first character is the
beginning character and the end character of the banner. After entering the end character, you can
press Enter to exit the interaction.

Description

Use the header command to set the banners that are displayed when a user logs into a switch through
an AUX or VTY user interface. The login banner is displayed on the terminal when the connection is
established. And the session banner is displayed on the terminal if a user successfully logs in.
Use the undo header command to disable displaying a specific banner or all banners.
By default, no banner is configured.

This command is valid to users logging in through AUX and VTY user interfaces, without affecting users
logging in through the Web interface.

Note the following:

z If you specify any one of the four keywords without providing the text argument, the specified
keyword will be regarded as the login information.
z The banner configured with the header incoming command is displayed after a modem user logs
in successfully or after a modem user passes the authentication when authentication is required. In
the latter case, the shell banner is not displayed.
z The banner configured with the header legal command is displayed when you enter the user
interface. If password authentication is enabled or an authentication scheme is specified, this
banner is displayed before login authentication.
z With password authentication enabled or an authentication scheme specified, the banner
configured with the header login command is displayed after the banner configured with the
header legal command and before login authentication.
z The banner configured with the header shell command is displayed after a non-modem user
session is established.

Examples

# Configure banners.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] header login %Welcome to login!%
[Sysname] header shell %
Input banner text, and quit with the character '%'.

1-12
Welcome to shell!%
[Sysname] header incoming %
Input banner text, and quit with the character '%'.
Welcome to incoming!%
[Sysname] header legal %
Input banner text, and quit with the character '%'.
Welcome to legal!%

z The character % is the starting/ending character of text in this example. Entering % after the
displayed text quits the header command.
z As the starting and ending character, % is not a part of a banner.

# Test the configuration remotely using Telnet. (only when login authentication is configured can the
login banner be displayed).
********************************************************************************
* Copyright(c) 2004-2008 3Com Corp. and its licensors. All rights reserved. *
* Without the owner's prior written consent, *
* no decompiling or reverse-engineering shall be allowed. *
********************************************************************************

Welcome to legal!
Press Y or ENTER to continue, N to exit.
Welcome to login!

Password:

Welcome to shell!
<Sysname>

history-command max-size

Syntax

history-command max-size value

undo history-command max-size

View

User interface view

Parameters

value: Size of the history command buffer, ranging from 0 to 256 (in terms of commands).

1-13
Description

Use the history-command max-size command to set the size of the history command buffer of the
current user interface.
Use the undo history-command max-size command to revert to the default history command buffer
size.
By default, the history command buffer of each user can contain up to ten commands.
Each user interface has an independent history command buffer, which saves validated history
commands of the current user. The size of a history command buffer determines the number of history
commands that can be saved. You can use the display history-command command, up-arrow key or
down-arrow key to display commands saved in the history command buffer.
After you terminate the current session, the system automatically clears the commands saved in the
corresponding history command buffer.
Related commands: display history-command.

Examples

# Set the size of the history command buffer of AUX 0 to 20 to enable it to store up to 20 commands.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface aux 0
[Sysname-ui-aux0] history-command max-size 20

idle-timeout

Syntax

idle-timeout minutes [ seconds ]

undo idle-timeout

View

User interface view

Parameters

minutes: Number of minutes. This argument ranges from 0 to 35,791.

seconds: Number of seconds. This argument ranges from 0 to 59.

Description

Use the idle-timeout command to set the timeout time. The connection to a user interface is terminated
if no operation is performed in the user interface within the timeout time.
Use the undo idle-timeout command to revert to the default timeout time.
You can use the idle-timeout 0 command to disable the timeout function.
The default timeout time is 10 minutes.

Examples

# Set the timeout time of AUX 0 to 1 minute.

<Sysname> system-view

1-14
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface aux 0
[Sysname-ui-aux0] idle-timeout 1

ip http shutdown

Syntax

ip http shutdown
undo ip http shutdown

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the ip http shutdown command to shut down the WEB Server.
Use the undo ip http shutdown command to launch the WEB Server.
By default, the WEB Server is launched.

To improve security and prevent attacks to the unused Sockets, TCP 80 port for HTTP service will be
enabled or disabled after corresponding configurations.
z TCP 80 port is enabled only after you use the undo ip http shutdown command to enable the
Web server.
z If you use the ip http shutdown command to disabled the Web server, TCP 80 port is disabled.

After the Web file is upgraded, you need to use the boot web-package command to specify a new Web
file or specify a new Web file from the boot menu after reboot for the Web server to operate properly.
Refer to the File System Management part in this manual for information about the boot web-package
command.

Examples

# Shut down the WEB Server.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ip http shutdown

1-15
# Launch the WEB Server.
[Sysname] undo ip http shutdown

lock

Syntax

lock

View

User view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the lock command to lock the current user interface to prevent unauthorized operations in the user
interface.
After you execute this command, the system prompts you for the password and prompts you to confirm
the password. The user interface is locked only when the password entered is the same both times.
To unlock a user interface, press Enter and then enter the password as prompted.
Note that if you set a password containing more than 16 characters, the system matches only the first
16 characters of the password entered for unlocking the user interface. That is, the system unlocks the
user interface as long as the first 16 characters of the password entered are correct.
By default, the current user interface is not locked.

Examples

# Lock the current user interface.

<Sysname> lock

Press Enter, enter a password, and then confirm it as prompted. (The password entered is not
displayed).
Password:
Again:
locked !

In this case, the user interface is locked. To operate the user interface again, you need to press Enter
and provide the password as prompted.
Password:
<Sysname>

parity

Syntax

parity { even | none | odd | }

undo parity

1-16
View

AUX user interface view

Parameters

even: Performs even checks.

none: Does not check.
odd: Performs odd checks.

Description

Use the parity command to set the check mode of the user interface.
Use the undo parity command to revert to the default check mode.
By default, no check is performed.

z This command takes effect on AUX user interfaces only.

z The check mode on the terminal and that on the device user interface must be the same for
communication.

Examples

# Set to perform even checks.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface aux 0
[Sysname-ui-aux0] parity even

protocol inbound

Syntax

protocol inbound { all | ssh | telnet }

View

VTY user interface view

Parameters

all: Supports both Telnet protocol and SSH protocol.

ssh: Supports SSH protocol.
telnet: Supports Telnet protocol.

Description

Use the protocol inbound command to specify the protocols supported by the user interface.
Both Telnet protocol and SSH protocol are supported by default.

1-17
Related commands: user-interface vty.

To improve security and prevent attacks to the unused Sockets, TCP 23 and TCP 22 (ports for Telnet
and SSH services respectively) will be enabled or disabled after corresponding configurations.
z If the authentication mode is none, TCP 23 will be enabled, and TCP 22 will be disabled.
z If the authentication mode is password, and the corresponding password has been set, TCP 23 will
be enabled, and TCP 22 will be disabled.
z If the authentication mode is scheme, there are three scenarios: when the supported protocol is
specified as telnet, TCP 23 will be enabled; when the supported protocol is specified as ssh, TCP
22 will be enabled; when the supported protocol is specified as all, both the TCP 23 and TCP 22
port will be enabled.

To configure a user interface to support SSH, you need to set the authentication mode to scheme for
users to log in successfully. If the authentication mode is set to password or none for login users, the
protocol inbound ssh command will fail. Refer to the authentication-mode command for the related
configuration.

Examples

# Configure that only SSH protocol is supported in VTY 0.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface vty 0
[Sysname-ui-vty0] protocol inbound ssh

screen-length

Syntax

screen-length screen-length
undo screen-length

View

User interface view

Parameters

screen-length: Number of lines the screen can contain. This argument ranges from 0 to 512.

Description

Use the screen-length command to set the number of lines the terminal screen can contain.

1-18
Use the undo screen-length command to revert to the default number of lines.
By default, the terminal screen can contain up to 24 lines.
You can use the screen-length 0 command to disable the function to display information in pages.

Examples

# Set the number of lines the terminal screen can contain to 20.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface aux 0
[Sysname-ui-aux0] screen-length 20

send

Syntax

send { all | number | type number }

View

User view

Parameters

all: Sends messages to all user interfaces.

type: User interface type, which can be AUX (for AUX user interface) and VTY (for VTY user interface).
number: User interface index. A user interface index can be relative or absolute.
z In relative user interface index scheme, the type argument is required. In this case, AUX user
interfaces is numbered AUX0; VTY user interfaces are numbered from VTY0 through VTY4.
z In absolute user interface index scheme, the type argument is not required. In this case, user
interfaces are numbered from 0 to 5.

Description

Use the send command to send messages to a user interface or all the user interfaces.

Examples

# Send “hello” to all user interfaces.

<Sysname> send all
Enter message, end with CTRL+Z or Enter; abort with CTRL+C:
hello^Z
Send message? [Y/N]y

The current user interface will receive the following information:

***
***
***Message from vty1 to vty1
***
hello

1-19
service-type

Syntax

service-type { ftp | lan-access | { ssh | telnet | terminal }* [ level level ] }

undo service-type { ftp | lan-access | { ssh | telnet | terminal }* }

View

Local user view

Parameters

ftp: Specifies the users to be of FTP type.

lan-access: Specifies the users to be of LAN-access type, which normally means Ethernet users, such
as 802.1x users.
ssh: Specifies the users to be of SSH type.
telnet: Specifies the users to be of Telnet type.
terminal: Makes terminal services available to users logging in through the console port.
level level: Specifies the user level for Telnet users, Terminal users, or SSH users. The level argument
ranges from 0 to 3 and defaults to 0.

Description

Use the service-type command to specify the login type and the corresponding available command
level.
Use the undo service-type command to cancel login type configuration.
Commands fall into four command levels: visit, monitor, system, and manage, which are described as
follows:
z Visit level: Commands at this level are used to diagnose network and change the language mode
of user interface, such as the ping, tracert, and language-mode command. The telnet command
is also at this level. Commands at this level cannot be saved in configuration files.
z Monitor level: Commands at this level are used to maintain the system, to debug service problems,
and so on. The display and debugging commands are at monitor level. Commands at this level
cannot be saved in configuration files.
z System level: Commands at this level are used to configure services. Commands concerning
routing and network layers are at system level. You can utilize network services by using these
commands.
z Manage level: Commands at this level are for the operation of the entire system and the system
supporting modules. Services are supported by these commands. Commands concerning file
system, file transfer protocol (FTP), trivial file transfer protocol (TFTP), downloading using
XModem, user management, and level setting are at administration level.
Refer to CLI for detailed introduction to the command level.

Examples

# Configure commands at level 0 are available to the users logging in using the user name of zbr.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] local-user zbr

1-20
[Sysname-luser-zbr] service-type telnet level 0

# To verify the above configuration, you can quit the system, log in again using the user name of zbr,
and then list the available commands, as listed in the following.
<Sysname> ?
User view commands:
cluster Run cluster command
display Display current system information
nslookup Query Internet name servers
ping Ping function
quit Exit from current command view
super Set the current user priority level
telnet Establish one TELNET connection
tracert Trace route function
undo Cancel current setting

set authentication password

Syntax

set authentication password { cipher | simple } password

undo set authentication password

View

User interface view

Parameters

cipher: Specifies to save the local password in cipher text.

simple: Specifies to save the local password in plain text.
password: Password to be set. The password must be in plain text if you specify the simple keyword in
the set authentication password command. If you specify the cipher keyword, the password can be
in either cipher text or plain text, as described in the following.
z When you enter the password in plain text containing no more than 16 characters (such as 123),
the system converts the password to the corresponding 24-character encrypted password.
z When you enter the password in cipher text containing 24 characters, make sure you are aware of
the corresponding password in plaintext. For example, the plain text “123456” corresponds to the
cipher text “OUM!K%F<+$[Q=^Q`MAF4<1!!”.

Description

Use the set authentication password command to set the local password.
Use the undo set authentication password command to remove the local password.
Note that only plain text passwords are expected when users are authenticated.

1-21
By default, password authentication is performed when a user logs in through a modem or Telnet. If no
password is set, the user cannot establish a connection with the switch.

Examples

# Set the local password of VTY 0 to “123”.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface vty 0
[Sysname-ui-vty0] set authentication password simple 123

shell

Syntax

shell
undo shell

View

User interface view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the shell command to enable terminal services.

Use the undo shell command to disable terminal services.
By default, terminal services are disabled in all user interfaces.
Note the following when using the undo shell command:
z Terminal services cannot be disabled in AUX user interfaces.
z This command is unavailable in the current user interface.
z The execution of this command requires user confirmation.

Examples

# Disable terminal services in VTY 0 through VTY 4 (assuming that you log in through an AUX user
interface).
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface vty 0 4
[Sysname-ui-vty0-4] undo shell
% Disable ui-vty0-4 , are you sure ? [Y/N]y

1-22
speed

Syntax

speed speed-value
undo speed

View

AUX user interface view

Parameters

speed-value: Transmission speed (in bps). This argument can be 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19,200, 38,400, 57,600, and 115,200.

Description

Use the speed command to set the transmission speed of the user interface.
Use the undo speed command to revert to the default transmission speed.
By default, the transmission speed is 19,200 bps.

z This command takes effect on AUX user interfaces only.

z The transmission speed setting on the terminal and that on the device user interface must be the
same for communication.

Examples

# Set the transmission speed of the user interface AUX 0 to 115,200 bps.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface aux 0
[Sysname-ui-aux0] speed 115200

stopbits

Syntax

stopbits { 1 | 1.5 | 2 }
undo stopbits

View

AUX user interface view

Parameters

1: Sets the stopbits to 1.

1.5: Sets the stopbits to 1.5.

1-23
2: Sets the stopbits to 2.

Description

Use the stopbits command to set the stopbits of the user interface.
Use the undo stopbits command to revert to the default stopbits.
Execute these two commands in AUX user interface view only.
By default, the stopbits is 1.

z The Switch 4200G does not support communication with a terminal emulation program with
stopbits set to 1.5.
z Changing the stop bits value of the switch to a value different from that of the terminal emulation
utility does not affect the communication between them.

Examples

# Set the stop bits to 2.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface aux 0
[Sysname-ui-aux0] stopbits 2

telnet

Syntax

telnet { hostname | ip-address } [ service-port ] [ source-interface interface-type interface-number |

source-ip ip-address ]

View

User view

Parameters

hostname: Host name of the remote device, a string of 1 to 20 characters.

ip-address: IPv4 address of the remote device.
service-port: Number of the TCP port through which the remote device provides Telnet service. This
argument ranges from 0 to 65535, and defaults to 23.
source-interface interface-type interface-number: Specifies the type and number of the source
interface.
source-ip ip-address: Specifies the source IP address.

Description

Use the telnet command to Telnet to another device from the current switch to manage the former
remotely. You can terminate a Telnet connection by pressing Ctrl+K or by executing the quit command.
1-24
Examples

# Telnet from Ethernet switch Switch A to Switch B whose IP address is 129.102.0.1.

<SwitchA> telnet 129.102.0.1
Trying 129.102.0.1 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 129.102.0.1 ...
********************************************************************************
* Copyright(c) 2004-2008 3Com Corp. and its licensors. All rights reserved. *
* Without the owner's prior written consent, *
* no decompiling or reverse-engineering shall be allowed. *
********************************************************************************

telnet ipv6

Syntax

telnet ipv6 remote-system [ -i interface-type interface-number ] [ port-number ]

View

User view

Parameters

remote-system: IPv6 address or host name of the remote system. An IPv6 address can be up to 46
characters; a host name is a string of 1 to 20 characters.
-i interface-type interface-number: Specifies the outbound interface by interface type and interface
number. The outbound interface is required when the destination address is a local link address.
port-number: TCP port number assigned to Telnet service on the remote system, in the range 0 to
65535 and defaults to 23.

Description

Use the telnet ipv6 command to Telnet to a device from the current device to perform remote
management operation. You can terminate a Telnet session by pressing Ctrl+K.

Example

# Telnet to the device with IPv6 address 3001::1.

<Sysname> telnet ipv6 3001::1
Trying 3001::1 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 3001::1 ...
********************************************************************************
* Copyright(c) 2004-2008 3Com Corp. and its licensors. All rights reserved. *
* Without the owner's prior written consent, *
* no decompiling or reverse-engineering shall be allowed. *
********************************************************************************

1-25
<Sysname>

telnet source-interface

Syntax

telnet source-interface interface-type interface-number

undo telnet source-interface

View

System view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.

Description

Use the telnet source-interface command to specify the source interface for a Telnet client.
Use the undo telnet source-interface command to remove the specified source interface.
The source interface can be a loopback interface or a VLAN interface. If the specified interface does not
exist, the system prompts that this configuration fails.
With this command configured, when a device logs in to the Telnet server as a Telnet client, the source
IP address is the IP address of the specified interface, the login succeeds only when there is a route
between the specified source interface and the Telnet server.

Examples

# Specify VLAN-interface 2 as the source interface for the Telnet client.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] telnet source-interface Vlan-interface 2

telnet source-ip

Syntax

telnet source-ip ip-address

undo telnet source-ip

View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address to be set.

Description

Use the telnet source-ip command to specify the source IP address for a Telnet client.
Use the undo telnet source-ip command to remove the source IP address.

1-26
With the telnet source-ip command configured, the specified IP address functions as the source IP
address when a device logs into a Telnet server as a Telnet client, and the login succeeds only when
there is a route between the specified source IP address and the Telnet server.
Note that when the telnet source-ip command is executed, if the IP address specified is not an IP
address of the local device, your configuration fails.

Examples

# Set the source IP address to 192.168.1.1 for the Telnet client.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] telnet source-ip 192.168.1.1

telnet-server source-interface

Syntax

telnet-server source-interface interface-type interface-number

undo telnet-server source-interface

View

System view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.

Description

Use the telnet-server source-interface command to specify the source interface for a Telnet server.
Use the undo telnet-server source-interface command to remove the source interface.
The source interface can be a loopback interface or a VLAN interface. If the specified interface does not
exist, the system prompts that this configuration fails, and the login succeeds only when there is a route
between the Telnet client and the specified source interface.
With the telnet-server source-interface command configured, the client can log in to the local device
using only the primary IP address of the specified interface.

Examples

# Specify VLAN-interface 2 as the source interface for the Telnet server.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] telnet source-interface Vlan-interface 2

telnet-server source-ip

Syntax

telnet-server source-ip ip-address

undo telnet-server source-ip

1-27
View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: Source IP address to be set.

Description

Use the telnet-server source-ip command to specify the source Telnet server IP address.
Use the undo telnet-server source-ip command to remove the source Telnet server IP address.
With the telnet-server source-ip command configured, the client can log in to the local device using
the specified IP address only, and the login succeeds only when there is a route between the client and
specified source IP address.

z If the specified IP address is not an address on the local switch, the system prompts configuration
failure.
z If the specified IP address is a secondary IP address of a Layer 3 interface, a client can log in to the
switch using only the primary IP address of the interface.

Examples

# Specify the source IP address of the Telnet server as 192.168.1.1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] telnet-server source-ip 192.168.1.1

user-interface

Syntax

user-interface [ type ] first-number [ last-number ]

View

System view

Parameters

type: User interface type, which can be AUX (for AUX user interface) and VTY (for VTY user interface).
first-number: User interface index identifying the first user interface to be configured. A user interface
index can be relative or absolute.
z In relative user interface index scheme, the type argument is required. In this case, AUX user
interfaces is numbered AUX0; VTY user interfaces are numbered from VTY0 through VTY4.
z In absolute user interface index scheme, the type argument is not required. In this case, user
interfaces are numbered from 0 to 5.

1-28
last-number: User interface number identifying the last user interface to be configured. The value of this
argument must be larger than that of the first-number argument.

Description

Use the user-interface command to enter one or more user interface views to perform configuration.

Examples

# Enter VTY0 user interface.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface vty 0
[Sysname-ui-vty0]

user privilege level

Syntax

user privilege level level

undo user privilege level

View

User interface view

Parameters

level: Command level ranging from 0 to 3.

Description

Use the user privilege level command to configure the command level available to the users logging in
to the user interface.
Use the undo user privilege level command to revert to the default command level.
By default, the commands at level 3 are available to the users logging in to the AUX user interface. The
commands at level 0 are available to the users logging in to VTY user interfaces.
Commands fall into four command levels: visit, monitor, system, and manage, which are described as
follows:
z Visit level: Commands at this level are used to diagnose network, such as the ping, tracert, and
telnet command. Commands at this level cannot be saved in configuration files.
z Monitor level: Commands at this level are used to maintain the system, to debug service problems,
and so on. The display and debugging commands are at monitor level. Commands at this level
cannot be saved in configuration files.
z System level: Commands at this level are used to configure services. Commands concerning
routing and network layers are at system level. You can utilize network services by using these
commands.
z Manage level: Commands at this level are for the operation of the entire system and the system
supporting modules. Services are supported by these commands. Commands concerning file
system, file transfer protocol (FTP), trivial file transfer protocol (TFTP), downloading using
XModem, user management, and level setting are at administration level.
Refer to CLI Configuration for information about command level.

1-29
Examples

# Configure that commands at level 1 are available to the users logging in to VTY 0.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface vty 0
[Sysname-ui-vty0] user privilege level 1

# You can verify the above configuration by Telnetting to VTY 0 and displaying the available commands,
as listed in the following.
<Sysname> ?
User view commands:
cluster Run cluster command
debugging Enable system debugging functions
display Display current system information
mtracert Trace route to multicast source
nslookup Query Internet name servers
ping Ping function
quit Exit from current command view
reset Reset operation
send Send information to other user terminal interfaces
super Set the current user priority level
telnet Establish one TELNET connection
terminal Set the terminal line characteristics
tracert Trace route function
undo Cancel current setting

CLI Configuration Commands

command-privilege level

Syntax

command-privilege level level view view command

undo command-privilege view view command

View

System view

Parameters

level level: Command level to be set, in the range of 0 to 3.

view view: CLI view. It can be any CLI view that the Ethernet switch supports. The 3com switch 4200G
supports only the CLI views listed in Table 1-5:

Table 1-5 Available CLI views for the view argument

CLI view Description

acl-adv Advanced ACL view
acl-basic Basic ACL view

1-30
CLI view Description
acl-ethernetframe Layer 2 ACL view
aux Aux 1/0/0 port view, that is, console port view
cluster Cluster view
ftp-client FTP client view
gigabitethernet GigabitEthernet port view
hwtacacs HWTACACS view
isp ISP domain view
loopback Loopback interface view
luser Local user view
manage-vlan Management VLAN view
mst-region MST region view
mtlk-group Monitor link group view
null NULL interface view
peer-key-code Public key editing view
peer-public-key Public key view
poe-profile PoE profile view
radius-template RADIUS scheme view
remote-ping Remote-ping test group view
shell User view
smlk-group Smart link group view
system System view
tengigabitethernet 10 Gigabit Ethernet port view
user-interface User interface view
vlan VLAN view
vlan-interface VLAN interface view

command: Command for which the level is to be set.

Description

Use the command-privilege level command to set the level of a specified command in a specified
view.
Use the undo command-privilege view command to restore the default.
Commands fall into four levels: visit (level 0), monitor (level 1), system (level 2), and manage (level 3).
The administrator can change the level of a command as required. For example, the administrator can
change a command from a higher level to a lower level so that the lower level users can use the
command.
The default levels of commands are described in the following table:

1-31
Table 1-6 Default levels of commands

Level Name Command

Commands used to diagnose network, such as ping, tracert, and
0 Visit level
telnet commands.
Commands used to maintain the system and diagnose service fault,
1 Monitor level
such as debugging, terminal and reset commands.
2 System level All configuration commands except for those at the manage level.
Commands associated with the basic operation modules and
support modules of the system, such as file system,
3 Manage level
FTP/TFTP/XMODEM downloading, user management, and level
setting commands.

Note that:
z You are recommended to use the default command level or modify the command level under the
guidance of professional staff; otherwise, the change of command level may bring inconvenience
to your maintenance and operation, or even potential security problem.
z When you change the level of a command with multiple keywords or arguments, you should input
the keywords or arguments one by one in the order they appear in the command syntax. Otherwise,
your configuration will not take effect. The values of the arguments should be within the specified
ranges.
z When you configure the undo command-privilege view command, the value of the command
argument can be an abbreviated form of the specified command, that is, you only need to enter the
keywords at the beginning of the command. For example, after the undo command-privilege
view system ftp command is executed, all commands starting with the keyword ftp (such as ftp
server acl, ftp server enable, and ftp timeout) will be restored to the default level; if you have
modified the command level of commands ftp server enable and ftp timeout, and you want to
restore only the ftp server enable command to its default level, you should use the undo
command-privilege view system ftp server command.
z If you modify the command level of a command in a specified view from the default command level
to a lower level, remember to modify the command levels of the quit command and the
corresponding command that is used to enter this view. For example, the default command level of
commands interface and system-view is 2 (system level); if you want to make the interface
command available to the users with the user privilege level of 1, you need to execute the following
three commands: command-privilege level 1 view shell system-view, command-privilege level
1 view system interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1, and command-privilege level 1 view system quit,
so that the login users with the user privilege level of 1 can enter system view, execute the
interface ethernet command, and then return to user view.

Examples

# Set the level of the tftp get command in user view (shell) to 0, and configure the keywords or
arguments one by one in the order they appear in the tftp get command syntax.
[Sysname] command-privilege level 0 view shell tftp
[Sysname] command-privilege level 0 view shell tftp 192.168.0.1
[Sysname] command-privilege level 0 view shell tftp 192.168.0.1 get
[Sysname] command-privilege level 0 view shell tftp 192.168.0.1 get bootrom.btm

1-32
# Restore the default level of the tftp get command. To restore the default levels of the commands
starting with the tftp keyword, you only need to specify the tftp keyword.
[Sysname] undo command-privilege view shell tftp

display history-command

Syntax

display history-command

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display history-command command to display the history commands of the current user, so
that the user can check the configurations performed formerly.
History commands are those commands that were successfully executed recently and saved in the
history command buffer. You can set the size of the buffer by the history-command max-size
command. When the history command buffer is full for that user, the earlier commands will be
overwritten by the new ones.
By default, the CLI can save 10 history commands for each user.
Related commands: history-command max-size in login module.

Examples

# Display the history commands of the current user.

<Sysname> display history-command
system-view
quit
display history-command

super

Syntax

super [ level ]

View

User view

Parameters

level: User level, in the range of 0 to 3.

Description

Use the super command to switch from the current user level to a specified level.

1-33
Executing this command without the level argument will switch the current user level to level 3 by
default.
Note that:
z Users logged into the switch fall into four user levels, which correspond to the four command levels
respectively. Users at a specific level can only use the commands at the same level or lower levels.
z You can switch between user levels after logging into a switch successfully. The high-to-low user
level switching is unlimited. However, the low-to-high user level switching requires the
corresponding authentication. The authentication mode can be set through the super
authentication-mode command.
z For security purpose, the password entered is not displayed when you switch to another user level.
You will remain at the original user level if you have tried three times but failed to enter the correct
authentication information.
Related commands: super authentication-mode, super password.

Examples

# Switch from the current user level to user level 3, using super password authentication.
<Sysname> super 3
Password:
User privilege level is 3, and only those commands can be used
whose level is equal or less than this.
Privilege note: 0-VISIT, 1-MONITOR, 2-SYSTEM, 3-MANAGE

# Switch from the current user level to level 3, using HWTACACS authentication.
<Sysname> super 3
Username: user@system
Password:
User privilege level is 3, and only those commands can be used
whose level is equal or less than this.
Privilege note: 0-VISIT, 1-MONITOR, 2-SYSTEM, 3-MANAGE

super authentication-mode

Syntax

super authentication-mode { super-password | scheme }*

undo super authentication-mode

View

User interface view

Parameters

super-password: Adopts super password authentication for low-to-high user level switching.
scheme: Adopts Huawei terminal access controller access control system (HWTACACS)
authentication for low-to-high user level switching.

Description

Use the super authentication-mode command to specify the authentication mode used for low-to-high
user level switching.

1-34
Use the undo super authentication-mode command to restore the default.
By default, super password authentication is adopted for low-to-high user level switching.
Note that, the two authentication modes, super password authentication and HWTACACS
authentication, are available at the same time to provide authentication redundancy. When both the two
authentication modes are specified, the order to perform the two types of authentication is determined
by the order in which they are specified, as described below.
z If the super authentication-mode super-password scheme command is executed to specify the
authentication mode for user level switching, the super password authentication is preferred and
the HWTACACS authentication mode is the backup.
z If the super authentication-mode scheme super-password command is executed to specify the
authentication mode for low-to-high user level switching, the HWTACACS authentication is
preferred and the super password authentication mode is the backup.
z When both the super password authentication and the HWTACACS authentication are specified,
the device adopts the preferred authentication mode first. If the preferred authentication mode
cannot be implemented (for example, the super password is not configured or the HWTACACS
authentication server is unreachable), the backup authentication mode is adopted.

Examples

# Specify HWTACACS authentication as the preferred authentication mode when a VTY 0 user
switches from the current level to a higher level, with the super password authentication as the backup
authentication mode.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface vty 0
[Sysname-ui-vty0] super authentication-mode scheme super-password

super password

Syntax

super password [ level level ] { cipher | simple } password

undo super password [ level level ]

View

System view

Parameters

level level: User level, in the range of 1 to 3. It is 3 by default.

cipher: Stores the password in the configuration file in ciphered text.
simple: Stores the password in the configuration file in plain text.
password: Password to be set. If the simple keyword is used, you must provide a plain-text password,
that is, a string of 1 to 16 characters. If the cipher keyword is used, you can provide a password in either
of the two ways:
z Input a plain-text password, that is, a string of 1 to 16 characters, which will be automatically
converted into a 24-character cipher-text password.

1-35
z Directly input a cipher-text password, that is, a string of 1 to 24 characters, which must correspond
to a plain-text password. For example, The cipher-text password “_(TT8F]Y\5SQ=^Q`MAF4<1!!”
corresponds to the plain-text password 1234567.

Description

Use the super password command to set a switching password for a specified user level, which will be
used when users switch from a lower user level to the specified user level.
Use the undo super password command to restore the default configuration.
By default, no such password is set.
Note that, no matter whether a plain-text or cipher-text password is set, users must enter the plain-text
password during authentication.

Examples

# Set the switching password for level 3 to 0123456789 in plain text.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] super password level 3 simple 0123456789

1-36
2 Commands for User Control

Commands for Controlling Logging in Users

acl

Syntax

acl acl-number { inbound | outbound }

undo acl acl-number { inbound | outbound }

View

User interface view

Parameters

acl-number: ACL number. This argument can identify different types of ACLs, as listed below.
z 2000 to 2999, for basic ACLs
z 3000 to 3999, for advanced ACLs
z 4000 to 4999, for Layer 2 ACLs
inbound: Applies the ACL for the users Telnetting to the local switch from the current user interface.
outbound: Applies the ACL for the users Telnetting to other devices from the current user interface.
This keyword is unavailable to Layer 2 ACLs.

Description

Use the acl command to apply an ACL for Telnet users.

Use the undo acl command to cancel the configuration.
By default, no ACL is applied.

snmp-agent community

Syntax

snmp-agent community { read | write } community-name [ acl acl-number | mib-view view-name ]*

undo snmp-agent community community-name

View

System view

2-2
Parameters

read: Specifies that the community has read-only permission in the specified view.
write: Specifies that the community has read/write permission in the specified view.
community-name: Community name, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
acl acl-number: Specifies an ACL number for the community. The acl-number argument ranges from
2000 to 2999.
mib-view view-name: Sets the name of the MIB view accessible to the community. The view-name
argument is a string of 1 to 32 characters.

Description

Use the snmp-agent community command to set a community name and to enable users to access
the switch through SNMP. You can also optionally use this command to apply an ACL to perform access
control for network management users.
Use the undo snmp-agent community command to cancel community-related configuration for the
specified community.
By default, SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c access a switch by community names.

Examples

# Set the community name to h123, enable users to access the switch in the name of the community
(with read-only permission). Apply ACL 2000 for network management users (assuming that ACL 2000
already exists.)
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent community read h123 acl 2000

snmp-agent group

Syntax

In SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c:

snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name [ read-view read-view ] [ write-view write-view ]
[ notify-view notify-view ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name
In SNMPv3:
snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ] [ read-view read-view ] [ write-view
write-view ] [ notify-view notify-view ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ]

View

System view

Parameters

v1: SNMPv1.
v2c: SNMPv2c.
v3: SNMPv3.

2-3
group-name: Group name. This argument can be of 1 to 32 characters.
authentication: Specifies to authenticate SNMP data without encrypting the data.
privacy: Authenticates and encrypts packets.
read-view: Name of the view to be set to read-only. This argument can be of 1 to 32 characters.
write-view: Name of the view to be set to readable & writable. This argument can be of 1 to 32
characters.
notify-view: Name of the view to be set to a notifying view. This argument can be of 1 to 32 characters.
acl acl-number: Specifies an ACL. The acl-number argument ranges from 2,000 to 2,999.

Description

Use the snmp-agent group command to create an SNMP group. You can also optionally use this
command to apply an ACL to filter network management users.
Use the undo snmp-agent group command to remove a specified SNMP group.
By default, the SNMP group configured through the snmp-agent group v3 command is not
authenticated or encrypted.

Examples

# Create an SNMP group named h123 and apply ACL 2001 for network management users (assuming
that basic ACL 2001 already exists).
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent group v1 h123 acl 2001

snmp-agent usm-user

Syntax

For SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c:

snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name
For SNMPv3:
snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name [ [ cipher ] authentication-mode { md5 | sha }
auth-password [ privacy-mode { aes128 | des56 } priv-password ] ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name { engineid engineid-string | local }

View

System view

Parameters

v1: SNMPv1.
v2c: SNMPv2c.
v3: SNMPv3.
user-name: User name, a string of 1 to 32 characters.

2-4
group-name: Name of the group to which the user corresponds. This argument is a string of 1 to 32
characters.
cipher: Specifies the authentication or encryption password to be in ciphertext.
authentication-mode: Requires authentication. If this keyword is not provided, neither authentication
nor encryption is performed.
md5: Adopts HMAC-MD5 algorithm.
sha: Adopts HMAC-SHA algorithm.
auth-password: Authentication password, a string of 1 to 64 characters in plain text, a 32-bit
hexadecimal number in cipher text if MD5 algorithm is used, and a 40-bit hexadecimal number in cipher
text if SHA algorithm is used.
privacy: Encrypts packets.
des56: Specifies data encryption standard (DES) for encrypting.
aes128: Specifies advanced encryption standard (AES) for encrypting.
priv-password: Encryption password, a string of 1 to 64 characters in plain text, a 32-bit hexadecimal
number in cipher text if MD5 algorithm is used, and a 40-bit hexadecimal number in cipher text if SHA
algorithm is used.
acl-number: Basic ACL number, ranging from 2000 to 2999.
local: Specifies local entity users.
engineid-string: Engine ID associated with the user, a string of even number of hexadecimal numbers
and comprising of 10 to 64 hexadecimal digits.

Description

Use the snmp-agent usm-user command to add a user to an SNMP group. You can also optionally
use this command to apply an ACL for network management users.
Use the undo snmp-agent usm-user command to remove an SNMP user from the corresponding
SNMP group and to remove the ACL configuration on the user.

Examples

# Add a user named aaa to an SNMP group named group1, specify to require authentication, specify
the authentication protocol as HMAC-MD5-96 and authentication password as 123, and apply ACL
2002 to filter network management users (assuming that ACL 2002 already exists).
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent usm-user v3 aaa group1 authentication-mode md5 123 acl 2002

2-5
Table of Contents

1 Configuration File Management Commands ··························································································1-1

File Attribute Configuration Commands ··································································································1-1
display current-configuration ···········································································································1-1
display current-configuration vlan····································································································1-4
display saved-configuration·············································································································1-5
display startup ·································································································································1-7
display this·······································································································································1-8
reset saved-configuration ················································································································1-9
save ···············································································································································1-10
startup saved-configuration ···········································································································1-11

i
1 Configuration File Management Commands

3com Switch 4200G allows you to input a file path and file name in one of the following ways:
z In universal resource locator (URL) format and starting with “unit1>flash:/”. or “flash:/” This method
is used to specify a file in the current Flash memory. For example, the URL of a file named text.txt
in the root directory of the switch is unit1>flash:/text.txt or flash:/text.txt.
z Entering the path name or file name directly. This method can be used to specify a path or a file in
the current work directory. For example, to access file text.txt in the current directory, you can
directly input the file name text.txt as the file URL

File Attribute Configuration Commands

display current-configuration

Syntax

display current-configuration [ configuration [ configuration-type ] | interface [ interface-type ]

[ interface-number ] ] [ by-linenum ] [ | { begin | exclude | include } regular-expression ]

View

Any view

Parameters

configuration configuration-type: Specifies to display non-interface configuration. If configuration-type

is not specified, all the non-interface configurations are displayed; if configuration-type is specified, the
specified type of configuration is displayed. The configuration type you can specify is based on your
current configuration. For example:
z acl-adv: Indicates the advanced Access Control List (ACL) configuration.
z acl-basic: Indicates the basic ACL configuration.
z acl-ethernetframe: Indicates the Layer 2 ACL configuration
z remote-ping: Indicates the remote-ping configuration.
z isp: Indicates the internet service provider configuration.
z radius-template: Indicates the radius template configuration.
z system: Indicates the system configuration.
z user-interface: Indicates the user interface configuration.
interface: Displays port/interface configuration.
interface-type: Port/interface type, which can be one of the following: AUX, GigabitEthernet,
Ten-GigabitEthernet, Loopback, NULL and VLAN-interface.

1-1
interface-number: Port/interface number.
by-linenum: Displays configuration information with line numbers.
|: Uses a regular expression to filter the configuration of the switch to be displayed. By specifying a
regular expression, you can locate and query the needed information quickly.
regular-expression: A regular expression, case sensitive. It supports the following match rules:
z begin: Displays the line that matches the regular expression and all the subsequent lines.
z exclude: Displays the lines that do not match the regular expression.
z include: Displays only the lines that match the regular expression.
A regular expression also supports some special characters. For match rules of the special characters,
refer to Table 1-1 for details.

Table 1-1 Special characters in regular expression

Character Meaning Remarks

Starting sign, the string to the right of this For example, regular expression ^user
^ character appears only at the beginning matches lines beginning with user, not
of a line. Auser.
Ending sign, the string to the left of this For example, regular expression user$
$ character appears only at the end of a matches lines ending with user, not
line. userA.
Full stop, a wildcard used in place of any
. None
character, including blank
Asterisk, the character to the left of the
For example, zo* can match z and zoo,
* asterisk should match zero or more
and so on, but not zo.
consecutive times.
Plus sign, the character to the left of the
For example, zo+ can match zo and
+ plus sign should match one or more
zoo, and so on, but not z.
consecutive times.
Hyphen. It connects two values (the
For example, 1-9 means numbers from 1
smaller one before it and the bigger one
- to 9 (inclusive); a-h means from a to h
after it) to indicate a range together with
(inclusive).
[ ].
Square brackets. Specifies a range of For example, [1-36A] can match a
[] characters, and matches any character string containing any character among
in the specified range. 1, 2, 3, 6, and A.
For example, (123A) means a character
group 123A; 408(12)+ can match 40812
Parenthesis. Specifies a character
() or 408121212. But it cannot match 408.
group. It is usually used with + or *.
That is, 12 can appear continuously and
it must at least appear once.

Description

Use the display current-configuration command to display the current configuration of a switch.
After you finish a set of configurations, you can execute the display current-configuration command
to display the parameters that take effect currently.
Note that:
z Parameters that are the same as the default are not displayed.
z The configured parameter whose corresponding function does not take effect is not displayed.

1-2
Related commands: save, reset saved-configuration, display saved-configuration.

Examples

# Display configuration information about all the interfaces on the current switch.
<Sysname> display current-configuration interface
#
interface Vlan-interface1
ip address 192.168.0.54 255.255.255.0
#
interface Vlan-interface2
#
interface Vlan-interface3
#
interface Aux1/0/0
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
voice vlan enable
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/3
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/4
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/5
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/6
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/7
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/8
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/9
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/10
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/11
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/12
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/13
shutdown
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/14
shutdown
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/15
shutdown

1-3
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/16
shutdown
#
interface NULL0
#
return

# Display the lines that include the strings matching 10* in the configuration information. (The character
* means that the character 0 in the string before it can appear multiple times or does not appear.)
<Sysname> display current-configuration | include 10*
domain 1
vlan 1 to 3
vlan 10
interface Vlan-interface1
ip address 192.168.0.91 255.255.255.0
interface Aux1/0/0
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/3
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/4
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/5
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/6
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/7
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/8
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/9
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/10
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/11
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/12
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/13
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/14
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/15
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/16

# Display the configuration information starting with the string user.

<Sysname> display current-configuration | include ^user
user-interface aux 0
user-interface vty 0 4

display current-configuration vlan

Syntax

display current-configuration vlan [ vlan-id ] [ by-linenum ]

View

Any view

Parameters

vlan vlan-id: VLAN ID, in the range 1 to 4094.

1-4
by-linenum: Displays configuration information with line numbers.

Description

Use the display current-configuration vlan command to display the current VLAN configuration of
the switch.
Without the vlan-id argument specified, this command displays configuration information about all the
VLANs that exist on the switch.
If there are contiguous VLANs without any configuration, the system combines these VLANs together in
the format of vlan-id to vlan-id when displaying the VLAN configuration information.
Related commands: save, reset saved-configuration, display saved-configuration.

Examples

# Display the VLAN configuration information of the current switch.

<Sysname> display current-configuration vlan
#
vlan 1
#
vlan 100 to 200
#
return

display saved-configuration

Syntax

display saved-configuration [ unit unit-id ] [ by-linenum ]

View

Any view

Parameters

unit unit-id: Specifies the unit ID of a switch. It only can be 1.

by-linenum: Displays configuration information with line numbers.

Description

Use the display saved-configuration command to display the initial configuration file of a switch.
Note that:
z If the switch starts up without a configuration file, the system will display that no configuration file
exists upon execution of the command.
z If you have saved configuration after the switch starts up, the command displays the last saved
configuration.
Related commands: save, reset saved-configuration, display current-configuration.

Examples

# Display the initial configuration file of the current switch.

<Sysname> display saved-configuration

1-5
#
sysname Sysname
#
radius scheme system
#
domain system
#
vlan 1
#
interface Vlan-interface1
ip address 192.168.0.54 255.255.255.0
#LOCCFG. MUST NOT DELETE
#
interface Aux1/0/0
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/3
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/4
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/5
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/6
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/7
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/8
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/9
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/10
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/11
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/12
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/13
shutdown
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/14
shutdown
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/15
shutdown
#

1-6
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/16
shutdown
#TOPOLOGYCFG. MUST NOT DELETE
#GLBCFG. MUST NOT DELETE
#
interface NULL0
#
user-interface aux 0
user-interface vty 0 4
authentication-mode none
user privilege level 3
#
return

The configuration information output above in turn is the system configuration, logical interface
configuration, physical port configuration, and user interface configuration.

display startup

Syntax

display startup [ unit unit-id ]

View

Any view

Parameters

unit unit-id: Specifies the unit ID of a switch. It only can be 1.

Description

Use the display startup command to display the startup configuration of a switch.
Related commands: startup saved-configuration.

Examples

# Display the startup configuration file information of the current switch.

<Sysname> display startup
UNIT1:
Current Startup saved-configuration file: flash:/config.cfg
Next main startup saved-configuration file: flash:/config.cfg
Next backup startup saved-configuration file: flash:/backup.cfg
Bootrom-access enable state: enabled

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display startup command

Field Description
Current Startup
The configuration file used for the current startup
saved-configuration file
Next main startup
The main configuration file used for the next startup
saved-configuration file

1-7
Field Description
Next backup startup
The backup configuration file used for the next startup
saved-configuration file
Whether you can use the user-defined password to access the
Boot ROM:
z enabled indicates you can access the Boot ROM with the
user-defined password.
Bootrom-access enable state z disabled indicates you cannot access the Boot ROM with the
user-defined password.
For related information, refer to the startup bootrom-access
enable command in the File System Management part of the
manual.

display this

Syntax

display this [ by-linenum ]

View

Any view

Parameters

by-linenum: Displays configuration information with line numbers.

Description

Use the display this command to display the current configuration performed in the current view. To
verify the configuration performed in a view, you can use this command to display the parameters that
are valid in the current view.
Note that:
z Effective parameters that are the same as the default are not displayed.
z The configured parameter whose corresponding function does not take effect is not displayed.
z Execution of this command in any user interface view or VLAN view displays the valid configuration
parameters in all user interfaces or VLANs.
Related commands: save, reset saved-configuration, display saved-configuration, display
current-configuration.

Examples

# Display the configuration parameters that take effect in all user interface views.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface aux 0
[Sysname-ui-aux0] display this
#
user-interface aux 0
user-interface vty 0 4
authentication-mode none

1-8
user privilege level 3
#
return

reset saved-configuration

Syntax

reset saved-configuration [ backup | main ]

View

User view

Parameters

backup: Erases the backup configuration file.

main: Erases the main configuration file.

Description

Use the reset saved-configuration command to erase the configuration file saved in the Flash of a
switch.
The following two situations exist:
z While the reset saved-configuration [ main ] command erases the configuration file with main
attribute, it only erases the main attribute of a configuration file having both main and backup
attribute.
z While the reset saved-configuration backup command erases the configuration file with backup
attribute, it only erases the backup attribute of a configuration file having both main and backup
attribute.
You may need to erase the configuration file for one of these reasons:
z After you upgrade software, the old configuration file does not match the new software.
z The startup configuration file is corrupted or not the one you need.

z This command will permanently delete the configuration file from the switch.
z An error occurs when you execute this command if the configuration file to be deleted does not
exist.

Related commands: save.

Examples

# Erase the main configuration file to be used in the next startup.

<Sysname> reset saved-configuration main
The saved configuration will be erased.
Are you sure?[Y/N]y
Configuration in flash memory is being cleared.

1-9
Please wait ...
....
Unit1 reset saved-configuration successfully.

save

Syntax

save [ cfgfile | [ safely ] [ backup | main ] ]

View

Any view

Parameters

cfgfile: Path name or file name of a configuration file in the Flash, a string of 5 to 56 characters.
safely: Saves the current configuration in the safe mode.
backup: Saves the configuration to the backup configuration file.
main: Saves the configuration to the main configuration file.

Description

Use the save command to save the current configuration to a configuration file in the Flash.
When you use this command to save the configuration file,
z If the main and backup keywords are not specified, the current configuration will be saved to the
main configuration file.
z If the cfgfile argument is specified, but the file specified by it does not exist, the system will create
the file and then save the current configuration to it. The file attribute is neither main nor backup.
z If the cfgfile argument is specified and the file specified by it exists, the system will save the current
configuration to the specified file. The file attribute is the original attribute of the file.
z If the cfgfile argument is not specified, the system will save the current configuration to the
configuration file used for this startup. If the switch starts up without loading the configuration file,
the system will save the current configuration with the default name (config.cfg) in the root
directory.
The system supports two modes for saving the current configuration file.
z Fast saving mode. This is the mode when you use the save command without the safely keyword.
The mode saves the file quicker but is likely to lose the original configuration file if the switch
reboots or the power fails during the process.
z Safe mode. This is the mode when you use the save command with the safely keyword. The mode
saves the file slower but can retain the original configuration file in the Flash even if the switch
reboots or the power fails during the process.

1-10
z It is recommended to adopt the fast saving mode in the conditions of stable power and adopt the
safe mode in the conditions of unstable power or remote maintenance.
z The extension name of the configuration file must be .cfg.

Examples

# Save the current configuration to 123.cfg as the main configuration file for the next startup.
<Sysname> save main
The configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure?[Y/N]y
Please input the file name(*.cfg)(To leave the existing filename
unchanged press the enter key):123.cfg

Now saving current configuration to the device.

Saving configuration. Please wait...
............
Unit1 save configuration flash:/123.cfg successfully

startup saved-configuration

Syntax

startup saved-configuration cfgfile [ backup | main ]

undo startup saved-configuration [ unit unit-id ]

View

User view

Parameters

cfgfile: Path name or file name of a configuration file in the Flash, a string of 5 to 56 characters.
backup: Specifies the configuration file to be the backup configuration file.
main: Specifies the configuration file to be the main configuration file.
unit unit-id: Specifies a switch by its unit ID. It only can be 1.

Description

Use the startup saved-configuration command to specify a configuration file to be the main
configuration file or the backup configuration file to be used for the next startup of the switch.
Use the undo startup saved-configuration command to specify a switch to use null configuration
when it restarts.
Note that: If you execute the startup saved-configuration command with neither the backup nor the
main keyword specified, the configuration file identified by the cfgfile argument is specified as the main
configuration file to be used for the next startup of the switch.

1-11
The configuration file must use .cfg as its extension name and the startup configuration file must be
saved at the root directory in the Flash of the switch.

Related commands: display startup.

Examples

# Configure the configuration file named config.cfg as the main configuration file to be used for the next
startup of the current switch.
<Sysname> startup saved-configuration config.cfg main
Please wait......Done!

1-12
Table of Contents

1 VLAN Configuration Commands··············································································································1-1

VLAN Configuration Commands·············································································································1-1
description ·······································································································································1-1
display interface Vlan-interface ·······································································································1-2
display vlan······································································································································1-3
interface Vlan-interface····················································································································1-5
name················································································································································1-5
shutdown ·········································································································································1-6
vlan ··················································································································································1-7
Port-Based VLAN Configuration Commands··························································································1-9
display port ······································································································································1-9
port···················································································································································1-9
port access vlan·····························································································································1-10
port hybrid pvid vlan ······················································································································1-11
port hybrid vlan ······························································································································1-12
port link-type ··································································································································1-12
port trunk permit vlan·····················································································································1-13
port trunk pvid vlan ························································································································1-14
Protocol-Based VLAN Configuration Commands ·················································································1-15
display protocol-vlan interface·······································································································1-15
display protocol-vlan vlan ··············································································································1-16
port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan ········································································································1-17
protocol-vlan ··································································································································1-18

i
1 VLAN Configuration Commands

VLAN Configuration Commands

description

Syntax

description text
undo description

View

VLAN view, VLAN interface view

Parameters

text: Case sensitive character string to describe the current VLAN or VLAN interface. Special characters
and spaces are allowed.
It has:
z 1 to 32 characters for a VLAN description.
z 1 to 80 characters for a VLAN interface description.

Description

Use the description command to configure the description of the current VLAN or VLAN interface. You
can use the description to provide information helping identify the devices or network segment attached
to the VLAN or VLAN interface, and so on.
Use the undo description command to restore the default.
By default, the description of a VLAN is its VLAN ID, for example VLAN 0001; the description of a VLAN
interface is its name, for example Vlan-interface 1 Interface.
You can display the description of a VLAN or VLAN interface with the display vlan or display interface
Vlan-interface command.

Examples

# Configure the description of VLAN 10 as connect to LAB1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan 10
[Sysname-vlan10] description connect to LAB1

# Configure the description of VLAN-interface 1 as gateway of LAB1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] description gateway of LAB1

1-1
display interface Vlan-interface

Syntax

display interface Vlan-interface [ vlan-id ]

View

Any view

Parameters

vlan-id: Specifies a VLAN interface number.

Description

Use the display interface Vlan-interface command to display information about the specified VLAN
interface or all VLAN interfaces already created if no VLAN interface is specified.
VLAN interface is a virtual interface in Layer 3 mode, used to realize the layer 3 communication
between different VLANs. Each VLAN has a VLAN interface, which can forward packets of the local
VLAN to the destination IP addresses at the network layer.
The output of this command shows the state, IP address, description and other information of a VLAN
interface. You can use the information to troubleshoot network problems.
Related commands: interface Vlan-interface.

Examples

# Display information about all existing VLAN interfaces.

<Sysname> display interface Vlan-interface 1
Vlan-interface1 current state :UP
Line protocol current state :UP
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc00-5191
Internet Address is 192.168.0.1/24 Primary
Description : Vlan-interface1 Interface
The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display interface Vlan-interface command

Field Description
The state of the VLAN interface, which can be
one of the following:
z Administratively DOWN: This VLAN interface
has been manually disabled with the
shutdown command.
Vlan-interface1 current state z DOWN: The administrative state of this VLAN
interface is up, but its physical state is down.
It indicates that the VLAN corresponding to
this interface does not contain ports in up
state (possibly because the lines have failed).
z UP: The administrative and physical states of
this VLAN interface are both up.

1-2
Field Description
The link layer protocol state of the VLAN
interface, which can be one of the following:
z DOWN: The protocol state of this VLAN
Line protocol current state interface is down, usually because no IP
address is configured.
z UP: The protocol state of this VLAN interface
is up.
Format of the frames sent from the VLAN
interface. PKTFMT_ETHNT 2 indicates that this
IP Sending Frames' Format is VLAN interface sends Ethernet II frames. Refer
PKTFMT_ETHNT_2 to the VLAN configuration part in the
accompanied operation manual for information
about frame formats.
MAC address corresponding to the VLAN
Hardware address
interface
Internet Address IP address corresponding to the VLAN interface
192.168.0.1/24 Primary Primary IP address of this VLAN interface
Description Description string of the VLAN interface
The Maximum Transmit Unit Maximum transmission unit (MTU)

For information about how to configure an IP address for a VLAN interface, refer to the description on
the ip address command in the IP Address and Performance Command part.

display vlan

Syntax

display vlan [ vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] | all | dynamic | static ]

View

Any view

Parameters

vlan-id1: Specifies the ID of a VLAN of which information is to be displayed, in the range of 1 to 4094.
to vlan-id2: In conjunction with vlan-id1, define a VLAN range to display information about all existing
VLANs in the range. The vlan-id2 argument takes a value in the range of 1 to 4094, and must not be
less than that of vlan-id1.
all: Displays information about all the VLANs.
dynamic: Displays the number of dynamic VLANs and the ID of each dynamic VLAN. Dynamic VLANs
refer to VLANs that are generated through GVRP or those distributed by a RADIUS server.
static: Displays the number of static VLANs and the ID of each static VLAN. Static VLANs refer to
VLANs manually created.

1-3
Description

Use the display vlan command to display information about VLANs. The output shows the ID, type,
VLAN interface state and member ports of a VLAN.
If no keyword or argument is specified, the command displays the number of existing VLANs in the
system and the ID of each VLAN.
Related commands: vlan.

Examples

# Display information about VLAN 1.

<Sysname> display vlan 1
VLAN ID: 1
VLAN Type: static
Route Interface: configured
IP Address: 192.168.0.39
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Description: VLAN 0001
Name: VLAN 0001
Tagged Ports:
GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Untagged Ports:
GigabitEthernet1/0/2

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display vlan command

Field Description
VLAN ID VLAN ID.
VLAN Type VLAN type (dynamic or static).
Indicates whether the VLAN interface of the
Route Interface VLAN is configured with an IP address for
routing.
IP address of the VLAN interface (available only
IP Address on a VLAN interface configured with an IP
address).
Subnet mask of the IP address of the VLAN
Subnet Mask
interface.
Description Description of the VLAN.
Name VLAN name.
Tagged Ports Ports out of which packets are sent tagged.
Untagged Ports Ports out of which packets are sent untagged.

1-4
interface Vlan-interface

Syntax

interface Vlan-interface vlan-id

undo interface Vlan-interface vlan-id

View

System view

Parameters

vlan-id: Specifies the ID of a VLAN interface, in the range of 1 to 4094.

Description

Use the interface Vlan-interface command to create the VLAN interface for a VLAN and enter VLAN
interface view.
VLAN interface is a virtual interface in Layer 3 mode, used to realize the layer 3 communication
between different VLANs. Each VLAN has a VLAN interface, which can forward packets of the local
VLAN to the destination IP addresses at the network layer.
Use the undo interface Vlan-interface command to delete a VLAN interface.
You can create a VLAN interface only for an existing VLAN and must ensure that the ID of the VLAN
interface is the same as the VLAN ID.
You can use the ip address command in VLAN interface view (refer to the IP Address and Performance
Command part for the command description) to configure an IP address for this VLAN interface.
Related commands: display interface Vlan-interface.

Examples

# Create the VLAN interface for VLAN 1 and enter VLAN-interface 1 view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1]

name

Syntax

name text
undo name

View

VLAN view

1-5
Parameters

text: VLAN name, a description of 1 to 32 characters. It can contain special characters and spaces.

Description

Use the name command to assign a name to the current VLAN.

Use the undo name command to restore the default VLAN name.
When 802.1x or MAC address authentication is configured on the switch, a RADIUS server may be
used to deploy VLANs (either named or numbered) on the ports that have passed authentication. If a
named VLAN is deployed, you must use the name command to associate the VLAN name with the
intended VLAN ID. The name of a VLAN must be unique among all VLANs.
By default, the name of a VLAN is its VLAN ID, VLAN 0001 for example.

Examples

# Specify the name of VLAN 2 as test vlan.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan 2
[Sysname-vlan2] name test vlan

shutdown

Syntax

shutdown
undo shutdown

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the shutdown command to administratively shut down the VLAN interface.
Use the undo shutdown command to bring up the VLAN interface.
By default, a VLAN interface is administratively enabled. In this case, the physical state of the VLAN
interface is affected by that of the ports in the VLAN.
z When all the Ethernet ports in the VLAN are down, the VLAN interface of the VLAN is down, that is,
disabled.
z When one or more Ethernet ports in the VLAN are up, the VLAN interface of the VLAN is up, that is,
enabled.
If you shut down the VLAN interface manually, the administrative state of the VLAN interface will always
be down, regardless of the state of the ports in the VLAN.
You can use the undo shutdown command to enable a VLAN interface when its related parameters
and protocols are configured. When a VLAN interface fails, you can use the shutdown command to

1-6
disable the interface, and then use the undo shutdown command to enable this interface again, which
may restore the interface.
Enabling or disabling a VLAN interface does not influence the state of the Ethernet ports belonging to
this VLAN.
Related commands: display interface Vlan-interface.

Examples

# Disable the VLAN-interface2.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 2
[Sysname-Vlan-interface2] shutdown

vlan

Syntax

vlan { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] | all }

undo vlan { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] | all }

View

System view

Parameters

vlan-id1: Specifies the ID of the VLAN you want to create or remove, in the range of 1 to 4094.
to vlan-id2: In conjunction with vlan-id1, specify a VLAN ID range you want to create or remove. The
vlan-id2 argument takes a value in the range of 1 to 4094, and must not be less than that of vlan-id1.
all: Creates or removes all existing VLANs except those configured with other functions.

1-7
Description

Use the vlan command to create VLANs. If you create only one VLAN, you enter the view of the VLAN
upon its creation; if the specified VLAN already exists, you enter its VLAN view directly.
Use the undo vlan command to remove VLANs.
By default, only VLAN 1 exists in the system.

z VLAN 1 is the default VLAN and cannot be removed.

z You cannot use the undo vlan command to directly remove the VLANs reserved by the protocol,
voice VLAN, control VLANs for Smart Link, probe VLANs for remote mirroring, or VLANs used for
performing any other features. To remove them, you must remove the associations of them with
the features.
z After you use the undo vlan command to remove a VLAN functioning as the default VLAN of a
trunk or a hybrid port, the configuration of the default VLAN on the trunk port or hybrid port does not
change. The port will continue to use the removed VLAN as its default VLAN.

Examples

# Create VLAN 5 and enter its VLAN view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan 5
[Sysname-vlan5]

# Remove VLAN 5.
[Sysname-vlan5] quit
[Sysname] undo vlan 5

# Create VLAN 4 through VLAN 100.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan 4 to 100
Please wait............. Done.

# Remove VLAN 2 through VLAN 9 in bulk. VLAN 7 is the voice VLAN.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] undo vlan 2 to 9
Note:The VLAN kept by protocol, the voice VLAN, the default VLAN, the management VLAN and
the remote probe VLAN will not be deleted!
Please wait... Done.
[Sysname] display vlan
The following VLANs exist:
1(default), 7

1-8
The above output information indicates that VLAN 7 (the voice VLAN) cannot be removed, while the
other VLANs are removed successfully.

Port-Based VLAN Configuration Commands

display port

Syntax

display port { hybrid | trunk }

View

Any view

Parameters

hybrid: Displays hybrid ports.

trunk: Displays trunk ports.

Description

Use the display port command to display the existing hybrid or trunk ports, if any.
For information about port type configuration, refer to the port link-type command.

Examples

# Display the existing hybrid ports.

<Sysname> display port hybrid
The following hybrid ports exist:
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2

The above information shows the current system has two hybrid ports: GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 and
GigabitEthernet 1/0/2.

port

Syntax

port interface-list
undo port interface-list

View

Parameters

vlan-id-list: List of the VLANs that the current hybrid port will be assigned to or removed from. In this list,
you can specify individual VLAN IDs (each in the form of vlan-id) and VLAN ID ranges (each in the form
of vlan-id1 to vlan-id2). Specify each VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4094 and ensure that vlan-id2 is no
less than vlan-id1. The total number of individual VLAN IDs and VLAN ID ranges defined in the list must
not exceed 10. Be sure that the specified VLANs already exist.
tagged: Keeps VLAN tags when the packets of the specified VLANs are forwarded on the port.
untagged: Removes VLAN tags when the packets of the specified VLANs are forwarded on the port.

Description

Use the port hybrid vlan command to assign the hybrid port to one or multiple VLANs and configure
the port to send packets tagged or untagged for the VLAN(s).
Use the undo port hybrid vlan command to remove the hybrid port from the specified VLAN(s).
By default, a hybrid port only allows packets from VLAN 1 to pass through untagged.
You can configure the port hybrid vlan vlan-id-list { tagged | untagged } command multiple times. The
VLANs specified each time does not overwrite those configured before, if any.
The VLAN specified by the vlan-id argument must already exist. Otherwise, this command is invalid.
Related commands: port link-type.

Examples

# Assign hybrid port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to VLAN 2, VLAN 4, and VLAN 50 through VLAN 100;
configure the port to keep VLAN tags when sending the packets of these VLANs.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port link-type hybrid
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port hybrid vlan 2 4 50 to 100 tagged

port link-type

Syntax

port link-type { access | hybrid | trunk }

1-12
undo port link-type

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

access: Sets the link type of the current port to access.

hybrid: Sets the link type of the current port to hybrid.
trunk: Sets the link type of the current port to trunk.

Description

Use the port link-type command to set the link type of the Ethernet port.
Use the undo port link-type command to restore the default link type.
The default link type of an Ethernet port is access.

To change the link type of a port from hybrid to trunk or vice versa, you need to change the link type to
access first.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 as a trunk port.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port link-type trunk

port trunk permit vlan

Syntax

port trunk permit vlan { vlan-id-list | all }

undo port trunk permit vlan { vlan-id-list | all }

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

vlan-id-list: List of the VLANs that the current trunk port will be assigned to or removed from. In this list,
you can specify individual VLAN IDs (each in the form of vlan-id) and VLAN ID ranges (each in the form
of vlan-id1 to vlan-id2). Specify each VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4094 and ensure that vlan-id2 is no
less than vlan-id1. The total number of individual VLAN IDs and VLAN ID ranges defined in the list must
not exceed 10.

1-13
all: Assigns the trunk port to all VLANs. On a GVRP-enabled trunk port, you must configure the port
trunk permit vlan all command to ensure that the traffic of all dynamically registered VLANs can pass
through. However, When GVRP is disabled, you are discouraged to configure the keyword. This is to
prevent users of unauthorized VLANs from accessing restricted resources through the port.

Description

Use the port trunk permit vlan command to assign the trunk port to the specified VLAN(s), that is, to
allow packets from these VLANs to pass through the port.
Use the undo port trunk permit vlan command to remove the hybrid port from the specified VLAN(s).
By default, a trunk port belongs to VLAN 1 only.
On a trunk port, only traffic of the default VLAN can pass through untagged.
You can perform the command multiple times. The VLANs specified each time does not overwrite those
configured before, if any.
Related commands: port link-type.

Examples

# Assign the trunk port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to VLAN 2, VLAN 4, and VLAN 50 through VLAN 100.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port link-type trunk
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port trunk permit vlan 2 4 50 to 100
Please wait... Done.

port trunk pvid vlan

Syntax

port trunk pvid vlan vlan-id

undo port trunk pvid

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

vlan-id: Specifies the default VLAN ID of the current port, in the range of 1 to 4094.

Description

Use the port trunk pvid vlan command to set the default VLAN ID for the trunk port. A trunk port sends
packets of the default VLAN untagged.
Use the undo port trunk pvid command to restore the default.
By default, the default VLAN ID of a trunk port is VLAN 1.
After configuring the default VLAN of a trunk port, you need to use the port trunk permit vlan
command to configure the trunk port to allow the packets of the default VLAN to pass through.
If the specified default VLAN has been removed or is not carried on the trunk port, the port will be unable
to receive VLAN untagged packets.
1-14
The local and remote trunk ports must use the same default VLAN ID for the traffic of the default VLAN
to be transmitted properly.

Related commands: port link-type, port trunk permit vlan.

Examples

# Set the default VLAN ID of the trunk port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to 100.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port link-type trunk
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port trunk pvid vlan 100

Protocol-Based VLAN Configuration Commands

display protocol-vlan interface

Syntax

display protocol-vlan interface { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]

| all }

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Specify a port by its type and number to display the protocol VLAN(s)
bound with the port. You can use the interface-type interface-number to interface-type
interface-number keyword and argument combination to specify a port range to display the protocol
template information of the ports bound with protocol VLAN(s) in the range. When defining a port range,
note that the second port must not be less than the first port.
all: Displays all the ports bound with at least one protocol VLAN and the associated protocol templates.

Description

Use the display protocol-vlan interface command to display information about protocol-based
VLANs and protocol templates for the specified port(s).
Related commands: port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan, protocol-vlan.

Examples

# Display the protocol VLAN information of ports GigabitEthernet1/0/1 and GigabitEthernet1/0/2.

<Sysname> display protocol-vlan interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/1

1-15
VLAN ID Protocol-Index Protocol-type
50 0 ip
80 1 ip
100 0 ip
100 1 ipx ethernetii
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/2
VLAN ID Protocol-Index Protocol-type
50 1 ipx raw
80 2 at
100 3 snap etype 0x0abc
100 4 llc dsap 0xac ssap 0xbd

Table 1-3 Description on the fields of the display vlan command

Field Description
Interface Interface bound with at least one protocol VLAN
VLAN ID ID of a protocol VLAN bound with the interface
Protocol-Index Protocol template index
Protocol type specified by the protocol template.
Protocol-type Refer to the protocol-vlan command for
detailed description.

display protocol-vlan vlan

Syntax

display protocol-vlan vlan { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] | all }

View

Any view

Parameters

vlan-id1: Specifies a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4094, of which the protocol VLAN configuration
information is to be displayed.
to vlan-id2: In conjunction with vlan-id1, define a VLAN range to display the protocol template
configurations of all protocol VLANs in the range. The vlan-id2 argument takes a value in the range of 1
to 4094, and must not be less than that of vlan-id1.
all: Displays all protocol VLANs and their protocol template information.

Description

Use the display protocol-vlan vlan command to display information about protocol VLANs.
Related commands: protocol-vlan.

Examples

# Display the protocol information and protocol indexes configured for VLAN 10 through VLAN 20.
<Sysname> display protocol-vlan vlan 10 to 20
VLAN ID: 10

1-16
VLAN Type: Protocol-based VLAN
Protocol-Index Protocol-Type
0 ip
1 ip
2 ipx ethernetii
3 at
VLAN ID: 15
VLAN Type: Protocol-based VLAN
Protocol-Index Protocol-Type
0 ip
1 snap etype 0x0abcd

Table 1-4 Description on the fields of the display protocol-vlan vlan command

Field Description
VLAN ID Protocol VLAN ID
VLAN type. Here, it refers to Protocol-based
VLAN Type
VLAN
Protocol-Index Protocol template index
Protocol type specified in the protocol template.
Protocol-Type Refer to the protocol-vlan command for
detailed description.

port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan

Syntax

port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan vlan-id { protocol-index [ to protocol-index-end ] | all }

undo port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan vlan-id { protocol-index [ to protocol-index-end ] | all }

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

vlan-id: Specifies the ID of the protocol VLAN bound with the port. The value range is 1 to 4094. At least
one protocol template must have been configured for the VLAN.
protocol-index: Specifies a protocol template, in the range of 0 to 7.
to protocol-index-end: In conjunction with protocol-index, specify a protocol index range. The
protocol-index-end argument takes a value in the range of 0 to 7 and must be greater than
protocol-index.
all: Specifies all protocol indexes. With the all keyword, the port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan command
binds the port with all the protocol templates of the specified protocol VLAN, and the undo form of the
command removes the associations between the port and all the protocol templates of the specified
protocol VLAN.

1-17
Description

Use the port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan command to bind the port with the specified protocol
template(s) of a protocol VLAN.
Use the undo port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan command to remove the binding between the port and
the specified protocol template(s) of a protocol VLAN.

z The port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan command is available on hybrid ports only.
z Before you bind a port with a protocol VLAN, assign the port to the VLAN with the port hybrid vlan
command. Otherwise, the binding will fail.
z To bind a protocol template to a port in a VLAN successfully, you must ensure that the protocol
template has been created in the VLAN. If the protocol template you are binding with the port has
not been created in the VLAN, the system will display the operation failure message. If some of the
protocol templates you are binding with the port have not been created in the VLAN, the system
does not display error messages while binding those already created with the port.
z When you removes the binding between a port and a protocol template, the system will report
operation failure if the index of the specified protocol to be removed does not exist. If a part of the
specified protocol indexes to be removed do not exist, the switch will remove the existing indexes
when it prompts errors.

Related commands: display protocol-vlan interface.

Examples

# Bind GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 with the protocols indexed from 0 to 2 of VLAN 3 (assuming that VLAN 3 is
a protocol VLAN).
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan 3 0 to 2

# Remove the binding between GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 and protocols indexed from 1 to 4 of VLAN 3.
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] undo port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan 3 1 to 4
Protocol index 1 does not exist in VLAN 3
Protocol index 4 does not exist in VLAN 3

protocol-vlan

Syntax

protocol-vlan [ protocol-index ] { at | ip | ipx { ethernetii | llc | raw | snap } | mode { ethernetii etype
etype-id | llc dsap dsap-id ssap ssap-id | snap etype etype-id } }
undo protocol-vlan { protocol-index [ to protocol-index-end ] | all }

1-18
View

VLAN view

Parameters

at: Creates the AppleTalk-based protocol template.

ip: Creates the IP-based protocol template.
ipx: Creates the IPX-based protocol template. The ethernetii, llc, raw and snap keywords represent
four IPX encapsulation formats. For more information about encapsulation formats, refer to the
accompanying operation manual.
mode: Configures a user-defined protocol template.
ethernetii etype-id: Creates the protocol template that matches the Ethernet II encapsulation format
and the corresponding protocol type value of the packet. The etype-id argument indicates the protocol
type value and ranges from 0x0600 to 0xFFFF(excluding 0x0800, 0x8137, and 0x809b).
llc: Creates the protocol template that matches LLC encapsulation format.
dsap-id: Destination service access point. This argument ranges 0x00 to 0xFF.
ssap-id: Source service access point. This argument ranges from 0x00 to 0xFF.
snap etype-id: Creates a protocol template that matches SNAP encapsulation format and the
corresponding protocol type value of the packet. The etype-id argument indicates the protocol type
value and ranges from 0x0600 to 0xFFFF.
protocol-index: Beginning protocol index ranging from 0 to 7. If you do not specify this argument, the
beginning protocol index will be determined by the system.
protocol-index-end: End protocol index ranging from 0 to 7. Note that this argument must be larger than
or equal to the protocol-index argument.
all: Deletes all the protocol templates.

When you use the mode keyword to configure a user-defined protocol template, if you set the etype-id
argument for Ethernet II or SNAP packets to 0x0800, 0x8137, or 0x809B, the matching packets will
have the same format as that of IP, IPX, and AppleTalk packets respectively. To prevent two
commands from processing packets of the same matching conditions in different ways, the switch will
prompt that you cannot set the etype-id argument for Ethernet II or SNAP packets to 0x0800, 0x8137, or
0x809B.

Description

Use the protocol-vlan command to configure the protocol template used for classifying protocol-based
VLANs.
Use the undo protocol-vlan command to disable the configuration.
By default, no protocol template is configured.
Related commands: display protocol-vlan vlan.

1-19
Examples

# Configure VLAN 3 as a protocol-based VLAN and assign IP packets to VLAN 3 for transmission.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan 3
[Sysname-vlan3] protocol-vlan ip

Because the IP protocol is closely associated with the ARP protocol, you are recommended to
configure the ARP protocol type when configuring the IP protocol type and associate the two protocol
types with the same port, in case that ARP packets and IP packets are not assigned to the same VLAN,
which will cause IP address resolution failure.

# Configure an ARP protocol template. The code for the ARP protocol is 0x0806.
z Perform the following command when Ethernet encapsulation is used.
[Sysname-vlan3] protocol-vlan mode ethernetii etype 0806
z Perform the following configuration when 802.3 encapsulation format is used.
[Sysname-vlan3] protocol-vlan mode snap etype 0806

1-20
Table of Contents

1 Static Routing Configuration Commands·······························································································1-1

Static Routing Configuration Commands································································································1-1
delete static-routes all······················································································································1-1
display ip routing-table·····················································································································1-1
display ip routing-table acl···············································································································1-2
display ip routing-table ip-address···································································································1-4
display ip routing-table ip-address1 ip-address2·············································································1-6
display ip routing-table ip-prefix·······································································································1-6
display ip routing-table protocol·······································································································1-7
display ip routing-table radix············································································································1-9
display ip routing-table statistics······································································································1-9
display ip routing-table verbose·····································································································1-10
ip route-static ·································································································································1-11
reset ip routing-table statistics protocol ·························································································1-12

i
1 Static Routing Configuration Commands

Static Routing Configuration Commands

delete static-routes all

Syntax

delete static-routes all

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the delete static-routes all command to delete all static routes.
The system will request your confirmation before it deletes all the configured static routes.
Related command: ip route-static and display ip routing-table.

Example

# Delete all the static routes in the router.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] delete static-routes all
Are you sure to delete all the unicast static routes?[Y/N]y

display ip routing-table

Syntax

display ip routing-table [ | { begin | exclude | include } regular-expression ]

View

Any view

Parameter

regular-expression: Regular expression, which specifies a match character string.

|: Uses the regular expression to match the output routing information.
begin: Displays the routing information from the route entry containing the specified character string.
include: Displays all routing information containing the specified character string.
exclude: Displays all routing information without the specified character string.

1-1
Description

Use the display ip routing-table command to display the summary information about the routing table.
This command displays the summary information about a routing table, with the items of a routing entry
contained in one line. The information displayed includes destination IP address/mask length, protocol,
preference, cost, next hop and outbound interface.
The display ip routing-table command only displays the routes currently in use, that is, the optimal
routes.

Example

# Display the summary information about the routing table.

<Sysname> display ip routing-table
Routing Table: public net
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
127.0.0.0/8 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display ip routing-table command

Field Description
Destination/Mask Destination IP address/mask length
Protocol Routing protocol that discovers the route

Pre Route preference

Cost Route cost
Nexthop Next hop IP address of the route
Outbound interface, through which packets
Interface destined for the destination network segment are
to be transmitted

display ip routing-table acl

Syntax

display ip routing-table acl acl-number [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

acl-number: Number of a basic access control list (ACL), in the range of 2000 to 2999.
verbose: Displays the detailed information about the active and inactive routes that match the specified
ACL. If you do not specify this keyword, only the summary information about the active routes matching
the specified ACL is displayed.

Description

Use the display ip routing-table acl command to display the routes that match a specified basic ACL.

1-2
As this command displays the routes that match a specified basic ACL, you can use it to trace routing
policies.

Example

# Display the summary information about the active routes that match ACL 2000.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] acl number 2000
[Sysname-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 10.1.1.1 0.0.0.255
[Sysname-acl-basic-2000] rule deny source any
[Sysname-acl-basic-2000] display ip routing-table acl 2000
Routes matched by access-list 2000:
Summary count: 1
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
10.1.1.0/24 STATIC 60 0 192.168.0.31 Vlan-interface1

Refer to Table 1-1 for the description on the output fields.

# Display the detailed information about the active and inactive routes that match ACL 2000.
[Sysname] display ip routing-table acl 2000 verbose
Routes matched by access-list 2000:
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both * = Next hop in use

Summary count: 1

**Destination: 10.1.1.0 Mask: 255.255.255.0

Protocol: #STATIC Preference: 60
*NextHop: 192.168.0.31 Interface: 192.168.0.51(Vlan-interface1)
State: <Int ActiveU Gateway Static Unicast>
Age: 1:48:18 Cost: 0/0

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display ip routing-table acl command

Field Description
Destination Destination address
Mask Mask
Protocol Routing protocol that discovers the route
Preference Route preference
Nexthop Next hop IP address
Outbound interface, through which packets destined for the destination network
Interface
segment are to be transmitted

1-3
Field Description
Descriptions on the route state are as follows:
ActiveU Valid unicast route. “U” stands for unicast.
Blackhole route is the same as reject route except that a router
Blackhole drops a packet traveling along a blackhole route without sending
ICMP unreachable messages to the source of the packets.
Delete The route is deleted.
Gateway The route is not a direct route.
The route is a hidden route. The system hides routes that are
Hidden temporarily unavailable for some reasons (such as the policy
configured or the interface is down) for later use.
The route is held down. Holddown is a kind of route advertisement
policy used in some D-V (distance vector) routing protocols (such as
Holddown RIP) to avoid the propagation of some incorrect routes and improve
the transmission speed of route-unreachable information. For
details, refer to corresponding routing protocols.

State Int The route is discovered by the internal gateway protocol (IGP).
The route is not advertised when the router advertises routes based
NoAdvise
on policies
The route are not loaded to the core routing table but can be
NotInstall advertised. Normally, the routes with the highest preference in the
routing table are loaded to the core routing table and are advertised.
The packets travel along the route will be dropped. Besides, the
router sends ICMP unreachable messages to the source of the
Reject
dropped packets. The Reject routes are usually used for network
testing.
The route is not deleted when the routes in the core routing table are
Retain deleted. You can enable static routes to remain in the core routing
table by configure them to be in retain state.
Static routes configured manually on the router are marked as static.
Static Such routes are not lost when you perform the save operation and
then restart the router.
Unicast The route is a unicast route.
Time period during which the route is allowed to be in the routing table, in the form of
Age
hh:mm:ss.
Cost Cost of the route

display ip routing-table ip-address

Syntax

display ip routing-table ip-address [ mask ] [ longer-match ] [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

ip-address: Destination IP address, in dotted decimal notation.

1-4
mask: Mask of the destination IP address, which can be in dotted decimal notation or be an integer
ranging from 0 to 32.
longer-match: Displays all the routes leading to the destination coupled with the default mask.
verbose: Displays the detailed information about the active and inactive routes leading to the
destination. If this keyword is not specified, only the summary information about the active routes is
displayed.

Description

Use the display ip routing-table ip-address command to display the information about the routes
leading to a specified destination.
The output information of this command differs with the arguments/keywords specified as follows:
z display ip routing-table ip-address
For the destination address ip-address, if there are some routes matched within the natural mask range,
the active routes which best match ip-address are displayed.
z display ip routing-table ip-address mask
Only the routes which match exactly the specified destination address and mask are displayed.
z display ip routing-table ip-address longer-match
All routes with their destination addresses matched within the natural mask range are displayed.
z display ip routing-table ip-address mask longer-match
All routes with their destination addresses matched within the specified mask range are displayed.

Example

# Display the summary information of the routes with their destination addresses matched within the
natural mask range.
<Sysname> display ip routing-table 169.0.0.0
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
169.0.0.0/16 Static 60 0 2.1.1.1 LoopBack1

Refer to Table 1-1 for the description on the output fields.

# Display the detailed information of the routes with their destination addresses matched within the
natural mask range.
<Sysname> display ip routing-table 169.0.0.0 verbose
Routing tables:
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both * = Next hop in use
Summary count: 1
**Destination: 169.0.0.0 Mask: 255.255.255.0
Protocol: #STATIC Preference: 60
*NextHop: 2.1.1.1 Interface: 2.1.1.1(LoopBack1)
State: <Int ActiveU Gateway Static Unicast>
Age: 4:49 Cost: 0/0

Refer to Table 1-2 for the description on the output fields.

1-5
display ip routing-table ip-address1 ip-address2

Syntax

display ip routing-table ip-address1 mask1 ip-address2 mask2 [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

ip-address1, ip-address2: Destination IP addresses in dotted decimal notation. ip-address1 and mask1,
together with ip-address2 and mask2, determine an IP address range. The starting address of the IP
address range is determined by the ip-address1 and mask1 arguments; and the end address of the IP
address range is determined by the ip-address2 and mask2 arguments.
mask1, mask2: IP address masks. These two arguments can be in dotted decimal notation or two
integers ranging from 0 to 32.
verbose: Displays the detailed information about the active and inactive routes. If you do not specify
this keyword, only the summary information about the active routes is displayed.

Description

Use the display ip routing-table ip-address1 ip-address2 command to display the information about
the routes with their destinations within the specified destination IP address range.

Example

# Display the information about the routes with their destinations within the range of 1.1.1.0 to 2.2.2.0.
<Sysname> display ip routing-table 1.1.1.0 24 2.2.2.0 24
Routing tables:
Summary count: 1
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
1.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 1.1.1.1 Vlan-interface1

Refer to Table 1-1 for the description on the output fields.

display ip routing-table ip-prefix

Syntax

display ip routing-table ip-prefix ip-prefix-name [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameter

ip-prefix-name: Name of an IP prefix list, a string comprising 1 to 19 characters.

verbose: Displays the detailed information about the active and inactive routes matching a specified IP
prefix list. If you do not specify this keyword, only the summary information about the active routes
matching the IP prefix list is displayed.

1-6
Description

Use the display ip routing-table ip-prefix command to display the information about the routes
matching a specified IP prefix list.
You can use this command to trace routing policies and display the routes matching a specified IP prefix
list.
If the specified IP prefix list does not exist, the detailed information about all the active and inactive
routes is displayed when you execute this command with the verbose keyword specified, and only the
summary information about all the active routes is displayed if you execute this command with the
verbose keyword not specified.

Example

# Display the summary information about the active routes matching the IP prefix list named abc2.
<Sysname> display ip routing-table ip-prefix abc2
Routes matched by ip-prefix abc2:
Summary count: 2
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
10.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 10.1.1.2 Vlan-interface1
10.1.1.2/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

Refer to Table 1-1 for the description on the output fields.

# Display the detailed information about the active and inactive routes matching the IP prefix list named
abc2.
<Sysname> display ip routing-table ip-prefix abc2 verbose
Routes matched by ip-prefix abc2:
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both * = Next hop in use

Summary count: 2

**Destination: 10.1.1.0 Mask: 255.255.255.0

Protocol: #DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 10.1.1.2 Interface: 10.1.1.2(Vlan-interface1)
State: <Int ActiveU Retain Unicast>
Age: 3:23:44 Cost: 0/0

**Destination: 10.1.1.2 Mask: 255.255.255.255

Protocol: #DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 127.0.0.1 Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)
State: <NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Unicast>
Age: 3:23:44 Cost: 0/0

Refer to Table 1-2 for the description on the output fields.

display ip routing-table protocol

Syntax

display ip routing-table protocol protocol [ inactive | verbose ]

1-7
View

Any view

Parameter

protocol: This argument can be one of the following:

z direct: Displays the information about the direct routes.
z static: Displays the information about the static routes.
inactive: Displays the information about the inactive routes. If you do not specify this keyword, the
information about both active and inactive routes is displayed.
verbose: Displays the detailed route information. If you do not specify this keyword, only the summary
route information is displayed.

Description

Use the display ip routing-table protocol command to display the information about specified type of
routes.

Example

# Display the summary information about all the direct routes.

<Sysname> display ip routing-table protocol direct
DIRECT Routing tables:
Summary count: 4
DIRECT Routing tables status:<active>:
Summary count: 3
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
20.1.1.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.0/8 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
127.0.0.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
DIRECT Routing tables status:<inactive>:
Summary count: 1
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
210.0.0.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0

# Display the summary information about the static routing table.

<Sysname> display ip routing-table protocol static
STATIC Routing tables:
Summary count: 1
STATIC Routing tables status:<active>:
Summary count: 0
STATIC Routing tables status:<inactive>:
Summary count: 1
Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface
1.2.3.0/24 STATIC 60 0 1.2.4.5 Vlan-interface1

Refer to Table 1-1 for the description on the output fields.

1-8
display ip routing-table radix

Syntax

display ip routing-table radix

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the display ip routing-table radix command to display the information about the routes in a
routing table in a hierarchical way.

Example

# Display the information about the routes in a routing table in a hierarchical way.
<Sysname> display ip routing-table radix
Radix tree for INET (2) inodes 2 routes 2:

+--8+--{127.0.0.0
+-32+--{127.0.0.1

Table 1-3 Description on the fields of the display ip routing-table radix command

Field Description
INET Address family
inodes Number of nodes
routes Number of routes

display ip routing-table statistics

Syntax

display ip routing-table statistics

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the display ip routing-table statistics command to display the statistics of a routing table.
The statistics information displayed by this command includes:
z The total number of the routes

1-9
z The number of the active routes
z The number of the added routes
z The number of the routes with deleted flags

Example

# Display the statistics information about the routing table.

<Sysname> display ip routing-table statistics
Routing tables:
Proto route active added deleted
DIRECT 2 2 2 0
STATIC 0 0 0 0
Total 2 2 2 0

Table 1-4 Description on the fields of the display ip routing-table statistics command

Field Description
Proto Routing protocol
route Total number of routes

active Number of the active routes that are currently in use

Number of the routes that are added to the routing table after the switch starts
added
or the routing table is cleared last time
Number of the routes with deleted flags (this type of routes will be removed
deleted
after a period of time)
Total Total numbers of various routes

display ip routing-table verbose

Syntax

display ip routing-table verbose

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the display ip routing-table verbose command to display the detailed information about a routing
table.
You can use this command to display all the routes, including the inactive and invalid routes.

Example

# Display the detailed information about the routing table.

<Sysname> display ip routing-table verbose
Routing Tables:

1-10
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both * = Next hop in use

Destinations: 2 Routes: 2
Holddown: 0 Delete: 0 Hidden: 0

**Destination: 127.0.0.0 Mask: 255.0.0.0

Protocol: #DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 127.0.0.1 Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)
State: <NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Unicast>
Age: 57:12 Cost: 0/0

**Destination: 127.0.0.1 Mask: 255.255.255.255

Protocol: #DIRECT Preference: 0
*NextHop: 127.0.0.1 Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)
State: <NotInstall NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Unicast>
Age: 57:12 Cost: 0/0

The statistics of the routing table are displayed first, and then the detailed descriptions of each route.
Table 1-2 describes the route states and Table 1-5 describes the statistics information about the routing
table.

Table 1-5 Description on the fields of the display ip routing-table verbose command

Field Description
Holddown Number of the routes that are held down
Delete Number of the deleted routes
Hidden Number of the hidden routes

ip route-static

Syntax

ip route-static ip-address { mask | mask-length } { interface-type interface-number | next-hop }

[ preference preference-value ] [ reject | blackhole ] [ description text ]
undo ip route-static ip-address { mask | mask-length } [ interface-type interface-number | next-hop ]
[ preference preference-value ]

View

System view

Parameter

ip-address: Destination IP address, in dotted decimal notation.

mask: IP address mask, in dotted decimal notation.
mask-length: Mask length, in the range of 0 to 32.
interface-type interface-number: Next hop outgoing interface. A null interface is a virtual interface.
Packets destined for a null interface are discarded, helping to reduce system load.
next-hop: IP address of the next hop of this route, in dotted decimal notation.

1-11
preference-value: Preference of this route, in the range of 1 to 255.
reject: Specifies the route as an unreachable route. When a static route destined for a destination
address is of the reject attribute, all the IP packets destined for the destination address are discarded,
and the source host is informed that the destination address is unreachable.
blackhole: Specifies the route as a black hole route. When a static route destined for a destination
address is of the blackhole attribute, the outgoing interface of the route is Null 0 regardless of the next
hop address. All the IP packets destined for the destination address are discarded, and the source host
is not informed that the destination address is unreachable.
description text: Specifies a descriptive string for the static route. The text argument is a case-sensitive
string of 1 to 60 characters (including the space).

Description

Use the ip route-static command to configure a static route.

Use the undo ip route-static command to remove a static route.
By default, the system can obtain the subnet route directly connected to the router. When you configure
a static route, if no preference is specified for the route, the preference defaults to 60. Note that routes
with the same destinations, the same next hops, but different preferences are different routes. Among
these routes, the one with least preference (which means the highest preference) is chosen to be the
current route. A route configured using the ip route-static command is a reachable route if neither of
the reject and blackhole keywords is specified.
Note the following when configuring a static route:
z The next hop address of a static route cannot be the VLAN interface address of the local switch.
z A static route with both its destination IP address and mask both being 0.0.0.0 is the default route.
When no matched entry is found in the routing table, a received packet is forwarded according to
the default route.
Related command: display ip routing-table.

Example

# Configure the next hop of the default route as 129.102.0.2.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 129.102.0.2

reset ip routing-table statistics protocol

Syntax

reset ip routing-table statistics protocol { all | protocol }

View

User view

Parameter

all: Specifies all protocols.

protocol: Specifies a protocol, which can be static, or direct.

1-12
Description

Use the reset ip routing-table statistics protocol command to clear the statistics of routes in a routing
table.

Example

# Before executing the reset ip routing-table statistics protocol command, use the display ip
routing-table statistics command to display the routing statistics:
<Sysname> display ip routing-table statistics
Routing tables:
Proto route active added deleted
DIRECT 4 4 24 20
STATIC 0 0 1 1
Total 4 4 25 21

# Clear the routing statistics of all protocols from the IP routing table.
<Sysname> reset ip routing-table statistics protocol all
This will erase the specific routing counters information.
Are you sure?[Y/N]y

# Display the routing statistics in the IP routing table.

<Sysname> display ip routing-table statistics
Routing tables:
Proto route active added deleted
DIRECT 4 4 0 0
STATIC 0 0 0 0
Total 4 4 0 0

The above information shows that the routing statistics in the IP routing table is cleared.

1-13
Table of Contents

1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands ···································································································1-1

Voice VLAN Configuration Commands···································································································1-1
display voice vlan error-info·············································································································1-1
display voice vlan oui·······················································································································1-1
display voice vlan status··················································································································1-2
display vlan······································································································································1-3
voice vlan·········································································································································1-4
voice vlan aging·······························································································································1-5
voice vlan enable·····························································································································1-6
voice vlan legacy ·····························································································································1-7
voice vlan mac-address···················································································································1-7
voice vlan mode·······························································································································1-8
voice vlan qos··································································································································1-9
voice vlan security enable ·············································································································1-10

i
1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands

Voice VLAN Configuration Commands

display voice vlan error-info

Syntax

display voice vlan error-info

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display voice vlan error-info command to display the ports on which the voice VLAN function
fails to be enabled.

When ACL number applied to a port reaches to its threshold, voice VLAN cannot be enabled on this
port.

Examples

# Display the ports on which voice VLAN fails to be enabled.

<Sysname> display voice vlan error-info
Fail to apply voice VLAN ACL rules to the following port(s):
GigabitEthernet1/0/10 GigabitEthernet1/0/15

display voice vlan oui

Syntax

display voice vlan oui

View

Any view

1-1
Parameters

None

Description

Use the display voice vlan oui command to display the organizationally unique identifier (OUI) list
used for identifying voice traffic.
The output of the command displays the OUI addresses, their masks, and descriptions.
By default, there are five pre-defined OUI addresses in the system. You can use the voice vlan
mac-address command to add, modify, or remove OUI addresses.

Examples

# Display the OUI list for the voice VLAN.

<Sysname> display voice vlan oui
Oui Address Mask Description
0003-6b00-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 Cisco phone
000f-e200-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 H3C Aolynk phone
00d0-1e00-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 Pingtel phone
00e0-7500-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 Polycom phone
00e0-bb00-0000 ffff-ff00-0000 3Com phone

display voice vlan status

Syntax

display voice vlan status

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display voice vlan status command to display voice VLAN-related information.
The output of the command displays information such as the voice VLAN security mode and voice
VLAN assignment mode (manual or automatic).
Related commands: voice vlan, voice vlan enable.

Examples

# Display the information about the voice VLAN.

<Sysname> display voice vlan status
Voice Vlan status: ENABLE
Voice Vlan ID: 2
Voice Vlan security mode: Security
Voice Vlan aging time: 1440 minutes
Current voice vlan enabled port mode:

1-2
PORT MODE COS DSCP
---------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 AUTO 5 40
GigabitEthernet1/0/2 MANUAL 4 40

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display voice vlan status command

Field Description
The status of global voice VLAN function: enabled or
Voice Vlan status
disabled.
The VLAN which is currently enabled with voice
Voice Vlan ID
VLAN.
The status of voice VLAN security mode: enabled or
Voice Vlan security mode
disabled.
Voice Vlan aging time The voice VLAN aging time
The ports on which the voice VLAN function is
Current voice vlan enable port mode
enabled.
PORT Port number
Voice VLAN assignment mode on the port, which
MODE
can be auto or manual.
The CoS precedence marked on the voice traffic
COS
passing through the port.
The DSCP precedence marked on the voice traffic
DSCP
passing through the port.

The Current voice vlan enable port mode field lists the ports with the voice VLAN function enabled.
Note that not all of them are transmitting packets in the voice VLAN. To view the ports operating in the
voice VLAN currently, use the display vlan command.

display vlan

Syntax

display vlan vlan-id

View

Any view

Parameters

vlan-id: Specifies the ID of the current voice VLAN in the range of 1 to 4094.

Description

Use the display vlan command to display information about the specified VLAN.

1-3
For the voice VLAN, this command displays all the ports in the VLAN.
Related commands: voice vlan, voice vlan enable.

Examples

# Display all the ports in the current voice VLAN, assuming that the current voice VLAN is VLAN 6.
<Sysname> display vlan 6
VLAN ID: 6
VLAN Type: static
Route Interface: not configured
Description: VLAN 0006
Name: VLAN 0006
Tagged Ports:
GigabitEthernet1/0/5
Untagged Ports:
GigabitEthernet1/0/6

The output indicates that GigabitEthernet 1/0/5 and GigabitEthernet 1/0/6 are in the voice VLAN.

voice vlan

Syntax

voice vlan vlan-id enable

undo voice vlan enable

View

System view

Parameters

vlan-id: Specifies the ID of the VLAN to be enabled with the voice VLAN function, in the range of 2 to
4094. Note that the VLAN must already exist.

Description

Use the voice vlan command to configure the specified VLAN as the voice VLAN, that is, enable voice
VLAN globally.
Use the undo voice vlan enable command to remove the voice VLAN configuration from the specified
VLAN.
By default, voice VLAN is disabled globally.
After a VLAN is configured as the voice VLAN, the switch will modify QoS priorities for the traffic in the
VLAN to improve its transmission preference, guaranteeing that the voice data can be transmitted
preferentially.
To make the voice VLAN function take effect on a port, you must enable the function both globally and
on the port with the voice vlan enable command.

1-4
z If you want to delete a VLAN with voice VLAN function enabled, you must disable the voice VLAN
function first.
z The voice VLAN function can be enabled for only one VLAN at one time.

Related commands: display voice vlan status.

Examples

# Create VLAN 2, and enable the voice VLAN function on it.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan 2
[Sysname-vlan2] quit
[Sysname] voice vlan 2 enable

# After the voice VLAN function of VLAN 2 is enabled, if you enable the voice VLAN function for other
VLANs, the system will prompt that your configuration fails.
[Sysname] voice vlan 4 enable
Can't change voice vlan configuration when other voice vlan is running

voice vlan aging

Syntax

voice vlan aging minutes

undo voice vlan aging

View

System view

Parameters

Parameters

oui: Specify a MAC address, in the format of H-H-H.

oui-mask: Specify a MAC address mask, made up of consecutive Fs and consecutive 0s. It specifies the
matching length of the OUI address. When the switch receives a packet, it matches the bits in the
source MAC address corresponding to the Fs against the OUI list.
text: Description of the MAC address, containing 1 to 30 characters.

1-7
Description

Use the voice vlan mac-address command to add an OUI entry to the OUI list for the specified MAC
address. The OUI list contains the MAC addresses of recognizable voice devices. A packet is
considered as a voice packet only when its source MAC address can match an entry in the OUI list.
Use the undo voice vlan mac-address command to remove an OUI entry from the OUI list.
By default, the OUI list contains the five pre-defined OUI addresses in Table 1-2. You can modify them
with the voice vlan mac-address command.
The OUI list can contain up to 16 OUI address entries.

Table 1-2 Default OUI addresses of a switch

Number OUI address Vendor

1 0003-6b00-0000 Cisco phone

2 000f-e200-0000 H3C Aolynk phone

3 00d0-1e00-0000 Pingtel phone

4 00e0-7500-0000 Polycom phone

5 00e0-bb00-0000 3Com phone

Related commands: display voice vlan oui.

Examples

# Add MAC address 00aa-bb00-0000 to the OUI list and configure its description as ABC.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] voice vlan mac-address 00aa-bb00-0000 mask ffff-ff00-0000 description ABC

voice vlan mode

Syntax

voice vlan mode auto

undo voice vlan mode auto

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the voice vlan mode auto command to configure the voice VLAN assignment mode of the
Ethernet port to automatic.
Use the undo voice vlan mode auto command to configure the voice VLAN assignment mode of the
Ethernet port to manual.

1-8
You cannot and need not to assign a port working in automatic voice VLAN assignment mode to the
voice VLAN manually. When the port receives a packet whose source MAC address matches the OUI
list, the port is assigned to the voice VLAN automatically, and the packet is tagged with the voice VLAN
tag. If the port has not received any voice data before the voice VLAN aging timer expires, the port is
removed from the voice VLAN automatically.
By default, an Ethernet port works in automatic voice VLAN assignment mode.
A port working in manual voice VLAN assignment mode needs to be assigned to the voice VLAN
manually. The port stays in the voice VLAN no matter whether voice data is present on the port, that is,
the voice VLAN aging timer does not take effect on the port.
Related commands: display voice vlan status.

Examples

# Configure the voice VLAN assignment mode on GigabitEthernet1/0/2 to manual.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] undo voice vlan mode auto

voice vlan qos

Syntax

voice vlan qos { cos-value dscp-value | trust }

undo voice vlan qos

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

cos-value: Sets the CoS precedence marked for voice VLAN traffic, in the range 0 to 7.
dscp-value: Sets the DSCP precedence marked for voice VLAN traffic, in the range 0 to 63.
trust: Sets the port to trust the priorities of voice VLAN traffic passing through it, that is, the CoS
precedence or the DSCP precedence carried in voice VLAN traffic.

Description

Use the voice vlan qos command to modify the CoS precedence and DSCP precedence to be marked
for voice VLAN traffic.
Use the undo voice vlan qos command to restore the default.
By default, the CoS precedence and the DSCP precedence marked for voice VLAN traffic are 6 and 46.
After the CoS and DSCP precedence values marked for voice VLAN traffic are changed, the switch will
use the changed precedence values to look for the matching local precedence when queuing voice
VLAN traffic. For more information about local precedence and queuing, refer to the QoS-QoS Profile
part of this manual.

1-9
Examples

# Modify the CoS precedence and the DSCP precedence marked for voice VLAN traffic passing
through GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to 5 and 40 respectively.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] voice vlan qos 5 40

voice vlan security enable

Syntax

voice vlan security enable

undo voice vlan security enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the voice vlan security enable command to enable the voice VLAN security mode.
Use the undo voice vlan security enable command to disable the voice VLAN security mode.
In security mode, the ports in a voice VLAN and with voice devices attached to can only forward voice
data. Data packets with their MAC addresses not among the OUI addresses that can be identified by
the system will be filtered out. This mode has no effects on other VLANs.
By default, the voice VLAN security mode is enabled.
Related commands: display voice vlan status.

Examples

# Disable the voice VLAN security mode.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] undo voice vlan security enable

1-10
Table of Contents

1 GVRP Configuration Commands ·············································································································1-1

GARP Configuration Commands ············································································································1-1
display garp statistics ······················································································································1-1
display garp timer ····························································································································1-2
garp timer ········································································································································1-3
garp timer leaveall ···························································································································1-4
reset garp statistics··························································································································1-5
GVRP Configuration Commands ············································································································1-6
display gvrp statistics·······················································································································1-6
display gvrp status···························································································································1-7
gvrp··················································································································································1-7
gvrp registration·······························································································································1-8

i
1 GVRP Configuration Commands

GARP Configuration Commands

display garp statistics

Syntax

display garp statistics [ interface interface-list ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-list: Specifies a list of Ethernet ports for which the statistics about GARP are to be displayed. In
this list, you can specify individual ports and port ranges. An individual port takes the form of
interface-type interface-number and a port range takes the form of interface-type interface-number1 to
interface-type interface-number2, with interface-number2 taking a value greater than
interface-number1. The total number of individual ports and port ranges defined in the list must not
exceed 10.

Description

Use the display garp statistics command to display the GARP statistics of the specified or all ports. If
the interface interface-list keyword-argument combination is not specified, this command displays the
GARP statistics on all the ports.
The switch automatically collects statistics about GVRP packets sent, received and dropped on
GVRP-enabled ports. Upon system reboot or the execution of the reset garp statistics command, the
system automatically deletes the statistics and starts collecting statistics again. You can check whether
GVRP is running normally on a port by checking the GVRP statistics on it:
z If the number of received GVRP packets and the number of sent GVRP packets are the same as
those on the remote port, it indicates that the ports are transmitting and receiving GVRP packets
normally and no registration information is lost.
z If the number of dropped GVRP packets is not 0, it indicates that the registration mode on the port
may be fixed or forbidden. As in either mode dynamic VLANs cannot be registered, GVRP packet
drop may occur on the port.

Examples

# Display the GARP statistics on GigabitEthernet1/0/1 and GigabitEthernet 1/0/2.

<Sysname> display garp statistics interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
GARP statistics on port GigabitEthernet1/0/1

Number Of GVRP Frames Received : 0

Number Of GVRP Frames Transmitted : 0

1-1
Number Of Frames Discarded : 0

GARP statistics on port GigabitEthernet1/0/2

Number Of GVRP Frames Received : 0

Number Of GVRP Frames Transmitted : 0
Number Of Frames Discarded : 0

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display garp statistics command

Field Description
Number of the GVRP frames received on the
Number of GVRP Frames Received
port
Number of the GVRP frames transmitted through
Number of GVRP Frames Transmitted
the port
Number of Frames Discarded Number of GVRP frames discarded by the port

display garp timer

Syntax

display garp timer [ interface interface-list ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-list: Specifies a list of Ethernet ports of which the GARP timer settings are to be displayed. In
this list, you can specify individual ports and port ranges. An individual port takes the form of
interface-type interface-number and a port range takes the form of interface-type interface-number1 to
interface-type interface-number2, with interface-number2 taking a value greater than
interface-number1. The total number of individual ports and port ranges defined in the list must not
exceed 10.

Description

Use the display garp timer command to display the settings of the GARP timers on specified ports or
all ports.
If the interface interface-list keyword-argument combination is not specified, this command displays
the GARP timer settings of all ports.
This command displays the settings of the following timers:
z Join timer
z Leave timer
z LeaveAll timer
z Hold timer
Related commands: garp timer, garp timer leaveall.

1-2
Examples

# Display the settings of the GARP timers on port GigabitEthernet1/0/1.

<Sysname> display garp timer interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

GARP timers on port GigabitEthernet1/0/1

Garp Join Time : 20 centiseconds

Garp Leave Time : 60 centiseconds
Garp LeaveAll Time : 1000 centiseconds
Garp Hold Time : 10 centiseconds

garp timer

Syntax

garp timer { hold | join | leave } timer-value

undo garp timer { hold | join | leave }

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

hold: Sets the GARP Hold timer.

join: Sets the GARP Join timer.
leave: Sets the GARP Leave timer.
timer-value: Timeout time (in centiseconds) of the GARP timer (Hold, Join or Leave) to be set.

Description

Use the garp timer command to set a GARP timer (that is, the Hold timer, the Join timer, or the Leaver
timer) for an Ethernet port.
Use the undo garp timer command to restore the default setting of a GARP timer.
By default, the Hold, Join, and Leave timers are set to 10, 20, and 60 centiseconds.
Note that:
z The setting of each timer must be a multiple of 5 (in centiseconds).
z The timeout ranges of the timers vary depending on the timeout values you set for other timers. If
you want to set the timeout time of a timer to a value out of the current range, you can set the
timeout time of the associated timer to another value to change the timeout range of this timer.
The following table describes the relations between the timers:

1-3
Table 1-2 Relations between the timers

Timer Lower threshold Upper threshold

This upper threshold is less
than or equal to one-half of the
timeout time of the Join timer.
Hold 10 centiseconds
You can change the threshold
by changing the timeout time of
the Join timer.
This lower threshold is greater This upper threshold is less
than or equal to twice the than one-half of the timeout
timeout time of the Hold timer. time of the Leave timer. You
Join
You can change the threshold can change the threshold by
by changing the timeout time of changing the timeout time of
the Hold timer. the Leave timer.
This upper threshold is less
This lower threshold is greater
than the timeout time of the
than twice the timeout time of
LeaveAll timer. You can
Leave the Join timer. You can change
change the threshold by
the threshold by changing the
changing the timeout time of
timeout time of the Join timer.
the LeaveAll timer.
This lower threshold is greater
than the timeout time of the
LeaveAll Leave timer. You can change 32,765 centiseconds
threshold by changing the
timeout time of the Leave timer.

In networking, the following GARP timer settings are recommended:

z GARP hold timer: 100 centiseconds (1 second)
z GARP Join timer: 600 centiseconds (6 seconds)
z GARP Leave timer: 3000 centiseconds (30 seconds)

Related commands: display garp timer.

Examples

# Set the GARP Join timer to 30 centiseconds for GigabitEthernet1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] garp timer join 30

garp timer leaveall

Syntax

garp timer leaveall timer-value

undo garp timer leaveall

1-4
View

System view

Parameters

timer-value: Setting (in centiseconds) of the GARP LeaveAll timer. You need to set this argument with
the Leave timer settings of other Ethernet ports as references. That is, this argument needs to be larger
than the Leave timer settings of any Ethernet ports. Also note that this argument needs to be a multiple
of 5 and cannot be larger than 32,765.

Description

Use the garp timer leaveall command to set the GARP LeaveAll timer.
Use the undo garp timer leaveall command to restore the default setting of the GARP LeaveAll timer.
By default, the LeaveAll timer is set to 1,000 centiseconds, that is, 10 seconds.

In networking, you are recommended to set the GARP LeaveAll timer to 12000 centiseconds (2
minutes).

Related commands: display garp timer.

Examples

# Set the GARP LeaveAll timer to 100 centiseconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] garp timer leaveall 100

reset garp statistics

Syntax

reset garp statistics [ interface interface-list ]

View

User view

Parameters

interface-list: Specifies a list of Ethernet ports. In this list, you can specify individual ports and port
ranges. An individual port takes the form of interface-type interface-number and a port range takes the
form of interface-type interface-number1 to interface-type interface-number2, with interface-number2
taking a value greater than interface-number1. The total number of individual ports and port ranges
defined in the list must not exceed 10.

1-5
Description

Use the reset garp statistics command to clear the GARP statistics (including statistics about packets
received/sent/discarded by GVRP) on the specified or all ports. You can use the display garp
statistics command to view the NDP statistics before and after the execution of the reset garp
statistics command to verify the execution result.
Executing the reset garp statistics command without any parameter clears the GARP statistics of all
ports.
Related commands: display garp statistics.

Examples

# Clear GARP statistics of all ports.

<Sysname> reset garp statistics

GVRP Configuration Commands

display gvrp statistics

Syntax

display gvrp statistics [ interface interface-list ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface interface-list: Specifies an Ethernet port list. By providing a value for this argument, you can
display the GVRP statistics on the specified ports. You need to provide the interface-list argument in the
format of { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where the
interface-type argument represents the port type, the interface-number argument represents the port
number, and & <1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this
argument.
Note that, this command displays GVRP statistics only on the trunk ports included in the list. Statistics
on non-trunk ports will not be displayed.

Description

Use the display gvrp statistics command to display the GVRP statistics of trunk ports.
This command displays the following information:
z GVRP status
z Number of the GVRP entries that fail to be registered
z Source MAC address of the previous GVRP PDU
z GVRP registration type of a port

Examples

# Display the GVRP statistics of GigabitEthernet1/0/1, assuming that the port is a trunk port.
<Sysname> display gvrp statistics interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
GVRP statistics on port GigabitEthernet1/0/1

1-6
GVRP Status : Enabled
GVRP Failed Registrations : 0
GVRP Last Pdu Origin : 0000-0000-0000
GVRP Registration Type : Normal

display gvrp status

Syntax

display gvrp status

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display gvrp status command to display the global GVRP status (enabled or disabled).

Examples

# Display the global GVRP status.

<Sysname> display gvrp status
GVRP is enabled

The above information indicates that GVRP is enabled globally.

gvrp

Syntax

gvrp
undo gvrp

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the gvrp command to enable GVRP globally (in system view) or for a port (in Ethernet port view).
Use the undo gvrp command to disable GVRP globally (in system view) or on a port (in Ethernet port
view).
By default, GVRP is disabled both globally and on ports.
Note that:

1-7
z To enable GVRP for a port, you need to enable GVRP globally first. GVRP does not take effect
automatically on ports upon being enabled globally.
z You can enable/disable GVRP only on trunk ports.
z After you enable GVRP on a trunk port, you cannot change the port to other types.
Related commands: display gvrp status.

Examples

# Enable GVRP globally.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] gvrp
GVRP is enabled globally.

# Enable GVRP on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] gvrp
GVRP is enabled on port GigabitEthernet1/0/5.

gvrp registration

Syntax

gvrp registration { fixed | forbidden | normal }

undo gvrp registration

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

fixed: Specifies the fixed GVRP registration mode. A port operating in this mode cannot register or
deregister VLAN information dynamically. It only propagates static VLAN information. Besides, the port
permits only static VLANs, that is, it propagates only static VLAN information to the other GARP
members.
forbidden: Specifies the forbidden GVRP registration mode. A port operating in this mode cannot
register or deregister VLAN information dynamically. It permits only VLAN 1, that is, it propagates only
the information about VLAN 1 to the other GARP members.
normal: Specifies the normal mode. A port operating in this mode can dynamically register or deregister
VLAN information and can propagate both dynamic and static VLAN information.

Description

Use the gvrp registration command to configure the GVRP registration mode on a port.
Use the undo gvrp registration command to restore the default GVRP registration mode on a port.
By default, the GVRP registration mode is normal.
Note that these commands only apply to trunk ports.
Related commands: display gvrp statistics

1-8
Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to operate in fixed GVRP registration mode.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] gvrp registration fixed

1-9
Table of Contents

1 Port Basic Configuration Commands······································································································1-1

Port Basic Configuration Commands······································································································1-1
broadcast-suppression ····················································································································1-1
copy configuration ···························································································································1-2
description ·······································································································································1-4
display brief interface·······················································································································1-5
display interface·······························································································································1-6
display link-delay ···························································································································1-10
display loopback-detection ············································································································1-11
display port combo ························································································································1-11
display port-group··························································································································1-12
display storm-constrain··················································································································1-13
display unit·····································································································································1-14
duplex ············································································································································1-15
enable log updown ························································································································1-16
flow-control ····································································································································1-17
flow interval····································································································································1-17
interface·········································································································································1-18
jumboframe enable························································································································1-19
link-delay ·······································································································································1-19
loopback ········································································································································1-20
loopback-detection control enable·································································································1-21
loopback-detection enable ············································································································1-22
loopback-detection interface-list enable ························································································1-23
loopback-detection interval-time····································································································1-23
loopback-detection per-vlan enable ······························································································1-24
loopback-detection shutdown enable ····························································································1-24
mdi ·················································································································································1-25
port-group ······································································································································1-26
port·················································································································································1-27
reset counters interface ·················································································································1-27
shutdown ·······································································································································1-28
speed ·············································································································································1-29
speed auto·····································································································································1-30
storm-constrain······························································································································1-30
storm-constrain control ··················································································································1-31
storm-constrain enable ··················································································································1-32
storm-constrain interval ·················································································································1-33
virtual-cable-test ····························································································································1-33

i
1 Port Basic Configuration Commands

Port Basic Configuration Commands

broadcast-suppression

Syntax

broadcast-suppression { ratio | pps max-pps }

undo broadcast-suppression

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

ratio: Maximum ratio of the broadcast traffic allowed on a port to the total transmission capacity of the
port. The value ranges from 1 to 100 (in step of 1) and defaults to 100. The smaller the ratio is, the less
broadcast traffic is allowed.
max-pps: Maximum number of broadcast packets allowed to be received per second on an Ethernet
port (in pps). The following are the value ranges for the argument:
z In system view, the value range is 200 to 14881000.
z In Ethernet port view, the value range is 200 to 1488100.

Description

Use the broadcast-suppression command to limit broadcast traffic allowed to be received on each
port (in system view) or on a specified port (in Ethernet port view).
Use the undo broadcast-suppression command to restore the default broadcast suppression setting.
The broadcast-suppression command is used to enable broadcast suppression. By default,
broadcast suppression is disabled.
When incoming broadcast traffic exceeds the broadcast traffic threshold you set, the system drops the
packets exceeding the threshold to reduce the broadcast traffic ratio to the specified range, so as to
keep normal network service.
You can use the undo broadcast-suppression command in system view to cancel the broadcast
suppression settings on all ports, or use the broadcast-suppression command in system view to make a
global setting.
Executing the commands in Ethernet port view only takes effect on the current port.

1-1
The global broadcast suppression setting configured by the broadcast-suppression command in
system view takes effect on all Ethernet ports in the system except for the reflection ports, stack ports
and ports having their own broadcast suppression settings.
If you configure broadcast-suppression command in both system view and Ethernet port view, the
configuration in Ethernet port view will take effect.

Examples

# Allow incoming broadcast traffic on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to occupy at most 20% of the total
transmission capacity of the port and suppress the broadcast traffic that exceeds the specified range.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] broadcast-suppression 20

# Set the maximum number of broadcast packets that can be received per second by the
GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 port to 1,000.
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] broadcast-suppression pps 1000

copy configuration

Syntax

copy configuration source { interface-type interface-number | aggregation-group source-agg-id }

destination { interface-list [ aggregation-group destination-agg-id ] | aggregation-group
destination-agg-id }

View

System view

Parameters

interface-type: Port type.

interface-number: Port number.
source-agg-id: Source aggregation group number, in the range of 1 to 50. The port with the smallest
port number in the aggregation group is used as the source port.
destination-agg-id: Destination aggregation group number, in the range of 1 to 50.
interface-list: Destination port list, interface-list = interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ] &<1-10. &<1-10> means that you can input up to 10 ports/port ranges.

Description

Use the copy configuration command to duplicate the configuration of a port to specified ports to keep
consistent configuration on them.

1-2
z If you specify a source aggregation group ID, the system uses the port with the smallest port
number in the aggregation group as the source.
z If you specify a destination aggregation group ID, the configuration of the source port will be copied
to all ports in the aggregation group and all ports in the group will have the same configuration as
that of the source port.

Refer to Table 1-1 for the configurations that can be copied.

Table 1-1 Configurations that can be copied

Configuration category Contents

VLAN VLANs carried on the port and the default VLAN ID.
Protocol-based VLAN Protocol VLAN IDs and protocol indexes.

The enable/disable status of LACP.

LACP (Link Aggregation (As the configuration commands of manual and static link
Control protocol) aggregation groups cannot be copied, you cannot assign a port to a
link aggregation group with the copy command.)
Traffic policing, packet priority marking, port priority, traffic
accounting, VLAN mapping, port rate limiting, priority trust mode,
QoS
QoS profile (the qos-profile port-based configuration cannot be
copied), and so on.
The enable/disable state of STP on the port, link attribute of the port
(point-to-point or non-point-to-point), STP priority, path cost,
STP transmission rate limit, enable/disable state of loop protection,
enable/disable state of root protection, and whether the port is an
edge port.
GARP GVRP enable/disable status, timer settings, and registration mode.
Basic port configuration Link type of the port, port rate, and duplex mode.

In case a configuration setting fails to be copied, the system will print the error message.

Examples

# Copy the configurations of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 and GigabitEthernet 1/0/3.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] copy configuration source GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 destination GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
GigabitEthernet 1/0/3
Note: The following will be removed from destination port list:
Aggregation port(s), Voice vlan port(s).
Copying VLAN configuration...
Copying Protocol based VLAN configuration...
Copying LACP configuration...
Copying QOS configuration...
Copying GARP configuration...

1-3
Copying STP configuration...
Copying speed/duplex configuration...

z Any aggregation group port you input in the destination port list will be removed from the list and the
copy command will not take effect on the port. If you want an aggregation group port to have the
same configuration with the source port, you can specify the aggregation group of the port as the
destination (with the destination-agg-id argument).
z Any voice-VLAN-enabled port you input in the destination port list will be removed from the list.

# Copy the configurations of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/2.

[Sysname]copy configuration source GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 destination GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
Copying VLAN configuration...
Copying Protocol based VLAN configuration...
Copying LACP configuration...
Copying QOS configuration...
Copying GARP configuration...
Copying STP configuration...
Copying speed/duplex configuration...
Copying speed configuration to interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 failed
Copying QoS rate limit configuration to interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 failed

The output shows that all configurations except port rate limiting and QoS traffic policing were copied
successfully.

description

Syntax

description text
undo description

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

text: Port description, a string of 1 to 80 characters.

Description

Use the description command to configure a description for the port.

Use the undo description command to remove the port description.
By default, no description is configured for a port.
You can use the display brief interface command to display the configured description.

1-4
Examples

# Set description string home for the GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 port.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] description home

display brief interface

Syntax

display brief interface [ interface-type [ interface-number ] ] [ | { begin | include | exclude }

regular-expression ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type: Port type.

interface-number: Port number.
|: Specifies to use a regular expression to filter the configuration information entries to be displayed.
begin: Each entry must begin with a specified character string.
include: Each entry must include a specified character string.
exclude: Each entry must not include a specified character string.
regular-expression: Regular expression, a string of 1 to 256 characters.

For details about regular expression, refer to the Configuration File Management module in this manual.

Description

Use the display brief interface command to display the brief configuration information about one or all
interfaces, including: interface type, link state, link rate, duplex attribute, link type, default VLAN ID and
description string.

Currently, for the port types other than Ethernet port, this command only displays the link state, and
shows "--" in all other configuration information fields.

Related commands: display interface.

1-5
Examples

# Display the brief configuration information about the GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 port.
<Sysname> display brief interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
Interface:
Eth - Ethernet GE - GigabitEthernet TENGE - tenGigabitEthernet
Loop - LoopBack Vlan - Vlan-interface Cas - Cascade
Speed/Duplex:
A - auto-negotiation

Interface Link Speed Duplex Type PVID Description

------------------------------------------------------------------------
GE1/0/1 DOWN A A hybrid 1 home

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display brief interface command

Field Description
Interface Port type
Link Current link state: UP, DOWN or ADMINISTRATIVELY DOWN

Speed Link rate

Duplex Duplex attribute
Type Link type: access, hybrid or trunk

PVID Default VLAN ID

Description Port description string

The state of an Ethernet port can be UP, DOWN, or ADMINISTRATIVELY DOWN. The following table
shows the port state transitions.

Table 1-3 Port state transitions

State after executing

State after executing the
Initial port state the undo shutdown
shutdown command
command
DOWN DOWN
Not connected to
any cable ADMINISTRATIVELY
DOWN
DOWN
ADMINISTRATIVELY
DOWN DOWN
DOWN
Connected to a UP UP
cable
ADMINISTRATIVELY
UP
DOWN

display interface

Syntax

display interface [ interface-type | interface-type interface-number ]

1-6
View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type: Port type.

interface-number: Port number.
For details about the arguments, refer to the parameter description of the interface command.

Description

Use the display interface command to display port configuration.

When using this command:
z If you specify neither port type nor port number, the command displays information about all ports.
z If you specify only port type, the command displays information about all ports of the specified type.
z If you specify both port type and port number, the command displays information about the
specified port.

Examples

# Display the configuration information of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> display interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 current state : DOWN
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc00-5190
Media type is twisted pair, loopback not set
Port hardware type is 1000_BASE_T
Unknown-speed mode, unknown-duplex mode
Link speed type is autonegotiation, link duplex type is autonegotiation
Flow-control is not enabled
The Maximum Frame Length is 9216
Broadcast MAX-ratio: 100%
Unknown Multicast Packet drop: Disable
Unknown Unicast Packet drop: Disable
Allow jumbo frame to pass
PVID: 1
Mdi type: auto
Port link-type: access
Tagged VLAN ID : none
Untagged VLAN ID : 1
Last 300 seconds input: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
Last 300 seconds output: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
Input(total): 0 packets, - bytes
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses
Input(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 pauses
Input: 0 input errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, - throttles, 0 CRC
0 frame, 0 overruns, 0 aborts, - ignored, - parity errors
Output(total): 0 packets, - bytes
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses

1-7
Output(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 pauses
Output: 0 output errors, - underruns, - buffer failures
0 aborts, 0 deferred, 0 collisions, 0 late collisions
- lost carrier, - no carrier

Table 1-4 Description on the fields of the display interface command

Field Description
Current GigabitEthernet port status: UP, DOWN or
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 current state
ADMINISTRATIVELY DOWN
IP Sending Frames' Format Ethernet frame format
Hardware address Port hardware address
Media type Media type
Port hardware type Port hardware type
Unknown-speed mode, unknown-duplex
Current speed mode and duplex mode
mode
Link speed type is autonegotiation, link Link speed and duplex status ( force or
duplex type is autonegotiation auto-negotiation)
Flow-control is not enabled Status of flow-control on the port
The Maximum Frame Length Maximum frame length allowed on the port
Broadcast MAX-ratio Broadcast suppression ratio on the port
Allow jumbo frame to pass Whether Jumbo frame is allowed on the port.
PVID Default VLAN ID of the port
Mdi type Network cable type
Port link-type Port link type
Identify the VLANs whose packets will be forwarded
Tagged VLAN ID
with tags on the port.
Identify the VLANs whose packets will be forwarded
Untagged VLAN ID
without tags on the port.
Last 300 seconds input: 0 packets/sec 0
bytes/sec Average input and output rates (in pps and Bps) in the
Last 300 seconds output: 0 packets/sec 0 last 300 seconds
bytes/sec
Count in packets and in bytes of total incoming traffic
on the port, including incoming normal packets,
Input(total): 0 packets, - bytes abnormal packets, and PAUSE frames
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses The number of incoming broadcast packets, the
number of incoming multicast packets, and the number
of incoming PAUSE frames on the port.
Count in packets and in bytes of incoming normal
packets on the port, including incoming normal packets
Input(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes and normal PAUSE frames
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 The number of normal incoming broadcast packets, the
pauses number of normal incoming multicast packets, and the
number of normal incoming PAUSE frames of the port

1-8
Field Description
input errors The total number of incoming error frames
The number of incoming runt frames
runts A runt frame is of less than 64 bytes but has the correct
format and CRC field
The number of incoming giant frames
giants (A giant frame is of more than 1518 bytes if untagged
or more than 1522 bytes if tagged.)
The number of throttles that occurred on the port
- throttles (A throttle occurs when a port is shut down due to
buffer or memory overload.)
The number of CRC error frames received in correct
CRC
length
The number of incoming CRC error frames with
frame
non-integer number of bytes
The number of packets dropped because the receiving
overruns rate of the port exceeds the processing capability of the
input queues
The total number of incoming illegal packets, including:
z Fragments: CRC error frames of less than 64 bytes
(integer or non-integer).
z Jabber frames: CRC error frames of more than
1518 bytes if untagged or 1522 bytes if tagged
(integer or non-integer).
aborts z Symbol error frames: frames with at least one
symbol error.
z Unknown operator frames: MAC control frames that
are not Pause frames
z Length error frames: frames whose actual length
(46-1500 bytes) is inconsistent with the length field
in the 802.3 header.
The number of packets dropped due to insufficient
- ignored
receive buffer on the port
- parity errors The number of incoming parity error frames
Count in packets and in bytes of total outgoing traffic on
the port, including normal packets, abnormal packets,
Output(total): 0 packets, - bytes and normal Pause frames
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses The number of outgoing broadcast packets, the
number of outgoing multicast packets, and the number
of outgoing Pause frames on the port
Count in packets and in bytes of outgoing normal
packets on the port, including outgoing normal packets
Output(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes
and normal Pause frames.
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0
The number of normal outgoing broadcast packets, the
pauses
number of normal outgoing multicast packets, and the
number of normal outgoing Pause frames on the port.
output errors The total number of outgoing error frames
The number of packets dropped because the
transmitting rate of the port exceeds the processing
- underruns
capacity of the output queue, which is a rare hardware
error.

1-9
Field Description
The number of packets dropped due to insufficient
- buffer failures
transmit buffer on the port
The number of transmission failures due to various
aborts
reasons, such as collisions
The number of first transmission attempts delayed
deferred
because of detection of collisions

The number of detected collisions

collisions (Transmission of a frame will be aborted upon
detection of a collision.)
The number of detected late collisions
late collisions (A late collision occurs if the transmission of a frame
defers due to detection of collision after its first 512 bits
have been transmitted.)
The lost carrier counter applicable to serial WAN
interfaces
- lost carrier
The counter increases by 1 upon each carrier loss
detected during frame transmission.
The no carrier counter applicable to serial WAN
interfaces
- no carrier
The counter increases by 1 upon each carrier detection
failure for frame transmission.

A hyphen (-) indicates that the statistical item is not supported.

display link-delay

Syntax

display link-delay

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display link-delay command to display the information about the ports with the link-delay
command configured, including the port name and the configured delay.
Related commands: link-delay.

Examples

# Display the information about the ports with the link-delay command configured.
1-10
<Sysname> display link-delay
Interface Time Delay
===================== ==============
GigabitEthernet1/0/5 8

display loopback-detection

Syntax

display loopback-detection

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display loopback-detection command to display the loopback detection status on the port. If
loopback detection is enabled, this information will also be displayed: time interval for loopback
detection and the loopback ports.

Examples

# Display the loopback detection status on the port.

<Sysname> display loopback-detection
Port GigabitEthernet1/0/1 loopback-detection is running
system Loopback-detection is running
Detection interval time is 30 seconds
There is no port existing loopback link

Table 1-5 Description on the fields of the display loopback-detection command

Field Description
Port GigabitEthernet1/0/1 loopback-detection is Loopback detection is enabled on the
running GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
system Loopback-detection is running Loopback detection is enabled globally.
Time interval for loopback detection is 30
Detection interval time is 30 seconds
seconds.
There is no port existing loopback link No loopback port exists.

display port combo

Syntax

display port combo

View

Any view

1-11
Parameters

None

Description

Use the display port combo command to display the Combo ports of a device and the corresponding
optical ports and electrical ports.

Examples

# Display the Combo ports of the device and the corresponding optical ports and electrical ports.
<Sysname> display port combo
Combo-group Active Inactive
1 GigabitEthernet1/0/23 GigabitEthernet1/0/49
2 GigabitEthernet1/0/24 GigabitEthernet1/0/50
3 GigabitEthernet1/0/47 GigabitEthernet1/0/51
4 GigabitEthernet1/0/48 GigabitEthernet1/0/52

Table 1-6 display port combo command output description

Field Description
Combo ports of the device, represented by Combo port number, which
Combo-group
is generated by the system.
Active Ports of the Combo ports that are active
Inactive Ports of the Combo ports that are inactive

As for the optical port and the electrical port of a Combo port, the one with the smaller port number is
active by default. You can determine whether a port is an optical port or an electrical port by checking
the “Media type is” field of the display interface command.

display port-group

Syntax

display port-group group-id

View

Any view

Parameter

group-id: Number of port group, in the range of 1 to 100.

Description

Use the display port-group command to display information for a specified port group .

Example

# Display information for the port group 1.

<Sysname> display port-group 1
Port Group 1:

1-12
Interface list: GigabitEthernet1/0/2-5

The above information indicates that port group 1 includes 4 ports: from GigabitEthernet1/0/2 to
GigabitEthernet1/0/5.

display storm-constrain

Syntax

display storm-constrain [ interface interface-type interface-number ] [ | { begin | exclude | include }

regular-expression ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type: Port type.

interface-number: Port number.
|: Uses a regular expression to filter the output configuration information.
begin: Displays the configurations that begin with the string specified by regular-expression.
exclude: Displays the configurations that do not contain the string specified by regular-expression.
include: Displays the configurations that contain the string specified by regular-expression.
regular-expression: Regular expression.

Description

Use the display storm-constrain command to display the storm control configurations.

Examples

# Display the storm control configurations.

<Sysname> display storm-constrain
Abbreviation: BC - broadcast; MC - multicast; UC - unicast
Flow Statistic Interval: 10(second)
PortName Type LowerLimit UpperLimit CtrMode Status Trap Log SwiNum Unit
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
GE1/0/5 BC 1 1 NA normal on on 0 pps

Table 1-7 Description on the fields of the display storm-constrain command

Field Description
Flow Statistic
Interval to collect traffic statistics.
Interval
PortName Name of an Ethernet port
Type Traffic type, which can be unicast, multicast, and broadcast
LowerLimit Lower threshold of traffic received on the port
UpperLimit Upper threshold of traffic received on the port
Control action to be taken when the broadcast/multicast/unicast traffic
CtrMode
exceeds the upper threshold, which can be block or shutdown.

1-13
Field Description
Status Current status of the port, which can be normal or control.
on: trap information is output when a type of traffic received on the port
exceeds the upper threshold or falls below the lower threshold.
Trap
off: trap information is not output when a type of traffic received on the port
exceeds the upper threshold or falls below the lower threshold.
on: log information is output when traffic received on the port exceeds the
upper threshold or falls below the lower threshold
Log
off: log information is not output when traffic received on the port exceeds the
upper threshold or falls below the lower threshold
SwiNum Number of port state switchover

display unit

Syntax

display unit unit-id interface

View

Any view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit ID, only can be 1.

Description

Use the display unit command to display information about the ports on a specified unit.

Examples

# Display information about the ports on unit 1.

<Sysname> display unit 1 interface
Aux1/0/0
Description : Aux Interface
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 current state : DOWN
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 00e0-fc00-5190
Media type is twisted pair, loopback not set
Port hardware type is 1000_BASE_T
Unknown-speed mode, unknown-duplex mode
Link speed type is autonegotiation, link duplex type is autonegotiation
Flow-control is not enabled
The Maximum Frame Length is 9216
Broadcast MAX-ratio: 100%
Unknown Multicast Packet drop: Disable
Unknown Unicast Packet drop: Disable
Allow jumbo frame to pass
PVID: 1
Mdi type: auto
Port link-type: access

1-14
Tagged VLAN ID : none
Untagged VLAN ID : 1
Last 300 seconds input: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
Last 300 seconds output: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
Input(total): 0 packets, - bytes
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses
Input(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 pauses
Input: 0 input errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, - throttles, 0 CRC
0 frame, 0 overruns, 0 aborts, - ignored, - parity errors
Output(total): 0 packets, - bytes
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses
Output(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 pauses
Output: 0 output errors, - underruns, - buffer failures
0 aborts, 0 deferred, 0 collisions, 0 late collisions
- lost carrier, - no carrier

(The following displayed information is omitted)

Table 1-8 Description on the fields of the display unit command

Field Description
Aux1/0/0 The description string of the AUX port is Aux
Description : Aux Interface Interface.

For the description of other fields, refer to Table 1-4.

duplex

Syntax

duplex { auto | full | half }

undo duplex

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

auto: Sets the port to auto-negotiation mode.

full: Sets the port to full duplex mode.
half: Sets the port to half duplex mode.

Description

Use the duplex command to set the duplex mode of the current port.
Use the undo duplex command to restore the default duplex mode, that is, auto-negotiation.
By default, the port is in auto-negotiation mode.
Related commands: speed.

1-15
Examples

# Set the GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 port to auto-negotiation mode.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] duplex auto

enable log updown

Syntax

enable log updown

undo enable log updown

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the enable log updown command to enable Up/Down log information output.
Use the undo log enable updown command to disable Up/Down log information output.
By default, a port is allowed to output Up/Down log information.

Examples

# By default, a port is allowed to output the Up/Down log information. Execute the shutdown command
or the undo shutdown command on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1, and the system outputs Up/Down log
information of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] shutdown
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]
%Apr 5 07:25:37:634 2000 Sysname L2INF/5/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 -
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is DOWN
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] undo shutdown
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]
%Apr 5 07:25:56:244 2000 Sysname L2INF/5/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 -
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is UP

# Disable GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 from outputting Up/Down log information and execute the shutdown
command or the undo shutdown command on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1. No Up/Down log information is
output for GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] undo enable log updown
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] shutdown
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] undo shutdown

1-16
flow-control

Syntax

flow-control
undo flow-control

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the flow-control command to enable flow control on the current Ethernet port.
Use the undo flow-control command to disable flow control on the port.
Suppose flow control is enabled on both the local and peer switches. When congestion occurs on the
local switch,
the local switch sends a message to notify the peer switch of stopping sending packets to itself or
reducing the sending rate temporarily,
the peer switch will stop sending packets to the local switch or reduce the sending rate temporarily when
it receives the message; and vice versa. By this way, packet loss is avoided and the network service
operates normally.
By default, flow control is disabled on a port.

Examples

# Enable flow control on the GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 port.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] flow-control

flow interval

Syntax

flow-interval interval
undo flow-interval

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

Interval: Interval (in seconds) to perform statistics on port information. This argument ranges from 5 to
300 (in step of 5) and is 300 by default.

1-17
Description

Use the flow-interval command to set the interval to perform statistics on port information.
Use the undo flow-interval command to restore the default interval.
By default, this interval is 300 seconds.
When you use the display interface interface-type interface-number command to display the
information of a port, the system performs statistical analysis on the traffic flow passing through the port
during the specified interval and displays the average rates in the interval. For example, if you set the
interval to 100 seconds, the displayed information is as follows:
Last 100 seconds input: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
Last 100 seconds output: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec

Related commands: display interface.

Examples

# Set the interval to perform statistics on the GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 port to 100 seconds.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] flow-interval 100

interface

Syntax

interface interface-type interface-number

View

System view

Parameters

interface-type: Port type, which can be Aux, GigabitEthernet, TenGigabitEthernet .LoopBack, NULL or
VLAN-interface.
interface-number: Port number. For the GigabitEthernet and TenGigabitEthernet port, it is in the format
of slot number/subslot number/port number.
z The slot number is fixed to 1;
z The subslot number is 0 if the port is an GigabitEthernet port, the subslot number is 1 or 2 if the port
is a TenGigabitEthernet port;
z The port number is relevant to the device.

Description

Use the interface command to enter specific port view. To configure an Ethernet port, you need to enter
Ethernet port view first.

Examples

# Enter GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 port view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.

1-18
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]

jumboframe enable

Syntax

jumboframe enable
undo jumboframe enable

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the jumboframe enable command to set the maximum frame size allowed on a port to 9,216
bytes.
Use the undo jumboframe enable command to set the maximum frame size allowed on a port to 1,522
bytes.
By default, the maximum frame size allowed on an Ethernet port is 9,216 bytes.

Examples

# Set the maximum frame size allowed on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to 9.216 bytes.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] jumboframe enable

link-delay

Syntax

link-delay delay-time
undo link-delay

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

delay-time: Port state change delay to be set. This argument is in the range 2 to 10 (in seconds).

Description

Use the link-delay command to set the port state change delay.
Use the undo link-delay command to restore the default.
By default, the port state change delay is 0 seconds, that is, the port state changes without any delay.

1-19
During a short period after you connect your switch to another device, the connecting port may go up
and down frequently due to hardware compatibility, resulting in service interruption.
To avoid situations like this, you may set a port state change delay.

z The port state change delay takes effect when the port goes down but not when the port goes up.
z The delay configured in this way does not take effect for ports in DLDP down state. For information
about the DLDP down state, refer to DLDP.

Examples

# Set the port state change delay of GigabitEthernet 1/0/5 to 8 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
Enter system view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/5
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/5] link-delay 8

loopback

Syntax

loopback { external | internal }

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

external: Performs external loop test. In the external loop test, self-loop headers must be used on the
port of the switch. The external loop test can locate the hardware failures on the port.

For 1000M port, the self-loop headers are made from eight cores of the 8-core cables, and the packets
forwarded by the port will be received by itself.

internal: Performs internal loop test. In the internal loop test, self loop is established in the switching
chip to locate the chip failure which is related to the port.

Description

Use the loopback command to perform a loopback test on the current Ethernet port to check whether
the Ethernet port works normally. The loopback test terminates automatically after running for a specific
period.

1-20
By default, no loopback test is performed on the Ethernet port.

Examples

# Perform an internal loop test on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] loopback internal
Loopback internal succeeded.

loopback-detection control enable

Syntax

loopback-detection control enable

undo loopback-detection control enable

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the loopback-detection control enable command to enable the loopback detection control
feature on the current trunk or hybrid port.
Use the undo loopback-detection control enable command to disable the loopback detection control
feature on the trunk or hybrid port.
This function needs to be used in conjunction with the loopback detection function. For details, refer to
the loopback-detection enable command. When a loopback is detected in a VLAN on a trunk or hybrid
port, you can use this function to control the working status of the port.
z If this feature is enabled on a trunk or hybrid port, when loopback is found on the port, the system
puts the port into the controlled working status, sends log and trap messages to the terminal, and
remove the corresponding MAC forwarding entry.
z If this feature is disabled on a trunk or hybrid port, when loopback is found on the port, the system
just reports log and trap messages, and the port still works normally.
By default, the loopback detection control feature is disabled on the trunk or hybrid port.
Note that this command is invalid for an access port.
Related commands: loopback-detection enable.

Examples

# Enable the loopback detection control feature on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port link-type trunk

1-21
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] loopback-detection control enable

loopback-detection enable

Syntax

loopback-detection enable
undo loopback-detection enable

View

System view or Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the loopback-detection enable command to enable the loopback detection feature on ports to
detect whether external loopback occurs on a port.
Use the undo loopback-detection enable command to disable the loopback detection feature on port.
z If loopback is found on an access port, the system disables the port, sends log and trap messages
to the client and removes the corresponding MAC forwarding entry.
z If loopback is found on a trunk or hybrid port, the system sends log and trap messages to the client.
If the loopback port control function is enabled on the port (with the loopback-detection control
enable command), the system disables the port, sends log and trap messages to the client and
removes the corresponding MAC forwarding entry.

The loopback detection feature takes effect on a port only when the loopback detection feature is
enabled in both system view and the specified port view.

By default, the loopback detection feature is disabled on any port.

Related commands: loopback-detection control enable.

Examples

# Enable the loopback detection feature on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] loopback-detection enable
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] loopback-detection enable

1-22
loopback-detection interface-list enable

Syntax

loopback-detection interface-list enable

undo loopback-detection interface-list enable

View

System view

Parameter

interface-list: Ethernet port list, in the form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to

interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where
z interface-type is the port type, and interface-number is the port number.
z Keyword to is used to specify a range of ports. The port number after to must be equal to or greater
than that before to.
z &<1-10> means that you can specify up to 10 ports or port ranges.

Description

Use the loopback-detection interface-list enable command to enable the loopback detection function
on a range of ports.
Use the undo loopback-detection interface-list enable command to disable the loopback detection
function on a range of ports.

Example

# Enable the loopback detection function on ports GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 through GigabitEthernet 1/0/4.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] loopback-detection enable
[Sysname] loopback-detection GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 enable

loopback-detection interval-time

Syntax

loopback-detection interval-time time

undo loopback-detection interval-time

View

System view

Parameters

time: Time interval for loopback detection, in the range of 5 to 300 (in seconds). It is 30 seconds by
default.

Description

Use the loopback-detection interval-time command to set time interval for loopback detection.

1-23
Use the undo loopback-detection interval-time command to restore the default time interval.

Examples

# Set time interval for loopback detection to 10 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] loopback-detection interval-time 10

loopback-detection per-vlan enable

Syntax

loopback-detection per-vlan enable

undo loopback-detection per-vlan enable

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the loopback-detection per-vlan enable command to configure the system to run loopback
detection on all VLANs of the current trunk or hybrid port.
Use the undo loopback-detection per-vlan enable command to restore the default setting.
By default, the system runs loopback detection only on the default VLAN of the trunk or hybrid port.
Note that, this command is not applicable to access ports. When the link type of a non-access port
changes to access, the loopback-detection per-vlan enable command already configured on the port
becomes invalid automatically.

Examples

# Configure the system to run loopback detection on all VLANs of the trunk port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port link-type trunk
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] loopback-detection per-vlan enable

loopback-detection shutdown enable

Syntax

loopback-detection shutdown enable

undo loopback-detection shutdown enable

View

Ethernet port view

1-24
Parameter

None

Description

Use the loopback-detection shutdown enable command to enable the loopback port auto-shutdown
function.
Use the undo loopback-detection shutdown enable command to disable the function.
The loopback port auto-shutdown function works in conjunction with the loopback detection function
(refer to loopback-detection enable). If a loop is found at a port:
z With the function enabled on the port, the system will shut down the port, and send log messages
to the terminal. After the loop is removed, you need to use the undo shutdown command to bring
up the port.
z With the function disabled on the port, the system will only send log messages to the terminal, and
the port is still in the normal forwarding state.
By default, the loopback port auto-shutdown function is enabled on ports if the device boots with the
default configuration file (config.def); if the device boots with null configuration, this function is disabled.
Related command: loopback-detection enable; loopback-detection control enable.

You cannot enable both the loopback port control function (with the loopback-detection control
enable command) and the loopback port auto-shutdown function on a port. If you do so, the function
configured later will take effect.

Example

# Enable the loopback port auto-shutdown function on port Ethernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] loopback-detection enable
[Sysname] interface Ethernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-Ethernet1/0/1] loopback-detection shutdown enable

mdi

Syntax

mdi { across | auto | normal }

undo mdi

View

Ethernet port view

1-25
Parameters

across: Sets the MDI mode to medium dependent interface (MDI).

normal: Sets the MDI mode to media dependent interface-X mode (MDI-X).
auto: Sets the MDI mode to auto-sensing. Port operating in this mode adjust its MDI mode between
MDI and MDI-X automatically.

z An RJ-45 interface can operate in MDI or MDI-X mode.

z To connect two RJ-45 interfaces operating in the same MDI mode, use a crossover cable; to
connect two RJ-45 interfaces operating in different MDI modes, use a straight-through cable.
z The MDI mode of an optical port is fixed to auto.

Description

Use the mdi command to set the MDI mode for a port.
Use the undo mdi command to restore the default setting.
By default, a port operates in auto-sensing MDI mode.

Examples

# Set the MDI mode of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to MDI.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] mdi across

port-group

Syntax

port-group group-id
undo port-group group-id

View

System view

Parameter

group-id: Number of port group, in the range of 1 to 100.

Description

Use the port-group command to create a port group or enter the specified port group view.
By default, no port group is configured.

1-26
Example

# Create port group 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] port-group 1
[Sysname-port-group-1]

port

Syntax

port interface-list
undo port interface-list

View

Port group view

Parameter

interface-list: Ethernet interface list, in the format of interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type

interface-number ] &<1-10>, where &<1-10> indicates that you can specify up to 10 port ranges.

Description

Use the port command to add Ethernet interface(s) to a specified port group.
Use the undo group-member command to remove specified Ethernet interface(s) from a port group.
By default, a port group is empty, that is, there is no Ethernet interface in it.

Example

# Add the interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2~GigabitEthernet1/0/5 to the port group1.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] port-group 1
[Sysname-port-group-1] port GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/5

reset counters interface

Syntax

reset counters interface [ interface-type | interface-type interface-number ]

View

User view

Parameters

interface-type: Port type.

interface-number: Port number.
For details about the parameters, see the parameter description of the interface command.

1-27
Description

Use the reset counters interface command to clear the statistics of the port, preparing for a new
statistics collection.
If you specify neither port type nor port number, the command clears statistics of all ports.
If specify only port type, the command clears statistics of all ports of this type.
If specify both port type and port number, the command clears statistics of the specified port.
Note that the statistics of the 802.1x-enabled ports cannot be cleared.

Examples

# Clear the statistics of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> reset counters interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

shutdown

Syntax

shutdown
undo shutdown

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the shutdown command to shut down an Ethernet port.

Use the undo shutdown command to bring up an Ethernet port.
By default, an Ethernet port is in up state.

Examples

# Shut down GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 and then bring it up.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] shutdown
#Apr 2 08:33:19:669 2000 Sysname L2INF/2/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 -
Trap 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3(linkDown): portIndex is 4227745, ifAdminStatus is 1, i
fOperStatus is 2

%Apr 2 08:33:19:860 2000 Sysname L2INF/5/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 -

GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is DOWN

%Apr 2 08:33:19:973 2000 Sysname L2INF/5/VLANIF LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 -

Vlan-interface1 is DOWN

1-28
%Apr 2 08:33:20:091 2000 Sysname IFNET/5/UPDOWN:- 1 -Line protocol on the interface
Vlan-interface1 is DOWN

# Enable GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] undo shutdown
#Apr 2 08:34:06:865 2000 Sysname L2INF/2/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 -
Trap 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4(linkUp): portIndex is 4227745, ifAdminStatus is 1, ifO
perStatus is 1
%Apr 2 08:34:07:058 2000 Sysname L2INF/5/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 -
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is UP

%Apr 2 08:34:07:176 2000 Sysname L2INF/5/VLANIF LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 -

Vlan-interface1 is UP

%Apr 2 08:34:07:288 2000 Sysname IFNET/5/UPDOWN:- 1 -Line protocol on the interface

Vlan-interface1 is UP

speed

Syntax

speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | auto }

undo speed

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

10: Specifies the port speed to 10 Mbps.

100: Specifies the port speed to 100 Mbps.
1000: Specifies the port speed to 1,000 Mbps.
auto: Specifies the port speed to the auto-negotiation mode.

Description

Use the speed command to set the port speed.

Use the undo speed command to restore the port speed to the default setting.
By default, the port speed is in the auto-negotiation mode.
Related commands: duplex.

The speed and undo speed commands cannot be configured on a combo port.

1-29
Examples

# Set the speed of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to 10 Mbps.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] speed 10

speed auto

Syntax

speed auto [ 10 | 100 | 1000 ]*

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

10: Configures 10 Mbps as an auto-negotiation speed of the port.

100: Configures 100 Mbps as an auto-negotiation speed of the port.
1000: Configures 1,000 Mbps as an auto-negotiation speed of the port.

Description

Use the speed auto [ 10 | 100 | 1000 ]* command to configure auto-negotiation speed(s) for the current
port.
By default, the port speed is auto-negotiated.
The last configuration will take effect if you configure the command for multiple times.

Examples

# Configure 10 Mbps and 1000 Mbps as the auto-negotiation speeds of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] speed auto 10 1000

storm-constrain

Syntax

storm-constrain broadcast max-packets min-packets { pps | kbps }

undo storm-constrain { all | broadcast }

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

broadcast: Specifies to control broadcast traffic on the port.

all: Cancels all the storm control threshold configurations on the port.

1-30
pps: Specifies the storm constrain threshold in packets.
kbps: Specifies the storm constrain threshold in kilobits per second (kbps).
max-packets: Upper threshold of the traffic on the port, in pps, or kbps. It ranges from 1 to
4,294,967,295 and must be greater than or equal to the lower threshold.
min-packets: Lower threshold of the traffic on the port, in pps, or kbps. It ranges from 1 to 4,294,967,295,
and must be less than or equal to the upper threshold.

Description

Use the storm-constrain command to set the upper and lower thresholds of the broadcast traffic
received on the port.
Use the undo storm-constrain command to cancel the threshold configuration.
z With traffic upper and lower thresholds specified on a port, the system periodically collects
statistics about the broadcast traffic on the port. Once it finds that a type of traffic exceeds the
specified upper threshold, it blocks this type of traffic on the port or directly shuts down the port, and
outputs trap/log information according to your configuration.
z When a type of traffic on the port falls back to the specified lower threshold, the system cancels the
blocking of this type of traffic on the port or brings up the port to restore traffic forwarding for the port,
and outputs log/trap information according to your configuration.
Related commands: display storm-constrain, storm-constrain control, storm-constrain enable.

Examples

# Set the upper and lower thresholds of broadcast traffic on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to 100 pps and 10 pps
respectively.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] storm-constrain broadcast 100 10 pps

storm-constrain control

Syntax

storm-constrain control { block | shutdown }

undo storm-constrain control

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

block: Blocks and stops forwarding those types of traffic exceeding the upper thresholds.
shutdown: Shutdowns the port if the broadcast traffic exceeds the upper threshold, and stops receiving
and forwarding all types of traffic on the port.

Description

Use the storm-constrain control command to set the action to be taken when the broadcast traffic on
the port exceeds the upper threshold.

1-31
Use the undo storm-constrain control command to cancel the configured action.
By default, no action is taken.

z If the broadcast-suppression command is configured on a port, you cannot configure the storm
control function on the port, and vice versa.
z You are not recommended to set the upper and lower traffic thresholds to the same value.
z The system can take one of the actions when the broadcast traffic received on a port exceeds the
upper threshold: block and shutdown. The block action blocks only those types of traffic that
exceed the upper thresholds instead of all types of traffic. When a type of traffic is blocked, it is still
counted by the system and contained in the traffic statistics. The shutdown action automatically
shutdowns the port when a type of traffic on the port exceeds the upper threshold. If you want to
bring up the port again, you can execute the undo shutdown command or the undo
storm-constrain broadcast command.

Related commands: display storm-constrain, storm-constrain.

Examples

# Set the control action on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to block.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] storm-constrain control block

storm-constrain enable

Syntax

storm-constrain enable { log | trap }

undo storm-constrain enable

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

log: Enables log information to be output when traffic received on the port exceeds the upper threshold
or falls below the lower threshold.
trap: Enables trap information to be output when traffic received on the port exceeds the upper
threshold or falls below the lower threshold.

Description

Use the storm-constrain enable command to enable log/trap information to be output when traffic
received on the port exceeds the upper threshold or falls below the lower threshold.

1-32
Use the undo storm-constrain enable command to disable log/trap information from being output
when traffic received on the port exceeds the upper threshold or falls below the lower threshold.
By default, log/trap information is output when traffic received on the port exceeds the upper threshold
or falls below the lower threshold.
Related commands: display storm-constrain, storm-constrain.

Examples

# Disable log information from being output when traffic received on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 exceeds the
upper threshold or falls below the lower threshold.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] undo storm-constrain enable log

storm-constrain interval

Syntax

storm-constrain interval interval-value

undo storm-constrain interval

View

System view

Parameters

interval-value: Interval to collect traffic statistics, in the range of 1 to 300 (in seconds).

Description

Use the storm-constrain interval command to set the interval to collect traffic statistics.
Use the undo storm-constrain interval command to restore the default setting.
By default, the interval is 10 seconds.
Related commands: display storm-constrain, storm-constrain.

Examples

# Set the interval to collect traffic statistics to 2 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] storm-constrain interval 2

virtual-cable-test

Syntax

virtual-cable-test

View

Ethernet port view

1-33
Parameters

None

Description

Use the virtual-cable-test command to enable the system to test the cable connected to a specific port
and to display the results. The system can test these attributes of the cable:
z Cable status, including normal, abnormal, abnormal-open, abnormal-short and failure
z Cable length

z If the cable is in normal state, the displayed length value is the total length of the cable.
z If the cable is in any other state, the displayed length value is the length from the port to the faulty
point.
The testing functions that are available on an switch vary with port state as follows:
z For ports that are Down, the cable status testing and cable length testing are available.
z For ports that are Up, the cable status testing, cable length testing, and Pair skew testing are
available.

z Pair impedance mismatch

z Pair skew
z Pair swap
z Pair polarity
z Insertion loss
z Return loss
z Near-end crosstalk
By default, the system does not test the cable connected to the Ethernet port.

z Optical port (including Combo optical port) does not support VCT (virtual-cable-test) function.
z Combo electrical port supports VCT function only when it is in UP condition (using undo shutdown
command), normal Ethernet electrical port always supports this function.
z A hyphen (-) indicates that the corresponding test item is not supported.

Examples

# Enable the system to test the cable connected to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] virtual-cable-test

1-34
Cable status: normal, 6 metres
Pair Impedance mismatch: -
Pair skew: 8 ns
Pair swap: -
Pair polarity: -
Insertion loss: - db
Return loss: - db
Near-end crosstalk: - db

1-35
Table of Contents

1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands··························································································1-1

Link Aggregation Configuration Commands ···························································································1-1
display link-aggregation interface····································································································1-1
display link-aggregation summary···································································································1-2
display link-aggregation verbose·····································································································1-3
display lacp system-id ·····················································································································1-4
lacp enable ······································································································································1-5
lacp port-priority·······························································································································1-5
lacp system-priority··························································································································1-6
link-aggregation group description ··································································································1-6
link-aggregation group mode···········································································································1-7
port link-aggregation group ·············································································································1-8
reset lacp statistics ··························································································································1-9

i
1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands

Link Aggregation Configuration Commands

display link-aggregation interface

Syntax

display link-aggregation interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type

interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type: Port type.

interface-number: Port number.
to: Specifies a port index range, with the two interface-type interface-number argument pairs around it
as the two ends.

Description

Use the display link-aggregation interface command to display the link aggregation details about a
specified port or port range.
Note that as ports in a manual link aggregation groups do not acquire the information about their peers
automatically, so the entries in the information about the peer ports displayed are all 0 instead of the
actual values.

Examples

# Display the link aggregation details on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> display link-aggregation interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1

GigabitEthernet1/0/1:
Selected AggID: 1
Local:
Port-Priority: 32768, Oper key: 2, Flag: 0x45
Remote:
System ID: 0x8000, 0000-0000-0000
Port Number: 0, Port-Priority: 32768 , Oper-key: 0, Flag: 0x38
Received LACP Packets: 0 packet(s), Illegal: 0 packet(s)
Sent LACP Packets: 0 packet(s)

1-1
Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display link-aggregation interface command

Field Description
ID of the aggregation group to which the
Selected AggID
specified port belongs
Local Information about the local end
Port-Priority Port priority
Oper key Operation key
Flag Protocol status flag
Remote Information about the remote end
System ID Remote device ID
Port number Port number
Received LACP Packets: 0 packet(s), Illegal: 0
packet(s) Statistics about received, invalid, and sent LACP
packets
Sent LACP Packets: 0 packet(s)

display link-aggregation summary

Syntax

display link-aggregation summary

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display link-aggregation summary command to display summary information of all
aggregation groups.
Note that as ports in a manual link aggregation groups do not acquire the information about their peers
automatically, so the entries in the information about the peer ports displayed are all 0 instead of the
actual values.

Examples

# Display summary information of all aggregation groups.

<Sysname> display link-aggregation summary

Aggregation Group Type:D -- Dynamic, S -- Static , M -- Manual

Loadsharing Type: Shar -- Loadsharing, NonS -- Non-Loadsharing
Actor ID: 0x8000, 000f-e20f-5104

AL AL Partner ID Select Unselect Share Master

ID Type Ports Ports Type Port

1-2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 S 0x8000,0000-0000-0000 0 1 NonS GigabitEthernet1/0/2
2 M none 0 1 NonS GigabitEthernet1/0/3

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display link-aggregation summary command

Field Description
Aggregation group type: D for dynamic, S for
Aggregation Group Type
static, and M for manual
Load sharing type: Shar for load sharing and
Loadsharing Type
NonS for non-load sharing
Actor ID Local device ID
AL ID Aggregation group ID
Aggregation group type: D (dynamic), S (static),
AL Type
or M (manual)
ID of the remote device, including the system
priority and system MAC address of the remote
device
Partner ID For a device belonging to an dynamic
aggregation group or static aggregation group, if
no LACP packet is received, the partner ID is
displayed as 0x8000, 0000-0000-0000.
Select Ports Number of the selected ports
Unselect Ports Number of the unselected ports
Load sharing type: Shar (load-sharing), or NonS
Share Type
(non-load-sharing)
the smallest port number in an aggregation
Master Port
group

display link-aggregation verbose

Syntax

display link-aggregation verbose [ agg-id ]

View

Any view

Parameters

agg-id: Aggregation group ID, which ranges from 1 to 50 and must be the ID of an existing aggregation
group.

Description

Use the display link-aggregation verbose command to display the details about a specified
aggregation group or all aggregation groups.
Note that as ports in a manual link aggregation groups do not acquire the information about their peers
automatically, so the entries in the information about the peer ports displayed are all 0 instead of the
actual values.

1-3
Examples

# Display the details about aggregation group 1.

<Sysname> display link-aggregation verbose 1
Loadsharing Type: Shar -- Loadsharing, NonS -- Non-Loadsharing
Flags: A -- LACP_Activity, B -- LACP_timeout, C -- Aggregation,
D -- Synchronization, E -- Collecting, F -- Distributing,
G -- Defaulted, H -- Expired

Aggregation ID: 1, AggregationType: Manual, Loadsharing Type: NonS

Aggregation Description:
System ID: 0x8000, 000f-e214-000a
Port Status: S -- Selected, U -- Unselected
Local:
Port Status Priority Key Flag
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/0/2 S 32768 1 {}
GigabitEthernet1/0/3 U 32768 1 {}

Remote:
Actor Partner Priority Key SystemID Flag
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/0/2 0 0 0 0x0000,0000-0000-0000 {}
GigabitEthernet1/0/3 0 0 0 0x0000,0000-0000-0000 {}

Table 1-3 Description on the fields of the display link-aggregation verbose command

Field Description
Loadsharing type, including Loadsharing and
Loadsharing Type
Non-Loadsharing
Flags Flag types of LACP
Aggregation ID Aggregation group ID
Aggregation Description Aggregation group description string
AggregationType Aggregation group type
System ID Device ID
Port Status Port status, including selected and unselected

display lacp system-id

Syntax

display lacp system-id

View

Any view

1-4
Parameters

None

Description

Use the display lacp system-id command to display the device ID of the local system, including the
system priority and the MAC address.

Examples

# Display the device ID of the local system.

<Sysname> display lacp system-id
Actor System ID: 0x8000, 000f-e20f-0100

The value of the Actor System ID field is the device ID.

lacp enable

Syntax

lacp enable
undo lacp enable

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the lacp enable command to enable LACP on the current port.
Use the undo lacp enable command to disable LACP.
By default, LACP is disabled on a port.

Examples

# Enable the LACP protocol on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] lacp enable

lacp port-priority

Syntax

lacp port-priority port-priority

undo lacp port-priority

View

Ethernet port view

1-5
Parameters

port-priority: Port priority, ranging from 0 to 65,535.

Description

Use the lacp port-priority command to set the priority of the current port.
Use the undo lacp port-priority command to restore the default port priority.
By default, the port priority is 32,768.
You can use the display link-aggregation verbose command or the display link-aggregation
interface command to check the configuration result.

Examples

# Set the priority of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to 64.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] lacp port-priority 64

lacp system-priority

Syntax

lacp system-priority system-priority

undo lacp system-priority

View

System view

Parameters

system-priority: System priority, ranging from 0 to 65,535.

Description

Use the lacp system-priority command to set the system priority.

Use the undo lacp system-priority command to restore the default system priority.
By default, the system priority is 32,768.

Examples

# Set the system priority to 64.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] lacp system-priority 64

link-aggregation group description

Syntax

link-aggregation group agg-id description agg-name

1-6
undo link-aggregation group agg-id description

View

System view

Parameters

agg-id: Aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 50.

agg-name: Aggregation group name, a string of 1 to 32 characters.

Description

Use the link-aggregation group description command to set a description for an aggregation group.
Use the undo link-aggregation group description command to remove the description of an
aggregation group.

If you have saved the current configuration with the save command, after system reboot, the
configuration concerning manual and static aggregation groups and their descriptions still exists, but
that of the dynamic aggregation groups and their descriptions gets lost.

You can use the display link-aggregation verbose command to check the configuration result.

Examples

# Set the description abc for aggregation group 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] link-aggregation group 1 description abc

link-aggregation group mode

Syntax

link-aggregation group agg-id mode { manual | static }

undo link-aggregation group agg-id

View

System view

Parameters

agg-id: Aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 50.

manual: Creates a manual aggregation group.
static: Creates a static aggregation group.

1-7
Description

Use the link-aggregation group mode command to create a manual or static aggregation group.
Use the undo link-aggregation group command to remove the specified aggregation group.
Related commands: display link-aggregation summary.

Examples

# Create manual aggregation group 22

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] link-aggregation group 22 mode manual

port link-aggregation group

Syntax

port link-aggregation group agg-id

undo port link-aggregation group

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

agg-id: Aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 50.

Description

Use the port link-aggregation group command to add the current Ethernet port to a manual or static
aggregation group.
Use the undo port link-aggregation group command to remove the current Ethernet port from the
aggregation group.
Related commands: display link-aggregation verbose.

Examples

# Add GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to aggregation group 22.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port link-aggregation group 22

1-8
reset lacp statistics

Syntax

reset lacp statistics [ interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] ]

View

User view

Parameters

interface-type: Port type

interface-number: Port number
to: Specifies a port index range, with the two interface-type interface-number argument pairs around it
as the two ends.

Description

Use the reset lacp statistics command to clear LACP statistics on specified port(s), or on all ports if no
port is specified.
Related commands: display link-aggregation interface.

Examples

# Clear LACP statistics on all Ethernet ports.

<Sysname> reset lacp statistics

1-9
Table of Contents

1 Port Isolation Configuration Commands ································································································1-1

Port Isolation Configuration Commands ·································································································1-1
display isolate port···························································································································1-1
port isolate ·······································································································································1-1

i
1 Port Isolation Configuration Commands

Port Isolation Configuration Commands

display isolate port

Syntax

display isolate port

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display isolate port command to display the Ethernet ports assigned to the isolation group.

Examples

# Display the Ethernet ports added to the isolation group.

<Sysname> display isolate port
Isolated port(s) on UNIT 1:
GigabitEthernet1/0/2, GigabitEthernet1/0/3, GigabitEthernet1/0/4

The information above shows that GigabitEthernet1/0/2, GigabitEthernet1/0/3, and

GigabitEthernet1/04 are in the isolation group. Neither Layer-2 nor Layer-3 packets can be exchanged
between these ports.

port isolate

Syntax

port isolate
undo port isolate

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the port isolate command to assign the Ethernet port to the isolation group.
Use the undo port isolate command to remove the Ethernet port from the isolation group.

1-1
z Assigning or removing an aggregation member port to or from the isolation group can cause the
other ports in the aggregation group join or leave the isolation group.
z For ports that belong to an aggregation group and an isolation group simultaneously, removing a
port from the aggregation group has no effect on the other ports. That is, the rest ports remain in
the aggregation group and the isolation group.
z Ports that belong to an aggregation group and the isolation group simultaneously are still isolated
after they are removed from the aggregation group (in system view).
z Assigning an isolated port to an aggregation group causes all the ports in the aggregation group on
the local unit to join the isolation group.

By default, the isolation group contains no port.

Examples

# Assign GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 and GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to the isolation group.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port isolate
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port isolate

After the configuration, packets cannot be exchanged between GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 and
GigabitEthernet 1/0/2.
# Remove GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 from the isolation group.
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] undo port isolate

1-2
Table of Contents

1 Port Security Commands··························································································································1-1

Port Security Commands ························································································································1-1
display mac-address security ··········································································································1-1
display port-security·························································································································1-2
mac-address security ······················································································································1-5
port-security authorization ignore ····································································································1-6
port-security enable ·························································································································1-7
port-security guest-vlan ···················································································································1-8
port-security intrusion-mode ············································································································1-9
port-security max-mac-count·········································································································1-11
port-security ntk-mode···················································································································1-12
port-security oui ·····························································································································1-13
port-security port-mode ·················································································································1-14
port-security timer disableport ·······································································································1-17
port-security timer guest-vlan-reauth·····························································································1-18
port-security trap····························································································································1-19

2 Port Binding Commands ··························································································································2-1

Port Binding Commands ·························································································································2-1
am user-bind····································································································································2-1
display am user-bind ·······················································································································2-2

i
1 Port Security Commands

Port Security Commands

display mac-address security

Syntax

display mac-address security [ interface interface-type interface-number ] [ vlan vlan-id ] [ count ]

View

Any view

Parameters

Interface interface-type interface-number: Specify a port by its type and number, of which the security
MAC address information is to be displayed.
vlan vlan-id: Specify a VLAN by its ID, of which the security MAC address information is to be displayed.
The value range for the vlan-id argument is 1 to 4094.
count: Displays the number of matching security MAC addresses.

Description

Use the display mac-address security command to display security MAC address entries.
If no argument is specified, the command displays information about all security MAC address entries.
For each security MAC address entry, the output of the command displays the MAC address, the VLAN
that the MAC address belongs to, state of the MAC address (which is always security), port associated
with the MAC address, and the remaining lifetime of the entry.
By checking the output of this command, you can verify the current configuration.

Examples

# Display information about all security MAC address entries.

<Sysname> display mac-address security
MAC ADDR VLAN ID STATE PORT INDEX AGING TIME(s)
0000-0000-0001 1 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/20 NOAGED
0000-0000-0002 1 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/20 NOAGED
0000-0000-0003 1 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/20 NOAGED
0000-0000-0004 1 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/20 NOAGED
0000-0000-0001 2 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/22 NOAGED
0000-0000-0007 2 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/22 NOAGED

--- 6 mac address(es) found ---

# Display the security MAC address entries for port GigabitEthernet 1/0/20.
<Sysname> display mac-address security interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/20

1-1
MAC ADDR VLAN ID STATE PORT INDEX AGING TIME(s)
0000-0000-0001 1 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/20 NOAGED
0000-0000-0002 1 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/20 NOAGED
0000-0000-0003 1 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/20 NOAGED
0000-0000-0004 1 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/20 NOAGED

--- 4 mac address(es) found on port GigabitEthernet1/0/20 ---

# Display the security MAC address entries for VLAN 1.

<Sysname> display mac-address security vlan 1
MAC ADDR VLAN ID STATE PORT INDEX AGING TIME(s)
0000-0000-0001 1 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/20 NOAGED
0000-0000-0002 1 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/20 NOAGED
0000-0000-0003 1 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/20 NOAGED
0000-0000-0004 1 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/20 NOAGED

--- 4 mac address(es) found in vlan 1 ---

# Display the total number of security MAC address entries.

<Sysname> display mac-address security count
6 mac address(es) found

# Display the number of security MAC address entries for VLAN 1.

<Sysname> display mac-address security vlan 1 count
4 mac address(es) found in vlan 1

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display mac-address security command

Field Description
MAC ADDR Security MAC address

VLAN ID VLAN that the MAC address belongs to

MAC address type, which is always security for a security

STATE
MAC address
PORT INDEX Port associated with the MAC address

AGING TIME(s) Remaining lifetime of the MAC address entry

mac address(es) found Number of matching security MAC addresses

display port-security

Syntax

display port-security [ interface interface-list ]

View

Any view

1-2
Parameters

interface interface-list: Specify a list of Ethernet ports of which the port security configurations are to be
displayed. For the interface-list argument, you can specify individual ports and port ranges. An
individual port takes the form of interface-type interface-number and a port range takes the form of
interface-type interface-number1 to interface-type interface-number2, with interface-number2 taking a
value greater than interface-number1. The total number of individual ports and port ranges defined in
the list must not exceed 10.

Description

Use the display port-security command to display port security configurations.

If no interface is specified, the command displays the port security configurations of all Ethernet ports.
The output of the command includes the global configurations (such as whether port security is enabled
on the switch and whether the sending of specified Trap messages is enabled) and port configurations
(such as the security mode and the port security features).
By checking the output of this command, you can verify the current configuration.

Examples

# Display the global port security configurations and those of all ports.
<Sysname> display port-security
Equipment port-security is enabled
AddressLearn trap is Enabled
Intrusion trap is Enabled
Dot1x logon trap is Enabled
Dot1x logoff trap is Enabled
Dot1x logfailure trap is Enabled
RALM logon trap is Enabled
RALM logoff trap is Enabled
RALM logfailure trap is Enabled
Disableport Timeout: 20 s
OUI value:
Index is 5, OUI value is 000100
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is link-up
Port mode is AutoLearn
NeedtoKnow mode is needtoknowonly
Intrusion mode is BlockMacaddress
Max mac-address num is 4
Stored mac-address num is 0
Authorization is ignore

(The rest of the information is omitted.)

# Display the port security configurations of ports GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/3.
<Sysname> display port-security interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/3
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is link-up
Port mode is AutoLearn
NeedtoKnow mode is needtoknowonly
Intrusion mode is BlockMacaddress

1-3
Max mac-address num is 4
Stored mac-address num is 0
Authorization is ignore
GigabitEthernet1/0/2 is link-down
Port mode is AutoLearn
NeedtoKnow mode is disabled
Intrusion mode is no action
Max mac-address num is not configured
Stored mac-address num is 0
Authorization is ignore
GigabitEthernet1/0/3 is link-down
Port mode is AutoLearn
NeedtoKnow mode is disabled
Intrusion mode is BlockMacaddress
Max mac-address num is not configured
Stored mac-address num is 0
Authorization is ignore

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display port-security command

Field Description
Equipment port security is enabled Port security is enabled on the switch.
The sending of address-learning trap messages
AddressLearn trap is Enabled
is enabled.
The sending of intrusion-detection trap
Intrusion trap is Enabled
messages is enabled.
The sending of 802.1x user authentication
Dot1x logon trap is Enabled
success trap messages is enabled.
The sending of 802.1x user logoff trap messages
Dot1x logoff trap is Enabled
is enabled.
The sending of 802.1x user authentication failure
Dot1x logfailure trap is Enabled
trap messages is enabled.
The sending of MAC-based authentication
RALM logon trap is Enabled
success trap messages is enabled.
The sending of logoff trap messages for
RALM logoff trap is Enabled
MAC-based authenticated users is enabled.
The sending of MAC-based authentication
RALM logfailure trap is Enabled
failure trap messages is enabled.
Disableport Timeout: 20 s The temporary port-disabling time is 20 seconds.
OUI value The next line displays OUI value.

Index OUI index

The link status of port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 is
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is link-up
up.
Port mode is AutoLearn The security mode of the port is autolearn.
NeedtoKnow mode is needtoknowonly The NTK (Need To Know) mode is ntkonly.
The intrusion detection mode is
Intrusion mode is BlockMacaddress
BlockMacaddress.

1-4
Field Description
The maximum number of MAC addresses
Max mac-address num is 4
allowed on the port is 4.
Stored mac-address num is 0 No MAC address is stored.
Authorization information delivered by the
Authorization is ignore Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS) server will not be applied to the port.

mac-address security

Syntax

In system view:
mac-address security mac-address interface interface-type interface-number vlan vlan-id
undo mac-address security [ [ mac-address [ interface interface-type interface-number ] ] vlan
vlan-id ]
In Ethernet port view:
mac-address security mac-address vlan vlan-id
undo mac-address security [ [ mac-address ] vlan vlan-id ]

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

mac-address: Security MAC address, in the H-H-H format.

interface interface-type interface-number: Specify the port on which the security MAC address is to be
added. The interface-type interface-number arguments indicate the port type and port number.
vlan vlan-id: Specify the VLAN to which the MAC address belongs. The vlan-id argument specifies a
VLAN ID in the range 1 to 4094.

Description

Use the mac-address security command to create a security MAC address entry.
Use the undo mac-address security command to remove a security MAC address.
By default, no security MAC address entry is configured.

z The mac-address security command can be configured successfully only when port security is
enabled and the security mode is autolearn.
z To create a security MAC address entry successfully, you must make sure that the specified VLAN
is carried on the specified port.

1-5
Examples

# Enable port security; configure the port security mode of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 as autolearn and
create a security MAC address entry for 0001-0001-0001, setting the associated port to GigabitEthernet
1/0/1 and assigning the MAC address to VLAN 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] port-security enable
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port-security max-mac-count 100
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port-security port-mode autolearn
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] mac-address security 0001-0001-0001 vlan 1

# Use the display mac-address interface command to verify the configuration result.
[Sysname]display mac-address interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
MAC ADDR VLAN ID STATE PORT INDEX AGING TIME(s)
0001-0001-0001 1 Security GigabitEthernet1/0/1 NOAGED

--- 1 mac address(es) found on port GigabitEthernet1/0/1 ---

port-security authorization ignore

Syntax

port-security authorization ignore

undo port-security authorization ignore

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the port-security authorization ignore command to configure the port to ignore the authorization
information delivered by the RADIUS server.
Use the undo port-security authorization ignore command to restore the default configuration.
By default, the port uses (does not ignore) the authorization information delivered by the RADIUS
server.
You can use the display port-security command to check whether the port will use the authorization
information delivered by the RADIUS server.

1-6
After a RADIUS user passes authentication, the RADIUS server authorizes the attributes configured for
the user account such as the dynamic VLAN configuration. For more information, refer to AAA
Command.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to ignore the authorization information delivered by the RADIUS
server.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port-security authorization ignore

port-security enable

Syntax

port-security enable
undo port-security enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the port-security enable command to enable port security.

Use the undo port-security enable command to disable port security.
By default, port security is disabled.

Enabling port security resets the following configurations on the ports to the defaults (as shown in
parentheses below):
z 802.1x (disabled), port access control method (macbased), and port access control mode (auto)
z MAC authentication (disabled)
In addition, you cannot perform the above-mentioned configurations manually because these
configurations change with the port security mode automatically.

Related commands: display port-security.

1-7
Examples

# Enable port security.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] port-security enable
Notice: The port-control of 802.1x will be restricted to auto when port-security is enabled.
Please wait... Done.

port-security guest-vlan

Syntax

port-security guest-vlan vlan-id

undo port-security guest-vlan

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

vlan-id: Specifies a guest VLAN by its VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4094. The VLAN must already exist.

Description

Use the port-security guest-vlan command to specify an existing VLAN as the guest VLAN of a port.
Use the undo port-security guest-vlan command to remove the guest VLAN configuration.
By default, no guest VLAN is specified for a port.
Note that:
z Only an existing VLAN can be specified as a guest VLAN. Make sure the guest VLAN of the port
contain the resources that the users need.
z If one user of the port has passed or is undergoing authentication, you cannot specify a guest
VLAN for it.
z When a user using a port with a guest VLAN specified fail the authentication, the port is added to
the guest VLAN and users of the port can access only the resources in the guest VLAN.
z Multiple users may connect to one port in the macAddressOrUserLoginSecure mode for
authentication; however, after a guest VLAN is specified, a maximum of one user can pass the
security authentication. In this case, the authentication client software of the other 802.1x users
displays messages about the failure; MAC address authentication does not have any client
software and therefore no such messages will be displayed.
z To change the security mode from macAddressOrUserLoginSecure mode of a port that is
assigned to a guest VLAN, execute the undo port-security guest-vlan command first to remove
the guest VLAN configuration.
z For a port configured with both the port-security guest-vlan and port-security intrusion-mode
disableport commands, when authentication of a user fails, only the intrusion detection feature is
triggered. The port is not added to the specified guest VLAN.
z It is not recommended to configure the port-security guest-vlan and port-security
intrusion-mode blockmac commands simultaneously for a port. Because when the

1-8
authentication of a user fails, the blocking MAC address feature will be triggered and packets of the
user will be dropped, making the user unable to access the guest VLAN.

Examples

# Set the security mode of port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to macAddressOrUserLoginSecure, and

specify VLAN 100 as the guest VLAN of the port.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port-security port-mode userlogin-secure-or-mac
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port-security guest-vlan 100

port-security intrusion-mode

Syntax

port-security intrusion-mode { blockmac | disableport | disableport-temporarily }

undo port-security intrusion-mode

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

blockmac: Adds the source MAC addresses of illegal packets to the blocked MAC address list. As a
result, the packets sourced from the blocked MAC addresses will be filtered out. A blocked MAC
address will be unblocked three minutes (not user configurable) after the block action.
disableport: Disables a port permanently once an illegal frame or event is detected on it.
disableport-temporarily: Disables a port for a specified period of time after an illegal frame or event is
detected on it. You can set the period with the port-security timer disableport command.

Description

Use the port-security intrusion-mode command to set intrusion protection.

Use the undo port-security intrusion-mode command to disable intrusion protection.
By default, intrusion protection is not configured.

1-9
By checking the source MAC addresses in inbound data frames or the username and password in
802.1x authentication requests on a port, intrusion protection detects illegal packets (packets with
illegal MAC address) or events and takes a pre-set action accordingly. The actions you can set include:
disconnecting the port temporarily/permanently and blocking packets with invalid MAC addresses.
The following cases can trigger intrusion protection on a port:
z A packet with unknown source MAC address is received on the port while MAC address learning is
disabled on the port.
z A packet with unknown source MAC address is received on the port while the amount of security
MAC addresses on the port has reached the preset maximum number.
z The user fails the 802.1x or MAC address authentication.

After executing the port-security intrusion-mode blockmac command, you can only use the display
port-security command to view blocked MAC addresses.
Related commands: display port-security, port-security timer disableport.

Examples

# Configure the intrusion protection mode on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 as blockmac.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port-security intrusion-mode blockmac

# Display information about blocked MAC addresses after intrusion protection is triggered.
<Sysname> display port-security
Equipment port-security is enabled
AddressLearn trap is Enabled
Intrusion trap is Enabled
Dot1x logon trap is Enabled
Dot1x logoff trap is Enabled
Dot1x logfailure trap is Enabled
RALM logon trap is Enabled
RALM logoff trap is Enabled
RALM logfailure trap is Enabled
Disableport Timeout: 20 s
OUI value:
Index is 5, OUI value is 000100
Blocked Mac info:
MAC ADDR From Port Vlan
--- On unit 1, 2 blocked mac address(es) found. ---
0000-0000-0003 GigabitEthernet1/0/1 1
0000-0000-0004 GigabitEthernet1/0/1 1
--- 2 blocked mac address(es) found. ---
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is link-up
Port mode is Secure

1-10
NeedtoKnow mode is disabled
Intrusion mode is BlockMacaddress
Max mac-address num is 2
Stored mac-address num is 2
Authorization is permit

For description on the output information, refer to Table 1-2.

# Configure the intrusion protection mode on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 as disableport-temporarily. As a
result, the port will be disconnected when intrusion protection is triggered and then re-enabled 30
seconds later.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] port-security timer disableport 30
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port-security intrusion-mode disableport-temporarily

# Configure the intrusion protection mode on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 as disableport. As a result, when
intrusion protection is triggered, the port will be disconnected permanently.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port-security intrusion-mode disableport

You can bring up a port that has been permanently disabled by running the undo shutdown command
or disabling port security on the port.

port-security max-mac-count

Syntax

port-security max-mac-count count-value

undo port-security max-mac-count

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

count-value: Maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on the port, in the range of 1 to 1024.

Description

Use the port-security max-mac-count command to set the maximum number of MAC addresses
allowed on the port.
Use the undo port-security max-mac-count command to cancel this limit.

1-11
By default, there is no limit on the number of MAC addresses allowed on the port.

By configuring the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port, you can:
z Limit the number of users accessing the network through the port.
z Limit the number of security MAC addresses that can be added on the port.
When the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port is reached, the port will not allow
more users to access the network through this port.

z The port-security max-mac-count command is irrelevant to the maximum number of MAC

addresses that can be learned on a port configured in MAC address management.
z When there are online users on a port, you cannot perform the port-security max-mac-count
command on the port.

Examples

# Set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on the port to 100.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] port-security enable
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port-security max-mac-count 100

port-security ntk-mode

Syntax

port-security ntk-mode { ntkonly | ntk-withbroadcasts | ntk-withmulticasts }

undo port-security ntk-mode

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

ntkonly: Allows the port to transmit only unicast packets with successfully-authenticated destination
MAC addresses.
ntk-withbroadcasts: Allows the port to transmit broadcast packets and unicast packets with
successfully-authenticated destination MAC addresses.
ntk-withmulticasts: Allows the port to transmit multicast packets, broadcast packets and unicast
packets with successfully-authenticated destination MAC addresses.

1-12
Description

Use the port-security ntk-mode command to configure the NTK feature on the port.
Use the undo port-security ntk-mode command to restore the default setting.
Be default, NTK is disabled on a port, namely all frames are allowed to be sent.

z By checking the destination MAC addresses of the data frames to be sent from a port, the NTK
feature ensures that only successfully authenticated devices can obtain data frames from the port,
thus preventing illegal devices from intercepting network data.
z Currently, the Switch 4200G Family do not support the ntkonly NTK feature.

Examples

# Set the NTK feature to ntk-withbroadcasts on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] port-security enable
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port-security ntk-mode ntk-withbroadcasts

port-security oui

Syntax

port-security oui OUI-value index index-value

undo port-security oui index index-value

View

System view

Parameters

OUI-value: OUI value. You can input a 48-bit MAC address in the form of H-H-H for this argument and
the system will take the first 24 bits as the OUI value and ignore the rest.
index-value: OUI index, ranging from 1 to 16.

The organizationally unique identifiers (OUIs) are assigned by the IEEE to different vendors. Each OUI
uniquely identifies an equipment vendor in the world and is the higher 24 bits of a MAC address.

1-13
Description

Use the port-security oui command to set an OUI value for authentication.
Use the undo port-security oui command to cancel the OUI value setting.
By default, no OUI value is set for authentication.

z The OUI value set by this command takes effect only when the security mode of the port is set to
userLoginWithOUI by the port-security port-mode command.
z The OUI value set by this command cannot be a multicast MAC address.

Related commands: port-security port-mode.

Examples

# Configure an OUI value of 00ef-ec00-0000, setting the OUI index to 5.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] port-security oui 00ef-ec00-0000 index 5

port-security port-mode

Syntax

port-security port-mode { autolearn | mac-and-userlogin-secure | mac-and-userlogin-secure-ext

| mac-authentication | mac-else-userlogin-secure | mac-else-userlogin-secure-ext | secure |
userlogin | userlogin-secure | userlogin-secure-ext | userlogin-secure-or-mac |
userlogin-secure-or-mac-ext | userlogin-withoui }
undo port-security port-mode

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

Table 1-3 shows the description on the security mode keywords.

1-14
Table 1-3 Keyword description

Keyword Security mode Description

In this mode, MAC addresses learned on the
port become security MAC addresses.
When the number of security MAC addresses
exceeds the maximum number of MAC
addresses configured by the port-security
autolearn autolearn max-mac-count command, the port security
mode changes to secure automatically.
After that, no more security MAC addresses
can be added to the port and only the packets
whose source MAC addresses are the security
MAC addresses can pass through the port.
In this mode, users trying to assess the
network through the port must first pass MAC
mac-and-userlogin-sec macAddressAndUser address authentication and then 802.1x
ure LoginSecure authentication.
In this mode, only one user can access the
network through the port at a time.
This mode is similar to the
macAddressAndUserLoginSecure mode,
mac-and-userlogin-sec macAddressAndUser
except that in this mode, more than one user
ure-ext LoginSecureExt
can access the network through the port in this
mode.

macAddressWithRad In this mode, MAC address authentication is

mac-authentication
ius applied on users trying to access the network.

In this mode, a port performs MAC

authentication or 802.1x authentication of an
access user. If either authentication succeeds,
the user is authenticated.
mac-else-userlogin-se macAddressElseUse
cure rLoginSecure In this mode, only one 802.1x-authenticated
user can access the network through the port.
But at the same time, there can be more than
one MAC-address-authenticated user on the
port.
This mode is similar to the
macAddressElseUserLoginSecure mode,
mac-else-userlogin-se macAddressElseUse
except that in this mode, there can be more
cure-ext rLoginSecureExt
than one 802.1x-authenticated user on the
port.
In this mode, MAC address learning is
disabled on the current port. Only packets
secure secure whose source MAC addresses are security
MAC addresses, already configured static
MAC addresses can pass through the port.
In this mode, 802.1x authentication is applied
userlogin userlogin on users trying to access the network through
the current port.

1-15
Keyword Security mode Description
In this mode, MAC-based 802.1x
authentication is applied on users trying to
access the network through the port. The port
will be enabled when the authentication
succeeds and allow packets from
authenticated users to pass through.
userlogin-secure userLoginSecure In this mode, only one 802.1x-authenticated
user can access the network through the port.
When the security mode of the port changes
from noRestriction to this mode, the old
dynamic MAC address entries and
authenticated MAC address entries kept on
the port are deleted automatically.
This mode is similar to the userLoginSecure
mode, except that in this mode, there can be
userlogin-secure-ext userLoginSecureExt
more than one 802.1x-authenticated user on
the port.
MAC address authentication and 802.1x
authentication can coexist on a port, with
802.1x authentication having higher priority.
802.1x authentication can be applied on users
who have already passed MAC address
authentication.
userlogin-secure-or-m macAddressOrUserL
ac oginSecure However, users who have already passed
802.1x authentication do not need to go
through MAC address authentication.
In this mode, only one 802.1x-authenticated
user can access the network through the port.
However, there can be more than one
MAC-address-authenticated user on the port.
This mode is similar to the
macAddressOrUserLoginSecure mode,
userlogin-secure-or-m macAddressOrUserL
except that in this mode, there can be more
ac-ext oginSecureExt
than one 802.1x-authenticated user on the
port.
Similar to the userLoginSecure mode, in this
mode, there can be only one
802.1x-authenticated user on the port.
However, the port also allows packets with the
OUI address to pass through.
userlogin-withoui userLoginWithOUI
When the security mode of the port changes
from noRestriction to this mode, the old
dynamic MAC address entries and
authenticated MAC address entries kept on
the port are deleted automatically.

Description

Use the port-security port-mode command to set the security mode of the port.
Use the undo port-security port-mode command to restore the default mode.
By default, the port is in the noRestriction mode, namely access to the port is not restricted.

1-16
z Before setting the security mode to autolearn, you need to use the port-security max-mac-count
command to configure the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on the port.
z When a port operates in the autolearn mode, you cannot change the maximum number of MAC
addresses allowed on the port.
z After setting the security mode to autolearn, you cannot configure static or blackhole MAC
addresses on the port.
z When the port security mode is not noRestriction, you need to use the undo port-security
port-mode command to change it back to noRestriction before you change the port security
mode to other modes.

On a port configured with a security mode, you cannot do the following:

z Configure the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned.
z Configure the port as a reflector port for port mirroring.
z Configure link aggregation.
Related commands: display port-security.

Examples

# Set the security mode of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 on the switch to userLogin.

port-security timer disableport

Syntax

port-security timer disableport timer

undo port-security timer disableport

View

System view

Parameters

timer: This argument ranges from 20 to 300, in seconds.

Description

Use the port-security timer disableport command to set the time during which the system temporarily
disables a port.
Use undo port-security timer disableport command restore the default time.
By default, the system disables a port for 20 seconds.

1-17
The port-security timer disableport command is used in conjunction with the port-security
intrusion-mode disableport-temporarily command to set the length of time during which the port
remains disabled.

Related commands: port-security intrusion-mode.

Examples

# Set the intrusion protection mode on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to disableport-temporarily. It is required

that when intrusion protection is triggered, the port be shut down temporarily and then go up 30 seconds
later.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] port-security timer disableport 30
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port-security intrusion-mode disableport-temporarily

port-security timer guest-vlan-reauth

Syntax

port-security timer guest-vlan-reauth interval

undo port-security timer guest-vlan-reauth

View

System view

Parameters

interval: Time period in the range of 1 to 3600, in seconds.

Description

Use the port-security timer guest-vlan-reauth command to configure the interval at which the switch
triggers MAC address authentication after a port is added to its guest VLAN.
Use the undo port-security timer guest-vlan-reauth command to restore the default.
By default, the switch triggers MAC address authentication at intervals of 30 seconds.
At a certain interval, the switch uses the first MAC address learned in the guest VLAN to trigger MAC
address authentication. If the authentication succeeds, the port leaves the guest VLAN.

Examples

# Configure the switch to trigger MAC address authentication at intervals of 60 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] port-security timer guest-vlan-reauth 60

1-18
port-security trap

Syntax

port-security trap { addresslearned | dot1xlogfailure | dot1xlogoff | dot1xlogon | intrusion |

ralmlogfailure | ralmlogoff | ralmlogon }
undo port-security trap { addresslearned | dot1xlogfailure | dot1xlogoff | dot1xlogon | intrusion |
ralmlogfailure | ralmlogoff | ralmlogon }

View

System view

Parameters

addresslearned: Enables/disables sending traps for MAC addresses learning events.

dot1xlogfailure: Enables/disables sending traps for 802.1x authentication failures.
dot1xlogoff: Enables/disables sending traps for 802.1x-authenticated user logoff events.
dot1xlogon: Enables/disables sending traps for 802.1x-authenticated user logon events.
intrusion: Enables/disables sending traps for detections of intrusion packets.
ralmlogfailure: Enables/disables sending traps for MAC authentication failures.
ralmlogoff: Enables/disables sending traps for MAC-authenticated user logoff events.
ralmlogon: Enables/disables sending traps for MAC-authenticated user logon events.

RADIUS authenticated login using MAC-address (RALM) refers to MAC-based RADIUS authentication.

Description

Use the port-security trap command to enable the sending of specified type(s) of trap messages.
Use the undo port-security trap command to disable the sending of specified type(s) of trap
messages.
By default, the system disables the sending of any types of trap messages.

This command is based on the device tracking feature, which enables the switch to send trap messages
when special data packets (generated by illegal intrusion, abnormal user logon/logoff, or other special
activities) are passing through a port, so as to help the network administrator to monitor special
activities.

1-19
When you use the display port-security command to display global information, the system will
display which types of trap messages are allowed to send.
Related commands: display port-security.

Examples

# Allow the sending of intrusion packet-detected trap messages.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] port-security trap intrusion

# Use the display port-security command to display the related configuration information.
<Sysname> display port-security
Equipment port-security is enabled
Intrusion trap is Enabled
Disableport Timeout: 20 s
OUI value:
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is link-down
Port mode is AutoLearn
NeedtoKnow mode is needtoknowonly
Intrusion mode is disableportTemporarily
Max mac-address num is 4
Stored mac-address num is 0
Authorization is ignore

The rest of the information is omitted, if any.

For description of the output information, refer to Table 1-2.

1-20
2 Port Binding Commands

Port Binding Commands

am user-bind

Syntax

In system view:
am user-bind mac-addr mac-address ip-addr ip-address interface interface-type interface-number
undo am user-bind mac-addr mac-address ip-addr ip-address interface interface-type
interface-number
In Ethernet port view:
am user-bind mac-addr mac-address ip-addr ip-address
undo am user-bind mac-addr mac-address ip-addr ip-address

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

interface interface-type interface-number: Specify the port to be bound. The interface-type

interface-number arguments specify the port type and port number.
ip-addr ip-address: Specify the IP address to be bound.
mac-addr mac-address: Specify the MAC address to be bound. The mac-address argument is in the
form of H-H-H.

Description

Use the am user-bind command to bind the MAC address and IP address of a user to a specified port.
Use the undo am user-bind command to cancel the binding.
After the binding, the switch forwards only the packets from the bound MAC address and IP address
when received on the port.
By default, no user MAC address or IP address is bound to a port.

z An IP address can be bound with only one port at a time.

z A MAC address can be bound with only one port at a time.

2-1
Examples

# In system view, bind the MAC address 000f-e200-5101 and IP address 10.153.1.1 (supposing they
are MAC and IP addresses of a legal user) to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] am user-bind mac-addr 000f-e200-5101 ip-addr 10.153.1.1 interface
GigabitEthernet1/0/1

# In Ethernet port view, bind the MAC address 000f-e200-5102 and IP address 10.153.1.2 (supposing
they are MAC and IP addresses of a legal user) to GigabitEthernet 1/0/2.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] am user-bind mac-addr 000f-e200-5102 ip-addr 10.153.1.2

display am user-bind

Syntax

display am user-bind [ interface interface-type interface-number | ip-addr ip-address | mac-addr

mac-address ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface interface-type interface-number: Specify the port to be bound. The interface-type

interface-number arguments indicate the port type and port number.
ip-addr ip-address: Specify the IP address to be bound.
mac-addr mac-address: Specify the MAC address to be bound. The mac-address argument is in the
form of H-H-H.

Description

Use the display am user-bind command to display port binding information.

If no keyword is specified, this command displays all port bindings.
Related commands: am user-bind.

Examples

# Display all port bindings.

<Sysname> display am user-bind
Following User address bind have been configured:
Mac IP Port
000f-e200-5101 10.153.1.1 GigabitEthernet1/0/1
000f-e200-5102 10.153.1.2 GigabitEthernet1/0/2
Unit 1:Total 2 found, 2 listed.

Total: 2 found.

2-2
The above output displays that two port binding settings exist on unit 1:
z MAC address 000f-e200-5101 and IP address 10.153.1.1 are bound to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
z MAC address 000f-e200-5102 and IP address 10.153.1.2 are bound to GigabitEthernet 1/0/2.

2-3
Table of Contents

1 DLDP Configuration Commands··············································································································1-1

DLDP Configuration Commands·············································································································1-1
display dldp······································································································································1-1
dldp ··················································································································································1-2
dldp authentication-mode ················································································································1-3
dldp interval ·····································································································································1-4
dldp reset·········································································································································1-5
dldp unidirectional-shutdown···········································································································1-5
dldp work-mode ·······························································································································1-6
dldp delaydown-timer ······················································································································1-7

i
1 DLDP Configuration Commands

DLDP Configuration Commands

display dldp

Syntax

display dldp { unit-id | interface-type interface-number }

View

Any view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit number of a device, only can be set as 1 for switch 4200G.
interface-type: Port type.
interface-number: Port number.

Description

Use the display dldp command to display the DLDP configuration of a unit or a port.

Examples

# Display information about all DLDP-enabled ports on unit 1.

<Sysname> display dldp 1
dldp interval 10
dldp work-mode enhance
dldp authentication-mode none
dldp unidirectional-shutdown manual
dldp delaydown-timer 1

The port number of unit 1 with DLDP is 1.

interface GigabitEthernet1/0/50
dldp port state : advertisement
dldp link state : up
The neighbor number of the port is 1.
neighbor mac address : 000f-e20f-7206
neighbor port index : 98
neighbor state : two way
neighbor aged time : 24

1-1
Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display dldp command

Field Description
Interval for sending DLDP advertisement packets (in
dldp interval
seconds)
dldp work-mode DLDP work mode (enhance or normal)
dldp authentication-mode DLDP authentication mode (none, simple, or md5)
password Password for DLDP authentication
DLDP action to be performed on detecting a
dldp unidirectional-shutdown
unidirectional link (auto or manual)
dldp delaydown-timer Setting of the DelayDown timer
The port number of unit 1 with DLDP Number of the DLDP-enabled ports on unit 1
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/50 Port type and port number
DLDP state on a port (initial, inactive, active,
dldp port state
advertisement, probe, disable, or delaydown)
dldp link state Port state (up or down)
The neighbor number of the port Number of the neighbor ports
neighbor mac address MAC address of a neighbor port

neighbor port index Neighbor port index

neighbor state Neighbor state (unknown, one way, or two way)
neighbor aged time Neighbor aging time

dldp

Syntax

dldp { enable | disable }

View

System view/Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

In system view:
Use the dldp enable command to enable DLDP on all optical ports of the switch.
Use the dldp disable command to disable DLDP on all optical ports of the switch.
In Ethernet port view:
Use the dldp enable command to enable DLDP on the current port.
Use the dldp disable command to disable DLDP on the current port.
The dldp command can apply to a non-optical port as well as an optical port.
By default, DLDP is disabled.
1-2
When you use the dldp enable/dldp disable command in system view to enable/disable DLDP on all
optical ports of the switch, the configuration takes effect on the existing optical ports, instead of those
added subsequently.

Examples

# Enable DLDP on all optical ports of the switch.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dldp enable

# Enable DLDP on fiber-optic port GigabitEthernet 1/0/50.

[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/50
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/50] dldp enable

dldp authentication-mode

Syntax

dldp authentication-mode { none | simple simple-password | md5 md5-password }

undo dldp authentication-mode

View

System view

Parameters

none: Sets the authentication mode on the port to none (Performs no authentication on the port).
simple: Sets the authentication mode on the port to plain text.
simple-password: Plain text authentication password, a string in plain text consisting of 1 to 16
characters.
md5: Sets the authentication mode on the port to MD5.
md5-password: MD5 authentication password, a string in plain text consisting of 1 to 16 characters or a
string in cipher text corresponding to the string in plain text.

Description

Use the dldp authentication-mode command to set the DLDP authentication mode and password on
the current port.
Use the undo dldp authentication-mode to remove the DLDP authentication mode and password on
the current port.
By default, the authentication mode on the current port is none.
Note that:

1-3
When you configure a DLDP authentication mode and authentication password on a port, make sure
that the same DLDP authentication mode and password are set on the ports connected with a fiber
cable or copper twisted pair. Otherwise, DLDP authentication fails. DLDP cannot work before DLDP
authentication succeeds.
Related commands: dldp unidirectional-shutdown.

Examples

# Set the DLDP authentication mode and password to plain text and abc respectively on the ports
connected with a fiber cable or copper twisted pair between Switch A and Switch B.
z Configure Switch A
<SwitchA> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SwitchA] dldp authentication-mode simple abc

z Configure Switch B
<SwitchB> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SwitchB] dldp authentication-mode simple abc

dldp interval

Syntax

dldp interval timer-value

undo dldp interval

View

System view

Parameters

timer-value: Interval between sending advertisement packets in seconds, in the range of 1 to 100. It is 5
by default.

Description

Use the dldp interval command to set the interval between sending advertisement packets for all
DLDP-enabled ports in the advertisement state.
Use the undo dldp interval command to restore the interval to the default value.
By default, the interval between sending advertisement packets is 5 seconds.
A device in Advertisement state periodically sends out Advertisement packets to notify the neighbors of
its existence. Meanwhile, the device also retrieves neighbor information from the received
Advertisement packets and maintains its own neighbor entries. When the device receives an
Advertisement packet from a device that does not match any of its neighbor entries, it transits from
Advertisement state to Probe state and sends DLDP Probe packets to detect unidirectional links.
Note that:
z The interval takes effect on all DLDP-enabled ports.
z It is recommended that you set the interval shorter than one-third of the STP convergence time
(usually 30 seconds). If too long an interval is set, an STP loop may occur before DLDP shuts down

1-4
unidirectional links. On the contrary, if too short an interval is set, network traffic increases,
unnecessarily consuming port bandwidth.

Examples

# Set the interval between sending advertisement packets to 6 seconds for all DLDP-enabled ports in
the advertisement state.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dldp interval 6

dldp reset

Syntax

dldp reset

View

System view/Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

In system view:
Use the dldp reset command to reset the DLDP status of all the ports disabled by DLDP.
In Ethernet port view:
Use the dldp reset command to reset the DLDP status of the current port disabled by DLDP.
After the dldp reset command is executed, the DLDP status of a port changes from disable to active
and DLDP restarts to detect the link status of the fiber cable or copper twisted pair.
Related commands: dldp and dldp unidirectional-shutdown.

Examples

# Reset the DLDP status of all the ports disabled by DLDP.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dldp reset

dldp unidirectional-shutdown

Syntax

dldp unidirectional-shutdown { auto | manual }

undo dldp unidirectional-shutdown

View

System view

1-5
Parameters

auto: Disables automatically the corresponding port when DLDP detects an unidirectional link or finds
in the enhanced mode that the peer port is down.
manual: Generates log and traps and prompts the user to disable manually the corresponding port
when DLDP detects an unidirectional link or finds in the enhanced mode that the peer port is down. After
the port is disabled, it stops sending and receiving DLDP packets.

Description

Use the dldp unidirectional-shutdown command to set the DLDP handling mode after a unidirectional
link is found.
Use the undo dldp unidirectional-shutdown command to restore the default DLDP handling mode
after a unidirectional link is found.
By default, the DLDP handling mode after a unidirectional link is found is auto.
Related commands: dldp work-mode.

Examples

# Configure DLDP to automatically disable the corresponding port when a unidirectional link is found.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dldp unidirectional-shutdown auto

dldp work-mode

Syntax

dldp work-mode { enhance | normal }

undo dldp work-mode

View

System view

Parameters

enhance: Configures DLDP to work in enhanced mode. In this mode, DLDP detects whether neighbors
exist when neighbor tables are aging.
normal: Configures DLDP to work in normal mode. In this mode, DLDP does not detect whether
neighbors exist when neighbor tables are aging.

Description

Use the dldp work-mode command to set the DLDP operating mode.
Use the undo dldp work-mode command to restore the default DLDP operating mode.
By default, DLDP works in normal mode.

1-6
z When DLDP works in normal mode, the system can identify only the unidirectional link caused by
fiber cross-connection.
z When the DLDP protocol works in enhanced mode, the system can identify two types of
unidirectional links: one is caused by fiber cross-connection and the other is caused by one fiber
being not connected or being broken. To detect unidirectional links that are of the latter type, you
need to configure the ports to operate at specific speed and in full duplex mode. Otherwise, DLDP
cannot take effect.

Examples

# Configure DLDP to work in enhanced mode.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dldp work-mode enhance

dldp delaydown-timer

Syntax

dldp delaydown-timer delaydown-time

undo dldp delaydown-timer

View

System view

Parameters

delaydown-time: Delaydown timer to be set (in seconds). This argument ranges from 1 to 5.

Description

Use the dldp delaydown-timer command to set the delaydown timer.

Use the undo dldp delaydown-timer command to restore the default delaydown timer setting.
By default, the DelayDown timer is set to 1 second. A period of 5 seconds is recommended.

When a device in the active, advertisement, or probe DLDP state receives a port down message, it
does not remove the corresponding neighbor immediately, nor does it transit to the inactive state.
Instead, it transits to the delaydown state and starts the DelayDown timer. In delaydown state, the
device retains the related DLDP neighbor information. When the DelayDown timer expires, the DLDP
neighbor information is removed.

1-7
Examples

# Set the delaydown timer to 5 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dldp delaydown-timer 5

1-8
Table of Contents

1 MAC Address Table Management Configuration Commands ······························································1-1

MAC Address Table Management Configuration Commands································································1-1
display mac-address aging-time······································································································1-1
display mac-address························································································································1-2
mac-address····································································································································1-3
mac-address max-mac-count··········································································································1-5
mac-address max-mac-count 0·······································································································1-6
mac-address timer···························································································································1-6

i
1 MAC Address Table Management Configuration
Commands

This chapter describes the management of static, dynamic, and blackhole MAC address entries. For
information about the management of multicast MAC address entries, refer to the “Multicast Protocol”
part of the manual.

MAC Address Table Management Configuration Commands

display mac-address aging-time

Syntax

display mac-address aging-time

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display mac-address aging-time command to display the aging time of the dynamic MAC
address entries in the MAC address table.
Related commands: mac-address, mac-address timer, display mac-address.

Examples

# Display the aging time of the dynamic MAC address entries.

<Sysname> display mac-address aging-time
Mac address aging time: 300s

The output information indicates that the aging time of the dynamic MAC address entries is 300
seconds.
<Sysname> display mac-address aging-time
Mac address aging time: no-aging

The output information indicates that dynamic MAC address entries do not age out.

1-1
display mac-address

Syntax

display mac-address [ display-option ]

View

Any view

Parameters

display-option: Option used to display specific MAC address table information, as described in Table
1-1.

Table 1-1 Description on the display-option argument

Value Description
Displays information about a specified MAC
mac-address [ vlan vlan-id ]
address entry.
{ static | dynamic | blackhole } [ interface
Displays information about dynamic, static, or
interface-type interface-number ] [ vlan vlan-id ]
blackhole MAC address entries.
[ count ]
interface interface-type interface-number [ vlan Displays information about the MAC address
vlan-id ] [ count ] entries concerning a specified port.
Displays information about the MAC address
vlan vlan-id [ count ]
entries concerning a specified VLAN.
Displays the total number of the MAC address
count
entries maintained by the switch.
Displays statistics of the MAC address entries
statistics
maintained by the switch.

mac-address: Specifies a MAC address, in the form of H-H-H.

static: Displays static MAC address entries.
dynamic: Displays dynamic MAC address entries.
blackhole: Displays blackhole MAC address entries.
interface-type interface-number: Specify a port by its interface type and number, of which the MAC
address entries are displayed.
vlan-id: Specifies a VLAN by its ID in the range of 1 to 4094, in which the MAC address entries are
displayed.
count: Displays only the total number of the MAC address entries.
statistics: Displays statistics of the MAC address entries maintained by the switch.

Description

Use the display mac-address command to display information about MAC address entries in the MAC
address table, including: MAC address, VLAN and port corresponding to the MAC address, the type
(static or dynamic) of a MAC address entry, whether a MAC address is within the aging time and so on.
If you specify a unit ID with unit unit-id, the information about the MAC address entries on the specified
device in the fabric will be displayed.

1-2
Examples

# Display information about MAC address 000f-e20f-0101.

<Sysname> display mac-address 000f-e20f-0101
MAC ADDR VLAN ID STATE PORT INDEX AGING TIME(s)
000f-e20f-0101 1 Learned GigabitEthernet1/0/1 AGING

# Display the MAC address entries for the port GigabitEthernet 1/0/4.
<Sysname> display mac-address interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/4
MAC ADDR VLAN ID STATE PORT INDEX AGING TIME(s)
000d-88f6-44ba 1 Learned GigabitEthernet1/0/4 AGING
000d-88f7-9f7d 1 Learned GigabitEthernet1/0/4 AGING
000d-88f7-b094 1 Learned GigabitEthernet1/0/4 AGING
000f-e200-00cc 1 Learned GigabitEthernet1/0/4 AGING
000f-e200-2201 1 Learned GigabitEthernet1/0/4 AGING
000f-e207-f2e0 1 Learned GigabitEthernet1/0/4 AGING
000f-e209-ecf9 1 Learned GigabitEthernet1/0/4 AGING
--- 7 mac address(es) found on port GigabitEthernet1/0/4 ---

# Display the total number of MAC address entries for VLAN 2.

<Sysname> display mac-address vlan 2 count
9 mac address(es) found in vlan 2

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display mac-address command

Field Description
MAC ADDR MAC address
ID of the VLAN to which the network device
VLAN ID
identified by the MAC address belongs
The state of the MAC address entry, which can
be one of the following:
z Config static: Indicates a manually configured
static address entry.
STATE z Learned: Indicates a dynamically learnt
address entry.
z Config dynamic: Indicates a manually
configured dynamic address entry.
z Blackhole: Indicates a blackhole entry.
Outgoing port out of which the traffic destined for
PORT INDEX
the MAC address should be sent.
Indicates whether the MAC address entry is
aging. AGING indicates that the entry is aging;
AGING TIME(s)
NOAGED indicates that the entry will never age
out.

mac-address

Syntax

z In system view:

1-3
mac-address { static | dynamic | blackhole } mac-address interface interface-type interface-number
vlan vlan-id
undo mac-address [ mac-address-attribute ]
z In Ethernet port view:
mac-address { static | dynamic | blackhole } mac-address vlan vlan-id
undo mac-address { static | dynamic | blackhole } mac-address vlan vlan-id

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

static: Specifies a static MAC address entry.

dynamic: Specifies a dynamic MAC address entry.
blackhole: Specifies a blackhole MAC address entry.
mac-address: Specifies a MAC address, in the form of H-H-H. When entering the MAC address, you
can omit the leading 0s in each segment. For example, you can input f-e2-1 for 000f-00e2-0001.
interface-type interface-number: Specifies the outgoing port by its type and number for the MAC
address. All traffic destined for the MAC address will be sent out the port.
vlan-id: Specifies a VLAN ID, in the range of 1 to 4094. The VLAN must already exist.
mac-address-attribute: Specifies the criteria for removing MAC address entries. Available syntax
options for the argument are described in Table 1-3.

Table 1-3 Available syntax options for the mac-address-attribute argument

Syntax Description
{ static | dynamic | blackhole } interface Removes the static, dynamic, or blackhole MAC
interface-type interface-number address entries concerning a specified port.
Removes the static, dynamic, or blackhole MAC
{ static | dynamic | blackhole } vlan vlan-id
address entries concerning a specified VLAN.
{ static | dynamic | blackhole } mac-address
Removes a specified static, dynamic, or
[ interface interface-type interface-number ]
blackhole MAC address entry.
vlan vlan-id
Removes all the MAC address entries
interface interface-type interface-number
concerning a specified port.
Removes all the MAC address entries
vlan vlan-id
concerning a specified VLAN.
mac-address [ interface interface-type
Removes a specified MAC address entry.
interface-number ] vlan vlan-id

Description

Use the mac-address command to add or modify a MAC address entry.

Use the undo mac-address command to remove one or more MAC address entries.
In Ethernet port view, the MAC address entry configured with the mac-address command in Ethernet
port view takes the current Ethernet port as the outgoing port.

1-4
If the MAC address you input in the mac-address command already exists in the MAC address table,
the system will modify the attributes of the corresponding MAC address entry according to your settings
in the command.
You can remove all unicast MAC address entries on a port, or remove a specific type of MAC address
entries, such as the addresses learnt by the system, dynamic or static MAC address entries configured,
or blackhole addresses.

Examples

# Configure a static MAC address entry with the following settings:

z MAC address: 000f-e20f-0101
z Outbound port: GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 port
z GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 port belongs to VLAN 2.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mac-address static 000f-e20f-0101 interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 vlan 2

mac-address max-mac-count

Syntax

mac-address max-mac-count count

undo mac-address max-mac-count

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

count: Maximum number of MAC addresses a port can learn. This argument ranges from 0 to 4096. A
value of 0 disables the port from learning MAC addresses.

Description

Use the mac-address max-mac-count command to set the maximum number of MAC addresses an
Ethernet port can learn.
Use the undo mac-address max-mac-count command to cancel the limitation on the number of MAC
addresses an Ethernet port can learn.
By default, the number of MAC addresses an Ethernet port can learn is unlimited.
When you use the mac-address max-mac-count command, the port stops learning MAC addresses
after the number of MAC addresses it learned reaches the value of the count argument you provided.
You can use the undo command to cancel this limit so that the port can learn MAC addresses without
the number limitation. By default, no number limitation is set to the port for MAC address learning.
To prevent illegal devices from accessing the network through a port, you can configure static MAC
addresses and disable MAC address learning for the port. Thus, only the packets destined for the
configured MAC addresses can be forwarded out the port.
Related commands: mac-address, mac-address timer.

1-5
Examples

# Set the maximum number of MAC addresses GigabitEthernet 1/0/3 port can learn to 600.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/3
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/3] mac-address max-mac-count 600

mac-address max-mac-count 0

Syntax

mac-address max-mac-count 0
undo mac-address max-mac-count

View

VLAN view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the mac-address max-mac-count 0 command to disable a switch from learning MAC address in a
VLAN.
Use the undo mac-address max-mac-count command to enable a switch to learn MAC address in a
VLAN.
By default, a switch learns MAC addresses in any VLAN.

Example

# Disable the switch from learning MAC address in VLAN 3.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan 3
[Sysname-vlan3] mac-address max-mac-count 0

mac-address timer

Syntax

mac-address timer { aging age | no-aging }

undo mac-address timer aging

View

System view

Parameters

aging age: Specifies the aging time (in seconds) for dynamic MAC address entries. The age argument
ranges from 10 to 630.

1-6
no-aging: Specifies not to age dynamic MAC address entries.

Description

Use the mac-address timer command to set the MAC address aging timer.
Use the undo mac-address timer command to restore the default.
The default MAC address aging timer is 300 seconds.
The timer applies only to dynamic address entries, including both entries learnt and configured.
Setting an appropriate MAC address aging timer is important for the switch to run efficiently.
z If the aging timer is set too short, the MAC address entries that are still valid may be removed.
Upon receiving a packet destined for a MAC address that is already removed, the switch
broadcasts the packet through all its ports in the VLAN which the packet belongs to. This
decreases the operating performance of the switch.
z If the aging timer is set too long, MAC address entries may still exist even if they turn invalid. This
causes the switch to be unable to update its MAC address table in time. In this case, the MAC
address table cannot reflect the position changes of network devices in time.

Examples

# Set the aging time of MAC address entries to 500 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mac-address timer aging 500

1-7
Table of Contents

1 MSTP Configuration Commands ·············································································································1-1

MSTP Configuration Commands ············································································································1-1
active region-configuration ··············································································································1-1
bpdu-drop any ·································································································································1-1
check region-configuration ··············································································································1-2
display stp········································································································································1-3
display stp abnormalport ·················································································································1-7
display stp portdown························································································································1-8
display stp region-configuration·······································································································1-9
display stp root ······························································································································1-10
instance ·········································································································································1-11
region-name ··································································································································1-11
reset stp·········································································································································1-12
revision-level··································································································································1-13
stp ··················································································································································1-13
stp bpdu-protection························································································································1-15
stp bridge-diameter························································································································1-16
stp compliance·······························································································································1-16
stp config-digest-snooping ············································································································1-18
stp cost ··········································································································································1-20
stp dot1d-trap ································································································································1-21
stp edged-port ·······························································································································1-22
stp loop-protection ·························································································································1-23
stp max-hops ·································································································································1-25
stp mcheck ····································································································································1-25
stp mode········································································································································1-27
stp no-agreement-check················································································································1-27
stp pathcost-standard ····················································································································1-29
stp point-to-point····························································································································1-30
stp port priority·······························································································································1-32
stp portlog······································································································································1-33
stp portlog all ·································································································································1-33
stp priority ······································································································································1-34
stp region-configuration ·················································································································1-35
stp root primary······························································································································1-35
stp root secondary ·························································································································1-37
stp root-protection··························································································································1-38
stp tc-protection ·····························································································································1-39
stp tc-protection threshold ·············································································································1-40
stp timer forward-delay ··················································································································1-41
stp timer hello ································································································································1-41
stp timer max-age··························································································································1-42
stp timer-factor·······························································································································1-43

i
stp transmit-limit ····························································································································1-44
vlan-mapping modulo ····················································································································1-45
vlan-vpn tunnel ······························································································································1-46

ii
1 MSTP Configuration Commands

MSTP Configuration Commands

active region-configuration

Syntax

active region-configuration

View

MST region view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the active region-configuration command to activate the settings of a multiple spanning tree
(MST) region.
Configuring MST region-related parameters (especially the VLAN-to-instance mapping table) can result
in network topology jitter. To reduce network topology jitter caused by such a configuration change,
multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) does not recalculate spanning trees immediately after the
configuration change; it does this only after you activate the new MST region-related settings or enable
MSTP; only then will the new settings begin to take effect.
When you carry out this command, MSTP will replace the currently running MST region–related
parameters with the parameters you have just configured and will perform spanning tree recalculation.
Related commands: instance, region-name, revision-level, vlan-mapping modulo, check
region-configuration.

Examples

# Activate the MST region-related settings.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp region-configuration
[Sysname-mst-region] active region-configuration

bpdu-drop any

Syntax

bpdu-drop any
undo bpdu-drop any

1-1
View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the bpdu-drop any command to enable BPDU dropping on the Ethernet port.
Use the undo bpdu-drop any command to disable BPDU dropping on the Ethernet port.
By default, BPDU dropping is disabled.
In a STP-enabled network, some malicious users may send BPDU packets to the switch continuously in
order to destabilize the network. When a switch receives the BPDU packets, it will forward them to other
switches. As a result, STP calculation is performed repeatedly, which may occupy too much CPU of the
switches or cause errors in the protocol state of the BPDU packets.
In order to avoid this problem, you can enable BPDU dropping on Ethernet ports. Once the function is
enabled on a port, the port will not receive or forward any BPDU packets. In this way, the switch is
protected against the BPDU packet attack and the STP calculation correctness is ensured.

Examples

# Enable BPDU dropping on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] bpdu-drop any

check region-configuration

Syntax

check region-configuration

View

MST region view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the check region-configuration command to display the MST region-related configuration which
is being modified currently, including region name, revision level, and VLAN-to-instance mapping table.
As specified in the MSTP protocol, the configurations of MST regions must be right, especially the
VLAN-to-instance mapping table. MSTP-enabled switches are in the same region only when they have
the same format selector (a 802.1s-defined protocol selector, which is 0 by default and cannot be
configured), region name, VLAN-to-instance mapping table, and revision level. A switch cannot be in
the expected region if any of the four MST region-related parameters mentioned above are not
consistent with those of other switches in the region.

1-2
The 3Com switches support only the MST region name, VLAN-to-instance mapping table, and revision
level. Switches which have the settings of these parameters the same are assigned to the same MST
region.
This command is used to display the configuration information of inactivated MST regions. You can use
this command to find the MST region the switch currently belongs to or check to see whether or not the
MST region-related configuration is correct.
Related commands: instance, region-name, revision-level, vlan-mapping modulo, active
region-configuration.

Examples

# Display the MST region-related configuration.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp region-configuration
[Sysname-mst-region] check region-configuration
Admin Configuration
Format selector :0
Region name :00e0fc003600
Revision level :0

Instance Vlans Mapped

0 1 to 9, 11 to 4094
16 10

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the check region-configuration command

Field Description
Format selector The selector specified by MSTP
Region name The name of the MST region
Revision level The revision level of the MST region

Instance Vlans Mapped VLAN-to-instance mappings in the MST region

display stp

Syntax

display stp [ instance instance-id ] [ interface interface-list | slot slot-number ] [ brief ]

View

Any view

Parameters

instance-id: ID of the MSTI ranging from 0 to 16. The value of 0 refers to the common and internal
spanning tree (CIST).

1-3
interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the
form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>,
where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.
slot slot-number: Specifies a slot whose STP-related information is to be displayed.
brief: Displays only port state and protection measures taken on the port.

Description

Use the display stp command to display the state and statistical information about one or all spanning
trees.
The state and statistical information about MSTP can be used to analyze and maintain the topology of a
network. It can also be helpful when trying to make MSTP operate properly.
z If neither MSTI nor port list is specified, the command displays spanning tree information about all
MSTIs on all ports in the order of port number.
z If only one MSTI is specified, the command displays information about the specified MSTI on all
ports in the order of the port number.
z If only a port list is specified, the command displays information about all MSTIs on these ports in
the order of the port numbers.
z If both an MSTI ID list and a port list are specified, the command displays spanning tree information
about the specified MSTIs and the specified ports in the order of MSTI ID.
MSTP state information includes:
1) Global CIST parameters: Protocol operating mode, switch priority in the CIST instance, MAC
address, hello time, max age, forward delay, max hops, the common root of the CIST, the external
path cost for the switch to reach the CIST common root, region root, the internal path cost for the
switch to reach the region root, CIST root port of the switch, the state of the BPDU guard function
(enabled or disabled), the state of the digest snooping feature (enabled or disabled), and the state
of the TC-BPDU attack guard function (enabled or disabled).
2) CIST port parameters: Port protocol, port role, port priority, path cost, designated bridge,
designated port, edge port/non-edge port, whether or not the link on a port is a point-to-point link,
format of the MST BPDUs that the port can send, the maximum transmitting speed, type of the
enabled guard function, state of the digest snooping feature (enabled or disabled), VLAN mappings,
hello time, max age, forward delay, Message-age time, and remaining hops.
3) Global MSTI parameters: MSTI instance ID, bridge priority of the instance, region root, internal
path cost, MSTI root port, master bridge, and external path cost.
4) MSTI port parameters: Port state, role, priority, path cost, designated bridge, designated port,
remaining hops, and the number of VLANs mapped to the current MSTI.
The statistical information includes: the numbers of the TCN BPDUs, the configuration BPDUs, the RST
BPDUs, and the MST BPDUs transmitted/received by each port.
Related commands: reset stp.

Examples

# Display the brief state information of MSTI 0 on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 through GigabitEthernet 1/0/4.
<Sysname> display stp instance 0 interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4
brief
MSTID Port Role STP State Protection
0 GigabitEthernet1/0/1 ALTE DISCARDING LOOP

1-4
0 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 DESI FORWARDING NONE
0 GigabitEthernet1/0/3 DESI FORWARDING NONE
0 GigabitEthernet1/0/4 DESI FORWARDING NONE

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display stp brief command

Field Description
MSTID ID of an MSTI in the MST region
Port Port index corresponding to an MSTI
Port role, which can be one of the following:
z ALTE: The port is an alternate port
z BACK: The port is a backup port
Role z ROOT: The port is a root port
z DESI: The port is a designated port
z MAST: The port is a master port
z DISA: The port is disabled
MSTP state on the port , which can be:
z FORWARDING: The port learns MAC addresses and forwards
user traffic
STP State z DISCARDING: The port does not learn MAC addresses or
forward user traffic
z LEARNING: The port learns MAC addresses but does not
forward user traffic
Protection type of the port, which can be one of the following:
z ROOT: Root protection
Protection z LOOP: Loop protection
z BPDU: BPDU protection
z NONE: No protection

# Display the detailed MSTP status information and statistics information.

<Sysname> display stp instance 0 interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
-------[CIST Global Info][Mode MSTP]-------
CIST Bridge :32768.00e0-fc12-4001
Bridge Times :Hello 2s MaxAge 20s FwDly 15s MaxHop 20
CIST Root/ERPC :32768.000f-cb00-6600 / 200
CIST RegRoot/IRPC :32768.00e0-fc12-4001 / 0
CIST RootPortId :128.22
BPDU-Protection :disabled
TC-Protection :enabled / Threshold=6
Bridge Config
Digest Snooping :disabled
TC or TCN received :0
Time since last TC :0 days 1h:33m:54s

----[Port2(GigabitEthernet1/0/2)][DOWN]----
Port Protocol :enabled
Port Role :CIST Disabled Port
Port Priority :128
Port Cost(Legacy) :Config=auto / Active=200000

1-5
Desg. Bridge/Port :32768.00e0-fc12-4001 / 128.2
Port Edged :Config=disabled / Active=disabled
Point-to-point :Config=auto / Active=false
Transmit Limit :10 packets/hello-time
Protection Type :None
MSTP BPDU format :Config=auto / Active=legacy
Port Config
Digest Snooping :disabled
Num of Vlans Mapped :1
PortTimes :Hello 2s MaxAge 20s FwDly 15s MsgAge 0s RemHop 20
BPDU Sent :0
TCN: 0, Config: 0, RST: 0, MST: 0
BPDU Received :0
TCN: 0, Config: 0, RST: 0, MST: 0

Table 1-3 display stp command output description

Field Description
CIST Bridge CIST bridge ID
Major parameters for the bridge:
z Hello: Hello timer
Bridge Times z MaxAge: Max Age timer
z FwDly: Forward delay timer
z MaxHop: Max hops within the MST region
CIST Root/ERPC CIST root and external path cost
CIST RegRoot/IRPC CIST regional root and internal path cost
CIST RootPortId CIST root port ID

BPDU-Protection Indicates whether BPDU protection is enabled globally.

Indicates whether TC-BPDU attack guard function is enabled
TC-Protection*** / Threshold=** globally, and the maximum times that a switch can remove the
MAC address table and ARP entries within each 10 seconds.
Bridge Config Indicates whether Digest Snooping is enabled globally on the
Digest Snooping bridge.

TC or TCN received Number of received TC/TCN packets

Time since last TC Time of the latest topology change
Port Protocol Indicates whether STP is enabled on the port
Port role, which can be Alternate, Backup, Root, Designated,
Port Role
Master, or Disabled
Port Priority Port priority
Path cost of the port. The field in the bracket indicates the
standard used for port path cost calculation, which can be
Port Cost(Legacy)
legacy, dot1d-1998, or dot1t. Config indicates the configured
value, and Active indicates the actual value.
Designated bridge ID and port ID of the port
Desg. Bridge/Port The port ID displayed is insignificant for a port which does not
support port priority.

1-6
Field Description
Indicates whether the port is an edge port. Config indicates the
Port Edged
configured value, and Active indicates the actual value.
Indicates whether the port is connected to a point-to-point link.
Point-to-point Config indicates the configured value, and Active indicates the
actual value.
Transmit Limit The maximum number of packets sent within each Hello time
Protection type on the port, including Root guard and Loop
Protection Type
guard
Format of the MST BPDUs that the port can send, which can be
MST BPDU format legacy or 802.1s. Config indicates the configured value, and
Active indicates the actual value.
Port Config
Indicates whether digest snooping is enabled on the port.
Digest Snooping
Num of Vlans Mapped Number of VLANs mapped to the current MSTI
Major parameters for the port:
z Hello: Hello timer
PortTimes z MaxAge: Max Age timer
z FwDly: Forward delay timer
z MsgAge: Message Age timer
z Remain Hop: Remaining hops
The number of BPDUs sent since MSTP was enabled on the
BPDU Sent
device
The number of BPDUs received since MSTP was enabled on
BPDU Received
the device

display stp abnormalport

Syntax

display stp abnormalport

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display stp abnormalport command to display the ports that are blocked by STP guard
functions.

Examples

# Display the ports that are blocked by STP guard functions.

<Sysname> display stp abnormalport
MSTID Port Block Reason
--------- -------------------- -------------

1-7
0 GigabitEthernet1/0/20 Root-Protection
1 GigabitEthernet1/0/21 Loop-Protection

Table 1-4 Description on the fields of the display stp abnormalport command

Field Description
MSTID MSTI ID in the MST region
Port Port that has been blocked
The function blocking the port:
z Root-Protected: root guard function
Block Reason z Loop-Protected: loop guard function
z Formatcompatibility-Protected: MSTP BPDU format
incompatibility protection function

display stp portdown

Syntax

display stp portdown

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display stp portdown command to display the ports that are shut down by STP guard
functions.

Examples

# Display the ports that are shut down by STP guard functions.
<Sysname> display stp portdown
Port Down Reason
--------------------- ------------
GigabitEthernet1/0/20 BPDU-Protection

1-8
Table 1-5 Description on the fields of the display stp portdown command

Field Description
Port Port that has been shut down
Reason that caused the port to be blocked.
Down Reason z BPDU-Protected: BPDU attack guard function
z Formatfrequency-Protected: MSTP BPDU format frequent change
protection function

display stp region-configuration

Syntax

display stp region-configuration

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display stp region-configuration command to display the activated MST region configuration,
including the region name, region revision level, and VLAN-to-instance mappings configured for the
switch.
Related commands: stp region-configuration.

Examples

# Display the configuration of the MST region.

<Sysname> display stp region-configuration
Oper Configuration
Format selector :0
Region name :hello
Revision level :0

Instance Vlans Mapped

0 21 to 4094
1 1 to 10
2 11 to 20

Table 1-6 Description on the fields of the display stp region-configuration command

Field Description
Format selector The selector specified by MSTP
Region name The name of the MST region
Revision level of the MST region, which can be configured
Revision level
using the revision-level command and defaults to 0.

1-9
Field Description
Instance Vlans Mapped VLAN-to-instance mappings in the MST region

display stp root

Syntax

display stp root

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display stp root command to display information about the root ports in the MSTP region
where the switch resides.

Examples

# Display information about the root ports in the MSTP region where the switch resides.
<Sysname> display stp root
MSTID Root Bridge ID ExtPathCost IntPathCost Root Port
-------- -------------------- ------------ ------------- -----------
0 32768.00e0-fc53-d908 0 200 GigabitEthernet1/0/18

Table 1-7 Description on the fields of the display stp root command

Field Description
MSTID MSTI ID in the MST region
Root Bridge ID ID of the root bridge
Cost of the external path from the switch to the root bridge. The device
can automatically calculate the default path cost of a port, or
ExtPathCost
alternatively, you can use the stp cost command to configure the path
cost of a port.
Cost of the internal path from the switch to the root bridge. The device
can automatically calculate the default path cost of a port, or
IntPathCost
alternatively, you can use the stp cost command to configure the path
cost of a port.
Root port (If a port on the current device is an MSTI root port, the port
Root Port type and port number is displayed. Otherwise, the root port name is not
displayed.)

1-10
instance

Syntax

instance instance-id vlan vlan-list

undo instance instance-id [ vlan vlan-list ]

View

MST region view

Parameters

instance-id: ID of an MSTI ranging from 0 to 16. The value of 0 refers to the CIST.
vlan-list: List of VLANs. You need to provide this argument in the form of vlan-list = { vlan-id [ to
vlan-id ] }&<1-10>, where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 VLAN IDs/VLAN ID ranges for
this argument. Normally, a VLAN ID can be a number ranging from 1 to 4094.

Description

Use the instance command to map specified VLANs to a specified MSTI.

Use the undo instance command to remove the mappings from the specified VLANs to the specified
MSTI and remap the specified VLANs to the CIST (MSTI 0). If you specify no VLAN in the undo
instance command, all VLANs that are mapped to the specified MSTI are remapped to the CIST.
By default, all VLANs are mapped to the CIST.
VLAN-to-instance mappings are recorded in the VLAN-to-instance mapping table of an MSTP-enabled
switch. So these two commands are actually used to manipulate the VLAN-to-instance mapping table.
You can add/remove a VLAN to/from the VLAN-to-instance mapping table of a specific MSTI by using
these two commands.
Note that a VLAN cannot be mapped to multiple MSTIs at the same time. A VLAN-to-instance mapping
is automatically removed if you map the VLAN to another MSTI.
Related commands: region-name, revision-level, vlan-mapping modulo, check
region-configuration, active region-configuration.

Examples

# Map VLAN 2 to MSTI 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp region-configuration
[Sysname-mst-region] instance 1 vlan 2

region-name

Syntax

region-name name
undo region-name

View

MST region view

1-11
Parameters

name: MST region name to be set for the switch, a string of 1 to 32 characters.

Description

Use the region-name command to set an MST region name for a switch.
Use the undo region-name command to restore the MST region name to the default value.
The default MST region name of a switch is its MAC address.
MST region name, along with VLAN-to-instance mapping table and MSTP revision level, determines
the MST region which a switch belongs to.
Related commands: instance, revision-level, check region-configuration, vlan-mapping modulo,
active region-configuration.

Examples

# Set the MST region name of the switch to hello.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp region-configuration
[Sysname-mst-region] region-name hello

reset stp

Syntax

reset stp [ interface interface-list ]

View

User view

Parameters

interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the
form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>,
where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.

Description

Use the reset stp command to clear spanning tree statistics.

The spanning tree statistics includes the numbers of TCN BPDUs, configuration BPDUs, RST BPDUs,
and MST BPDUs sent/received through one or more specified ports or all ports (note that BPDUs and
TCN BPDUs are counted only for CISTs.)
Note that:
z If you specify the interface-list argument, this command clears the spanning tree statistics on
specified ports.
z If you do not specify the interface-list argument, this command clears the spanning tree statistics
on all ports.
Related commands: display stp.

1-12
Examples

# Clear the spanning tree statistics on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 through GigabitEthernet 1/0/3.
<Sysname> reset stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/3

revision-level

Syntax

revision-level level
undo revision-level

View

MST region view

Parameters

level: MSTP revision level to be set for the switch. This argument ranges from 0 to 65,535.

Description

Use the revision-level command to set the MSTP revision level for a switch.
Use the undo revision-level command to restore the revision level to the default value.
By default, the MSTP revision level of a switch is 0.
MSTP revision level, along with MST region name and VLAN-to-instance mapping table, determines
the MST region which a switch belongs to. When the MST region name and VLAN-to-instance mapping
table are both the same for two MST regions, you can still tell them apart by their MSTP revision levels.
Related commands: instance, region-name, check region-configuration, vlan-mapping modulo,
active region-configuration.

Examples

# Set the MSTP revision level of the MST region to 5.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp region-configuration
[Sysname-mst-region] revision-level 5

stp

Syntax

z System view, Ethernet port view:

stp { enable | disable }
undo stp
z System view:
stp interface interface-list { enable | disable }

View

System view, Ethernet port view

1-13
Parameters

enable: Enables MSTP.

disable: Disables MSTP.
interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the
form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>,
where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.

Description

z Use the stp command in system view to enable/disable MSTP globally. Use the undo stp
command in system view to restore the MSTP state to the default globally.
z Use the stp command in Ethernet port view to enable/disable MSTP on a port. Use the undo stp
command in Ethernet port view to restore the MSTP state to the default on a port.
z Use the stp interface command in system view to enable or disable MSTP on specified ports.
By default, MSTP is enabled both globally and on a port.
Note that:
z After you enable MSTP, the device works in STP-compatible mode, RSTP mode or MSTP mode
depending on the MSTP mode setting, which is configurable with the stp mode command.
z To control MSTP flexibly, you can use the undo stp enable command to disable MSTP on ports
that are not intended to take part in spanning tree calculation and thus to save CPU resources.
z After being enabled, MSTP dynamically maintains the spanning tree status of VLANs based on
received configuration BPDUs. After being disabled, it stops maintaining the spanning tree status.

Disabling MSTP on ports may result in data loops that can destabilize a network.

Related commands: stp mode.

Examples

# Enable MSTP globally.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp enable

# Disable MSTP on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

z Disable MSTP on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in Ethernet port view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp disable

z Disable MSTP on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 disable

1-14
# Disable MSTP on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 in system view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 disable

stp bpdu-protection

Syntax

stp bpdu-protection
undo stp bpdu-protection

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the stp bpdu-protection command to enable the BPDU guard function on the switch.
Use the undo stp bpdu-protection command to restore to the default state of the BPDU guard
function.
By default, the BPDU guard function is disabled.
Normally, the access ports of the devices operating on the access layer are directly connected to
terminals (such as PCs) or file servers. These ports are usually configured as edge ports to implement
rapid transition. But they resume non-edge ports automatically upon receiving configuration BPDUs,
which causes spanning trees recalculation and network topology jitter.
Normally, no configuration BPDU will reach edge ports. But malicious users can attack a network by
sending configuration BPDUs deliberately to edge ports to cause network jitter. You can prevent such
attacks by enabling the BPDU guard function. With this function enabled on a switch, the switch shuts
down the edge ports that receive configuration BPDUs and then reports these cases to the
administrator. If an edge port is shut down, only the administrator can restore it.

You are recommended to enable BPDU guard for devices with edge ports configured.

Examples

# Enable the BPDU guard function.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.

1-15
[Sysname] stp bpdu-protection

stp bridge-diameter

Syntax

stp bridge-diameter bridgenum

undo stp bridge-diameter

View

System view

Parameters

bridgenum: Network diameter to be set for a switched network. This argument ranges from 2 to 7.

Description

Use the stp bridge-diameter command to set the network diameter of a switched network. The
network diameter of a switched network is represented by the maximum possible number of switches
between any two terminal devices in a switched network.
Use the undo stp bridge-diameter command to restore the network diameter to the default value.
By default, the network diameter is 7.
After you configure the network diameter of a switched network, MSTP adjusts its hello time, forward
delay, and max age settings accordingly. With the network diameter set to the default value 7, the three
time-relate settings, including hello time, forward delay, and max age, are set to their default values as
well.
The stp bridge-diameter command only applies to CIST. It is invalid for MSTIs.
Related commands: stp timer forward-delay, stp timer hello, stp timer max-age.

Examples

# Set the network diameter to 5.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp bridge-diameter 5

stp compliance

Syntax

z Ethernet port view:

stp compliance { auto | legacy | dot1s }
undo stp compliance
z System view:
stp interface interface-list compliance { auto | legacy | dot1s }
undo stp interface interface-list compliance

1-16
View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

auto: Configures the port(s) to recognize the MSTP BPDU format automatically and accordingly
determine the format of MSTP BPDUs to send.
legacy: Configures the port(s) to receive and send only compatible-format MSTP BPDUs.
dot1s: Configures the port(s) to receive and send only standard-format (802.1s-compliant) MSTP
BPDUs.
interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the
format of interface-list ={ interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] }
&<1-10>, where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this
argument.

Description

z Use the stp compliance command in interface view to configure the mode the port(s) will use to
recognize and send MSTP BPDUs. Use the undo stp compliance command to restore the
system default.
z Use the stp interface compliance command in system view to set the mode in which a port
recognizes and sends MSTP packets. Use the undo stp interface compliance command to
restore the default.
The default mode is auto, namely all ports recognize the BPDU format automatically.
Note that:
z If the mode is set to auto on a port, the port automatically recognizes and resolves the received
compatible-format BPDUs or 802.1s-compliant BPDUs, and sends, when needed,
compatible-format or 802.1s-compliant BPDUs.
z If the mode is set to legacy or dot1s on a port, the port can only receive and send BPDUs of the
specified format. If the port is configured not to detect the packet format automatically while it works
in the MSTP mode, and if it receives a packet in the format other than the configured format, it will
become a designated port and remain in the discarding state to prevent the occurrence of a loop.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to recognize and send MSTP BPDUs in dot1s format.
z In Ethernet port view.
<Sysname> system-view
Enter system view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp compliance dot1s

z In system view.
<Sysname> system-view
Enter system view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 compliance dot1s

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 to recognize and send MSTP BPDUs in
dot1s format.
<Sysname> system-view

1-17
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet1/0/4 compliance dot1s

stp config-digest-snooping

Syntax

z System view, Ethernet port view:

stp config-digest-snooping
undo stp config-digest-snooping
z System view:
stp interface interface-list config-digest-snooping
undo stp interface interface-list config-digest-snooping

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

Description

z Use the stp config-digest-snooping command to enable the digest snooping feature. Use the
undo stp config-digest-snooping command to disable the digest snooping feature. Configured
in system view, the setting takes effect globally; configured in interface view, the setting takes
effect on the current port only.
z Use the stp interface config-digest-snooping command in system view to enable the digest
snooping feature on specific ports. Use the undo stp interface config-digest-snooping
command in system view to disable the digest snooping feature on specific ports.
The digest snooping feature is disabled by default.

To enable the digest snooping feature successfully, you must first enable it on all the switch ports that
connect to the other manufacturer’s switches adopting proprietary spanning tree protocols and then
enable it globally.

According to IEEE 802.1s, two interconnected switches can interwork with each other through MSTIs in
an MST region only when the two switches have the same MST region-related configuration. With
MSTP enabled, interconnected switches determine whether or not they are in the same MST region by
checking the configuration IDs of the BPDUs between them. (A configuration ID contains information
such as region ID and configuration digest.)

1-18
As some other manufacturers' switches adopt proprietary spanning tree protocols, they cannot
interwork with other switches in an MST region even if they are configured with the same MST
region-related settings as other switches in the MST region.
This kind of problem can be overcome by implementing the digest snooping feature. If a switch port is
connected to another manufacturer’s switch that has the same MST region-related settings but adopts
a proprietary spanning tree protocol, you can enable the digest snooping feature on the port that will be
receiving BPDU packets from another manufacturer's switch. Then the switch considers these BPDU
packets to be from its own MST region and records the configuration digests carried in the BPDU
packets received from the switch, which will be put in the BPDU packets to be sent to another
manufacturer’s switch. In this way, the switch can interwork with another manufacturer’s switches in an
MST region.

z When the digest snooping feature is enabled on a port, the port turns to the discarding state. That is,
the port stops sending BPDU packets. The port is not involved in the STP calculation until it
receives BPDU packets from the peer port.
z The digest snooping feature is needed only when your switch is connected to another
manufacturer’s switches adopting proprietary spanning tree protocols.
z To enable the digest snooping feature, the interconnected switches and another manufacturer’s
switch adopting proprietary spanning tree protocols must be configured with exactly the same MST
region-related configurations (including region name, revision level, and VLAN-to-instance
mapping).
z The digest snooping feature must be enabled on all the switch ports that connect to another
manufacturer’s switches adopting proprietary spanning tree protocols in the same MST region.
z When the digest snooping feature is enabled globally, the VLAN-to-instance mapping table cannot
be modified.
z The digest snooping feature is not applicable to boundary ports in an MST region.
z The digest snooping function is not applicable to edge ports in an MST region.

Examples

# Enable the digest snooping feature on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

z Enable the digest snooping feature on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in Ethernet port view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp config-digest-snooping
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
[Sysname] stp config-digest-snooping

z Enable the digest snooping feature on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 config-digest-snooping
[Sysname] stp config-digest-snooping

1-19
# Enable the digest snooping feature on GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet1/0/4
config-digest-snooping
[Sysname] stp config-digest-snooping

stp cost

Syntax

z Ethernet port view:

stp [ instance instance-id ] cost cost
undo stp [ instance instance-id ] cost
z System view:
stp interface interface-list [ instance instance-id ] cost cost
undo stp interface interface-list [ instance instance-id ] cost

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

instance-id: ID of an MSTI ranging from 0 to 16. The value of 0 refers to the CIST.
cost: Path cost to be set for the port. STP uses path costs to indicate the quality of links. A smaller path
cost indicates a higher link quality. The range of the cost argument varies with the standard used for
calculating the default path cost of a port as follows:
z With the IEEE 802.1D-1998 standard selected, the path cost of an Ethernet port ranges from 1 to
65535.
z With the IEEE 802.1t standard selected, the path cost of an Ethernet port ranges from 1 to
200000000.
z With the proprietary standard selected, the path cost of an Ethernet port ranges from 1 to 200000.
interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the
form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>,
where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.

Description

z Use the stp cost command to set the path cost of the current port in a specified MSTI in ethernet
port view. Use the undo stp cost command to restore the default path cost of the current port in
the specified MSTI in ethernet port view.
z Use the stp interface cost command to set the path cost(s) of the specified port(s) in a specified
MSTI in system view. Use the undo stp interface cost command to restore the default value of
the path cost(s) of the specified port(s) in the specified MSTI in system view.
By default, a switch automatically calculates the path costs of a port in different MSTIs based on a
specified standard.
Path cost is an important factor in spanning tree calculation. Setting different path costs for a port in
MSTIs allows VLAN traffic flows to be forwarded along different physical links, thus achieving
VLAN-based load balancing.
1-20
Note that:
z If you specify the instance-id argument to be 0 or do not specify this argument, the stp cost
command sets the path cost of the port in CIST.
z Changing the path cost of a port in an MSTI may change the role of the port in the instance and put
it in state transition.
z Ports with different rates have different default path costs. For details, see Table 1-8.

Examples

# Set the path cost of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in MSTI 2 to 200.

z Set the path cost of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in MSTI 2 to 200 in Ethernet port view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp instance 2 cost 200

z Set the path cost of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in MSTI 2 to 200 in system view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 instance 2 cost 200

# Set the path cost of GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 in MSTI 2 to 400 in system view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 instance 2 cost 400

stp dot1d-trap

Syntax

stp dot1d-[ instance instance-id ] trap [ newroot | topologychange ] enable

undo stp [ instance instance-id ] dot1d-trap [ newroot | topologychange ] enable

View

System view

Parameters

instance-id: MSTI ID ranging from 0 to 16. The value of 0 refers to CIST. With this argument specified,
the trap messages sent are only of the MSTI identified by this argument.
newroot: Sends trap messages conforming to 802.1d standard to the network management device
when the switch becomes the root bridge of an instance.
topologychange: Sends trap messages conforming to 802.1d standard to the network management
device when the switch detects network topology changes.

Description

Use the stp dot1d-trap command to enable a switch to send trap messages conforming to 802.1d
standard when MSTP network topology changes.
Use the undo stp dot1d-trap command to disable this function.

1-21
A switch sends trap messages conforming to 802.1d standard to the network management device
when:
z The switch becomes the root bridge of an MSTI.
z Network topology changes are detected.

Examples

# Enable a switch to send trap messages conforming to 802.1d standard to the network management
device when the switch becomes the root bridge of MSTI 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp instance 1 dot1d-trap newroot enable

stp edged-port

Syntax

z Ethernet port view:

stp edged-port { enable | disable }
undo stp edged-port
z System view:
stp interface interface-list edged-port { enable | disable }
undo stp interface interface-list edged-port

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

enable: Configures the port as an edge port.

disable: Configures the port as a non-edge port.
interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the
form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>,
where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.

Description

z Use the stp edged-port enable command to configure the current Ethernet port as an edge port.
Use the stp edged-port disable command to configure the current Ethernet port as a non-edge
port. Use the undo stp edged-port command to restore the current Ethernet port to its default
state.
z Use the stp interface edged-port enable command to configure the specified Ethernet ports as
edge ports in system view. Use the stp interface edged-port disable command to configure the
specified Ethernet ports as non-edge ports in system view. Use the undo stp interface
edged-port command to restore the specified Ethernet ports to the default state.
By default, all Ethernet ports of a switch are non-edge ports.
An edge port is a port that is directly connected to a user terminal instead of another switch or shared
network segment. Rapid transition to the forwarding state (sometimes referred to as “Fast Start”) is
applied to edge ports because on these ports no loops can be incurred by network topology changes.
1-22
You can enable a port to turn to the forwarding state rapidly by setting it to an edge port. And you are
recommended to configure the Ethernet ports directly connected to user terminals as edge ports to
enable them to turn to the forwarding state rapidly.
Normally, configuration BPDUs cannot reach an edge port because the port is not connected to another
switch. But when the BPDU guard function is disabled on an edge port, configuration BPDUs sent
deliberately by a malicious user may reach the port. If an edge port receives a BPDU, it turns to a
non-edge port.

Loop guard, root guard, and edge port settings are mutually exclusive. With one of these functions
enabled on a port, any of the other two functions cannot take effect even if you have configured it on the
port.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 as an edge port.

z Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 as an edge port in Ethernet port view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp edged-port enable

z Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 as an edge port in system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 edged-port enable

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 as edge ports in system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 edged-port enable

stp loop-protection

Syntax

z Ethernet port view:

stp loop-protection
undo stp loop-protection
z System view:
stp interface interface-list loop-protection
undo stp interface interface-list loop-protection

View

System view, Ethernet port view

1-23
Parameters

Description

z Use the stp loop-protection command to enable the loop guard function on the current port. Use
the undo stp loop-protection command to restore the loop guard function to the default state on
the current port.
z Use the stp interface loop-protection command to enable the loop guard function on specified
ports in system view. Use the undo stp interface loop-protection command to restore the default
state of the loop guard function on specified ports in system view.
By default, the loop guard function is disabled on the port.
A switch maintains the states of the root port and other blocked ports by receiving and processing
BPDUs from the upstream switch. These BPDUs may get lost because of network congestion or
unidirectional link failures. If a switch does not receive BPDUs from the upstream switch for a certain
period, the switch selects a new root port; the original root port becomes a designated port; and the
blocked ports turn to the forwarding state. This may cause loops in the network.
The loop guard function suppresses loops. With this function enabled, if link congestions or
unidirectional link failures happen, a root port becomes a designated port, and the port turns to the
discarding state. The blocked port also becomes the designated port and the port turns to the
discarding state, that is, the port does not forward packets and thereby loops can be prevented.

z You are recommended to enable loop guard on the root port and alternate port of a non-root bridge.
z Loop guard, root guard, and edge port settings are mutually exclusive. With one of these functions
enabled on a port, any of the other two functions cannot take effect even if you have configured it
on the port.

Examples

# Enable the loop guard function on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

z Enable the loop guard function on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in Ethernet port view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp loop-protection

z Enable the loop guard function on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 loop-protection

1-24
# Enable the loop guard function on GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 in system view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 loop-protection

stp max-hops

Syntax

stp max-hops hops

undo stp max-hops

View

System view

Parameters

hops: Maximum hop count to be set. This argument ranges from 1 to 40.

Description

Use the stp max-hops command to set the maximum hop count for the MST region the current switch
belongs to.
Use the undo stp max-hops command to restore the maximum hop count to the default.
By default, the maximum hop count of an MST region is 20.
The maximum hop count configured on the region roots of an MST region limits the size of the MST
region.
A configuration BPDU contains a field that maintains the remaining hops of the configuration BPDU.
And a switch discards the configuration BPDUs whose remaining hops are 0. After a configuration
BPDU reaches a root bridge of a spanning tree in a MST region, the value of the remaining hops field in
the configuration BPDU is decreased by 1 every time the configuration BPDU passes one switch. Such
a mechanism disables the switches that are beyond the maximum hops from participating in spanning
tree calculation, and thus limits the size of an MST region.
With such a mechanism, the maximum hops configured on the switch operating as the root bridge of the
CIST or an MSTI in a MST region becomes the network diameter of the spanning tree, which limits the
size of the spanning tree in the current MST region. The switches that are not root bridges in an MST
region adopt the maximum hop settings of the root bridge.

Examples

# Set the maximum hop count of the current MST region to 35.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp max-hops 35

stp mcheck

Syntax

z Ethernet port view:

1-25
stp mcheck
z System view:
stp [ interface interface-list ] mcheck

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

Description

z Use the stp mcheck command to perform the mCheck operation on the current port in Ethernet
port view.
z Use the stp interface mcheck command to perform the mCheck operation on specified port(s) in
system view. If the value of interface interface-list is not specified, this command performs the
mCheck operation on all MSTP-enabled ports of the device.
When a port on an MSTP-enabled/RSTP-enabled upstream switch connects with an STP-enabled
downstream switch, the port operates in the STP-compatible mode automatically. But when the
STP-enabled downstream switch is then replaced by an MSTP-enabled switch, the port cannot
automatically transit to the MSTP mode but still remains in the STP-compatible mode. In this case, you
can force the port to transit to the MSTP mode by performing the mCheck operation on the port.
Related commands: stp mode.

Examples

# Perform the mCheck operation on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

z Perform the mCheck operation on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in Ethernet port view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp mcheck

z Perform the mCheck operation on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 mcheck

# Perform the mCheck operation on GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 in system view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 mcheck

# Perform the mCheck operation on all the MSTP-enabled ports of your switch in system view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp mcheck

1-26
stp mode

Syntax

stp mode { stp | rstp | mstp }

undo stp mode

View

System view

Parameters

stp: Specifies the STP-compatible mode.

mstp: Specifies the MSTP mode.
rstp: Specifies the RSTP-compatible mode.

Description

Use the stp mode command to set the operating mode of an MSTP-enabled switch.
Use the undo stp mode command to restore the default operating mode of an MSTP-enabled switch.
By default, an MSTP-enabled switch operates in MSTP mode.
To make a switch compatible with STP and RSTP, MSTP provides following three operating modes.
z STP-compatible mode, where the ports of a switch send STP BPDUs to neighboring devices. If
STP-enabled switches exist in a switched network, you can use the stp mode stp command to
configure an MSTP-enabled switch to operate in STP-compatible mode.
z RSTP-compatible mode, where the ports of a switch send RSTP BPDUs to neighboring devices. If
RSTP-enabled switches exist in a switched network, you can use the stp mode rstp command to
configure an MSTP-enabled switch to operate in RSTP-compatible mode.
z MSTP mode, where the ports of a switch send MSTP BPDUs and STP BPDUs (if the switch is
connected to STP-enabled switches) to neighboring devices. In this case, the switch is
MSTP-capable.
Related commands: stp mcheck, stp, stp interface, stp interface mcheck.

Examples

# Configure the MSTP operation mode as STP-compatible.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp mode stp

stp no-agreement-check

Syntax

z Ethernet port view:

stp no-agreement-check
undo stp no-agreement-check
z System view:
stp interface interface-type interface-number no-agreement-check

1-27
undo stp interface interface-type interface-number no-agreement-check

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

interface-type: Port type.

interface-number: Port number.

Description

z Use the stp no-agreement-check command to enable the rapid transition feature on the current
port in Ethernet port view. Use the stp no-agreement-check command to disable the rapid
transition feature on the current port in Ethernet port view.
z Use the stp interface no-agreement-check command to enable the rapid transition feature on the
specified port in system view. Use the undo stp interface no-agreement-check command to
disable the rapid transition feature on the specified port in system view.
By default, the rapid transition feature is disabled on a port.
Some manufactures' switches adopt proprietary spanning tree protocols that are similar to RSTP in the
way to implement rapid transition on designated ports. When a switch of this kind operates as the
upstream switch of a 3Com switch running MSTP, the upstream designated port fails to change their
states rapidly.
The rapid transition feature aims to resolve this problem. When a 3Com switch running MSTP is
connected in the upstream direction to another manufacture's switch adopting proprietary spanning tree
protocols, you can enable the rapid transition feature on the ports of the 3Com switch operating as the
downstream switch. Among these ports, those operating as the root ports will then actively send
agreement packets to their upstream ports after they receive proposal packets from the upstream
designated ports, instead of waiting for agreement packets from the upstream switch. This enables
designated ports of the upstream switch to change their states rapidly.

z The rapid transition feature can be enabled on only root ports or alternate ports.
z You can enable the rapid transition feature on the designated port. However, the feature does not
take effect on the port.

Examples

# Enable the rapid transition feature on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

z Enable the rapid transition feature on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in Ethernet port view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp no-agreement-check

z Enable the rapid transition feature on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in system view.

1-28
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]stp interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 no-agreement-check

stp pathcost-standard

Syntax

stp pathcost-standard { dot1d-1998 | dot1t | legacy }

undo stp pathcost-standard

View

System view

Parameters

dot1d-1998: The device calculates the default path cost for ports based on IEEE 802.1d-1998.
dot1t: The device calculates the default path cost for ports based on IEEE 802.1t.
legacy: The device calculates the default path cost for ports based on a private standard.

Description

Use the stp pathcost-standard command to set the standard to be used to calculate the default path
costs of the links connected to the switch.
Use the undo stp pathcost-standard command to specify to use the default standard.
By default, the device calculates the default path cost for ports based on a private standard. STP uses
path costs to indicate the quality of links. A smaller path cost indicates a higher link quality. The path
cost of a port is related to the rate of the link connecting the port. The higher the link rate, the smaller the
path cost. The path cost of a port may vary when different standards are used to calculate it. For details,
see Table 1-8.

Table 1-8 Link speeds and the corresponding path costs

Path cost in Path cost in Path cost in

Link speed Duplex state 802.1d-1998 IEEE 802.1t private
standard standard standard
0 — 65,535 200,000,000 200,000
Half-duplex/Full-duplex 100 2,000,000 2,000
Aggregated link 2 ports 95 1,000,000 1,800
10 Mbps
Aggregated link 3 ports 95 666,666 1,600
Aggregated link 4 ports 95 500,000 1,400
Half-duplex/Full-duplex 19 200,000 200
Aggregated link 2 ports 15 100,000 180
100 Mbps
Aggregated link 3 ports 15 66,666 160
Aggregated link 4 ports 15 50,000 140
Full-duplex 4 20,000 20
Aggregated link 2 ports 3 10,000 18
1,000 Mbps
Aggregated link 3 ports 3 6,666 16
Aggregated link 4 ports 3 5,000 14

1-29
Path cost in Path cost in Path cost in
Link speed Duplex state 802.1d-1998 IEEE 802.1t private
standard standard standard
Full-duplex 2 2,000 2
Aggregated link 2 ports 1 1,000 1
10 Gbps
Aggregated link 3 ports 1 666 1
Aggregated link 4 ports 1 500 1

Normally, the path cost of a port operating in full-duplex mode is slightly less than that of the port
operating in half-duplex mode.
When calculating the path cost of an aggregated link, the 802.1D-1998 standard does not take the
number of the ports on the aggregated link into account, whereas the 802.1T standard does. The
following formula is used to calculate the path cost of an aggregated link:
Path cost = 200,000,000 / link transmission rate
Where, “link transmission rate” is the sum of the rates of all the unblocked ports on the aggregated link
measured in 100 Kbps.
You can use the stp cost command to manually configure the path cost of a port in a specified MSTI.
For details, see stp cost.

Examples

# Configure to use the IEEE 802.1D-1998 standard to calculate the default path costs of ports.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp pathcost-standard dot1d-1998

# Configure to use the IEEE 802.1t standard to calculate the default path costs of ports.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp pathcost-standard dot1t

stp point-to-point

Syntax

z Ethernet port view:

stp point-to-point { force-true | force-false | auto }
undo stp point-to-point
z System view:
stp interface interface-list point-to-point { force-true | force-false | auto }
undo stp interface interface-list point-to-point

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

force-true: Specifies that the link connected to the current Ethernet port is a point-to-point link.

1-30
force-false: Specifies that the link connected to the current Ethernet port is not a point-to-point link.
auto: Specifies to automatically determine whether or not the link connected to the current Ethernet port
is a point-to-point link.
interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the
form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>,
where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.

Description

z Use the stp point-to-point command to specify whether the link connected to the current Ethernet
port is a point-to-point link. Use the undo stp point-to-point command to restore the link
connected to the current Ethernet port to its default link type, which is automatically determined by
MSTP.
z Use the stp interface point-to-point command to specify whether the links connected to the
specified Ethernet ports are point-to-point links in system view. Use the undo stp interface
point-to-point command to restore the links connected to the specified ports to their default link
types, which are automatically determined by MSTP.
The default setting is auto; namely the MSTP-enabled device automatically detects whether a port
connects to a point-to-point link.
If no keyword is specified in the stp point-to-point command, the auto keyword is used by default, and
so MSTP automatically determines the type of the link connected to the current port.
The rapid transition feature is not applicable to ports on non-point-to-point links.
If an Ethernet port is the master port of aggregation ports or operates in full-duplex mode, the link
connected to the port is a point-to-point link. You are recommended to let MSTP automatically
determine the link types of ports.
The two commands only apply to CISTs and MSTIs. If you configure the link to which a port is
connected is a point-to-point link (or a non-point-to-point link), the configuration applies to all MSTIs
(that is, the port is configured to connect to a point-to-point link (or a non-point-to-point link) in all MSTIs).
If the actual physical link is not a point-to-point link and you configure the link to which the port is
connected to be a point-to-point link, temporary loops may occur.

Examples

# Configure the link connected to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 as a point-to-point link.

z Configure the link connected to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 as a point-to-point link in Ethernet port view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp point-to-point force-true

z Configure the link connected to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 as a point-to-point link in system view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 point-to-point force-true

# Configure the links connected to GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 as point-to-point links
in system view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.

1-31
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 point-to-point
force-true

stp port priority

Syntax

z Ethernet port view:

stp [ instance instance-id ] port priority priority
undo stp [ instance instance-id ] port priority
z System view:
stp interface interface-list instance instance-id port priority priority
undo stp interface interface-list instance instance-id port priority

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

instance-id: MSTI ID ranging from 0 to 16. The value of 0 refers to the CIST.
port priority priority: Sets the port priority. The priority argument ranges from 0 to 240 and must be a
multiple of 16 (such as 0, 16, and 32).
interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the
form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>,
where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.

Description

z Use the stp port priority command to set the port priority of the current port in the specified MSTI.
Use the undo stp port priority command to restore the default port priority of the current port in
the specified MSTI.
z Use the stp interface port priority command to set a port priority for the specified ports in the
specified MSTI in system view. Use the undo stp interface port priority command to restore the
default priority of the specified ports in the specified MSTI in system view.
The default port priority of a port in any MSTI is 128.
If you specify the instance-id argument to 0 or do not specify the argument, the two commands apply to
the port priorities of ports on the CIST. The role a port plays in a MSTI is determined by the port priority
in the instance. A port on a MSTP-enabled switch can have different port priorities and play different
roles in different MSTIs. This enables packets of different VLANs to be forwarded along different
physical links, so as to implement VLAN-based load balancing. Changing port priorities result in port
role recalculation and state transition.

Examples

# Set the port priority of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in MSTI 2 to 16.

z Set the port priority of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in MSTI 2 to 16 in Ethernet port view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

1-32
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp instance 2 port priority 16

z Set the port priority of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in MSTI 2 to 16 in system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 instance 2 port priority 16

# Set the port priority of GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 in MSTI 2 to 16 in system view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 instance 2 port
priority 16

stp portlog

Syntax

stp [ instance instance-id ] portlog

undo stp [ instance instance-id ] portlog

View

System view

Parameters

instance instance-id: Specifies an MSTI ID, ranging from 0 to 16. The value of 0 indicates the CIST.

Description

Use the stp portlog command to enable log and trap message output for the ports of a specified
instance.
Use the undo stp portlog command to disable this function.
By default, log and trap message output is disabled.
Executing the stp portlog command (without using the instance instance-id parameters) will enable
log and trap message output for the ports of instance 0.

Examples

# Enable log and trap message output for the ports of instance 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp instance 1 portlog

stp portlog all

Syntax

stp portlog all

undo stp portlog all

View

System view

1-33
Parameters

None

Description

Use the stp portlog all command to enable log and trap message output for the ports of all instances.
Use the undo stp portlog all command to disable this function.
By default, log and trap message output is disabled on the ports of all instances.

Examples

# Enable log and trap message output for the ports of all instances.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp portlog all

stp priority

Syntax

stp [ instance instance-id ] priority priority

undo stp [ instance instance-id ] priority

View

System view

Parameters

instance-id: MSTI ID ranging from 0 to 16. The value of 0 refers to the CIST.
priority: Switch priority to be set. This argument ranges from 0 to 61,440 and must be a multiple of 4,096
(such as 0, 4,096, and 8,192). There are totally 16 available switch priorities.

Description

Use the stp priority command to set the priority of the switch in the specified MSTI.
Use the undo stp priority command to restore the switch priority to the default priority in the specified
MSTI.
The default priority of a switch is 32,768.
The priorities of switches are used for spanning tree calculation. Switch priorities are spanning
tree-specific. That is, you can set different priorities for the same switch in different MSTIs.
If you do not specify the instance-id argument, the two commands apply to only the CIST.

Examples

# Set the bridge priority of the switch in MSTI 1 to 4,096.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp instance 1 priority 4096

1-34
stp region-configuration

Syntax

stp region-configuration
undo stp region-configuration

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the stp region-configuration command to enter MST region view.

Use the undo stp region-configuration command to restore the MST region-related settings to the
default.
MST region-related parameters include: region name, revision level, and VLAN-to-instance mapping
table. By default:
z MST region name is the first MAC address of the switch
z All VLANs are mapped to the CIST in the VLAN-to-instance mapping table
z The MSTP revision level is 0
You can modify the three parameters after entering MST region view by using the stp
region-configuration command.

NTDP packets sent by devices in a cluster can be transmitted in only the instances where the
management VLAN of the cluster resides.

Examples

# Enter MST region view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp region-configuration
[Sysname-mst-region]

stp root primary

Syntax

stp [ instance instance-id ] root primary [ bridge-diameter bridgenum [ hello-time centi-seconds ] ]

undo stp [ instance instance-id ] root

1-35
View

System view

Parameters

instance-id: MSTI ID ranging from 0 to 16. The value of 0 refers to the CIST.
bridgenum: Network diameter of the specified spanning tree. This argument ranges from 2 to 7 and
defaults to 7.
centi-seconds: Hello time in centiseconds of the specified spanning tree. This argument ranges from
100 to 1,000 and defaults to 200.

Description

Use the stp root primary command to configure the current switch as the root bridge of a specified
MSTI.
Use the undo stp root command to cancel the current configuration.
By default, a switch is not configured as a root bridge.
If you do not specify the instance-id argument, these two commands apply to only the CIST.
You can specify the current switch as the root bridge of an MSTI regardless of the priority of the switch.
You can also specify the network diameter of the switched network by using the stp root primary
command. The switch will then figure out the following three time parameters: hello time, forward delay,
and max age. As the hello time figured out by the network diameter is not always the optimal one, you
can set it manually through the hello-time centi-seconds parameter. Generally, you are recommended
to obtain the forward delay and max age parameters through setting the network diameter.

z You can configure only one root bridge for an MSTI and can configure one or more secondary root
bridges for an MSTI. Specifying multiple root bridges for an MSTI causes unpredictable spanning
tree calculation results.
z Once a switch is configured as the root bridge or a secondary root bridge, its priority cannot be
modified.

Examples

# Configure the current switch as the root bridge of MSTI 1, set the network diameter of the switched
network to 4, and set the hello time to 500 centiseconds.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp instance 1 root primary bridge-diameter 4 hello-time 500

1-36
stp root secondary

Syntax

stp [ instance instance-id ] root secondary [ bridge-diameter bridgenum [ hello-time

centi-seconds ] ]
undo stp [ instance instance-id ] root

View

System view

Parameters

Description

Use the stp root secondary command to configure the current switch as a secondary root bridge of a
specified MSTI.
Use the undo stp root command to cancel the current configuration.
By default, a switch does not operate as a secondary root bridge.
If you do not specify the instance-id argument, the two commands apply to only the CIST.
You can configure one or more secondary root bridges for an MSTI. If the switch operating as the root
bridge fails or is turned off, the secondary root bridge with the least MAC address becomes the root
bridge.
You can specify the network diameter and the hello time of the switch when you are configuring it as a
secondary root bridge. The switch will then figure out the other two time parameters: forward delay and
max age. If the instance-id argument is specified to 0 in this command, the current switch is configured
as the secondary root bridge of the CIST. You can configure only one root bridge for an MSTI but you
can configure one or more secondary root bridges for an MSTI.
Once a switch is configured as the root bridge or a secondary root bridge, its priority cannot be modified.

Examples

# Configure the current switch as a secondary root bridge of MSTI 4, setting the network diameter of the
switched network to 5 and the hello time of the current switch to 300 centiseconds.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp instance 4 root secondary bridge-diameter 5 hello-time 300

1-37
stp root-protection

Syntax

z Ethernet port view:

stp root-protection
undo stp root-protection
z System view:
stp interface interface-list root-protection
undo stp interface interface-list root-protection

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

Description

z Use the stp root-protection command to enable the root guard function on the current port. Use
the undo stp root-protection command to restore the root guard function to the default state on
the current port.
z Use the stp interface root-protection command to enable the root guard function on specified
port(s) in system view. Use the undo stp interface root-protection command to restore the root
guard function to the default state on specified port(s) in system view.
By default, the root guard function is disabled.
Because of configuration errors or malicious attacks, the valid root bridge in the network may receive
configuration BPDUs with their priorities higher than that of the root bridge, which causes new root
bridge to be elected and network topology jitter to occur. In this case, flows that should have traveled
along high-speed links are led to low-speed links, causing network congestion.
You can avoid this problem by utilizing the root guard function. Root-guard-enabled ports can only be
kept as designated ports in all MSTIs. When a port of this type receives configuration BPDUs with
higher priorities, it turns to the discarding state before it is specified as a non-designated port and stops
forwarding packets (as if it is disconnected from the link). It resumes the normal state if it does not
receive any configuration BPDUs with higher priorities for a specified period.

z You are recommended to enable root guard on the designated ports of a root bridge.
z Loop guard, root guard, and edge port settings are mutually exclusive. With one of these functions
enabled on a port, any of the other two functions cannot take effect even if you have configured it
on the port.

1-38
Examples

# Enable the root guard function on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

z Enable the root guard function on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in Ethernet port view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp root-protection

z Enable the root guard function on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 root-protection

# Enable the root guard function on GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 in system view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 root-protection

stp tc-protection

Syntax

stp tc-protection enable

stp tc-protection disable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the stp tc-protection enable command to enable the TC-BPDU attack guard function.
Use the stp tc-protection disable command to disable the TC-BPDU attack guard function.
By default, the TC-BPDU guard attack function is enabled, and the MAC address table and ARP entries
can be removed for up to six times within 10 seconds.
Normally, a switch removes the MAC address table and ARP entries upon receiving TC-BPDUs. If a
malicious user sends a large amount of TC-BPDUs to a switch in a short period, the switch may be busy
in removing the MAC address table and ARP entries frequently, which may affect spanning tree
calculation, occupy large amount of bandwidth and increase switch CPU utilization.
With the TC-BPDU attack guard function enabled, a switch performs a removing operation upon
receiving a TC-BPDU and triggers a timer (set to 10 seconds by default) at the same time. Before the
timer expires, the switch only performs the removing operation for limited times (up to six times by
default) regardless of the number of the TC-BPDUs it receives. Such a mechanism prevents a switch
from being busy in removing the MAC address table and ARP entries.

Examples

# Enable the TC-BPDU attack guard function on the switch.

1-39
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp tc-protection enable

stp tc-protection threshold

Syntax

stp tc-protection threshold number

undo stp tc-protection threshold

View

System view

Parameters

number: Maximum number of times that a switch can remove the MAC address table and ARP entries
within each 10 seconds, in the range of 1 to 255.

Description

Use the stp tc-protection threshold command to set the maximum number of times that a switch can
remove the MAC address table and ARP entries within each 10 seconds.
Use the undo stp tc-protection threshold command to restore the default.
Normally, a switch removes the MAC address table and ARP entries upon receiving a TC-BPDU. If a
malicious user sends large amount of TC-BPDUs to a switch in a short period, the switch may be busy
in removing the MAC address table and ARP entries, which may affect spanning tree calculation,
occupy a large amount of bandwidth and increase switch CPU utilization.
With the TC-BPDU attack guard function enabled, a switch performs a removing operation upon
receiving a TC-BPDU and triggers a timer (set to 10 seconds by default) at the same time. Before the
timer expires, the switch only performs the removing operation for limited times (up to six times by
default) regardless of the number of the TC-BPDUs it receives. Such a mechanism prevents a switch
from being busy in removing the MAC address table and ARP entries.
You can use the stp tc-protection threshold command to set the maximum times for a switch to
remove the MAC address table and ARP entries in a specific period. When the number of the
TC-BPDUs received within a period is less than the maximum times, the switch performs a removing
operation upon receiving a TC-BPDU. After the number of the TC-BPDUs received reaches the
maximum times, the switch stops performing the removing operation. For example, if you set the
maximum times for a switch to remove the MAC address table and ARP entries to 100 and the switch
receives 200 TC-BPDUs in the period, the switch removes the MAC address table and ARP entries for
only 100 times within the period.

Examples

# Set the maximum times for a switch to remove the MAC address table and ARP entries within 10
seconds to 5.
<Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp tc-protection threshold 5

1-40
stp timer forward-delay

Syntax

stp timer forward-delay centi-seconds

undo stp timer forward-delay

View

System view

Parameters

centi-seconds: Forward delay in centiseconds to be set. This argument ranges from 400 to 3,000.

Description

Use the stp timer forward-delay command to set the forward delay of the switch.
Use the undo stp timer forward-delay command to restore the forward delay to the default value.
By default, the forward delay of the switch is 1,500 centiseconds.
To prevent the occurrence of temporary loops, when a port changes its state from discarding to
forwarding, it undergoes an intermediate state and waits for a specific period to synchronize with the
state transition of the remote switches. This state transition period is determined by the forward delay
configured on the root bridge.
The forward delay setting configured on a root bridge applies to all non-root bridges.
As for the configuration of the three time-related parameters (namely, the hello time, forward delay, and
max age parameters), the following formulas must be met to prevent frequent network jitter.
2 x (forward delay – 1 second) >= max age
Max age >= 2 x (hello time + 1 second)
You are recommended to specify the network diameter of the switched network and the hello time by
using the stp root primary or stp root secondary command. After that, the three proper time-related
parameters are automatically calculated by MSTP.
Related commands: stp timer hello, stp timer max-age, stp bridge-diameter.

Examples

# Set the forward delay to 2,000 centiseconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp timer forward-delay 2000

stp timer hello

Syntax

stp timer hello centi-seconds

undo stp timer hello

View

System view

1-41
Parameters

centi-seconds: Hello time to be set, in the range of 100 to 1,000 (in centiseconds).

Description

Use the stp timer hello command to set the hello time of the switch.
Use the undo stp timer hello command to restore the hello time of the switch to the default value.
By default, the hello time of the switch is 200 centiseconds.
A root bridge regularly sends out configuration BPDUs to maintain the stability of existing spanning
trees. If the switch does not receive BPDU packets in a specified period, spanning trees will be
recalculated because BPDU packets time out. When a switch becomes a root bridge, it regularly sends
BPDUs at the interval specified by the hello time you have configured on it. The other none-root-bridge
switches adopt the interval specified by the hello time.
As for the configuration of the three time-related parameters (namely, the hello time, forward delay, and
max age parameters), the following formulas must be met to prevent frequent network jitter.
2 × (forward delay – 1 second) >= max age
Max age >= 2 × (hello time + 1 second)
You are recommended to specify the network diameter of the switched network and the hello time by
using the stp root primary or stp root secondary command. After that, the three proper time-related
parameters are automatically calculated by MSTP.
Related commands: stp timer forward-delay, stp timer max-age, stp bridge-diameter.

Examples

# Set the hello time to 400 centiseconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp timer hello 400

stp timer max-age

Syntax

stp timer max-age centi-seconds

undo stp timer max-age

View

System view

Parameters

centi-seconds: Max age to be set, in the range of 600 to 4,000 (in centiseconds).

Description

Use the stp timer max-age command to set the max age of the switch.
Use the undo stp timer max-age command to restore the default max age.
By default, the max age of a switch is 2,000 centiseconds.

1-42
MSTP is capable of detecting link failures and automatically restoring redundant links to the forwarding
state. In CIST, switches use the max age parameter to judge whether or not a received configuration
BPDU times out. Spanning trees will be recalculated if a configuration BPDU received by a port times
out.
The max age is meaningless to MSTIs. The max age configured for the root bridge of the CIST applies
to all switches operating on the CIST, including the root bridge.
As for the configuration of the three time-related parameters (namely, the hello time, forward delay, and
max age parameters), the following formulas must be met to prevent frequent network jitter:
2 × (forward delay – 1 second) >= max age,
Max age >= 2 × (hello time + 1 second).
You are recommended to specify the network diameter of the switched network and the hello time
parameter by using the stp root primary or stp root secondary command. After that, the three proper
time-related parameters are automatically determined by MSTP.
Related commands: stp timer forward-delay, stp timer hello, stp bridge-diameter.

Examples

# Set the max age to 1,000 centiseconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp timer max-age 1000

stp timer-factor

Syntax

stp timer-factor number

undo stp timer-factor

View

System view

Parameters

number: Hello time factor to be set, in the range of 1 to 10.

Description

Use the stp timer-factor command to set the timeout time of a switch in the form of a multiple of the
hello time.
Use the undo stp timer-factor command to restore the hello time factor to the default value.
By default, the hello time factor of the switch is 3.
A switch regularly sends protocol packets to its neighboring devices at the interval specified by the hello
time parameter to test the links. Generally, a switch regards its upstream switch faulty if the former does
receive any protocol packets from the latter in a period three times of the hello time and then initiates the
spanning tree recalculation process.
Spanning trees may be recalculated even in a steady network if an upstream switch is always busy. You
can configure the hello time factor to a larger number to avoid this problem. Normally, the timeout time

1-43
can be four (or more) times of the hello time. For a steady network, the timeout time can be five to seven
times of the hello time.

Examples

# Set the hello time factor to 7.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp timer-factor 7

stp transmit-limit

Syntax

z Ethernet port view:

stp transmit-limit packetnum
undo stp transmit-limit
z System view:
stp interface interface-list transmit-limit packetnum
undo stp interface interface-list transmit-limit

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

packetnum: Maximum number of configuration BPDUs a port can transmit in each hello time. This
argument ranges from 1 to 255.
interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the
form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>,
where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.

Description

z Use the stp transmit-limit command to set the maximum number of configuration BPDUs the
current port can transmit in each hello time. Use the undo stp transmit-limit command to restore
the maximum number to the default value on the current port.
z Use the stp interface transmit-limit command to set the maximum number of configuration
BPDUs each specified port can send in each hello time. Use the undo stp interface
transmit-limit command to restore the maximum number to the default value for each specified
port.
By default, the maximum number of configuration BPDUs a port can transmit in each hello time is 10.
A larger number configured by the stp transmit-limit command allows more configuration BPDUs to be
transmitted in each hello time, which may occupy more switch resources. So you are recommended
configure it to a proper value to avoid network topology jitter and prevent MSTP from occupying too
many bandwidth resources.

1-44
Examples

# Set the maximum number of configuration BPDUs that can be transmitted through GigabitEthernet
1/0/1 in each hello time to 15.
z In Ethernet port view:
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] stp transmit-limit 15

z In system view:
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 transmit-limit 15

# Set the maximum number of configuration BPDUs that can be transmitted through GigabitEthernet
1/0/2, GigabitEthernet 1/0/3 and GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 in each hello time to 15 in system view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 transmit-limit 15

vlan-mapping modulo

Syntax

vlan-mapping modulo modulo

View

MST region view

Parameters

modulo: Modulo by which VLANs are mapped to MSTIs, in the range of 1 to 16.

Description

Use the vlan-mapping modulo command to set the modulo by which VLANs are mapped to MSTIs.
By default, all VLANs in a network are mapped to the CIST (MSTI 0).
MSTP uses a VLAN-to-instance mapping table to describe VLAN-to-instance mappings. You can use
this command to establish the VLAN-to-instance mapping table and map VLANs to MSTIs in a specific
way.
Note that a VLAN cannot be mapped to multiple different MSTIs at the same time. A VLAN-to-instance
mapping becomes invalid when you map the VLAN to another MSTI.

1-45
You can map VLANs to the specific MSTIs rapidly by using the vlan-mapping modulo modulo
command. The ID of the MSTI to which a VLAN is mapped can be figured out by using the following
formula:
(VLAN ID-1) % modulo + 1.
In this formula, (VLAN ID-1) % modulo yields the module of (VLAN ID-1) with regards to the modulo
argument. For example, if you set the modulo argument to 16, then VLAN 1 is mapped to MSTI 1, VLAN
2 is mapped to MSTI 2, …, VLAN 16 is mapped to MSTI 16, VLAN 17 is mapped to MSTI 1, and so on.

Related commands: check region-configuration, revision-level, region-name, active

region-configuration.

Examples

# Map VLANs to MSTIs, with the modulo being 16.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] stp region-configuration
[Sysname-mst-region] vlan-mapping modulo 16

vlan-vpn tunnel

Syntax

vlan-vpn tunnel
undo vlan-vpn tunnel

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the vlan-vpn tunnel command to enable the VLAN-VPN tunnel function for a switch.
Use the undo vlan-vpn tunnel command to disable the VLAN-VPN tunnel function.
The VLAN-VPN tunnel function enables BPDUs to be transparently transmitted between geographically
dispersed user networks through specified VLAN VPNs in operator’s networks, through which spanning
trees can be calculated across these user networks and are independent of those of the operator’s
network.
By default, the VLAN-VPN tunnel function is disabled.

1-46
z The VLAN-VPN tunnel function can only be enabled on STP-enabled devices.
z To enable the VLAN-VPN tunnel function, make sure the links between operator’s networks are
trunk links.

Examples

# Enable the VLAN-VPN tunnel function for the switch.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan-vpn tunnel

1-47
Table of Contents

1 802.1x Configuration Commands ············································································································1-1

802.1x Configuration Commands ···········································································································1-1
display dot1x····································································································································1-1
dot1x ················································································································································1-4
dot1x authentication-method ···········································································································1-5
dot1x dhcp-launch ···························································································································1-6
dot1x guest-vlan ······························································································································1-7
dot1x handshake ·····························································································································1-8
dot1x handshake secure ·················································································································1-9
dot1x max-user······························································································································1-10
dot1x port-control···························································································································1-11
dot1x port-method ·························································································································1-12
dot1x quiet-period··························································································································1-13
dot1x retry······································································································································1-13
dot1x retry-version-max·················································································································1-14
dot1x re-authenticate·····················································································································1-15
dot1x supp-proxy-check ················································································································1-16
dot1x timer·····································································································································1-18
dot1x timer reauth-period ··············································································································1-19
dot1x version-check·······················································································································1-20
reset dot1x statistics ······················································································································1-21

2 Quick EAD Deployment Configuration Commands ···············································································2-1

Quick EAD Deployment Configuration Commands ················································································2-1
dot1x free-ip·····································································································································2-1
dot1x timer acl-timeout ····················································································································2-2
dot1x url···········································································································································2-2

3 HABP Configuration Commands ·············································································································3-1

HABP Configuration Commands ············································································································3-1
display habp ····································································································································3-1
display habp table····························································································································3-2
display habp traffic···························································································································3-2
habp enable·····································································································································3-3
habp server vlan ······························································································································3-4
habp timer········································································································································3-4

4 System Guard Configuration Commands·······························································································4-1

System-Guard Configuration Commands ·······························································································4-1
display system-guard attack-record ································································································4-1
display system-guard state··············································································································4-1
system-guard detect-threshold········································································································4-2
system-guard enable ·······················································································································4-3
system-guard timer-interval ·············································································································4-3

i
1 802.1x Configuration Commands

802.1x Configuration Commands

display dot1x

Syntax

display dot1x [ sessions | statistics ] [ interface interface-list ]

View

Any view

Parameters

sessions: Displays the information about 802.1x sessions.

statistics: Displays the statistics on 802.1x.
interface: Display the 802.1x-related information about a specified port.
interface-list: Ethernet port list, in the form of interface-list= { interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, in which interface-type specifies the type of an Ethernet
port and interface-number is the number of the port. The string “&<1-10>” means that up to 10 port lists
can be provided.

Description

Use the display dot1x command to display 802.1x-related information, such as configuration
information, operation information (session information), and statistics.
When the interface-list argument is not provided, this command displays 802.1x-related information
about all the ports.
The output information can be used to verify 802.1 x-related configurations and to troubleshoot.
Related commands: reset dot1x statistics, dot1x, dot1x retry, dot1x max-user, dot1x port-control,
dot1x port-method, dot1x timer.

Examples

# Display 802.1x-related information.

<Sysname> display dot1x
Global 802.1X protocol is enabled
CHAP authentication is enabled
DHCP-launch is disabled
Handshake is enabled
Proxy trap checker is disabled
Proxy logoff checker is disabled
EAD Quick Deploy is enabled

1-1
Configuration: Transmit Period 30 s, Handshake Period 15 s
ReAuth Period 3600 s, ReAuth MaxTimes 2
Quiet Period 60 s, Quiet Period Timer is disabled
Supp Timeout 30 s, Server Timeout 100 s
Interval between version requests is 30s
Maximal request times for version information is 3
The maximal retransmitting times 2
EAD Quick Deploy configuration:
Url: http: //192.168.19.23
Free-ip: 192.168.19.0 255.255.255.0
Acl-timeout: 30 m

Total maximum 802.1x user resource number is 1024

Total current used 802.1x resource number is 1

GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is link-up
802.1X protocol is enabled
Proxy trap checker is disabled
Proxy logoff checker is disabled
Version-Check is disabled
The port is an authenticator
Authentication Mode is Auto
Port Control Type is Port-based
ReAuthenticate is disabled
Max number of on-line users is 256

Authentication Success: 4, Failed: 2

EAPOL Packets: Tx 7991, Rx 14
Sent EAP Request/Identity Packets : 7981
EAP Request/Challenge Packets: 0
Received EAPOL Start Packets : 5
EAPOL LogOff Packets: 1
EAP Response/Identity Packets : 4
EAP Response/Challenge Packets: 4
Error Packets: 0
1. Authenticated user : MAC address: 000d-88f6-44c1

Controlled User(s) amount to 1

GigabitEthernet1/0/2
……

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display dot1x command

Field Description
802.1x protocol (802.1x for short) is enabled on
Equipment 802.1X protocol is enabled
the switch.
CHAP authentication is enabled CHAP authentication is enabled.

1-2
Field Description
DHCP-triggered. 802.1x authentication is
DHCP-launch is disabled
disabled.
The online user handshaking function is
Handshake is enabled
enabled.

Whether or not to send Trap packets when

detecting a supplicant system logs in through a
proxy.
z Disable means the switch does not send Trap
Proxy trap checker is disabled packets when it detects that a supplicant
system logs in through a proxy.
z Enable means the switch sends Trap packets
when it detects that a supplicant system logs
in through a proxy.
Whether or not to disconnect a supplicant
system when detecting it logs in through a proxy.
z Disable means the switch does not
Proxy logoff checker is disabled disconnect a supplicant system when it
detects that the latter logs in through a proxy.
z Enable means the switch disconnects a
supplicant system when it detects that the
latter logs in through a proxy.
EAD Quick Deploy is enabled Quick EAD deployment is enabled.
Setting of the Transmission period timer (the
Transmit Period
tx-period)
Setting of the handshake period timer (the
Handshake Period
handshake-period)
ReAuth Period Re-authentication interval
ReAuth MaxTimes Maximum times of re-authentications
Setting of the quiet period timer (the
Quiet Period
quiet-period)
The quiet period timer is disabled here. It can
Quiet Period Timer is disabled
also be configured as enabled when necessary.
Setting of the supplicant timeout timer
Supp Timeout
(supp-timeout)
Setting of the server-timeout timer
Server Timeout
(server-timeout)
The maximum number of times that a switch can
The maximal retransmitting times send authentication request packets to a
supplicant system
Url URL for HTTP redirection
Free IP range that users can access before
Free-ip
passing authentication
Acl-timeout ACL timeout period
The maximum number of 802.1x users that a
Total maximum 802.1x user resource number
switch can accommodate
Total current used 802.1x resource number The number of online supplicant systems
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is link-down GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 port is down.

1-3
Field Description
802.1X protocol is disabled 802.1x is disabled on the port
Whether or not to send Trap packets when
detecting a supplicant system in logging in
through a proxy.
z Disable means the switch does not send Trap
Proxy trap checker is disabled packets when it detects that a supplicant
system logs in through a proxy.
z Enable means the switch sends Trap packets
when it detects that a supplicant system logs
in through a proxy.
Whether or not to disconnect a supplicant
system when detecting it in logging in through a
proxy.
z Disable means the switch does not
Proxy logoff checker is disabled disconnect a supplicant system when it
detects that the latter logs in through a proxy.
z Enable means the switch disconnects a
supplicant system when it detects that the
latter logs in through a proxy.
Whether or not the client version checking
function is enabled:
Version-Check is disabled z Disable means the switch does not checks
client version.
z Enable means the switch checks client
version.
The port is an authenticator The port acts as an authenticator system.
Authentication Mode is Auto The port access control mode is Auto.
The access control method of the port is
Port Control Type is Mac-based MAC-based. That is, supplicant systems are
authenticated based on their MAC addresses.
ReAuthenticate is disabled 802.1x re-authentication is disabled on the port.
The maximum number of online users that the
Max number of on-line users
port can accommodate
… Information omitted here

dot1x

Syntax

dot1x [ interface interface-list ]

undo dot1x [ interface interface-list ]

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

interface-list: Ethernet port list, in the form of interface-list= { interface-type interface-number [ to

interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, in which interface-type specifies the type of an Ethernet

1-4
port and interface-number is the number of the port. The string “&<1-10>” means that up to 10 port lists
can be provided.

Description

Use the dot1x command to enable 802.1x globally or for specified Ethernet ports.
Use the undo dot1x command to disable 802.1x globally or for specified Ethernet ports.
By default, 802.1x is disabled globally and also on all ports.
In system view:
z If you do not provide the interface-list argument, the dot1x command enables 802.1x globally.
z If you specify the interface-list argument, the dot1x command enables 802.1x for the specified
Ethernet ports.
In Ethernet port view, the interface-list argument is not available and the command enables 802.1x for
only the current Ethernet port.
802.1x-related configurations take effect on a port only after 802.1x is enabled both globally and on the
port.

z The settings of 802.1x and MAC address learning limit are mutually exclusive. Enabling 802.1x on
a port will prevent you from setting the limit on MAC address learning on the port and vice versa.
z The settings of 802.1x and aggregation group member are mutually exclusive. Enabling 802.1x on
a port will prevent you from adding the port to an aggregation group and vice versa.

Related commands: display dot1x.

Examples

# Enable 802.1x for GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

# Enable 802.1x globally.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x

dot1x authentication-method

Syntax

dot1x authentication-method { chap | pap | eap }

undo dot1x authentication-method

1-5
View

System view

Parameters

chap: Authenticates using challenge handshake authentication protocol (CHAP).

pap: Authenticates using password authentication protocol (PAP).
eap: Authenticates using extensible authentication protocol (EAP).

Description

Use the dot1x authentication-method command to set the 802.1x authentication method.
Use the undo dot1x authentication-method command to revert to the default 802.1x authentication
method.
The default 802.1x authentication method is CHAP.
PAP applies a two-way handshaking procedure. In this method, passwords are transmitted in plain text.
CHAP applies a three-way handshaking procedure. In this method, user names are transmitted rather
than passwords. Therefore this method is safer.
In EAP authentication, a switch authenticates supplicant systems by encapsulating 802.1x
authentication information in EAP packets and sending the packets to the RADIUS server, instead of
converting the packets into RADIUS packets before forwarding to the RADIUS server. You can use EAP
authentication in one of the four sub-methods: PEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and EAP-MD5.
Related commands: display dot1x.

When the current device operates as the authentication server, EAP authentication is unavailable.

Examples

# Specify the authentication method to PAP.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x authentication-method pap

dot1x dhcp-launch

Syntax

dot1x dhcp-launch
undo dot1x dhcp-launch

View

System view

1-6
Parameters

None

Description

Use the dot1x dhcp-launch command to specify an 802.1x-enabled switch to launch the process to
authenticate a supplicant system when the supplicant system applies for a dynamic IP address through
DHCP.
Use the undo dot1x dhcp-launch command to disable an 802.1x-enabled switch from authenticating
a supplicant system when the supplicant system applies for a dynamic IP address through DHCP.
By default, an 802.1x-enabled switch does not authenticate a supplicant system when the latter applies
for a dynamic IP address through DHCP.
Related commands: display dot1x.

Examples

# Configure to authenticate a supplicant system when it applies for a dynamic IP address through
DHCP.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x dhcp-launch

dot1x guest-vlan

Syntax

dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id [ interface interface-list ]

undo dot1x guest-vlan [ interface interface-list ]

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

vlan-id: VLAN ID of a guest VLAN, in the range 1 to 4094.

interface-list: Ethernet port list, in the form of interface-list= { interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, in which interface-type specifies the type of an Ethernet
port and interface-number is the number of the port. The string “&<1-10>” means that up to 10 port lists
can be provided.

Description

Use the dot1x guest-vlan command to enable the guest VLAN function for ports.
Use the undo dot1x guest-vlan command to disable the guest VLAN function for ports.
After 802.1x and guest VLAN are properly configured on a port:
z If the switch receives no response from the port after sending EAP-Request/Identity packets to the
port for the maximum number of times, the switch will add the port to the guest VLAN.
z Users in a guest VLAN can access the guest VLAN resources without 802.1x authentication.
However, they have to pass the 802.1x authentication to access the external resources.

1-7
In system view,
z If you do not provide the interface-list argument, these two commands apply to all the ports of the
switch.
z If you specify the interface-list argument, these two commands apply to the specified ports.
In Ethernet port view, the interface-list argument is not available and these two commands apply to only
the current Ethernet port.

z The guest VLAN function is available only when the switch operates in the port-based
authentication mode.
z Only one guest VLAN can be configured on a switch.
z The guest VLAN function is unavailable when the dot1x dhcp-launch command is executed on
the switch, because the switch does not send authentication request packets in this case.

Examples

# Configure the switch to operate in the port-based authentication mode.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x port-method portbased

# Enable the guest VLAN function for all the ports.

[Sysname] dot1x guest-vlan 1

dot1x handshake

Syntax

dot1x handshake enable

undo dot1x handshake enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the dot1x handshake enable command to enable the online user handshaking function.
Use the undo dot1x handshake enable command to disable the online user handshaking function.
By default, the online user handshaking function is enabled.

1-8
z To enable the proxy detecting function, you need to enable the online user handshaking function
first.
z With the support of H3C proprietary clients, handshaking packets can be used to test whether or
not a user is online.
z As clients that are not of H3C do not support the online user handshaking function, switches cannot
receive handshaking acknowledgement packets from them in handshaking periods. To prevent
users being falsely considered offline, you need to disable the online user handshaking function in
this case.

Examples

# Enable the online user handshaking function.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x handshake enable

dot1x handshake secure

Syntax

dot1x handshake secure

undo dot1x handshake secure

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the dot1x handshake secure command to enable the handshaking packet protection function,
protecting the device against attacks from fake clients.
Use the undo dot1x handshake secure command to disable the handshaking packet protection
function.
By default, the handshaking packet protection function is disabled.

The handshaking packet protection function requires the cooperation of the client and the
authentication server. If either of the two ends does not support the function, you need to disable it on
the other one.

1-9
Examples

# Enable the handshaking packet protection function.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] dot1x handshake secure

dot1x max-user

Syntax

dot1x max-user user-number [ interface interface-list ]

undo dot1x max-user [ interface interface-list ]

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

user-number: Maximum number of users a port can accommodate, in the range 1 to 256.
interface-list: Ethernet port list, in the form of interface-list= { interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, in which interface-type specifies the type of an Ethernet
port and interface-number is the number of the port. The string “&<1-10>” means that up to 10 port lists
can be provided.

Description

Use the dot1x max-user command to set the maximum number of users an Ethernet port can
accommodate.
Use the undo dot1x max-user command to revert to the default maximum user number.
By default, a port can accommodate up to 256 users.
In system view:
z If you do not provide the interface-list argument, these two commands apply to all the ports of the
switch.
z If you specify the interface-list argument, these two commands apply to the specified ports.
In Ethernet port view, the interface-list argument is not available and the commands apply to only the
current port.
Related commands: display dot1x.

Examples

# Configure the maximum number of users that GigabitEthernet 1/01 port can accommodate to be 32.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x max-user 32 interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

1-10
dot1x port-control

Syntax

dot1x port-control { auto | authorized-force | unauthorized-force } [ interface interface-list ]

undo dot1x port-control [ interface interface-list ]

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

auto: Specifies to operate in auto access control mode. When a port operates in this mode, all the
unauthenticated hosts connected to it are unauthorized. In this case, only EAPoL packets can be
exchanged between the switch and the hosts. And the hosts connected to the port are authorized to
access the network resources after the hosts pass the authentication. Normally, a port operates in this
mode.
authorized-force: Specifies to operate in authorized-force access control mode. When a port
operates in this mode, all the hosts connected to it can access the network resources without being
authenticated.
unauthorized-force: Specifies to operate in unauthorized-force access control mode. When a port
operates in this mode, the hosts connected to it cannot access the network resources.
interface-list: Ethernet port list, in the form of interface-list= { interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, in which interface-type specifies the type of an Ethernet
port and interface-number is the number of the port. The string “&<1-10>” means that up to 10 port lists
can be provided.

Description

Use the dot1x port-control command to specify the access control mode for specified Ethernet ports.
Use the undo dot1x port-control command to revert to the default access control mode.
The default access control mode is auto.
Use the dot1x port-control command to configure the access control mode for specified
802.1x-enabled ports.
In system view:
z If you do not provide the interface-list argument, these two commands apply to all the ports of the
switch.
z If you specify the interface-list argument, these commands apply to the specified ports.
In Ethernet port view, the interface-list argument is not available and the commands apply to only the
current Ethernet port.
Related commands: display dot1x.

Examples

# Specify GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to operate in unauthorized-force access control mode.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x port-control unauthorized-force interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

1-11
dot1x port-method

Syntax

dot1x port-method { macbased | portbased } [ interface interface-list ]

undo dot1x port-method [ interface interface-list ]

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

macbased: Performs MAC-based authentication.

portbased: Performs port-based authentication.
interface-list: Ethernet port list, in the form of interface-list= { interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, in which interface-type specifies the type of an Ethernet
port and interface-number is the number of the port. The string “&<1-10>” means that up to 10 port lists
can be provided.

Description

Use the dot1x port-method command to specify the access control method for specified Ethernet
ports.
Use the undo dot1x port-method command to revert to the default access control method.
By default, the access control method is macbased.
This command specifies the way in which the users are authenticated.
z In MAC-based authentication mode, the users connected to the port are authenticated separately.
Thus, log-off of a user will not affect other users.
z In port-based authentication mode, all the users connected to the port can access the network
without being authenticated if a user among them passes the authentication. When the user logs
off, the network is inaccessible to all other supplicant systems too.
z Changing the access control method on a port by the dot1x port-method command will forcibly log
out the online 802.1x users on the port.
In system view:
z If you do not provide the interface-list argument, these two commands apply to all the ports of the
switch.
z If you specify the interface-list argument, these commands apply to the specified ports.
In Ethernet port view, the interface-list argument is not available and the commands apply to only the
current Ethernet port.
Related commands: display dot1x.

Examples

# Specify to authenticate users connected to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 by port numbers.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x port-method portbased interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

1-12
dot1x quiet-period

Syntax

dot1x quiet-period
undo dot1x quiet-period

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the dot1x quiet-period command to enable the quiet-period timer.

Use the undo dot1x quiet-period command to disable the quiet-period timer.
When a user fails to pass the authentication, the authenticator system (such as a 3Com switch) will stay
quiet for a period (determined by the quiet-period timer) before it performs another authentication.
During the quiet period, the authenticator system performs no 802.1x authentication of the user.
By default, the quiet-period timer is disabled.
Related commands: display dot1x, dot1x timer.

Examples

# Enable the quiet-period timer.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x quiet-period

dot1x retry

Syntax

dot1x retry max-retry-value

undo dot1x retry

View

System view

Parameters

max-retry-value: Maximum number of times that a switch sends authentication request packets to a
user. This argument ranges from 1 to 10.

Description

Use the dot1x retry command to specify the maximum number of times that a switch sends
authentication request packets to a user.
Use the undo dot1x retry command to revert to the default value.
By default, a switch sends authentication request packets to a user for up to 2 times.

1-13
After a switch sends an authentication request packet to a user, it sends another authentication request
packet if it does not receive response from the user after a specific period of time. If the switch still
receives no response when the configured maximum number of authentication request transmission
attempts is reached, it stops sending requests to the user. This command applies to all ports.
Related commands: display dot1x.

Examples

# Specify the maximum number of times that the switch sends authentication request packets to be 9.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x retry 9

dot1x retry-version-max

Syntax

dot1x retry-version-max max-retry-version-value

undo dot1x retry-version-max

View

System view

Parameters

max-retry-version-value: Maximum number of times that a switch sends version request packets to a
user. This argument ranges from 1 to 10.

Description

Use the dot1x retry-version-max command to set the maximum number of times that a switch sends
version request packets to a user.
Use the undo dot1x retry-version-max command to revert to the default value.
By default, a switch sends version request packets to a user for up to 3 times.
After a switch sends a version request packet to a user, it sends another version request packet if it
does receive response from the user after a specific period of time (as determined by the client version
request timer). When the number set by this command has reached and there is still no response from
the user, the switch continues the following authentication procedures without sending version requests.
This command applies to all the ports with the version checking function enabled.
Related commands: display dot1x, dot1x timer.

1-14
Examples

# Configure the maximum number of times that the switch sends version request packets to 6.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x retry-version-max 6

dot1x re-authenticate

Syntax

dot1x re-authenticate [ interface interface-list ]

undo dot1x re-authenticate [ interface interface-list ]

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

interface-list: Ethernet port list, in the form of interface-list= { interface-type interface-number [ to

interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, in which interface-type specifies the type of an Ethernet
port and interface-number is the number of the port. The string “&<1-10>” means that up to 10 port lists
can be provided.

Description

Use the dot1x re-authenticate command to enable 802.1x re-authentication on specific ports or on all
ports of the switch.
Use the undo dot1x re-authenticate command to disable 802.1x re-authentication on specific ports or
on all ports of the switch.
By default, 802.1x re-authentication is disabled on all ports.
In system view:
z If you do not specify the interface-list argument, this command will enable 802.1x re-authentication
on all ports.
z If you specify the interface-list argument, the command will enable 802.1x on the specified ports.
In Ethernet port view, the interface-list argument is not available and 8021.x re-authentication is
enabled on the current port only.

802.1x must be enabled globally and on the current port before 802.1x re-authentication can be
configured on a port.

Examples

# Enable 802.1x re-authentication on port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view

1-15
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x
802.1X is enabled globally.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] dot1x
802.1X is enabled on port GigabitEthernet1/0/1 already.
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] dot1x re-authenticate
Re-authentication is enabled on port GigabitEthernet1/0/1

dot1x supp-proxy-check

Syntax

dot1x supp-proxy-check { logoff | trap } [ interface interface-list ]

undo dot1x supp-proxy-check { logoff | trap } [ interface interface-list ]

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

logoff: Disconnects a user upon detecting it logging in through a proxy or through multiple network
adapters.
trap: Sends Trap packets upon detecting a user logging in through a proxy or through multiple network
adapters.
interface-list: Ethernet port list, in the form of interface-list= { interface-type interface-number [ to
interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, in which interface-type specifies the type of an Ethernet
port and interface-number is the number of the port. The string “&<1-10>” means that up to 10 port lists
can be provided.

Description

Use the dot1x supp-proxy-check command to enable 802.1x proxy checking for specified ports.
Use the undo dot1x supp-proxy-check command to disable 802.1x proxy checking for specified
ports.
By default, 802.1x proxy checking is disabled on all Ethernet ports.
In system view:
z If you do not specify the interface-list argument, the configurations performed by these two
commands are global.
z If you specify the interface-list argument, these two commands apply to the specified Ethernet
ports.
In Ethernet port view, the interface-list argument is not available and the commands apply to only the
current Ethernet port.
The proxy checking function takes effect on a port only when the function is enabled both globally and
on the port.
802.1x proxy checking checks for:
z Users logging in through proxies
z Users logging in through IE proxies
1-16
z Whether or not a user logs in through multiple network adapters (that is, when the user attempts to
log in, it contains more than one active network adapters.)
A switch can optionally take the following actions in response to any of the above three cases:
z Only disconnects the user but sends no Trap packets, which can be achieved by using the dot1x
supp-proxy-check logoff command.
z Sends Trap packets without disconnecting the user, which can be achieved by using the dot1x
supp-proxy-check trap command.
This function needs the cooperation of 802.1x clients and the CAMS server:
z Multiple network adapter checking, proxy checking, and IE proxy checking are enabled on the
802.1x client.
z The CAMS server is configured to disable the use of multiple network adapters, proxies, and IE
proxy.
By default, proxy checking is disabled on 802.1x client. In this case, if you configure the CAMS server to
disable the use of multiple network adapters, proxies, and IE proxy, it sends messages to the 802.1x
client to ask the latter to disable the use of multiple network adapters, proxies, and IE proxy after the
user passes the authentication.

z The 802.1x proxy checking function needs the cooperation of H3C's 802.1x client program.
z The proxy checking function takes effect only after the client version checking function is enabled
on the switch (using the dot1x version-check command).

Related commands: display dot1x.

Examples

# Configure to disconnect the users connected to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 through GigabitEthernet 1/0/8
ports if they are detected logging in through proxies.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x supp-proxy-check logoff
[Sysname] dot1x supp-proxy-check logoff interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet
1/0/8

# Configure the switch to send Trap packets if the users connected to GigabitEthernet 1/0/9 port is
detected logging in through proxies.
[Sysname] dot1x supp-proxy-check trap
[Sysname] dot1x supp-proxy-check trap interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/9

1-17
dot1x timer

Syntax

dot1x timer { handshake-period handshake-period-value | quiet-period quiet-period-value |

server-timeout server-timeout-value | supp-timeout supp-timeout-value | tx-period tx-period-value |
ver-period ver-period-value }
undo dot1x timer { handshake-period | quiet-period | server-timeout | supp-timeout | tx-period |
ver-period }

View

System view

Parameters

handshake-period handshake-period-value: Sets the handshake timer. This timer sets the
handshake-period and is triggered after a supplicant system passes the authentication. It sets the
interval for a switch to send handshake request packets to online users. If you set the number of retries
to N by using the dot1x retry command, an online user is considered offline when the switch does not
receive response packets from it in a period N times of the handshake-period.
The handshake-period-value argument ranges from 5 to 1,024 (in seconds). By default, the handshake
timer is set to 15 seconds.
quiet-period quiet-period-value: Sets the quiet-period timer. This timer sets the quiet-period. When a
supplicant system fails to pass the authentication, the switch quiets for the set period (set by the
quiet-period timer) before it processes another authentication request re-initiated by the supplicant
system. During this quiet period, the switch does not perform any 802.1x authentication-related actions
for the supplicant system.
The quiet-period-value argument ranges from 10 to 120 (in seconds). By default, the quiet-period timer
is set to 60 seconds.
server-timeout server-timeout-value: Sets the RADIUS server timer. This timer sets the server-timeout
period. After sending an authentication request packet to the RADIUS server, a switch sends another
authentication request packet if it does not receive the response from the RADIUS server when this
timer times out.
The server-timeout-value argument ranges from 100 to 300 (in seconds). By default, the RADIUS
server timer is set to 100 seconds.
supp-timeout supp-timeout-value: Sets the supplicant system timer. This timer sets the supp-timeout
period and is triggered by the switch after the switch sends a request/challenge packet to a supplicant
system (The packet is used to request the supplicant system for the MD5 encrypted string.) The switch
sends another request/challenge packet to the supplicant system if the switch does not receive the
response from the supplicant system when this timer times out..
The supp-timeout-value argument ranges from 10 to 120 (in seconds). By default, the supplicant
system timer is set to 30 seconds.
tx-period tx-period-value: Sets the transmission timer. This timer sets the tx-period and is triggered in
two cases. The first case is when the client requests for authentication. The switch sends a unicast
request/identity packet to a supplicant system and then triggers the transmission timer. The switch
sends another request/identity packet to the supplicant system if it does not receive the reply packet
from the supplicant system when this timer times out. The second case is when the switch

1-18
authenticates the 802.1x client who cannot request for authentication actively. The switch sends
multicast request/identity packets periodically through the port enabled with 802.1x function. In this
case, this timer sets the interval to send the multicast request/identity packets.
The tx-period-value argument ranges from 1 to 120 (in seconds). By default, the transmission timer is
set to 30 seconds.
ver-period ver-period-value: Sets the client version request timer. This timer sets the version period
and is triggered after a switch sends a version request packet. The switch sends another version
request packet if it does receive version response packets from the supplicant system when the timer
expires.
The ver-period-value argument ranges from 1 to 30 (in seconds). By default, the client version request
timer is set to 30 seconds.

Description

Use the dot1x timer command to set a specified 802.1x timer.

Use the undo dot1x timer command to restore a specified 802.1x timer to the default setting.
During an 802.1x authentication process, multiple timers are triggered to ensure that the supplicant
systems, the authenticator systems, and the Authentication servers interact with each other in an
orderly way. To make authentications being processed in the desired way, you can use the dot1x timer
command to set the timers as needed. This may be necessary in some special situations or in tough
network environments. Normally, the defaults are recommended. (Note that some timers cannot be
adjusted.)
Related commands: display dot1x.

Examples

# Set the RADIUS server timer to 150 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x timer server-timeout 150

dot1x timer reauth-period

Syntax

dot1x timer reauth-period reauth-period-value

undo dot1x timer reauth-period

View

System view

Parameters

reauth-period reauth-period-value: Specifies re-authentication interval, in seconds. After this timer

expires, the switch initiates 802.1x re-authentication. The value of the reauth-period-value argument
ranges from 60 to 7,200.

Description

Use the dot1x timer reauth-period command to configure the interval for 802.1x re-authentication.

1-19
Use the undo dot1x timer reauth-period command to restore the default 802.1x re-authentication
interval.
By default, the 802.1x re-authentication interval is 3,600 seconds.

Examples

# Set the 802.1x re-authentication interval to 150 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dot1x timer reauth-period 150

dot1x version-check

Syntax

dot1x version-check [ interface interface-list ]

undo dot1x version-check [ interface interface-list ]

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

interface-list: Ethernet port list, in the form of interface-list= { interface-type interface-number [ to

Description

Use the dot1x version-check command to enable 802.1x client version checking for specified Ethernet
ports.
Use the undo dot1x version-check command to disable 802.1x client version checking for specified
Ethernet ports.
By default, 802.1x client version checking is disabled on all the Ethernet ports.
In system view:
z If you do not provide the interface-list argument, these two commands apply to all the ports of the
switch.
z If you specify the interface-list argument, these commands apply to the specified ports.
In Ethernet port view, the interface-list argument is not available and the commands apply to only the
current Ethernet port.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to check the version of the 802.1x client upon receiving
authentication packets.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] dot1x version-check

1-20
reset dot1x statistics

Syntax

reset dot1x statistics [ interface interface-list ]

View

User view

Parameters

interface-list: Ethernet port list, in the form of interface-list= { interface-type interface-number [ to

Description

Use the reset dot1x statistics command to clear 802.1x-related statistics.

To retrieve the latest 802.1x-related statistics, you can use this command to clear the existing
802.1x-related statistics first.
When you execute this command,
If the interface-list argument is not specified, this command clears the global 802.1x statistics and the
802.1x statistics on all the ports.
If the interface-list argument is specified, this command clears the 802.1x statistics on the specified
ports.
Related commands: display dot1x.

Examples

# Clear 802.1x statistics on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> reset dot1x statistics interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

1-21
2 Quick EAD Deployment Configuration Commands

Quick EAD Deployment Configuration Commands

dot1x free-ip

Syntax

dot1x free-ip ip-address { mask-address | mask-length }

undo dot1x free-ip [ ip-address { mask-address | mask-length } ]

View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: Free IP address, in dotted decimal notation.

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display habp command to display HABP configuration and status.

Examples

# Display HABP configuration and status.

<Sysname> display habp
Global HABP information:
HABP Mode: Server
Sending HABP request packets every 20 seconds
Bypass VLAN: 2

Table 3-1 Description on the fields of the display habp command

Field Description
Indicates the HABP mode of the switch. A switch
HABP Mode can operate as an HABP server (displayed as
Server) or an HABP client (displayed as Client).
Sending HABP request packets every 20 The HABP request packet transmission interval
seconds is 20 seconds.
Indicates the IDs of the VLANs to which HABP
Bypass VLAN
request packets are sent.

3-1
display habp table

Syntax

display habp table

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display habp table command to display the MAC address table maintained by HABP.

Examples

# Display the MAC address table maintained by HABP.

<Sysname> display habp table
MAC Holdtime Receive Port
001f-3c00-0030 53 GigabitEthernet1/0/1

Table 3-2 Description on the fields of the display habp table command

Field Description
MAC MAC addresses contained in the HABP MAC address table.
Hold time of the entries in the HABP MAC address table. An entry
Holdtime is removed from the table if it is not updated in a period determined
by the hold time.
Receive Port The port from which a MAC address is learned

display habp traffic

Syntax

display habp traffic

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display habp traffic command to display the statistics on HABP packets.

Examples

# Display the statistics on HABP packets.

<Sysname> display habp traffic

3-2
HABP counters :
Packets output: 0, Input: 0
ID error: 0, Type error: 0, Version error: 0
Sent failed: 0

Table 3-3 Description on the fields of the display habp traffic command

Field Description
Packets output Number of the HABP packets sent
Input Number of the HABP packets received
ID error Number of the HABP packets with ID errors
Type error Number of the HABP packets with type errors
Version error Number of the HABP packets with version errors
Number of the HABP packets that failed to be
Sent failed
sent

habp enable

Syntax

habp enable
undo habp enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the habp enable command to enable HABP for a switch.

Use the undo habp enable command to disable HABP for a switch.
By default, HABP is enabled on a switch.
If an 802.1x-enabled switch does not have HABP enabled, it cannot manage the switches attached to it.
So, you need to enable HABP on specific switches in a network with 802.1x enabled.

Examples

# Enable HABP.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] habp enable

3-3
habp server vlan

Syntax

habp server vlan vlan-id

undo habp server

View

System view

Parameters

vlan-id: VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.

Description

Use the habp server vlan command to configure a switch to operate as an HABP server. This
command also specifies the VLAN where HABP packets are broadcast.
Use the undo habp server vlan command to revert to the default HABP mode.
By default, a switch operates as an HABP client.
To specify a switch to operate as an HABP server, you need to enable HABP (using the habp enable
command) for the switch first. When HABP is not enabled, the habp server vlan command cannot take
effect.

Examples

# Specify the switch to operate as an HABP server and the HABP packets to be broadcast in VLAN 2.
(Assume that HABP is enabled.)
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] habp server vlan 2

habp timer

Syntax

habp timer interval

undo habp timer

View

System view

Parameters

interval: Interval (in seconds) to send HABP request packets. This argument ranges from 5 to 600.

Description

Use the habp timer command to set the interval for a switch to send HABP request packets.
Use the undo habp timer command to revert to the default interval.
The default interval for a switch to send HABP request packets is 20 seconds.
Use these two commands on switches operating as HABP servers only.

3-4
Examples

# Configure the switch to send HABP request packets once in every 50 seconds
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] habp timer 50

3-5
4 System Guard Configuration Commands

System-Guard Configuration Commands

display system-guard attack-record

Syntax

display system-guard attack-record

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the display system-guard attack-record command to display the record of detected attacks.

Example

# Display the record of detected attacks.

<Sysname> display system-guard attack-record
Not found attack

display system-guard state

Syntax

display system-guard state

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the display system-guard state command to display the state of the system-guard feature.
Related command: system-guard enable, system-guard detect-threshold, and system-guard
timer-interval.

Example

# Display the state of the system-guard feature.

<Sysname> display system-guard state

4-1
System-guard Status: Enabled
Detect Threshold: 201
Isolated Time: 20
Attack Number: 0

Table 4-1 Description on the fields of the display system-guard state command

Field Description
The enable/disable status of the system-guard
System-guard Status
feature
The threshold for the number of packets when an
Detect Threshold
attack is detected
The length of the isolation after an attack is
Isolated Time
detected
Attack Number The times of detected attacks

system-guard detect-threshold

Syntax

system-guard detect-threshold threshold-value

undo system-guard detect-threshold

View

System view

Parameter

threshold-value: Threshold for the number of packets when an attack is detected, in the range of 200 to
1,000.

Description

Use the system-guard detect-threshold command to set the threshold for the number of packets
when an attack is detected. When the number of inbound packets of the same type exceeds the
threshold, one attack is detected and recorded.
Use the undo system-guard detect-threshold command to restore the threshold to the default value.
By default, the threshold is 200.
Related command: display system-guard state.

Example

# Set the threshold for the number of packets when an attack is detected to 300.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]system-guard detect-threshold 300

4-2
system-guard enable

Syntax

system-guard enable
undo system-guard enable

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the system-guard enable command to enable the system-guard feature.

Use the undo system-guard enable command to disable the system-guard feature.
By default, the system-guard feature is disabled.
Related command: display system-guard state.

Example

# Enable the system-guard feature.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]system-guard enable
System-guard is enabled

system-guard timer-interval

Syntax

system-guard timer-interval isolate-timer

undo system-guard timer-interval

View

System view

Parameter

isolate-timer: Length of the isolation after an attack is detected, in the range of 1 to 10,000 in minutes.

Description

Use the system-guard timer-interval command to set the length of the isolation after an attack is
detected.
Use the undo system-guard timer-interval command to restore the length of the isolation to the
default value.
By default, the length of the isolation after an attack is detected is 10 minutes.
Related command: display system-guard state.

4-3
Example

# Set the length of the isolation after an attack is detected to 20 minutes.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]system-guard timer-interval 20

4-4
Table of Contents

1 AAA Configuration Commands················································································································1-1

AAA Configuration Commands ···············································································································1-1
access-limit······································································································································1-1
accounting ·······································································································································1-2
accounting optional··························································································································1-2
attribute············································································································································1-3
authentication ··································································································································1-4
authentication super ························································································································1-6
authorization ····································································································································1-6
authorization vlan ····························································································································1-7
cut connection ·································································································································1-8
display connection ···························································································································1-9
display domain·······························································································································1-10
display local-user···························································································································1-12
domain ···········································································································································1-13
domain delimiter ····························································································································1-14
idle-cut ···········································································································································1-15
level ···············································································································································1-16
local-user ·······································································································································1-17
local-user password-display-mode································································································1-18
messenger·····································································································································1-18
name··············································································································································1-19
password ·······································································································································1-20
radius-scheme ·······························································································································1-21
scheme ··········································································································································1-21
self-service-url ·······························································································································1-22
service-type ···································································································································1-23
state ···············································································································································1-24
vlan-assignment-mode ··················································································································1-25
RADIUS Configuration Commands·······································································································1-27
accounting optional························································································································1-27
accounting-on enable ····················································································································1-27
calling-station-id mode···················································································································1-29
data-flow-format·····························································································································1-30
display local-server statistics·········································································································1-30
display radius scheme ···················································································································1-31
display radius statistics··················································································································1-33
display stop-accounting-buffer ······································································································1-34
key ·················································································································································1-35
local-server ····································································································································1-36
local-server nas-ip ·························································································································1-37
nas-ip ·············································································································································1-38
primary accounting ························································································································1-39

i
primary authentication ···················································································································1-39
radius client ···································································································································1-40
radius nas-ip ··································································································································1-41
radius scheme ·······························································································································1-42
radius trap······································································································································1-43
reset radius statistics ·····················································································································1-44
reset stop-accounting-buffer··········································································································1-44
retry················································································································································1-45
retry realtime-accounting ···············································································································1-46
retry stop-accounting ·····················································································································1-47
secondary accounting····················································································································1-48
secondary authentication···············································································································1-48
server-type·····································································································································1-49
state ···············································································································································1-50
stop-accounting-buffer enable·······································································································1-51
timer···············································································································································1-52
timer quiet······································································································································1-52
timer realtime-accounting ··············································································································1-53
timer response-timeout··················································································································1-54
user-name-format ··························································································································1-55
HWTACACS Configuration Commands································································································1-56
data-flow-format·····························································································································1-56
display hwtacacs ···························································································································1-57
display stop-accounting-buffer ······································································································1-58
hwtacacs nas-ip·····························································································································1-58
hwtacacs scheme ··························································································································1-59
key ·················································································································································1-59
nas-ip ·············································································································································1-60
primary accounting ························································································································1-61
primary authentication ···················································································································1-62
primary authorization ·····················································································································1-62
reset hwtacacs statistics················································································································1-63
reset stop-accounting-buffer··········································································································1-64
retry stop-accounting ·····················································································································1-64
secondary accounting····················································································································1-65
secondary authentication···············································································································1-66
secondary authorization ················································································································1-66
timer quiet······································································································································1-67
timer realtime-accounting ··············································································································1-68
timer response-timeout··················································································································1-69
user-name-format ··························································································································1-69

2 EAD Configuration Commands················································································································2-1

EAD Configuration Commands···············································································································2-1
security-policy-server·······················································································································2-1

ii
1 AAA Configuration Commands

The maximum length of a domain name is changed from 24 characters to 128 characters. See domain.

AAA Configuration Commands

access-limit

Syntax

access-limit { disable | enable max-user-number }

undo access-limit

View

ISP domain view

Parameters

disable: Specifies not to limit the number of access users that can be contained in current ISP domain.
enable max-user-number: Specifies the maximum number of access users that can be contained in
current ISP domain. The max-user-number argument ranges from 1 to 2,072.

Description

Use the access-limit command to set the maximum number of access users that can be contained in
current ISP domain.
Use the undo access-limit command to restore the default setting.
By default, there is no limit on the number of access users in an ISP domain.
Because resource contention may occur among access users, there is a need to limit the number of
access users in an ISP domain so as to provide reliable performance to the current users in the ISP
domain.

Examples

# Allow ISP domain aabbcc.net to contain at most 500 access users.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[Sysname-isp-aabbcc.net] access-limit enable 500

1-1
accounting

Syntax

accounting { none | radius-scheme radius-scheme-name | hwtacacs-scheme

hwtacacs-scheme-name }
undo accounting

View

ISP domain view

Parameters

none: Specifies not to perform user accounting.

radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Specifies to use a RADIUS accounting scheme. Here,
radius-scheme-name is the name of a RADIUS scheme; it is a string of up to 32 characters.
hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name: Specifies to use an HWTACACS accounting scheme.
Here, hwtacacs-scheme-name is the name of an HWTACACS scheme; it is a string of up to 32
characters.

Description

Use the accounting command to configure an accounting scheme for current ISP domain.
Use the undo accounting command to cancel the accounting scheme configuration for current ISP
domain.
By default, no separate accounting scheme is configured for an ISP domain.
When you use the accounting command to reference a RADIUS or HWTACACS scheme in current
ISP domain, the RADIUS or HWTACACS scheme must already exist.
The accounting command takes precedence over the scheme command. If the accounting
command is used in ISP domain view, the system uses the scheme referenced in the accounting
command to charge the users in the domain. Otherwise, the system uses the scheme referenced in the
scheme command to charge the users.
Related commands: scheme, radius scheme, hwtacacs scheme, accounting optional.

Examples

# Specify "radius" as the RADIUS accounting scheme that will be referenced by ISP domain
"aabbcc.net".
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[Sysname-isp-aabbcc.net] accounting radius-scheme radius

accounting optional

Syntax

accounting optional
undo accounting optional
1-2
View

ISP domain view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the accounting optional command to open the accounting-optional switch.

Use the undo accounting optional command to close the accounting-optional switch so that the
system performs accounting for users unconditionally.
By default, the system performs accounting for users unconditionally..
Note that:
z If the system does not find any available accounting server or fails to communicate with any
accounting server when it performs accounting for an online user, it will not disconnect the user as
long as the accounting optional command has been executed.
z The accounting optional command is commonly used in the cases where only authentication is
needed and accounting is not needed.
z If you configure the accounting optional command in ISP domain view, it is effective to all users in
the domain; if you configure it in RADIUS scheme view, it is effective to users the RADIUS scheme
is used for.

Examples

# Open the accounting-optional switch for the ISP domain named aabbcc.net.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[Sysname-isp-aabbcc.net] accounting optional

attribute

Syntax

attribute { ip ip-address | mac mac-address | idle-cut second | access-limit max-user-number | vlan

vlan-id | location { nas-ip ip-address port port-number | port port-number } }*
undo attribute { ip | mac | idle-cut | access-limit | vlan | location }*

View

Local user view

Parameters

ip ip-address: Sets the IP address of the user.

mac mac-address: Sets the MAC address of the user. Here, mac-address is in H-H-H format.
idle-cut second: Enables the idle-cut function for the local user and sets the allowed idle time. Here,
second is the allowed idle time, which ranges from 60 to 7,200 seconds.

1-3
access-limit max-user-number: Sets the maximum number of users who can access the switch with
the current username. Here, max-user-number ranges from 1 to 1,024.
vlan vlan-id: Sets the VLAN attribute of the user (that is, specifies to which VLAN the user belongs).
Here, vlan-id is an integer ranging from 1 to 4094.
location: Sets the port binding attribute of the user.
nas-ip ip-address: Sets the IP address of an access server, so that the user can be bound to a port on
the server. Here, ip-address is in dotted decimal notation and is 127.0.0.1 by default (representing this
device). When binding the user to a remote port, you must use nas-ip ip-address to specify a remote
access server IP address. When binding the user to a local port, you need not use nas-ip ip-address.
port port-number: Sets the port to which you want to bind the user. Here, port-number is in the format of
device ID/slot number/port number; the device ID ranges from 1 to 8, the slot number ranges from 0 to
15 (if the bound port has no slot number, just input 0 for this item) and the port number ranges from 1 to
255.

Description

Use the attribute command to set the attributes of a user whose service type is lan-access.
Use the undo attribute command to cancel attribute settings of the user.
You may use display local-user command to view the settings of the attributes.

Examples

# Create local user user1 and set the IP address attribute of user1 to 10.110.50.1, allowing only the user
using the IP address of 10.110.50.1 to use the account user1 for authentication.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] local-user user1
New local user added.
[Sysname-luser- user1] password simple pass1
[Sysname-luser- user1] service-type lan-access
[Sysname-luser-user1] attribute ip 10.110.50.1

authentication

Syntax

authentication { radius-scheme radius-scheme-name [ local ] | hwtacacs-scheme

hwtacacs-scheme-name [ local ] | local | none }
undo authentication

View

ISP domain view

Parameters

radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Specifies to use a RADIUS authentication scheme. Here,

radius-scheme-name is a string of up to 32 characters.
hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name: Specifies to use an HWTACACS authentication scheme.
Here, hwtacacs-scheme-name is a string of up to 32 characters.

1-4
local: Specifies to use local authentication scheme.
none: Specifies not to perform authentication.

Description

Use the authentication command to configure an authentication scheme for current ISP domain.
Use the undo authentication command to restore the default authentication scheme setting of current
ISP domain.
By default, no separate authentication scheme is configured for an ISP domain.
Note that:
z Before you can use the authentication command to reference a RADIUS scheme in current ISP
domain, the RADIUS scheme must already exist.
z If you execute the authentication radius-scheme radius-scheme-name local command, the local
scheme is used as the secondary authentication scheme in case no RADIUS server is available.
That is, if the communication between the switch and a RADIUS server is normal, no local
authentication will be performed; otherwise, local authentication will be performed.
z If you execute the authentication hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name local command,
the local scheme is used as the secondary authentication scheme in case no TACACS server is
available. That is, if the communication between the switch and a TACACS server is normal, no
local authentication will be performed; otherwise, local authentication will be performed.
z If you execute the authentication local command, the local scheme is used as the primary
scheme. In this case, there is no secondary authentication scheme.
z If you execute the authentication none command, no authentication will be performed.
z The authentication command takes precedence over the scheme command. If the
authentication command is configured in an ISP domain view, the system uses the authentication
scheme referenced in the command to authenticate the users in the domain; otherwise it uses the
scheme referenced in the scheme command to authenticate the users.
Related commands: scheme, radius scheme, hwtacacs scheme.

Examples

# Reference the RADIUS scheme "radius1" as the authentication scheme of the ISP domain
aabbcc.net.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[Sysname-isp-aabbcc.net] authentication radius-scheme radius1

# Reference the RADIUS scheme "rd" as the authentication scheme and the local scheme as the
secondary authentication scheme of the ISP domain aabbcc.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain aabbcc
New Domain added.
[Sysname-isp-aabbcc] authentication radius-scheme rd local

1-5
authentication super

Syntax

authentication super hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name

undo authentication super

View

ISP domain view

Parameters

hwtacacs-scheme-name: Name of the HWTACACS authentication scheme, a string of 1 to 32

characters.

Description

Use the authentication super command to specify a HWTACACS authentication scheme for user level
switching in the current ISP domain.
Use the undo authentication super command to remove the specified HWTACACS authentication
scheme.
By default, no HWTACACS authentication scheme is configured for user level switching.
When you execute the authentication super command to specify a HWTACACS authentication
scheme for user level switching, the HWTACACS scheme must exist.

The Switch 4200G adopts hierarchical protection for command lines so as to inhibit users at lower
levels from using higher level commands to configure the switches. For details about configuring a
HWTACACS authentication scheme for low-to-high user level switching, refer to Switching User Level
in the Command Line Interface Operation.

Related commands: hwtacacs scheme.

Examples

# Set the HWTACACS scheme to ht for user level switching in the current ISP domain aabbcc.net.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[Sysname-isp-aabbcc.net] authentication super hwtacacs-scheme ht

authorization

Syntax

authorization { none | hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name }

1-6
undo authorization

View

ISP domain view

Parameters

none: Specifies not to use any authorization scheme.

hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name: Specifies to use an HWTACACS scheme. Here,
hwtacacs-scheme-name is the name of an HWTACACS scheme; it is a string of up to 32 characters.

Description

Use the authorization command to configure an authorization scheme for current ISP domain.
Use the undo authorization command to restore the default authorization scheme setting of the ISP
domain.
By default, no separate authorization scheme is configured for an ISP domain.
Related commands: scheme, radius scheme, hwtacacs scheme.

Examples

# Allow users in ISP domain aabbcc.net to access network services without being authorized.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[Sysname-isp-aabbcc.net] authorization none

authorization vlan

Syntax

authorization vlan string

undo authorization vlan

View

Local user view

Parameters

string: Number or descriptor of the authorized VLAN for the current user, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
If it is a numeral string and there is a VLAN with the number configured, it specifies the VLAN. If it is a
numeral string but no VLAN is present with the number, it specifies the VLAN using it as the VLAN
descriptor.

Description

Use the authorization vlan command to specify an authorized VLAN for a local user. A user passing
the authentication of the local RADIUS server can access network resources in the authorized VLAN.
Use the undo authorization vlan command to remove the configuration.
By default, no authorized VLAN is specified for a local user.

1-7
For local RADIUS authentication to take effect, the VLAN assignment mode must be set to string after
you specify authorized VLANs for local users.

Examples

# Specify the authorized VLAN for local user 00-14-22-2C-AA-69 as VLAN 2.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] local-user 00-14-22-2C-AA-69
[Sysname-luser-00-14-22-2C-AA-69] authorization vlan 2

cut connection

Syntax

cut connection { all | access-type { dot1x | mac-authentication } | domain isp-name | interface

interface-type interface-number | ip ip-address | mac mac-address | radius-scheme
radius-scheme-name | vlan vlan-id | ucibindex ucib-index | user-name user-name }

View

System view

Parameters

all: Cuts down all user connections.

access-type { dot1x | mac-authentication }: Cuts down user connections of a specified access type.
dot1x is used to cut down all 802.1x user connections, and mac-authentication is used to cut down all
MAC authentication user connections.
domain isp-name: Cuts down all user connections in a specified ISP domain. Here, isp-name is the
name of an ISP domain, a string of up to 128 characters. You can only specify an existing ISP domain.
interface interface-type interface-number: Cuts down all user connections under a specified port. Here,
interface-type is a port type and interface-number is a port number.
ip ip-address: Cuts down all user connections with a specified IP address.
mac mac-address: Cuts down the user connection with a specified MAC address. Here, mac-address is
in H-H-H format.
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Cuts down all user connections using a specified RADIUS
scheme. Here, radius-scheme-name is a string of up to 32 characters.
vlan vlan-id: Cuts down all user connections of a specified VLAN. Here, vlan-id ranges from 1 to 4094.
ucibindex ucib-index: Cuts down the user connection with a specified connection index. Here,
ucib-index ranges from 0 to 1047.
user-name user-name: Cuts down the connection of a specified user. Here, user-name is a string of up
to 184 characters..

1-8
Description

Use the cut connection command to forcibly cut down one user connection, one type of user
connections, or all user connections.
This command cannot cut down the connections of Telnet and FTP users.
Related commands: display connection.

Examples

# Cut down all user connections under the ISP domain aabbcc.net.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] cut connection domain aabbcc.net

display connection

Syntax

display connection [ access-type { dot1x | mac-authentication } | domain isp-name | interface

View

Any view

Parameters

access-type { dot1x | mac-authentication }: Displays user connections of a specified access type.

Here, dot1x is used to display all 802.1x user connections, and mac-authentication is used to display
all MAC authentication user connections.
domain isp-name: Displays all user connections under specified ISP domain. Here, isp-name is the
name of an ISP domain, a string of up to 128 characters. You can only specify an existing ISP domain.
interface interface-type interface-number: Displays all user connections on a specified port.
ip ip-address: Displays all user connections with a specified IP address.
mac mac-address: Displays the user connection with a specified MAC address. Here, mac-address is
in hexadecimal format (in the form of H-H-H).
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Displays all user connections using a specified RADIUS
scheme. Here, radius-scheme-name is a string of up to 32 characters.
hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name: Displays all user connections using a specified RADIUS
scheme. Here, hwtacacs-scheme-name is a string of up to 32 characters.
vlan vlan-id: Displays all user connections of a specified VLAN. Here, vlan-id ranges from 1 to 4094.
ucibindex ucib-index: Displays the user connection with a specified connection index. Here, ucib-index
ranges from 0 to 1047.
user-name user-name: Displays the connection of a specified user. Here, user-name is a character
string in the format of pure-username@domain-name. The pure-username cannot be longer than 55
characters, the domain-name cannot be longer than 24 characters, and the entire user-name cannot be
longer than 184 characters.

1-9
Description

Use the display connection command to display information about specified or all user connections.
If you execute this command without specifying any parameter, all user connections will be displayed.
This command cannot display information about the connections of FTP users.
Related commands: cut connection.

Examples

# Display information about all user connections.

<Sysname> display connection
------------------unit 1------------------------
Index=40 , Username=user1@domain1
MAC=000f-3d80-4ce5 , IP=0.0.0.0
On Unit 1: Total 1 connections matched, 1 listed.

# Display information about the user connection with index 0.

[Sysname] display connection ucibindex 0
Index=0 , Username=user1@system
MAC=000f-3d80-4ce5 , IP=192.168.0.3
Access=8021X ,Auth=CHAP ,Port=Ether ,Port NO=0x10003001
Initial VLAN=1, Authorization VLAN=1
ACL Group=Disable
CAR=Disable
Priority=Disable
Start=2000-04-03 02:51:53 ,Current=2000-04-03 02:52:22 ,Online=00h00m29s
On Unit 1:Total 1 connections matched, 1 listed.
Total 1 connections matched, 1 listed.

Here, Port NO=0x10003001 means (by the binary bits):

Table 1-1 Description of the Port NO field

31 to 28 bit 27 to 24 bit 23 to 20 bit 19 to 12 bit 11 to 0 bit

UNIT ID Slot number Sub-slot number Port number VLAN ID

display domain

Syntax

display domain [ isp-name ]

View

Any view

Parameters

isp-name: Name of an ISP domain, a string of up to 128 characters. This must be the name of an
existing ISP domain.

1-10
Description

Use the display domain command to display configuration information about one specific or all ISP
domains.
Related commands: access-limit, domain, scheme, state.

Examples

# Display configuration information about all ISP domains.

<Sysname> display domain
0 Domain = system
State = Active
Scheme = LOCAL
Access-limit = 512
Vlan-assignment-mode = Integer
Domain User Template:
Idle-cut = = Enable Time = 60(min) Flow = 200(byte)
Self-service URL = http://aabbcc.net
Messenger Time Maxlimit = 30(min) span = 10(min)

Default Domain Name: system

Total 1 domain(s).1 listed.

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display domain command

Field Description
Domain Domain name
Status of the domain, which can be active or
State
block.
Scheme AAA scheme that the domain uses
Maximum number of local user connections in
Access-Limit
the domain
VLAN assignment mode, which can be Integer or
Vlan-assignment-mode
String.
Domain user template settings, that is, attribute
Domain User Template
settings for all users in the domain.
Idle-Cut Status of the idle-cut function
Self-service URL Self-service URL for password changing
Settings of the messenger time service, which is
for reminding online users of their remaining
online time.
Messenger Time The setting in this example indicates that the
system starts to remind an online user (at an
interval of 10 minutes) when the remaining
online time is 30 minutes.
Default Domain Name Default ISP domain of the system

1-11
display local-user

Syntax

display local-user [ domain isp-name | idle-cut { disable | enable } | vlan vlan-id | service-type { ftp
| lan-access | ssh | telnet | terminal } | state { active | block } | user-name user-name ]

View

Any view

Parameters

domain isp-name: Displays all local users belonging to a specified ISP domain. Here, isp-name is the
name of an ISP domain, a string of up to 128 characters. You can only specify an existing ISP domain.
idle-cut { disable | enable }: Displays the local users who are inhibited from enabling the idle-cut
function, or the local users who are allowed to enable the idle-cut function. Here, disable specifies the
inhibited local users and enable specifies the allowed local users.
vlan vlan-id: Displays the local users belonging to a specified VLAN. Here, vlan-id ranges from 1 to
4094.
service-type: Displays the local users of a specified type. You can specify one of the following user
types: ftp, lan-access (generally, this type of users are Ethernet access users, for example, 802.1x
users), ssh, telnet, and terminal (this type of user is a terminal user who logs into the switch through
the Console port).
state { active | block }: Displays the local users in a specified state. Here active represents the users
allowed to request network services, and block represents the users inhibited from requesting network
services.
user-name user-name: Displays the local user with a specified username. Here, user-name is a string
of up to 184 characters.

Description

Use the display local-user command to display information about specified or all local users.
Related commands: local-user.

Examples

# Display information about all local users.

<Sysname> display local-user
0 The contents of local user test:
State: Active ServiceType Mask: L
Idle-cut: Enable Idle TimeOut: 3600 seconds
Access-limit: Enable Current AccessNum: 1
Max AccessNum: 1024
Bind location: 127.0.0.1/1/0/2 (NAS/UNITID/SUBSLOT/PORT)
Vlan ID: 1
Authorization VLAN: 2
IP address: 192.168.0.108
MAC address: 000d-88f6-44c1
Total 1 local user(s) Matched, 1 listed.

1-12
ServiceType Mask Meaning: C--Terminal F--FTP L--LanAccess S--SSH T--Telnet

Table 1-3 describes the fields in the above display output.

Table 1-3 Description on the fields of the display local-user command

Field Description
State Status of the local user
Service type mask:
T means Telnet service.
S means SSH service.
ServiceType Mask C means client service.
LM means lan-access service.
F means FTP service.
None means no defined service.
Idle-cut Status of the idle-cut function
Access-limit Limit on the number of access users
Current AccessNum Number of current access users
Bind location Whether or not bound to a port

Vlan ID VLAN of the user

Authorization VLAN Authorized VLAN of the user

IP address IP address of the user

MAC address MAC address of the user

domain

Syntax

domain { isp-name | default { disable | enable isp-name } }

undo domain isp-name

View

System view

Parameters

isp-name: Name of an ISP domain, a string of up to 128 characters. This string cannot contain the
following characters: /\:*?<>|. If the domain name includes one or more “~” characters and the last “~” is
followed by numerals, it must be followed by at least five numerals to avoid confusion. This is because
any domain name longer than 16 characters will appear in the form of “system prompt-the first 15
characters of the domain name~4-digit index” in the view prompt to avoid word wrap.
default: Manually changes the default ISP domain, which is "system" by default. There is one and only
one default ISP domain.
disable: Disables the configured default ISP domain.
enable: Enables the configured default ISP domain.

1-13
Description

Use the domain command to create an ISP domain and enter its view, or enter the view of an existing
ISP domain, or configure the default ISP domain.
Use the undo domain command to delete a specified ISP domain.
The ISP domain "system" is used as the default ISP domain before you manually configure the default
ISP domain, and you can use the display domain command to check the settings of the default ISP
domain "system".
After you execute the domain command, the system creates a new ISP domain if the specified ISP
domain does not exist. Once an ISP domain is created, it is in the active state. You can manually
specify an ISP domain as the default domain only when the specified domain already exists.
Related commands: access-limit, scheme, state, display domain.

Examples

# Create a new ISP domain named aabbcc.net.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[Sysname-isp-aabbcc.net]

# Create a new ISP domain named 01234567891234567 (note that it will appear as
012345678912345~0001 in the view prompt).
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]domain 01234567891234567
New Domain added.
[Sysname-isp-012345678912345~0001]

domain delimiter

Syntax

domain delimiter { at | dot }

undo domain delimiter

View

System view

Parameters

at: Specifies “@” as the delimiter between the username and the ISP domain name.
dot: Specifies “.” as the delimiter between the username and the ISP domain name.

Description

Use the domain delimiter command to specify the delimiter form between the username and the ISP
domain name.
Use the undo domain delimiter command to restore the delimiter form to the default setting.

1-14
By default, the“@” character is used as the delimiter between the username and the ISP domain name.

z If you have configured to use "." as the delimiter, for a username that contains multiple ".", the first
"." will be used as the domain delimiter.
z If you have configured to use "@" as the delimiter, the "@" must not appear more than once in the
username. If “.” is the delimiter, the username must not contain any “@”.

Related commands: domain.

Examples

# Specify “.” as the delimiter between the username and the ISP domain name.
<Sysname> system-view
Enter system view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain delimiter dot

idle-cut

Syntax

idle-cut { disable | enable minute flow }

View

ISP domain view

Parameters

disable: Disables the idle-cut function for the domain.

enable: Enables the idle-cut function for the domain.
minute: Maximum idle time in minutes, ranging from 1 to 120.
flow: Minimum traffic in bytes, ranging from 1 to 10,240,000.

Description

Use the idle-cut command to set the user idle-cut function in current ISP domain. If a user’s traffic in the
specified period of time is less than the specified amount, the system will disconnect the user.
By default, this function is disabled.
Note that if the authentication server assigns the idle-cut settings, the assigned ones take precedence
over the settings configured here.
Related commands: domain.

1-15
Examples

# Enable the idle-cut function for ISP domain aabbcc.net, setting the maximum idle time to 50 minutes
and the minimum traffic to 500 bytes. After this configuration, if a user in the domain has no traffic or has
less than 500 bytes of traffic within 50 minutes, the system will tear down the user’s connection.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[Sysname-isp-aabbcc.net] idle-cut enable 50 500

level

Syntax

level level
undo level

View

Local user view

Parameters

level: Privilege level to be set for the user. It is an integer ranging from 0 to 3.

Description

Use the level command to set the privilege level of the user. The privilege level of the user corresponds
to the command level of the user. For detailed information, refer to the description of the
command-privilege level command in the command line interface part.
Use the undo level command to restore the default privilege level of the user.
The default privilege level is 0.
Note that:
z If the configured authentication method is none or password authentication, the command level
that a user can access after login is determined by the level of the user interface.
z If the configured authentication method requires a username and a password, the command level
that a user can access after login is determined by the privilege level of the user. For SSH users
using RSA shared key for authentication, the commands they can access are determined by the
levels sets on their user interfaces.
Related commands: local-user.

Examples

# Set the level of user1 to 3.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] local-user user1
New local user added.
[Sysname-luser-user1] level 3

1-16
local-user

Syntax

local-user user-name
undo local-user { user-name | all [ service-type { ftp | lan-access | ssh | telnet | terminal } ] }

View

System view

Parameters

user-name: Local username, a string of up to 184 characters. This string cannot contain the following
characters: /:*?<>. It can contain no more than one @ character. The pure username (user ID, that is,
the part before @) cannot be longer than 55 characters, and the domain name (the part behind @)
cannot be longer than 128 characters. If the username includes one or more “~” characters and the last
“~” is followed by numerals, it must be followed by at least five numerals to avoid confusion. This is
because any username longer than 16 characters will appear in the form of “system prompt-the first 15
characters of the username~4-digit index” in the view prompt to avoid word wrap.
all: Specifies all local users.
service-type: Specifies the local users of a specified type. You can specify one of the following user
types: ftp, lan-access (generally, this type of users are Ethernet access users, for example, 802.1x
users), ssh, telnet, and terminal (terminal user who logs into the switch through the Console port).

Description

Use the local-user command to add a local user and enter local user view.
Use the undo local-user command to delete one or more local users of the specified type.
By default, there is no local user in the system.
Related commands: display local-user, service-type.

Examples

# Add a local user named user1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] local-user user1
New local user added.
[Sysname-luser-user1]

# Add a local user named 01234567891234567 (note that it will appear as 012345678912345~0000 in
the view prompt).
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]local-user 01234567891234567
New local user added.
[Sysname-luser-012345678912345~0000]

1-17
local-user password-display-mode

Syntax

local-user password-display-mode { cipher-force | auto }

undo local-user password-display-mode

View

System view

Parameters

cipher-force: Adopts the forcible cipher mode so that all local users' the passwords will be displayed in
cipher text.
auto: Adopts the automatic mode so that each local user's password will be displayed in the mode you
have set for the user by the password command.

Description

Use the local-user password-display-mode command to set the password display mode of all local
users.
Use the undo local-user password-display-mode command to restore the default password display
mode of all local users.
By default, the password display mode of all access users is auto.
If the cipher-force mode is adopted, all passwords will be displayed in cipher text even though you
have specified to display some users passwords in plain text by using the password command with the
simple keyword.
Related commands: display local-user, password.

Examples

# Specify to display all local user passwords in cipher text in whatever cases.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] local-user password-display-mode cipher-force

messenger

Syntax

messenger time { enable limit interval | disable }

undo messenger time

View

ISP domain view

Parameters

limit: Time limit in minutes, ranging from 1 to 60. The switch will send prompt messages at regular
intervals to users whose remaining online time is less than this limit.

1-18
interval: Interval to send prompt messages (in minutes). This argument ranges from 5 to 60 and must be
a multiple of 5.

Description

Use the messenger time enable command to enable the messenger function and set the related
parameters.
Use the messenger time disable command to disable the messenger function.
Use the undo messenger time command to restore the messenger function to its default state.
By default, the messenger function is disabled on the switch.
The purpose of this function is to remind online users of their remaining online time through clients by
message dialog box.

Examples

# Enable the switch to send prompt messages at intervals of 5 minutes to the users in the ISP domain
"system" after their remaining online time is less than 30 minutes.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain system
[Sysname-isp-system] messenger time enable 30 5

name

Syntax

name string
undo name

View

VLAN view

Parameters

string: Assigned VLAN name, a string of up to 32 characters.

Description

Use the name command to set a VLAN name, which will be used for VLAN assignment.
Use the undo name command to cancel the VLAN name.
By default, a VLAN uses its VLAN ID (like VLAN 0001) as its assigned VLAN name.
This command is used in conjunction with the dynamic VLAN assignment function. For details about
dynamic VLAN assignment, refer to the vlan-assignment-mode command.
Related commands: vlan-assignment-mode.

Examples

# Set the name of VLAN 100 to test.

Use the scheme command to configure an AAA scheme for current ISP domain.

1-21
Use the undo scheme command to restore the default AAA scheme configuration for the ISP domain.
By default, the ISP domain uses the local AAA scheme.
Note that:
z When you execute the scheme command to reference a RADIUS scheme in current ISP domain,
the referenced RADIUS scheme must already exist.
z If you execute the scheme radius-scheme radius-scheme-name local command, the local
scheme is used as the secondary scheme in case no RADIUS server is available. That is, if the
communication between the switch and a RADIUS server is normal, no local authentication is
performed; otherwise, local authentication is performed.
z If you execute the scheme hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name local command, the local
scheme is used as the secondary scheme in case no TACACS server is available. That is, if the
communication between the switch and a TACACS server is normal, no local authentication is
performed; If the TACACS server is not reachable or there is a key error or NAS IP error, local
authentication is performed.
z If you execute the scheme local or scheme none command to use local or none as the primary
scheme, the local authentication is performed or no authentication is performed. In this case, no
secondary scheme can be specified and therefore no scheme switching will occur.
z Both the radius-scheme command and the scheme command can be used to specify the
RADIUS scheme to be quoted for the ISP domain. Their functions are the same and the system
takes the latest configuration.
Related commands: radius scheme, display domain.

Examples

# Configure the ISP domain aabbcc.net to use RADIUS scheme radius1 as the primary AAA scheme
and use the local scheme as the secondary authentication scheme.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[Sysname-isp-aabbcc.net] scheme radius-scheme raduis1 local

self-service-url

Syntax

self-service-url { disable | enable url-string }

undo self-service-url

View

ISP domain view

Parameters

url-string: URL of the web page used to modify user password on the self-service server. It is a string of
1 to 64 characters. This string cannot contain any question mark "?". If the actual URL of the self-service
server contains a question mark, you should change it to an elect bar "|".

1-22
Description

Use the self-service-url enable command to enable the self-service server location function
Use the self-service-url disable command to disable the self-service server location function
Use the undo self-service-url command to restore the default state of this function.
By default, this function is disabled.
Note that:
z This command must be used with the cooperation of a self-service-supported RADIUS server
(such as CAMS). Through self-service, users can manage and control their accounts or card
numbers by themselves. A server installed with the self-service software is called a self-service
server.
z After this command is executed on the switch, a user can locate the self-service server through the
following operation: choose [change user password] on the 802.1x client, the client opens the
default browser (for example, IE or Netscape) and locates the URL page used to change user
password on the self-service server. Then, the user can change the password.
z A user can choose the [change user password] option on the client only after passing the
authentication. If the user fails the authentication, this option is in grey and is unavailable.

Examples

# Under the default ISP domain "system", set the URL of the web page used to modify user password
on the self-service server to http://10.153.89.94/selfservice/modPasswd1x.jsp|userName.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain system
[Sysname-isp-system] self-service-url enable
http://10.153.89.94/selfservice/modPasswd1x.jsp|userName

service-type

Syntax

service-type { ftp | lan-access | { telnet | ssh | terminal }* [ level level ] }

undo service-type { ftp | lan-access | { telnet | ssh | terminal }* }

View

Local user view

Parameters

ftp: Specifies that this is an FTP user.

lan-access: Specifies that this is a LAN access user (who is generally an Ethernet access user, for
example, 802.1x user).
telnet: Authorizes the user to access the Telnet service.
ssh: Authorizes the user to access the SSH service.
terminal: Authorizes the user to access the terminal service (that is, allows the user to log into the
switch through the Console port).

1-23
level level: Specifies the level of the Telnet, terminal or SSH user. Here, level is an integer ranging from
0 to 3 and defaulting to 0.

Description

Use the service-type command to authorize a user to access one or more types of services.
Use the undo service-type command to inhibit a user from accessing specified types of services.
By default, a user is inhibited from accessing any type of service.
You may user the display local-user command to view the types of services that a user is authorized to
access.

Examples

# Authorize user1 to access the Telnet service.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] local-user user1
New local user added.
[Sysname-luser-user1] service-type telnet

state

Syntax

state { active | block }

View

ISP domain view, local user view

Parameters

active: Activates the current ISP domain (in ISP domain view) or local user (in local user view), to allow
users in current ISP domain or current local user to access the network.
block: Blocks the current ISP domain (in ISP domain view) or local user (in local user view), to inhibit
users in current ISP domain or current local user from accessing the network.

Description

Use the state command to set the status of current ISP domain (in ISP domain view) or current local
user (in local user view).
By default, an ISP domain/local user is in the active state once it is created.
After an ISP domain is set to the block state, except for online users, users in this domain are inhibited
from accessing the network.
After a local user is set to the block state, the user is inhibited from accessing the network unless the
user is already online.
Related commands: domain, local-user.
You may use the display domain command or the display local-user command to view the status
information.

1-24
Examples

# Set the ISP domain aabbcc.net to the block state, so that all its offline users cannot access the
network.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[Sysname-isp-aabbcc.net] state block

# Set user1 to the block state.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] local-user user1
[Sysname-user-user1] state block

vlan-assignment-mode

Syntax

vlan-assignment-mode { integer | string }

View

ISP domain view

Parameters

integer: Sets the VLAN assignment mode to integer.

string: Sets the VLAN assignment mode to string.

Description

Use the vlan-assignment-mode command to set the VLAN assignment mode (integer or string) on the
switch.
By default, the VLAN assignment mode is integer, that is, the switch supports its RADIUS authentication
server to assign integer VLAN IDs.
The dynamic VLAN assignment feature enables a switch to dynamically add the ports of successfully
authenticated users to different VLANs according to the attributes assigned by the RADIUS server, so
as to control the network resources that different users can access.
In actual applications, to use this feature together with Guest VLAN, you are recommended to set port
control to port-based mode.
Currently, the switch supports the following two types of assigned VLAN IDs: integer and string.
z Integer: If the RADIUS authentication server assigns integer type of VLAN IDs, you can set the
VLAN assignment mode to integer on the switch (this is also the default mode on the switch). Then,
upon receiving an integer ID assigned by the RADIUS authentication server, the switch adds the
port to the VLAN whose VLAN ID is equal to the assigned integer ID. If no such a VLAN exists, the
switch first creates a VLAN with the assigned ID, and then adds the port to the newly created
VLAN.
z String: If the RADIUS authentication server assigns string type of VLAN IDs, you can set the VLAN
assignment mode to string on the switch. Then, upon receiving a string ID assigned by the RADIUS
1-25
authentication server, the switch compares the ID with existing VLAN names on the switch. If it
finds a match, it adds the port to the corresponding VLAN. Otherwise, the VLAN assignment fails
and the user fails the authentication.
The switch supports two dynamic VLAN assignment modes to adapt to different authentication servers.
You are recommended to configure the switch according to the dynamic VLAN assignment mode used
by the server.
Table 1-4 lists several commonly used RADIUS servers and their dynamic VLAN assignment modes.

Table 1-4 Commonly used servers and their dynamic VLAN assignment modes

Server Dynamic VLAN assignment mode

Integer
CAMS For the latest CAMS version, you can determine
the assignment mode by attribute value.
ACS String
You can determine the assignment mode by
FreeRADIUS attribute value (for example, 100 is integer; “100”
is string).
Shiva Access Manager String
Steel-Belted Radius Administrator String

In string mode, if the VLAN ID assigned by the RADIUS server is a character string containing only
digits (for example, 1024), the switch first regards it as an integer VLAN ID: the switch transforms the
string to an integer value and judges if the value is in the valid VLAN ID range; if it is, the switch adds the
authenticated port to the VLAN with the value as the VLAN ID (VLAN 1024, for example).

Related commands: name.

Examples

# Set the VLAN assignment mode of the domain aabbcc.net to string.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] domain aabbcc.net
New Domain added.
[Sysname-isp-aabbcc.net] vlan-assignment-mode string

1-26
RADIUS Configuration Commands
accounting optional

Syntax

accounting optional
undo accounting optional

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the accounting optional command to open the accounting-optional switch.

Use the undo accounting optional command to close the accounting-optional switch so that the
system performs accounting for users unconditionally.
By default, the system performs accounting for users unconditionally.
Note that:
z If the system does not find any available accounting server or fails to communicate with any
accounting server when it performs accounting for an online user, it will not disconnect the user as
long as the accounting optional command has been executed. This command is commonly used
in the cases where only authentication is needed and accounting is not needed.
z This configuration takes effect only on the ISP domains using this RADIUS scheme.
z If you configure the accounting optional command in ISP domain view, it is effective to all users in
the domain; if you configure it in RADIUS scheme view, it is effective to users the RADIUS scheme
is used for.

Examples

# Open the accounting-optional switch in RADIUS scheme radius1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] accounting optional

accounting-on enable

Syntax

accounting-on enable [ send times | interval interval ]

undo accounting-on { enable | send | interval }

View

RADIUS scheme view

1-27
Parameters

times: Maximum number of attempts to send an Accounting-On message, ranging from 1 to 256 and
defaulting to 15. If the maximum number has been reached but the switch still receives no response
from the CAMS, the switch stops sending Accounting-On messages.
interval: Interval to send Accounting-On messages (in seconds), ranging from 1 to 30 and defaulting to
3.

Description

Use the accounting-on enable command to enable the user re-authentication at restart function.
Use the undo accounting-on enable command to disable the user re-authentication at restart function
and restore the default interval and maximum number of attempts to send Accounting-On messages.
Use the undo accounting-on send command to restore the default maximum number of attempts to
send Accounting-On messages.
Use the undo accounting-on interval command to restore the default interval to send Accounting-On
messages.
By default, the user re-authentication at restart function is disabled.
The purpose of this function is to solve this problem: users cannot re-log into the switch after the switch
restarts because they are regarded as already online. After this function is enabled, every time the
switch restarts, it sends an Accounting-On message to the RADIUS server to tell the server that it has
restarted and ask the server to log out its users. The following gives the operations after the switch
restarts:
1) The switch generates an Accounting-On message, which mainly contains the following information:
NAS-ID, NAS-IP-address (source IP address), and session ID. You can configure the
NAS-IP-address argument manually by using the nas-ip command. When configuring the
NAS-IP-address argument, be sure to specify an appropriate valid IP address. If you do not
configure the NAS-IP-address argument, the switch automatically uses the IP address of a VLAN
interface as the NAS-IP-address.
2) The switch sends the Accounting-On message to the CAMS at regular intervals.
3) Once the CAMS receives the Accounting-On message, it sends a response to the switch. At the
same time it finds and deletes the original online information of the users who were accessing the
network through the switch before the restart according to the information (NAS-ID,
NAS-IP-address and session ID) contained in the message, and ends the accounting of the users
based on the last accounting update message.
4) Once the switch receives the response from the CAMS, it stops sending Accounting-On messages.
5) If the switch does not receive any response from the CAMS after it has tried the configured
maximum number of times to send the Accounting-On message, it will not send the Accounting-On
message any more.

1-28
z After configuring the accounting-on enable command, you need to execute the save command
so that the command can take effect when the switch restarts.
z This function requires the cooperation of the H3C CAMS system.

Related commands: nas-ip.

Examples

# Enable the user re-authentication at restart function for the RADIUS scheme named radius1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
[Sysname-radius-radius1] accounting-on enable

calling-station-id mode

Syntax

calling-station-id mode { mode1 | mode2 } { lowercase | uppercase }

undo calling-station-id mode

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

mode1: Sets the MAC address format to XXXX-XXXX-XXXX, where each X represents a hexadecimal
number.
mode2: Sets the MAC address format to XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX.
lowercase: Uses lowercase letters in the MAC address.
uppercase: Uses uppercase letters in the MAC address.

Description

Use the calling-station-id mode command to configure the MAC address format of the
Calling-Station-Id (Type 31) field in RADIUS packets.
Use the undo calling-station-id mode command to restore the default format.
By default, the MAC address format is XXXX-XXXX-XXXX, in lowercase.

Examples

# Set the MAC address format of the Calling-Station-Id field to XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX, in uppercase.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]radius scheme system
[Sysname-radius-system]calling-station-id mode mode2 uppercase

1-29
data-flow-format

Syntax

data-flow-format data { byte | giga-byte | kilo-byte | mega-byte } packet { giga-packet | kilo-packet

| mega-packet | one-packet }
undo data-flow-format

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

data: Sets the data unit of outgoing RADIUS flows, which can be byte, giga-byte, kilo-byte, or
mega-byte.
packet: Sets the packet unit of outgoing RADIUS flows, which can be one-packet, giga-packet,
kilo-packet, or mega-packet.

Description

Use the data-flow-format command to set the units of RADIUS data flows to RADIUS servers.
Use the undo data-flow-format command to restore the default units.
By default, the data unit and packet unit of outgoing RADIUS flows are byte and one-packet
respectively.
Note that the specified unit of data flows sent to the RADIUS server must be consistent with the traffic
statistics unit of the RADIUS server. Otherwise, accounting cannot be performed correctly.
Related commands: display radius scheme.

Examples

# Specify to measure data and packets in data flows to RADIUS servers in kilo-bytes and kilo-packets
respectively in RADIUS scheme radius1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] data-flow-format data kilo-byte packet kilo-packet

display local-server statistics

Syntax

display local-server statistics

View

Any view

Parameters

None

1-30
Description

Use the display local-server statistics command to display the RADIUS message statistics about
local RADIUS server.
Related commands: local-server.

Examples

# Display the RADIUS message statistics about local RADIUS server.

<Sysname> display local-server statistics
On Unit 1:
The localserver packet statistics:
Receive: 30 Send: 30
Discard: 0 Receive Packet Error: 0
Auth Receive: 10 Auth Send: 10
Acct Receive: 20 Acct Send: 20

display radius scheme

Syntax

display radius scheme [ radius-scheme-name ]

View

Any view

Parameters

radius-scheme-name: Name of a RADIUS scheme, a string of up to 32 characters.

Description

Use the display radius scheme command to display configuration information about one specific or all
RADIUS schemes
Related commands: radius scheme.

Examples

# Display configuration information about all RADIUS schemes.

<Sysname> display radius scheme
------------------------------------------------------------------
SchemeName =system Index=0 Type=extended
Primary Auth IP =127.0.0.1 Port=1645
Primary Acct IP =127.0.0.1 Port=1646
Second Auth IP =0.0.0.0 Port=1812
Second Acct IP =0.0.0.0 Port=1813
Auth Server Encryption Key= Not configured
Acct Server Encryption Key= Not configured
Accounting method = required
Accounting-On packet enable, send times = 15 , interval = 3s
TimeOutValue(in second)=3 RetryTimes=3 RealtimeACCT(in minute)=12
Permitted send realtime PKT failed counts =5

1-31
Retry sending times of noresponse acct-stop-PKT =500
Quiet-interval(min) =5
Username format =without-domain
Data flow unit =Byte
Packet unit =1
calling_station_id format =XXXX-XXXX-XXXX in lowercase
unit 1 :
Primary Auth State=active, Second Auth State=block
Primary Acc State=active, Second Acc State=block

------------------------------------------------------------------
Total 1 RADIUS scheme(s). 1 listed

Table 1-5 Description on the fields of the display radius scheme command

Field Description
SchemeName Name of the RADIUS scheme
Index Index number of the RADIUS scheme
Type Type of the RADIUS servers
IP address/port number of the primary
Primary Auth IP/Port
authentication server
IP address/port number of the primary
Primary Acct IP/Port
accounting server
IP address/port number of the secondary
Second Auth IP/Port
authentication server
IP address/port number of the secondary
Second Acct IP/Port
accounting server
Auth Server Encryption Key Shared key for the authentication servers
Acct Server Encryption Key Shared key for the accounting servers
Accounting method Accounting method
The switch sends up to 15 Accounting-On
Accounting-On packet enable, send times = 15 ,
messages at intervals of 3 seconds after
interval = 3s
restarting.
TimeOutValue(in second) RADIUS server response timeout time
Maximum number of transmission attempts of a
RetryTimes
RADIUS request
RealtimeACCT(in minute) Real-time accounting interval in minutes
maximum allowed number of continuous
Permitted send realtime PKT failed counts
real-time accounting failures
Retry sending times of noresponse Maximum number of transmission attempts of
acct-stop-PKT the buffered stop-accounting requests
Time that the switch must wait before it can
Quiet-interval(min)
restore the status of a primary server to active
Username format Username format
Data flow unit Data unit of data flow

1-32
Field Description
Packet unit Packet unit of data flow
MAC address format of the Calling-Station-Id
calling_station_id format
(Type 31) field in RADIUS packets
Primary Auth State Status of the primary authentication server
Second Auth State Status of the secondary authentication server

Primary Acc State Status of the primary accounting server

Second Acc State Status of the secondary accounting server

display radius statistics

Syntax

display radius statistics

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display radius statistics command to display the RADIUS message statistics.
Related commands: radius scheme.

Examples

# Display RADIUS message statistics.

<Sysname> display radius statistics
state statistic(total=1048):
DEAD=1048 AuthProc=0 AuthSucc=0
AcctStart=0 RLTSend=0 RLTWait=0
AcctStop=0 OnLine=0 Stop=0
StateErr=0

Received and Sent packets statistic:

Unit 1........................................
Sent PKT total :0 Received PKT total:0
RADIUS received packets statistic:
Code= 2,Num=0 ,Err=0
Code= 3,Num=0 ,Err=0
Code= 5,Num=0 ,Err=0
Code=11,Num=0 ,Err=0

Running statistic:
RADIUS received messages statistic:

1-33
Normal auth request , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
EAP auth request , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
Account request , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
Account off request , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
PKT auth timeout , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
PKT acct_timeout , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
Realtime Account timer , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
PKT response , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
EAP reauth_request , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
PORTAL access , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
Update ack , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
PORTAL access ack , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
Session ctrl pkt , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
Set policy result , Num=0 , Err=0 , Succ=0
RADIUS sent messages statistic:
Auth accept , Num=0
Auth reject , Num=0
EAP auth replying , Num=0
Account success , Num=0
Account failure , Num=0
Cut req , Num=0
Set policy result , Num=0
RecError_MSG_sum:0 SndMSG_Fail_sum :0
Timer_Err :0 Alloc_Mem_Err :0
State Mismatch :0 Other_Error :0

No-response-acct-stop packet =0
Discarded No-response-acct-stop packet for buffer overflow =0

display stop-accounting-buffer

Syntax

display stop-accounting-buffer { radius-scheme radius-scheme-name | session-id session-id |

time-range start-time stop-time | user-name user-name }

View

Any view

Parameters

radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Displays the buffered stop-accounting requests of a specified

RADIUS scheme. Here, radius-scheme-name is a string of up to 32 characters.
session-id session-id: Displays the buffered stop-accounting requests of a specified session. Here,
session-id is a string of up to 50 characters.
time-range start-time stop-time: Displays the buffered stop-accounting requests generated in a
specified time range. Here, start-time is the start time of the time range, stop-time is the end time of the
time range, and both are in the format of hh:mm:ss-mm/dd/yyyy or hh:mm:ss-yyyy/mm/dd. The

1-34
parameters here are used to display all the buffered stop-accounting requests generated from start-time
to stop-time.
user-name user-name: Displays the buffered stop-accounting requests of a specified user. Here,
user-name is a string of up to 184 characters.

Description

Use the display stop-accounting-buffer command to display the non-response stop-accounting

requests buffered in the device.

z You can choose to display the buffered stop-accounting requests of a specified RADIUS scheme,
session (by session ID), or user (by username). You can also specify a time range to display those
generated within the specified time range. The displayed information helps you diagnose and
resolve RADIUS problems.
z If the switch gets no response in a specified time period after sending a stop-accounting request to
a RADIUS server, it will buffer the request and transmit the buffered one until the maximum number
of transmission attempts (set by the retry stop-accounting command) is reached.

Related commands: reset stop-accounting-buffer, stop-accounting-buffer enable, retry

stop-accounting.

Examples

# Display the buffered stop-accounting requests generated from 0:0:0 08/31/2002 to 23:59:59
08/31/2002.
<Sysname> display stop-accounting-buffer time-range 00:00:00-08/31/2002
23:59:59-08/31/2002
Total find 0 record

key

Syntax

key { accounting | authentication } string

undo key { accounting | authentication }

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

accounting: Sets a shared key for RADIUS accounting messages.

authentication: Sets a shared key for RADIUS authentication/authorization messages.
string: Shared key to be set, a string of up to 16 characters.

1-35
Description

Use the key command to set a shared key for RADIUS authentication/authorization messages or
accounting messages.
Use the undo key command to restore the corresponding default shared key setting.
By default, no shared key exists.
Note that:
z Both RADIUS client and server adopt MD5 algorithm to encrypt RADIUS messages before
exchanging the messages with each other.
z The two parties verify the validity of the RADIUS messages received from each other by using the
shared keys that have been set on them, and can accept and respond to the messages only when
both parties have same shared key.
z The authentication/authorization shared key and the accounting shared key you set on the switch
must be respectively consistent with the shared key on the authentication/authorization server and
the shared key on the accounting server.
Related commands: primary accounting, primary authentication, radius scheme.

Examples

# Set "hello" as the shared key for RADIUS authentication/authorization messages in RADIUS scheme
radius1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] key authentication hello

# Set "ok" as the shared key for RADIUS accounting messages in RADIUS scheme radius1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] key accounting ok

local-server

Syntax

local-server enable
undo local-server

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the local-server enable command to enable the UDP ports for local RADIUS services.
1-36
Use the undo local-server command to disable the UDP ports for local RADIUS services.
By default, the UDP ports for local RADIUS services are enabled.
In addition to functioning as a RADIUS client to provide remote RADIUS authentication, authorization,
and accounting services, the switch can act as a local RADIUS server to provide simple RADIUS server
functions locally. For the switch to act as a local server, you need to use this command to enable the
service ports. The UDP port for local RADIUS authentication/authorization service is 1645, and that for
local RADIUS accounting service is 1646.
Related commands: radius scheme, state, local-server nas-ip.

Examples

# Enable UDP ports for local RADIUS services.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] local-server enable

local-server nas-ip

Syntax

local-server nas-ip ip-address key password

undo local-server nas-ip ip-address

View

System view

Parameters

nas-ip ip-address: Specifies the IP address of a network access server (NAS) that can use the local
RADIUS services. Here, ip-address is in dotted decimal notation.
key password: Sets the shared key between the local RADIUS server and the NAS. Here, password is
a string of up to 16 characters.

Description

Use the local-server nas-ip command to set the related parameters of the local RADIUS server.
Use the undo local-server nas-ip command to cancel a specified NAS setting for the local RADIUS
server.
By default, the local RADIUS server is enabled and it allows the access of NAS 127.0.0.1. That is, the
local device serves as both a RADIUS server and a network access server, and all authentications are
performed locally. The default share key is null.
Note that:
z The message encryption key set by the local-server nas-ip ip-address key password command
must be identical with the authentication/authorization message encryption key set by the key
authentication command in the RADIUS scheme view of the RADIUS scheme on the specified
NAS that uses this switch as its authentication server.
z The switch supports the IP addresses and shared keys of at most 16 network access servers
(including the local device); that is, when the switch serves as a RADIUS server, it can provide
authentication service to at most 16 NASs simultaneously.

1-37
z When serving as a local RADIUS server, the switch does not support EAP authentication (that is
you cannot set the 802.1x authentication method as eap by using the dot1x
authentication-method eap command).
Related commands: radius scheme, state, local-server enable.

Examples

# Allow the local RADIUS server to provide services to NAS 10.110.1.2 with shared key aabbcc.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] local-server nas-ip 10.110.1.2 key aabbcc

nas-ip

Syntax

nas-ip ip-address
undo nas-ip

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

ip-address: Source IP address for RADIUS messages, an IP address of this device. This address can
neither be the all 0's address nor be a Class-D address.

Description

Use the nas-ip command to set the source IP address of outgoing RADIUS messages.
Use the undo nas-ip command to remove the source IP address setting.
By default, the IP address of the outbound interface is used as the source IP address of RADIUS
messages.

The nas-ip command in RADIUS scheme view has the same function as the radius nas-ip command
in system view; and the configuration in RADIUS scheme view takes precedence over that in system
view.

You can set the source IP address of outgoing RADIUS messages to avoid messages returned from
RADIUS server from being unable to reach their destination due to physical interface trouble. It is
recommended to use a Loopback interface address as the source IP address.
Related commands: display radius scheme, radius nas-ip.

Examples

# Set source IP address 10.1.1.1 for outgoing RADIUS messages in RADIUS scheme radius1.

1-38
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] nas-ip 10.1.1.1

primary accounting

Syntax

primary accounting ip-address [ port-number ]

undo primary accounting

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address of the primary accounting server to be used, in dotted decimal notation.
port-number: UDP port number of the primary accounting server, ranging from 1 to 65535.

Description

Use the primary accounting command to set the IP address and port number of the primary RADIUS
accounting server to be used by the current scheme.
Use the undo primary accounting command to restore the default IP address and port number of the
primary RADIUS accounting server, which are 0.0.0.0 and 1813 respectively.
In the system default RADIUS scheme “system”, the default IP address of the primary accounting
server is 127.0.0.1 and the default UDP port number is 1646. In a new RADIUS scheme, the default IP
address of the primary accounting server is 0.0.0.0 and the default UDP port number is 1813.
Related commands: key, radius scheme, state.

Examples

# Set the IP address and UDP port number of the primary accounting server for RADIUS scheme
radius1 to 10.110.1.2 and 1813 respectively.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] primary accounting 10.110.1.2 1813

primary authentication

Syntax

primary authentication ip-address [ port-number ]

undo primary authentication

View

RADIUS scheme view

1-39
Parameters

ip-address: IP address of the primary authentication/authorization server to be used, in dotted decimal

notation.
port-number: UDP port number of the primary authentication/authorization server, ranging from 1 to
65535.

Description

Use the primary authentication command to set the IP address and port number of the primary
RADIUS authentication/authorization server used by the current RADIUS scheme.
Use the undo primary authentication command to restore the default IP address and port number of
the primary RADIUS authentication/authorization server, which are 0.0.0.0 and 1812 respectively.
In the system default RADIUS scheme “system”, the default IP address of the primary
authentication/authorization server is 127.0.0.1 and the default UDP port number is 1645. In a new
RADIUS scheme, the default IP address of the primary authentication/authorization server is 0.0.0.0
and the default UDP port number is 1812.
Note that:
z After creating a new RADIUS scheme, you should configure the IP address and UDP port number
of each RADIUS server you want to use in this scheme. These RADIUS servers fall into two types:
authentication/authorization, and accounting. For each kind of server, you can configure two
servers in a RADIUS scheme: primary and secondary servers.
z In an actual network environment, you can make RADIUS server-related configuration as required.
But you should configure at least one authentication/authorization server and one accounting
server, and at the same time, you should keep the RADIUS server port settings on the switch
consistent with those on the RADIUS servers.
Related commands: key, radius scheme, state.

Examples

# Set the IP address and UDP port number of the primary authentication/authorization server for
RADIUS scheme radius1 to 10.110.1.1 and 1812 respectively.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] primary authentication 10.110.1.1 1812

radius client

Syntax

radius client enable

undo radius client

View

System view

1-40
Parameters

None

Description

Use the radius client enable command to enable RADIUS authentication and accounting ports.
Use the undo radius client command to disable RADIUS authentication and accounting ports.
By default, RADIUS authentication and accounting ports are enabled.
If you want to use the switch as a RADIUS client, you need to ensure that the ports for RADIUS
authentication and accounting are open. Otherwise, you can disable the ports to improve security of the
switch.
Related commands: radius scheme.

Examples

# Disable the RADIUS authentication and accounting ports.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] undo radius client enable

radius nas-ip

Syntax

radius nas-ip ip-address

undo radius nas-ip

View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: Source IP address to be set, an IP address of this device. This address can neither be the
all 0's address nor be a Class-D address.

Description

Use the radius nas-ip command to set the source IP address of outgoing RADIUS messages.
Use the undo radius nas-ip command to restore the default setting.
By default, no source IP address is set, and the IP address of corresponding outbound interface is used
as the source IP address of RADIUS messages.

The nas-ip command in RADIUS scheme view has the same function as the radius nas-ip command
in system view; and the configuration in RADIUS scheme view takes precedence over that in system
view.

1-41
Note that:
z You can set the source IP address of outgoing RADIUS messages to avoid messages returned
from RADIUS server from being unable to reach their destination due to physical interface trouble.
It is recommended to use a Loopback interface address as the source IP address.
z You can set only one source IP address by using this command. When you re-execute this
command again, the newly set source IP address will overwrite the old one.
Related commands: nas-ip.

Examples

# Set source address 129.10.10.1 for outgoing RADIUS messages.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius nas-ip 129.10.10.1

radius scheme

Syntax

radius scheme radius-scheme-name

undo radius scheme radius-scheme-name

View

System view

Parameters

radius-scheme-name: Name of the RADIUS scheme to be created, a string of up to 32 characters.

Description

Use the radius scheme command to create a RADIUS scheme and enter its view.
Use the undo radius scheme command to delete a specified RADIUS scheme.
By default, a RADIUS scheme named "system" has already been created in the system.
Note that:
z All the attributes of RADIUS scheme "system" take the default values, which you can see by using
the display radius scheme command.
z The RADIUS protocol configuration is performed on a RADIUS scheme basis. For each RADIUS
scheme, you should specify at least the IP addresses and UDP port numbers of the RADIUS
authentication/authorization and accounting servers, and the parameters required for the RADIUS
client to interact with the RADIUS servers. You should first create a RADIUS scheme and enter its
view before performing RADIUS protocol configurations.
z A RADIUS scheme can be referenced by multiple ISP domains simultaneously.
z The undo radius scheme command cannot delete the default RADIUS scheme. In addition, you
are not allowed to delete a RADIUS scheme which is being used by an online user.
Related commands: key, retry realtime-accounting, scheme, timer realtime-accounting,
stop-accounting-buffer enable, retry stop-accounting, server-type, state, user-name-format,
retry, display radius scheme, display radius statistics.

1-42
Examples

# Create a RADIUS scheme named radius1 and enter its view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1]

radius trap

Syntax

radius trap { authentication-server-down | accounting-server-down }

undo radius trap { authentication-server-down | accounting-server-down }

View

System view

Parameters

authentication-server-down: Enables/disables the switch to send trap messages when a RADIUS

authentication server turns down.
accounting-server-down: Enables/disables the switch to send trap messages when a RADIUS
accounting server turns down.

Description

Use the radius trap command to enable the switch to send trap messages when a RADIUS server
turns down.
Use the undo radius trap command to disable the switch from sending trap messages when a
RADIUS authentication server or a RADIUS accounting server turns down.
By default, this function is disabled.
This configuration takes effect on all RADIUS scheme.

The switch considers a RADIUS server as being down if it has tried the configured maximum number of
times to send a message to the RADIUS server but does not receive any response.

Examples

# Enable the switch to send trap messages when a RADIUS authentication server turns down.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius trap authentication-server-down

1-43
reset radius statistics

Syntax

reset radius statistics

View

User view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the reset radius statistics command to clear RADIUS message statistics.
Related commands: display radius scheme.

Examples

# Clear RADIUS message statistics.

<Sysname> reset radius statistics

reset stop-accounting-buffer

Syntax

reset stop-accounting-buffer { radius-scheme radius-scheme-name | session-id session-id |

time-range start-time stop-time | user-name user-name }

View

User view

Parameters

radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Deletes the buffered stop-accounting requests of a specified

RADIUS scheme. Here, radius-scheme-name is the name of a RADIUS scheme, which is a string of up
to 32 characters that does not contain any of the following characters: /:*?<>.
session-id session-id: Deletes the buffered stop-accounting requests of a specified session. Here,
session-id is a session ID, which is a string of up to 50 characters.
time-range start-time stop-time: Deletes the buffered stop-accounting requests generated within a
specified time period. Here, start-time is the start time of the time period, stop-time is the end time of the
time period, and both are in the format of hh:mm:ss-mm/dd/yyyy or hh:mm:ss-yyyy/mm/dd.
user-name user-name: Deletes the buffered stop-accounting requests of a specified user. Here,
user-name is the name of a user, which is a string of up to 184 characters.

Description

Use the reset stop-accounting-buffer command to delete stop-accounting requests that are buffered
on the switch due to getting no response.
Related commands: stop-accounting-buffer enable, retry stop-accounting, display
stop-accounting-buffer.

1-44
Examples

# Delete the stop-accounting requests buffered for user [email protected].

<Sysname> reset stop-accounting-buffer user-name [email protected]

# Delete the stop-accounting requests buffered from 0:0:0 08/31/2002 to 23:59:59 08/31/2002.
<Sysname> reset stop-accounting-buffer time-range 00:00:00-08/31/2002 23:59:59-08/31/2002

retry

Syntax

retry retry-times
undo retry

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

retry-times: Maximum number of transmission attempts of a RADIUS request, ranging from 1 to 20.

Description

Use the retry command to set the maximum number of transmission attempts of a RADIUS request.
Use the undo retry command to restore the default maximum number of transmission attempts.
By default, the maximum number of RADIUS request transmission attempts is 3.
Note that:
z The communication in RADIUS is unreliable because this protocol adopts UDP packets to carry its
data. Therefore, it is necessary for the switch to retransmit a RADIUS request if it gets no response
from the RADIUS server after the server response timeout timer expires. If the switch gets no
answer after it has tried the maximum number of times to transmit a RADIUS request, the switch
considers that the request fails.
z Appropriately setting this maximum number of transmission attempts according to your network
situation can improve the reacting speed of the system.
Related commands: radius scheme.

Examples

# Set the maximum number of RADIUS request transmission attempts for RADIUS scheme radius1 to
five.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] retry 5

1-45
retry realtime-accounting

Syntax

retry realtime-accounting retry-times

undo retry realtime-accounting

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

retry-times: Maximum allowed number of continuous real-time accounting failures, ranging from 1 to
255.

Description

Use the retry realtime-accounting command to set the maximum allowed number of continuous
real-time accounting failures.
Use the undo retry realtime-accounting command to restore the default maximum number of
continuous real-time accounting failures.
By default, the maximum number of continuous real-time accounting failures is five.
Note that:
z Generally, a RADIUS server uses the connection timeout timer to determine whether a user is
currently online. If the RADIUS server receives no real-time accounting message for a specified
period of time, it considers that the switch or the line is in trouble and stop accounting for the user.
To make the switch cooperate with the RADIUS server in this feature, it is necessary to cut down
the user connection on the switch to synchronize with the RADIUS server when the server
terminates the accounting and connection of a user in case of unforeseen trouble. You can limit the
number of continuous real-time accounting requests that fail due to getting no response, and then
the switch will cut down user connection if the limit is reached.
z A real-time account request may be transmitted multiple times in an accounting attempt (the
maximum number of transmission attempts is set by the retry command in RADIUS scheme view).
If no response is received after the switch tries the maximum number of attempts to send the
request, the switch considers the accounting fails. Suppose that the response timeout time of
RADIUS server is three seconds (set by the timer response-timeout command), the maximum
number of transmission attempts is 3 (set by the retry command), the real-time accounting interval
is 12 minutes (set by the timer realtime-accounting command), the maximum allowed number of
real-time accounting failures is 5 (set by the retry realtime-accounting command). In this case,
the switch initiates an accounting request every 12 minutes; if the switch does not receive a
response within 3 seconds after it sends out the accounting request, it resends the request; if the
switch continuously sends the accounting request for three times but does not receive any
response; it considers this real-time accounting a failure. Then, the switch reinitiates the
accounting request every 12 minutes; if five continuous accounting failures occur, the switch cuts
down the user connection.
Related commands: radius scheme, timer realtime-accounting.

1-46
Examples

# Set the maximum allowed number of continuous real-time accounting failures for RADIUS scheme
radius1 to 10.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] retry realtime-accounting 10

retry stop-accounting

Syntax

retry stop-accounting retry-times

undo retry stop-accounting

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

retry-times: Maximum number of transmission attempts of a buffered stop-accounting request, ranging

from 10 to 65,535.

Description

Use the retry stop-accounting command to set the maximum number of transmission attempts of a
stop-accounting request buffered due to no response.
Use the undo retry stop-accounting command to restore the default maximum number of
transmission attempts of a buffered stop-accounting request.
By default, the maximum number of stop-accounting request transmission attempts is 500.
Stop-accounting requests are critical to billing and will eventually affect the charges of users; they are
important to both users and ISPs. Therefore, the switch should do its best to transmit them to RADIUS
accounting servers. When getting no response to such a request, the switch should first buffer the
request on itself, and then retransmit the request to the RADIUS accounting server until it gets a
response, or the maximum number of transmission attempts is reached (in this case, it discards the
request).
Related commands: reset stop-accounting-buffer, radius scheme, display
stop-accounting-buffer.

Examples

# In RADIUS scheme radius1, specify that the switch can transmit a buffered stop-accounting request
at most 1000 times
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] retry stop-accounting 1000

1-47
secondary accounting

Syntax

secondary accounting ip-address [ port-number ]

undo secondary accounting

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address of the secondary accounting server to be used, in dotted decimal notation.
port-number: UDP port number of the secondary accounting server, ranging from 1 to 65535.

Description

Use the secondary accounting command to set the IP address and port number of the secondary
RADIUS accounting server to be used by the current scheme.
Use the undo secondary accounting command to restore the default IP address and port number of
the secondary RADIUS accounting server, which are 0.0.0.0 and 1813 respectively.
Related commands: key, radius scheme, state.

Examples

# Set the IP address and UDP port number of the secondary accounting server for RADIUS scheme
radius1 to 10.110.1.1 and 1813 respectively.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] secondary accounting 10.110.1.1 1813

secondary authentication

Syntax

secondary authentication ip-address [ port-number ]

undo secondary authentication

View

RADIUS scheme view

1-48
Parameters

ip-address: IP address of the secondary authentication/authorization server to be used, in dotted

decimal notation.
port-number: UDP port number of the secondary authentication/authorization server, ranging from 1 to
65535.

Description

Use the secondary authentication command to set the IP address and port number of the secondary
RADIUS authentication/authorization server to be used by the current scheme.
Use the undo secondary authentication command to restore the default IP address and port number
of the secondary RADIUS authentication/authorization server, which is 0.0.0.0 and 1812 respectively.
Related commands: key, radius scheme, state.

Examples

# Set the IP address and UDP port number of the secondary authentication/authorization server for
RADIUS scheme radius1 to 10.110.1.2 and 1812 respectively.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] secondary authentication 10.110.1.2 1812

server-type

Syntax

server-type { extended | standard }

undo server-type

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

extended: Specifies to support H3C's RADIUS server (which is generally a CAMS), that is, use the
procedure and message format of private RADIUS protocol to interact with an H3C's RADIUS server.
standard: Specifies to support standard RADIUS server, that is, use the procedure and message
format of a standard RADIUS protocol (RFC 2865/2866 or above) to interact with a standard RADIUS
server.

Description

Use the server-type command to configure the switch to support a specified type of RADIUS server.
Use the undo server-type command to restore the default setting.
By default, the switch supports RADIUS servers of the standard type, and the RADIUS server type in
the default scheme named system is extended.
Related commands: radius scheme.

1-49
Examples

# Configure the switch to support H3C's RADIUS server in RADIUS scheme radius1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] server-type extended

state

Syntax

state { primary | secondary } { accounting | authentication } { block | active }

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

primary: Specifies that the server to be set is a primary RADIUS server.

secondary: Specifies that the server to be set is a secondary RADIUS server.
accounting: Specifies that the server to be set is a RADIUS accounting server.
authentication: Specifies that the server to be set is a RADIUS authentication/authorization server.
block: Sets the status of the specified RADIUS server to block (that is, the down state).
active: Sets the status of the specified RADIUS server to active (that is, the normal working state).

Description

Use the state command to set the status of a RADIUS server.

By default, all RADIUS servers in any customized RADIUS scheme are in the block state; the primary
RADIUS servers in the default RADIUS scheme "system" are in the active state, and the secondary
RADIUS servers in "system" are in the block state.
For the primary and secondary servers (authentication/authorization servers, or accounting servers) in
a RADIUS scheme, note that:
z When the switch fails to communicate with the primary server due to some server trouble, the
switch will turn to the secondary server and exchange messages with the secondary server.
z After the primary server remains in the block state for a set time (set by the timer quiet command),
the switch will try to communicate with the primary server again when it receives a RADIUS request.
If it finds that the primary server has recovered, the switch immediately restores the communication
with the primary server instead of communicating with the secondary server, and at the same time
restores the status of the primary server to active while keeping the status of the secondary server
unchanged.
z When both primary and secondary servers are in the active or block state, the switch sends
messages only to the primary server.
Related commands: radius scheme, primary authentication, secondary authentication, primary
accounting, secondary accounting.

1-50
Examples

# Set the status of the secondary authentication server in RADIUS scheme radius1 to active.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] state secondary authentication active

stop-accounting-buffer enable

Syntax

stop-accounting-buffer enable
undo stop-accounting-buffer enable

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the stop-accounting-buffer enable command to enable the switch to buffer the stop-accounting
requests that get no response.
Use the undo stop-accounting-buffer enable command to disable the switch from buffering the
stop-accounting requests that get no response.
By default, the switch is enabled to buffer the stop-accounting requests that get no response.
Stop-accounting requests are critical to billing and will eventually affect the charges; they are important
to both users and ISPs. Therefore, the switch should do its best to transmit them to RADIUS accounting
servers. When getting no response to such a request, the switch should first buffer the request on itself,
and then retransmit the request to the RADIUS accounting server until it gets a response, or the
maximum number of transmission attempts is reached (in this case, it discards the request).
Related commands: reset stop-accounting-buffer, radius scheme, display
stop-accounting-buffer.

Examples

# In RADIUS scheme radius1, enable the switch to buffer the stop-accounting requests that get no
response from the servers.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] stop-accounting-buffer enable

1-51
timer

Syntax

timer seconds
undo timer

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

seconds: Response timeout time of RADIUS servers, ranging from 1 to 10 seconds.

Description

Use the timer command to set the response timeout time of RADIUS servers (that is, the timeout time
of the response timeout timer of RADIUS servers).
Use the undo timer command to restore the default response timeout timer of RADIUS servers.
By default, the response timeout time of RADIUS servers is 3 seconds.
Note that:
z After sending out a RADIUS request (authentication/authorization request or accounting request)
to a RADIUS server, the switch waits for a response from the server. The maximum time that the
switch can wait for the response is called the response timeout time of RADIUS servers, and the
corresponding timer in the switch system is called the response timeout timer of RADIUS servers.
You can use the timer command to set the timeout time of this timer, and if the switch gets no
answer before the response timeout timer expires, it needs to retransmit the request to ensure that
the user can obtain RADIUS service.
z Appropriately setting the timeout time of this timer according to your network situation can improve
the performance of your system.
z The timer command has the same function with the timer response-timeout command.
Related commands: radius scheme, retry.

Examples

# Set the timeout time of the response timeout timer for RADIUS scheme radius1 to 5 seconds.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] timer 5

timer quiet

Syntax

timer quiet minutes

undo timer quiet

1-52
View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

minutes: Wait time before primary server state restoration, ranging from 1 to 255 minutes.

Description

Use the timer quiet command to set the time that the switch waits before it tries to re-communicate with
the primary server and restore the status of the primary server to active.
Use the undo timer quiet command to restore the default wait time.
By default, the switch waits five minutes.
Related commands: display radius scheme.

Examples

# Configure the switch to wait 10 minutes before it tries to restore the status of the primary server to
active.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] timer quiet 10

timer realtime-accounting

Syntax

timer realtime-accounting minutes

undo timer realtime-accounting

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

minutes: Real-time accounting interval, in minutes. It ranges from 3 to 60 and must be a multiple of 3.

Description

Use the timer realtime-accounting command to set the real-time accounting interval.
Use the undo timer realtime-accounting command to restore the default real-time accounting
interval.
By default, this interval is 12 minutes.
Note that:
z To control the interval at which users are charged in real time, you can set the real-time accounting
interval. After the setting, the switch periodically sends online users' accounting information to the
RADIUS server at the set interval.
z The setting of the real-time accounting interval depends, to some degree, on the performance of
the switch and the RADIUS server. The higher the performance of the switch and the RADIUS
1-53
server is, the shorter the interval can be. It is recommended to set the interval as long as possible
when the number of users is relatively great (≥1000). Table 1-6 lists the recommended intervals for
different numbers of users.

Table 1-6 Numbers of users and recommended intervals

Number of users Real-time accounting interval

1 to 99 3
100 to 499 6
500 to 999 12

≥1000 ≥15

Related commands: retry realtime-accounting, radius scheme.

Examples

# Set the real-time accounting interval of RADIUS scheme radius1 to 51 minutes.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] timer realtime-accounting 51

timer response-timeout

Syntax

timer response-timeout seconds

undo timer response-timeout

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

seconds: Response timeout time of RADIUS servers, ranging from 1 to 10 seconds.

Description

Use the timer response-timeout command to set the response timeout time of RADIUS servers.
Use the undo timer response-timeout command to restore the default response timeout time of
RADIUS servers.
By default, the response timeout time of RADIUS servers is 3 seconds.
Note that:
z After sending out a RADIUS request (authentication/authorization request or accounting request)
to a RADIUS server, the switch waits for a response from the server. The maximum time that the
switch can wait for the response is called the response timeout time of RADIUS servers, and the
corresponding timer in the switch system is called the response timeout timer of RADIUS servers.
You can use the timer response-timeout command to set the timeout time of this timer, and if the

1-54
switch gets no answer before the response timeout timer expires, it needs to retransmit the request
to ensure that the user can obtain RADIUS service.
z Appropriately setting the timeout time of this timer according to your network situation can improve
the performance of your system.
z This command has the same function with the timer command.
Related commands: radius scheme, retry.

Examples

# Set the response timeout time in RADIUS scheme radius1 to five seconds.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] timer response-timeout 5

user-name-format

Syntax

user-name-format { with-domain | without-domain }

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

with-domain: Specifies to include ISP domain names in the usernames to be sent to RADIUS server.
without-domain: Specifies to exclude ISP domain names from the usernames to be sent to RADIUS
server.

Description

Use the user-name-format command to set the format of the usernames to be sent to RADIUS server
By default, except for the default RADIUS scheme "system", the usernames sent to RADIUS servers in
any RADIUS scheme carry ISP domain names.
Note that:
z Generally, an access user is named in the userid@isp-name format. Here, isp-name behind the @
character represents the ISP domain name, by which the device determines which ISP domain a
user belongs to. However, some old RADIUS servers cannot accept the usernames that carry ISP
domain names. In this case, it is necessary to remove domain names from usernames before
sending usernames to RADIUS server. For this reason, the user-name-format command is
designed for you to specify whether or not ISP domain names are carried in the usernames to be
sent to the RADIUS server.
z For a RADIUS scheme, if you have specified to exclude ISP domain names from usernames, you
should not use this RADIUS scheme in more than one ISP domain. Otherwise, such errors may
occur: the RADIUS server regards two different users having the same name but belonging to
different ISP domains as the same user (because the usernames sent to it are the same).

1-55
z For an 802.1x user, if you have specified to use EAP authentication, the switch will encapsulate
and send the contents from the client directly to the server. In this case, the configuration of the
user-name-format command is not effective.
Related commands: radius scheme.

Examples

# Specify to exclude ISP domain names from the usernames to be sent to RADIUS server in RADIUS
scheme radius1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme radius1
New Radius scheme
[Sysname-radius-radius1] user-name-format without-domain

HWTACACS Configuration Commands

data-flow-format

Syntax

data-flow-format data { byte | giga-byte | kilo-byte | mega-byte }

data-flow-format packet { giga-packet | kilo-packet | mega-packet | one-packet }
undo data-flow-format { data | packet }

View

HWTACACS scheme view

Parameters

data: Sets the data unit of outgoing HWTACACS data flows, which can be byte, giga-byte, kilo-byte, or
mega-byte.
packet: Sets the packet unit of outgoing HWTACACS data flows, which can be one-packet, giga-packet,
kilo-packet, or mega-packet.

Description

Use the data-flow-format command to set the units of data flows to TACACS servers.
Use the undo data-flow-format command to restore the default units.
By default, the data unit and packet unit for outgoing HWTACACS flows are byte and one-packet
respectively.
Note that the specified unit of data flows sent to the TACACS server must be consistent with the traffic
statistics unit of the TACACS server. Otherwise, accounting cannot be performed correctly.
Related commands: display hwtacacs.

Examples

# Specify to measure data and packets in data flows to TACACS servers in kilo-bytes and kilo-packets
respectively in HWTACACS scheme hwt1.
<Sysname> system-view

1-56
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] hwtacacs scheme hwt1
[Sysname- hwtacacs-hwt1] data-flow-format data kilo-byte
[Sysname- hwtacacs-hwt1] data-flow-format packet kilo-packet

display hwtacacs

Syntax

display hwtacacs [ hwtacacs-scheme-name [ statistics ] ]

View

Any view

Parameters

hwtacacs-scheme-name: HWTACACS scheme name, a string of 1 to 32 characters. This name is

case-insensitive. If this argument is not specified, the system displays information about all
HWTACACS schemes.
statistics: Displays statistics about one or all HWTACACS schemes.

Description

Use the display hwtacacs command to display configuration or statistics information of one specified
or all HWTACACS schemes.
Related commands: hwtacacs scheme.

Examples

# Display configuration information of HWTACACS scheme ht1.

<Sysname> display hwtacacs ht1
-------------------------------------------------------------------- HWTACACS-server
template name : ht1
Primary-authentication-server : 172.31.1.11:49
Primary-authorization-server : 172.31.1.11:49
Primary-accounting-server : 172.31.1.11:49
Secondary-authentication-server : 0.0.0.0:0
Secondary-authorization-server : 0.0.0.0:0
Secondary-accounting-server : 0.0.0.0:0
Current-authentication-server : 172.31.1.11:49
Current-authorization-server : 172.31.1.11:49
Current-accounting-server : 172.31.1.11:49
Source-IP-address : 0.0.0.0
key authentication : 790131
key authorization : 790131
key accounting : 790131
Quiet-interval(min) : 5
Response-timeout-Interval(sec) : 5
Realtime-accouting-Interval(min): 12
Stop-acct-PKT resending times : 100
Domain-included : No

1-57
Traffic-unit : B
Packet traffic-unit : one-packet

display stop-accounting-buffer

Syntax

display stop-accounting-buffer hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name

View

Any view

Parameters

hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name: Displays the buffered stop-accounting requests of a

specified HWTACACS scheme. Here, hwtacacs-scheme-name is a string of up to 32 characters.

Description

Use the display stop-accounting-buffer command to display stop-accounting requests buffered in the
switch.
Related commands: reset stop-accounting-buffer, stop-accounting-buffer enable, retry
stop-accounting.

Examples

# Display stop-accounting requests buffered for HWTACACS scheme hwt1.

<Sysname> display stop-accounting-buffer hwtacacs-scheme hwt1

hwtacacs nas-ip

Syntax

hwtacacs nas-ip ip-address

undo hwtacacs nas-ip

View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: Source IP address to be set, an IP address of this device. This address can neither be the
all 0's address nor be a Class D address.

Description

Use the hwtacacs nas-ip command to set the source address of outgoing HWTACACS messages.
Use the undo hwtacacs nas-ip command to restore the default setting.
By default, no source address is specified, and the IP address of corresponding outbound interface is
used as the source address.
Note that:

1-58
z You can specify the source address of outgoing HWTACACS messages to avoid messages
returned from server from being unable to reach their destination due to physical interface trouble.
It is recommended to use a Loopback interface address as the source IP address.
z You can specify only one source IP address by using this command. When you re-execute this
command again, the newly set source IP address will overwrite the old one.
Related commands: nas-ip.

Examples

# Configure the switch to use source address 129.10.10.1 for outgoing HWTACACS messages.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] hwtacacs nas-ip 129.10.10.1

hwtacacs scheme

Syntax

hwtacacs scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name

undo hwtacacs scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name

View

System view

Parameters

hwtacacs-scheme-name: HWTACACS scheme name, a string of 1 to 32 characters.

Description

Use the hwtacacs scheme command to create an HWTACACS scheme and enter its view.
Use the undo hwtacacs scheme command to delete an HWTACACS scheme.
By default, no HWTACACS scheme exists.

Examples

# Create an HWTACACS scheme named "hwt1" and enter the corresponding HWTACACS scheme
view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] hwtacacs scheme hwt1
[Sysname-hwtacacs-hwt1]

key

Syntax

key { accounting | authentication | authorization } string

undo key { accounting | authentication | authorization }

1-59
View

HWTACACS scheme view

Parameters

accounting: Sets a shared key for HWTACACS accounting messages.

authentication: Sets a shared key for HWTACACS authentication messages.
authorization: Sets a shared key for HWTACACS authorization messages.
string: Shared key to be set, a string of up to 16 characters.

Description

Use the key command to configure a shared key for HWTACACS authentication, authorization or
accounting messages.
Use the undo key command to delete such a configuration.
By default, no key is set for HWTACACS messages.
Related commands: display hwtacacs.

Examples

# Use hello as the shared key for HWTACACS accounting messages in HWTACACS scheme hwt1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] hwtacacs scheme hwt1
[Sysname-hwtacacs-hwt1] key accounting hello

nas-ip

Syntax

nas-ip ip-address
undo nas-ip

View

HWTACACS scheme view

Parameters

1-62
Parameters

ip-address: IP address of the primary authorization server to be used, a valid unicast address in dotted
decimal notation.
port: Port number of the primary authorization server, ranging from 1 to 65535.

Description

Use the primary authorization command to set the IP address and port number of the primary
HWTACACS authorization server to be used by the current scheme.
Use the undo primary authorization command to restore the default IP address and port number of
the primary authorization server, which are 0.0.0.0 and 49 respectively.
Note that:
z You are not allowed to set the same IP address for both primary and secondary authorization
servers. If you do this, your setting will fail.
z If you re-execute the command, the new setting will overwrite the old one.
z You can remove an authorization server setting only when there is no active TCP connection that is
sending authorization messages to the server.
Related commands: display hwtacacs.

Examples

# Set the IP address and UDP port number of the primary authorization server for HWTACACS scheme
hwt1 to 10.163.155.13 and 49 respectively.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] hwtacacs scheme hwt1
[Sysname-hwtacacs-hwt1] primary authorization 10.163.155.13 49

reset hwtacacs statistics

Syntax

reset hwtacacs statistics { accounting | authentication | authorization | all }

View

User view

Parameters

accounting: Clears HWTACACS accounting statistics.

authentication: Clears HWTACACS authentication statistics.
authorization: Clears HWTACACS authorization statistics.
all: Clears all HWTACACS statistics.

Description

Use the reset hwtacacs statistics command to clear HWTACACS statistics.

Related commands: display hwtacacs.

1-63
Examples

# Clear all HWTACACS protocol statistics.

<Sysname> reset hwtacacs statistics all

reset stop-accounting-buffer

Syntax

reset stop-accounting-buffer hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name

View

User view

Parameters

hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name: Deletes the buffered stop-accounting requests of a

specified HWTACACS scheme. Here, hwtacacs-scheme-name is the name of a HWTACACS scheme,
which is a string of up to 32 characters.

Description

Use the reset stop-accounting-buffer command to clear stop-accounting requests that are buffered
on the switch due to getting no response.
Related commands: stop-accounting-buffer enable, retry stop-accounting, display
stop-accounting-buffer.

Examples

# Delete the stop-accounting requests buffered for HWTACACS scheme hwt1.

<Sysname> reset stop-accounting-buffer hwtacacs-scheme hwt1

retry stop-accounting

Syntax

retry stop-accounting retry-times

undo retry stop-accounting

View

undo timer quiet

View

HWTACACS scheme view

Parameters

minutes: Wait time before primary server state restoration, ranging from 1 to 255 minutes.

Description

1-67
Examples

# Configure the switch to wait 10 minutes before it tries to restore the status of the primary server to
active.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] hwtacacs scheme hwt1
[Sysname-hwtacacs-hwt1] timer quiet 10

timer realtime-accounting

Syntax

timer realtime-accounting minutes

undo timer realtime-accounting

View

HWTACACS scheme view

Parameters

minutes: Real-time accounting interval, in minutes. It ranges from 3 to 60 and must be a multiple of 3.

Description

Use the timer realtime-accounting command to set the real-time accounting interval.
Use the undo timer realtime-accounting command to restore the default real-time accounting
interval.
By default, the real-time accounting interval is 12 minutes.
Note that:
z To control the interval at which users are charged in real time, you can set the real-time accounting
interval. After the setting, the switch periodically sends online users' accounting information to
TACACS accounting server at the set interval.
z The setting of the real-time accounting interval depends, to some degree, on the performance of
the switch and the TACACS server. The higher the performance of the switch and the TACACS
server is, the shorter the interval can be. It is recommended to set the interval as long as possible
when the number of users is relatively great (≥1000). The following table lists the recommended
intervals for different numbers of users.

Table 1-7 Numbers of users and recommended intervals

Number of users Real-time accounting interval

1 to 99 3

100 to 499 6
500 to 999 12
≥1000 ≥15

1-68
Examples

# Set the real-time accounting interval in HWTACACS scheme hwt1 to 51 minutes.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] hwtacacs scheme hwt1
[Sysname-hwtacacs-hwt1] timer realtime-accounting 51

timer response-timeout

Syntax

timer response-timeout seconds

undo timer response-timeout

View

HWTACACS scheme view

Parameters

seconds: Response timeout time of TACACS servers, ranging from 1 to 300 seconds.

Description

Use the timer response-timeout command to set the response timeout time of TACACS servers.
Use the undo timer response-timeout command to restore the default response timeout time of
TACACS servers.
By default, the response timeout time of TACACS servers is five seconds.
As HWTACACS is based on TCP, both server response timeout and TCP timeout may cause
disconnection from TACACS server.
Related commands: display hwtacacs.

Examples

# Set the response timeout time of TACACS servers to 30 seconds for HWTACACS scheme hwt1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] hwtacacs scheme hwt1
[Sysname-hwtacacs-hwt1] timer response-timeout 30

user-name-format

Syntax

user-name-format { with-domain | without-domain }

View

HWTACACS scheme view

Parameters

with-domain: Specifies to include ISP domain names in the usernames to be sent to TACACS server.

1-69
without-domain: Specifies to exclude ISP domain names from the usernames to be sent to TACACS
server.

Description

Use the user-name-format command to set the format of the usernames to be sent to TACACS server.
By default, the usernames sent to TACACS server in a HWTACACS scheme carry ISP domain names.
Note that:
z Generally, an access user is named in the userid@isp-name format. Here, isp-name behind the @
character represents the ISP domain name, by which the device determines which ISP domain a
user belongs to. However, some old TACACS servers cannot accept the usernames that carry ISP
domain names. In this case, it is necessary to remove domain names from usernames before
sending usernames to TACACS server. For this reason, the user-name-format command is
designed for you to specify whether or not ISP domain names are carried in the usernames to be
sent to TACACS server.
z For a HWTACACS scheme, if you have specified to exclude ISP domain names from usernames,
you should not use this scheme in more than one ISP domain. Otherwise, such errors may occur:
the TACACS server regards two different users having the same name but belonging to different
ISP domains as the same user (because the usernames sent to it are the same).
Related commands: hwtacacs scheme.

Examples

# Specify to exclude ISP domain names from the usernames to be sent to TACACS server in
HWTACACS scheme hwt1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] hwtacacs scheme hwt1
[Sysname-hwtacacs-hwt1] user-name-format without-domain

1-70
2 EAD Configuration Commands

EAD Configuration Commands

security-policy-server

Syntax

security-policy-server ip-address
undo security-policy-server { ip-address | all }

View

RADIUS scheme view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address of a security policy server.

all: IP addresses of all security policy servers.

Description

Use the security-policy-server command to set the IP address of a security policy server.
Use the undo security-policy-server command to remove one specified or all security policy server
address settings.
You can configure up to eight security policy server addresses in each RADIUS scheme. The switch
only responds to those session control messages that come from authentication server or security
policy server.

Examples

# Set a security policy server address 192.168.0.1 on the switch.

<Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] radius scheme extended
[Sysname-radius-extended] security-policy-server 192.168.0.1
[Sysname-radius-extended] display current-configuration
…
radius scheme extended
primary authentication 1.1.11.29 1812
secondary authentication 127.0.0.1 1645
security-policy-server 192.168.0.1
user-name-format without-domain

2-1
Table of Contents

1 MAC Address Authentication Configuration Commands ·····································································1-1

MAC Address Authentication Basic Function Configuration Commands ···············································1-1
display mac-authentication ··············································································································1-1
mac-authentication ··························································································································1-3
mac-authentication interface ···········································································································1-4
mac-authentication authmode usernameasmacaddress ································································1-5
mac-authentication authmode usernamefixed ················································································1-6
mac-authentication authpassword···································································································1-7
mac-authentication authusername ··································································································1-7
mac-authentication domain ·············································································································1-8
mac-authentication timer ·················································································································1-8
reset mac-authentication ·················································································································1-9
MAC Address Authentication Enhanced Function Configuration Commands······································1-10
mac-authentication guest-vlan ······································································································1-10
mac-authentication max-auth-num································································································1-11
mac-authentication timer guest-vlan-reauth ··················································································1-12

i
1 MAC Address Authentication Configuration
Commands

MAC Address Authentication Basic Function Configuration

Commands
display mac-authentication

Syntax

display mac-authentication [ interface interface-list ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface interface-list: List of Ethernet ports. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this
argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port
index ranges for this argument.

Description

Use the display mac-authentication command to display information about MAC address
authentication.

Examples

# Display the global information about MAC address authentication.

<Sysname> display mac-authentication
Mac address authentication is Enabled.
Authentication mode is UsernameAsMacAddress
Usernameformat:with-hyphen lowercase
Fixed password:not configured
Offline detect period is 300s
Quiet period is 60 second(s).
Server response timeout value is 100s
Guest VLAN re-authenticate period is 30s
Max allowed user number is 1024
Current user number amounts to 1
Current domain: not configured, use default domain
Silent Mac User info:
MAC ADDR From Port Port Index
--- On unit 1, 1 silent mac address(es) found. ---

1-1
0016-e0be-e201 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 1(vlan:1)
--- 1 silent mac address(es) found. ---
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is link-up
MAC address authentication is Enabled
max-auth-num is 256
Guest VLAN is 2
Authenticate success: 1, failed: 0
Current online user number is 1
MAC ADDR Authenticate state AuthIndex
000d-88f8-4e71 MAC_AUTHENTICATOR_SUCCESS 0

……(The following is omitted)

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display mac-authentication command

Field Description
Mac address authentication is Enabled MAC address authentication is enabled.
Username type used in the MAC address
authentication:
z UsernameFixed: Uses the fixed username for
authentication.
Authentication mode z UsernameAsMacAddress: Uses the MAC
address of a user as the username for
authentication.
The default is the MAC address
(UsernameAsMacAddress).
Meaning of this field varies by the username type
for MAC address authentication:
z If the username type is MAC address, this
field indicates whether to use a fixed
password for authentication. By default, this
field is not configured, which means using the
Fixed password MAC address of a user as the password for
authentication.
z If the username type is fixed username, this
field indicates whether a fixed password is
configured. By default, this field is not
configured, which means the password is
null.
Password used in the fixed mode, which is not
Fixed password
configured by default.
Offline detect timer, which sets the time interval
Offline detect period to check whether a user goes offline and defaults
to 300 seconds.
Quiet timer sets the quiet period. A switch goes
through a quiet period if a user fails to pass the
Quiet period
MAC address authentication. The default value
is 60 seconds.
Server timeout timer, which sets the timeout time
Server response timeout value for the connection between a switch and the
RADIUS server. By default, it is 100 seconds.
Re-authenticate timer, which sets the time
Guest VLAN re-authenticate period interval to reauthenticate the users in the Guest
VLAN and defaults to 30 seconds.

1-2
Field Description
The maximum number of users supported by the
Max allowed user number
switch. It is 1,024 by default.
Current user number amounts to The current number of users
The current domain. It is not configured by
Current domain
default.

The information about the silent user. When the

user fails to pass MAC address authentication
because of inputting error user name and
Silent Mac User info
password, the switch sets the user to be in quiet
state. During quiet period, the switch does not
process the authentication request of this user.
The link connected to GigabitEthernet1/0/1 port
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is link-up
is up.
MAC address authentication is enabled for
MAC address authentication is Enabled
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 port.
Maximum number of MAC address
max-auth-num authentication users that the port can
accommodate
Guest VLAN Guest VLAN of the port
Statistics of the MAC address authentications
Authenticate success: 1, failed: 0 performed on the port, including the numbers of
successful and failed authentication operations.
The number of the users current access the
Current online user number
network through the port
MAC ADDR Peer MAC address

mac-authentication

Syntax

mac-authentication
undo mac-authentication

View

System view, Ethernet port view

1-3
Parameters

None

Description

Use the mac-authentication command to enable MAC address authentication globally or on the
current port.
Use the undo mac-authentication command to disable MAC address authentication globally or on the
current port.
By default, MAC address authentication is disabled both globally and on a port.
When being executed in system view, the mac-authentication command enables MAC address
authentication globally.
When being executed in Ethernet port view, the mac-authentication command enables MAC address
authentication on the current port.
To make the MAC address authentication take effect, you must enable MAC address authentication
globally and on the relevant ports.

You can configure MAC address authentication on a port before enabling it globally. However, the
configuration will not take effect unless MAC address authentication is enabled globally.

Examples

# Enable MAC address authentication globally.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mac-authentication
MAC-Authentication is enabled globally.

# Enable MAC address authentication on port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] mac-authentication

mac-authentication interface

Syntax

mac-authentication interface interface-list

undo mac-authentication interface interface-list

View

System view

1-4
Parameters

interface-list: List of Ethernet ports. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument
in the form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] }
&<1-10>, where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this
argument.

Description

Use the mac-authentication interface command to enable the MAC address authentication for on the
specified port(s).
Use the undo mac-authentication interface command to disable the MAC address authentication for
the specified port(s).
By default, MAC address authentication is disabled on a port.

z This command is essential for MAC address authentication to work on a port or on particular ports
after MAC address authentication is globally enabled.
z You cannot configure the maximum number of dynamic MAC address entries for a port (through
the mac-address max-mac-count command) with MAC address authentication enabled.
Likewise, you cannot enable the MAC address authentication feature on a port with a limit of
dynamic MAC addresses configured.
z If you have enabled MAC address authentication on a port, you cannot add the port to an
aggregation group. If a port is already added to an aggregation group, you cannot enable MAC
address authentication on the port.

Examples

# Enable MAC address authentication for GigabitEthernet1/0/1 port.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mac-authentication interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

mac-authentication authmode usernameasmacaddress

Syntax

mac-authentication authmode usernameasmacaddress [ usernameformat { with-hyphen |

without-hyphen } ] { lowercase | uppercase } | fixedpassword password ]
undo mac-authentication authmode usernameasmacaddress [ usernameformat |
fixedpassword ]

View

System view

1-5
Parameters

usernameformat: Specifies the input format of the username and password.

with-hyphen: Uses hyphened MAC addresses as usernames and passwords, for example,
00-05-e0-1c-02-e3.
without-hyphen: Uses MAC addresses without hyphens as usernames and passwords, for example,
0005e01c02e3.
lowercase: Uses lowercase MAC addresses as usernames and passwords.
uppercase: Uses uppercase MAC addresses as usernames and passwords.
fixedpassword password: Specifies the password for MAC address authentication as the specified
fixed password instead of user MAC addresses. password is a string of 1 to 63 characters.

Description

Use the mac-authentication authmode usernameasmacaddress command to set the username

type for MAC address authentication to MAC address and specify the username format.
Use the undo mac-authentication authmode command to restore the default user name mode.
By default, the user name and password in MAC address mode are used for MAC address
authentication.

Examples

# Use the user name in MAC address mode for MAC address authentication, requiring hyphened
lowercase MAC addresses as the usernames and passwords.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mac-authentication authmode usernameasmacaddress usernameformat with-hyphen
lowercase

mac-authentication authmode usernamefixed

Syntax

mac-authentication authmode usernamefixed

undo mac-authentication authmode

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the mac-authentication authmode usernamefixed command to set the user name in fixed mode
for MAC address authentication.
Use the undo mac-authentication authmode command to restore the default user name mode for
MAC address authentication.
By default, the MAC address mode is used.

1-6
Examples

# Use the user name in fixed mode for MAC address authentication.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mac-authentication authmode usernamefixed

mac-authentication authpassword

Syntax

mac-authentication authpassword password

undo mac-authentication authpassword

View

System view

Parameters

password: Password to be set, a string comprising 1 to 63 characters.

Description

Use the mac-authentication authpassword command to set a password for MAC address
authentication when the user name in fixed mode is used.
Use the undo mac-authentication authpassword command to cancel the configured password.
By default, no password is configured.

Examples

# Set the password to newmac.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mac-authentication authpassword newmac

mac-authentication authusername

Syntax

mac-authentication authusername username

undo mac-authentication authusername

View

User view

Parameters

Description

Use the reset mac-authentication command to clear the MAC address authentication statistics. With
the interface keyword specified, the command clears the MAC address authentication statistics of the
specified port. Without this keyword, the command clears the global MAC address authentication
statistics.

Examples

# Clear the MAC address authentication statistics for port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

1-9
<Sysname> reset mac-authentication statistics interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

MAC Address Authentication Enhanced Function Configuration

Commands
mac-authentication guest-vlan

Syntax

mac-authentication guest-vlan vlan-id

undo mac-authentication guest-vlan

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

vlan-id: ID of the guest VLAN configured for the current port. This argument is in the range of 1 to 4,094.

Description

Use the mac-authentication guest-vlan command to configure a guest VLAN for the current port. If
the client connected to the port fails in the authentication, the port will be added to the guest VLAN, and
thus the users accessing the port can access network resources in the guest VLAN.
Use the undo mac-authentication guest-vlan command to remove the guest VLAN configuration for
the port.
No guest VLAN is configured for a port by default.
The system will re-authenticate users in the guest VLAN at the interval configured by the
mac-authentication timer guest-vlan-reauth command. If the user of a port passes the
authentication, the port will leave the guest VLAN and return to the initial VLAN configured for it.

1-10
z If more than one client are connected to a port, you cannot configure a Guest VLAN for this port.
z When a Guest VLAN is configured for a port, only one MAC address authentication user can
access the port. Even if you set the limit on the number of MAC address authentication users to
more than one, the configuration does not take effect.
z The undo vlan command cannot be used to remove the VLAN configured as a Guest VLAN. If you
want to remove this VLAN, you must remove the Guest VLAN configuration for it. Refer to the
VLAN module in this manual for the description on the undo vlan command.
z Only one Guest VLAN can be configured for a port, and the VLAN configured as the Guest VLAN
must be an existing VLAN. Otherwise, the Guest VLAN configuration does not take effect. If you
want to change the Guest VLAN for a port, you must remove the current Guest VLAN and then
configure a new Guest VLAN for this port.
z 802.1x authentication cannot be enabled for a port configured with a Guest VLAN.
z The Guest VLAN function for MAC address authentication does not take effect when port security
is enabled.

Related commands: mac-authentication timer guest-vlan-reauth.

Examples

# Configure VLAN 4 as the Guest VLAN for GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] mac-authentication guest-vlan 4

mac-authentication max-auth-num

Syntax

mac-authentication max-auth-num user-number

undo mac-authentication max-auth-num

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

user-name: Maximum number of MAC address authentication users allowed to access a port. This
argument is in the range of 1 to 256.

Description

Use the mac-authentication max-auth-num command to configure the maximum number of MAC
address authentication users allowed to access the port. After the number of access users has
exceeded the configured maximum number, the switch will not trigger MAC address authentication for
subsequent access users, and thus these subsequent access users cannot access the network
normally.

1-11
Use the undo mac-authentication max-auth-num command to restore the maximum number of MAC
address authentication users allowed to access the port to the default value.
By default, the maximum number of MAC address authentication users allowed to access a port is 256.

z If both the limit on the number of MAC address authentication users and the limit on the number of
users configured in the port security function are configured for a port at the same time, the smaller
value of the two configured limits is adopted as the maximum number of MAC address
authentication users allowed to access this port. Refer to the Port Security module in this manual
for the description on the port security function.
z You cannot configure the maximum number of MAC address authentication users for a port if any
user connected to this port is online.

Examples

# Set the maximum number of MAC address authentication users allowed to access GigabitEthernet
1/0/2 to 100.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] mac-authentication max-auth-num 100

mac-authentication timer guest-vlan-reauth

Syntax

mac-authentication timer guest-vlan-reauth interval

undo mac-authentication timer guest-vlan-reauth

View

System view

Parameters

interval: Interval at which the switch re-authenticates users in guest VLANs. This argument is in the
range of 1 to 3,600 in seconds.

Description

Use the mac-authentication timer guest-vlan-reauth command to configure the interval at which the
switch re-authenticates users in guest VLANs. If the user of a port passes the authentication, the port
will leave the guest VLAN and return to the initial VLAN configured for it.
Use the undo mac-authentication timer guest-vlan-reauth command to restore the re-authentication
interval to the default value.
The switch re-authenticates the users in guest VLANs at the interval of 30 seconds by default.

1-12
Examples

# Configure the switch to re-authenticate users in Guest VLANs at the interval of 60 seconds.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mac-authentication timer guest-vlan-reauth 60

1-13
Table of Contents

1 IP Address Configuration Commands·····································································································1-1

IP Address Configuration Commands·····································································································1-1
display ip interface···························································································································1-1
display ip interface brief···················································································································1-3
ip address ········································································································································1-4

2 IP Performance Optimization Configuration Commands ······································································2-1

IP Performance Optimization Configuration Commands ········································································2-1
display fib·········································································································································2-1
display fib ip-address·······················································································································2-2
display fib acl ···································································································································2-3
display fib |·······································································································································2-4
display fib statistics··························································································································2-4
display icmp statistics ······················································································································2-5
display ip socket ······························································································································2-6
display ip statistics···························································································································2-8
display tcp statistics·························································································································2-9
display tcp status ···························································································································2-11
display udp statistics······················································································································2-12
icmp redirect send ·························································································································2-13
icmp unreach send ························································································································2-14
reset ip statistics ····························································································································2-14
reset tcp statistics ··························································································································2-15
reset udp statistics·························································································································2-15
tcp timer fin-timeout ·······················································································································2-16
tcp timer syn-timeout ·····················································································································2-16
tcp window·····································································································································2-17

i
1 IP Address Configuration Commands

IP Address Configuration Commands

display ip interface

Syntax

display ip interface [ interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Specifies an interface by its type and number.

Description

Use the display ip interface command to display information about a specified or all Layer 3
interfaces.
If no argument is specified, information about all Layer 3 interfaces is displayed.

Examples

# Display information about VLAN-interface 1.

<Sysname> display ip interface vlan-interface 1
Vlan-interface1 current state :UP
Line protocol current state :UP
Internet Address is 192.168.0.39/24 Primary
Broadcast address : 192.168.0.255
The Maximum Transmit Unit : 1500 bytes
IP packets input number: 9678, bytes: 475001, multicasts: 7
IP packets output number: 8622, bytes: 391084, multicasts: 0
TTL invalid packet number: 0
ICMP packet input number: 0
Echo reply: 0
Unreachable: 0
Source quench: 0
Routing redirect: 0
Echo request: 0
Router advert: 0
Router solicit: 0
Time exceed: 0
IP header bad: 0
Timestamp request: 0

1-1
Timestamp reply: 0
Information request: 0
Information reply: 0
Netmask request: 0
Netmask reply: 0
Unknown type: 0

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display ip interface command

Field Description
Current physical state of the interface, which can be
z Administrative DOWN: Indicates that the interface is
administratively down; that is, the interface is shut
down with the shutdown command.
current state z DOWN: Indicates that the interface is
administratively up but its physical state is down,
which may be caused by a connection or link failure.
UP: Indicates that both the administrative and physical
states of the interface are up.
Current state of the network layer protocol, which can
be
z DOWN: Indicates that the protocol state of the
Line protocol current state interface is down, which is usually because that no
IP address is assigned to the interface.
z UP: Indicates that the protocol state of the interface
is up.
Internet Address IP address of the interface
Directed broadcast address of the subnet attached to
Broadcast address
the interface
The Maximum Transmit Unit Maximum transmission unit on the interface, in bytes
IP packets input number, bytes, multicasts Total number of packets, bytes, and multicast packets
IP packets output number, bytes, forwarded and received on the interface(the statistics
multicasts start at the device startup)

Number of TTL-invalid packets received on the

TTL invalid packet number
interface (the statistics start at the device startup)

1-2
Field Description
ICMP packet input number:
Echo reply:
Unreachable:
Source quench:
Routing redirect: Total number of ICMP packets received on the
Echo request: interface (the statistics start at the device startup),
including the following packets:
Router advert:
Echo reply packet, unreachable packet, source quench
Router solicit:
packet, routing redirect packet, Echo request packet,
Time exceed: router advert packet, router solicit packet, time exceed
IP header bad: packet, IP header bad packet, timestamp request
packet, timestamp reply packet, information request
Timestamp request:
packet, information reply packet, netmask request
Timestamp reply: packet, netmask reply packet, and unknown types of
Information request: packets.
Information reply:
Netmask request:
Netmask reply:
Unknown type:

display ip interface brief

Syntax

display ip interface brief [ interface-type [ interface-number ] ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type: Interface type.

interface-number: Interface number.

Description

Use the display ip interface brief command to display brief information about a specified or all Layer 3
interfaces.
With no argument included, the command displays information about all layer 3 interfaces; with only the
interface type specified, it displays information about all layer 3 interfaces of the specified type; with
both the interface type and interface number specified, it displays information about the specified
interface.
Related commands: display ip interface.

Examples

# Display brief information about VLAN-interface 1.

<Sysname> display ip interface brief vlan-interface 1
*down: administratively down
(l): loopback

1-3
(s): spoofing
Interface IP Address Physical Protocol Description
Vlan-interface1 192.168.0.39 up up Vlan-inte...

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display ip interface brief command

Field Description
*down administratively The interface is administratively shut down with the shutdown
down command.
Spoofing attribute of the interface. It indicates that the interface whose
(s) : spoofing link layer protocol is displayed up may have no such a link present or the
link is set up only on demand.
Interface Interface name
IP address of the interface (If no IP address is configured, “unassigned”
IP Address
is displayed.)
Physical state of the interface, which can be
z *down: Indicates that the interface is administratively down; that is,
the interface is shut down with the shutdown command.
Physical z down: Indicates that the interface is administratively up but its
physical state is down, which may be caused by a connection or link
failure.
up: Indicates that both the administrative and physical states of the
interface are up.
Network layer protocol state of the interface, which can be
Protocol z down: Indicates that the protocol state of the interface is down, which
is usually because that no IP address is assigned to the interface.
z up: Indicates that the protocol state of the interface is up.
Interface description information (for detailed information, refer to VLAN
Configuration and VLAN Commands).
Description If the description has no more than 12 characters, the whole description
can be displayed. If it has more than 12 characters, only the first nine
characters are displayed.

ip address

Syntax

ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length }

undo ip address [ ip-address { mask | mask-length } ]

View

VLAN interface view, loopback interface view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address, in dotted decimal notation.

mask: Subnet mask, in dotted decimal notation.
mask-length: Subnet mask length, the number of consecutive ones in the mask. It is in the range of 0 to
32.

1-4
Description

Use the ip address command to specify an IP address and mask for a VLAN or loopback interface.
Use the undo ip address command to remove an IP address and mask of a VLAN or loopback
interface.
By default, no IP address is configured for a VLAN or loopback interface.
Related commands: display ip interface.

Examples

# Assign the IP address 129.12.0.1 to VLAN-interface 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ip address 129.12.0.1 255.255.255.0

1-5
2 IP Performance Optimization Configuration
Commands

IP Performance Optimization Configuration Commands

display fib

Syntax

display fib

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display fib command to display all forwarding information base (FIB) information.

Examples

# Display all FIB information.

<Sysname> display fib
Flag:
U:Usable G:Gateway H:Host B:Blackhole D:Dynamic S:Static
R:Reject E:Equal cost multi-path L:Generated by ARP or ESIS Destination/Mask Nexthop
Flag TimeStamp Interface
10.153.17.0/24 10.153.17.99 U t[37] Vlan-interface1
10.153.18.88/32 127.0.0.1 GHU t[37] InLoopBack0
10.153.18.0/24 10.153.18.88 U t[37] LoopBack0
10.153.17.99/32 127.0.0.1 GHU t[37] InLoopBack0
127.0.0.0/8 127.0.0.1 U t[33] InLoopBack0

2-1
Table 2-1 Description on the fields of the display fib command

Field Description
Flags:
U: Usable route.
G: Gateway route
H: Host route
B: Blackhole route
Flag
D: Dynamic route
S: Static route
R: Rejected route
E: Multi-path equal-cost route
L: Route generated by ARP or ESIS
Destination/Mask Destination address/mask length
Nexthop Next hop address
TimeStamp Timestamp
Interface Forwarding interface

display fib ip-address

Syntax

display fib ip-address1 [ { mask1 | mask-length1 } [ ip-address2 { mask2 | mask-length2 } | longer ] |

longer ]

View

Any view

Parameters

ip-address1, ip-address2: Destination IP addresses, in dotted decimal notation. ip-address1 and

ip-address2 together define an address range. The FIB entries in this address range will be displayed.
mask1, mask2: Subnet masks, in dotted decimal notation.
mask-length1, mask-length2: Lengths of the subnet masks, the number of consecutive ones in the
masks, in the range of 0 to 32.
longer: Displays the FIB entries matching the specified address/mask and having masks longer than or
equal to the specified mask. If no masks are specified, FIB entries that match the natural network
address and have the masks longer than or equal to the natural mask will be displayed.

Description

Use the display fib ip-address command to view the FIB entries matching the specified destination IP
address.
If no mask or mask length is specified, the FIB entry that matches the destination IP address and has
the longest mask will be displayed; if the mask is specified, the FIB entry that exactly matches the
specified destination IP address and mask will be displayed.

2-2
Examples

# Display FIB entry information which matches destination 12.158.10.0 and has a mask length no less
than eight.
<Sysname> display fib 12.158.10.0 longer
Route Entry Count: 1
Flag:
U:Usable G:Gateway H:Host B:Blackhole D:Dynamic S:Static
R:Reject E:Equal cost multi-path L:Generated by ARP or ESIS
Destination/Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface
12.158.10.0/24 12.158.10.1 U t[85391] Vlan-interface10

# Display FIB entry information which has a destination in the range of 12.158.10.0/24 to
12.158.10.6/24 and has a mask length of 24.
<Sysname> display fib 12.158.10.0 255.255.255.0 12.158.10.6 255.255.255.0
Route Entry Count: 1
Flag:
U:Usable G:Gateway H:Host B:Blackhole D:Dynamic S:Static
R:Reject E:Equal cost multi-path L:Generated by ARP or ESIS
Destination/Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface
12.158.10.0/24 12.158.10.1 U t[85391] Vlan-interface10

For details about the displayed information, see Table 2-1.

display fib acl

Syntax

display fib acl acl-number

View

Any view

Parameters

acl-number: Basic ACL number, in the range of 2000 to 2999.

Description

Use the display fib acl command to display the FIB entries matching a specific ACL. For ACL, refer to
the part discussing ACL in this manual.

Examples

# Configure and display ACL 2001.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] acl number 2001
[Sysname-acl-basic-2001] rule permit source 211.71.75.0 0.0.0.255
[Sysname-acl-basic-2001] display acl 2001
Basic ACL 2001, 1 rule
Acl's step is 1
rule 0 permit source 211.71.75.0 0.0.0.255

2-3
# Display the FIB entries filtered by ACL 2001.
<Sysname> display fib acl 2001
Route Entry matched by access-list 2001
Summary Counts :1
Flag:
U:Usable G:Gateway H:Host B:Blackhole D:Dynamic S:Static
R:Reject E:Equal cost multi-path L:Generated by ARP or ESIS
Destination/Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp Interface
211.71.75.0/24 1.1.1.2 GSU t[250763] Vlan-interface2

For details about the displayed information, see Table 2-1.

display fib |

Syntax

display fib | { begin | exclude | include } regular-expression

View

Any view

Parameters

|: Uses a regular expression to match FIB entries. For detailed information about regular expression,
refer to Configuration File Management Command.
begin: Displays a specific FIB entry and all the FIB entries following it. The specific FIB entry is the first
entry that matches the specified regular expression.
exclude: Displays the FIB entries that do not match the specified regular expression.
include: Displays the FIB entries that match the specified regular expression.
regular-expression: A case-sensitive character string.

Description

Use the display fib | command to display the FIB entries filtered by the specified regular expression.

Examples

# Display the entries starting from the first one containing the string 169.254.0.0.
<Sysname> display fib | begin 169.254.0.0
169.254.0.0/16 2.1.1.1 U t[0] Vlan-interface1
2.0.0.0/16 2.1.1.1 U t[0] Vlan-interface1

For details about the displayed information, see Table 2-1.

display fib statistics

Syntax

display fib statistics

View

Any view

2-4
Parameters

None

Description

Use the display fib statistics command to display the total number of FIB entries.

Examples

# Display the total number of FIB entries.

<Sysname> display fib statistics
Route Entry Count : 8

display icmp statistics

Syntax

display icmp statistics

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display icmp statistics command to display the statistics about ICMP packets.
Related commands: display ip interface, reset ip statistics.

Examples

# Display the statistics about ICMP packets.

<Sysname> display icmp statistics
Input: bad formats 0 bad checksum 0
echo 5 destination unreachable 0
source quench 0 redirects 0
echo reply 10 parameter problem 0
timestamp 0 information request 0
mask requests 0 mask replies 0
time exceeded 0
Output:echo 10 destination unreachable 0
source quench 0 redirects 0
echo reply 5 parameter problem 0
timestamp 0 information reply 0
mask requests 0 mask replies 0
time exceeded 0

2-5
Table 2-2 Description on the fields of the display icmp statistics command

Field Description
bad formats Number of received wrong format packets
bad checksum Number of received wrong checksum packets
echo Number of received echo packets
Number of received destination unreachable
destination unreachable
packets
source quench Number of received source quench packets
redirects Number of received redirection packets
Input:
echo reply Number of received replies
parameter problem Number of received parameter problem packets
timestamp Number of received time stamp packets
information request Number of received information request packets
mask requests Number of received mask requests
mask replies Number of received mask replies
time exceeded Number of received expiration packets

echo Number of sent echo packets

destination unreachable Number of sent destination unreachable packets
source quench Number of sent source quench packets

redirects Number of sent redirection packets

echo reply Number of sent replies
Output: parameter problem Number of sent parameter problem packets

timestamp Number of sent time stamp packets

information reply Number of sent information reply packets
mask requests Number of sent mask requests

mask replies Number of sent mask replies

time exceeded Number of sent expiration packets

display ip socket

Syntax

display ip socket [ socktype sock-type ] [ task-id socket-id ]

View

Any view

Parameters

socktype sock-type: Displays the socket information of this type. The sock type is in the range 1 to 3,
corresponding to TCP, UDP and raw IP respectively.

2-6
task-id: ID of a task, in the range 1 to 100.
socket-id: ID of a socket, in the range 0 to 3072.

Description

Use the display ip socket command to display socket information.

Examples

# Display the TCP socket information.

<Sysname> display ip socket socktype 1
SOCK_STREAM:
Task = VTYD(18), socketid = 1, Proto = 6,
LA = 0.0.0.0:23, FA = 0.0.0.0:0,
sndbuf = 8192, rcvbuf = 8192, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,
socket option = SO_ACCEPTCONN SO_KEEPALIVE SO_SENDVPNID SO_SETKEEPALIVE,
socket state = SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC

Task = VTYD(18), socketid = 2, Proto = 6,

LA = 10.153.17.99:23, FA = 10.153.17.56:1161,
sndbuf = 8192, rcvbuf = 8192, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,
socket option = SO_KEEPALIVE SO_OOBINLINE SO_SENDVPNID SO_SETKEEPALIVE,
socket state = SS_ISCONNECTED SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC

Task = VTYD(18), socketid = 3, Proto = 6,

LA = 10.153.17.99:23, FA = 10.153.17.82:1121,
sndbuf = 8192, rcvbuf = 8192, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,
socket option = SO_KEEPALIVE SO_OOBINLINE SO_SENDVPNID SO_SETKEEPALIVE,
socket state = SS_ISCONNECTED SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC

Table 2-3 Description on the fields of the display ip socket command

Field Description
SOCK_STREAM Indicates the socket type is TCP
SOCK_DGRAM Indicates the socket type is UDP
SOCK_RAW Indicates the socket type is raw IP
Task Task ID

socketid Socket ID
Protocol number used by the socket, indicating the protocol type
Proto
that IP carries
sndbuf Sending buffer size of the socket, in bytes
rcvbuf Receiving buffer size of the socket, in bytes
Current data size in the sending buffer. The value makes sense
sb_cc only for the socket of TCP type, because only TCP is able to cache
data.
rb_cc Current data size in the receiving buffer
socket option Option of a socket

2-7
Field Description
socket state State of a socket

display ip statistics

Syntax

display ip statistics

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ip statistics command to display the statistics about IP packets.
Related commands: display ip interface, reset ip statistics.

Examples

# Display the statistics about IP packets.

<Sysname> display ip statistics
Input: sum 7120 local 112
bad protocol 0 bad format 0
bad checksum 0 bad options 0
Output: forwarding 0 local 27
dropped 0 no route 2
compress fails 0
Fragment:input 0 output 0
dropped 0
fragmented 0 couldn't fragment 0
Reassembling:sum 0 timeouts 0

Table 2-4 Description on the fields of the display ip statistics command

Field Description
Input: sum Total number of packets received
Total number of packets with destination being
local
local
Total number of unknown protocol packets.
Unknown protocol packets are destined to the local
device, but the upper layer protocol specified in
bad protocol their IP header cannot be processed by the device.
(For example, if a switch is not enabled with the
Layer 3 multicast function, it considers IGMP
packets as unknown protocol packets.)

2-8
Field Description
Total number of packets with incorrect header
bad format format that contains a wrong version, or has a
header length less than 20 bytes.
bad checksum Total number of packets with incorrect checksum

bad options Total number of packets with incorrect option

Total number of IP packets forwarded by the local
forwarding
device
Total number of IP packets initiated from the local
local
device
Output:
dropped Total number of IP packets discarded
Total number of IP packets for which no route is
no route
available
compress fails Total number of IP packets failed to compress
input Total number of fragments received
output Total number of fragments sent
dropped Total number of fragments discarded
Fragment:
Total number of IP packets successfully
fragmented
fragmented
Total number of IP packets that cannot be
couldn't fragment
fragmented
sum Total number of IP packets reassembled
Reassembling:
timeouts Total number of reassembly timeout IP packets

display tcp statistics

Syntax

display tcp statistics

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display tcp statistics command to display the statistics about TCP packets.
Related commands: display tcp status, reset tcp statistics.

Examples

# Display the statistics about TCP connections.

<Sysname> display tcp statistics
Received packets:

2-9
Total: 753
packets in sequence: 412 (11032 bytes)
window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 0
checksum error: 0, offset error: 0, short error: 0

duplicate packets: 4 (88 bytes), partially duplicate packets: 5 (7 bytes)

out-of-order packets: 0 (0 bytes)
packets of data after window: 0 (0 bytes)
packets received after close: 0

ACK packets: 481 (8776 bytes)

duplicate ACK packets: 7, too much ACK packets: 0

Sent packets:
Total: 665
urgent packets: 0
control packets: 5 (including 1 RST)
window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 2

data packets: 618 (8770 bytes) data packets retransmitted: 0 (0 bytes)

ACK-only packets: 40 (28 delayed)

Retransmitted timeout: 0, connections dropped in retransmitted timeout: 0

Keepalive timeout: 0, keepalive probe: 0, Keepalive timeout, so connections disconnected :
0
Initiated connections: 0, accepted connections: 0, established connections: 0
Closed connections: 0 (dropped: 0, initiated dropped: 0)
Packets dropped with MD5 authentication: 0
Packets permitted with MD5 authentication: 0

Table 2-5 Description on the fields of the display tcp statistics command

Field Description
Received Total Total number of packets received
packets:
packets in sequence Number of packets arriving in sequence
window probe packets Number of window probe packets received

window update packets Number of window update packets received

checksum error Number of checksum error packets received
offset error Number of offset error packets received
Number of received packets with length being too
short error
small
duplicate packets Number of completely duplicate packets received
partially duplicate packets Number of partially duplicate packets received
out-of-order packets Number of out-of-order packets received
packets of data after
Number of packets outside the receiving window
window

2-10
Field Description
packets received after Number of packets that arrived after connection is
close closed

ACK packets Number of ACK packets received

duplicate ACK packets Number of duplicate ACK packets received
too much ACK packets Number of ACK packets for data unsent

Total Total number of packets sent

urgent packets Number of urgent packets sent
Number of control packets sent; in brackets are
control packets
retransmitted packets
Number of window probe packets sent; in the
window probe packets
brackets are resent packets
Sent packets:
window update packets Number of window update packets sent
data packets Number of data packets sent
data packets
Number of data packets retransmitted
retransmitted
Number of ACK packets sent; in brackets are
ACK-only packets: 40
delayed ACK packets
Retransmitted timeout Number of retransmission timer timeouts
Number of connections broken due to
connections dropped in retransmitted timeout
retransmission timeouts
Keepalive timeout Number of keepalive timer timeouts
keepalive probe Number of keepalive probe packets sent
Keepalive timeout, so connections Number of connections broken due to keepalive
disconnected probe failures

Initiated connections Number of connections initiated

accepted connections Number of connections accepted
established connections Number of connections established
Number of connections closed; in brackets are
connections closed accidentally (before receiving
Closed connections
SYN from the peer) and connections closed
initiatively (after receiving SYN from the peer)
Packets dropped with MD5 authentication Number of packets dropped by MD5 authentication
Number of packets permitted by MD5
Packets permitted with MD5 authentication
authentication

display tcp status

Syntax

display tcp status

View

Any view
2-11
Parameters

None

Description

Use the display tcp status command to display the state of all the TCP connections so that you can
monitor TCP connections in real time.

Examples

# Display the state of all the TCP connections.

<Sysname> display tcp status
*: TCP MD5 Connection
TCPCB Local Add:port Foreign Add:port State
03e37dc4 0.0.0.0:4001 0.0.0.0:0 Listening
04217174 100.0.0.204:23 100.0.0.253:65508 Established

Table 2-6 Description on the fields of the display tcp status command

Field Description
If there is an asterisk before a connection, it means that the TCP
*
connection is authenticated through the MD5 algorithm.
TCPCB TCP control block

Local Add:port Local IP address and port number

Foreign Add:port Remote IP address and port number
State State of the TCP connection

display udp statistics

Syntax

display udp statistics

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display udp statistics command to display the statistics about UDP packets.
Related commands: reset udp statistics.

Examples

# Display the statistics about UDP packets.

<Sysname> display udp statistics
Received packets:
Total: 26320

2-12
checksum error: 0
shorter than header: 0, data length larger than packet: 0
no socket on port: 0
total broadcast or multicast packets : 25006
no socket broadcast or multicast packets: 24989
not delivered, input socket full: 0
input packets missing pcb cache: 1314
Sent packets:
Total: 7187

Table 2-7 Description on the fields of the display udp statistics command

Field Description
Total Total number of received UDP packets
checksum error Total number of packets with incorrect checksum

shorter than header Number of packets with data shorter than header

data length larger than

Number of packets with data longer than packet
packet
no socket on port Number of unicast packets with no socket on port
Received
packets: total broadcast or multicast Total number of received broadcast or multicast
packets packets
no socket broadcast or Total number of broadcast or multicast packets without
multicast packets socket on port
not delivered, input socket Number of packets not delivered due to a full socket
full cache

input packets missing pcb

Number of packets without matching PCB cache
cache
Sent
Total Total number of UDP packets sent
packets:

icmp redirect send

Syntax

icmp redirect send

undo icmp redirect send

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the icmp redirect send command to enable the device to send ICMP redirection packets.

2-13
Use the undo icmp redirect send command to disable the device from sending ICMP redirection
packets.
By default, the device is enabled to send ICMP redirection packets.

Examples

# Disable the device from sending ICMP redirection packets.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] undo icmp redirect send

icmp unreach send

Syntax

icmp unreach send

undo icmp unreach send

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the icmp unreach send command to enable the device to send ICMP destination unreachable
packets. After enabled with this feature, the switch, upon receiving a packet with an unreachable
destination, discards the packet and then sends a destination unreachable packet to the source host.
Use the undo icmp unreach send command to disable the device from sending ICMP destination
unreachable packets.
By default, the device is enabled to send ICMP destination unreachable packets.

Examples

# Disable the device from sending ICMP destination unreachable packets.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] undo icmp unreach send

reset ip statistics

Syntax

reset ip statistics

undo tcp timer fin-timeout

View

System view

Parameters

time-value: TCP finwait timer, in seconds, in the range 76 to 3600.

Description

Use the tcp timer fin-timeout command to configure the TCP finwait timer.
Use the undo tcp timer fin-timeout command to restore the default value of the TCP finwait timer.
By default, the value of the TCP finwait timer is 675 seconds.
When the TCP connection state changes from FIN_WAIT_1 to FIN_WAIT_2, the finwait timer is
enabled. If the switch does not receive any FIN packet within the finwait timer interval, the TCP
connection will be terminated.
Related commands: tcp timer syn-timeout, tcp window.

Examples

# Configure the value of the TCP finwait timer as 800 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] tcp timer fin-timeout 800

tcp timer syn-timeout

Syntax

tcp timer syn-timeout time-value

undo tcp timer syn-timeout

View

System view

Parameters

time-value: TCP synwait timer, in seconds, in the range 2 to 600.

Description

Use the tcp timer syn-timeout command to configure the TCP synwait timer.
Use the undo tcp timer syn-timeout command to restore the default value of the TCP synwait timer.
By default, the value of the TCP synwait timer is 75 seconds.

2-16
When sending a SYN packet, TCP starts the synwait timer. If no response packet is received within the
synwait timer interval, the TCP connection will be terminated.
Related commands: tcp timer fin-timeout, tcp window.

Examples

# Configure the value of the TCP synwait timer as 80 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] tcp timer syn-timeout 80

tcp window

Syntax

tcp window window-size

undo tcp window

View

System view

Parameters

window-size: Size of the send/receive buffer, in kilobytes (KB), in the range of 1 to 32.

Description

Use the tcp window command to configure the size of the TCP send/receive buffer,.
Use the undo tcp window command to restore the default.
By default, the size of the TCP send/receive buffer is 8 KB.
Related commands: tcp timer fin-timeout, tcp timer syn-timeout.

Examples

# Configure the size of the TCP send/receive buffer as 3 KB.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] tcp window 3

2-17
Table of Contents

1 DHCP Relay Agent Configuration Commands ·······················································································1-1

DHCP Relay Agent Configuration Commands ·······················································································1-1
address-check ·································································································································1-1
dhcp relay information enable ·········································································································1-1
dhcp relay information strategy ·······································································································1-2
dhcp-security static··························································································································1-3
dhcp-server······································································································································1-4
dhcp-server detect···························································································································1-5
dhcp-server ip··································································································································1-5
display dhcp-security ·······················································································································1-6
display dhcp-server ·························································································································1-7
display dhcp-server interface ··········································································································1-8
reset dhcp-server·····························································································································1-9

2 DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands ···························································································2-1

DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands····························································································2-1
dhcp-snooping ·································································································································2-1
dhcp-snooping information enable ··································································································2-1
dhcp-snooping information format···································································································2-2
dhcp-snooping information packet-format ·······················································································2-3
dhcp-snooping information remote-id······························································································2-3
dhcp-snooping information strategy ································································································2-4
dhcp-snooping information vlan circuit-id ························································································2-5
dhcp-snooping information vlan remote-id ······················································································2-6
dhcp-snooping trust ·························································································································2-7
display dhcp-snooping·····················································································································2-7
display dhcp-snooping trust·············································································································2-8
display ip source static binding········································································································2-9
ip check dot1x enable······················································································································2-9
ip check source ip-address············································································································2-10
ip source static binding ··················································································································2-11
reset dhcp-snooping ······················································································································2-11

3 Rate Limit Configuration Commands ······································································································3-1

Rate Limit Configuration Commands ······································································································3-1
dhcp protective-down recover enable ·····························································································3-1
dhcp protective-down recover interval·····························································································3-1
dhcp rate-limit ··································································································································3-2
dhcp rate-limit enable ······················································································································3-3

4 DHCP/BOOTP Client Configuration ·········································································································4-1

DHCP Client Configuration Commands··································································································4-1
display dhcp client ···························································································································4-1
ip address dhcp-alloc·······················································································································4-2
BOOTP Client Configuration Commands ·······························································································4-3

i
display bootp client ··························································································································4-3
ip address bootp-alloc ·····················································································································4-4

ii
1 DHCP Relay Agent Configuration Commands

DHCP Relay Agent Configuration Commands

address-check

Syntax

address-check enable
address-check disable

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the address-check enable command to enable IP address match checking on the DHCP relay
agent. After this feature is enabled, the DHCP relay agent can cooperate with the ARP module to check
whether a requesting client’s IP and MAC addresses match a binding on the DHCP relay agent; if not,
the client cannot access outside networks via the DHCP relay agent.
Use the address-check disable command to disable IP address match checking on the DHCP relay
agent.
By default, IP address match checking on the DHCP relay agent is disabled.

Examples

# Enter system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.

# Enter VLAN-interface 1 view.

[Sysname] interface vlan-interface 1

# Enable IP address match checking on VLAN-interface 1 of the DHCP relay agent.

[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] address-check enable

dhcp relay information enable

Syntax

dhcp relay information enable

undo dhcp relay information enable

1-1
View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the dhcp relay information enable command to enable Option 82 support on a DHCP relay
agent.
Use the undo dhcp relay information enable command to disable Option 82 support on a DHCP relay
agent.
By default, this function is disabled.

By default, with the Option 82 support function enabled on the DHCP relay agent, the DHCP relay agent
will adopt the replace strategy to process the request packets containing Option 82. However, if other
strategies are configured before, then enabling the 82 supporting on the DHCP relay will not change the
configured strategies.

Related commands: dhcp relay information strategy.

Examples

# Enter system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.

# Enable Option 82 support on a DHCP relay agent.

[Sysname] dhcp relay information enable

dhcp relay information strategy

Syntax

dhcp relay information strategy { drop | keep | replace }

undo dhcp relay information strategy

View

System view

Parameters

drop: Specifies to drop messages containing Option 82.

keep: Specifies to forward messages containing Option 82 without any change.
replace: Specifies to forward messages containing Option 82 after replacing the original Option 82 with
the Option 82 padded with the specified content.

1-2
Description

Use the dhcp relay information strategy command to configure the DHCP relay agent handling
strategy for messages containing Option 82 sent by the DHCP client.
Use the undo dhcp relay information strategy command to restore the default handling strategy.
By default, the handling strategy for messages containing Option 82 is replace.
Related commands: dhcp relay information enable.

Examples

# Enter system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.

# Configure the DHCP relay agent handling strategy for messages containing Option 82 sent by the
DHCP client as drop.
[Sysname] dhcp relay information strategy drop

dhcp-security static

Syntax

dhcp-security static ip-address mac-address

undo dhcp-security { ip-address | all | dynamic | static }

View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: User IP address.

mac-address: User MAC address.
all: Removes all user address entries.
dynamic: Removes dynamic user address entries.
static: Removes static user address entries.

Description

Use the dhcp-security static command to configure a static DHCP address binding entry.
Use the undo dhcp-security command to remove one or all address binding entries, or all address
binding entries of a specified type.
Related commands: display dhcp-security.

Examples

# Enter system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z

# Configure a static address binding entry, with the IP address being 1.1.1.1 and the MAC address
being 0005-5D02-F2B3.

1-3
[Sysname] dhcp-security static 1.1.1.1 0005-5D02-F2B3

dhcp-server

Syntax

dhcp-server groupNo
undo dhcp-server

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

groupNo: DHCP server group number. This argument ranges from 0 to 19.

Description

Use the dhcp-server command to map the current VLAN interface to a DHCP server group.
Use the undo dhcp-server command to cancel the mapping.
Note that:
z A DHCP server group can correspond to multiple interfaces, while an interface can only be
correlated with one DHCP server group.
z If you execute the dhcp-server command repeatedly, the latest configuration will overwrite the
previous one.
z Before referencing a DHCP server group, you need to use the dhcp-server groupNo ip
ip-address&<1-8> command to configure the DHCP server group.
Related commands: dhcp-server ip, display dhcp-server, display dhcp-server interface
vlan-interface.

To improve security and avoid malicious attack to the unused SOCKETs, S4200G Ethernet switches
provide the following functions:
z UDP 67 and UDP 68 ports used by DHCP are enabled only when DHCP is enabled.
z UDP 67 and UDP 68 ports are disabled when DHCP is disabled.
The corresponding implementation is as follows.
z When a VLAN interface is mapped to a DHCP server group with the dhcp-server command, the
DHCP relay agent is enabled. At the same time, UDP 67 and UDP 68 ports used by DHCP are
enabled.
z When the mapping between a VLAN interface and a DHCP server group is removed with the undo
dhcp-server command, DHCP services are disabled. At the same time, UDP 67 and UDP 68 ports
used by DHCP are disabled.

Examples

# Enter system view.

1-4
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.

# Enter VLAN-interface 1 view.

[Sysname] interface vlan-interface 1

# Specify that VLAN-interface 1 corresponds to DHCP server group 1.

[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] dhcp-server 1

dhcp-server detect

Syntax

dhcp-server detect
undo dhcp-server detect

View

System view

Parameters

Use the display dhcp-security command to display information about address binding entries on the
DHCP relay agent.

Examples

# Display information about all address binding entries.

<Sysname> display dhcp-security
IP Address MAC Address IP Address Type
10.1.1.1 0001-0001-0001 Static
192.168.10.2 000d-88f7-b090 Dynamic_ack
--- 2 dhcp-security item(s) found ---

1-6
Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display dhcp-security command

Field Description
IP Address IP address of the DHCP client
MAC Address MAC address of the DHCP client
IP Address Type Type of the user address entry (static/dynamic)

display dhcp-server

Syntax

display dhcp-server groupNo

View

Any view

Parameters

groupNo: DHCP server group number, ranging from 0 to 19.

Description

Use the display dhcp-server command to display information about a specified DHCP server group.
Related commands: dhcp-server ip, dhcp-server, display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface.

Examples

# Display information about DHCP server group 0.

<Sysname> display dhcp-server 0
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 1.1.1.1
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 2.2.2.2
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 3.3.3.3
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 4.4.4.4
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 5.5.5.5
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 6.6.6.6
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 7.7.7.7
IP address of DHCP server group 0: 8.8.8.8
Messages from this server group: 0
Messages to this server group: 0
Messages from clients to this server group: 0
Messages from this server group to clients: 0
DHCP_OFFER messages: 0
DHCP_ACK messages: 0
DHCP_NAK messages: 0
DHCP_DECLINE messages: 0
DHCP_DISCOVER messages: 0
DHCP_REQUEST messages: 0
DHCP_INFORM messages: 0
DHCP_RELEASE messages: 0
BOOTP_REQUEST messages: 0

1-7
BOOTP_REPLY messages: 0

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display dhcp-server command

Field Description
DHCP server IP addresses of DHCP server
IP address of DHCP server group 0:
group 0
Number of the packets the DHCP relay receives
Messages from this server group
from the DHCP server group
Number of the packets the DHCP relay sends to
Messages to this server group
the DHCP server group
Number of the packets the DHCP relay receives
Messages from clients to this server group
from the DHCP clients
Number of the packets the DHCP relay sends to
Messages from this server group to clients
the DHCP clients
Number of the DHCP-OFFER packets received
DHCP_OFFER messages
by the DHCP relay
Number of the DHCP-ACK packets received by
DHCP_ACK messages
the DHCP relay
Number of the DHCP-NAK packets received by
DHCP_NAK messages
the DHCP relay
Number of the DHCP-DECLINE packets
DHCP_DECLINE messages
received by the DHCP relay
Number of the DHCP-DISCOVER packets
DHCP_DISCOVER messages
received by the DHCP relay
Number of the DHCP-REQUEST packets
DHCP_REQUEST messages
received by the DHCP relay
Number of the DHCP-INFORM packets received
DHCP_INFORM messages
by the DHCP relay
Number of the DHCP-RELEASE packets
DHCP_RELEASE messages
received by the DHCP relay
BOOTP_REQUEST messages Number of the BOOTP request packets
BOOTP_REPLY messages Number of the BOOTP response packets

display dhcp-server interface

Syntax

display dhcp-server interface Vlan-interface vlan-id

View

Any view

Parameters

vlan-id: VLAN ID.

1-8
Description

Use the display dhcp-server interface command to display information about the DHCP server group
to which a VLAN interface is mapped.
Related commands: dhcp-server, display dhcp-server.

Examples

# Display information about the DHCP server group to which VLAN-interface 2 is mapped.
<Sysname> display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface 2
Dhcp-group 0 is configured on this interface

The above information indicates the VLAN-interface 2 is mapped to DHCP server group 0.

reset dhcp-server

Syntax

reset dhcp-server groupNo

View

User view

Parameters

groupNo: DHCP server group number, ranging from 0 to 19.

Description

Use the reset dhcp-server command to clear the statistics information of the specified DHCP server
group.
Related commands: dhcp server, display dhcp-server.

Examples

# Clear the statistics information of DHCP server group 2.

<Sysname> reset dhcp-server 2

1-9
2 DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands

DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands

dhcp-snooping

Syntax

dhcp-snooping
undo dhcp-snooping

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the dhcp-snooping command to enable the DHCP snooping function.

Use the undo dhcp-snooping command to disable the DHCP snooping function. After DHCP
snooping is disabled, all the ports can forward DHCP replies from the DHCP server without recording
the IP-to-MAC bindings of the DHCP clients.
By default, the DHCP snooping function is disabled.
Note that:
z You need to disable DHCP relay agent before enabling DHCP snooping on the switch.
z The clients connected to a DHCP snooping device cannot obtain an IP address through BOOTP.
Related commands: display dhcp-snooping.

Examples

# Enter system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.

# Enable the DHCP snooping function.

[Sysname] dhcp-snooping

dhcp-snooping information enable

Syntax

dhcp-snooping information enable

undo dhcp-snooping information enable

2-1
View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the dhcp-snooping information enable command to enable DHCP snooping Option 82.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information enable command to disable DHCP snooping Option 82.
DHCP snooping Option 82 is disabled by default.
Enable DHCP snooping before performing this configuration.

Examples

# Enable DHCP snooping Option 82.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dhcp-snooping information enable

dhcp-snooping information format

Syntax

dhcp-snooping information format { hex | ascii }

View

undo dhcp-snooping information strategy

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

drop: If a packet contains Option 82, DHCP snooping drops this packet.
keep: If a packet contains Option 82, DHCP snooping keeps and forwards this packet.
replace: If a packet contains Option 82, DHCP snooping replaces the original Option 82 field with the
Option 82 field having the specified padding content and forwards the packet.

Description

Use the dhcp-snooping information strategy command in system view to configure a handling policy
for DHCP requests that contain Option 82 sent by the DHCP client.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information strategy command to restore the default handling policy.
Use the dhcp-snooping information strategy command in Ethernet port view to configure a handling
policy for requests that contain Option 82 received on the current port.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information strategy command to restore the default handling policy.
By default, after DHCP-snooping Option 82 support is enabled, DHCP snooping replaces the Option 82
field in the requests sent by the DHCP clients.

2-4
z Enable DHCP-snooping and DHCP-snooping Option 82 before performing this configuration.
z If a handling policy is configured on a port, this configuration overrides the globally configured
handling policy for requests received on this port, while the globally configured handling policy
applies on those ports where a handling policy is not natively configured.

Examples

# Configure the keep handling policy for DHCP requests that contain Option 82 on the DHCP snooping
device.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dhcp-snooping information strategy keep

dhcp-snooping information vlan circuit-id

Syntax

dhcp-snooping information [ vlan vlan-id ] circuit-id string string

undo dhcp-snooping information { [ vlan vlan-id ] circuit-id | circuit-id all }

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

vlan vlan-id: Specifies a VLAN. DHCP packets from the VLAN are padded with the circuit ID sub-option.
string: Content of the circuit ID sub-option, a string of 3 to 63 ASCII characters.

Description

Use the dhcp-snooping information vlan circuit-id command to configure the content of the circuit
ID field in Option 82.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information circuit-id command to restore the default.
With vlan vlan-id specified, the customized circuit ID sub-option applies only to the DHCP packets from
the specified VLAN. With no vlan vlan-id specified, the customized circuit ID sub-option applies to all
DHCP packets that pass through the current port.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information vlan vlan-id circuit-id command to restore the default
circuit ID in DHCP packets from the specified VLAN.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information circuit-id command to restore the default circuit ID for all
DHCP packets except those from the specified VLAN.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information circuit-id all command to restore the default circuit ID for
all DHCP packets.
By default, the circuit ID field in Option 82 contains the VLAN ID and index of the port that received the
client’s request.

2-5
If you have configured a circuit ID with the vlan vlan-id argument specified, and the other one without
the argument in Ethernet port view, the former circuit ID applies to the DHCP messages from the
specified VLAN, while the latter one applies to DHCP messages from other VLANs.

Examples

# Set the circuit ID field in Option 82 of the DHCP messages sent through GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to abc.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] dhcp-snooping information circuit-id string abc

dhcp-snooping information vlan remote-id

Syntax

dhcp-snooping information [ vlan vlan-id ] remote-id string string

undo dhcp-snooping information { [ vlan vlan-id ] remote-id | remote-id all }

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

vlan vlan-id: Specifies the VLAN ID of the remote ID to be customized.

string: Customized content of the remote ID sub-option, a string of 3 to 63 ASCII characters.

Description

Use the dhcp-snooping information vlan remote-id command to configure the content of the remote
ID in Option 82
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information remote-id command to restore the default remote ID in
Option 82.
With vlan vlan-id specified, the customized remote ID sub-option applies only to the DHCP packets
from the specified VLAN. Without vlan vlan-id specified, the customized remote ID sub-option applies
to all DHCP packets that pass through the current port.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information vlan vlan-id remote-id command to restore the default
remote ID in DHCP packets from the specified VLAN.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information remote-id command to restore the default remote ID in all
DHCP packets except those from the specified VLAN.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping information remote-id all command to restore the default remote ID in
all DHCP packets.
By default, the remote ID sub-option in Option 82 is the MAC address of the DHCP Snooping device
that received the DHCP client’s request.
If you have configured a remote ID with the vlan vlan-id argument specified, and the other one without
the argument in Ethernet port view, the former remote ID applies to the DHCP messages from the
specified VLAN, while the latter one applies to DHCP messages from other VLANs.

2-6
Examples

# Configure the remote ID of Option 82 in DHCP packets to abc on the port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] dhcp-snooping information remote-id string abc

dhcp-snooping trust

Syntax

dhcp-snooping trust
undo dhcp-snooping trust

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the dhcp-snooping trust command to set an Ethernet port to a DHCP-snooping trusted port.
Use the undo dhcp-snooping trust command to restore an Ethernet port to a DHCP-snooping
untrusted port.
By default, with the DHCP snooping enabled, all the ports of a switch are untrusted ports.
Note that:
After DHCP snooping is enabled, you need to specify the port connected to a valid DHCP server as
trusted to ensure that DHCP clients can obtain valid IP addresses. The trusted port and the ports
connected to DHCP clients must be in the same VLAN.
Related commands: display dhcp-snooping trust.

Examples

# Enter system view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.

# Set the GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 port to a trusted port.

[Sysname] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] dhcp-snooping trust

display dhcp-snooping

Syntax

display dhcp-snooping [ unit unit-id ]

View

Any view
2-7
Parameters

unit unit-id: Displays the DHCP-snooping information on the specified device, the value is 1 for S4200G
series switches.

Description

Use the display dhcp-snooping command to display the user IP-MAC address mapping entries
recorded by the DHCP snooping function.
Related commands: dhcp-snooping.

Examples

# Display the user IP-MAC address mapping entries recorded by the DHCP snooping function.
<Sysname> display dhcp-snooping
DHCP-Snooping is enabled.
The client binding table for all untrusted ports.
Type : D--Dynamic , S--Static
Unit ID : 1
Type IP Address MAC Address Lease VLAN Interface

==== ============= ============== ========= ==== ================

D 10.1.1.1 000f-e200-0006 200 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/1
--- 1 dhcp-snooping item(s) of unit 1 found ---

display dhcp-snooping trust

Syntax

display dhcp-snooping trust

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display dhcp-snooping trust command to display the (enabled/disabled) state of the DHCP
snooping function and the trusted ports.
Related commands: dhcp-snooping trust.

Examples

# Display the state of the DHCP snooping function and the trusted ports.
<Sysname> display dhcp-snooping trust
DHCP-Snooping is enabled.
DHCP-Snooping trust become effective.
Interface Trusted
===================== =================
GigabitEthernet1/0/10 Trusted

2-8
The above display information indicates that the DHCP snooping function is enabled, and the
GigabitEthernet 1/0/10 port is a trusted port.

display ip source static binding

Syntax

display ip source static binding [ vlan vlan-id | interface interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

vlan-id: ID of the VLAN whose IP static binding entries are to be displayed.

ip-address ip-address: Specifies the IP address to be statically bound.

mac-address mac-address: Specifies the MAC address to be statically bound.

Description

Use the ip source static binding ip-address command to configure the static binding among source
IP address, source MAC address, and the port number so as to generate static binding entries.
Use the undo ip source static binding ip-address command to remove the static binding among
source IP address, source MAC address, and the port.
By default, no binding among source IP address, source MAC address, and the port number is
configured.
To create a static binding after IP filtering is enabled with the mac-address keyword included on a port,
the mac-address argument must be specified; otherwise, the packets sent from this IP address cannot
pass the IP filtering.
Related commands: ip check source ip-address.

Examples

# Configure static binding among source IP address 1.1.1.1, source MAC address 0015-e20f-0101, and
GigabitEthernet 1/0/3.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface gigabitethernet1/0/3
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/3] ip source static binding ip-address 1.1.1.1 mac-address
0015-e20f-0101

reset dhcp-snooping

Syntax

reset dhcp-snooping [ ip-address ]

View

User view

2-11
Parameters

ip-address: IP address of a DHCP snooping entry to be deleted.

Description

Use the reset dhcp-snooping command to remove DHCP snooping entries from a switch. If no
ip-address is specified, all DHCP snooping entries are removed.

Examples

# Remove all DHCP snooping entries from the switch.

<Sysname> reset dhcp-snooping

2-12
3 Rate Limit Configuration Commands

Rate Limit Configuration Commands

dhcp protective-down recover enable

Syntax

dhcp protective-down recover enable

undo dhcp protective-down recover enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the dhcp protective-down recover enable command to enable port state auto-recovery on the
switch.
Use the undo dhcp protective-down recover enable command to disable port state auto-recovery.
With the port state auto-recovery function, a port that is shut down because the DHCP traffic rate limit
configured on it is exceeded can automatically be brought up after a specified interval.
By default, the port state auto-recovery function on the switch is disabled.

Examples

# Enable port state auto-recovery on the switch.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dhcp protective-down recover enable

dhcp protective-down recover interval

Syntax

dhcp protective-down recover interval interval

undo dhcp protective-down recover interval

View

System view

3-1
Parameters

interval: Interval (in seconds) for a port disabled due to the DHCP traffic exceeding the set threshold to
be brought up again. This argument ranges from 10 to 86,400.

Description

Use the dhcp protective-down recover interval command to set an auto recovery interval.
Use the undo dhcp protective-down recover interval command to restore the default interval.
With the port state auto-recovery function enabled on a switch, the auto recovery interval defaults to
300 seconds.
Note that:
z Before configuring the port state auto-recovery interval, you must enable port state auto-recovery
on the switch first.
z The new port state auto-recovery interval only applies to the ports that are shut down after the
dhcp protective-down recover interval command is last executed.

Examples

# Set the port state auto-recovery interval to 30 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dhcp protective-down recover enable
[Sysname] dhcp protective-down recover interval 30

dhcp rate-limit

Syntax

dhcp rate-limit rate

undo dhcp rate-limit

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

rate: Maximum rate of DHCP traffic in pps. This argument ranges from 10 to 150.

Description

Use the dhcp rate-limit command to configure the maximum rate of DHCP traffic for the port. When the
number of DHCP packets received on the port per second exceeds the specified threshold, the switch
will discard the exceeding DHCP packets.
Use the undo dhcp rate-limit command to restore the default.
By default, after the DHCP traffic limit is enabled, the maximum rate of DHCP traffic is 15 pps.
Note that:
You need to enable the function to limit DHCP traffic (refer to the dhcp rate-limit enable command) for
a port before executing either of these two commands for the port.

3-2
Examples

# Configure the DHCP traffic threshold to 100 pps for port GigabitEthernet 1/0/11.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Gigabitethernet 1/0/11
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/11] dhcp rate-limit enable
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/11] dhcp rate-limit 100

dhcp rate-limit enable

Syntax

dhcp rate-limit enable

undo dhcp rate-limit enable

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the dhcp rate-limit enable command to enable the function to limit DHCP traffic for an Ethernet
port. You can use this command to limit the DHCP traffic passing through an Ethernet port. When the
number of DHCP packets received on the port per second exceeds the specified threshold (the default
value is 15 pps), the switch will discard the exceeding DHCP packets.
Use the undo dhcp rate-limit enable command to disable the function. You can use this command to
relieve the DHCP traffic limit configured on an Ethernet port.
By default, the function to limit DHCP traffic is disabled on an Ethernet port. That is, DHCP traffic
passing through an Ethernet port is not limited.

Examples

# Enable the function to limit DHCP traffic for GigabitEthernet 1/0/11 port.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Gigabitethernet 1/0/11
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/11] dhcp rate-limit enable

3-3
4 DHCP/BOOTP Client Configuration

DHCP Client Configuration Commands

display dhcp client

Syntax

display dhcp client [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameters

verbose: Displays the detailed address allocation information.

Description

Use the display dhcp client command to display the information about the address allocation of DHCP
clients.
Note that S4200G series Ethernet switches that operate as DHCP clients support a maximum lease
duration of 24 days currently.

Examples

# Display the information about the address allocation of DHCP clients.

<Sysname> display dhcp client verbose
DHCP client statistic information:
Vlan-interface1:
Current machine state: BOUND
Allocated IP: 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0
Allocated lease: 86400 seconds, T1: 43200 seconds, T2: 75600 seconds
Lease from 2002.09.20 01:05:03 to 2002.09.21 01:05:03
Server IP: 192.168.0.1
Transaction ID = 0x3d8a7431
Default router: 192.168.0.1
Next timeout will happen after 0 days 11 hours 56 minutes 1 seconds.

4-1
Table 4-1 Description on the fields of the display dhcp client command

Field Description
VLAN interface operating as a DHCP client to
Vlan-interface1
obtain an IP address dynamically
Current machine state The state of the client state machine
Allocated IP IP address allocated to the DHCP client
lease Lease period
T1 Renewal timer setting
T2 Rebinding timer setting
Lease from….to…. The starting and end time of the lease period
Server IP IP address of the DHCP server selected
Transaction ID Transaction ID
Default router Gateway address
Next timeout will happen after 0 days 11 hours The timer expires in 11 hours, 56 minutes, and 1
56 minutes 1 seconds. second.

ip address dhcp-alloc

Syntax

ip address dhcp-alloc
undo ip address dhcp-alloc

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the ip address dhcp-alloc command to configure a VLAN interface to obtain an IP address
through DHCP.
Use the undo ip address dhcp-alloc command to cancel the configuration.
By default, a VLAN interface does not use DHCP to obtain an IP address.

4-2
To improve security and avoid malicious attacks to the unused sockets, S4200G Ethernet switches
provide the following functions:
z UDP ports 67 and 68 used by DHCP are enabled/disabled only when DHCP is enabled/disabled.
The implementation is as follows:
z After the DHCP client is enabled by executing the ip address dhcp-alloc command, UDP port 68
is enabled.
z After the DHCP client is disabled by executing the undo ip address dhcp-alloc command, UDP
port 68 is disabled.

Examples

# Configure VLAN-interface 1 to obtain an IP address through DHCP.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ip address dhcp-alloc

BOOTP Client Configuration Commands

display bootp client

Syntax

display bootp client [ interface Vlan-interface vlan-id ]

View

Any view

Parameters

vlan-id: ID of the VLAN interface.

Description

Use the display bootp client command to display BOOTP client-related information, including the
MAC address of the BOOTP client and the IP address obtained.

Examples

# Display the BOOTP client-related information.

<Sysname> display bootp client interface Vlan-interface 1
Vlan-interface1:
Allocated IP: 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.0
Transaction ID = 0x3d8a7431
Mac Address 000f-e20a-c3ef
Default router: 192.168.0.1

4-3
Table 4-2 Description on the fields of the display bootp client command

Field Description
VLAN-interface 1 is configured to obtain an IP
Vlan-interface1
address through BOOTP.
Allocated IP IP address allocated to the VLAN interface
Transaction ID Value of the XID field in BOOTP packets
Mac Address MAC address of the BOOTP client
Default router Default router

ip address bootp-alloc

Syntax

ip address bootp-alloc
undo ip address bootp-alloc

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the ip address bootp-alloc command to configure a VLAN interface to obtain an IP address
through BOOTP.
Use the undo ip address bootp-alloc command to cancel the configuration.
By default, a VLAN interface does not use BOOTP to obtain an IP address.
Related commands: display bootp client.

Examples

# Configure VLAN-interface 1 to obtain an IP address through BOOTP.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ip address bootp-alloc

4-4
Table of Contents

1 ACL Configuration Commands ················································································································1-1

ACL Configuration Commands ···············································································································1-1
acl ····················································································································································1-1
description ·······································································································································1-2
display acl········································································································································1-3
display acl remaining entry··············································································································1-3
display ipv6-acl-template ·················································································································1-4
display packet-filter··························································································································1-5
display time-range ···························································································································1-6
ipv6-acl-template ·····························································································································1-7
packet-filter ······································································································································1-8
packet-filter vlan ······························································································································1-9
rule (for Basic ACLs) ·····················································································································1-10
rule (for Advanced ACLs) ··············································································································1-12
rule (for Layer 2 ACLs) ··················································································································1-18
rule (for IPv6 ACLs) ·······················································································································1-20
rule comment·································································································································1-22
time-range ·····································································································································1-23

i
1 ACL Configuration Commands

ACL Configuration Commands

acl

Syntax

acl number acl-number [ match-order { auto | config } ]

undo acl { all | number acl-number }

View

System view

Parameters

all: Specifies to remove all access control lists (ACLs).

number acl-number: Specifies the number of an existing ACL or an ACL to be defined. ACL number
identifies the type of an ACL as follows.
z An ACL number in the range 2000 to 2999 identifies a basic ACL.
z An ACL number in the range 3000 to 3999 identifies an advanced ACL. Note that 3998 and 3999
cannot be configured because they are reserved for cluster management.
z An ACL number in the range 4000 to 4999 identifies a layer 2 ACL.
z An ACL number in the range 5000 to 5999 identifies an IPv6 ACL.
match-order: Specifies the match order for ACL rules. Following two match orders exist.
z auto: Specifies to match ACL rules according to the depth-first rule.
z config: Specifies to match ACL rules in the order they are defined.
Note that the match-order keyword is not available to Layer 2 ACLs and IPv6 ACLs. The match order
for layer 2 ACLs and IPv6 ACLs can only be config. For details about the two match orders, refer to the
relevant description in ACL Operation.

Description

Use the acl command to define an ACL and enter the corresponding ACL view.
Use the undo acl command to remove all the rules of the specified ACL or all the ACLs.
By default, ACL rules are matched in the order they are defined.
Only after the rules in an existing ACL are fully removed can you modify the match order of the ACL.
In ACL view, you can use the rule command to add rules to the ACL.
Related commands: rule.

Examples

# Define ACL 2000 and specify “depth-first” as the match order.

<Sysname> system-view

1-1
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] acl number 2000 match-order auto
[Sysname-acl-basic-2000]

# Add three rules with different numbers of zeros in the source wildcards.
[Sysname-acl-basic-2000] rule 1 permit source 1.1.1.1 0.255.255.255
[Sysname-acl-basic-2000] rule 2 permit source 2.2.2.2 0.0.255.255
[Sysname-acl-basic-2000] rule 3 permit source 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.255

# Use the display acl command to display the configuration information of ACL 2000.
[Sysname-acl-basic-2000] display acl 2000
Basic ACL 2000, 3 rules, match-order is auto
Acl's step is 1
rule 3 permit source 3.3.3.0 0.0.0.255
rule 2 permit source 2.2.0.0 0.0.255.255
rule 1 permit source 1.0.0.0 0.255.255.255

As shown in the output information, the switch sorts the rules of ACL 2000 in the depth-first order: a rule
with more zeros in the source IP address wildcard has a higher priority.

description

Syntax

description text
undo description

View

Basic ACL view, advanced ACL view, Layer 2 ACL view, IPv6 ACL view

Parameters

text: Description string to be assigned to an ACL, a string of 1 to 127 characters. Blank spaces and
special characters are acceptable.

Description

Use the description command to assign a description string to an ACL.

Use the undo description to remove the description string of the ACL.
You can give ACLs descriptions to provide relevant information such as their application purposes and
the ports they are applied to, so that you can easily identity and distinguish ACLs by their descriptions.
By default, no description string is assigned for an ACL.

Examples

# Assign description string “This ACL is used for filtering all HTTP packets” to ACL 3000.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] acl number 3000
[Sysname-acl-adv-3000] description This ACL is used for filtering all HTTP packets

# Use the display acl command to view the configuration information of ACL 3000.
[Sysname-acl-adv-3000] display acl 3000
Advanced ACL 3000, 0 rule

1-2
This acl is used for filtering all HTTP packets
Acl's step is 1

# Remove the description string of ACL 3000.

[Sysname-acl-adv-3000] undo description

display acl

Syntax

display acl { all | acl-number }

View

Any view

Parameters

all: Displays all ACLs.

acl-number: Number of the ACL to be displayed, in the range of 2000 to 5999.

Description

Use the display acl command to display the configuration information of a specified or all ACLs.
Note that if you specify the match order of an ACL when configuring the ACL, this command will display
the rules of the ACL in the specified match order.

Examples

# Display information about ACL 2000.

<Sysname> display acl 2000
Basic ACL 2000, 1 rule
Acl's step is 1

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display acl command

Field Description
Basic ACL 2000 The displayed information is about the basic ACL 2000.
1 rule The ACL includes one rule.
Acl's step is 1 The step for rules of this ACL is 1.

display acl remaining entry

Syntax

display acl remaining entry

1-3
View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the display acl remaning entry command to display information about the remaining ACL
resources.
According to the output, you can determine the number of resources consumed by a certain type of ACL
rules and whether the exhaustion of resources causes the failure to assign ACL rules.

Example

# Display information about the remaining ACL resources.

<Sysname> display acl remaining entry
Resource Total Reserved Configured Remaining Start End
Type Number Number Number Number Port Name Port Name
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
RULE/MASK 1024 64 1 959 GE1/0/1 GE1/0/24
COUNTER 32 0 0 32 GE1/0/1 GE1/0/24
METER 256 0 0 256 GE1/0/1 GE1/0/24

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display acl remaining entry command

Field Description
Resource type, including:
z RULE/MASK: number of rule resources that the switch can assign;
Resource Type z CONUTER: number of traffic statistics resources that the switch can
assign;
z METER: number of traffic limit resources that the switch can assign.
Total Number Total number of ACL resources
Reserved Number Number of resources reserved for system ACLs
Configured Number Number of resources configured for user-defined ACLs
Remaining Number Number of remaining resources
Start Port Name
Start port number and end port number corresponding to the entry
End Port Name

display ipv6-acl-template

Syntax

display ipv6-acl-template

View

Any view

1-4
Parameter

None

Description

Use the display ipv6-acl-template command to display the IPv6 ACL template configuration
information.

Example

# Display the IPv6 ACL template configuration information.

<Sysname> display ipv6-acl-template
Ipv6 acl template : src-ip dest-ip

display packet-filter

Syntax

display packet-filter { global | interface interface-type interface-number | port-group [ group-id ] |

unitid unit-id | vlan [ vlan-id ] }

View

Any view

Parameter

global: Displays information about global packet filtering.

interface interface-type interface-number: Displays information about packet filtering on the port
specified by interface-type and interface-number.
port-group group-id: Displays information about packet filtering on the port group specified by group-id.
unitid unit-id: Displays information about packet filtering on the unit specified by unit-id. The unit ID can
be set only to 1.
vlan vlan-id: Displays information about packet filtering on the VLAN specified by vlan-id.

Description

Use the display packet-filter command to display information about packet filtering.

Example

# Display information about packet filtering on the switch.

<Sysname> display packet-filter unitid 1
GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Inbound:
Acl 2000 rule 0 running

Table 1-3 Description on the fields of the display packet-filter command

Field Description
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Packet filtering is performed on GigabitEthernet1/0/1.
Inbound Packet filtering is performed in the inbound direction.
Acl 2000 rule 0 The rule 0 of ACL 2000 is used.

1-5
Field Description
Status of the rule, which can be
running z running: The ACL rule is active.
z not running: The ACL rule is inactive. Usually, this is because the
current time is out of the rule’s time range.

display time-range

Syntax

display time-range { all | time-name }

View

Any view

Parameters

all: Displays all time ranges.

time-name: Name of a time range, a string of 1 to 32 characters that starts with a to z or A to Z.

Description

Use the display time-range command to display the configuration and status of a time range or all the
time ranges. For active time ranges, this command displays “Active”; for inactive time ranges, this
command displays “Inactive”.
Related commands: time-range.

Examples

# Display all time ranges.

<Sysname> display time-range all
Current time is 17:01:34 May/21/2007 Monday
Time-range : tr ( Active )
12:00 to 18:00 working-day
Time-range : tr1 ( Inactive )
From 12:00 Jan/1/2008 to 12:00 Jun/1/2008

Table 1-4 Description on the fields of the display time-range command.

Field Description
Current time is 17:01:34 May/21/2007 Monday Current system time
Time-range Name of the time range
Status of the time range, which can be:
Active z Active: The time range is active currently.
z Inactive: The time range is not inactive now.
The periodic time range is from 12:00 to 18:00 on
12:00 to 18:00 working-day
each working day.

1-6
Field Description
The absolute time range is from 12:00 January 1,
From 12:00 Jan/1/2008 to 12:00 Jun/1/2008
2008 to 12:00 June 1, 2008.

ipv6-acl-template

Syntax

ipv6-acl-template { cos | dscp | dest-ip | dest-mac | dest-port | ip-protocol | icmpv6-type |

icmpv6-code | src-ip | src-mac | src-port | vlan} *
undo ipv6-acl-template

View

System view

Parameter

cos: Matches the cos field in IPv6 packets.

dscp: Matches the dscp field in IPv6 packets.
dest-ip: Matches the destination IP address field in IPv6 packets.
dest-mac: Matches the destination MAC address field in IPv6 packets.
dest-port: Matches the TCP/UDP destination port field in IPv6 packets.
ip-protocol: Matches the next header field in IPv6 packets.
icmpv6-type: Matches the ICMPv6 type field in IPv6 packets.
icmpv6-code: Matches the ICMPv6 code field in IPv6 packets.
src-ip: Matches the source IP address field in IPv6 packets.
src-mac: Matches the source MAC address field in IPv6 packets.
src-port: Matches the TCP/UDP source port field in IPv6 packets.
vlan: Matches the VLAN tag field in IPv6 packets.

Description

Use the ipv6-acl-template command to configure an IPv6 ACL template.

Use the undo ipv6-acl-template command to remove the configuration.
By default, no IPv6 ACL template is configured.
Note that:
z Only one IPv6 ACL template is supported on a 4200G switch.
z To specify the src-port, dest-port, icmpv6-type or icmpv6-code keyword in the command, you
need to specify the ip-protocol keyword at first.
z If there is already a template, you need to remove it to configure a new one. If the template is
referenced by an IPv6 ACL rule that has been applied, you cannot remove it.

Example

# Configure an IPv6 ACL template to match the source address and destination address fields in IPv6
packets.

1-7
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ipv6-acl-template src-ip dest-ip

packet-filter

Syntax

packet-filter inbound acl-rule

undo packet-filter inbound acl-rule

View

System view, Ethernet port view, Port group view

Parameters

inbound: Filters inbound packets.

acl-rule: ACL/ACL rules to be applied. This argument can be one of those listed in Table 1-5.

Table 1-5 Combined application of ACLs

Combination mode The acl-rule argument

Apply all the rules of an ACL that is of IP type
(The ACL can be a basic ACL or an advanced ip-group acl-number
ACL.)
Apply a rule of an ACL that is of IP type (The ACL
ip-group acl-number rule rule-id
can be a basic ACL or an advanced ACL.)
Apply all the rules of a Layer 2 ACL link-group acl-number
Apply a rule of a Layer 2 ACL link-group acl-number rule rule-id
Apply all rules of an IPv6 ACL user-group acl-number
Apply a rule of an IPv6 ACL user-group acl-number rule rule-id
Apply a rule of an ACL that is of IP type and a ip-group acl-number rule rule-id link-group
rule of a Layer 2 ACL acl-number rule rule-id

In Table 1-5:
z The ip-group acl-number keyword specifies a basic or an advanced ACL. The acl-number
argument ranges from 2000 to 3999.
z The link-group acl-number keyword specifies a Layer 2 ACL. The acl-number argument ranges
from 4000 to 4999.
z The user-group acl-number keyword specifies an IPv6 ACL. The acl-number argument ranges
from 5000 to 5999.
z The rule rule-id keyword specifies a rule of an ACL. The rule argument ranges from 0 to 65534. If
you do not specify this argument, all the rules of the ACL are applied.

Description

Use the packet-filter command to assign an ACL globally, to a port, or in a port group to filter inbound
packets.
Use the undo packet-filter command to cancel the assignment of an ACL.

1-8
Examples

# Apply all rules of basic ACL 2000 on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to filter inbound packets. Here, it is
assumed that the ACL and its rules are already configured.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] packet-filter inbound ip-group 2000
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit

# Apply rule 1 of advanced ACL 3000 and rule 2 of Layer 2 ACL 4000 on GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 to filter
inbound packets. Here, it is assumed that the ACLs and their rules are already configured.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/4
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/4] packet-filter inbound ip-group 3000 rule 1 link-group 4000
rule 2

After completing the above configuration, you can use the display packet-filter command to view
information about packet filtering.

packet-filter vlan

Syntax

packet-filter vlan vlan-id inbound acl-rule

undo packet-filter vlan vlan-id inbound acl-rule

View

System view

Parameters

vlan-id: VLAN ID.

inbound: Specifies to filter packets received by the ports in the VLAN.
acl-rule: ACL rules to be applied, which can be a combination of the rules of multiple ACLs, as described
in Table 1-5.

Description

Use the packet-filter vlan command to apply ACL rules to a VLAN to filter packets.
Use the undo packet-filter vlan command to remove the application of ACL rules to a VLAN.
When you need to apply an ACL to all ports in a VLAN, you can use the packet-filter vlan command to
achieve the goal in one operation.

An ACL assigned to a VLAN takes effect only for the packets tagged with 802.1Q header. For more
information about 802.1Q header, refer to the VLAN part.

1-9
Examples

# Apply all rules of basic ACL 2000 to VLAN 10 to make all ports in VLAN 10 filter inbound packets. Here,
it is assumed that the ACL and its rules and the VLAN are already configured.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] packet-filter vlan 10 inbound ip-group 2000

After completing the above configuration, you can use the display packet-filter command to view
information about packet filtering.

rule (for Basic ACLs)

Syntax

rule [ rule-id ] { deny | permit} [ rule-string ]

undo rule rule-id [ fragment | source | time-range ]*

View

Basic ACL view

Parameters

Parameters of the rule command

rule-id: ACL rule ID, in the range of 0 to 65534.

deny: Drops the matched packets.
permit: Permits the matched packets.
rule-string: ACL rule information, which can be a combination of the parameters described in Table 1-6.

Table 1-6 Parameters for basic IPv4 ACL rules

Parameters Function Description

The sour-addr sour-wildcard
argument specifies a source IP
address in dotted decimal
source { sour-addr
Specifies a source address. notation. Setting the wildcard to
sour-wildcard | any }
a zero indicates a host address.
The any keyword indicates any
source IP address.
Indicates that the rule applies
fragment ––
only to non-tail fragments.

time-name: specifies the name

Specifies the time range in of the time range in which the
time-range time-name
which the rule takes effect. rule is active; a string
comprising 1 to 32 characters.

sour-wildcard is the complement of the wildcard mask of the source subnet mask. For example, you
need to input 0.0.255.255 to specify the subnet mask 255.255.0.0.

1-10
Parameters of the undo rule command

rule-id: Rule ID, which must the ID of an existing ACL rule. You can obtain the ID of an ACL rule by using
the display acl command.
fragment: Removes the settings concerning non-tail fragments in the ACL rule.
source: Removes the settings concerning source address in the ACL rule.
time-range: Removes the settings concerning time range in the ACL rule.

Description

Use the rule command to define an ACL rule.

Use the undo rule command to remove an ACL rule or specified settings of an ACL rule.
To remove an ACL rule using the undo rule command, you need to provide the ID of the ACL rule. If no
other arguments are specified, the entire ACL rule is removed. Otherwise, only the specified information
of the ACL rule is removed.
Note that:
z With the config match order specified for the basic ACL, you can modify any existent rule. The
unmodified part of the rule remains. With the auto match order specified for the basic ACL, you
cannot modify any existent rule; otherwise the system prompts error information.
z If you do not specify the rule-id argument when creating an ACL rule, the rule will be numbered
automatically. If the ACL has no rules, the rule is numbered 0; otherwise, the number of the rule will
be the greatest rule number plus one. If the current greatest rule number is 65534, however, the
system will display an error message and you need to specify a number for the rule.
z The content of a modified or created rule cannot be identical with the content of any existing rule;
otherwise the rule modification or creation will fail, and the system prompts that the rule already
exists.
z With the auto match order specified, the newly created rules will be inserted in the existent ones by
depth-first principle, but the numbers of the existent rules are unaltered.

Examples

# Create basic ACL 2000 and define rule 1 to deny packets whose source IP addresses are
192.168.0.1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] acl number 2000
[Sysname-acl-basic-2000] rule 1 deny source 192.168.0.1 0
[Sysname-acl-basic-2000] quit

# Create basic ACL 2001 and define rule 1 to deny packets that are non-tail fragments.
[Sysname] acl number 2001
[Sysname-acl-basic-2001] rule 1 deny fragment
[Sysname-acl-basic-2001] quit

# Create basic ACL 2002 and define rule 1 to deny all packets during the period specified by time range
trname.
[Sysname] acl number 2002
[Sysname-acl-basic-2002] rule 1 deny time-range trname

1-11
After completing the above configuration, you can use the display acl command to view the
configuration information of the ACLs.

rule (for Advanced ACLs)

Syntax

rule [ rule-id ] { deny | permit } protocol [ rule-string ]

View

Advanced ACL view

Parameters

Parameters of the rule command

rule-id: ACL rule ID, in the range of 0 to 65534.

deny: Drops the matched packets.
permit: Permits the matched packets.
protocol: Protocol carried by IP. When the protocol is represented by numeral, it ranges from 1 to 255;
when the protocol is represented by name, it can be gre (47), icmp (1), igmp (2), ip, ipinip (4), ospf
(89), tcp (6), and udp (17).
rule-string: ACL rule information, which can be a combination of the parameters described in Table 1-7.

Table 1-7 Arguments/keywords available to the rule-string argument

Arguments/Keyword
Type Function Description
s
The sour-addr
sour-wildcard
arguments specify the
source address of the
packets, expressed in
dotted decimal
Specifies the source notation. You can
source { sour-addr specify the IP address
Source address address information for
sour-wildcard | any } of a host as the source
the ACL rule
address by providing 0
for the sour-wildcard
argument.
The any keyword
specifies any source
address.

1-12
Arguments/Keyword
Type Function Description
s
The dest-addr
dest-wildcard
arguments specify the
destination address of
the packets,
expressed in dotted
Specifies the decimal notation. You
destination can specify the IP
destination address
{ dest-addr Destination address address of a host as
information for the ACL
dest-wildcard | any } the destination
rule
address by providing 0
for the dest-wildcard
argument.
The any keyword
specifies any
destination address.
The precedence
precedence Specifies an IP argument can be a
Packet priority
precedence precedence. number in the range 0
to 7.
The tos argument can
Specifies a ToS
tos tos Packet priority be a number in the
preference.
range 0 to 15.
The dscp argument
Specifies a DSCP
dscp dscp Packet priority can be a number in the
priority.
range 0 to 63.
Indicates that the rule
fragment Fragment information applies only to non-tail —
fragments.
time-name: specifies
the name of the time
Specifies the time
Time range range in which the rule
time-range time-name range in which the rule
information is active; a string
takes effect.
comprising 1 to 32
characters.

The sour-wildcard/dest-wildcard argument is the complement of the wildcard mask of the

source/destination subnet mask. For example, you need to input 0.0.255.255 to specify the subnet
mask 255.255.0.0.

If you specify the dscp keyword, you can directly input a value ranging from 0 to 63 or input one of the
keywords listed in Table 1-8 as DSCP.

1-13
Table 1-8 DSCP values and the corresponding keywords

Keyword DSCP value in decimal DSCP value in binary

af11 10 001010

af12 12 001100

af13 14 001110

af21 18 010010

af22 20 010100

af23 22 010110

af31 26 011010

af32 28 011100

af33 30 011110

af41 34 100010

af42 36 100100

af43 38 100110

be 0 000000

cs1 8 001000

cs2 16 010000

cs3 24 011000

cs4 32 100000

cs5 40 101000

cs6 48 110000

cs7 56 111000

ef 46 101110

If you specify the precedence keyword, you can directly input a value ranging from 0 to 7 or input one of
the keywords listed in Table 1-9 as IP precedence.

Table 1-9 IP Precedence values and the corresponding keywords

Keyword IP Precedence in decimal IP Precedence in binary

routine 0 000

priority 1 001

immediate 2 010

flash 3 011

flash-override 4 100

critical 5 101

internet 6 110

network 7 111

1-14
If you specify the tos keyword, you can directly input a value ranging from 0 to 15 or input one of the
keywords listed in Table 1-10 as the ToS value.

Table 1-10 ToS value and the corresponding keywords

Keyword ToS in decimal ToS in binary

normal 0 0000

min-monetary-cost 1 0001

max-reliability 2 0010

max-throughput 4 0100

min-delay 8 1000

If the protocol type is TCP or UDP, you can also define the information listed in Table 1-11.

Table 1-11 TCP/UDP-specific ACL rule information

Parameters Type Function Description

The value of operator can be lt

Defines the source (less than), gt (greater than), eq
source-port operator
Source port port information of (equal to), neq (not equal to) or
port1 [ port2 ]
UDP/TCP packets range (within the range of). Only
the range operator requires two
port numbers as the operands.
The other operators require only
one port number as the operand.
port1 and port2: TCP/UDP port
Defines the number(s), expressed as port
destination-port Destination destination port names or port numbers. When
operator port1 [ port2 ] port information of expressed as numerals, the
UDP/TCP packets value range is 0 to 65535.

Specifies that the rule

TCP is applicable only to
established connection the first SYN segment TCP-specific argument
flag for establishing a
TCP connection

If TCP or UDP port number is represented by name, you can also define the information listed in Table
1-12.

Table 1-12 TCP or UDP port values

Type Value
CHARgen (19), bgp (179), cmd (514), daytime (13), discard (9),
domain (53), echo (7), exec (512), finger (79), ftp (21), ftp-data (20),
gopher (70), hostname (101), irc (194), klogin (543), kshell (544), login
TCP
(513), lpd (515), nntp (119), pop2 (109), pop3 (110), smtp (25), sunrpc
(111), tacacs (49), talk (517), telnet (23), time (37), uucp (540), whois
(43), www (80)

1-15
Type Value
biff (512), bootpc (68), bootps (67), discard (9), dns (53), dnsix (90),
echo (7), mobilip-ag (434), mobilip-mn (435), nameserver (42),
UDP netbios-dgm (138), netbios-ns (137), netbios-ssn (139), ntp (123), rip
(520), snmp (161), snmptrap (162), sunrpc (111), syslog (514),
tacacs-ds (65), talk (517), tftp (69), time (37), who (513), xdmcp (177)

Note the following when assigning an advanced ACL to the hardware on Switch 4200G series:
z The precedence and tos keywords are not supported.
z When defining ACL rules for TCP/UDP packets, operator (in Table 1-11) can only be “eq”.

If the protocol type is ICMP, you can also define the information listed in Table 1-13.

Table 1-13 ICMP-specific ACL rule information

Parameters Type Function Description

icmp-type: ICMP
Specifies the type and message type, ranging
Type and message from 0 to 255
icmp-type icmp-type message code
code information of
icmp-code information of ICMP icmp-code: ICMP
ICMP packets
packets in the ACL rule message code,
ranging from 0 to 255

If the protocol type is ICMP, you can also just input the ICMP message name after the icmp-type
keyword. See Table 1-14 for ICMP messages.

Table 1-14 ICMP messages

Name ICMP type ICMP code

echo Type=8 Code=0

echo-reply Type=0 Code=0

fragmentneed-DFset Type=3 Code=4

host-redirect Type=5 Code=1

host-tos-redirect Type=5 Code=3

host-unreachable Type=3 Code=1

information-reply Type=16 Code=0

information-request Type=15 Code=0

net-redirect Type=5 Code=0

net-tos-redirect Type=5 Code=2

net-unreachable Type=3 Code=0

parameter-problem Type=12 Code=0

port-unreachable Type=3 Code=3

1-16
Name ICMP type ICMP code
protocol-unreachable Type=3 Code=2

reassembly-timeout Type=11 Code=1

source-quench Type=4 Code=0

source-route-failed Type=3 Code=5

timestamp-reply Type=14 Code=0

timestamp-request Type=13 Code=0

ttl-exceeded Type=11 Code=0

Parameters of the undo rule command

rule-id: Rule ID, which must the ID of an existing ACL rule. You can obtain the ID of an ACL rule by using
the display acl command.
source: Removes the settings concerning the source address in the ACL rule.
source-port: Removes the settings concerning the source port in the ACL rule. This keyword is only
available to the ACL rules with their protocol types set to TCP or UDP.
destination: Removes the settings concerning the destination address in the ACL rule.
destination-port: Removes the settings concerning the destination port in the ACL rule. This keyword
is only available to the ACL rules with their protocol types set to TCP or UDP.
icmp-type: Removes the settings concerning the ICMP type and message code in the ACL rule. This
keyword is only available to the ACL rules with their protocol type set to ICMP.
precedence: Removes the precedence-related settings in the ACL rule.
tos: Removes the ToS-related settings in the ACL rule.
dscp: Removes the DSCP-related settings in the ACL rule.
time-range: Removes the time range settings in the ACL rule.
fragment: Removes the settings concerning non-tail fragments in the ACL rule.

Description

Use the rule command to define an ACL rule.

Use the undo rule command to remove an ACL rule or specified settings of an ACL rule.
To remove an ACL rule using the undo rule command, you need to provide the ID of the ACL rule. If no
other arguments are specified, the entire ACL rule is removed. Otherwise, only the specified information
of the ACL rule is removed.
Note that:
z With the config match order specified for the advanced ACL, you can modify any existent rule. The
unmodified part of the rule remains. With the auto match order specified for the ACL, you cannot
modify any existent rule; otherwise the system prompts error information.
z If you do not specify the rule-id argument when creating an ACL rule, the rule will be numbered
automatically. If the ACL has no rules, the rule is numbered 0; otherwise, the number of the rule will
be the greatest rule number plus one. If the current greatest rule number is 65534, however, the
system will display an error message and you need to specify a number for the rule.

1-17
z The content of a modified or created rule cannot be identical with the content of any existing rules;
otherwise the rule modification or creation will fail, and the system prompts that the rule already
exists.
z If the ACL is created with the auto keyword specified, the newly created rules will be inserted in the
existent ones by depth-first principle, but the numbers of the existent rules are unaltered.

Examples

# Create advanced ACL 3000 and define rule 1 to deny packets with the source IP address of
192.168.0.1 and DSCP priority of 46.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] acl number 3000
[Sysname-acl-adv-3000] rule 1 deny ip source 192.168.0.1 0 dscp 46
[Sysname-acl-adv-3000] quit

# Create advanced ACL 3001 and define rule 1 to permit TCP packets that are sourced from network
129.9.0.0/16, destined for network 202.38.160.0/24, and using the destination port number of 80.
[Sysname] acl number 3001
[Sysname-acl-adv-3001] rule 1 permit tcp source 129.9.0.0 0.0.255.255 destination
202.38.160.0 0.0.0.255 destination-port eq 80

After completing the above configuration, you can use the display acl command to view the
configuration information of the ACLs.

rule (for Layer 2 ACLs)

Syntax

rule [ rule-id ] { deny | permit } [ rule-string ]

undo rule rule-id

View

Layer 2 ACL view

Parameters

rule-id: ACL rule ID, in the range of 0 to 65534.

deny: Drops the matched packets.
permit: Permits the matched packets.
rule-string: ACL rule information, which can be a combination of the arguments/keywords described in
Table 1-15.

Table 1-15 Layer 2 ACL rule information

Parameters Type Function Description

Specifies the link layer This argument can be
Link layer
format-type encapsulation type in 802.3/802.2, 802.3,
encapsulation type
the rule ether_ii, or snap.

1-18
Parameters Type Function Description
lsap-code:
Encapsulation format
of data frames, a 16-bit
hexadecimal number.
lsap lsap-code Specifies the lsap field
lsap field lsap-wildcard: Mask of
lsap-wildcard for the ACL rule
the lsap value, a 16-bit
hexadecimal number
used to specify the
mask bits.

source-mac-addr:
Source MAC address,
in the format of H-H-H.
source Specifies the source source-mac-mask:
Source MAC address
{ source-mac-addr MAC address range or Mask of the source
information or source
source-mac-mask | source VLAN range for MAC address, in the
VLAN information
vlan-id }* the ACL rule format of H-H-H.
vlan-id: Source VLAN
ID, in the range of 1 to
4,094.
dest-mac-addr:
Destination MAC
Specifies the address, in the format
dest dest-mac-addr Destination MAC destination MAC of H-H-H.
dest-mac-mask address information address range for the dest-mac-mask: Mask
ACL rule of the destination MAC
address, in the format
of H-H-H.
Specifies the 802.1p cos: VLAN priority, in
cos cos Priority
priority of the rule the range of 0 to 7.
time-name: specifies
the name of the time
Specifies the time
Time range range in which the rule
time-range time-name range in which the rule
information is active; a string
takes effect.
comprising 1 to 32
characters.
protocol-type: Protocol
Specifies the protocol type.
type protocol-type Protocol type of
type of Ethernet
protocol-mask Ethernet frames protocol-mask:
frames for the ACL rule
Protocol type mask.

As for Layer 2 ACLs to be assigned to the hardware, Switch 4200G series do not support ACL rules with
the format-type argument or the lsap keyword specified.

Description

Use the rule command to define an ACL rule.

Use the undo rule command to remove an ACL rule.

1-19
To remove an ACL rule using the undo rule command, you need to provide the ID of the ACL rule. You
can obtain the ID of an ACL rule by using the display acl command.
Note that:
z You can modify any existent rule of the Layer 2 ACL and the unmodified part of the ACL remains.
z If you do not specify the rule-id argument when creating an ACL rule, the rule will be numbered
automatically. If the ACL has no rules, the rule is numbered 0; otherwise, the number of the rule will
be the greatest rule number plus one. If the current greatest rule number is 65534, however, the
system will display an error message and you need to specify a number for the rule.
z The content of a modified or created rule cannot be identical with the content of any existing rules;
otherwise the rule modification or creation will fail, and the system prompts that the rule already
exists.

Examples

# Create Layer 2 ACL 4000 and define rule 1 to deny packets that are sourced from MAC address
000d-88f5-97ed, destined for MAC address 0011-4301-991e, and using the 802.1p priority of 3.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] acl number 4000
[Sysname-acl-ethernetframe-4000] rule 1 deny cos 3 source 000d-88f5-97ed ffff-ffff-ffff dest
0011-4301-991e ffff-ffff-ffff
[Sysname-acl-ethernetframe-4000] quit

After completing the above configuration, you can use the display acl command to view the
configuration information of the ACLs.

rule (for IPv6 ACLs)

Syntax

rule [ rule-id ] { deny | permit } [ src-mac rule-string rule-mask ] [ dest-mac rule-string rule-mask ] [ cos
rule-string rule-mask ] [ dscp rule-string rule-mask ] [ vlan rule-string rule-mask ] [ ip-protocol
rule-string rule-mask ] [ src-ip ipv6-address prefix-length ] [ dest-ip ipv6-address prefix-length ]
[ [ src-port rule-string rule-mask | dest-port rule-string rule-mask ] * | [ icmpv6-type rule-string
rule-mask | icmpv6-code rule-string rule-mask ] * ] [ time-range time-name ]
undo rule rule-id

View

IPv6 ACL view

Parameter

rule-id: ACL rule ID, in the range of 0 to 65534.

deny: Drops the matched packets.
permit: Permits the matched packets.
src-mac rule-string rule-mask: Specifies the source IPv6 MAC address information. Arguments
rule-string and rule-mask indicate the IPv6 source MAC address and mask and consist of twelve
hexadecimal numbers respectively.

1-20
dest-mac rule-string rule-mask: Specifies the destination IPv6 MAC address information. Arguments
rule-string and rule-mask indicate the IPv6 destination MAC address and mask and consist of twelve
hexadecimal numbers respectively.
cos rule-string rule-mask: Specifies the CoS information. Arguments rule-string and rule-mask indicate
the content string and mask and consist of two hexadecimal numbers respectively.
dscp rule-string rule-mask: Specifies the traffic class information. Arguments rule-string and rule-mask
indicate the content string and mask and consist of two hexadecimal numbers respectively.
vlan rule-string rule-mask: Specifies the IPv6 VLAN tag information. Arguments rule-string and
rule-mask indicate the content string and mask and consist of four hexadecimal numbers respectively.
ip-protocol rule-string rule-mask: Specifies the next header information. Arguments rule-string and
rule-mask indicate the content string and mask and consist of two hexadecimal numbers respectively.
src-ip ipv6-address prefix-length: Specifies the source IPv6 address information. Arguments
ipv6-address and prefix-length indicate the IPv6 address and prefix length respectively, where
prefix-length must be in the range 1 to 128.
dest-ip ipv6-address prefix-length: Specifies the destination IPv6 address information. Arguments
ipv6-address and prefix-length indicate the IPv6 address and prefix length respectively, where
prefix-length must be in the range 1 to 128.
src-port rule-string rule-mask: Specifies the source TCP/UDP port information. Arguments rule-string
and rule-mask indicate the content string and mask and consist of four hexadecimal numbers
respectively.
dest-port rule-string rule-mask: Specifies the destination TCP/UDP port information. Arguments
rule-string and rule-mask indicate the content string and mask and consist of four hexadecimal numbers
respectively.
icmpv6-type rule-string rule-mask: Specifies the ICMPv6 type information. Arguments rule-string and
rule-mask indicate the content string and mask and consist of two hexadecimal numbers respectively.
icmpv6-code rule-string rule-mask: Specifies the ICMPv6 code information. Arguments rule-string and
rule-mask indicate the content string and mask and consist of two hexadecimal numbers respectively.
time-range time-name: Specifies the time range in which the rule takes effect. time-name indicates the
name of a time range and must be a case-insensitive string of 1 to 32 characters that starts with an
English letter. To avoid confusion, it cannot be all.

Description

Use the rule command to define an ACL rule.

Use the undo rule command to remove an ACL rule.
To remove an ACL rule, you need to specify the number of the ACL rule. You can use the display acl
command to view the number of an ACL rule.
Note that:
z You can modify any existent rule of an IPv6 ACL. If you modify only the action to be taken or the
time range, the unmodified part of the rule remains the same. If you modify the contents of a
user-defined string, the new string overwrites the original one.
z If you do not specify the rule-id argument when creating an ACL rule, the rule will be numbered
automatically. If the ACL has no rules, the rule is numbered 0; otherwise, the number of the rule will
be the greatest rule number plus one. If the current greatest rule number is 65534, however, the
system will display an error message and you need to specify a number for the rule.

1-21
z The content of a modified or created rule cannot be identical with the content of any existing rule of
the ACL; otherwise the rule modification or creation will fail, and the system prompts that the rule
already exists.
z To specify the src-port or dest-port keyword for a rule, you need to specify the ip-protocol
rule-string rule-mask combination as TCP or UDP, that is, 0x06 or 0x11. To specify the
icmpv6-type or icmpv6-code keyword for a rule, you need to specify the ip-protocol rule-string
rule-mask combination as ICMPv6, that is, 0x3a.

Note:
Note the following when assigning an IPv6 ACL to the hardware on Switch 4200G Series:
z IPv6 ACLs do not match IPv6 packets with extension headers.
z Do not use IPv6 ACLs with VLAN mapping and trusted port priority.

Example

# Configure an rule for IPv6 ACL 5000, denying packets from 3001::1/64 to 3002::1/64.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] acl number 5000
[Sysname-acl-user-5000] rule deny src-ip 3001::1 64 dest-ip 3002::1 64

rule comment

Syntax

rule rule-id comment text

undo rule rule-id comment

View

Advanced ACL view, Layer 2 ACL view, IPv6 ACL view

Parameters

rule-id: ID of the ACL rule, in the range of 0 to 65534.

text: Comment for the ACL rule, a string of 1 to 127 characters. Blank spaces and special characters are
acceptable.

Description

Use the rule comment command to define a comment for the ACL rule.
Use the undo rule comment command to remove the comment defined for the ACL rule.
You can give rules comments to provide relevant information such as their application purposes and the
ports they are applied to, so that you can easily identity and distinguish ACL rules by their comments.
By default, an ACL rule has no comment.
Before defining a comment for an ACL rule, make sure that the ACL rule exists.

1-22
Examples

# Define the comment “This rule is to be applied to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1” for rule 0 of advanced ACL
3001.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] acl number 3001
[Sysname-acl-adv-3001] rule 0 comment This rule is to be applied to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

# Use the display acl command to view the configuration information of advanced ACL 3001.
[Sysname-acl-adv-3001] display acl 3001
Advanced ACL 3001, 1 rule
Acl's step is 1
rule 0 deny IP source 1.1.1.1 0 destination 2.2.2.2 0
rule 0 comment This rule is to be applied to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

time-range

Syntax

time-range time-name { start-time to end-time days-of-the-week [ from start-time start-date ] [ to

end-time end-date ] | from start-time start-date [ to end-time end-date ] | to end-time end-date }
undo time-range { all | name time-name [ start-time to end-time days-of-the-week [ from start-time
start-date ] [ to end-time end-date ] | from start-time start-date [ to end-time end-date ] | to end-time
end-date ] }

View

System view

Parameters

all: Removes all the time ranges.

time-name: Name of a time range, a case insensitive string of 1 to 32 characters that starts with a to z or
A to Z. To avoid confusion, it cannot be all.
start-time: Start time of a periodic time range, in the form of hh:mm.
end-time: End time of a periodic time range, in the form of hh:mm. The end time must be greater than
the start time.
days-of-the-week: Day of the week when the periodic time range is active. You can provide this
argument in one of the following forms.
z Numeral (0 to 6)
z Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, and Sun
z Working days (Monday through Friday)
z Off days (Saturday and Sunday)
z Daily, namely everyday of the week
from start-time start-date: Specifies the start date of an absolute time range, in the form of hh:mm
MM/DD/YYYY or hh:mm YYYY/MM/DD. The start-time start-date and end-time end-date argument
jointly define a period in which the absolute time range takes effect. If the start date is not specified, the
time range starts from 1970/01/01 00:00.

1-23
to end-time end-date: Specifies the end date of an absolute time range, in the form of hh:mm
MM/DD/YYYY or hh:mm YYYY/MM/DD. The start-time start-date and end-time end-date argument
jointly define a period in which the absolute time range takes effect. If the end date is not specified, the
time range ends at 2100/12/31 23:59.

Description

Use the time-range command to define a time range.

Use the undo time-range command to remove the specified or all time ranges.
Note that:
z If only a periodic time section is defined in a time range, the time range is active only when the
system time is within the defined periodic time section. If multiple periodic time sections are defined
in a time range, the time range is active only when the system time is within one of the periodic time
sections.
z If only an absolute time section is defined in a time range, the time range is active only when the
system time is within the defined absolute time section. If multiple absolute time sections are
defined in a time range, the time range is active only when the system time is within one of the
absolute time sections.
z If both a periodic time section and an absolute time section are defined in a time range, the time
range is active only when the periodic time range and the absolute time range are both matched.
Assume that a time range defines an absolute time section from 00:00 January 1, 2004 to 23:59
December 31, 2004, and a periodic time section from 12:00 to 14:00 every Wednesday. This time
range is active only when the system time is within 12:00 to 14:00 every Wednesday in 2004.

Examples

# Define a periodic time range that is active from 08:00 to 12:00 every working day.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] time-range tr1 08:00 to 12:00 working-day

# Define an absolute time range that is active from 12:00 January 1, 2008 to 12:00 June 1, 2008.
[Sysname] time-range tr2 from 12:00 1/1/2008 to 12:00 6/1/2008

# Display the configuration information of the time ranges.

[Sysname] display time-range all
Current time is 17:37:23 Nov/27/2007 Tuesday

Time-range : tr1 ( Inactive )

08:00 to 12:00 working-day

Time-range : tr2 ( Inactive )

From 12:00 Jan/1/2008 to 12:00 Jun/1/2008

1-24
Table of Contents

1 QoS Commands·········································································································································1-1
QoS Commands······································································································································1-1
burst-mode enable···························································································································1-1
display protocol-priority····················································································································1-2
display qos cos-drop-precedence-map ···························································································1-2
display qos cos-dscp-map ···············································································································1-3
display qos cos-local-precedence-map ···························································································1-3
display qos dscp-cos-map···············································································································1-4
display qos dscp-drop-precedence-map ·························································································1-6
display qos dscp-dscp-map·············································································································1-7
display qos dscp-local-precedence-map ·························································································1-9
display qos-global··························································································································1-11
display qos-interface all ·················································································································1-12
display qos-interface mirrored-to···································································································1-14
display qos-interface priority-trust ·································································································1-14
display qos-interface traffic-limit ····································································································1-15
display qos-interface traffic-priority································································································1-17
display qos-interface traffic-redirect ······························································································1-18
display qos-interface traffic-remark-vlanid·····················································································1-18
display qos-interface traffic-shape·································································································1-19
display qos-interface traffic-statistic ······························································································1-21
display qos-port-group···················································································································1-21
display qos-vlan·····························································································································1-22
display queue-scheduler ···············································································································1-23
mirrored-to ·····································································································································1-24
mirrored-to vlan ·····························································································································1-26
monitor-port ···································································································································1-26
priority ············································································································································1-27
priority-trust····································································································································1-28
protocol-priority protocol-type········································································································1-29
qos cos-drop-precedence-map ·····································································································1-30
qos cos-dscp-map ·························································································································1-32
qos cos-local-precedence-map ·····································································································1-33
qos dscp-cos-map ·························································································································1-35
qos dscp-drop-precedence-map ···································································································1-36
qos dscp-dscp-map ·······················································································································1-37
qos dscp-local-precedence-map ···································································································1-39
queue-scheduler····························································································································1-40
reset traffic-limit ·····························································································································1-42
reset traffic-limit vlan······················································································································1-42
reset traffic-statistic························································································································1-43
reset traffic-statistic vlan ················································································································1-43
traffic-limit ······································································································································1-44

i
traffic-limit vlan·······························································································································1-46
traffic-priority··································································································································1-47
traffic-priority vlan ··························································································································1-48
traffic-redirect·································································································································1-48
traffic-redirect vlan ·························································································································1-49
traffic-remark-vlanid·······················································································································1-50
traffic-shape···································································································································1-51
traffic-statistic·································································································································1-52
traffic-statistic vlan ·························································································································1-53

2 QoS Profile Configuration Commands····································································································2-1

QoS Profile Configuration Commands····································································································2-1
apply qos-profile ······························································································································2-1
display qos-profile····························································································································2-2
packet-filter ······································································································································2-3
qos-profile········································································································································2-3
qos-profile port-based······················································································································2-4
traffic-limit ········································································································································2-5
traffic-priority····································································································································2-6

ii
1 QoS Commands

QoS Commands
burst-mode enable

Syntax

burst-mode enable
undo burst-mode enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the burst-mode enable command to enable the burst function.

Use the undo burst-mode enable command to disable the burst function.
By default, the burst function is disabled.
The burst function improves packet buffering and forwarding performance in the following scenarios:
z Dense broadcast or multicast traffic and massive burst traffic are present.
z High-speed traffic is forwarded over a low-speed link or traffic received from multiple interfaces at
the same speed is forwarded through an interface at the same speed.
By enabling the burst function on your device, you can improve the processing performance of the
device operating in the above scenarios and thus reduce packet loss rate.

Because the burst function may affect the QoS performance of your device, you must make sure that
you are fully aware of the impacts when enabling the burst function.

Examples

# Enable the burst function on a Switch 4200G.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] burst-mode enable

1-1
display protocol-priority

Syntax

display protocol-priority

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display protocol-priority command to display the list of protocol priorities you assigned with
the protocol-priority command.
A Switch 4200G supports setting priorities for certain protocol packets generated by it. The supported
protocols are Telnet, SNMP, and ICMP. Depending on your configuration, the IP or DSCP value is
displayed for a specified protocol.
Related commands: protocol-priority.

Examples

# Display the list of protocol priorities manually specified.

<Sysname> display protocol-priority
Protocol: telnet
DSCP: be(0)

display qos cos-drop-precedence-map

Syntax

display qos cos-drop-precedence-map

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display qos cos-drop-precedence-map command to display the

CoS-precedence-to-drop-precedence mapping table. Note that the CoS precedence is also referred to
as the 802.1p precedence in this document.
Related commands: qos cos-drop-precedence-map.

Examples

# Display the CoS-precedence-to-drop-precedence mapping table on a Switch 4200G.

<Sysname> display qos cos-drop-precedence-map
cos-drop-precedence-map:

1-2
cos : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
--------------------------------------------------------------------
drop-precedence : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

display qos cos-dscp-map

Syntax

display qos cos-dscp-map

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display qos cos-dscp-map command to display the CoS-precedence-to-DSCP mapping
table.
Related commands: qos cos-dscp-map.

Examples

# Display the CoS-precedence-to-DSCP mapping table.

<Sysname> display qos cos-dscp-map
cos-dscp-map:
cos : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
dscp : 16 0 8 24 32 40 48 56

display qos cos-local-precedence-map

Syntax

display qos cos-local-precedence-map

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display qos cos-local-precedence-map command to display the

CoS-precedence-to-local-precedence mapping table.
Related commands: qos cos-local-precedence-map.

Examples

# Display the CoS-precedence-to-local-precedence mapping table on a Switch 4200G.

<Sysname> display qos cos-local-precedence-map

1-3
cos-local-precedence-map:
cos(802.1p) : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
local precedence(queue) : 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7

display qos dscp-cos-map

Syntax

display qos dscp-cos-map

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display qos dscp-cos-map command to display the DSCP-to-CoS-precedence mapping
table.
Related commands: qos dscp-cos-map.

Examples

# Display the DSCP-to-CoS-precedence mapping table.

<Sysname> display qos dscp-cos-map
dscp-cos-map:
dscp : cos
----------------------------------------------
0 : 1
1 : 1
2 : 1
3 : 1
4 : 1
5 : 1
6 : 1
7 : 1
8 : 2
9 : 2
10 : 2
11 : 2
12 : 2
13 : 2
14 : 2
15 : 2
16 : 0
17 : 0
18 : 0
19 : 0

1-4
20 : 0
21 : 0
22 : 0
23 : 0
24 : 3
25 : 3
26 : 3
27 : 3
28 : 3
29 : 3
30 : 3
31 : 3
32 : 4
33 : 4
34 : 4
35 : 4
36 : 4
37 : 4
38 : 4
39 : 4
40 : 5
41 : 5
42 : 5
43 : 5
44 : 5
45 : 5
46 : 5
47 : 5
48 : 6
49 : 6
50 : 6
51 : 6
52 : 6
53 : 6
54 : 6
55 : 6
56 : 7
57 : 7
58 : 7
59 : 7
60 : 7
61 : 7
62 : 7
63 : 7

1-5
display qos dscp-drop-precedence-map

Syntax

display qos dscp-drop-precedence-map

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display qos dscp-drop-precedence-map command to display the

DSCP-to-drop-precedence mapping table.
Related commands: qos dscp-drop-precedence-map.

Examples

# Display the DSCP-to-drop-precedence mapping table on a Switch 4200G.

<Sysname> display qos dscp-drop-precedence-map
dscp-drop-precedence-map:
dscp : drop-precedence
----------------------------------------------
0 : 1
1 : 1
2 : 1
3 : 1
4 : 1
5 : 1
6 : 1
7 : 1
8 : 1
9 : 1
10 : 1
11 : 1
12 : 1
13 : 1
14 : 1
15 : 1
16 : 1
17 : 1
18 : 1
19 : 1
20 : 1
21 : 1
22 : 1
23 : 1
24 : 1

1-6
25 : 1
26 : 1
27 : 1
28 : 1
29 : 1
30 : 1
31 : 1
32 : 0
33 : 0
34 : 0
35 : 0
36 : 0
37 : 0
38 : 0
39 : 0
40 : 0
41 : 0
42 : 0
43 : 0
44 : 0
45 : 0
46 : 0
47 : 0
48 : 0
49 : 0
50 : 0
51 : 0
52 : 0
53 : 0
54 : 0
55 : 0
56 : 0
57 : 0
58 : 0
59 : 0
60 : 0
61 : 0
62 : 0
63 : 0

display qos dscp-dscp-map

Syntax

display qos dscp-dscp-map

View

Any view

1-7
Parameters

None

Description

Use the display qos dscp-dscp-map command to display the DSCP-to-DSCP mapping table.
Related commands: qos dscp-dscp-map.

Examples

# Display the DSCP-to-DSCP mapping table.

<Sysname> display qos dscp-dscp-map
dscp-dscp-map:
dscp : dscp
----------------------------------------------
0 : 0
1 : 1
2 : 2
3 : 3
4 : 4
5 : 5
6 : 6
7 : 7
8 : 8
9 : 9
10 : 10
11 : 11
12 : 12
13 : 13
14 : 14
15 : 15
16 : 16
17 : 17
18 : 18
19 : 19
20 : 20
21 : 21
22 : 22
23 : 23
24 : 24
25 : 25
26 : 26
27 : 27
28 : 28
29 : 29
30 : 30
31 : 31
32 : 32
33 : 33

1-8
34 : 34
35 : 35
36 : 36
37 : 37
38 : 38
39 : 39
40 : 40
41 : 41
42 : 42
43 : 43
44 : 44
45 : 45
46 : 46
47 : 47
48 : 48
49 : 49
50 : 50
51 : 51
52 : 52
53 : 53
54 : 54
55 : 55
56 : 56
57 : 57
58 : 58
59 : 59
60 : 60
61 : 61
62 : 62
63 : 63

display qos dscp-local-precedence-map

Syntax

display qos dscp-local-precedence-map

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display qos dscp-local-precedence-map command to display the

DSCP-to-local-precedence mapping table.
Related commands: qos dscp-local-precedence-map.

1-9
Examples

# Display the DSCP-to-local-precedence mapping table on a Switch 4200G.

<Sysname> display qos dscp-local-precedence-map
dscp-local-precedence-map:
dscp : local-precedence(queue)
----------------------------------------------
0 : 0
1 : 0
2 : 0
3 : 0
4 : 0
5 : 0
6 : 0
7 : 0
8 : 1
9 : 1
10 : 1
11 : 1
12 : 1
13 : 1
14 : 1
15 : 1
16 : 2
17 : 2
18 : 2
19 : 2
20 : 2
21 : 2
22 : 2
23 : 2
24 : 3
25 : 3
26 : 3
27 : 3
28 : 3
29 : 3
30 : 3
31 : 3
32 : 4
33 : 4
34 : 4
35 : 4
36 : 4
37 : 4
38 : 4
39 : 4
40 : 5

1-10
41 : 5
42 : 5
43 : 5
44 : 5
45 : 5
46 : 5
47 : 5
48 : 6
49 : 6
50 : 6
51 : 6
52 : 6
53 : 6
54 : 6
55 : 6
56 : 7
57 : 7
58 : 7
59 : 7
60 : 7
61 : 7
62 : 7
63 : 7

display qos-global

Syntax

display qos-global { all | mirrored-to | traffic-limit | traffic-priority | traffic-redirect |

traffic-statistic }

View

Any view

Parameters

all: Displays all the global QoS configurations.

traffic-limit: Displays the global traffic policing configuration and the traffic policing statistics.
traffic-priority: Displays the global priority marking configuration.
traffic-redirect: Displays the global traffic redirecting configuration.
traffic-statistics: Displays the global traffic accounting configuration and the collected traffic statistics.

Description

Use the display qos-global command to display the specific global QoS configuration or all the global
QoS configurations.
Related commands: mirrored-to, traffic-limit, traffic-priority, traffic-redirect, traffic-statistic.

1-11
Examples

# Display all the global QoS configurations.

<Sysname> display qos-global all
global: traffic-limit inbound:
Matches: Acl 3001 rule 0 running
Target rate: 128 Kbps
Exceed action: drop
meter-statistic not running

Table 1-1 display qos-global all command output description

Field Description
QoS features configured globally, including:
z traffic-limit: Traffic policing configuration. For description on fields related to this
feature, refer to Table 1-5.
z traffic-priority: Priority marking configuration. For description on fields related to
this feature, refer to Table 1-6.
Global z traffic-redirect: Traffic redirecting configuration. For description on fields related
to this feature, refer to Table 1-7.
z traffic-statistic: Traffic accounting configuration. For description on fields related
to this feature, refer to Table 1-10.
z mirrored-to: Traffic mirroring configuration. For description on fields related to
this feature, refer to Table 1-3.

display qos-interface all

Syntax

display qos-interface { interface-type interface-number | unit-id } all

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Specifies the type and number of a port, for which all the QoS
configurations is to be displayed.
unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, for which all the configurations are to be displayed. The unit-id argument is
always 1.

Description

Use the display qos-interface all command to display all the QoS configurations of a port or a unit.
For Switch 4200G series, the following information is displayed in the following order depending on the
configuration:
z Traffic policing configurations
z Priority marking configurations
z Traffic redirecting configurations
z Traffic accounting configurations
z Traffic mirroring configurations
z Priority trust mode configurations

1-12
z Traffic shaping configurations
z VLAN mapping configurations
Related commands: line-rate, mirrored-to, priority-trust, traffic-limit, traffic-priority,
traffic-redirect, traffic-remark-vlanid, traffic-shape, traffic-statistic.

Examples

# Display all the QoS configurations of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> display qos-interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 all

GigabitEthernet1/0/1: traffic-limit
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running
Target rate: 128 Kbps
meter-statistic not running

GigabitEthernet1/0/1: priority-trust port

GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Port Shaping: Disable

0 kbps, 0 burst
QID: status max-rate(kbps) burst-size(byte)
----------------------------------------------------
0 : Enable 640 16
1 : Disable 0 0
2 : Disable 0 0
3 : Disable 0 0
4 : Disable 0 0
5 : Disable 0 0
6 : Disable 0 0
7 : Disable 0 0

Table 1-2 display qos-interface all command output description

Field Description
QoS features configured on the port, including:
z traffic-limit: Traffic policing configuration. For description on fields
related to this feature, refer to Table 1-5.
z traffic-priority: Priority marking configuration. For description on fields
related to this feature, refer to Table 1-6.
z traffic-redirect: Traffic redirecting configuration. For description on
fields related to this feature, refer to Table 1-7.
z traffic-statistic: Traffic accounting configuration. For description on
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 fields related to this feature, refer to Table 1-10.
z mirrored-to: Traffic mirroring configuration. For description on fields
related to this feature, refer to Table 1-3.
z priority-trust: Priority trust mode configuration. For description on
fields related to this feature, refer to Table 1-4.
z Port Shaping: Traffic shaping configuration. For description on fields
related to this feature, refer to Table 1-9.
z traffic-remark-vlanid: VLAN mapping configuration. For description on
fields related to this feature, refer to Table 1-8.

1-13
display qos-interface mirrored-to

Syntax

display qos-interface { interface-type interface-number | unit-id } mirrored-to

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Specifies the type and number of a port, whose traffic mirroring
configuration is to be displayed.
unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, whose traffic mirroring configuration is to be displayed. The unit-id argument
is always 1.

Description

Use the display qos-interface mirrored-to command to display the traffic mirroring configuration of a
port or all the ports on the device.
Related commands: mirrored-to.

Examples

# Display the traffic mirroring configuration of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> display qos-interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 mirrored-to
GigabitEthernet1/0/1: mirrored-to
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running
Mirrored to: monitor interface

Table 1-3 display qos-interface mirrored-to command output description

Field Description
GigabitEthernet1/0/1: Port with traffic mirroring configured.

Inbound Traffic mirroring is performed for incoming packets.

Matches Match criteria.
Mirrored to Mirror packets to the monitor port.

display qos-interface priority-trust

Syntax

display qos-interface { interface-type interface-number | unit-id } priority-trust

View

Any view

1-14
Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Specifies the type and number of a port, whose priority trust mode
configuration is to be displayed.
unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, whose priority trust mode configuration is to be displayed. The unit-id
argument is always 1.

Description

Use the display qos-interface priority-trust command to display the priority trust mode configuration
of a port or all the ports on the device.
Related commands: priority-trust.

Examples

# Display the priority trust mode configuration of Gigabitethernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> display qos-interface Gigabitethernet 1/0/1 priority-trust

GigabitEthernet1/0/1: priority-trust port

Table 1-4 display qos-interface priority-trust command output description

Field Description
The priority trust mode configured on the port, which can be:
z priority-trust port: Indicates that port priority is trusted
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 z priority-trust cos: Indicates that the 802.1p precedence values of
received packets are trusted
z priority-trust dscp: Indicates that the DSCP values of received
packets are trusted

display qos-interface traffic-limit

Syntax

display qos-interface { interface-type interface-number | unit-id } traffic-limit

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Specifies the type and number of a port, whose traffic policing
configuration is to be displayed.
unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, whose traffic policing configuration is to be displayed. The unit-id argument is
always 1.

Description

Use the display qos-interface traffic-limit command to display the traffic policing configuration of a
port or all the ports on the device. This command also displays the traffic policing statistics.
Related commands: traffic-limit.

1-15
Examples

# Display the traffic policing configuration and the traffic policing statistics of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> display qos-interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 traffic-limit

<Sysname> display qos-interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 traffic-remark-vlanid
GigabitEthernet1/0/1: traffic-remark-vlanid
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running
Remark vlan: 2
Packet type: untagged-packet

Table 1-8 display qos-interface traffic-remark-vlanid command output description

Field Description
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Port with VLAN mapping configured.
Inbound Indicates that VLAN mapping is applied in the inbound direction.

Matches Match criteria.

Remark vlan Target VLAN ID of the VLAN mapping function.
Type of packets to which VLAN mapping applies, which can be:
z all-packet: Performs VLAN mapping for all the packets matching
the specified ACL rule.
Packet type z tagged-packet: Performs VLAN mapping for only the tagged
packets matching the specified ACL rule.
z untagged-packet: Performs VLAN mapping for only the
untagged packets matching the specified ACL rule.

display qos-interface traffic-shape

Syntax

display qos-interface { interface-type interface-number | unit-id } traffic-shape

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Specifies the type and number of a port, whose traffic shaping
configuration is to be displayed.

1-19
unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, whose traffic shaping configuration is to be displayed. The unit-id argument
is always 1.

Description

Use the display qos-interface traffic-shape command to display the traffic shaping configuration of a
port or all the ports on the device.
Related commands: traffic-shape.

Examples

# Display the traffic shaping configuration of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> display qos-interface Gigabitethernet1/0/1 traffic-shape

GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Port Shaping: Enable

2000 kbps, 160 burst
QID: status max-rate(kbps) burst-size(byte)
----------------------------------------------------
0 : Disable 0 0
1 : Disable 0 0
2 : Disable 0 0
3 : Disable 0 0
4 : Disable 0 0
5 : Disable 0 0
6 : Disable 0 0
7 : Disable 0 0

Table 1-9 display qos-interface traffic-shape command output description

Field Description
Status of traffic shaping on the port, which can be:
z Enable: Performs traffic shaping for all traffic on the
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 port.
z Disable: Performs traffic shaping for traffic of specific
queues on the port.
2000 kbps Maximum rate of all traffic on the port.
160 burst Burst size of all traffic on the port.
QID Queue ID.

Status of traffic shaping for a queue, which can be:

z Enable: Indicates that queue-based traffic shaping is
status enabled for the queue.
z Disable: Indicates that queue-based traffic shaping is
disabled for the queue.
max-rate(kbps) Maximum traffic rate of a port queue.
burst-size(byte) Burst size of a port queue.

1-20
display qos-interface traffic-statistic

Syntax

display qos-interface { interface-type interface-number | unit-id } traffic-statistic

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Specifies the type and number of a port, whose traffic accounting
configuration and collected traffic statistics are to be displayed.
unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, whose traffic accounting configuration and collected traffic statistics are to be
displayed. The unit-id argument is always 1.

Description

Use the display qos-interface traffic-statistic command to display the traffic accounting configuration
and collected traffic statistics of a port or all the ports on the device.
Related commands: traffic-statistic.

Examples

# Display the traffic accounting configuration and collected traffic statistics for GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> display qos-interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 traffic-statistic
GigabitEthernet1/0/1: traffic-statistic
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running
8251 packet

Table 1-10 display qos-interface traffic-statistic command output description

Field Description
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Port with traffic accounting configured.
Indicates that traffic accounting is applied in the inbound
Inbound
direction.
Matches Match criteria.
8251 packet The number of matched packets.

display qos-port-group

Syntax

display qos-port-group [ group-id ] { all | mirrored-to | traffic-limit | traffic-priority | traffic-redirect

| traffic-statistic }

View

Any view

1-21
Parameters

group-id: Port group ID, in the range 1 to 100. If no port group is specified, the specified QoS
configurations of all port groups are displayed.
all: Displays all the QoS configurations of a port group.
traffic-limit: Displays the traffic policing configuration and traffic policing statistics for a port group.
traffic-priority: Displays the priority marking configuration of a port group.
traffic-redirect: Displays the traffic redirecting configuration of a port group.
traffic-statistics: Displays the traffic accounting configuration and collected traffic statistics for a port
group.

Description

Use the display qos-port-group command to display the specified QoS configurations of a port group
or all port groups.
Related commands: mirrored-to, traffic-limit, traffic-priority, traffic-redirect, traffic-statistic.

Examples

# Display all the QoS configurations of port group 1.

<Sysname> display qos-port-group 1 all
Port-group 1 traffic-limit
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 3001 rule 0 running
Target rate: 128 Kbps
Exceed action: drop
meter-statistic not running

Table 1-11 display qos-port-group command output description

Field Description
QoS features configured on the port group, which can be:
z traffic-limit: Traffic policing configuration. For description on fields related to
this feature, refer to Table 1-5.
z traffic-priority: Priority marking configuration. For description on fields related
to this feature, refer to Table 1-6.
Port-group 1 z traffic-redirect: Traffic redirecting configuration. For description on fields
related to this feature, refer to Table 1-7.
z traffic-statistic: Traffic accounting configuration. For description on fields
related to this feature, refer to Table 1-10.
z mirrored-to: Traffic mirroring configuration. For description on fields related
to this feature, refer to Table 1-3.

display qos-vlan

Syntax

display qos-vlan [ vlan-id ] { all | mirrored-to | traffic-limit | traffic-priority | traffic-redirect |

traffic-statistic }

1-22
View

Any view

Parameters

vlan-id: VLAN ID, in the range 1 to 4094. If no VLAN is specified, the specified QoS configurations of all
VLANs are displayed.
all: Displays all the QoS configurations of a VLAN.
traffic-limit: Displays the traffic policing configuration and traffic policing statistics for a VLAN.
traffic-priority: Displays the priority marking configuration of a VLAN.
traffic-redirect: Displays the traffic redirecting configuration of a VLAN.
traffic-statistics: Displays the traffic accounting configuration and collected traffic statistics for a VLAN.

Description

Use the display qos-vlan command to display the specified QoS configurations of a VLAN.
Related commands: mirrored-to, traffic-limit, traffic-priority, traffic-redirect, traffic-statistic.

Examples

# Display all the QoS configurations of VLAN 1 (assuming that the current device is a Switch 4200G).
<Sysname> display qos-vlan 1 all
Vlan 1 traffic-limit
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 3001 rule 0 running
Target rate: 128 Kbps
Exceed action: drop
meter-statistic not running

Table 1-12 display qos-vlan command output description

Field Description
QoS features configured for VLAN 1, including:
z traffic-limit: Traffic policing configuration. For description on fields related to
this feature, refer to Table 1-5.
z traffic-priority: Priority marking configuration. For description on fields related
to this feature, refer to Table 1-6.
Vlan 1 z traffic-redirect: Traffic redirecting configuration. For description on fields
related to this feature, refer to Table 1-7.
z traffic-statistic: Traffic accounting configuration. For description on fields
related to this feature, refer to Table 1-10.
z mirrored-to: Traffic mirroring configuration. For description on fields related to
this feature, refer to Table 1-3.

display queue-scheduler

Syntax

display queue-scheduler

1-23
View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display queue-scheduler command to display the queue scheduling algorithms in use and
related parameters.
Related commands: queue-scheduler.

Examples

# Display the queue scheduling algorithms in use and related parameters on a Switch 4200G.
<Sysname> display queue-scheduler
QID: scheduling-group weight
-----------------------------------
0 : wrr , group2 20
1 : wrr , group2 20
2 : wrr , group2 40
3 : wrr , group1 20
4 : wrr , group1 20
5 : wrr , group1 30
6 : sp 0
7 : sp 0

Table 1-13 display queue-scheduler command output description

Field Description
QID Queue ID.
The queue scheduling algorithm used by each queue, which can be:
z SP: Indicates that the queue uses the SP queuing.
scheduling-group z wrr , group1: Indicates that the queue uses SDWRR and belongs to
WRR group 1.
z wrr , group2: Indicates that the queue uses SDWRR and belongs to
WRR group 1.
weight Weight of the queue.

mirrored-to

Syntax

mirrored-to inbound acl-rule monitor-interface

undo mirrored-to inbound acl-rule

View

System view, port group view, Ethernet port view

1-24
Parameters

inbound: Mirrors incoming packets.

Table 1-14 Ways of applying combined ACL rules

ACL combination Form of the acl-rule argument

Apply a basic or advanced Layer 3 ACL ip-group acl-number
Apply a rule of a Layer 3 ACL ip-group acl-number rule rule-id
Apply all the rules of a Layer 2 ACL link-group acl-number
Apply a rule of a Layer 2 ACL link-group acl-number rule rule-id
Apply all the rules in an IPv6 ACL user-group acl-number
Apply a rule in an IPv6 ACL user-group acl-number rule rule-id
Apply a rule of a Layer 3 ACL and a rule of a ip-group acl-number rule rule-id link-group
Layer 2 ACL acl-number rule rule-id

Table 1-15 Description on the parameters in Table 1-14

Parameters Description
Specifies the number of a basic or advanced ACL, in the range
ip-group acl-number
2000 to 3999.

link-group acl-number Specifies the number of a Layer 2 ACL, in the range 4000 to 4999.

user-group acl-number IPv6 ACL number, in the range 5000 to 5999.

ACL rule number, in the range 0 to 65534. If the rule-id argument is
rule-id
not provided, all rules of the ACL are specified.

monitor-interface: Mirrors the packets to the monitor port.

Description

Use the mirrored-to command to configure mirroring the incoming packets matching the specific ACL
rules to the monitor port globally, in a port group, or on a port.
Use the undo mirrored-to command to remove a traffic mirroring action configured globally, on a port,
or in a port group.
Related commands: display qos-interface mirrored-to.

Examples

# Mirror the incoming packets matching ACL 2000 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/4
[Sysname- GigabitEthernet1/0/4] monitor-port
[Sysname- GigabitEthernet1/0/4] quit

1-25
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] mirrored-to inbound ip-group 2000 monitor-interface

mirrored-to vlan

Syntax

mirrored-to vlan vlan-id inbound acl-rule monitor-interface

undo mirrored-to vlan vlan-id inbound acl-rule

View

System view

Parameters

vlan-id: VLAN ID, in the range of 1 to 4094.

inbound: Mirrors incoming packets.
acl-rule: ACL rules to be used for traffic classification. The acl-rule argument can be a combination of
multiple types of ACLs. For more information about the acl-rule argument, refer to Table 1-14 and Table
1-15. Note that the ACL rules referenced must be configured with the permit keyword.
monitor-interface: Mirrors the packets to the monitor port.

Description

Use the mirrored-to vlan command to mirror the incoming packets matching the specific ACL rules in a
specific VLAN to the specified monitor port.
Use the undo mirrored-to vlan command to remove the configuration.
Related commands: display qos-vlan.

Examples

# Mirror the incoming packets matching ACL 2000 in VLAN 1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/2.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] monitor-port
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] quit
[Sysname] mirrored-to vlan 1 inbound ip-group 2000 monitor-interface

monitor-port

Syntax

monitor-port
undo monitor-port

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None
1-26
Description

Use the monitor-port command to configure a port as the monitor port for traffic mirroring.
Use the undo monitor-port command to remove the configuration.
Note that link aggregation group member ports, LACP-enabled ports, and STP-enabled ports cannot be
configured as monitor ports.

When you configure an Ethernet port as a monitor port, if local mirroring group 1 does not exist, the
device automatically creates local mirroring group 1 and adds the monitor port to the mirroring group; if
mirroring group 1 already exists and is configured as a remote mirroring group, your monitor port
configuration will fail.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet1/0/4 as the monitor port.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/4
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/4] monitor-port

priority

Syntax

priority priority-level
undo priority

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

priority-level: Port priority, ranging from 0 to 7.

Description

Use the priority command to configure the priority of an Ethernet port.

Use the undo priority command to restore the priority of an Ethernet port to the default.
By default, the priority of an Ethernet port is 0.
With the priority command configured on a port, the switch takes the configured port priority of the port
as the 802.1p precedence value of the received packet, searches for the precedence values
corresponding to the 802.1p precedence value in the CoS-precedence-to-other-precedence mapping
table, and assigns the matching precedence values to the packet.

1-27
Examples

# Set the priority of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to 6.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] priority 6

priority-trust

Syntax

priority-trust { cos [ automap ] | dscp [ automap | remap ] }

undo priority-trust

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

cos [ automap ]: Configured to use the 802.1p precedence carried in the incoming traffic for priority
mapping and decide how the switch processes the DSCP field when delivering the traffic:
z If automap is not specified (the default), the switch keeps the original DSCP value of the traffic
unchanged.
z If automap is specified, the switch replaces the original DSCP value carried in the incoming traffic
with the target DSCP value.
dscp [ automap | remap]: Configured to use the DSCP value carried in the incoming traffic for priority
mapping and decide how the switch processes the CoS field when delivering the traffic:
z If neither automap nor remap is specified, the switch keeps the original 802.1p precedence value
of the incoming traffic unchanged.
z With automap specified, the switch replaces the original 802.1p precedence value of the incoming
traffic with the target one.
z If remap is specified, the switch looks up the DSCP-to-DSCP mapping table for the DSCP value
corresponding to the DSCP value carried in the incoming traffic, then searches for the set of
precedence values corresponding to the new DSCP value in the DSCP-to-other-precedence
mapping table, and then replaces the 802.1p precedence value of the traffic with the target one.

Description

Use the priority-trust command to specify the trusted priority type and packet processing mode on an
Ethernet port.
Use the undo priority-trust command to restore the default.
An Ethernet port trusts the port priority by default.
Related commands: display qos-interface priority-trust.

Examples

# Configure the switch to trust 802.1p precedence of received packets and use the default packet
processing mode on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view

1-28
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] priority-trust cos

protocol-priority protocol-type

Syntax

protocol-priority protocol-type protocol-type { ip-precedence ip-precedence | dscp dscp-value }

undo protocol-priority protocol-type protocol-type

View

System view

Parameters

protocol-type protocol-type: Specifies the protocol type, which can be Telnet, SNMP, or ICMP.
ip-precedence ip-precedence: Specifies an IP precedence value, in the range 0 to 7. Alternatively, you
can enter a keyword listed in Table 1-16 as the IP precedence value.

Table 1-16 IP precedence keywords and the corresponding decimal/binary values

IP precedence value
Keyword IP precedence value (binary)
(decimal)

routine 0 000

priority 1 001

immediate 2 010

flash 3 011

flash-override 4 100

critical 5 101

internet 6 110

network 7 111

dscp dscp-value: Specifies the DSCP value, in the range of 0 to 63. Alternatively, you can enter a
keyword listed in Table 1-17 as the DSCP value.

Table 1-17 DSCP value keywords and the corresponding decimal/binary values

Keyword DSCP value (decimal) DSCP value (binary)

af11 10 001010

af12 12 001100

af13 14 001110

af21 18 010010

af22 20 010100

af23 22 010110

af31 26 011010

1-29
Keyword DSCP value (decimal) DSCP value (binary)
af32 28 011100

af33 30 011110

af41 34 100010

af42 36 100100

af43 38 100110
be (the default) 0 000000

cs1 8 001000

cs2 16 010000

cs3 24 011000

cs4 32 100000

cs5 40 101000

cs6 48 110000

cs7 56 111000

ef 46 101110

Description

Use the protocol-priority command to set an IP precedence value or DSCP value for locally generated
packets of a specific protocol globally.
Use the undo protocol-priority command to remove the IP precedence value or DSCP value set for
the locally generated packets of a specific protocol globally.
Related commands: display protocol-priority.

Examples

# Set the IP precedence value to 3 for SNMP protocol packets.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] protocol-priority protocol-type snmp ip-precedence 3

qos cos-drop-precedence-map

Syntax

qos cos-drop-precedence-map cos0-map-drop-prec cos1-map-drop-prec cos2-map-drop-prec

cos3-map-drop-prec cos4-map-drop-prec cos5-map-drop-prec cos6-map-drop-prec
cos7-map-drop-prec
undo qos cos-drop-precedence-map

View

System view

1-30
Parameters

cos0-map-drop-prec: Drop precedence value to which CoS 0 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 1.

cos1-map-drop-prec: Drop precedence value to which CoS 1 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 1.
cos2-map-drop-prec: Drop precedence value to which CoS 2 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 1.
cos3-map-drop-prec: Drop precedence value to which CoS 3 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 1.
cos4-map-drop-prec: Drop precedence value to which CoS 4 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 1.
cos5-map-drop-prec: Drop precedence value to which CoS 5 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 1.
cos6-map-drop-prec: Drop precedence value to which CoS 6 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 1.
cos7-map-drop-prec: Drop precedence value to which CoS 7 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 1.

Description

Use the qos cos-drop-precedence-map command to modify the

CoS-precedence-to-drop-precedence mapping table.
Use the undo qos cos-drop-precedence-map command to restore the default
CoS-precedence-to-drop-precedence mapping table.
Table 1-18 shows the default CoS-precedence-to-drop-precedence mapping table.

Table 1-18 The default CoS-precedence-to-drop-precedence mapping table

CoS value Drop precedence value

0 0

1 0
2 0
3 0

4 0
5 0
6 0

7 0

Related commands: display qos cos-drop-precedence-map.

Examples

# Modify the CoS-precedence-to-drop-precedence mapping table according to Table 1-19.

Table 1-19 A CoS-precedence-to-drop-precedence mapping table

CoS value Drop precedence value

0 1
1 1
2 1

3 1
4 1

1-31
CoS value Drop precedence value
5 0
6 0
7 0

The configuration procedure is as follows:

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] qos cos-drop-precedence-map 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

qos cos-dscp-map

Syntax

qos cos-dscp-map cos0-map-dscp cos1-map-dscp cos2-map-dscp cos3-map-dscp cos4-map-dscp

cos5-map-dscp cos6-map-dscp cos7-map-dscp
undo qos cos- dscp-map

View

System view

Parameters

cos0-map-dscp: DSCP value to which CoS 0 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 63.

cos1-map-dscp: DSCP value to which CoS 1 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 63.
cos2-map-dscp: DSCP value to which CoS 2 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 63.
cos3-map-dscp: DSCP value to which CoS 3 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 63.
cos4-map-dscp: DSCP value to which CoS 4 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 63.
cos5-map-dscp: DSCP value to which CoS 5 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 63.
cos6-map-dscp: DSCP value to which CoS 6 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 63.
cos7-map-dscp: DSCP value to which CoS 7 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 63.

Description

Use the qos cos-dscp-map command to modify the CoS-precedence-to-DSCP mapping table.
Use the undo qos cos-dscp-map command to restore the default CoS-precedence-to-DSCP mapping
table.
Table 1-20 shows the default CoS-precedence-to-DSCP mapping table.

Table 1-20 The default CoS-precedence-to-DSCP mapping table

CoS value DSCP value

0 16
1 0
2 8
3 24

1-32
CoS value DSCP value
4 32
5 40
6 48
7 56

Related commands: display qos cos-dscp-map.

Examples

# Modify the CoS-precedence-to-DSCP mapping table according to Table 1-21.

Table 1-21 A CoS-precedence-to-DSCP mapping table

CoS value DSCP value

0 0

1 1
2 2
3 3

4 4
5 5
6 6

7 7

The configuration procedure is as follows:

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] qos cos-dscp-map 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

qos cos-local-precedence-map

Syntax

qos cos-local-precedence-map cos0-map-local-prec cos1-map-local-prec cos2-map-local-prec

cos3-map-local-prec cos4-map-local-prec cos5-map-local-prec cos6-map-local-prec
cos7-map-local-prec
undo qos cos-local-precedence-map

View

System view

Parameters

cos0-map-local-prec: Local precedence value to which CoS 0 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 7.

cos1-map-local-prec: Local precedence value to which CoS 1 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 7.
cos2-map-local-prec: Local precedence value to which CoS 2 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 7.

1-33
cos3-map-local-prec: Local precedence value to which CoS 3 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 7.
cos4-map-local-prec: Local precedence value to which CoS 4 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 7.
cos5-map-local-prec: Local precedence value to which CoS 5 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 7.
cos6-map-local-prec: Local precedence value to which CoS 6 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 7.
cos7-map-local-prec: Local precedence value to which CoS 7 is to be mapped, in the range 0 to 7.

Description

Use the qos cos-local-precedence-map command to modify the

CoS-precedence-to-local-precedence mapping table.
Use the undo qos cos-local-precedence-map command to restore the default
CoS-precedence-to-local-precedence mapping table.
As the port of a Switch 4200G can accommodate up to eight output queues, as shown in Table 1-22.

Table 1-22 The default CoS-precedence-to-local-precedence mapping table on Switch 4200G series

CoS value Local precedence value

0 2
1 0

2 1
3 3
4 4

5 5
6 6
7 7

Related commands: display qos cos-local-precedence-map.

Examples

# Modify the CoS-precedence-to-local-precedence mapping table according to Table 1-23.

Table 1-23 A CoS-precedence-to-local-precedence mapping table

CoS value Local precedence value

0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7

The configuration procedure is as follows:

1-34
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] qos cos-local-precedence-map 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

qos dscp-cos-map

Syntax

qos dscp-cos-map dscp-list : cos-value

undo qos dscp-cos-map [ dscp-list ]

View

System view

Parameters

dscp-list: A DSCP value or multiple DSCP values each separated by a space. The value range for
DSCP values is 0 to 63. The dscp-list argument is separated from the cos-value argument by a colon (:).
cos-value: 802.1p precedence value, in the range of 0 to 7. It is mapped to the specified DSCP value or
values.

Description

Use the qos dscp-cos-map command to modify the DSCP-to-CoS-precedence mapping table.
Use the undo qos dscp-cos-map command to restore the default DSCP-to-CoS-precedence mapping
table.
Table 1-24 shows the default DSCP-to-CoS-precedence mapping table.

Table 1-24 The default DSCP-to-CoS-precedence mapping table

DSCP value range CoS value

0 to 7 1

8 to 15 2
16 to 23 0
24 to 31 3

32 to 39 4
40 to 47 5
48 to 55 6
56 to 63 7

Related commands: display qos dscp-cos-map.

Examples

# Modify the DSCP-to-CoS-precedence mapping table according to Table 1-25.

1-35
Table 1-25 A DSCP-to-CoS-precedence mapping table

DSCP values CoS value

0 to 7 0
8 to 15 1
16 to 23 2
24 to 31 3
32 to 39 4
40 to 47 5
48 to 55 6
56 to 63 7

The configuration procedure is as follows:

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] qos dscp-cos-map 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 : 0
[Sysname] qos dscp-cos-map 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 : 1
[Sysname] qos dscp-cos-map 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 : 2
[Sysname] qos dscp-cos-map 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 : 3
[Sysname] qos dscp-cos-map 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 : 4
[Sysname] qos dscp-cos-map 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 : 5
[Sysname] qos dscp-cos-map 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 : 6
[Sysname] qos dscp-cos-map 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 : 7

qos dscp-drop-precedence-map

Syntax

qos dscp-drop-precedence-map dscp-list : drop-precedence

undo qos dscp-drop-precedence-map [dscp-list ]

View

System view

Parameters

dscp-list: A DSCP value or multiple DSCP values each separated by a space. The value range for
DSCP values is 0 to 63. The dscp-list argument is separated from the drop-precedence argument by a
colon (:).
drop-precedence: Drop precedence value, in the range of 0 to 1. It is mapped to the specified DSCP
value or values.

Description

Use the qos dscp-drop-precedence-map command to modify the DSCP-to-drop-precedence

mapping table.

1-36
Use the undo qos dscp-drop-precedence-map command to restore the default
DSCP-to-drop-precedence mapping table.
Table 1-26 shows the default DSCP-to-drop-precedence mapping table.

Table 1-26 The default DSCP-to-drop-precedence mapping table

DSCP value range Drop precedence value

0 to 7 1
8 to 15 1
16 to 23 1
24 to 31 1
32 to 39 0
40 to 47 0
48 to 55 0
56 to 63 0

Related commands: display qos dscp-drop-precedence-map.

Examples

# Modify the DSCP-to-drop-precedence mapping table according to Table 1-27.

Table 1-27 A DSCP-to-drop-precedence mapping table

DSCP value range Drop precedence value

0 to 7 0

8 to 15 1
16 to 23 1
24 to 31 1
32 to 39 0
40 to 47 0
48 to 55 0

56 to 63 0

The configuration procedure is as follows:

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] qos dscp-drop-precedence-map 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 : 0

qos dscp-dscp-map

Syntax

qos dscp-dscp-map dscp-list : dscp-value

undo qos dscp-dscp-map [dscp-list ]

1-37
View

System view

Parameters

dscp-list: A DSCP value or multiple DSCP values each separated by a space. The value range for
DSCP values is 0 to 63. The dscp-list argument is separated from the dscp-value argument by a colon
(:).
dscp-value: A target DSCP value, in the range of 0 to 63. It is mapped to the specified DSCP value or
values.

Description

Use the qos dscp-dscp-map command to modify the DSCP-to-DSCP mapping table.
Use the undo qos dscp-dscp-map command to restore the default DSCP-to-DSCP mapping table.
Table 1-28 shows the default DSCP-to-DSCP mapping table.

Table 1-28 The default DSCP-to-DSCP mapping table

Source DSCP value Target DSCP value

0 0
1 1

2 2
... ...
61 61

62 62
63 63

Related commands: display qos dscp-dscp-map.

Examples

# Modify the DSCP-to-DSCP mapping table according to Table 1-29.

Table 1-29 A DSCP-to-DSCP mapping table

Source DSCP value Target DSCP value

0 1
1 1
2 1
3 1
4 1
5 1
6 1
7 1
8 8

1-38
Source DSCP value Target DSCP value
9 9
10 10
... ...
61 61
62 62
63 63

The configuration procedure is as follows:

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] qos dscp-dscp-map 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 : 1

qos dscp-local-precedence-map

Syntax

qos dscp-local-precedence-map dscp-list : local-precedence

undo qos dscp-local-precedence-map [dscp-list ]

View

System view

Parameters

dscp-list: A DSCP value or multiple DSCP values each separated by a space. The value range for
DSCP values is 0 to 63. The dscp-list argument is separated from the local-precedence argument by a
colon (:).
local-precedence: Local precedence value mapped to the specified DSCP value or values. This
argument is in the range of 0 to 7 on the Switch 4200G series.

Description

Use the qos dscp-local-precedence-map command to modify the DSCP-to-local-precedence

mapping table.
Use the undo qos dscp-local-precedence-map command to restore the default
DSCP-to-local-precedence mapping table.
As the port of a Switch 4200G can accommodate up to eight output queues, as shown in Table 1-30.

Table 1-30 The default DSCP-to-local-precedence mapping table on the Switch 4200G series

DSCP value range Local precedence value

0 to 7 0
8 to 15 1
16 to 23 2
24 to 31 3

1-39
DSCP value range Local precedence value
32 to 39 4
40 to 47 5
48 to 55 6
56 to 63 7

Related commands: display qos dscp-local-precedence-map.

Examples

# Modify the DSCP-to-local-precedence mapping table according to Table 1-31.

Table 1-31 A DSCP-to-local-precedence mapping table

DSCP values Local precedence value

0 to 7 1

8 to 15 1
16 to 23 2
24 to 31 3

32 to 39 4
40 to 47 5
48 to 55 6

56 to 63 7

The configuration procedure is as follows:

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] qos dscp-local-precedence-map 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 : 1

queue-scheduler

Syntax

queue-scheduler wrr { group1 { queue-id queue-weight } &<1-8> | group2 { queue-id queue-weight }

&<1-8> }*
undo queue-scheduler [ queue-id ] &<1-8>

View

System view

Parameters

wrr: Uses the shaped deficit weighted round robin (SDWRR) queuing.
group1: Assigns the specified queues to WRR scheduling group 1.
group2: Assigns the specified queues to WRR scheduling group 2.
queue-id: Queue ID, in the range 0 to 7.

1-40
queue-weight: Weight assigned to a queue, in the range 1 to 255.
&<1-8>: Indicates that the queue-id argument and the queue-weight argument can be entered for up to
eight times.

Description

Use the queue-scheduler command to specify the queue scheduling algorithms to be used and the
related parameters for the specific queues.
Use the undo queue-scheduler command to restore the default.
By default, the SP queuing is used.
The port of a Switch 4200G can accommodate up to eight. You can configure to use SP queuing,
SDWRR queuing, or SP queuing in combination with SDWRR queuing as required.
z With SDWRR queuing adopted, the output queues of a port can be assigned to group 1 and group
2. The two groups are scheduled using the SP algorithm. For example, you can assign queues 0
through 3 to group 1, and assign queues 4 through 7 to group 2. The queues in group 2 are
scheduled preferentially using WRR. The queues in group 1 are scheduled using WRR only when
all the queues in group 2 are empty.
z With both SP queuing and SDWRR queuing adopted, groups are scheduled using the SP
algorithm. Assume that queue 0 and queue 1 are scheduled using SP queuing, queues 2 through 4
are assigned to group 1, and queues 5 through 7 are assigned to group 2. The queues in group 2
are scheduled preferentially using WRR. When all the queues in group 2 are empty, the queues in
group 1 are scheduled using WRR. Then, queue 1 is scheduled, and then queue 0.

When using SDWRR or SP-SDWRR combination for queue scheduling, you are recommended to
assign queues with successive queue numbers to the same scheduling group.

Related commands: display queue-scheduler.

Examples

# Use both SP and SDWRR for queue scheduling, assigning queue 3, queue 4, and queue 5 to WRR
scheduling group 1, with the weigh of 20, 20 and 30; assigning queue 0, queue 1, and queue 2 to WRR
scheduling group 2, with the weight 20, 20, and 40; and scheduling queue 6 and queue 7 using the SP
algorithm.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] queue-scheduler wrr group1 3 20 4 20 5 30 group2 0 20 1 20 2 40
[Sysname] display queue-scheduler
QID: scheduling-group weight
-----------------------------------
0 : wrr , group2 20
1 : wrr , group2 20
2 : wrr , group2 40
3 : wrr , group1 20

1-41
4 : wrr , group1 20
5 : wrr , group1 30
6 : sp 0
7 : sp 0

reset traffic-limit

Syntax

reset traffic-limit inbound acl-rule

View

System view, Ethernet port view, port group view

Parameters

inbound: Clears the statistics about the incoming packets.

Description

Use the reset traffic-limit command to clear the traffic policing statistics of the incoming packets
matching the specific ACL rules globally, on a port, or in a port group.
Related commands: traffic-limit.

Examples

# Clear the traffic policing statistics of the incoming packets matching ACL 2000 on GigabitEthernet
1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] reset traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000

reset traffic-limit vlan

Syntax

reset traffic-limit vlan vlan-id inbound acl-rule

View

System view

Parameters

vlan-id: VLAN ID, in the range 1 to 4094.

inbound: Clears the statistics about the incoming packets.
acl-rule: ACL rules to be used for traffic classification. The acl-rule argument can be a combination of
multiple types of ACLs. For more information about the acl-rule argument, refer to Table 1-14 and Table
1-15.

1-42
Description

Use the reset traffic-limit vlan command to clear the statistics of the incoming packets matching the
specific ACL rules in a VLAN.
Related commands: traffic-limit vlan.

Examples

# Clear the statistics of the incoming packets matching ACL 2000 in VLAN 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] reset traffic-limit vlan 1 inbound ip-group 2000

reset traffic-statistic

Syntax

reset traffic-statistic inbound acl-rule

View

System view, Ethernet port view, port group view

Parameters

inbound: Clears statistics about the incoming packets.

Description

Use the reset traffic-statistics command to clear the statistics about the incoming packets matching
the specific ACL rules globally, on a port, or in a port group.
Related commands: traffic-statistic.

Examples

# Clear the statistics about the incoming packets matching ACL 2000 on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] reset traffic-statistic inbound ip-group 2000

reset traffic-statistic vlan

Syntax

reset traffic-statistic vlan vlan-id inbound acl-rule

View

System view

1-43
Parameters

vlan-id: VLAN ID, in the range 1 to 4094.

Description

Use the reset traffic-statistics vlan command to clear the statistics about the incoming packets
matching the specific ACL rules for the specified VLAN.
Related commands: traffic-statistic vlan.

Examples

# Clear the statistics on packets incoming packets matching ACL 2000 in VLAN 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] reset traffic-statistic vlan 1 inbound ip-group 2000

traffic-limit

Syntax

traffic-limit inbound acl-rule target-rate [ conform con-action ] [ exceed exceed-action ]

[ meter-statistic ]
undo traffic-limit inbound acl-rule [ meter-statistic ]

View

System view, Ethernet port view, port group view

Parameters

inbound: Performs traffic policing on incoming packets.

1-44
Table 1-32 802.1p precedence keywords and the corresponding decimal/binary values

802.1p precedence value 802.1p precedence value

Keyword
(decimal) (binary)

best-effort 0 000

background 1 001

Spare 2 010

excellent-effort 3 011

controlled-load 4 100

Video 5 101

Voice 6 110

Network-management 7 111

exceed exceed-action: Specifies the action to take on the packets exceeding the rate limit. The action
can be:
z drop: Drops the packets.
z forward: Forwards the packets.
z remark-dscp dscp-value: Resets the DSCP value of the packets and forwards them at the same
time. The DSCP value is in the range of 0 to 63. You can also enter a keyword listed in Table 1-17
for this argument.
z remark-cos cos-value: Resets the 802.1p precedence value of the packets and forwards them at
the same time. The cos-value argument is in the range of 0 to 7. You can also enter a keyword
listed in Table 1-32 for this argument.
meter-statistic: Collects traffic policing statistics. It can measure in bytes the traffic conforming to the
rate limit and the traffic exceeding the rate limit.

Description

Use the traffic-limit command to configure traffic policing for the incoming packets matching the
specific ACL rules globally, on a port, or in a port group.
Use the undo traffic-limit command to remove the configuration.
The granularity of traffic policing is described in Table 1-33:

Table 1-33 The granularity of traffic policing

Rate limit range Granularity

0 to 1 Mbps 1 kbps
0 to 10 Mbps 10 kbps
0 to 100 Mbps 100 kbps
0 to 1 Gbps 1 Mbps
0 to 10 Gbps 10 Mbps

Related commands: display qos-interface traffic-limit.

1-45
Examples

# Perform traffic policing for incoming packets matching ACL 4000 on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1, limiting the
rate to 128 kbps and dropping the packets exceeding the rate limit.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] traffic-limit inbound link-group 4000 128 exceed drop

traffic-limit vlan

Syntax

undo traffic-redirect inbound acl-rule

View

System view, Ethernet port view, port group view

1-48
Parameters

inbound: Redirects the incoming packets.

Description

Use the traffic-redirect command to redirect the incoming packets matching the specific ACL rules
globally, on a port, or in a port group.
Use the undo traffic-redirect command to remove the configuration.

If the traffic is redirected to a Combo port in down state, the system automatically redirects the traffic to
the port corresponding to the Combo port in up state. Refer to Basic Port Configuration module of this
manual for information about Combo ports.

Related commands: display qos-interface traffic-redirect.

Examples

# Redirect the incoming packets matching ACL 2000 on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/7.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] traffic-redirect inbound ip-group 2000 interface
GigabitEthernet1/0/7

traffic-redirect vlan

Syntax

traffic-redirect vlan vlan-id inbound acl-rule interface interface-type interface-number

undo traffic-redirect vlan vlan-id inbound acl-rule

View

System view

Parameters

vlan-id: VLAN ID, in the range 1 to 4094.

inbound: Redirects the incoming packets.

1-49
acl-rule: ACL rules to be used for traffic classification. The acl-rule argument can be a combination of
multiple types of ACLs. For more information about the acl-rule argument, refer to Table 1-14 and Table
1-15. Note that the ACL rules referenced must be configured with the permit keyword.
interface interface-type interface-number: Redirects packets to an Ethernet port specified by its port
and number.

Description

Use the traffic-redirect vlan command to redirect the incoming packets matching the specific ACL
rules in a specific VLAN to a specified port.
Use the undo traffic-redirect vlan command to remove the configuration.

Related commands: display qos-vlan.

Examples

# Redirect the incoming packets matching ACL 2000 in VLAN 1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/7.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] traffic-redirect vlan 1 inbound ip-group 2000 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/7

traffic-remark-vlanid

Syntax

traffic-remark-vlanid inbound acl-rule remark-vlan vlan-id [ all-packet | tagged-packet |

untagged-packet ]
undo traffic-remark-vlanid inbound acl-rule

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

inbound: Performs VLAN mapping for the incoming packets.

1-50
untagged-packet: Performs VLAN mapping for untagged packets matching the specific ACL rules.

Description

Use the traffic-remark-vlanid command to enable VLAN mapping and set the target VLAN ID for the
incoming packets matching the specific ACL rules on a port.
Use the undo traffic-remark-vlanid command to disable VLAN mapping for the incoming packets
matching the specific ACL rules.

Currently, the all-packet keyword and the tagged-packet keyword are not supported.

Related commands: display qos-interface traffic-remark-vlanid.

Examples

# Configure VLAN mapping on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 of a Switch 4200G to map the VLAN IDs of
incoming packets matching ACL 4001 to 1001.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] traffic-remark-vlanid inbound link-group 4001 remark-vlan
1001

traffic-shape

Syntax

traffic-shape [ queue queue-id ] max-rate burst-size

undo traffic-shape [ queue queue-id ]

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

queue queue-id: Specifies the ID of a queue, in the range of 0 to 7.

max-rate: Maximum traffic rate on a port, in kbps.
burst-size: Burst size (in KB), in the range 16 to 16000. This argument must be a multiple of 4.

Description

Use the traffic-shape command to configure traffic shaping on a port.

Use the undo traffic-shape command to disable traffic shaping on a port.
To shape all traffic on the port, do not specify the queue queue-id keyword and argument combination.
To shape traffic of a specific output queue rather than of all queues on the port, specify the queue with
the queue queue-id keyword.

1-51
Table 1-34 The granularity of traffic shaping

Port type The set traffic shaping value Granularity (in bps)
GE ports 0 to 80 Mbps 20 kbps
GE ports 80 Mbps to 1 Gbps 260 kbps
10GE ports 0 to 10 Gbps 2500 kbps

Related commands: display qos-interface traffic-shape.

Examples

# Configure traffic shaping on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 of a Switch 4200G, with the maximum rate being
640 kbps and the burst size being 16 KB.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] traffic-shape 640 16

traffic-statistic

Syntax

traffic-statistic inbound acl-rule

undo traffic-statistic inbound acl-rule

View

System view, Ethernet port view, port group view

Parameters

inbound: Collects statistics on the incoming packets.

Description

Use the traffic-statistic command to collect statistics for the incoming packets matching the specific
ACL rules globally, on a port, or in a port group.
Use the undo traffic-statistic command to remove the configuration.
Related commands: display qos-interface traffic-statistic.

Examples

# Collect statistics for the incoming packets matching ACL 2000 on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] traffic-statistic inbound ip-group 2000

1-52
traffic-statistic vlan

Syntax

traffic-statistic vlan vlan-id inbound acl-rule

undo traffic-statistic vlan vlan-id inbound acl-rule

View

System view

Parameters

vlan-id: VLAN ID, in the range 1 to 4094.

inbound: Collects statistics for the incoming packets.
acl-rule: ACL rules to be used for traffic classification. The acl-rule argument can be a combination of
multiple types of ACLs. For more information about the acl-rule argument, refer to Table 1-14 and Table
1-15. Note that the ACL rules referenced must be configured with the permit keyword.

Description

Use the traffic-statistic vlan command to collect statistics for the incoming packets matching the
specific ACL rules for a specific VLAN.
Use the undo traffic-statistic vlan command to remove the configuration.
Related commands: display qos-vlan.

Examples

# Collect statistics for the incoming packets matching ACL 2000 in VLAN 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] traffic-statistic vlan 1 inbound ip-group 2000

1-53
2 QoS Profile Configuration Commands

QoS Profile Configuration Commands

apply qos-profile

Syntax

In system view

apply qos-profile profile-name interface interface-list

undo apply qos-profile profile-name interface interface-list

In Ethernet port view

apply qos-profile profile-name

undo apply qos-profile profile-name

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

profile-name: QoS profile name, a string of 1 to 32 characters and starting with English letters [a-z, A-Z].
interface-list: List of Ethernet ports. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument
in the form of interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ].

Description

Use the apply qos-profile command to apply a QoS profile to a port or multiple ports.
Use the undo apply qos-profile command to remove a QoS profile from a port or multiple ports.

Examples

# Apply the QoS profile named a123 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] apply qos-profile a123

# Apply the QoS profile named a123 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 through GigabitEthernet 1/0/4.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] apply qos-profile a123 interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/4

2-1
display qos-profile

Syntax

display qos-profile { all | name profile-name | interface interface-type interface-number | user

user-name }

View

Any view

Parameters

all: Specifies all the QoS profiles.

name profile-name: Specifies a QoS profile name, a string of 1 to 32 characters and starting with
English letters [a-z, A-Z].
interface interface-type interface-number: Specifies a port by its type and number.
user user-name: Specifies a user by its name, a string of 1 to 80 characters.

Description

Use the display qos-profile command to display the configuration of a QoS profile or all the QoS
profiles.

Examples

# Display the configuration of QoS profile a123.

<Sysname> display qos-profile name a123
qos-profile: a123, 3 actions
traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000 rule 0 640
packet-filter inbound ip-group 2000 rule 0
traffic-priority inbound ip-group 2000 rule 1 cos video

# Display the configuration of the QoS profile applied to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1, assuming that the QoS
profile has been applied to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 manually.
<Sysname> display qos-profile interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
User's qos-profile applied mode: user-based
Default applied qos-profile: a123, 3 actions
traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000 rule 0 640
packet-filter inbound ip-group 2000 rule 0
traffic-priority inbound ip-group 2000 rule 1 cos video

Table 2-1 display qos-profile command output description

Field Description
Name of the QoS profile and the number of actions
qos-profile: a123, 3 actions
configured in the QoS profile
traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000 rule 0 Limit the rate of the incoming packets matching rule 0 of
640 ACL 2000 to 640 kbps
packet-filter inbound ip-group 2000 rule
Filter the incoming packets matching rule 0 of ACL 2000
0

2-2
Field Description
Set the 802.1p precedence of the incoming packets
traffic-priority inbound ip-group 2000
matching rule 0 of ACL 4000 to video (that is, 802.1p
rule 0 cos video
precedence 5)
The QoS profile is dynamically applied and the application
mode could be:
z User-based
User's qos-profile applied mode
z Port-based
For detailed information about the two application modes,
refer to the corresponding operation manual.
“Default” indicates that the QoS profile named a123 is
Default applied qos-profile: a123, 3
applied to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 manually. The QoS
actions
profile contains three actions.

packet-filter

Syntax

packet-filter inbound acl-rule

undo packet-filter inbound acl-rule

View

QoS profile view

Parameters

inbound: Filters the incoming packets.

Description

Use the packet-filter command to add the packet filtering action to a QoS profile.
Use the undo packet-filter command to remove the packet filtering action from a QoS profile.
Refer to the ACL module for the detailed information about packet filtering.

Examples

# Add the packet filtering action to QoS profile a123 to filter the incoming packets matching ACL 4000.
(For how to create and configure a Layer 2 ACL, refer to the ACL module of this manual.)
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] qos-profile a123
[Sysname-qos-profile-a123] packet-filter inbound link-group 4000

qos-profile

Syntax

qos-profile profile-name
2-3
undo qos-profile profile-name

View

System view

Parameters

profile-name: QoS profile name, a string of 1 to 32 characters and starting with English letters [a-z, A-Z].
Note that a QoS profile name cannot be all, interface, user, undo, or name.

Description

Use the qos-profile command to create a QoS profile and enter QoS profile view. If the QoS profile
already exists, this command leads you to the corresponding QoS profile view.
Use the undo qos-profile command to remove a QoS profile.
A QoS profile currently applied to a port cannot be removed.

Examples

# Create a QoS profile named a123.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] qos-profile a123
[Sysname-qos-profile-a123]

qos-profile port-based

Syntax

qos-profile port-based
undo qos-profile port-based

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the qos-profile port-based command to configure the QoS profile application mode on a port to
be port-based.
Use the undo qos-profile port-based command to restore the default.
By default, the application mode of a QoS profile is user-based.
Note that:
z If the 802.1x authentication is MAC-based, you need to configure the QoS profile application mode
to be user-based.
z If the 802.1x authentication is port-based, you need to configure the QoS profile application mode
to be port-based.

2-4
Examples

# Configure the QoS profile application mode on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to be port-based.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] qos-profile port-based

traffic-limit

Syntax

traffic-limit inbound acl-rule target-rate [ conform con-action ] [ exceed exceed-action ]

[ meter-statistic ]
undo traffic-limit inbound acl-rule [ meter-statistic ]

View

QoS profile view

Parameters

inbound: Performs traffic policing on the incoming packets.

acl-rule: ACL rules to be used for traffic classification. The acl-rule argument can be a combination of
multiple types of ACLs. For more information about the acl-rule argument, refer to Table 1-14 and Table
1-15. Note that the ACL rules referenced must be configured with the permit keyword.
target-rate: Rate limit (in kbps) of traffic policing. This argument is in the range 1 to 10000000.
conform con-action: Sets the actions of the switch on the packets except forwarding when the packet
traffic is within the specified traffic. The con-action argument can be:
z remark-dscp dscp-value: Sets the DSCP value for the packets. The dscp-value argument is in the
range 0 to 63. You can also enter a keyword listed in Table 1-17 for this argument.
z remark-cos cos-value : Sets the 802.1p precedence of the packets. The cos-value argument is in
the range 0 to 7. You can also enter a keyword listed in Table 1-32 for this argument.
exceed exceed-action: Sets the actions on the part of the packets exceeding the specified traffic when
the packet traffic exceeds the specified traffic. The actions include:
z drop: Drops the packets.
z forward: Forwards the packets.
z remark-dscp dscp-value: Resets the DSCP value for the packets and forwards them at the same
time. The dscp-value argument is in the range 0 to 63. You can also enter a keyword listed in Table
1-17 for this argument.
z remark-cos cos-value: Resets the 802.1p precedence for the packets and forwards them at the
same time. The cos-value argument is in the range 0 to 7. You can also enter a keyword listed in
Table 1-32 for this argument.
meter-statistic: Performs the statistics function specific to traffic policing. It can meter the bytes of the
packets within the limited rate and the bytes of the packets beyond the limited rate.

Description

Use the traffic-limit command to add the traffic policing action to a QoS profile.

2-5
Use the undo traffic-limit command to remove the traffic policing action from a QoS profile.
The traffic policing action of a QoS profile currently applied to a port cannot be removed.

Examples

# Add traffic policing action to the QoS profile named “a123” to limit the rate of the incoming packets
matching ACL 2000 to 128 kbps and drop the packets exceeding 128 kbps. (For how to create and
configure a basic ACL, refer to the ACL module of this manual.)
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] qos-profile a123
[Sysname-qos-profile-a123] traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000 128 exceed drop

traffic-priority

Syntax

traffic-priority inbound acl-rule { dscp dscp-value | cos cos-value }

undo traffic-priority inbound acl-rule

View

QoS profile view

Parameters

inbound: Performs priority marking on the incoming packets.

Description

Use the traffic-priority command to add a priority marking action to a QoS profile.
Use the undo traffic-priority command to remove a priority marking action from a QoS profile.
The priority marking action of a QoS profile currently applied to a port cannot be removed.

Examples

# Add the priority marking action to the QoS profile named a123 to set the 802.1p precedence value of
the incoming packets matching ACL 4000 to 1. (For how to create and configure a Layer 2 ACL, refer to
the ACL module of this manual.)
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] qos-profile a123
[Sysname-qos-profile-a123] traffic-priority inbound link-group 4000 cos 1

2-6
Table of Contents

1 Mirroring Commands ································································································································1-1

Mirroring Commands·······························································································································1-1
display mirroring-group····················································································································1-1
mirroring-group ································································································································1-2
mirroring-group mirroring-mac·········································································································1-3
mirroring-group mirroring-port ·········································································································1-4
mirroring-group mirroring-vlan·········································································································1-5
mirroring-group monitor-port ···········································································································1-6
mirroring-group reflector-port ··········································································································1-6
mirroring-group remote-probe vlan··································································································1-7
mirroring-port ···································································································································1-8
monitor-port ·····································································································································1-9
remote-probe vlan enable ·············································································································1-10

i
1 Mirroring Commands

Mirroring Commands
display mirroring-group

Syntax

display mirroring-group { group-id | all | local | remote-destination | remote-source }

View

Any view

Parameters

group-id: Specifies the mirroring group of which the configurations are to be displayed. The argument
takes a value in the range of 1 to 20.
all: Specifies to display the parameter settings of all mirroring groups.
local: Specifies to display the parameter settings of local port mirroring groups.
remote-destination: Specifies to display the parameter settings of the destination groups for remote
mirroring.
remote-source: Specifies to display the parameter settings of the source groups for remote mirroring.

Description

Use the display mirroring-group command to display port mirroring configurations.

Related commands: mirroring-group mirroring-port, mirroring-group monitor-port.

Examples

# Display the configurations of a local mirroring group on your Switch 4200G series.
<Sysname> display mirroring-group 1
mirroring-group 1:
type: local
status: active
mirroring port:
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 both
mirroring mac:
mirroring vlan:
monitor port: GigabitEthernet1/0/2

# Display the configurations of a remote source mirroring group on your Switch 4200G series.
<Sysname> display mirroring-group 2
mirroring-group 2:
type: remote-source
status: active

1-1
mirroring port:
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 inbound
mirroring mac:
mirroring vlan:
reflector port: GigabitEthernet1/0/2
remote-probe vlan: 10

# Display the configurations of a remote destination mirroring group on your Switch 4200G series.
<Sysname> display mirroring-group 3
mirroring-group 3:
type: remote-destination
status: active
monitor port: GigabitEthernet1/0/3
remote-probe vlan: 20

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display mirroring-group command

Field Description
mirroring-group Port mirroring group number.
Port mirroring group type, which can be local, remote-source,
type
or remote-destination.
Status of the port mirroring group, which can be active or
status
inactive.
Source port in port mirroring. This field is available only for
mirroring port
local mirroring groups or remote source mirroring groups.

The direction of the mirrored packets, which can be one of the

following:
z both: means packets received on and sent from the
both/inbound/outbound mirroring port are mirrored.
z Inbound: means packets received on the mirroring port are
mirrored.
z outbound: means packets sent from the mirroring port are
mirrored.
The specified MAC address and VLAN ID for MAC-based
mirroring mac
mirroring
mirroring vlan The specified VLAN ID for VLAN-based mirroring
Destination port. This field is available only for local mirroring
monitor port
groups and remote destination mirroring groups.
Reflector port. This field is available only for remote source
reflector port
mirroring groups.
Remote probe VLAN. This field is available only for remote
remote-probe vlan
source/destination mirroring groups.

mirroring-group

Syntax

mirroring-group group-id { local | remote-destination | remote-source }

undo mirroring-group { group-id | all | local | remote-destination | remote-source }

1-2
View

System view

Parameters

group-id: Number of a port mirroring group, in the range 1 to 20.

all: Specifies to remove all mirroring groups.
local: Specifies the mirroring group as a local port mirroring group.
remote-destination: Specifies the mirroring group as the destination mirroring group for remote port
mirroring.
remote-source: Specifies the mirroring group as the source mirroring group for remote port mirroring.

Description

Use the mirroring-group command to create a port mirroring group.

Use the undo mirroring-group command to remove a port mirroring group.
The mirroring group you created can take effect only after you configure other parameters for it.
Note that, a Switch 4200G supports configuring only one destination port in local port mirroring or one
reflector port in remote port mirroring. That is, on a Switch 4200G, there can be only one effective local
mirroring group or one effective remote source mirroring group. The two mirroring groups cannot
coexist.
Related commands: display mirroring-group.

Examples

# Create a port mirroring group on the local switch.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 local

mirroring-group mirroring-mac

Syntax

mirroring-group group-id mirroring-mac mac vlan vlan-id

undo mirroring-group group-id mirroring-mac [ [ mac ] vlan vlan-id ]

View

System view

Parameters

group-id: Number of a port mirroring group, in the range 1 to 20.

mac: Specified MAC address, in the format of H-H-H. The MAC address must be a static one existing in
the MAC address table.
vlan vlan-id: Specifies the VLAN to which the static MAC address belongs.

1-3
Description

Use the mirroring-group mirroring-mac command to configure the MAC-based mirroring for a local or
remote source mirroring group.
Use the undo mirroring-group mirroring-mac command to remove the configuration.

Examples

# Configure MAC-based mirroring to mirror packets whose source/destination MAC addresses match
000f-e20f-0101 to port GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 on the local device.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mac-address static 000f-e20f-0101 interface Gigabitethernet 1/0/1 vlan 2
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 local
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 mirroring-mac 000f-e20f-0101 vlan 2
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 monitor-port GigabitEthernet 1/0/2

mirroring-group mirroring-port

Syntax

mirroring-group group-id mirroring-port mirroring-port-list { both | inbound | outbound }

undo mirroring-group group-id mirroring-port mirroring-port-list

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

group-id: Number of a port mirroring group, in the range 1 to 20.

mirroring-port mirroring-port-list: Specifies a list of source ports. mirroring-port-list is available in
system view only, and there is no such argument in Ethernet port view. mirroring-port-list is provided in
the format of mirroring-port-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ] }&<1-8>, where interface-type is the port type, and interface-number is the port
number, and &<1-8> means that you can specify up to 8 ports or port lists.
both: Specifies to mirror the packets received on and sent from the source mirroring port.
inbound: Specifies to mirror the packets received on the source mirroring port.
outbound: Specifies to mirror the packets sent from the source mirroring port.

Description

Use the mirroring-group mirroring-port command to configure the source ports for a local mirroring
group or a remote source mirroring group.
Use the undo mirroring-group mirroring-port command to remove the source ports of a local
mirroring group or a remote source mirroring group.
Note that:
z You cannot configure a member port of an existing mirroring group as a source port for port
mirroring.
z Before configuring a mirroring source port, make sure that the corresponding mirroring group has
already been created.

1-4
z A copy of each packet passing through a source port will be sent to the corresponding destination
port.
Related commands: display mirroring-group.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 as the source port of local mirroring group 1, and mirror all packets
received on this port.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 local
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 mirroring-port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 inbound

mirroring-group mirroring-vlan

Syntax

mirroring-group group-id mirroring-vlan vlan-id inbound

undo mirroring-group group-id mirroring-vlan [ vlan-id inbound ]

View

System view

Parameters

group-id: Number of a port mirroring group, in the range 1 to 20.

mirroring-vlan vlan-id: Specifies a VLAN. The vlan-id argument ranges from 1 to 4094. The specified
VLAN must be an existing VLAN on the device.
inbound: Specifies to mirror packets received on all ports of the VLAN.

Description

Use the mirroring-group mirroring-vlan command to configure the VLAN-based mirroring for a local
or remote source mirroring group.
Use the undo mirroring-group mirroring-vlan command to remove the configuration.
You can monitor packets of multiple VLANs by executing the mirroring-group mirroring-vlan
command for several times.

Examples

# Configure VLAN-based mirroring to mirror packets received on all ports in VLAN 2 to port
GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 on the local device.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 local
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 mirroring-vlan 2 inbound
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 monitor-port GigabitEthernet 1/0/2

1-5
mirroring-group monitor-port

Syntax

mirroring-group group-id monitor-port monitor-port

undo mirroring-group group-id monitor-port monitor-port

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

group-id: Number of a port mirroring group, in the range 1 to 20.

monitor-port monitor-port: Specifies the destination port for port mirroring. monitor-port is available in
system view only, and there is no such argument in Ethernet port view.

Description

Use the mirroring-group monitor-port command to configure the destination port for a local mirroring
group or a remote destination mirroring group.
Use the undo mirroring-group monitor-port to remove the destination port of a local mirroring group
or a remote destination mirroring group.
Note that:
z You cannot configure a member port of an existing mirroring group, a member port of an
aggregation group, or a port enabled with LACP or STP as the destination port.
z Before configuring a destination port for a local mirroring group, make sure that the corresponding
mirroring group has already been created.
z It is recommended that you use a destination port for port mirroring purpose only. Do not use a
destination port to transmit other service packets.
Related commands: display mirroring-group.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 as the destination port of local mirroring group 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 local
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 monitor-port GigabitEthernet 1/0/4

mirroring-group reflector-port

Syntax

mirroring-group group-id reflector-port reflector-port

undo mirroring-group group-id reflector-port reflector-port

View

System view, Ethernet port view

1-6
Parameters

group-id: Number of a port mirroring group, in the range 1 to 20.

reflector-port reflector-port: Specifies the reflector port. reflector-port is available in system view only,
and there is no such argument in Ethernet port view.

Description

Use the mirroring-group reflector-port command to specify the reflector port for a remote source
mirroring group.
Use the undo mirroring-group reflector-port command to remove the reflector port of a remote
source mirroring group.
Note the following when you configure the reflector port:
z The reflector port cannot be a member port of an existing mirroring group, a member port of an
aggregation group, or a port enabled with LACP or STP. It must be an access port and cannot be
configured with functions like VLAN-VPN, port loopback detection, port security, and so on.
z It is recommended that you use a reflector port for port mirroring purpose only.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 as the reflector port of remote source mirroring group 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 remote-source
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 reflector-port GigabitEthernet 1/0/2

mirroring-group remote-probe vlan

Syntax

mirroring-group group-id remote-probe vlan remote-probe-vlan-id

undo mirroring-group group-id remote-probe vlan remote-probe-vlan-id

View

System view

Parameters

group-id: Number of a port mirroring group, in the range 1 to 20.

remote-probe vlan remote-probe-vlan-id: Specifies the remote-probe VLAN for the mirroring group.

Description

Use the mirroring-group remote-probe vlan command to specify the remote-probe VLAN for a
remote source/destination mirroring group.
Use the undo mirroring-group remote-probe vlan command to remove the configuration of
remote-probe VLAN for a remote source/destination mirroring group.
Note that, before configuring a VLAN as the remote-probe VLAN for a remote source/destination
mirroring group, you need to use the remote-probe vlan enable command to configure the VLAN as a
remote-probe VLAN first.
Related commands: display mirroring-group, remote-probe vlan enable.

1-7
Examples

# Configure VLAN 100 as the remote-probe VLAN of remote source mirroring group 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan 100
[Sysname-vlan100] remote-probe vlan enable
[Sysname-vlan100] quit
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 remote-source
[Sysname] mirroring-group 1 remote-probe vlan 100

mirroring-port

Syntax

mirroring-port { both | inbound | outbound }

undo mirroring-port

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

both: Specifies to mirror all packets received on and sent from the port.
inbound: Specifies to mirror the packets received on the port.
outbound: Specifies to mirror the packets sent from the port.

Description

Use the mirroring-port command to configure the source port in Ethernet port view.
Use the undo mirroring-port command to remove the configuration of the source port in Ethernet port
view.
Note that:
You cannot configure a member port of an existing mirroring group as a source port for port mirroring.
Related commands: display mirroring-group.

When you configure mirroring source port on an Ethernet port of a Switch 4200G, if mirroring group 1
does not exist, the switch will automatically create local mirroring group 1 and add the source port to the
group; if mirroring group 1 already exists, but is not a local mirroring group, your configuration of the
source port will fail.

Examples

# In Ethernet port view, configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 as the source port, and mirror all packets
received on and sent from this port.

1-8
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] mirroring-port both

monitor-port

Syntax

monitor-port
undo monitor-port

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the monitor-port command to configure the destination port in Ethernet port view.
Use the undo monitor-port command to remove the configuration of the destination port in Ethernet
port view.
Note that:
z You cannot configure a member port of an aggregation group, a member port of an aggregation
group, or a port enabled with LACP and STP as the mirroring destination port.
z It is recommended that you use a destination port for port mirroring purpose only. Do not use a
destination port to transmit other service packets.
Related commands: display mirroring-group.

When you configure mirroring destination port on an Ethernet port of a Switch 4200G, if mirroring group
1 does not exist, the switch will automatically create local mirroring group 1 and add the destination port
to the group; if mirroring group 1 already exists, but is not a local mirroring group, your configuration of
the destination port will fail.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 as a destination port in Ethernet port view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/4
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/4] monitor-port

1-9
remote-probe vlan enable

Syntax

remote-probe vlan enable

undo remote-probe vlan enable

View

VLAN view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the remote-probe vlan enable command to configure the current VLAN as the remote-probe
VLAN.
Use the undo remote-probe vlan enable command to restore the remote-probe VLAN to a normal
VLAN.
Note that:
z You cannot configure a default VLAN, a management VLAN, or a dynamic VLAN as the
remote-probe VLAN.
z A remote-probe VLAN cannot be removed directly. To do that, you need to run the undo
remote-probe vlan enable command in VLAN view first.
Related commands: mirroring-group remote-probe vlan.

Examples

# Configure VLAN 5 as the remote-probe VLAN.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan 5
[Sysname-vlan5] remote-probe vlan enable

1-10
Table of Contents

1 ARP Configuration Commands················································································································1-1

ARP Configuration Commands···············································································································1-1
arp check enable ·····························································································································1-1
arp static ··········································································································································1-1
arp timer aging·································································································································1-2
display arp ·······································································································································1-3
display arp | ·····································································································································1-4
display arp count ·····························································································································1-5
display arp timer aging ····················································································································1-5
gratuitous-arp-learning enable ········································································································1-6
reset arp ··········································································································································1-7

2 ARP Attack Defense Configuration Commands·····················································································2-1

ARP Attack Defense Configuration Commands ·····················································································2-1
arp anti-attack valid-check enable···································································································2-1
arp detection enable ························································································································2-1
arp detection trust····························································································································2-2
arp filter source································································································································2-2
arp filter binding ·······························································································································2-3
arp max-learning-num ·····················································································································2-4
arp protective-down recover enable ································································································2-4
arp protective-down recover interval ·······························································································2-5
arp rate-limit·····································································································································2-6
arp rate-limit enable·························································································································2-6
arp restricted-forwarding enable······································································································2-7
display arp detection statistics interface··························································································2-8
ip source static import dot1x············································································································2-8

i
1 ARP Configuration Commands

ARP Configuration Commands

arp check enable

Syntax

arp check enable

undo arp check enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the arp check enable command to enable the ARP entry checking function on a switch.
Use the undo arp check enable command to disable the ARP entry checking function.
With the ARP entry checking function enabled, the switch cannot learn any ARP entry with a multicast
MAC address. Configuring such a static ARP entry is not allowed either; otherwise, the system prompts
error information.
After the ARP entry checking function is disabled, the switch can learn the ARP entry with a multicast
MAC address, and you can also configure such a static ARP entry on the switch.
By default, the ARP entry checking function is enabled.

Examples

# Disable the ARP entry checking function.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] undo arp check enable

arp static

Syntax

arp static ip-address mac-address [ vlan-id interface-type interface-number ]

arp static ip-address mac-address vlan-id (in Ethernet port view)
undo arp ip-address

View

System view, Ethernet port view

1-1
Parameters

ip-address: IP address contained in the ARP mapping entry to be created/removed.

mac-address: MAC address contained in the ARP mapping entry to be created, in the format of H-H-H.
vlan-id: ID of the VLAN to which the static ARP entry belongs, in the range of 1 to 4,094.
interface-type: Type of the port to which the static ARP entry belongs.
interface-number: Number of the port to which the static ARP entry belongs.

Description

Use the arp static command to create a static ARP entry.

Use the undo arp command to remove an ARP entry.
By default, the system ARP mapping table is empty and the address mapping entries are obtained by
ARP dynamically.
Note that:
z Static ARP entries are valid as long as the Ethernet switch operates normally. But some operations,
such as removing a VLAN, or removing a port from a VLAN, will make the corresponding ARP
entries invalid and therefore removed automatically.
z As for the arp static command, the value of the vlan-id argument must be the ID of an existing
VLAN, and the port identified by the interface-type and interface-number arguments must belong to
the VLAN.
z Currently, static ARP entries cannot be configured on the ports of an aggregation group.
Related commands: reset arp, display arp.

Examples

# Create a static ARP mapping entry, with the IP address of 202.38.10.2, the MAC address of
000f-e20f-0000. The ARP mapping entry belongs to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 which belongs to VLAN 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] arp static 202.38.10.2 000f-e20f-0000 1 GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

arp timer aging

Syntax

arp timer aging aging-time

undo arp timer aging

View

System view

Parameters

aging-time: Aging time (in minutes) of the dynamic ARP entries. This argument ranges from 1 to 1,440.

Description

Use the arp timer aging command to configure the aging time for dynamic ARP entries.
Use the undo arp timer aging command to restore the default.

1-2
By default, the aging time for dynamic ARP entries is 20 minutes.
Related commands: display arp timer aging.

Examples

# Configure the aging time to be 10 minutes for dynamic ARP entries.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] arp timer aging 10

display arp

Syntax

display arp [ dynamic | static | ip-address ]

View

Any view

Parameters

dynamic: Displays dynamic ARP entries.

static: Displays static ARP entries.
ip-address: IP address. ARP entries containing the IP address are to be displayed.

Description

Use the display arp command to display specific ARP entries.

If you execute this command with no keyword/argument specified, all the ARP entries are displayed.
Related commands: arp static, reset arp.

Examples

# Display all the ARP entries.

<Sysname> display arp
Type: S-Static D-Dynamic
IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Name / AL ID Aging Type
10.2.72.162 000a-000a-0aaa N/A N/A N/A S
192.168.0.77 0000-e8f5-6a4a 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 13 D
192.168.0.2 000d-88f8-4e88 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 14 D
192.168.0.200 0014-222c-9d6a 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 14 D
192.168.0.45 000d-88f6-44c1 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 15 D
192.168.0.110 0011-4301-991e 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 15 D
192.168.0.32 0000-e8f5-73ee 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 16 D
192.168.0.3 0014-222c-aa69 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 16 D
192.168.0.17 000d-88f6-379c 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 17 D
192.168.0.115 000d-88f7-9f7d 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 18 D
192.168.0.43 000c-760a-172d 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 18 D
192.168.0.33 000d-88f6-44ba 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 20 D
192.168.0.35 000f-e20f-2181 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 20 D
192.168.0.5 000f-3d80-2b38 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 20 D

1-3
--- 14 entries found ---

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display arp command

Field Description
IP Address IP address contained in an ARP entry
MAC Address MAC address contained in an ARP entry
VLAN ID ID of the VLAN which an ARP entry corresponds to
Port Name / AL ID Port which an ARP entry corresponds to
Aging time (in minutes) of an ARP entry
Aging
N/A is displayed for static ARP entries.
Type Type of an ARP entry: D for dynamic, and S for static.

display arp |

Syntax

display arp [ dynamic | static] | { begin | exclude | include } regular-expression

View

Any view

Parameters

dynamic: Displays dynamic ARP entries.

static: Displays static ARP entries.
|: Uses a regular expression to specify the ARP entries to be displayed. For detailed information about
regular expressions, refer to Configuration File Management Command in this manual.
begin: Displays the first ARP entry containing the specified string and all subsequent ARP entries.
exclude: Displays the ARP entries that do not contain the specified string.
include: Displays the ARP entries containing the specified string.
regular-expression: A case-sensitive character string.

Description

Use the display arp | command to display the ARP entries related to string in a specified way.
Related commands: arp static, reset arp.

Examples

# Display all the ARP entries that contain the string 77.
<Sysname> display arp | include 77
Type: S-Static D-Dynamic
IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Name / AL ID Aging Type
192.168.0.77 0000-e8f5-6a4a 1 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 12 D

--- 1 entry found ---

1-4
# Display all the ARP entries that do not contain the string 68.
<Sysname> display arp | exclude 68
Type: S-Static D-Dynamic
IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Name / AL ID Aging Type
10.2.72.162 000a-000a-0aaa N/A N/A N/A S

--- 1 entry found ---

Refer to Table 1-1 for the description on the above output information.

display arp count

Syntax

display arp count [ [ dynamic | static ] [ | { begin | exclude | include } regular-expression ] |

ip-address ]

View

Any view

Parameters

dynamic: Counts the dynamic ARP entries.

static: Counts the static ARP entries.
|: Uses a regular expression as the match criterion. For detailed information about regular expressions,
refer to Configuration File Management Command in this manual.
begin: Displays the number of ARP entries counted from the first one containing the specified string.
exclude: Displays the number of ARP entries that do not contain the specified string.
include: Displays the number of ARP entries containing the specified string.
regular-expression: A case-sensitive character string.
ip-address: IP address. The ARP entries containing the IP address are to be displayed.

Description

Use the display arp count command to display the number of the specified ARP entries. If no
parameter is specified, the total number of ARP entries is displayed.
Related commands: arp static, reset arp.

Examples

# Display the total number of ARP entries.

<Sysname> display arp count
14 entries found

display arp timer aging

Syntax

display arp timer aging

1-5
View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display arp timer aging command to display the setting of the ARP aging time.
Related commands: arp timer aging.

Examples

# Display the setting of the ARP aging time.

<Sysname> display arp timer aging
Current ARP aging time is 20 minute(s)(default)

The displayed information shows that the ARP aging time is set to 20 minutes.

gratuitous-arp-learning enable

Syntax

gratuitous-arp-learning enable
undo gratuitous-arp-learning enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the gratuitous-arp-learning enable command to enable the gratuitous ARP packet learning
function. Then, a switch receiving a gratuitous ARP packet can add the IP and MAC addresses carried
in the packet to its own dynamic ARP table if it finds no corresponding ARP entry for the ARP packet in
the cache.
Use the undo gratuitous-arp-learning enable command to disable the gratuitous ARP packet
learning function.
By default, the gratuitous ARP packet learning function is enabled.

Examples

# Enable the gratuitous ARP packet learning function on a switch.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] gratuitous-arp-learning enable

1-6
reset arp

Syntax

reset arp [ dynamic | static | interface interface-type interface-number ]

View

User view

Parameters

dynamic: Clears dynamic ARP entries.

static: Clears static ARP entries.
interface interface-type interface-number: Clears ARP entries of the specified port.

Description

Use the reset arp command to clear specific ARP entries.

Related commands: arp static, display arp.

Examples

# Clear static ARP entries.

<Sysname> reset arp static

1-7
2 ARP Attack Defense Configuration Commands

ARP Attack Defense Configuration Commands

arp anti-attack valid-check enable

Syntax

arp anti-attack valid-check enable

undo arp anti-attack valid-check enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the arp anti-attack valid-check enable command to enable ARP source MAC address
consistency check.
Use the undo arp anti-attack valid-check enable command to disable this function.
By default, ARP source MAC address consistency check is disabled.

Examples

# Enable ARP source MAC address consistency check.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] arp anti-attack valid-check enable

arp detection enable

Syntax

arp detection enable

undo arp detection enable

View

VLAN view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the arp detection enable command to enable the ARP attack detection function on all ports in the
specified VLAN. When receiving an ARP packet from a port in this VLAN, the switch will check the

2-1
source IP address, source MAC address, number of the receiving port, and the VLAN of the port. If the
mapping of the source IP address and source MAC address is not included in the DHCP snooping
entries or IP static binding entries, or the number of the receiving port and the VLAN of the port do not
match the DHCP snooping entries or IP static binding entries, the ARP packet will be discarded.
Use the undo arp detection enable command to disable the ARP attack detection function on all ports
in the specified VLAN.
By default, ARP attack detection is disabled on the switch.

Examples

# Enable ARP attack detection on all ports in VLAN 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan 1
[Sysname-vlan1] arp detection enable

arp detection trust

Syntax

arp detection trust

undo arp detection trust

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the arp detection trust command to specify the current port as a trusted port, that is, ARP packets
received on this port are regarded as legal ARP packets and will not be checked.
Use the undo arp detection trust command to specify the current port as an untrusted port in ARP
detection.
By default, a port is an untrusted port in ARP detection.

Examples

# Specify GigabitEthernet 1/0/11 as the trusted port in ARP detection.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/11
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/11] arp detection trust

arp filter source

Syntax

arp filter source ip-address

undo arp filter source
2-2
View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address of the gateway.

Description

Use the arp filter source command to configure ARP packet filtering based on the gateway’s IP
address on the current port working as the downstream port connected to a host. After that, ARP
packets from the host with the gateway’s IP address as the sender IP address are considered invalid
and discarded.
Use the undo arp filter source command to remove the configuration.
By default, ARP packet filtering based on the gateway’s IP address is disabled.
Note that:
z This command should be configured on a port directly connected to hosts.
z If you execute this command repeatedly, the last configured command takes effect.

Examples

# Configure ARP packet filtering based on the gateway’s IP address 192.168.0.1/24 on GigabitEthernet
1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] arp filter source 192.168.0.1

arp filter binding

Syntax

arp filter binding ip-address mac-address

undo arp filter binding

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address of the gateway.

mac-address: MAC address of the gateway.

Description

Use the arp filter binding command to configure ARP packet filtering based on the gateway’s IP and
MAC addresses on the current port. After that, the port will discard ARP packets with the gateway’s IP
address as the sender IP address but with the sender MAC address different from that of the gateway.
Use the undo arp filter binding command to remove the configuration.
By default, ARP packet filtering based on the gateway’s IP and MAC addresses are disabled.
Note that:

2-3
z This command should be configured on a cascaded port or upstream port of an access switch.
z If you execute this command repeatedly, the last configured command takes effect.

Examples

# Configure ARP packet filtering based on the gateway’s IP address 192.168.100.1/24 and MAC
address 000d-88f8-528c on GigabitEthernet 1/0/2.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] interface gigabitethernet1/0/2
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] arp filter binding 192.168.100.1 000d-88f8-528c

arp max-learning-num

Syntax

arp max-learning-num number

undo arp max-learning-num

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] arp protective-down recover enable
[Sysname] arp protective-down recover interval 30

arp rate-limit

Syntax

arp rate-limit rate

undo arp rate-limit

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

rate: Maximum ARP packet receiving rate on the port, in the range of 10 to 1,024 pps.

Description

Use the arp rate-limit command to specify the maximum ARP packet receiving rate on the port. If a rate
is specified, exceeding packets will be discarded.
Use the undo arp rate-limit command to restore the default.
By default, after a port is enabled with the ARP packet rate limit function, the maximum ARP packet
receiving rate on the port is 15 pps.
Note that:
You must enable the ARP packet rate limit function before you can specify the maximum ARP packet
receiving rate on the port by using the arp rate-limit command.

Examples

# Set the maximum ARP packet receiving rate on GigabitEthernet 1/0/11 to 100 pps.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/11
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/11] arp rate-limit enable
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/11] arp rate-limit 100

arp rate-limit enable

Syntax

arp rate-limit enable

undo arp rate-limit enable

View

Ethernet port view

2-6
Parameters

None

Description

Use the arp rate-limit enable command to enable the ARP packet rate limit function on the port, that is,
to limit the rate of ARP packets passing through the port. If a rate (the maximum ARP packet rate is 15
pps by default) is specified, exceeding ARP packets will be discarded.
Use the undo arp rate-limit enable command to disable the ARP packet rate limit function on the port.
By default, the ARP packet rate limit function is disabled, that is, ARP packet rate is not limited on a port.

Examples

# Enable the ARP packet rate limit function on GigabitEthernet 1/0/11.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/11
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/11] arp rate-limit enable

arp restricted-forwarding enable

Syntax

arp restricted-forwarding enable

undo arp restricted-forwarding enable

View

VLAN view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the arp restricted-forwarding enable command to enable ARP restricted forwarding so that the
legal ARP requests received from the specified VLAN are forwarded through configured trusted ports
only, and the legal ARP responses are forwarded according to the MAC addresses in the packets, or
through trusted ports if the MAC address table contains no such destination MAC addresses.
Use the undo arp restricted-forwarding enable command to disable ARP restricted forwarding.
By default, ARP restricted forwarding is disabled.
Related commands: arp detection enable, arp detection trust

Syntax

# Enable ARP restricted forwarding in VLAN 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan 1
[Sysname-vlan1] arp restricted-forwarding enable

2-7
display arp detection statistics interface

Syntax

display arp detection statistics interface interface-type interface-number

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Type and number of a port.

Description

Use the display arp detection statistics interface command to display the statistics of ARP attack
detection state, ARP trusted port state, and discarded invalid ARP packets ( those failed to pass ARP
attack detection) on the specified port.
If ARP attack detection is disabled, the statistics of ARP trusted port state and discarded invalid ARP
packets will not be displayed.

Examples

# Display ARP detection statistics on GigabitEthernet 1/0/10.

<Sysname> display arp detection statistics interface gigabitethernet1/0/10
ARP DETECTION : ENABLE
ARP PORT TRUST : DISABLE
INVALID ARP PACKETS : 31

Table 2-1 Description on the fields of the display arp detection statistics interface command

Field Description
ARP DETECTION ARP attack detection state: enabled/disabled
ARP PORT TRUST ARP trusted port state: enabled/disabled
Number of discarded invalid ARP packets (those failed to pass
INVALID ARP PACKETS
ARP attack detection)

ip source static import dot1x

Syntax

ip source static import dot1x

undo ip source static import dot1x

View

System view

Parameters

None

2-8
Description

Use the ip source static import dot1x command to enable ARP attack detection based on IP-to-MAC
mappings of authenticated 802.1x clients. Enabled with this function, switch records mappings between
IP addresses (both static and dynamic IP addresses) and MAC addresses of authenticated 802.1x
clients and uses the mappings for ARP attack detection after IP-to-MAC static bindings and DHCP
snooping entries are checked.
Use the undo ip source static import dot1x command to disable the function.
By default, this function is disabled.
Note that this command should be used in cooperation with the arp detection enable command.

Examples

# Enable the switch to record IP-to-MAC bindings of authenticated 802.1x clients.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] ip source static import dot1x

2-9
Table of Contents

1 Stack Function Configuration Commands······························································································1-1

Stack Function Configuration Commands ······························································································1-1
display stacking ·······························································································································1-1
stacking ···········································································································································1-2
stacking enable································································································································1-3
stacking ip-pool································································································································1-4

2 Cluster Configuration Commands ···········································································································2-1

NDP Configuration Commands···············································································································2-1
display ndp ······································································································································2-1
ndp enable·······································································································································2-3
ndp timer aging································································································································2-4
ndp timer hello ·································································································································2-4
reset ndp statistics···························································································································2-5
NTDP Configuration Commands ············································································································2-6
display ntdp ·····································································································································2-6
display ntdp device-list ····················································································································2-7
ntdp enable······································································································································2-8
ntdp explore·····································································································································2-9
ntdp hop···········································································································································2-9
ntdp timer·······································································································································2-10
ntdp timer hop-delay······················································································································2-11
ntdp timer port-delay······················································································································2-12
Cluster Configuration Commands·········································································································2-12
add-member ··································································································································2-12
administrator-address····················································································································2-13
auto-build·······································································································································2-14
build ···············································································································································2-16
cluster ············································································································································2-18
cluster enable ································································································································2-18
cluster switch-to·····························································································································2-19
cluster-local-user ···························································································································2-20
cluster-mac ····································································································································2-21
cluster-mac syn-interval·················································································································2-22
cluster-snmp-agent community ·····································································································2-22
cluster-snmp-agent group v3·········································································································2-23
cluster-snmp-agent mib-view included ··························································································2-25
cluster-snmp-agent usm-user v3···································································································2-26
delete-member ······························································································································2-27
display cluster································································································································2-28
display cluster candidates ·············································································································2-29
display cluster members················································································································2-31
ftp cluster ·······································································································································2-33

i
ftp-server ·······································································································································2-34
holdtime ·········································································································································2-35
ip-pool ············································································································································2-35
logging-host ···································································································································2-36
management-vlan··························································································································2-37
management-vlan synchronization enable····················································································2-37
nm-interface Vlan-interface ···········································································································2-38
reboot member ······························································································································2-39
snmp-host······································································································································2-40
tftp get············································································································································2-40
tftp put············································································································································2-41
tftp-server ······································································································································2-42
timer···············································································································································2-43
tracemac········································································································································2-43
Enhanced Cluster Feature Configuration Commands ··········································································2-44
black-list·········································································································································2-44
display cluster base-members·······································································································2-45
display cluster base-topology ········································································································2-46
display cluster black-list·················································································································2-47
display cluster current-topology·····································································································2-48
display ntdp single-device mac-address ·······················································································2-49
topology accept ·····························································································································2-51
topology restore-from ····················································································································2-52
topology save-to ····························································································································2-52

ii
1 Stack Function Configuration Commands

The Switch 4200G series switches can form a stack only when connected through interfaces on 10 GE
stack boards.

Stack Function Configuration Commands

display stacking

Syntax

display stacking [ members ]

View

Any view

Parameter

members: Displays the information about the members of a stack. Do not specify this keyword when
you execute this command on a slave switch.

Description

Use the display stacking command to display the information about the main switch or the slave
switches of a stack.
When you execute this command on a main switch, the information displayed depends on the
members keyword as follows:
z If the members keyword is not specified, the output information indicates that the local switch is the
main switch. Besides, the number of the switches contained in the stack is also displayed.
z If the members keyword is specified, the information about the members of the stack is displayed,
including the stack numbers of the main/slave switches, stack name, stack device name, MAC
address and status.
When you execute this command on a slave switch, the information displayed indicates that the local
switch is a slave switch. Besides, the information such as the stack number of the local switch, and the
MAC address of the main switch in the stack is also displayed.

Example

# Display the information about a stack on the main switch.

<stack_0.Sysname> display stacking

1-1
Main device for stack.
Total members:3
Management-vlan:1(default vlan)

# Display the information about the stack members on the main switch.
<stack_0.Sysname> display stacking members
Member number: 0
Name:stack_0.Sysname
Device: Switch 4200G PWR 24-Port
MAC Address:000f-e20f-3124
Member status:Admin
IP: 129.10.1.15 /16

Member number: 1
Name:stack_1.Sysname
Device: Switch 4200G PWR 24-Port
MAC Address: 000f-e200-3130
Member status:Up
IP: 129.10.1.16/16

Member number: 2
Name:stack_2.Sysname
Device: Switch 4200G PWR 24-Port
MAC Address: 000f-e200-3135
Member status:Up
IP: 129.10.1.17/16

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display stacking command

Field Description
Numbers of the switches in the stack
Member number
The main switch is numbered 0.

Name Name of a slave switch

Device Device type
MAC Address Mac address of a switch in the stack

Status of a switch in the stack

Member status “Cmdr” indicates the switch is the main switch;
“UP” indicates the switch is on.
IP: 129.10.1.15/16 IP address of a switch in the stack

stacking

Syntax

stacking number

1-2
View

User view

Parameter

number: Number of the slave switch to switch to.

Description

Use the stacking command to switch to a slave switch to configure it.

You can use this command to switch from user view of the main switch to user view of a slave switch. To
switch from a slave switch back to the main switch, execute the quit command in user view.

Remove the IP address configured for the existing Layer 3 interface first if you want to cancel the
stack-related configuration, otherwise, IP address conflicts may occur.

Example

# Switch from the main switch to the slave switch numbered 1 and then switch back to the main switch.
<stack_0.Sysname> stacking 1
<stack_1.Sysname>
<stack_1.Sysname> quit
<stack_0.Sysname>

stacking enable

Syntax

stacking enable
undo stacking enable

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the stacking enable command to create a stack.

Use the undo stacking enable command to remove a stack.
The stacking enable command triggers a main switch to add the switches connected to its stack ports
to the stack.
The undo stacking enable command can only be executed on a main switch.
A slave switch quits the stack automatically when it is disconnected from the stack.

1-3
Example

# Create a stack.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] stacking enable
[stack_0.Sysname] quit
<stack_0.Sysname>

stacking ip-pool

Syntax

stacking ip-pool from-ip-address ip-address-number [ ip-mask ]

undo stacking ip-pool

View

System view

Parameter

from-ip-address: Start address of the stack IP address pool.

ip-address-number: Number of the IP addresses in the stack IP address pool. A stack IP address pool
contains 16 addresses by default.
ip-mask: Mask of the stack IP address.

Description

Use the stacking ip-pool command to create a stack IP address pool.

Use the undo stacking ip-pool command to restore the default stack IP address pool.
You need to create an IP address pool for a stack before creating the stack. When adding a switch to a
stack, the main switch picks an IP address from the IP address pool and assigns the IP address to it.
The stacking ip-pool command can only be executed on switches that do not belong to any stack. That
is, the IP address pool of an existing stack cannot be modified.
To add a switch to a stack successfully, make sure the value of the ip-address-number argument is
larger than the number of switches currently contained in the stack.
Make sure the IP addresses in the IP address pool of a stack are successive so that they can be
assigned successively. For example, the IP addresses in an IP address pool with its start IP address
something like 223.255.255.254 are not successive. In this case, errors may occur when adding a
switch to the stack.
IP addresses in the IP address pool of a stack must be of the same network segment. For example, the
1.1.255.254 is not a qualified start address for a stack IP address pool.
Note the following when performing stack-related configurations on the main switch of a stack:
z After a stack is created, the main switch automatically adds the switches connected to its stack
ports to the stack.
z A slave switch quits the stack automatically when it is disconnected from the stack.
z If the IP address of the management VLAN interface of the main switch (or a slave switch) is not of
the same network segment as that of the stack address pool, the main switch (or the slave switch)

1-4
automatically removes the existing IP address and picks a new one from the stack address pool as
its IP address.

Example

# Configure the IP address pool for the stack.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] stacking ip-pool 129.10.1.1 5

1-5
2 Cluster Configuration Commands

NDP Configuration Commands

display ndp

Syntax

display ndp [ interface interface-list ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface interface-list: Specifies a port list. You need to provide the interface-list argument in the form
of { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where to is used to
specify a port range, and &<1-10> means that you can provide up to ten port indexes/port index ranges
for this argument. The interface-number argument is in the format of unit ID/slot number/port number.

Description

Use the display ndp command to display all NDP configuration and operating information, including
the global NDP status, the interval to send NDP packets, the holdtime of NDP information, and the NDP
status and neighbor information on all ports.
If executed with the interface keyword, the display ndp command will display the NDP status of the
specified interfaces and the related information of the peer device. If executed without the interface
keyword, the command will display the global NDP configuration information and the statistics on NDP
packets received on and sent by each port.

Examples

# Display all NDP configuration and operating information.

<aaa_0.Sysname> display ndp
Neighbor Discovery Protocol is enabled.
Neighbor Discovery Protocol Ver: 1, Hello Timer: 60(s), Aging Timer: 180(s)
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 0, Pkts Rvd: 0, Pkts Err: 0
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/2
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 3044, Pkts Rvd: 3042, Pkts Err: 0
Neighbor 1: Aging Time: 161(s)
MAC Address : 000f-e200-5111
Host Name : Sysname
Port Name : GigabitEthernet1/0/36
Software Ver: 3Com OS V3.02.00s56
Device Name : Switch 4200G 48-Port

2-1
Port Duplex : AUTO
Product Ver : 4200G
BootROM Ver : 2.00
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/3
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 0, Pkts Rvd: 0, Pkts Err: 0
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/4
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 0, Pkts Rvd: 0, Pkts Err: 0
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/5
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 0, Pkts Rvd: 0, Pkts Err: 0
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/6
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 0, Pkts Rvd: 0, Pkts Err: 0

……(Omitted)
# Display NDP information about GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<aaa_0.Sysname> display ndp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 3047, Pkts Rvd: 3045, Pkts Err: 0
Neighbor 1: Aging Time: 129(s)
MAC Address : 000f-e200-5111
Host Name : Sysname
Port Name : GigabitEthernet1/0/36
Software Ver: 3Com OS V3.02.00s56
Device Name : Switch 4200G 48-Port
Port Duplex : AUTO
Product Ver : 4200G
BootROM Ver : 2.00

Table 2-1 Description on the fields of the two commands

Field Description
Neighbor Discovery Protocol is enabled NDP is enabled globally on the switch.
Neighbor Discovery Protocol Ver: 1 NDP version 1 is running.
Interval for the switch to send NDP packets,
Hello Timer which is configured through the ndp timer hello
command
Holdtime for neighbors to keep the NDP
Aging Timer information of the switch, which is configured
through the ndp timer aging command
Interface Port index, used to identify a port
Status NDP state on the port (enabled/disabled)
Pkts Snd: Number of NDP packets sent by the port

Pkts Rvd: Number of NDP packets received by the port

Number of error NDP packets received by the
Pkts Err:
port
Holdtime for this switch to keep the NDP
Neighbor 1: Aging Time
information of the neighbor connected to the port
MAC Address MAC address of the neighbor device

2-2
Field Description
Port name Port name of the neighbor device
Software Ver Software version of the neighbor device
Device Name Device name of the neighbor device
Port (full/half) duplex mode of the neighbor
Port Duplex
device
Product Ver Product version of the neighbor device

ndp enable

Syntax

ndp enable [ interface interface-list ]

undo ndp enable [ interface interface-list ]

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

interface-list: Ethernet port list, in the format of { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type

interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where to is used to specify a port range, and &<1-10> means that you
can provide up to ten port indexes/port index ranges for this argument. The interface-number argument
is in the format of unit ID/slot number/port number.

Description

Use the ndp enable command to enable NDP globally or on a port.

Use the undo ndp enable command to disable NDP globally or on a port.
If you execute the ndp enable command in system view without the interface keyword specified, NDP
will be enabled globally; if you specify the interface keyword in the command, NDP will be enabled on
the specified ports. In Ethernet port view, the interface keyword is unavailable, and execution of the
command will enable NDP on the current port only.
By default, NDP is enabled both globally and on ports.
Note that NDP can take effect on a port only when NDP is enabled both globally and on the port.

Examples

# Enable NDP globally, and then enable NDP on port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ndp enable
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ndp enable

2-3
ndp timer aging

Syntax

ndp timer aging aging-in-seconds

undo ndp timer aging

View

System view

Parameters

aging-in-seconds: Holdtime of the NDP information, ranging from 5 to 255 seconds.

Description

Use the ndp timer aging command to set the holdtime of the NDP information. This command
specifies how long an adjacent device should hold the NDP neighbor information received from the
local switch before discarding the information.
Use the undo timer aging command to restore the default holdtime of NDP information.
By default, the holdtime of NDP information is 180 seconds.
You can specify how long the adjacent devices should hold the NDP information received from the local
switch. When an adjacent device receives an NDP packet from the local switch, it learns how long it
should keep the NDP information of the switch according to the holdtime carried in the NDP packet, and
discards the NDP information when the holdtime expires.
Note that NDP information holdtime should be longer than the interval between sending NDP packets.
Otherwise, a neighbor entry will be generated and age out frequently, resulting in instability of the NDP
port neighbor table.

Examples

# Set the holdtime of the NDP information sent by the switch to 60 seconds.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ndp timer aging 60

ndp timer hello

Syntax

ndp timer hello timer-in-seconds

undo ndp timer hello

View

System view

Parameters

timer-in-seconds: Interval between sending NDP packets, ranging from 5 to 254 seconds.

2-4
Description

Use the ndp timer hello command to set the interval between sending NDP packets.
Use the undo ndp timer hello command to restore the default interval.
By default, this interval is 60 seconds.
A switch should update the NDP information of its neighbors regularly, so that the switch can get the
updated information of the neighbors in time. You can use the ndp timer hello command to specify the
interval at which the switch sends hello packets to its neighbors for NDP information update.
Note that NDP information holdtime should be longer than the interval between sending NDP packets.
Otherwise, a neighbor entry will be generated and age out frequently, resulting in instability of the NDP
port neighbor table.

Examples

# Set the interval between sending NDP packets to 80 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ndp timer hello 80

reset ndp statistics

Syntax

reset ndp statistics [ interface interface-list ]

View

User view

Parameters

interface-list: Ethernet port list, in the format of { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type

Description

Use the reset ndp statistics command to clear the NDP statistics on specific ports. When executing
the command, if you specify the interface keyword, the command will clear NDP statistics on the
specified ports; if you do not specify the interface keyword, the command will clear NDP statistics on all
ports.
You can use the display ndp command to view the NDP statistics before and after the execution of the
reset ndp statistics command to verify the execution result.

Examples

# Display the NDP statistics on port GigabitEthernet 1/0/6.

<Sysname> display ndp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/6
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/6
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 1, Pkts Rvd: 2, Pkts Err: 0

# Clear the NDP statistics on port GigabitEthernet 1/0/6.

2-5
<Sysname> reset ndp statistics interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/6

# Re-display the NDP statistics on port GigabitEthernet 1/0/6.

<Sysname> display ndp interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/6
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/6
Status: Enabled, Pkts Snd: 0, Pkts Rvd: 0, Pkts Err: 0

NTDP Configuration Commands

display ntdp

Syntax

display ntdp

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ntdp command to display the global NTDP information.
The displayed information includes topology collection range (hop count), topology collection interval
(NTDP timer), device/port forwarding delay of topology collection requests, and time used by the last
topology collection.

Examples

# Display the global NTDP information.

<Sysname> display ntdp
NTDP is running.
Hops : 4
Timer : 0 min(disable)
Hop Delay : 100 ms
Port Delay: 10 ms
Last collection total time: 92ms

Table 2-2 Description on the fields of the display ntdp command

Field Description
NTDP is running. NTDP is enabled globally on this device.
Hop count for topology collection, which is
Hops
configured through the ntdp hop command
Interval to collect topology information, which is
configured through the ntdp timer command
Timer "disable" means this switch is not a management
device and does not perform periodic topology
collection.

2-6
Field Description
Delay for other devices to forward topology
Hop Delay collection requests, which is configured through
the ntdp timer hop-delay command
Delay for ports on other devices to forward
Port Delay topology collection requests, which is configured
through the ntdp timer port-delay command
Last collection total time Time used by the last topology collection

display ntdp device-list

Syntax

display ntdp device-list [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameters

verbose: Displays the detailed information of devices in a cluster.

Description

Use the display ntdp device-list command to display the cluster device information collected by
NTDP.

Examples

# Display the list of devices collected by NTDP.

<Sysname> display ntdp device-list
MAC HOP IP PLATFORM
000f-e20f-3901 0 100.100.1.1/24 4200G 12-Port
000f-e20f-3190 1 16.1.1.1/24 4200G 24-Port

Table 2-3 Description on the fields of the display ntdp device-list command

Field Description
MAC MAC address of a device collected by NTDP

HOP Hops from this device to the collected device

IP address and mask length of the management
IP
VLAN interface on the collected device
PLATFORM Platform information about the collected device

# Display detailed device information collected by NTDP.

<Sysname> display ntdp device-list verbose

Hostname : test_0.4200G
MAC : 00e0-fc00-5200

2-7
Hop : 0
Platform : 4200G 12-Port
IP : 192.168.0.91/16
Version :
3Com Versatile Routing Platform Software
Comware Software, Version 3Com OS V3.02.01s168
Copyright (c) 2004-2008 3Com Corporation and its licensors, All rights reserved.
Switch 4200G 12-Port 4200G

Cluster : Administrator switch of cluster test

Stack : Candidate switch

Peer MAC Peer Port ID Native Port ID Speed Duplex

00e0-fc02-2180 GigabitEthernet1/0/9 GigabitEthernet1/0/5 100 FULL
00e0-fc00-5104 GigabitEthernet1/0/16 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 1000 FULL

Table 2-4 Description on the fields of display ntdp device-list verbose

Field Description
Hostname System name of a device collected by NTDP
MAC MAC address of the collected device
Hop Hops from this device to the collected device
Platform Software platform of the collected device
IP address and mask length of the cluster
IP management VLAN interface on the collected
device
Version Software version of the collected device
Cluster The role of the collected device for the cluster
MAC address of a neighbor device connected to
Peer MAC
the collected device
Index of the port on the neighbor device
Peer Port ID
connected to the collected device
Index of the port on the collected device
Native Port ID
connected to the neighbor device
Speed Speed of the neighbor device port

Duplex Duplex mode of the neighbor device port

ntdp enable

Syntax

ntdp enable
undo ntdp enable

View

System view, Ethernet port view

2-8
Parameters

None

Description

Use the ntdp enable command to enable NTDP globally or on a port.

Use the undo ntdp enable command to disable NTDP globally or on a port.
By default, NTDP is enabled both globally and on ports.
Note that NTDP can take effect on a port only when NTDP is enabled both globally and on the port.

Examples

# Enable NTDP globally, and then enable NTDP on port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ntdp enable
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ntdp enable

ntdp explore

Syntax

ntdp explore

View

User view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the ntdp explore command to manually start a topology collection process.
NTDP is able to periodically collect topology information. In addition, you can use this command to
manually start a topology collection process at any moment. If you do this, NTDP collects NDP
information from all devices in a specific network range (which can be set through the ntdp hop
command) as well as the connection information of all its neighbors. Through this information, the
management device or the network management software knows the topology in the network range,
and thus it can manage and monitor the devices in the range.

Examples

# Start a topology collection process.

<Sysname> ntdp explore

ntdp hop

Syntax

ntdp hop hop-value

2-9
undo ntdp hop

View

System view

Parameters

hop-value: Maximum hops to collect topology information, namely, the topology collection range, in the
range of 1 to 16.

Description

Use the ntdp hop command to set the topology collection range.
Use the undo ntdp hop command to restore the default topology collection range.
By default, the topology collection range is three hops.
With the ntdp hop command, you can specify to collect topology information from the devices within a
specified range to avoid infinite collection. That is, you can limit the range of topology collection by
setting the maximum hops from the collecting device to the collected devices. For example, if you set
the maximum hops to two, the switch initiating the topology collection collects topology information from
the switches within two hops.
Note that:
z The topology collection range set by this command is applicable to both the periodic and manual
topology collection.
z This command is only applicable to topology-collecting device, and a wider collection range
requires more memory of the topology-collecting device.

Examples

# Set the topology collection range to 5 hops.

<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] ntdp hop 5

ntdp timer

Syntax

ntdp timer interval-in-minutes

undo ntdp timer

View

System view

Parameters

interval-in-minutes: Interval (in minutes) to collect topology information, ranging from 0 to 65,535. A
value of 0 disables topology information collection.

Description

Use the ntdp timer command to configure the interval to collect topology information periodically.

2-10
Use the undo ntdp timer command to restore the default interval.
By default, this interval is one minute.
After the interval is set to a non-zero value, the switch will collect topology information periodically at this
interval. You can also use the ndp explore command to start a topology collection process manually.
Note that:
z Only the management switch can collect topology periodically, and a member switch cannot.
However, you can use the ndp explore command on the member switch to start a topology
collection process manually.
z After a cluster is set up, the management switch will collect the topology information of the network
at the topology collection interval you set and automatically add the candidate switches it discovers
into the cluster.
z If you do not want the candidate switches to be automatically added into the cluster, you can set the
topology collection interval to zero, and use the add-member command to add the candidate
switches to the cluster manually.

Examples

# Set the topology collection interval to 30 minutes.

<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] ntdp timer 30

ntdp timer hop-delay

Syntax

ntdp timer hop-delay time

undo ntdp timer hop-delay

View

System view

Parameters

time: Device forwarding delay in milliseconds. This argument ranges from 1 to 1,000.

Description

Use the ntdp timer hop-delay command to set the delay for devices to forward topology collection
requests.
Use the undo ntdp timer hop-delay command to restore the default device forwarding delay.
By default, the device forwarding delay is 200 ms.
Network congestion may occur if large amount of topology response packets reach the collecting
device in a short period. To avoid this case, each collected switch in the network delays for a period
before it forwards a received topology collection request through each NTDP-enabled port.
You can use the ntdp timer hop-delay command to set the delay on a collecting switch. The delay
value you set by the command is carried in the topology collection requests sent by the collecting switch,
and is used by collected devices to determine how long they should wait before they can forward the
received topology collection requests.

2-11
Examples

# Set the delay for collected switches to forward topology collection requests to 300 ms.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] ntdp timer hop-delay 300

ntdp timer port-delay

Syntax

ntdp timer port-delay time

undo ntdp timer port-delay

View

System view

Parameters

time: Port forwarding delay in milliseconds. This argument ranges from 1 to 100.

Description

Use the ntdp timer port-delay command to configure the topology request forwarding delay between
two ports, that is, the interval at which the device forwards the topology requests through the
NTDP-enabled ports one after another.
Use the undo ntdp timer port-delay command to restore the default port forwarding delay.
By default, the port forwarding delay is 20 ms.
Network congestion may occur if large amount of topology response packets reach the collecting
device in a short period. To avoid this case, after a collected switch forwards a received topology
collection request through a port, it delays for a period before it forwards the request through the next
port. You can use the ntdp timer port-delay command to set the delay.
You can use the command on a collecting switch. The delay value you set by the ntdp timer port-delay
command is carried in the topology collection requests sent by the collecting switch, and is used by
collected devices to determine the topology collection request forwarding delay between two ports.

Examples

# Set the port forwarding delay for collected switches to forward NTDP requests to 40 ms.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] ntdp timer port-delay 40

Cluster Configuration Commands

add-member

Syntax

add-member [ member-number ] mac-address H-H-H [ password password ]

2-12
View

Cluster view

Parameters

member-number: Member number assigned to the candidate device to be added to the cluster. This
argument ranges from 1 to 255.
H-H-H: MAC address of the candidate device to be added (in hexadecimal).
password: Super password of the candidate device, a string of 1 to 256 characters. Password
authentication is required when you add a candidate device to a cluster. If the input password is not
consistent with the super password configured on the candidate device (through the super password
command, refer to the CLI part of the manual), you cannot add the candidate device to the cluster. If a
candidate device is not configured with a super password, you can add it to the cluster without providing
the password argument).

Description

Use the add-member command to add a candidate device to the cluster.

You can only use this command on the management device of a cluster.
If you do not specify the member number when adding a new cluster member, the management device
assigns the next available member number to the new member. If you want to specify the member
manually, you need to specify a number that is never used by a member device of the cluster.
After you add a candidate device to the cluster, the super password of the device automatically changes
to the super password of the management device. If the management device changes its super
password, the member devices will automatically synchronize their super passwords to the new super
password of the management device.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] cluster
[Sysname-cluster] auto-build
There is no base topology, if set up from local flash file?(Y/N)
n

Please input cluster name:aaa

Collecting candidate list, please wait...

#Apr 2 07:18:05:357 2000 aaa_0.4200G CLST/5/Cluster_Trap:- 1 -

OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.43.45.1.6.7.1.0.3(hgmpMemberStatusChange):member
00.00.00.00.00.e0.fc.00.51.00 role change, NTDPIndex:0.00.00.00.00.00.e0.fc.00.51.00,
Role:1
Candidate list:

Name Hops MAC Address Device

4200G 2 0016-e0c0-c201 4200G 12-Port
4200G 2 000f-e221-616e 4200G 24-Port
4200G 2 000f-e202-2180 4200G 12-Port
SwitchA 2 0016-e0be-e200 4200G 48-Port
4500 3 000f-e200-1774 4500 26-Port
5500 2 000f-e200-5300 5500-EI 28-Port
4500 3 000f-e200-5104 4500 50-Port

2-15
4200G 2 000f-e200-2420 4200G 12-Port
Processing...please wait
%Apr 3 08:12:37:813 2000 aaa_0.Sysname CLST/5/LOG:- 1 -
Member 000f-e200-2200 is joined in cluster aaa.

%Apr 3 08:12:37:831 2000 aaa_0.Sysname CLST/5/LOG:- 1 -

Member 000f-e200-0000 is joined in cluster aaa.

%Apr 3 08:12:37:847 2000 aaa_0.Sysname CLST/5/LOG:- 1 -

Member 000f-e200-7800 is joined in cluster aaa.

%Apr 3 08:12:37:863 2000 aaa_0.Sysname CLST/5/LOG:- 1 -

Member 000f-e200-2420 is joined in cluster aaa.

%Apr 3 08:12:37:996 2000 aaa_0.Sysname CLST/5/LOG:- 1 -

Member 000f-e202-2180 is joined in cluster aaa.

%Apr 3 08:12:38:113 2000 aaa_0.Sysname CLST/5/LOG:- 1 -

Member 0016-e0c0-c201 is joined in cluster aaa.

%Apr 3 08:12:38:139 2000 aaa_0.Sysname CLST/5/LOG:- 1 -

Member 000f-e200-5104 is joined in cluster aaa.

%Apr 3 08:12:38:367 2000 aaa_0.Sysname CLST/5/LOG:- 1 -

Member 000f-e200-5300 is joined in cluster aaa.

Cluster auto-build Finish!

8 member(s) added successfully.
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster]

build

Syntax

build name
undo build

View

Cluster view

Parameters

name: Name to be set for the cluster, a string of up to 8 characters, which can only be alphanumeric
characters, minus signs (-), and underscores (_).

Description

Use the build command to build a cluster with a cluster name or change the cluster name.
Use the undo build command to remove the cluster.
You can use this command on a candidate device as well as on a management device.
2-16
Executing the build command on a candidate device will change the device to a management device
and assign a name to the cluster created on the device, and the member number of the management
device is 0.
Executing the build command on a management device will change the cluster name.
Different from the auto-build command, the build command only builds a cluster on the management
device, which will not immediately collect the topology information to add the candidate devices into the
cluster, but wait for an interval (configured through the ntdp timer command) before it starts the
topology collection.

To reduce the risk of being attacked by malicious users against opened socket and enhance switch
security, the Switch 4200G series Ethernet switches provide the following functions, so that a cluster
socket is opened only when it is needed:
z Opening UDP port 40000 (used for cluster) only when the cluster function is implemented,
z Closing UDP port 40000 at the same time when the cluster function is closed.
On the management device, the preceding functions are implemented as follows:
z When you create a cluster by using the build or auto-build command, UDP port 40000 is opened
at the same time.
z When you remove a cluster by using the undo build or undo cluster enable command, UDP port
40000 is closed at the same time.
On member devices, the preceding functions are implemented as follows:
z When you execute the add-member command on the management device to add a candidate
device to a cluster, the candidate device changes to a member device and its UDP port 40000 is
opened at the same time.
z When you execute the auto-build command on the management device to have the system
automatically add candidate devices to a cluster, the candidate devices change to member devices
and their UDP port 40000 is opened at the same time.
z When you execute the administrator-address command on a device, the device's UDP port
40000 is opened at the same time.
z When you execute the delete-member command on the management device to remove a
member device from a cluster, the member device's UDP port 40000 is closed at the same time.
z When you execute the undo build command on the management device to remove a cluster, UDP
port 40000 of all the member devices in the cluster is closed at the same time.
z When you execute the undo administrator-address command on a member device, UDP port
40000 of the member device is closed at the same time.

Examples

# Configure the current switch as a management device and set the cluster name to aaa.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] cluster
[Sysname-cluster] build aaa
There is no base topology, if set up from local flash file?(Y/N)

2-17
n
#Apr 2 07:27:21:280 2000 aaa_0.4200G CLST/5/Cluster_Trap:- 1 -
OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.43.45.1.6.7.1.0.3(hgmpMemberStatusChange):member
00.00.00.00.00.e0.fc.00.51.00 role change, NTDPIndex:0.00.00.00.00.00.e0.fc.00.51.00,
Role:1
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster]

cluster

Syntax

cluster

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the cluster command to enter cluster view.

Examples

# Enter cluster view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] cluster
[Sysname-cluster]

cluster enable

Syntax

cluster enable
undo cluster enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the cluster enable command to enable the cluster function.

Use the undo cluster enable command to disable the cluster function.
By default, the cluster function is enabled.
Note that:

2-18
z To create a cluster on a management device through the build command or the auto-build
command, you must first enable the cluster function by executing the cluster enable command.
z When you execute the undo cluster enable command on the management device, the cluster
function is disabled on the device, and the device stops operating as a management device, and
the cluster and all its members are removed.
z When you execute the undo cluster enable command on a member device, the cluster function is
disabled on the device, and the device leaves the cluster.
z When you execute undo cluster enable command on a device that does not belong to any cluster,
the cluster function is disabled on the device, and thus you cannot create a cluster on the device or
add the device to an existing cluster.

Examples

# Enable the cluster function on the switch.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] cluster enable

cluster switch-to

Syntax

cluster switch-to { member-number | mac-address H-H-H | administrator | sysname sysname }

View

User view

Parameters

member-number: Member number of a member device, ranging from 1 to 255.

mac-address H-H-H: Specifies the MAC address of a member device.
administrator: Switches back from the member device to the management device.
sysname sysname: Specifies the system name of a member device, sysname is a string of 1 to 30
characters.

Description

Use the cluster switch-to command to switch between the management device and a member device
for configuration and management.
On the management device, you can switch to the view of a member device to configure and manage
the member device, and then switch back to the management device.
Both switching directions (from the management device to a member device, and from a member
device to the management device) will use Telnet connection. Switching is performed based on the
following rules:
z Both switching directions will perform authentication. In a switching process, the system will
authenticate the level-3 super password. If the super password on the device that requests the
switching is inconsistent with that on the requested device, the switching fails. When a candidate
device joins the cluster, its super password will automatically synchronize to the supper password
on the management device (this is not true when you add the candidate device to the cluster using
the administrator-address command). It is recommended not to change the super password of
2-19
any cluster member or the management device, so as to avoid switching failure resulting from
authentication failure.
z After you switch from the management device to a member device, the member device view will
inherit the user privilege level of the current management device view.
z After you switch from a member device to the management device, the privilege level on the
management device view will be determined by the configuration on the management device.
z If all the Telnet resources on the requested device are used up, the switching to the device will not
succeed.
When you execute this command on the management device with an inexistent member number or a
MAC address that is not in the member list, an error will occur. In this case, you can enter quit to end the
switching.

Examples

# Switch from the management device to number-6 member device and then switch back to the
management device.
<aaa_0.Sysname> cluster switch-to 6
<aaa_6.Sysname> quit
<aaa_0.Sysname>

cluster-local-user

Syntax

cluster-local-user username password { cipher | simple } password

undo cluster-local-user username

View

Cluster view

Parameters

username: Name of the public local user for the cluster, a string of 1 to 55 characters.
cipher: Cipher text password.
simple: Plain text password.
password: Password of the public local user for the cluster. If the password is in cipher text, the value is
a string of 1 to 63 characters; if the password is in plain text, the value is a string of 1 to 63 characters or
a string of 88 characters.

Description

Use the cluster-local-user command to create a public local user for the cluster. The username and
password are used to manage all member devices through Web.
Use the undo cluster-local-user command to remove all public local user configurations for the
cluster.
By default, no public local user is configured for the cluster.
z You can use this command only on the management device to create only one public local user.
z When you configure this command on the management device, the configuration will be
synchronized to the member devices that have passed the authentication; when a new member

2-20
device passes the authentication, this configuration is synchronized to the new member
automatically. If a user with the same name already exists, the new configuration will overwrite the
old one.
z If a member device leaves the cluster, the public local user configurations will not be removed.

Examples

# On the management device, create a public local user for the cluster: the username is public; the
password is 123 in plain text.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] cluster-local-user public password simple 123

cluster-mac

Syntax

cluster-mac H-H-H
undo cluster-mac

View

Cluster view

Parameters

H-H-H: Multicast MAC address to be set for the cluster, in hexadecimal format. This argument can be
one of the following addresses: 0180-C200-0000, 0180-C200-000A, 0180-C200-0020 to
0180-C200-002F.

Description

Use the cluster-mac command to configure a multicast destination MAC address for HGMPv2 protocol
packets.
Use the undo cluster-mac command to restore the default multicast destination MAC address of
HGMPv2 protocol packets.
The default multicast destination MAC address of HGMPv2 protocol packets is 0180-C200-000A.
Note that you can only use this command on a management device.
With the destination MAC address of HGMPv2 protocol packets configured on the management device,
through the multicast MAC synchronization packets, the member devices can learn the multicast MAC
address of HGMPv2 protocol packets and use it to send NDP multicast packets, NTDP multicast
packets, and cluster packets.
Since some devices cannot forward the multicast packets with the destination MAC address of
0180-C200-000A, HGMPv2 packets cannot traverse these devices. For a cluster to work normally in
this case, you can modify the multicast destination MAC address of HGMPv2 protocol packets without
changing the current networking.
Related commands: cluster-mac syn-interval.

2-21
Examples

# Configure multicast MAC address 0180-C200-0028 for HGMPv2 protocol packets.

<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] cluster-mac 0180-C200-0028

cluster-mac syn-interval

Syntax

cluster-mac syn-interval time-interval

View

Cluster view

Parameters

time-interval: Interval to send multicast MAC synchronization packets, ranging from 0 to 30 minutes.

Description

Use the cluster-mac syn-interval command to set the interval for the management device to send
HGMP V2 multicast MAC synchronization packets periodically. You can only use this command on a
management device.
By default, this interval is one minute.
HGMPv2 multicast MAC synchronization packets are used for synchronizing the HGMPv2 multicast
MAC address configuration (configured through the cluster-mac command) between devices in a
cluster, so that HGMPv2 protocol packets can be forwarded normally within the cluster. HGMPv2
multicast MAC synchronization packets are Layer 2 multicast packets.
If you set this interval to zero on a management device, the management device will not send HGMP V2
multicast MAC synchronization packets to other devices.
Related commands: cluster-mac.

Examples

# Set the interval for the management device to send HGMP V2 multicast MAC synchronization packets
to one minute.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] cluster-mac syn-interval 1

cluster-snmp-agent community

Syntax

cluster-snmp-agent community { read | write } community-name [ mib-view view-name ]

undo cluster-snmp-agent community community-name

2-22
View

Cluster view

Parameters

read: Indicates that the community has read-only access right to management information base (MIB)
objects, that is, an SNMP network management station (NMS) can only query MIBs for device
information when it uses this community name to access the agent.
write: Indicates that the community has read-write access right to MIB objects, that is, an SNMP NMS is
capable of configuring the devices when it uses this community name to access the agent.
community-name: Community name, a string of 1 to 27 characters.
view-name: MIB view name, a string of 1 to 32 characters. The default view is ViewDefault.

Description

Use the cluster-snmp-agent community command to create a public SNMP community for the
cluster.
Use the undo cluster-snmp-agent community command to remove the configuration.
By default, no public SNMP community is configured for a cluster.
z You can use this command only in cluster view on the management device to create only one
public community for the cluster.
z When you configure this command on the management device, the configuration is synchronized
to the member devices that have passed the authentication; when a new member device passes
the authentication, this configuration is synchronized to the new member automatically. If a
community with the same name already exists, the new configuration will overwrite the old one.
z If a member device leaves the cluster, the synchronized SNMP configurations will not be removed.

For the SNMP configurations, refer to the SNMP-RMON Operation part in this manual.

Examples

# On the management device, create a public SNMP community with the name of access, allowing
read-only access right using this community name.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] cluster-snmp-agent community read access

cluster-snmp-agent group v3

Syntax

cluster-snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ] [ read-view read-view ]

[ write-view write-view ] [ notify-view notify-view ]
undo cluster-snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ]

2-23
View

Cluster view

Parameters

v3: SNMPv3.
group-name: Group name, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
authentication: Specifies the security model of the SNMP group as authentication only (without
privacy).
privacy: Specifies the security model of the SNMP group as authentication and privacy.
read-view read-view: Read view, a string of 1 to 32 characters. The default read view is ViewDefault.
write-view write-view: Write view, a string of 1 to 32 characters. By default, no write view is configured,
namely, the NMS cannot perform the write operations to all MIB objects on the device.
notify-view notify-view: Notify view, for sending traps, a string of 1 to 32 characters. By default, no
notify view is configured, namely, the agent does not send traps to the NMS.

Description

Use the cluster-snmp-agent group v3 command to create a public SNMP group for a cluster. This
configuration is effective to all cluster members that have passed the authentication.
Use the undo cluster-snmp-agent group v3 command to remove the public SNMP group for the
cluster.
By default, no public SNMP group is configured for a cluster.
z You can use this command only in cluster view on the management device to create only one
public group for the cluster.
z When you configure this command on the management device, the configuration is synchronized
to the member devices that have passed the authentication; when a new member device passes
the authentication, this configuration is synchronized to the new member automatically. If a group
with the same name already exists, the new configuration will overwrite the old one.
z If a member device leaves the cluster, the synchronized SNMP configurations will not be removed.

For the SNMP configurations, refer to the SNMP-RMON Operation part in this manual.

Examples

# Create a public SNMP group with the name of snmpgroup.

<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] cluster-snmp-agent group v3 snmpgroup

2-24
cluster-snmp-agent mib-view included

Syntax

cluster-snmp-agent mib-view included view-name oid-tree

undo cluster-snmp-agent mib-view view-name

View

Cluster view

Parameters

view-name: View name, a string of 1 to 32 characters. The default view is ViewDefault.

oid-tree: MIB subtree, identified by the OID of the subtree root node or the name of the subtree root
node. The value is a string of 1 to 255 characters.
included: Indicates that all nodes of the MIB tree are included in the current view.

Description

Use the cluster-snmp-agent mib-view command to create or update the public MIB view information
for the cluster.
Use the undo cluster-snmp-agent mib-view command to remove the current configuration.
By default, public MIB view for the cluster is ViewDefault. When you access the device through the
ViewDefault view, you can access all the MIB objects of the iso subtree with the OID of 1.
z You can use this command only in cluster view on the management device to create only one
public MIB view for the cluster.
z When you configure this command on the management device, the configuration is synchronized
to the member devices that have passed the authentication; when a new member device passes
the authentication, this configuration is synchronized to the new member automatically. This
configuration is effective to all cluster members that have passed the authentication.
z If a member device leaves the cluster, the synchronized SNMP configurations will not be removed.

For the SNMP configurations, refer to the SNMP-RMON Operation part in this manual.

Examples

# Create a public MIB view mib2, which includes all objects of the subtree mib-2.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] cluster-snmp-agent mib-view included mib2 1.3.6.1.2.1

2-25
cluster-snmp-agent usm-user v3

Syntax

cluster-snmp-agent usm-user v3 username groupname [ authentication-mode { md5 | sha }

authpassstring [ privacy-mode { des56 privpassstring } ] ]
undo cluster-snmp-agent usm-user v3 username groupname

View

Cluster view

Parameters

v3: SNMPv3.
username: User name, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
groupname: Group name, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
authentication-mode: Specifies the security model as authentication. If you do not provide this
keyword, the security model defaults to no authentication no privacy.
md5: Specifies the authentication protocol as MD5. MD5 generates a 128-bit message digest and it is
faster than SHA.
sha: Specifies the authentication protocol as SHA. SHA generates a 160-bit message digest and it
provides a higher security than MD5.
authpassstring: Authentication password. For a plain text password, the value is a string of 1 to 16
characters. For a cipher text password, the value is a string of 1 to 24 characters.
privacy-mode: Specifies the security model as privacy.
des56: Specifies the privacy protocol as data encryption standard (DES).
privpassstring: The privacy password. For a plain text password, the value is a string of 1 to 16
characters. For a cipher text password, the value is a string of 1 to 24 characters.

Description

Use the cluster-snmp-agent usm-user v3 command to add a new user to the public SNMPv3 group of
the cluster.
Use the undo cluster-snmp-agent usm-user v3 command to delete the public SNMPv3 user of the
cluster.
By default, no public SNMPv3 user is configured for the cluster.
z You can use this command only in cluster view on the management device to add only one public
SNMPv3 group user for the cluster.
z When you configure this command on the management device, the configuration is synchronized
to the member devices that have passed the authentication; when a new member device passes
the authentication, this configuration is synchronized to the new member automatically. If a user
with the same name already exists, the new configuration will overwrite the old one.
z If a member device leaves the cluster, the synchronized SNMP configurations will not be removed.

Examples

# Add a user wang to the SNMPv3 group huawei. Configure the security model as authentication
without privacy, the authentication protocol as MD5, the plain-text authentication password as pass.

2-26
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] cluster-snmp-agent usm-user v3 wang huawei authentication-mode md5
pass

delete-member

Syntax

delete-member member-id [ to-black-list ]

View

Cluster view

Parameters

member-id: Member number of a member device, ranging from 1 to 255.

to-black-list: Adds the device removed from a cluster to the blacklist to prevent it from being added to
the cluster.

Description

Use the delete-member command to remove a member device from the cluster.
Note that a cluster will collect the topology information at the topology collection interval. If you do not
add a device to the cluster blacklist when removing it from the cluster, the device will be added to the
cluster again when the cluster collects topology information. Therefore, to remove a device from a
cluster permanently, you can use the following methods:
z Use the delete-member command with the to-black-list keyword specified to remove a device
and add the device to the blacklist of the cluster.
z Before using the delete-member command to remove a device from the cluster, use the undo ndp
enable and undo ntdp enable command to disable NDP and NTDP on the ports of the device
which connect with the cluster member devices.

This command is applicable to management devices only.

Related commands: add-member.

Examples

# Remove the member device numbered 4 from the cluster, and add it to the cluster blacklist.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
Enter system view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] delete-member 4 to-black-list

2-27
display cluster

Syntax

display cluster

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display cluster command to display the status and statistics information of the cluster to which
the current switch belongs.
Executing this command on a member device will display the following information: cluster name,
member number of the current switch, MAC address and status of the management device, holdtime,
and interval to send handshake packets.
Executing this command on a management device will display the following information: cluster name,
number of the member devices in the cluster, cluster status, holdtime, and interval to send handshake
packets.
Executing this command on a device that does not belong to any cluster will display an error.

Examples

# Display cluster information on a management device.

<aaa_0.Sysname-cluster> display cluster
Cluster name:"aaa"
Role:Administrator
Management-vlan:100

Handshake timer:10 sec

Handshake hold-time:60 sec
IP-Pool:20.1.1.1/24
cluster-mac:0180-c200-000a
No logging host configured
No SNMP host configured
No FTP server configured
No TFTP server configured

1 administrator(s) in the cluster

2 member(s) in the cluster, 0 of them down

0 candidate(s) does not join the cluster

# Display cluster information on a member device.

[aaa_2.4200G-3] display cluster
Cluster name:"aaa"
Role:Member

2-28
Member number:2
Management-vlan:100

cluster-mac:0180-c200-000a
Handshake timer:10 sec
Handshake hold-time:60 sec

Administrator device mac address:000f-e20f-3901

Administrator status:Up

Table 2-5 Description on the fields of the display cluster command

Field Description
Name of the cluster, which can be configured
Cluster name
through the build command
Role Role of this switch
Number of the management VLAN, which can be
Management-vlan configured through the management-vlan
command
Member number Member number of this switch
Interval to send handshake packets, which can
Handshake timer
be configured through the timer command
Holdtime of the neighbor status information,
Handshake hold-time which can be configured through the holdtime
command
Administrator device mac address MAC address of the management device
Administrator status Status of the management device

display cluster candidates

Syntax

display cluster candidates [ mac-address H-H-H | verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameters

mac-address H-H-H: Specifies a candidate device by its MAC address. H-H-H represents the MAC
address.
verbose: Displays detailed information about candidate devices.

Description

Use the display cluster candidates command to display information about one specified or all
candidate devices of a cluster.
You can only use this command on a management device.

2-29
Note that, after a cluster is set up on an Switch 4200G series switch, the switch will collect the topology
information of the network at the topology collection interval you set and automatically add the
candidate devices it discovers into the cluster. As a result, if the topology collection interval is too short
(the default interval is 1 minute), the switches acting as candidate devices will not keep in candidate
state for a long time – they will change to member devices within a short time. If you do not want the
candidate switches to be automatically added into the cluster, you can set the topology collection
interval to zero (by using the ntdp timer command), which specifies not to perform topology collection
periodically.

Examples

# Display information about all candidate devices.

<aaa_0.Sysname-cluster> display cluster candidates
MAC HOP IP PLATFORM
3900-0000-3334 2 16.1.1.11/24 4200G
000f-e20f-3190 1 16.1.1.1/24 4200G

Table 2-6 Description on the fields of the display cluster candidates command

Field Description
MAC MAC address of the candidate device
Hops from the management device to the
Hop
candidate device
IP IP address of the candidate device
Platform Platform of the candidate device

# Display information about a specified candidate device.

<aaa_0.Sysname-cluster> display cluster candidates mac-address 000f-e20f-3190
Hostname : 4200G
MAC : 000f-e20f-3190
Hop : 1
Platform : 4200G 12-Port
IP : 16.1.1.1/24

# Display detailed information about all candidate devices.

<aaa_0.Sysname-cluster> display cluster candidates verbose

Hostname : Sysname
MAC : 5200-0000-3334
Hop : 2
Platform : 4200G 24-Port
IP : 16.1.1.11/24

Hostname : 4200G-1
MAC : 000f-e20f-3190
Hop : 1
Platform : 4200G 48-Port

2-30
IP : 16.1.1.1/24

Table 2-7 Description on the fields of display cluster candidates verbose

Field Description
Hostname Name of the candidate device
MAC MAC address of the candidate device
Hops from the management device to the
Hop
candidate device
IP IP address of the candidate device

Platform Platform of the candidate device

display cluster members

Syntax

display cluster members [ member-number | verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameters

member-number: Member number of a device, ranging from 0 to 255.

verbose: Displays detailed information about all the devices in a cluster.

Description

Use the display cluster members command to display information about one specific or all devices in
a cluster.
This command is only applicable to a management device.

Examples

# Display information about all devices in a cluster.

<aaa_0.Sysname-cluster> display cluster members
SN Device MAC Address Status Name
0 4200G 000f-e20f-3901 Admin aaa_0.Sysname
1 4200G 3900-0000-3334 Up aaa_1.Sysname
2 4200G 000f-e20f-3190 Up aaa_2.4200G-3

Table 2-8 Description on the fields of the display cluster members command

Field Description
SN Member number of a device in the cluster
Device Device type
MAC Address Device MAC address
Status Device status
Name Device name

2-31
# Display detailed information about all devices in a cluster.
<aaa_0.Sysname-cluster> display cluster members verbose
Member number:0
Name:aaa_0.Sysname
Device: 4200G 12-Port
MAC Address:000f-e20f-3901
Member status:Admin

Hops to administrator device:0

IP: 100.100.1.1/24
Version:

3Com Versatile Routing Platform Software

Comware Software, Version 3Com OS V3.02.01s168
Copyright (c) 2004-2008 3Com Corporation and its licensors, All rights reserved.
Switch 4200G 12-Port 4200G

Member number:1
Name:aaa_1.3Com
Device: 4200G 24-Port
MAC Address:000f-e200-3334
Member status:Up
Hops to administrator device:2
IP: 16.1.1.11/24
Version:

3Com Versatile Routing Platform Software

Comware Software, Version 3Com OS V3.02.01s168
Copyright (c) 2004-2008 3Com Corporation and its licensors, All rights reserved.
Switch 4200G 24-Port 4200G

Member number:2
Name: aaa_2.3Com
Device: 4200G 12-Port
MAC Address:000f-e20f-3190
Member status:Up
Hops to administrator device:1
IP: 16.1.1.1/24
Version:
3Com Versatile Routing Platform Software
Comware Software, Version 3Com OS V3.02.01s168
Copyright (c) 2004-2008 3Com Corporation and its licensors, All rights reserved.
Switch 4200G 12-Port 4200G

2-32
Table 2-9 Description on the fields of display cluster members verbose

Field Description
Member number Member number of the device in the cluster
Name Device name
Device Device type
MAC Address Device MAC address
Member status Device status
Hops to administrator device Hops from the device to the management device
IP Device IP address
Version Software version of the device

ftp cluster

Syntax

ftp cluster

View

User view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the ftp cluster command to connect to the shared FTP server of the cluster and enter FTP Client
view through the management device.
You can use the ftp-server command on the management device to configure the shared FTP server of
the cluster, which is used for software version update and configuration file backup of the cluster
members.
Related commands: ftp-server.

For how to access other FTP servers using the ftp command, refer to the FTP-SFTP-TFTP part of the
manual.

Examples

# Connect to the FTP server shared by the cluster.

<123_1.Sysname> ftp cluster
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort

2-33
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in.

ftp-server

Syntax

ftp-server ip-address
undo ftp-server

View

Cluster view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address of the FTP server to be configured for the cluster.

Description

Use the ftp-server command to configure a shared FTP server for the cluster on the management
device.
Use the undo ftp-server command to remove the shared FTP server setting.
By default, the management device acts as the shared FTP server of the cluster.
After you configure the IP address of the shared FTP server on the management device, the member
devices in the cluster can access the shared FTP sever through the management device to back up
configuration and download software. The IP address of the shared FTP server configured on the
management device takes effect on the management device only and will not be applied to the member
devices through the cluster management packets.
After the IP address of the shared FTP server is configured, network address translation (NAT) is
enabled on the management device immediately. When a member device uses the ftp cluster
command to access the shared FTP server, the management device will translate the private IP
address of the member device to a public network address, forward the requests of the member device
to the FTP server, and forward the responses of FTP server to the member device according to the NAT
record.

Examples

# Configure FTP server 1.0.0.9 on the management device of a cluster.

<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] ftp-server 1.0.0.9

2-34
holdtime

Syntax

holdtime seconds
undo holdtime

View

Cluster view

Parameters

seconds: Neighbor information holdtime in seconds, ranging from 1 to 255.

Description

Use the holdtime command to configure the neighbor information holdtime of the member switches.
Use the undo holdtime command to restore the default holdtime value.
By default, the neighbor information holdtime is 60 seconds.
Note that:
z If the management switch does not receive NDP information from a member device within the
holdtime, it sets the state of the member device to “down”. When the management device receives
the NDP information from the device again, the device will be re-added to the cluster automatically.
z If the management device receives NDP information form a member device within the holdtime, the
member device stays in the normal state and does not need to be added to the cluster again.
z Note that, you need only execute the command on a management device, which will advertise the
holdtime value to all member devices in the cluster.

Examples

# Set the neighbor information holdtime of the cluster members to 30 seconds.

<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] holdtime 30

ip-pool

Syntax

ip-pool administrator-ip-address { ip-mask | ip-mask-length }

undo ip-pool

View

Cluster view

Parameters

administrator-ip-address: IP address for the device to be set as the management device of a cluster.
ip-mask: Mask of the cluster IP address pool.
ip-mask-length: Mask length of the cluster IP address pool.

2-35
Description

Use the ip-pool command to configure a private IP address pool on the management device.
Use the undo ip-pool command to cancel the IP address pool configuration.
Before creating a cluster, you must first configure a private IP address pool. When a candidate device
joins a cluster, the management device dynamically assigns a private IP address in the pool to it, so that
the candidate device can communicate with other devices in the cluster. This enables the management
device to manage and maintain member devices in the cluster.
As the IP address pool of a cluster cannot be modified, be sure to execute these two commands before
a cluster is created.

Examples

# Configure a private IP address pool for a cluster.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] cluster
[Sysname-cluster] ip-pool 10.200.0.1 20

logging-host

Syntax

logging-host ip-address
undo logging-host

View

Cluster view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address of the device to be configured as the log host of a cluster.

Description

Use the logging-host command to configure a shared log host for a cluster on the management
device.
Use the undo logging-host command to remove the shared log host setting.
By default, no shared log host is configured.
After setting the IP address of a log host for the cluster, the member devices in the cluster can send logs
to the log host through the management device.
Note that you must execute the command on a management device.
For how to configure a switch to send logs to the log host, refer to Information Center Operation.

Examples

# Configure the device with IP address 10.10.10.9 as the log host of a cluster.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster

2-36
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] logging-host 10.10.10.9

management-vlan

Syntax

management-vlan vlan-id
undo management-vlan

View

System view

Parameters

vlan-id: ID of the VLAN to be specified as the management VLAN.

Description

Use the management-vlan command to specify the management VLAN on the switch.
Use the undo management-vlan command to restore the default management VLAN.
By default, VLAN 1 is used as the management VLAN.
When specifying the management VLAN, note that:
z The management VLANs on all the devices in a cluster must be the same.
z You can specify the management VLAN on a device only when no cluster is created on the device.
You cannot change the management VLAN on a device that already joins a cluster. If you want to
change the management VLAN on a device where a cluster has already been created, you must
first remove the cluster configuration on the device, then re-specify a VLAN as the management
VLAN, and finally re-created the cluster.
z The management VLAN of a cluster defaults to VLAN 1. To isolate cluster management packets
from other packets to improve the cluster information security, it is recommended to configure the
management VLAN of the cluster as another VLAN.

Examples

# Specify VLAN 2 as the management VLAN of the current switch.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] management-vlan 2

management-vlan synchronization enable

Syntax

snmp-host ip-address
undo snmp-host

View

Cluster view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address of a SNMP network management station (NMS) to be configured for the cluster.

Description

Use the snmp-host command to configure a shared SNMP NMS for the cluster on the management
device.
Use the undo snmp-host command to remove the shared SNMP NMS setting.
By default, no shared SNMP NMS is configured.
After setting the IP address of an SNMP NMS for the cluster, the member devices in the cluster can
send trap messages to the SNMP NMS through the management device.
Note that, you can only use the commands on a management device.
For how to configure a switch to send trap messages to the SNMP NMS, refer to Information Center
Operation.

Examples

# Configure SNMP NMS address 1.0.0.9 on the management device for the cluster.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] snmp-host 1.0.0.9

tftp get

Syntax

tftp { cluster | tftp-server } get source-file [ destination-file ]

View

User view

Parameters

cluster: Downloads files through the shared TFTP server of the cluster.
tftp-server: IP address or host name of the TFTP server.
source-file: Name of the file to be downloaded from the shared TFTP server of the cluster.
destination-file: Name of the file to which the downloaded file will be saved on the switch.

2-40
Description

Use the tftp get command to download a file from a specific directory on the shared TFTP server to the
switch.
You can use the tftp-server command on the management device to configure the shared TFTP server
of the cluster, which is used for software version update and configuration file backup of the cluster
members. For TFTP server rights and directory configuration, refer to the user guide of the TFTP server
software.
Related commands: tftp put, tftp-server.

z You need to specify the cluster keyword completely in the command.

z For description of other parameters of the tftp command, refer to the FTP-SFTP-TFTP part of the
manual.

Examples

# Download file LANSwitch.app from the shared TFTP server of the cluster to the switch and save it as
vs.app.
<123_1.Sysname> tftp cluster get LANSwitch.app vs.app

tftp put

Syntax

tftp { cluster | tftp-server } put source-file [ destination-file ]

View

User view

Parameters

cluster: Uploads files through the shared TFTP server of the cluster.
tftp-server: IP address or host name of the TFTP server.
source-file: File name to be uploaded to the shared TFTP server.
destination-file: Name of the file to which the uploaded file will be saved in the storage directory of the
TFTP server.

Description

Use the tftp put command to upload a file from the switch to a specified directory on the TFTP server.
You can use the tftp-server command on the management device to configure the shared TFTP server
of the cluster, which is used for software version update and configuration file backup of the cluster
members. For TFTP server rights and directory configuration, refer to the user guide of the TFTP server
software.
Related commands: tftp get,tftp-server.

2-41
You need to specify the cluster keyword completely in the command.

Examples

# Upload file config.cfg on the switch to the shared TFTP server of the cluster and save it as temp.cfg.
<123_1.Sysname> tftp cluster put config.cfg temp.cfg

tftp-server

Syntax

tftp-server ip-address
undo tftp-server

View

Cluster view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address of a TFTP server to be configured for the cluster.

Description

Use the tftp-server command to configure a shared TFTP server for the cluster on the management
device.
Use the undo tftp-server command to remove the shared TFTP server setting.
By default, no shared TFTP server is configured.
After the IP address of the shared TFTP server is configured, NAT is enabled on the management
device immediately. When a member device uses the tftp cluster get or tftp cluster put command to
download or upload a file from the shared TFTP server, the management device translates the private
IP address of the member device to a public network address, forwards the requests of the member
device to the TFTP server, and forwards the responses of TFTP server to the member device according
to the NAT record.
Note that you can only use the commands on a management device.

Examples

# Configure shared TFTP server 1.0.0.9 on the management device for the cluster.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] tftp-server 1.0.0.9

2-42
timer

Syntax

timer interval
undo timer

View

Cluster view

Parameters

interval: Interval (in seconds) to send handshake packets. This argument ranges from 1 to 255.

Description

Use the timer command to set the interval between sending handshake packets.
Use the undo timer command to restore the default value of the interval.
By default, the interval between sending handshake packets is 10 seconds.
In a cluster, the management device keeps connections with the member devices through handshake
packets. Through the periodic handshaking between the management and member devices, the
management device monitors the member status and link status.
Note that, you need only execute the command on a management device, which will advertise the
handshake interval setting to all member devices in the cluster.

Examples

# Set the interval to send handshake packets to 3 seconds.

<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] timer 3

tracemac

Syntax

tracemac { by-mac mac-address vlan vlan-id | by-ip ip-address } [ nondp ]

View

Any view

Parameters

by-mac: Specifies to trace a device through the specified destination MAC address.
mac-address: MAC address of the device to be traced.
vlan vlan-id: Specifies to trace a device in the specified VLAN. vlan-id ranges from 1 to 4094.
by-ip: Specifies to trace a device through the specified destination IP address.
ip-address: IP address of the device to be traced.
nondp: Specifies not to check the NDP neighbor information.

2-43
Description

Use the tracemac command to trace a device in a cluster through the specified destination MAC
address or IP address, and to display the path from the current device to the destination device.

z When using the destination IP address to trace a device, the switch looks up the ARP entry
corresponding to the IP address, and then looks up the MAC address entry according to the ARP
entry.
z If the queried IP address has a corresponding ARP entry, but the corresponding MAC address of
the IP address does not exist in the MAC address table, the trace of the device fails.
z To trace a specific device using the tracemac command, make sure that all the devices passed
support the tracemac function.
z To trace a specific device in a management VLAN using the tracemac command, make sure that
all the devices passed are within the same management VLAN as the device to be traced.

Examples

# Trace the device that belongs to VLAN 1 through its MAC address 00e0-f032-0005.
<aaa_0.Sysname> tracemac by-mac 000f-e232-0005 vlan 1
Tracing MAC address 000f-e232-0005 in vlan 1
1 000f-e232-0001 3Com01 GigabitEthernet1/0/2
2 000f-e232-0002 3Com02 GigabitEthernet1/0/7
3 000f-e232-0003 3Com03 GigabitEthernet1/0/4
4 000f-e232-0005 3Com05 Local

# Trace the device that belongs to VLAN 1 through its IP address 192.168.1.5.
<aaa_0.Sysname> tracemac by-ip 192.168.1.5
Tracing MAC address 000f-e232-0005 in vlan 1
1 000f-e232-0001 3Com01 GigabitEthernet1/0/2
2 000f-e232-0002 3Com02 GigabitEthernet1/0/7
3 000f-e232-0003 3Com03 GigabitEthernet1/0/4
4 000f-e232-0005 3Com05 Local

Enhanced Cluster Feature Configuration Commands

black-list

Syntax

black-list add-mac mac-address

black-list delete-mac { all | mac-address }

View

Cluster view

2-44
Parameters

mac-address: MAC address of the device to be added to the blacklist. The format is H-H-H, for example,
0100-0498-e001.
all: Deletes all MAC address in the current cluster blacklist.

Description

Use the black-list add-mac command to add the specified MAC address to the cluster blacklist, so that
the device with the specified MAC address cannot join the cluster.
Use the black-list delete-mac command to remove all the MAC addresses or the specified MAC
address from the current cluster blacklist, so that all devices or the device with the specified MAC
address can join the cluster.
By default, no MAC address is added to the cluster blacklist.

You can only use this command on the cluster administrative device.

If the device to be added to the blacklist is a member of the cluster, the execution of the black-list
add-mac command will remove the device from the cluster and then add it to the cluster blacklist. In this
case, the black-list add-mac command is equivalent to the delete-member member-id to-black-list
command.

Examples

# Add the device with the MAC address 0010-3500-e001 to the blacklist.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
Enter system view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] black-list add-mac 0010-3500-e001

# Delete all addresses in the current cluster blacklist.

[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] black-list delete-mac all

display cluster base-members

Syntax

display cluster base-members

View

Any view

Parameters

None

2-45
Description

Use the display cluster base-members command to display the information about all the devices in
the base cluster topology, such as member number, name, MAC address, and the current status of
each device in a cluster.

Examples

# Display the information about all the devices in the base cluster topology.
<aaa_0.Sysname> display cluster base-members
SN Device MAC Adress Status
0 aaa_0.Sysname 000f-e200-30a0 UP
1 aaa_1.4200G 000f-e200-86e4 UP

Table 2-10 Description on the fields of display cluster base-members

Field Description
SN Device number in the cluster
Device Device name
MAC Address Device MAC address
Device status
Status Up: The member is connected.
Down: The member is disconnected.

display cluster base-topology

Syntax

display cluster base-topology [ mac-address mac-address | member member-id ]

View

Any view

Parameters

mac-address mac-address: Displays the structure of the standard topology three layers above or
below the node specified by the MAC address.
member member-id: Displays the structure of the standard topology three layers above or below the
node specified by the member ID.

Description

Use the display cluster base-topology command to display the standard topology of the cluster.
The standard topology of a cluster refers to the topology saved through the topology save-to
command. The standard topology is the backup of the normal topology information of a cluster and is
mainly used to resume the normal topology of the cluster member devices in case the cluster topology
encounters a fault.

Examples

# Display the standard topology of the cluster.

2-46
<aaa_0.Sysname> display cluster base-topology
--------------------------------------------------------------------
(PeerPort) ConnectFlag (NativePort) [SysName:DeviceMac]
--------------------------------------------------------------------
[aaa_0.Sysname:000f-e202-2180]
|
├-(P_0/40)<-->(P_0/6)[Sysname:000f-e200-2200]
|
├-(P_0/28)<-->(P_3/0/1)[Sysname:000f-e200-1774]
|
├-(P_0/22)<-->(P_1/0/2)[aaa_5.Sysname:000f-e200-5111]
|
├-(P_0/18)<-->(P_3/0/2)[Sysname 4200G:000f-e218-d0d0]
|
├-(P_0/14)<-->(P_1/0/2)[Sysname:000f-e200-5601]
|
└-(P_0/4)<-->(P_0/2)[4200G:000f-e200-00cc]

The output information of the display cluster base-topology command is in the following format:
(peer port number)<-->(local port number)[peer device name:peer device MAC address]
For example, (P_0/40)<-->(P_0/6)[Sysname:000f-e200-2200] means that the peer device uses its port
GigabitEthernet 1/0/40 to connect to port GigabitEthernet 1/0/6 of the local device; the peer device
name is Sysname; the MAC address of the peer device is 000f-e200-2200.

display cluster black-list

Syntax

display cluster black-list

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display cluster black-list command to display the information of devices in the current cluster
blacklist.
Related commands: black-list.

Examples

# Display the contents of the current cluster blacklist.

<aaa_0.Sysname> display cluster black-list
Device ID Access Device ID Access port
000f-e200-5502 000f-e202-2180 GigabitEthernet1/0/24
00e0-fd34-bc66 000f-e202-2180 GigabitEthernet1/0/1

2-47
Table 2-11 Description on the fields of the display cluster black-list command

Field Description
ID of the device in the blacklist, expressed by the
Device ID
MAC address of the device
ID of the device (in the cluster) that is connected
Access Device ID with a device in the blacklist, expressed by the
MAC address of the device
Port (in the cluster) that is connected with a
Access port
device in the blacklist

display cluster current-topology

Syntax

display cluster current-topology [ mac-address mac-address1 [ to-mac-address mac-address2 ] |

member-id member-id1 [ to-member-id member-id2 ] ]

View

Any view

Parameters

mac-address mac-address1: Displays the topology structure three layers above or below the node
specified by the MAC address. If to-mac-address is specified, mac-address1 is the start point of the
route in the specified route topology displayed.
to-mac-address mac-address2: Displays the topology structure of the route from mac-address1 to
mac-address2.
member-id member-id1: Displays the structure of the standard topology three layers above or below
the node specified by the member ID. If to-member-id is specified, member-id1 is the start point of the
route in the specified route topology displayed.
to-member-id member-id2: Displays the topology structure of the route from member-id1 to
member-id2.

Description

Use the display cluster current-topology command to display the topology of the current cluster.
If to-mac-address or to-member-id is not specified, the system displays the topology structure three
layers below the node specified by the MAC address or member ID.
If to-mac-address or to-member-id is specified, the system displays the topology structure of the route
between the two specified MAC addresses or two member IDs.

When you display the cluster topology information, the devices attached to the switch that is listed in the
backlist will not be displayed.

2-48
Examples

# Display the topology of the current cluster.

<aaa_0.Sysname> display cluster current-topology
--------------------------------------------------------------------
(PeerPort) ConnectFlag (NativePort) [SysName:DeviceMac]
--------------------------------------------------------------------
ConnectFlag:
<--> normal connect ---> odd connect **** in blacklist
???? lost device ++++ new device -┤├- STP discarding
--------------------------------------------------------------------
[aaa_0.Sysname:000f-e202-2180]
|
├-(P_0/40)<-->(P_0/6)[Sysname:000f-e200-2200]
|
├-(P_0/28)<-->(P_3/0/1)[Sysname:000f-e200-1774]
|
├-(P_0/24)****(P_1/0/6)[clie:000f-e200-5502]
|
├-(P_0/22)<-->(P_1/0/2)[aaa_5.Sysname:000f-e200-5111]
|
├-(P_0/18)<-->(P_3/0/2)[Sysname 4500:000f-e218-d0d0]
|
├-(P_0/14)<-->(P_1/0/2)[Sysname:000f-e200-5601]
|
├-(P_0/10)<-->(P_1/0/1)[aaa_7.4200G:0012-a990-2241]
|
├-(P_0/4)<-->(P_0/2)[5500-EI:000f-e200-00cc]
|
└-(P_0/1)****(P_0/1)[Sysname:00e0-fd34-bc66]

display ntdp single-device mac-address

Syntax

display ntdp single-device mac-address mac-address

View

Any view

Parameters

mac-address: MAC address of the device whose detailed information is to be displayed.

Description

Use the display ntdp single-device mac-address command to display the detailed information, which
is collected through NTDP protocol packets, about a single device. The information displayed by the
command is similar to that displayed by the display cluster members command. However, if you want
to display information about a device that is enabled with only NTDP and is not in any cluster, you have
to use the display ntdp single-device mac-address command.

2-49
Examples

# Display the detailed information about the switch with the MAC address 000f-e200-3956.
<Sysname> display ntdp single-device mac-address 000f-e200-3956

Hostname : aaa_0.4200G
MAC : 00e0-fc00-5200
Hop : 0
Platform : 4200G 12-Port
IP : 192.168.0.91/16
Version :
3Com Versatile Routing Platform Software
Comware Software, Version 3Com OS V3.02.01s168
Copyright (c) 2004-2008 3Com Corporation and its licensors, All rights reserved.
Switch 4200G 12-Port 4200G

Cluster : Administrator switch of cluster aaa

Stack : Candidate switch

Peer MAC Peer Port ID Native Port ID Speed Duplex

00e0-fc02-2180 GigabitEthernet1/0/9 GigabitEthernet1/0/5 100 FULL
00e0-fc00-5104 GigabitEthernet1/0/16 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 1000 FULL

Table 2-12 Description on the fields of the display ntdp single-device command

Field Description
Hostname System name of a device
MAC MAC address of the device
Number of hops from the device to the
Hop
topology-collecting device
Platform Platform information of the device
IP address and mask length of the management
IP
VLAN interface of the device

Version Version information

Cluster Role the device plays in the cluster

Peer MAC MAC address of the peer device

Name of the port on the peer device connecting

Peer Port ID
to the local device
Name of the port on the local device connecting
Native Port ID
to the peer device
Rate of the local port connecting to the peer
Speed
device
Duplex mode of the local port connecting to the
Duplex
peer device

2-50
topology accept

Syntax

topology accept { all [ save-to local-flash ] | mac-address mac-address | member-id member-id |

administrator }

View

Cluster view

Parameters

all: Accepts the current cluster topology as the standard topology.

save-to: Saves the standard topology of the current cluster to the local Flash or the cluster FTP server.
local-flash: Saves the standard topology of the current cluster to the local Flash.
mac-address mac-address: Accepts adding the device with the specified MAC address to the standard
topology of the cluster.
member-id member-id: Accepts adding the device with the specified member ID to the standard
topology of the cluster.
administrator: Accepts adding the administrative device to the standard topology of the cluster.

Description

Use the topology accept command to accept the topology of the current cluster as the standard
topology, and save the standard topology to the Flash memory of the administrative device so that the
standard topology can be restored when errors occur to the topology.

You can only use this command on the cluster management device.

Related commands: display cluster base-topology, topology restore-from, topology save-to.

Examples

# Save the current cluster topology as the base topology and save it in the local flash.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
Enter system view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] topology accept all save-to local-flash

# Accept the device with the MAC address 0010-0f66-3022 as a member of the base cluster topology.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
Enter system view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] topology accept mac-address 0010-0f66-3022

2-51
topology restore-from

Syntax

topology restore-from local-flash

View

Cluster view

Parameters

local-flash: Restores the standard topology of the cluster from the local Flash memory.

Description

Use the topology restore-from command to restore the standard topology of the cluster from the Flash
memory of the administrative device when errors occur to the topology, and advertise the topology to
the member devices of the cluster to ensure normal operation of the cluster.

You can only use this command on the cluster administrative device.

Related commands: topology accept, topology save-to.

Examples

# Restore the base cluster topology from the flash of the management device in the cluster.
<aaa_0.Sysname> system-view
Enter system view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] topology restore-from local-flash

topology save-to

Syntax

topology save-to local-flash

View

Cluster view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the topology save-to command to save the standard topology of the cluster to the local Flash
memory.
The file name used to save the standard topology is topology.top. Do not modify the file name.

2-52
This command is applicable to only the management device of a cluster.

Related commands: topology restore-from.

Examples

# Enter Cluster view.

<aaa_0.Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[aaa_0.Sysname] cluster
[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster]

# Save the standard topology of the cluster to the local Flash.

[aaa_0.Sysname-cluster] topology save-to local-flash
Base topology backup to file OK

2-53
Table of Contents

1 SNMP Configuration Commands ·············································································································1-1

SNMP Configuration Commands············································································································1-1
display snmp-agent ·························································································································1-1
display snmp-agent community·······································································································1-1
display snmp-agent group ···············································································································1-3
display snmp-agent mib-view ··········································································································1-4
display snmp-agent statistics ··········································································································1-5
display snmp-agent sys-info ············································································································1-8
display snmp-agent trap-list ············································································································1-9
display snmp-agent usm-user ·········································································································1-9
enable snmp trap updown ·············································································································1-11
snmp-agent····································································································································1-11
snmp-agent calculate-password····································································································1-12
snmp-agent community ·················································································································1-13
snmp-agent group ·························································································································1-14
snmp-agent local-engineid ············································································································1-16
snmp-agent log······························································································································1-16
snmp-agent mib-view ····················································································································1-17
snmp-agent packet max-size ········································································································1-19
snmp-agent sys-info ······················································································································1-19
snmp-agent target-host ·················································································································1-21
snmp-agent trap enable·················································································································1-22
snmp-agent trap ifmib····················································································································1-23
snmp-agent trap life·······················································································································1-24
snmp-agent trap queue-size··········································································································1-24
snmp-agent trap source·················································································································1-25
snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c }··································································································1-26
snmp-agent usm-user v3···············································································································1-27

2 RMON Configuration Commands ············································································································2-1

RMON Configuration Commands ···········································································································2-1
display rmon alarm ··························································································································2-1
display rmon event ··························································································································2-2
display rmon eventlog······················································································································2-3
display rmon history·························································································································2-4
display rmon prialarm ······················································································································2-5
display rmon statistics ·····················································································································2-7
rmon alarm ······································································································································2-8
rmon event·····································································································································2-10
rmon history···································································································································2-11
rmon prialarm ································································································································2-12
rmon statistics································································································································2-14

i
1 SNMP Configuration Commands

SNMP Configuration Commands

display snmp-agent

Syntax

display snmp-agent { local-engineid | remote-engineid }

View

Any view

Parameters

local-engineid: Displays the local SNMP entity engine ID.

remote-engineid: Displays all the remote SNMP entity engine IDs. At present, the device does not
support application of the keyword.

Description

Use the display snmp-agent command to display the local SNMP entity engine ID or all the remote
SNMP entity engine IDs.
Each device managed by the NMS needs a unique engine ID to identify an SNMP agent. By default,
each device has a default engine ID. You should ensure that each engine ID is unique within an SNMP
domain.
The creation of username and generation of cipher text password are related to engine ID in SNMPv3.
If you change an engine ID, the username and password configured on the agent with this engine ID
become invalid.
You can use the snmp-agent local-engineid command to configure an engine ID for the device.

Examples

# Display the local SNMP entity engine ID.

<Sysname> display snmp-agent local-engineid
SNMP local EngineID: 800007DB000FE20F12346877

SNMP local EngineID in the above information represents the local SNMP entity engine ID.

display snmp-agent community

Syntax

display snmp-agent community [ read | write ]

View

Any view

1-1
Parameters

read: Displays the information about the SNMP communities with read-only permission.
write: Displays the information about the SNMP communities with read-write permission.

Description

Use the display snmp-agent community command to display the information about the
SNMPv1/SNMPv2c communities with the specific access permission.
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c use community name authentication. Therefore, the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c
messages carry community names; if the carried community names are not permitted by the
NMS/agent, the messages will be discarded.
You need to create a read community name and a write community name separately, and these two
kinds of community names on the NMS and on the device should be consistent.
If you execute the command when the SNMP agent is not started, the device prompts “SNMP Agent
disabled”.
To display the current configuration username information of SNMPv3, use the display snmp-agent
usm-user command.

Examples

# Display the information about all the existing SNMPv1/SNMPv2c communities.

<Sysname> display snmp-agent community
Community name:public
Group name:public
Storage-type: nonVolatile

Community name:private
Group name:private
Storage-type: nonVolatile

Table 1-1 display snmp-agent community command output description

Field Description
Community name
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c use community name
Community name authentication. A community name functions like
a password; it is used to restrict access between
the NMS and the agent.
Group name
If you use the snmp-agent community
command to configure a community name for
SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c, the group name is the
community name.
Group name
If you use the snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c }
command to configure a username, the group
name is the group to which the user belongs, and
the corresponding community name has the
attribute of the group.

1-2
Field Description
Storage type, which can be:
z volatile: Information will be lost if the system
is rebooted
z nonVolatile: Information will not be lost if the
Storage-type system is rebooted
z permanent: Modification is permitted, but
deletion is forbidden
z readOnly: Read only, that is, no modification,
no deletion
z other: Other storage types

display snmp-agent group

Syntax

display snmp-agent group [ group-name ]

View

Any view

Parameters

group-name: Name of the desired SNMP group, a string of 1 to 32 characters.

Description

Use the display snmp-agent group command to display the information about an SNMP group,
including group name, security mode, related views, and storage mode.
A group is used to define security mode and related views. Users in the same group have the common
attributes.
Security mode falls into three types: authPriv (authentication with privacy), authNoPriv (authentication
without privacy), noAuthNoPriv (no authentication no privacy).
Related views include: read MIB view, write MIB view, and MIB view in which traps can be sent.
For the configuration of an SNMP group, refer to the snmp-agent group command.

Examples

# Display the information about all the SNMP groups.

<Sysname> display snmp-agent group
Group name: v3group
Security model: v3 noAuthnoPriv
Readview: ViewDefault
Writeview: ViewDefault
Notifyview : ViewDefault
Storage-type: nonVolatile

1-3
Table 1-2 display snmp-agent group command output description

Field Description
Group name SNMP group name of the user
SNMP group security mode, which can be
AuthPriv (authentication with privacy),
Security model
AuthnoPriv (authentication without privacy), and
noAuthnoPriv (no authentication no privacy).
Read-only MIB view corresponding to the SNMP
Readview
group
Writable MIB view corresponding to the SNMP
Writeview
group
Notify MIB view in which traps can be sent. It
Notifyview
corresponds to the SNMP group
Storage type, which can be:
z volatile: Information will be lost if the system
is rebooted
z nonVolatile: Information will not be lost if the
storage-type system is rebooted
z permanent: Modification is permitted, but
deletion is forbidden
z readOnly: Read only, that is, no modification,
no deletion
z other: Other storage types

display snmp-agent mib-view

Syntax

display snmp-agent mib-view [ exclude | include | viewname view-name ]

View

Any view

Parameters

exclude: Specifies the SNMP MIB views that are of the excluded type.
Include: Specifies the SNMP MIB views that are of the included type.
view-name: Name of an SNMP MIB view to be displayed.

Description

Use the display snmp-agent mib-view command to display the MIB view configuration of the current
Ethernet switch, including view name, MIB subtree, subtree mask, and so on.
For the description of the configuration items of MIB view, refer to the related description in the
snmp-agent mib-view command.

Examples

# Display the information about the currently configured MIB view.

<Sysname> display snmp-agent mib-view

1-4
View name:ViewDefault
MIB Subtree:iso
Subtree mask:
Storage-type: nonVolatile
View Type:included
View status:active

View name:ViewDefault
MIB Subtree:snmpUsmMIB
Subtree mask:
Storage-type: nonVolatile
View Type:excluded
View status:active
View name:ViewDefault
MIB Subtree:snmpVacmMIB
Subtree mask:
Storage-type: nonVolatile
View Type:excluded
View status:active

View name:ViewDefault
MIB Subtree:snmpModules.18
Subtree mask:
Storage-type: nonVolatile
View Type:excluded
View status:active

The above output information indicates that MIB view ViewDefault includes all MIB objects under the
ISO MIB subtree except snmpUsmMIB, snmpVacmMIB and snmpModules.18.

display snmp-agent statistics

Syntax

display snmp-agent statistics

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display snmp-agent statistics command to display the statistics on SNMP packets.
The statistics are collected from the time when the switch is started, and the statistics will not be cleared
if the SNMP is restarted.
If you execute the command when SNMP agent is not started, the device prompts “SNMP Agent
disabled”.

1-5
Examples

# Display the statistics on SNMP packets.

<Sysname> display snmp-agent statistics
1276 Messages delivered to the SNMP entity
0 Messages which were for an unsupported version
0 Messages which used a SNMP community name not known
0 Messages which represented an illegal operation for the community supplied
0 ASN.1 or BER errors in the process of decoding
1291 Messages passed from the SNMP entity
0 SNMP PDUs which had badValue error-status
0 SNMP PDUs which had genErr error-status
7 SNMP PDUs which had noSuchName error-status
0 SNMP PDUs which had tooBig error-status (Maximum packet size 1500)
3669 MIB objects retrieved successfully
26 MIB objects altered successfully
420 GetRequest-PDU accepted and processed
832 GetNextRequest-PDU accepted and processed
0 GetBulkRequest-PDU accepted and processed
1276 GetResponse-PDU accepted and processed
24 SetRequest-PDU accepted and processed
15 Trap PDUs accepted and processed
0 Alternate Response Class PDUs droped silently
0 Forwarded Confirmed Class PDUs droped silently

Table 1-3 display snmp-agent statistics command output description

Field Description
The total number of messages delivered to the
Messages delivered to the SNMP entity
SNMP entity from the transport service.
The total number of SNMP messages delivered
Messages which were for an unsupported
to the SNMP protocol entity and were for an
version
unsupported SNMP version.
The total number of SNMP messages delivered
Messages which used a SNMP community to the SNMP protocol entity which used an
name not known SNMP community name not known to said
entity.
The total number of SNMP messages delivered
Messages which represented an illegal to the SNMP protocol entity which represented
operation for the community supplied an SNMP operation which was not allowed by
the SNMP community named in the message.
The total number of ASN.1 or BER errors
ASN.1 or BER errors in the process of decoding encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when
decoding received SNMP messages.
The total number of SNMP messages which
Messages passed from the SNMP entity were passed from the SNMP protocol entity to
the transport service.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for
SNMP PDUs which had badValue error-status
which the value of the error-status field is
`badValue'.

1-6
Field Description
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for
SNMP PDUs which had genErr error-status
which the value of the error-status field is
`genErr'.

The total number of SNMP PDUs which were

SNMP PDUs which had noSuchName delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for
error-status which the value of the error-status field is
`noSuchName'.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were
SNMP PDUs which had tooBig error-status delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for
(Maximum packet size 1500) which the value of the error-status field is
`tooBig'.
The total number of MIB objects which have
been retrieved successfully by the SNMP
MIB objects retrieved successfully
protocol entity as the result of receiving valid
SNMP Get-Request and Get-Next PDUs.
The total number of MIB objects which have
been altered successfully by the SNMP protocol
MIB objects altered successfully
entity as the result of receiving valid SNMP
Set-Request PDUs.
The total number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs
GetRequest-PDU accepted and processed which have been accepted and processed by the
SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs
GetNextRequest-PDU accepted and processed which have been accepted and processed by the
SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Get-Bulk PDUs which
GetBulkRequest-PDU accepted and processed have been accepted and processed by the
SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs
GetResponse-PDU accepted and processed which have been accepted and processed by the
SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs
SetRequest-PDU accepted and processed which have been accepted and processed by the
SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Trap PDUs which
Trap PDUs accepted and processed have been accepted and processed by the
SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs,
GetNextRequest-PDUs, GetBulkRequest-PDUs,
SetRequest-PDUs, and InformRequest-PDUs
delivered to the SNMP entity which were silently
Alternate Response Class PDUs dropped
dropped because the size of a reply containing
silently
an alternate Response-PDU with an empty
variable-bindings field was greater than either a
local constraint or the maximum message size
associated with the originator of the request.

1-7
Field Description
The total number of Confirmed Class PDUs
(such as GetRequest-PDUs,
GetNextRequest-PDUs, GetBulkRequest-PDUs,
SetRequest-PDUs, and
InformRequest-PDUs) delivered to the SNMP
Forwarded Confirmed Class PDUs dropped
entity which were silently dropped because the
silently
transmission of the (possibly translated)
message to a proxy target failed in a manner
(other than a time-out) such that no Response
Class PDU (such as a Response-PDU) could be
returned.

display snmp-agent sys-info

Syntax

display snmp-agent sys-info [ contact | location | version ]*

View

Any view

Parameters

contact: Displays the contact information of the current device.

location: Displays the physical location of the current device.
version: Displays the version information about the SNMP running in the system.

Description

Use the display snmp-agent sys-info command to display the system SNMP information about the
current device, including contact information, geographical location of the device, and the employed
SNMP version.
This command displays all the system SNMP information if you execute it with no keyword specified.
The display snmp-agent sys-info command displays the related information configured using the
snmp-agent sys-info command. For the detailed configuration, refer to the snmp-agent sys-info
command.
By default, the contact information of A Switch 4200G is "3Com Corporation.", the geographical location
is " Marlborough, MA 01752 USA", and the SNMP version employed is SNMPv3.

Examples

# Display the system SNMP information about the device.

<Sysname> display snmp-agent sys-info
The contact person for this managed node:
3Com Corporation.

The physical location of this node:

Marlborough, MA 01752 USA

SNMP version running in the system:

1-8
SNMPv3

display snmp-agent trap-list

Syntax

display snmp-agent trap-list

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display snmp-agent trap-list command to display the modules that can generate traps and
whether the sending of traps is enabled on the modules.
If a module contains multiple submodules, the trap function of the entire module is displayed as enabled
as long as the trap function of any of the submodules is enabled.
Related commands: snmp-agent trap enable.

Examples

# Display the modules that can generate traps and whether the trap function is enabled on the modules.
<Sysname> display snmp-agent trap-list

configuration trap enable

flash trap enable

standard trap enable

system trap enable

Enable traps :4; Disable traps 0

In the above output information, enable indicates that traps are allowed to be generated on the module,
and disable indicates that traps are not allowed to be generated on the module.
By default, the modules that can generate traps are allowed to generate traps. If you do not need traps
of some modules, you can use the undo snmp-agent trap enable command to disable the trap
function of the specific modules.

display snmp-agent usm-user

Syntax

display snmp-agent usm-user [ engineid engineid | username user-name | group group-name ]*

View

Any view

1-9
Parameters

engineid: Engine ID, a string of 10 to 64 hexadecimal digits.

user-name: SNMPv3 username, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
group-name: Name of an SNMP group, a string of 1 to 32 characters.

Description

Use the display snmp-agent usm-user command to display the information about a specific type of
SNMPv3 users.
If you execute this command with no keyword specified, the information about all the SNMPv3 users is
displayed, including username, group name, engine ID, storage type and user status.
SNMPv3 introduced the concepts of username and group. You can set the authentication and privacy
functions. The former is used to authenticate the validity of the sending end of the packets, preventing
access of illegal users; the latter is used to encrypt packets between the NMS and agent, preventing the
packets from being intercepted. A more secure communication between SNMP NMS and SNMP agent
can be ensured by configuring whether to perform authentication and privacy or not.
You can configure whether to perform authentication and privacy when you create an SNMPv3 group,
and configure the specific algorithms and passwords for authentication and privacy when you create a
user.

Examples

# Display the information about all the SNMP users.

<Sysname> display snmp-agent usm-user
User name: usm-user
Group name: usm-group9-0
Engine ID: 800007DB000FE20F12346877
Storage-type: nonVolatile
UserStatus: active

Table 1-4 display snmp-agent usm-user command output description

Field Description
User name SNMP username
Group name The name of the SNMP group which the SNMP user belongs to
Engine ID SNMP engine ID of the device
Storage type, which can be:
z volatile: Information will be lost if the system is rebooted
Storage-type z nonVolatile: Information will not be lost if the system is rebooted
z permanent: Modification is permitted, but deletion is forbidden
z readOnly: Read only, that is, no modification, no deletion
z other: Other storage types
UserStatus SNMP user status

1-10
enable snmp trap updown

Syntax

enable snmp trap updown

undo enable snmp trap updown

View

Ethernet port view, interface view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the enable snmp trap updown command to enable the sending of port/interface linkUp/linkDown
traps.
Use the undo enable snmp trap updown command to disable the sending of linkUp/linkDown traps.
By default, the sending of port/interface linkUp/linkDown traps is enabled.
Note that you need to enable the generation of port/interface linkUp/linkDown traps both on the
port/interface and globally if you want a port/interface to generate port/interface linkUp/linkDown traps
when the state of the port/interface changes.
To enable this function on a port/interface, use the enable snmp trap updown command; to enable
this function globally, use the snmp-agent trap enable [ standard [ linkdown | linkup ] * ] command.
By default, both are enabled.

Examples

# Enable the port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to send linkUp/linkDown SNMP traps to the NMS whose IP
address is 10.1.1.1 using the community name public.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent trap enable
[Sysname] snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1 params securityname public
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] enable snmp trap updown

snmp-agent

Syntax

snmp-agent
undo snmp-agent

View

System view

Parameters

None

1-11
Description

Use the snmp-agent command to enable the SNMP agent.

Use the undo snmp-agent command to disable the SNMP agent.
Execution of the snmp-agent command or any of the commands used to configure the SNMP agent,
you can start the SNMP agent.
By default, the SNMP agent is disabled.

Examples

# Start the SNMP agent.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent

A Switch 4200G provides the following functions to prevent attacks through unused UDP ports.
z Starting the SNMP agent opens UDP port used by SNMP agents and the UDP port used by SNMP
trap respectively.
z Shutting down the SNMP agent closes UDP ports used by SNMP agents and SNMP trap as well.

snmp-agent calculate-password

Syntax

snmp-agent calculate-password plain-password mode { md5 | sha } { local-engineid |

specified-engineid engineid }

View

System view

Parameters

plain-password: The plain-text password to be encrypted, in the range 1 to 64 characters.

mode: Specifies the authentication algorithm used to encrypt a plain text password.
md5: Uses HMAC MD5 algorithm.
sha: Uses HMAC SHA algorithm, which is securer than MD5 algorithm.
local-engineid: Uses the local engine ID to calculate the key.
specified-engineid: Uses the specified engine ID to calculate the key.
engineid: A case-insensitive hexadecimal string used for key calculation. The system capitalizes the
string. The length of the string must be an even number and in the range 10 to 64 characters.

1-12
Description

Use the snmp-agent calculate-password command to encrypt a plain-text password to generate a

cipher-text one by using the specified encryption algorithm.
When creating an SNMPv3 user, if you specify an authentication or privacy password as in cipher text,
you need to use this command to generate a cipher text password by using the specified algorithm, and
copy the generated cipher text password to use.
The generated password is related to engine ID: password generated under an engine ID can only take
effect on this engine ID.
Related commands: snmp-agent usm-user v3.

SNMP agent must be enabled for you to encrypt a plain-text password.

Examples

# Use the local engine ID and the md5 algorithm to encrypt plain-text password aaaa.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent calculate-password aaaa mode md5 local-engineid
The result of the password is: B02A2E48346E2CBFFCE809C99CF1F6C

snmp-agent community

Syntax

snmp-agent community { read | write } community-name [ [ acl acl-number ] [ mib-view

view-name ] ]*
undo snmp-agent community community-name

View

System view

Parameters

read: Specifies that the community to be created has read-only permission to MIB objects.
Communities of this type can only query MIBs for device information.
write: Specifies that the community to be created has read-write permission to MIB objects.
Communities of this type are capable of configuring devices.
community-name: Name of the community to be created, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
acl-number: ID of the ACL to be applied to the community, in the range 2000 to 2999. Using basic ACL
can restrict the source addresses of SNMP messages, namely, permitting or refusing the SNMP
messages with specific source addresses, thus restricting access between the NMS and the agent.
view-name: MIB view name, a string of 1 to 32 characters.

1-13
Description

Use the snmp-agent community command to create an SNMP community. SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c
use community name to restrict access rights. You can use this command to configure a community
name and configure read or write access right and ACL.
Use the undo snmp-agent community command to remove an SNMP community.
Typically, “public” is used as a read community name, and “private” is used as a write community name.
For the security purposes, you are recommended to configure another community name except these
two.

Examples

# Create an SNMP community named comaccess, which has read-only permission to MIB objects.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent community read comaccess

# Create an SNMP community named mgr, which has read-write permission to MIB objects
[Sysname] snmp-agent community write mgr

# Remove the community named comaccess.

[Sysname] undo snmp-agent community comaccess

snmp-agent group

Syntax

1) Version 1 and version 2c

snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name [ read-view read-view ] [ write-view write-view ]
[ notify-view notify-view ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name
2) Version 3
snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ] [ read-view read-view ] [ write-view
write-view ] [ notify-view notify-view ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ]

View

System view

Parameters

v1: Specifies SNMPv1.

v2c: Specifies SNMPv2c.
v3: Specifies SNMPv3.
group-name: Name of the SNMP group to be created, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
authentication: Configures to authenticate but do not encrypt the packets.
privacy: Configures to authenticate and encrypt the packets.
read-view: Read-only view name, a string of 1 to 32 characters. The default value is ViewDefault.

1-14
write-view: Read-write view name, a string of 1 to 32 characters. By default, no write view is configured,
namely, the NMS cannot perform the write operation on the MIB objects of the device.
notify-view: Notification view name in which traps can be sent, a string of 1 to 32 characters. By default,
no notify view is configured, namely, the agent will not send traps to the NMS.
acl-number: ID of a basic ACL, in the range 2000 to 2999. Using basic ACL can restrict the source
addresses of SNMP messages, namely, permitting or refusing the SNMP messages with specific
source addresses, thus restricting access between the NMS and the agent.

Description

Use the snmp-agent group command to create an SNMP group, and set the security mode and
corresponding SNMP view of the group.
Use the undo snmp-agent group command to remove an SNMP group.
For SNMPv3, group name and security mode (whether authentication and privacy are performed) can
jointly define a group. Groups with the same group name but different security mode are different
groups. For the details, see the following examples.
By default, the SNMP groups created using the snmp-agent group v3 command do not authenticate or
encrypt packets.
Related commands: snmp-agent mib-view, snmp-agent usm-user.

Examples

# Create an SNMPv1 group named v1group.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent group v1 v1group

# Create an SNMPv3 group v3group, set the security mode to no authentication no privacy, and set the
read view, write view and view in which traps can be sent to ICMP view.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent group v3 v3group read-view icmp write-view icmp notify-view icmp

# Create an SNMPv3 group v3group, set the security mode to authentication and privacy, and permit
only access from the NMS whose IP address is 192.168.0.108 to the agent using ACL.
[Sysname] acl number 2001
[Sysname] rule 0 permit source 192.168.0.108 0
[Sysname] snmp-agent group v3 v3group privacy acl 2001

In this case, when you use the display snmp-agent group command to display group information, you
can see that two groups with the name v3group are created, but their security modes are noAuthnoPriv
and AuthPriv respectively.
<Sysname> display snmp-agent group
Group name: v3group
Security model: v3 noAuthnoPriv
Readview: ViewDefault
Writeview: icmp
Notifyview : icmp
Storage-type: icmp

1-15
Group name: v3group
Security model: v3 AuthPriv
Readview: ViewDefault
Writeview: <no specified>
Notifyview :<no specified>
Storage-type: nonVolatile
Acl:2001

snmp-agent local-engineid

Syntax

snmp-agent local-engineid engineid

undo snmp-agent local-engineid

View

System view

Parameters

engineid: Engine ID, an even number of hexadecimal characters, in the range 10 to 64.

Description

Use the snmp-agent local-engineid command to set an engine ID for the local SNMP entity.
Use the undo snmp-agent local-engineid command to restore the default engine ID.
By default, the engine ID of an SNMP entity is formed by appending the device information to the
enterprise number. The device information can be determined according to the device, which can be an
IP address, a MAC address, or a user-defined string comprising of hexadecimal digits.
The configurations with the snmp-agent usm-user v3 and snmp-agent calculate-password
commands are related to engine ID. If you modify the engine ID, the corresponding configurations are
invalid for the new engine ID.

Examples

# Set the local SNMP entity engine ID to 123456789A.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent local-engineid 123456789A

snmp-agent log

Syntax

snmp-agent log { set-operation | get-operation | all }

undo snmp-agent log { set-operation | get-operation | all }

View

System view

1-16
Parameters

set-operation: Logs the set operations.

get-operation: Logs the get operations.
all: Logs both the set operations and get operations.

Description

Use the snmp-agent log command to enable network management operation logging.
Use the undo snmp-agent log command to disable network management operation logging.
By default, network management operation logging is disabled.
After SNMP logging is enabled, when NMS performs specified operations on the SNMP agent, the
SNMP agent records and then saves the information related to the operations into the information
center of the device.

z When SNMP logging is enabled on a device, SNMP logs are output to the information center of the
device. With the output destinations of the information center set, the output destinations of SNMP
logs will be decided.
z The severity level of SNMP logs is informational, that is, the logs are taken as general prompt
information of the device. To view SNMP logs, you need to enable the information center to output
system information with informational level.
z For detailed description on system information and information center, refer to the Information
Center Configuration part in this manual.

Examples

# Enable logging for both the get and the set operations performed on the NMS.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent log all

snmp-agent mib-view

Syntax

snmp-agent mib-view { included | excluded } view-name oid-tree [ mask mask-value ]

undo snmp-agent mib-view view-name

View

System view

Parameters

included: Specifies that the MIB view includes this MIB subtree.
excluded: Specifies that the MIB view excludes this MIB subtree.

1-17
view-name: View name.
oid-tree: OID MIB subtree of a MIB subtree. It can be the ID of a node in OID MIB subtree (such as
1.4.5.3.1) or an OID (such as “system”).
mask mask-value: Mask of a MIB subtree, an even number of hexadecimal characters, in the range 2 to
32. An odd number of characters are invalid.

Description

Use snmp-agent mib-view command to create or update the information about a MIB view to limit the
MIB objects the NMS can access.
Use the undo snmp-agent mib-view command to cancel the current setting.
Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of all the managed objects. MIB view is a sub-set of
MIB. You can bind a community name/username with a MIB view when configuring an agent, thus to
control the MIB objects that NMS can access. You can configure the objects in the MIB view as
excluded or included; excluded indicates that all the nodes on the subtree are excluded in the current
MIB view, and included indicates that the current MIB includes all the nodes on the subtree.
By default, the view name is ViewDefault, which includes all the MIB objects under the ISO MIB subtree
except snmpUsmMIB, snmpVacmMIB and snmpModules.18.
If you specify a mask value in hexadecimal number when creating a MIB view, each bit number of the
mask value corresponds with each sub-OID of the MIB subtree OID, from left to right. In a binary mask
value, 1 indicates exact matching, meaning the OID of the node to be accessed must be the same as
the sub-OID at the corresponding position of the MIB subtree OID; 0 indicates fuzzy matching, meaning
the OID of the node to be accessed is not necessarily the same as the sub-OID at the corresponding
position of the MIB subtree OID.
Note the following when defining a MIB view with a mask:
z If the bit number of a mask value is more than the number of sub-OIDs of the MIB subtree OID, the
bit number remains unchanged.
z If the bit number of a mask value is less than the number of sub-OIDs of the OID of a MIB subtree,
the bit number is filled by 1(s) in a binary number by default.
z If no mask value is specified when you create a MIB view, the OID of the node to be accessed must
be the same as the sub-OID at the corresponding position of the MIB subtree OID. The mask value
is displayed as null when the system reads it.
You need to define the MIB view access right of the community name or group in the configuration of an
SNMP community name or group name. For the configurations, refer to the snmp-agent community
and snmp-agent group commands.

Examples

# Create an SNMP MIB view with the name of icmp, and MIB subtree of 1.3.6.1.2.1.5 to configure MIB
view for the NMS to display or configure icmp.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent mib-view included icmp 1.3.6.1.2.1.5

# Create a read community name with the name of icmpread, and a write community name with the
name of icmpwrite. Specify the MIB view as the configured icmp MIB view, and the NMS using this
community name to access the device can only display or configure icmp related configurations.

1-18
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]snmp-agent community read icmpread mib-view icmp
[Sysname]snmp-agent community write icmpwrite mib-view icmp

# Create an SNMP MIB view with the name of view-a, MIB subtree of 1.3.6.1.5.4.3.4 and subtree mask
of FE. MIB nodes with the OID of 1.3.6.1.5.4.3.x are included in this view, with x indicating any integer
number.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent mib-view included view-a 1.3.6.1.5.4.3.4 mask FE

snmp-agent packet max-size

Syntax

snmp-agent packet max-size byte-count

undo snmp-agent packet max-size

View

System view

Parameters

byte-count: Maximum SNMP packet size (in bytes) to be set, ranging from 484 to 17,940.

Description

Use the snmp-agent packet max-size command to set the maximum SNMP packet size allowed by an
agent.
Use undo snmp-agent packet max-size command to restore the default maximum SNMP packet
size.
The configuration of the maximum SNMP packet size is to prevent giant packets being discarded due to
existence of devices not supporting fragmentation on a routing path. Typically, the maximum size of a
packet can keep the default value of 1500 bytes.
By default, the maximum SNMP packet size allowed by an agent is 1,500 bytes.

Examples

# Set the maximum SNMP packet size allowed by the agent to 1,042 bytes.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent packet max-size 1042

snmp-agent sys-info

Syntax

snmp-agent sys-info { contact sys-contact | location sys-location | version { { v1 | v2c | v3 }* | all } }

undo snmp-agent sys-info { contact [ location ] | location [contact ] | version { { v1 | v2c | v3 }*
|all } }

1-19
View

System view

Parameters

sys-contact: Contact information for system maintenance, a string of up to 200 characters.

sys-location: Geographical location of the device, a string of up to 200 characters.
version: Specifies the SNMP version to be employed.
v1: Specifies SNMPv1.
v2c: Specifies SNMPv2c.
v3: Specifies SNMPv3.
all: Specifies all the SNMP versions available, that is, SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3.

Description

Use the snmp-agent sys-info command to set the system information, including geographical location
of the switch, contact information for system maintenance, and the SNMP version employed by the
switch.
Use the undo snmp-agent sys-info location command to restore the default contact information and
geographical location, or stop the running of the corresponding SNMP version.
If the switch fails, you can contact the switch manufacturer according to the system information.
The SNMP versions of the device and the NMS must be consistent; otherwise data exchange cannot be
completed.
The device processes the SNMP messages of the corresponding SNMP version when the SNMP
version is enabled on the device. If only SNMPv1 is enabled, while the device receives SNMPv2c
messages, the messages will be discarded; if only SNMPv2c is enabled, the device discards the
received SNMPv1 messages.
Multiple SNMP versions can be running the on the device at the same time to allow access of different
NMSs.
By default, the contact information of a Switch 4200G is " 3Com Corporation.", the geographical
location is " Marlborough, MA 01752 USA", and the SNMP version employed is SNMPv3.
You can use the display snmp-agent sys-info command to display the current SNMP system
information.

Examples

# Specify the contact information for system maintenance as Dial System Operator # 1234.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent sys-info contact Dial System Operator # 1234

1-20
snmp-agent target-host

Syntax

snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain ip-address [ udp-port port-number ] params

securityname security-string [ v1 | v2c | v3 [authentication | privacy ] ]
undo snmp-agent target-host ip-address securityname security-string

View

System view

Parameters

trap: Enables the host to receive SNMP traps.

address: Specifies the destination for the SNMP traps.
udp-domain: Specifies to use UDP to communicate with the target host.
ip-address: The IPv4 address of the host that is to receive the traps.
port-number: Number of the UDP port that is to receive the traps, in the range 1 to 65,535.
params: Specifies SNMP target host information to be used in the generation of SNMP traps.
security-string: SNMPv1/SNMPv2c community name or SNMPv3 username, a string of 1 to 32
characters.
v1: Specifies SNMPv1.
v2c: Specifies SNMPv2c.
v3: Specifies SNMPv3.
authentication: Configures to authenticate the packets without encryption.
privacy: Configures to authenticate and encrypt the packets.

Description

Use snmp-agent target-host command to set a destination host to receive the SNMP traps generated
by the local device.
Use undo snmp-agent target-host command to cancel the current setting.
You can configure multiple destination hosts to receive traps with the command as needed.
To enable a device to send SNMP traps, the snmp-agent target-host command need to be coupled
with a command among the snmp-agent trap enable command and the enable snmp trap updown
command.
1) Use the snmp-agent trap enable or enable snmp trap updown command to specify the types of
the SNMP traps a device can send (by default, a device can send all types of SNMP traps).
2) Use the snmp-agent target-host command to set the address of the destination for the SNMP
traps.
Related commands: snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent trap source, and snmp-agent trap life.

Examples

# Enable sending SNMP traps to 10.1.1.1, and set the community name to public.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.

1-21
[Sysname] snmp-agent trap enable standard
[Sysname] snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1 params securityname public

snmp-agent trap enable

Syntax

snmp-agent trap enable [ configuration | flash | standard [ authentication | coldstart | linkdown |

View

System view

Parameters

configuration: Specifies to send configuration traps.

flash: Specifies to send Flash traps.
standard: Specifies to send SNMP standard notification or traps.
authentication: Specifies to send SNMP authentication failure traps in cases of authentication failures.
coldstart: Specifies to send SNMP cold start traps when the device is rebooted.
linkdown: Specifies to send SNMP linkDown traps when a port becomes down.
linkup: Specifies to send SNMP linkUp traps when a port becomes up.
warmstart: Specifies to send SNMP warm start traps when SNMP is newly launched.
system: Specifies to send SYS-MAN-MIB (proprietary MIB) traps.

Description

Use the snmp-agent trap enable command to enable a device to send SNMP traps that are of
specified types.
Use the undo snmp-agent trap enable command to disable a device from sending SNMP traps that
are of specified types.
By default, a device sends all types of SNMP traps.
The snmp-agent trap enable command need to be coupled with the snmp-agent target-host
command. The snmp-agent target-host command specifies the destination hosts for SNMP traps. At
least one destination host is required for SNMP traps.

Examples

# Enable sending of SNMP authentication failure traps, with the destination IP address being 10.1.1.1
and the community name being public.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent trap enable standard authentication
[Sysname] snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1 params securityname public

1-22
snmp-agent trap ifmib

Syntax

snmp-agent trap ifmib link extended

undo snmp-agent trap ifmib link extended

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the snmp-agent trap ifmib link extended command to configure the extended trap. “Interface
description” and “interface type” are added into the extended linkUp/linkDown trap.
Use the undo snmp-agent trap ifmib link extended command to restore the default setting.
By default, the linkUp/linkDown trap uses the standard format defined in IF-MIB (refer to RFC 1213 for
detail). In this case, no MIB object name is added after the OID field of the MIB object.

Examples

# Before the configuration of the extended trap function, the trap information is as follows when a link is
down:
#Apr 2 05:53:15:883 2000 3Com L2INF/2/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 -
Trap 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3(linkDown): portIndex is 4227634, ifAdminStatus is 2, ifOperStatus
is 2
#Apr 2 05:53:16:094 2000 3Com IFNET/5/TRAP:- 1 -1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3(linkDown) Interface 31
is Down

# Configure the extended linkUp/linkDown trap format to make traps include the interface description
and interface type information.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent trap ifmib link extended

# After the configuration of the extended trap function, the trap information is as follows when a link is
down:
#Apr 2 05:55:00:642 2000 3Com L2INF/2/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 -
Trap 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3(linkDown): portIndex is 4227634, ifAdminStatus is 2, ifOperStatus
is 2,ifDescr='GigabitEthernet1/0/2', ifType=6
#Apr 2 05:55:00:893 2000 3Com IFNET/5/TRAP:- 1 -1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3(linkDown) Interface 31
is Down. ifAdminStatus=1, ifOperStatus=2, ifDescr='Vlan-interface1',ifType=136

The above output indicates that the interface description and interface type information is added into the
traps, thus facilitating fault location.

1-23
snmp-agent trap life

Syntax

snmp-agent trap life seconds

undo snmp-agent trap life

View

System view

Parameters

seconds: SNMP trap aging time (in seconds) to be set, ranging from 1 to 2,592,000.

Description

Use the snmp-agent trap life command to set the SNMP trap aging time. SNMP traps exceeding the
aging time will be discarded.
Use the undo snmp-agent trap life command to restore the default SNMP trap aging time.
By default, the SNMP trap aging time is 120 seconds.
The system discards the traps that timed out and not sent in the SNMP trap queue.
Related commands: snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent target-host.

Examples

# Set the SNMP trap aging time to 60 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent trap life 60

snmp-agent trap queue-size

Syntax

snmp-agent trap queue-size size

undo snmp-agent trap queue-size

View

System view

Parameters

size: The maximum number of traps that can be stored in the queue, an integer ranging from 1 to 1,000.

Description

Use the snmp-agent trap queue-size command to set the length of the queue of the SNMP traps to be
sent to the destination.
Use the undo snmp-agent trap queue-size command to restore the default queue length.
By default, an SNMP trap queue can contain up to 100 SNMP traps.

1-24
After a trap is generated, it will enter the trap queue to be sent. The length of a trap queue decides the
maximum number of traps in the queue. When a trap queue reaches the configured length, the newly
generated traps will enter the queue, and the traps generated the earliest will be discarded.
Related commands: snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent target-host, and snmp-agent trap life.

Examples

# Set the SNMP trap queue length to 200.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent trap queue-size 200

snmp-agent trap source

Syntax

snmp-agent trap source interface-type interface-number

undo snmp-agent trap source

View

System view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number. The source IP address of the trap
is the IP address of this interface.

Description

Use the snmp-agent trap source command to configure the source address for the SNMP traps sent.
Use the undo snmp-agent trap source command to cancel the configuration.
By default, the outbound interface is determined by SNMP and the IP address of this interface is used
as the source IP address of the traps.
After the command is executed, the system uses the primary IP address of the specified interface as the
source IP address of the traps sent. Thus on the NMS you can use the IP address to uniquely identify
the agent.
For example, although the agent uses different outbound interfaces to send traps, the NMS can still use
the IP address to filter all the traps that the agent sends.
You can configure this command to track a specific event by the source addresses of SNMP traps.

Before configuring an interface as the source interface for the SNMP traps sent, make sure the interface
is assigned an IP address.

Related commands: snmp-agent trap enable, snmp-agent target-host.

1-25
Examples

# Configure VLAN-interface 1 as the source interface for the SNMP traps sent.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] snmp-agent trap source Vlan-interface 1

snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c }

Syntax

snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name [ acl acl-number ]

undo snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name

View

System view

Parameters

v1: Creates an SNMPv1 user.

v2c: Creates an SNMPv2c user.
v3: Specifies to use SNMPv3 security mode.
user-name: Name of the user to be added, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
group-name: Name of the group corresponding to the user, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
acl-number: ID of a basic ACL, in the range 2000 to 2999. Using basic ACL can restrict the source
addresses of SNMP messages, namely, permitting or refusing the SNMP messages with specific
source addresses, thus restricting access between the NMS and the agent.

Description

Use the snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } command to add a user to an SNMP group.
Use the undo snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } command to remove a user from an SNMP group.
This command is applicable to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c, and is equal to using the snmp-agent
community command to create a community.
As the SNMP protocol defines, in the networking of SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c, community name is used
for authentication between NMS and agent, and in the networking of SNMPv3, username is used for
authentication. If you want to configure a username and use the username for authentication, the
device supports SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c users. Creating an SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c user is equal to
adding a new community name. If you fill the newly created username into the community name field of
the NMS, the NMS can establish a connection with the SNMP.
To make the configured user take effect, you must create a group first.
Related commands: snmp-agent group, snmp-agent community, and snmp-agent local-engineid.

Examples

# Create a group named readCom and an SNMPv2c user userv2c.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] snmp-agent sys-info version v2c
[Sysname] snmp-agent group v2c readCom

1-26
[Sysname] snmp-agent usm-user v2c userv2c readCom

Specify the SNMP version of the NMS as SNMPv2c, fill the write community name field with userv2c.
Then the NMS can access the agent.
# Create an SNMPv2c user userv2c in group readCom, permitting only the NMS with an IP address
1.1.1.1 to access the agent, and denying the access of other NMSs.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] acl number 2001
[Sysname-acl-basic-2001] rule permit source 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
[Sysname-acl-basic-2001] rule deny source any
[Sysname-acl-basic-2001] quit
[Sysname] snmp-agent sys-info version v2c
[Sysname] snmp-agent group v2c readCom
[Sysname] snmp-agent usm-user v2c userv2c readCom acl 2001

Specify the SNMP version of the NMS with an IP address 1.1.1.1 as SNMPv2c, fill the write community
name field with userv2c. Then the NMS can access the agent.

snmp-agent usm-user v3

Syntax

snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name [ [ cipher ] authentication-mode { md5 | sha }

auth-password [ privacy-mode { des56 | aes128 } priv-password ] ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name { local | engineid engineid-string }

View

System view

Parameters

user-name: Username, a string of 1 to 32 characters.

group-name: Name of the group corresponding to the user, a string of 1 to 32 characters.
cipher: Specifies the authentication password (auth-password) or encryption password (priv-password)
to be in cipher text. The cipher text password can be calculated using the snmp-agent
calculate-password command.
authentication-mode: Specifies the security mode as authentication required. If you do not specify this
keyword, neither authentication nor encryption is performed.
md5: Uses HMAC MD5 algorithm for authentication.
sha: Uses HMAC SHA algorithm for authentication, which is securer than MD5.
auth-password: Authentication password, a string of 1 to 64 characters in plain text, a 32-bit
hexadecimal number in cipher text if MD5 algorithm is used, and a 40-bit hexadecimal number in cipher
text if SHA algorithm is used.
privacy: Specifies the security mode as encrypted.
des56: Specifies the encryption protocol as Data Encryption Standard (DES).
aes128: Specifies the encryption protocol as Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), which is securer
than DES.

1-27
priv-password: Encryption password, a string of 1 to 64 characters in plain text, a 32-bit hexadecimal
number in cipher text if MD5 algorithm is used, and a 40-bit hexadecimal number in cipher text if SHA
algorithm is used.
acl-number: Binds a user with an ACL, where acl-number represents ACL number, in the range 2000 to
2999. Using ACLs can restrict the source addresses of SNMP messages, namely, permitting or refusing
the SNMP messages with specific source addresses, thus restricting access between the NMS and the
agent.
local: Specifies a local entity user.
engineid-string: Engine ID associated with the user, an even number of hexadecimal characters, in the
range 10 to 64.

Description

Use the snmp-agent usm-user command to add a user to an SNMP group.

Use the undo snmp-agent usm-user command to remove a user from an SNMP group.
This command is applicable to SNMPv3. If the agent and the NMS communicate using SNMPv3
messages, you need to create an SNMPv3 user first.
To make the configured user take effect, you need to create a group first. You can configure whether to
perform authentication or privacy when you create a group, and configure the algorithm and password
for authentication or privacy when you create a user.
An SNMPv3 user is related the engine ID: if you change the engine ID after configuring a user, the user
corresponding to the original engine ID becomes invalid.
Note that:
z If the password is in cipher text, the pri-password argument can be obtained by the snmp-agent
calculate-password command. To make the calculated cipher text password applicable to the
snmp-agent usm-user v3 cipher command, ensure that the same authentication algorithm is
specified for the two commands and the local engine ID specified in the snmp-agent usm-user v3
cipher command is consistent with the SNMP entity engine ID specified in the snmp-agent
calculate-password command.
z If you use the command repeatedly to configure the same user (namely, with the same username),
the last configuration takes effect.
z You must enter a plain text password when the NMS accesses the device. Therefore, when you
create a user, you need to memorize the username and the corresponding plain text password.
Related commands: snmp-agent group, snmp-agent community, snmp-agent local-engineid.

Examples

# Add a user named testUser to the SNMPv3 group named testGroup. Set the security mode to
authentication without privacy, the authentication algorithm to md5, and authentication password
authkey.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] snmp-agent group v3 testGroup authentication
[Sysname] snmp-agent usm-user v3 testUser testGroup authentication-mode md5 authkey

On the NMS, set the version to SNMPv3, the username to testUser, the authentication algorithm to
MD5, and the authentication password to authkey, and establish a connection with the device. Then
the NMS can access the MIB objects in the view ViewDefault on the device.

1-28
# Add a user named testUser to the SNMPv3 group named testGroup. Set the security mode to
authentication with privacy, the authentication algorithm to md5, the privacy algorithm to des56, the
plain text authentication password to authkey, the plain text privacy password to prikey.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] snmp-agent group v3 testgroup privacy
[Sysname] snmp-agent usm-user v3 testUser testGroup authentication-mode md5 authkey
privacy-mode des56 prikey

On the NMS, set the version to SNMPv3, the username to testUser, the authentication algorithm to
MD5, the authentication password to authkey, the privacy algorithm to DES, and the privacy password
to prikey, and establish a connection with the device. Then the NMS can access the MIB objects in the
view ViewDefault on the device.
# Add a user named testUser to the SNMPv3 group named testGroup in cipher mode (namely, the
authentication and privacy passwords should be in cipher text). Set the security mode to authentication
with privacy, the authentication algorithm to md5, the privacy algorithm to des56, the authentication
password to authkey, and the cipher text privacy password to prikey.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] snmp-agent group v3 testgroup privacy
[Sysname] snmp-agent calculate-password authkey mode md5 local-engineid
The secret key is: 09659EC5A9AE91BA189E5845E1DDE0CC
[Sysname] snmp-agent calculate-password prikey mode md5 local-engineid
The secret key is: 800D7F26E786C4BECE61BF01E0A22705
[Sysname] snmp-agent usm-user v3 testUser testGroup cipher authentication-mode md5
09659EC5A9AE91BA189E5845E1DDE0CC privacy-mode des56 800D7F26E786C4BECE61BF01E0A22705

1-29
2 RMON Configuration Commands

RMON Configuration Commands

display rmon alarm

Syntax

display rmon alarm [ entry-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

entry-number: Alarm entry index, in the range 1 to 65535.

Description

Use the display rmon alarm command to display the configuration of a specified alarm entry or all the
alarm entries. The configuration information includes: sampling type, sampled node, sampling interval,
rising and falling thresholds that trigger alarms, the condition under which an alarm is triggered, and the
last sampled value.
Related commands: rmon alarm.

Examples

# Display the configuration of all the alarm entries.

<Sysname> display rmon alarm
Alarm table 1 owned by user1 is VALID.
Samples type : absolute
Variable formula : 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1<etherStatsOctets.1>
Sampling interval : 20(sec)
Rising threshold : 100(linked with event 1)
Falling threshold : 10(linked with event 2)
When startup enables : risingOrFallingAlarm
Latest value : 5510006

Table 2-1 display rmon alarm command output description

Field Description
Alarm table Index of an entry in the alarm entry
user1 Entry owner: user1
Valid The alarm entry identified by the index is valid.
Samples type Sampling type, which can be absolute or delta
Variable formula The sampled node

2-1
Field Description
Sampling interval, in seconds. The system
Sampling interval performs absolute or delta sampling on the
sampled node at this interval.
Rising threshold. When the sampled value
Rising threshold equals or exceeds the rising threshold, an alarm
is triggered.
Falling threshold. When the sampled value
Falling threshold equals or falls under the falling threshold, an
alarm is triggered.
The condition under which an alarm is triggered,
which can be:
z risingOrFallingAlarm: An alarm is triggered
when the rising or falling threshold is
When startup enables reached.
z risingAlarm: An alarm is triggered when the
rising threshold is reached.
z FallingAlarm: An alarm is triggered when the
falling threshold is reached.
Latest value The value of the latest sample

display rmon event

Syntax

display rmon event [ event-entry ]

View

Any view

Parameters

event-entry: RMON event entry index, in the range 1 to 65535. If you do not specify the event-entry
argument, the configuration of all the RMON event entries is displayed.

Description

Use the display rmon event command to display the configuration of a specified RMON event entry.
RMON event information includes the following:
z Event entry index
z Event entry owner
z Event description
z The action triggered by the event (log or alarm messages)
z The time (in seconds) when the latest event is triggered (in terms of the time elapsed since the
system is started/initialized).
Related commands: rmon event.

Examples

# Display the configuration of all the RMON event entries.

<Sysname> display rmon event

2-2
Event table 1 owned by user1 is VALID.
Description: null.
Will cause log-trap when triggered, last triggered at 0days 00h:02m:27s.

Table 2-2 display rmon event command output description

Field Description
Event table Index of an entry in the RMON event table
The status of the entry identified by the index is
VALID
valid.
Description RMON event description
Will cause log-trap when triggered The event triggers logging and an alarm trap.

last triggered at Time when the latest event is triggered

display rmon eventlog

Syntax

display rmon eventlog [ event-entry ]

View

Any view

Parameters

event-entry: RMON event entry index, in the range 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify the event-entry
argument, the logs of all the RMON events are displayed.

Description

Use the display rmon eventlog command to display the log of an RMON event.
On creating an RMON event, you can configure to record the event information into the logbuffer when
an event is triggered, thus facilitating displaying of the information. The recorded information includes:
z RMON event entry Index
z Current RMON event entry status
z The time (in seconds) when an event log is generated (in terms of the time elapsed since the
system is started or initialized)
z RMON event description.

Examples

# Display the log generated by the event entry numbered 1.

<Sysname> display rmon eventlog 1
Event table 1 owned by user1 is VALID.
Generates eventLog 1.1 at 0days 00h:01m:39s.
Description: The 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1 defined in alarm table 1,
less than(or =) 100 with alarm value 0. Alarm sample type is absolute.
Generates eventLog 1.2 at 0days 00h:02m:27s.
Description: The alarm formula defined in private alarm table 1,

2-3
less than(or =) 100 with alarm value 0. Alarm sample type is absolute.

Table 2-3 display rmon eventlog command output description

Field Description
Event table Index of an entry in the RMON event table
The status of the entry identified by the index is
VALID
valid.
Time when the event is triggered. The event can
Generates eventLog 1.1 at 0days 00h:02m:27s be triggered for multiple times. 1.1 indicates the
time when event 1 is first triggered.
Description Description of the RMON event log

The above output indicates that two logs are generated due to event 1:
z Log 1.1 is generated from alarm entry 1, because the sampled value (0) of the alarm entry is lower
than the falling threshold (100). The sampling type is absolute.
z Log 1.1 is generated from prialarm entry 1, because the sampled value (0) of the prialarm entry is
lower than the falling threshold (100). The sampling type is absolute.

display rmon history

Syntax

display rmon history [ interface-type interface-number | unit unit-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type: Interface type.

interface-number: Interface number.
unit unit-number: Specifies a unit number.

Description

Use the display rmon history command to display the RMON history information about a specified
port. The information about the latest sample, including bandwidth utilization, the number of errors, the
total number of packets, and so on, is also displayed.
After a history entry is created on a port, the system collects statistics of the port at a certain interval,
and saves the information in the etherHistoryEntry table. You can use the command to display the
records saved in the table.
If you do not provide the interface-type interface-number or unit-number argument, this command
displays the RMON history information about all the ports/units.
Related commands: rmon history.

Examples

# Display the RMON history information about GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> display rmon history GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

2-4
History control entry 1 owned by user1 is VALID
Samples interface : GigabitEthernet1/0/1<ifIndex.4227625>
Sampling interval : 5(sec) with 10 buckets max
Latest sampled values :
Dropevents : 0 , octets : 10035
packets : 64 , broadcast packets : 35
multicast packets : 8 , CRC alignment errors : 0
undersize packets : 0 , oversize packets : 0
fragments : 0 , jabbers : 0
collisions : 0 , utilization : 0

Table 2-4 display rmon history command output description

Field Description
History control entry Index of an entry in the history control table
The status of the entry identified by the index is
VALID
valid.
Samples interface Interface on which statistics are collected
Statistics interval in seconds. The system
Sampling interval
collects statistics of the port at this interval.
buckets Number of the records in the history control table
Latest sampled values Latest sampled values
dropevents Number of the packet-dropping events
Number of the received/transmitted bytes during
octets
sampling duration
Number of the received/transmitted packets
packets
during sampling duration
broadcastpackets Number of the broadcast packets
multicastpackets Number of the multicast packets
CRC alignment errors Number of the packet with CRC errors

undersize packets Number of the undersize packets

oversize packets Number of the oversize packets
Number of the undersize packets with CRC
fragments
errors
jabbers Number of the oversize packets with CRC errors
collisions Number of the packets that cause collisions
utilization Bandwidth utilization

display rmon prialarm

Syntax

display rmon prialarm [ prialarm-entry-number ]

2-5
View

Any view

Parameters

prialarm-entry-number: Extended alarm entry Index, in the range 1 to 65,535.

Description

Use the display rmon prialarm command to display the configuration of an RMON extended alarm
entry. If you do not specify the prialarm-entry-number argument, the configuration of all the extended
alarm entries is displayed.
The information in an extended alarm entry includes: sampling type, variable formula of the sampled
node, sampling interval, rising and falling thresholds that trigger an alarm, the condition under which an
alarm is triggered, and the last sampled value.
Related commands: rmon prialarm.

Examples

# Display the configuration of all the extended RMON alarm entries.

<Sysname> display rmon prialarm
Prialarm table 1 owned by user1 is VALID.
Samples type : absolute
Variable formula : ((.1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1)*100)
Description :
Sampling interval : 10(sec)
Rising threshold : 10000(linked with event 1)
Falling threshold : 2000(linked with event 1)
When startup enables : risingOrFallingAlarm
This entry will exist : forever.
Latest value : 0

Table 2-5 display rmon prialarm command output description

Field Description
Prialarm table Index of an entry in the extended alarm table
owned by user1 Entry owner: user 1
VALID The alarm entry identified by the index is valid.
Samples type Sampling type: absolute or delta
Variable formula Variable formula of the sampled node

Description Description
Sampling interval in seconds. The system
Sampling interval
collects statistics of the port at this interval.
Rising threshold. When the sampled value
Rising threshold equals or exceeds the rising threshold, an alarm
is triggered.
Falling threshold. When the sampled value
Falling threshold equals or falls under the falling threshold, an
alarm is triggered.

2-6
Field Description
Linked with event Event index corresponding to an alarm
The condition under which an alarm is triggered,
which can be:
z risingOrFallingAlarm: An alarm is triggered
when the rising or falling threshold is
When startup enables: risingOrFallingAlarm reached.
z risingAlarm: An alarm is triggered when the
rising threshold is reached.
z FallingAlarm: An alarm is triggered when the
falling threshold is reached.
Existing period. This entry can exist forever or
This entry will exist: forever
exist in the specified cycle
Latest value The value of the latest sample

display rmon statistics

Syntax

display rmon statistics [ interface-type interface-number | unit unit-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type: Interface type.

interface-number: Interface number.
unit unit-number: Specifies a unit number.

Description

Use the display rmon statistics command to display the RMON statistics on a specified port or a
specified unit. If you do not specify the port or the unit, this command displays the RMON statistics on all
the ports or units.
The information displayed includes the number of:
z Collisions
z Packets with CRC errors
z Undersize/Oversize packets
z Broadcast/multicast packets
z Received bytes
z Received packets
Related commands: rmon statistics.

Examples

# Display the RMON statistics on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 port.

<Sysname> display rmon statistics GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
Statistics entry 1 owned by user1-rmon is VALID.

2-7
Interface : GigabitEthernet1/0/1<ifIndex.4227625>
etherStatsOctets : 30561 , etherStatsPkts : 217
etherStatsBroadcastPkts : 102 , etherStatsMulticastPkts : 25
etherStatsUndersizePkts : 0 , etherStatsOversizePkts : 0
etherStatsFragments : 0 , etherStatsJabbers : 0
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors : 0 , etherStatsCollisions : 0
etherStatsDropEvents (insufficient resources): 0
Packets received according to length:
64 : 177 , 65-127 : 27 , 128-255 : 2
256-511: 0 , 512-1023: 0 , 1024-1518: 11

Table 2-6 display rmon statistics command output description

Field Description
Statistics entry Index of the statistics information entry
VALID The statistics table is valid.
Interface Interface which the statistics is on
etherStatsOctets Number of bytes received
etherStatsPkts Number of the packets received

etherStatsBroadcastPkts Number of broadcast packets received

etherStatsMulticastPkts Number of multicast packets received
etherStatsUndersizePkts Number of undersize packets received

etherStatsOversizePkts Number of oversize packets received

Number of undersize packets received with CRC
etherStatsFragments
errors
Number of oversize packets received with CRC
etherStatsJabbers
errors
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors Number of packets received with CRC errors
Number of the received packets that cause
etherStatsCollisions
collisions
etherStatsDropEvents Event about dropping packets
Number of the received packets that are of
Packets received according to length
different lengths

rmon alarm

Syntax

rmon alarm entry-number alarm-variable sampling-time { delta | absolute } rising_threshold

threshold-value1 event-entry1 falling_threshold threshold-value2 event-entry2 [ owner text ]
undo rmon alarm entry-number

View

System view

2-8
Parameters

entry-number: Index of the alarm entry to be added/removed, in the range 1 to 65535.

alarm-variable: Alarm variable, a string comprising 1 to 256 characters in dotted node OID format (such
as 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.10.1). Only the variables that can be resolved to ASN.1 INTEGER data type (that is,
INTEGER, Counter, Gauge, or TimeTicks) can be used as alarm variables.
sampling-time: Sampling interval (in seconds), in the range 5 to 65,535.
delta: Specifies to sample increments (that is, the current increment with regard to the latest sample)
absolute: Specifies to sample absolute values.
rising_threshold threshold-value1: Specifies the rising threshold. The threshold-value1 argument
ranges from 0 to 2,147,483,647.
event-entry1: Index of the event entry corresponding to the rising threshold, in the range of 0 to 65535.
falling_threshold threshold-value2: Specifies the falling threshold. The threshold-value2 argument
ranges from 0 to 2,147,483,647.
event-entry2: Index of the event entry corresponding to the falling threshold, in the range 0 to 65535.
owner text: Specifies the owner of the entry, a string of 1 to 127 characters.

Description

Use the rmon alarm command to add an alarm entry to the alarm table. If you do not specify the owner
text keyword/argument combination, the owner of the entry is displayed as “null”.
Use the undo rmon alarm command to remove an alarm entry from the alarm table.
You can use the rmon alarm command to define an alarm entry so that a specific alarm event can be
triggered under specific circumstances. The act (such as logging and sending traps to NMS) taken after
an alarm event occurs is determined by the corresponding alarm entry.

Before adding an alarm entry, make sure the events to be referenced in the alarm entry exist. Refer to
the rmon event command for related information.

With an alarm entry defined in an alarm group, a network device performs the following operations
accordingly:
z Sample the defined alarm variables (alarm-variable) once in each specified period, which is
specified by the sampling-time argument.
z Comparing the sampled value with the set thresholds and performing the corresponding operations,
as described in Table 2-7.

Table 2-7 Sample value and the corresponding operation

Comparison Operation
The sample value is larger than or equal to the Triggering the event identified by the
set upper threshold (threshold-value1) event-entry1 argument

2-9
Comparison Operation
The sample value is smaller than the set lower Triggering the event identified by the
threshold (threshold-value2) event-entry2 argument

z Before adding an alarm entry, you need to use the rmon event command to define the events to be
referenced by the alarm entry.
z Make sure the node to be monitored exists before executing the rmon alarm command.

Examples

# Add the alarm entry numbered 1 as follows:

z The node to be monitored: 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1
z Sampling interval: 10 seconds
z Upper threshold: 50
z The event-entry1 argument identifies event 1.
z Lower threshold: 5
z The event-entry2 argument identifies event 2
z Owner: user1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] rmon statistics 1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
[Sysname] rmon event 1 log
[Sysname] rmon event 2 none
[Sysname] rmon alarm 1 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1 10 absolute rising_threshold 50 1
falling_threshold 5 2 owner user1

# Remove the alarm entry numbered 15 from the alarm table.

[Sysname] undo rmon alarm 15

rmon event

Syntax

rmon event event-entry [ description string ] { log | trap trap-community | log-trap log-trapcommunity
| none } [ owner text ]
undo rmon event event-entry

View

System view

Parameters

event-entry: Event entry index, in the range of 1 to 65535.

2-10
description string: Specifies the event description, a string of 1 to 127 characters.
log: Logs events.
trap: Sends traps to the NMS.
trap-community: Community name of the NMS that receives the traps, a string of 1 to 127 characters.
log-trap: Logs the event and sends traps to the NMS.
log-trapcommunity: Community name of the NMS that receives the traps, a character string of 1 to 127
characters.
none: Specifies that the event triggers no action.
owner text: Specifies the owner of the event entry, a string of 1 to 127 characters.

Description

Use the rmon event command to add an entry to the event table. If you do not specify the owner text
keyword/argument combination, the owner of the entry is displayed as “null”.
Use the undo rmon event command to remove an entry from the event table.
When adding an event entry to an event table, you need to specify the event index. You need also to
specify the corresponding actions, including logging the event, sending traps to the NMS, and the both,
for the network device to perform corresponding operation when an alarm referencing the event is
triggered.

Examples

# Add the event entry numbered 10 to the event table and configure it to be a log event.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] rmon event 10 log

rmon history

Syntax

rmon history entry-number buckets number interval sampling-interval [ owner text ]

undo rmon history entry-number

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

entry-number: History entry index, in the range of 1 to 65535.

buckets number: Specifies the size of the history table that corresponds to the entry, in the range 1 to
65535.
interval sampling-interval: Specifies the sampling interval (in seconds). The sampling-interval
argument ranges from 5 to 3600.
owner text: Specifies the owner of the entry, a string of 1 to 127 characters.

2-11
Description

Use the rmon history command to add an entry to the history control table. If you do not specify the
owner text keyword/argument combination, the owner of the entry is displayed as “null”.
Use the undo rmon history command to remove an entry from the history control table.
You can use the rmon history command to sample a specific port. You can also set the sampling
interval and the number of the samples that can be saved. After you execute this command, the RMON
system samples the port periodically and stores the samples for later retrieval. The sampled information
includes utilization, the number of errors, and total number of packets.
You can use the display rmon history command to display the statistics of the history control table.

Examples

# Create the history control entry numbered 1 for GigabitEthernet 1/0/1, with the table size being 10, the
sampling interval being 5 seconds, and the owner being user1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]rmon history 1 buckets 10 interval 5 owner user1

# Remove the history control entry numbered 15.

[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] undo rmon history 15

rmon prialarm

Syntax

rmon prialarm entry-number prialarm-formula prialarm-des sampling-timer { delta | absolute |

changeratio } rising_threshold threshold-value1 event-entry1 falling_threshold threshold-value2
event-entry2 entrytype { forever | cycle cycle-period } [ owner text ]
undo rmon prialarm entry-number

View

System view

Parameters

entry-number: Extended alarm entry index, in the range 1 to 65535.

prialarm-formula: Expression used to perform operations on the alarm variables, a string of 1 to 256
characters. The alarm variables in the expression must be represented by OIDs, for example,
(.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.10.1)*8. The operations available are addition, subtraction, multiplication and division
operations. The operation results are rounded to values that are of long integer type. To prevent invalid
operation results, make sure the operation results of each step are valid long integers.
prialarm-des: Alarm description, a string of 1 to 128 characters.
sampling-timer: Sampling interval (in seconds), in the range 10 to 65535.
delta | absolute | changeratio: Specifies the sample type.
threshold-value1: Upper threshold, in the range 0 to 2147483647.
event-entry1: Index of the event entry that corresponds to the rising threshold, in the range 0 to 65535.

2-12
threshold-value2: Lower threshold, in the range 0 to 2147483647.
event-entry2: Index of the event entry that corresponds to the falling threshold, in the range 0 to 65535.
forever: Specifies the corresponding RMON alarm instance is valid permanently.
cycle: Specifies the corresponding RMON alarm instance is valid periodically.
cycle-period: Life time (in seconds) of the RMON alarm instance, in the range 0 to 2147483647.
owner text: Specifies the owner of the alarm entry, a string of 1 to 127 characters.

Description

Use the rmon prialarm command to create an extended entry in an extended RMON alarm table. If you
do not specify the owner text keyword/argument combination, the owner of the entry is displayed as
“null”.
Use the undo rmon prialarm command to remove an extended alarm entry.

z Before adding an extended alarm entry, you need to use the rmon event command to define the
events to be referenced by the entry.
z Make sure the node to be monitored exists before executing the rmon event command.
z You can define up to 50 extended alarm entries.

With an extended alarm entry defined in an extended alarm group, the device performs the following
operations accordingly:
z Sampling the alarm variables referenced in the defined extended alarm expression
(prialarm-formula) once in each period specified by the sampling-timer argument.
z Performing operations on the sampled values according to the defined extended alarm expression
(prialarm-formula)
z Comparing the operation result with the set thresholds and perform corresponding operations, as
described in Table 2-8.

Table 2-8 Operation result and corresponding operation

Comparison Operation
The operation result is larger than or equal to the Triggering the event identified by the
set upper threshold (threshold-value1) event-entry1 argument
The operation result is smaller than or equal to Triggering the event identified by the
the set lower threshold (threshold-value2) event-entry2 argument

Examples

# Add the extended alarm entry numbered 2 as follows:

z Perform operations on the corresponding alarm variables using the expression
((1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1)*100).
z Sampling interval: 10 seconds
z Rising threshold: 50

2-13
z Falling threshold: 5
z Event 1 is triggered when the change ratio is larger than the rising threshold.
z Event 2 is triggered when the change ratio is less than the falling threshold.
z The alarm entry is valid forever.
z Entry owner: user1
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] rmon statistics 1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
[Sysname] rmon prialarm 2 ((.1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1)*100) test 10 changeratio
rising_threshold 50 1 falling_threshold 5 2 entrytype forever owner user1

# Remove the extended alarm entry numbered 2 from the extended alarm table.
[Sysname] undo rmon prialarm 2

rmon statistics

Syntax

rmon statistics entry-number [ owner text ]

undo rmon statistics entry-number

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

entry-number: Statistics entry Index, in the range 1 to 65535.

owner text: Specifies the owner of the entry, a string of 1 to 127 characters.

Description

Use the rmon statistics command to add an entry to the statistics table. If you do not specify the owner
text keyword/argument combination, the owner of the entry is displayed as “null”.
Use the undo rmon statistics command to remove an entry from the statistics table.
The RMON statistics management function is used to take statistics of the usage of the monitored ports
and errors occurred on them. The statistics includes the number of the following items:
z Collisions
z Packets with CRC errors
z Undersize/Oversize packets
z Broadcast/Multicast packets
z Received packets
z Received bytes

2-14
For each port, only one RMON statistics entry can be created. That is, if an RMON statistics entry was
already created for a given port, you will fail to create a statistics entry with a different index for the port.

You can use the display rmon statistics command to display the information about the statistics entry.

Examples

# Add the statistics entry numbered 20 to take statistics of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] rmon statistics 20

2-15
Table of Contents

1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands ····························································································1-1

IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands·····························································································1-1
display igmp-snooping configuration ·······························································································1-1
display igmp-snooping group ··········································································································1-2
display igmp-snooping statistics······································································································1-3
igmp-snooping ·································································································································1-4
igmp-snooping fast-leave ················································································································1-5
igmp-snooping general-query source-ip··························································································1-6
igmp-snooping group-limit ···············································································································1-7
igmp-snooping group-policy ············································································································1-8
igmp-snooping host-aging-time ·····································································································1-10
igmp-snooping max-response-time ·······························································································1-10
igmp-snooping nonflooding-enable ·······························································································1-11
igmp-snooping querier···················································································································1-12
igmp-snooping query-interval ········································································································1-13
igmp-snooping router-aging-time ··································································································1-13
igmp-snooping special-query source-ip·························································································1-14
igmp-snooping version ··················································································································1-15
igmp-snooping vlan-mapping ········································································································1-15
igmp host-join ································································································································1-16
multicast static-group interface······································································································1-17
multicast static-group vlan ·············································································································1-18
multicast static-router-port ·············································································································1-19
multicast static-router-port vlan ·····································································································1-19
reset igmp-snooping statistics ·······································································································1-20
service-type multicast ····················································································································1-20

2 Common Multicast Configuration Commands ·······················································································2-1

Common Multicast Configuration Commands ························································································2-1
display mac-address multicast ········································································································2-1
mac-address multicast interface······································································································2-2
mac-address multicast vlan ·············································································································2-3
unknown-multicast drop enable·······································································································2-3

i
1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands

IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands

display igmp-snooping configuration

Syntax

display igmp-snooping configuration

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display igmp-snooping configuration command to display IGMP Snooping configuration
information.
If IGMP Snooping is disabled on this switch, this command displays a message showing that IGMP
Snooping is not enabled.
With IGMP Snooping enabled, this command displays the following information:
z IGMP Snooping status
z aging time of the router port
z maximum response time in IGMP queries
z aging time of multicast member ports
z non-flooding feature status
Related commands: igmp-snooping, igmp-snooping router-aging-time, igmp-snooping
max-response-time, igmp-snooping host-aging-time, igmp-snooping nonflooding-enable.

Examples

# Display IGMP Snooping configuration information on the switch.

<Sysname> display igmp-snooping configuration
Enable IGMP-Snooping.
The router port timeout is 105 second(s).
The max response timeout is 10 second(s).
The host port timeout is 260 second(s).
Enable IGMP-Snooping Non-Flooding.

The above-mentioned information shows: IGMP Snooping is enabled, the aging time of the router port
is 105 seconds, the maximum response time in IGMP queries is 10 seconds, the aging time of multicast
member ports is 260 seconds, and the IGMP Snooping non-flooding feature is enabled.

1-1
display igmp-snooping group

Syntax

display igmp-snooping group [ vlan vlan-id ]

View

Any view

Parameters

vlan vlan-id: Specifies the VLAN in which the multicast group information is to be displayed, where
vlan-id ranges from 1 to 4094. If you do not specify a VLAN, this command displays the multicast group
information of all VLANs.

Description

Use the display igmp-snooping group command to display the IGMP Snooping multicast group
information.
Related commands: igmp-snooping, igmp host-join, multicast static-group vlan, multicast
static-group interface, multicast static-group vlan, multicast static-router-port, multicast
static-router-port vlan

Examples

# Display the information about the multicast groups in all VLANs.

<Sysname> display igmp-snooping group
Total 1 IP Group(s).
Total 1 MAC Group(s).
Vlan(id):99.
Total 1 IP Group(s).
Total 1 MAC Group(s).
Static Router port(s):
GigabitEthernet1/0/11
Dynamic Router port(s):
GigabitEthernet1/0/22
IP group(s):the following ip group(s) match to one mac group.
IP group address:228.0.0.0
Static host port(s):
GigabitEthernet1/0/23
Dynamic host port(s):
GigabitEthernet1/0/10
MAC group(s):
MAC group address:0100-5e00-0000
Host port(s): GigabitEthernet1/0/10 GigabitEthernet1/0/23

Table 1-1 display igmp-snooping group command output description

Field Description
Total 1 IP Group(s). Total number of IP multicast groups in all VLANs

1-2
Field Description
Total number of MAC multicast groups in all
Total 1 MAC Group(s).
VLANs
ID of the VLAN whose multicast group
Vlan(id):
information is displayed
Total 1 IP Group(s). Total number of IP multicast groups in VLAN 100
Total number of MAC multicast groups in VLAN
Total 1 MAC Group(s).
100
Static Router port(s): Static router port
Dynamic Router port(s): Dynamic router port

Static host port(s): Static member port

Dynamic host port(s): Dynamic member port
IP group address: IP address of a multicast group
MAC group(s): MAC multicast group
MAC group address: Address of a MAC multicast group
Host port(s) Member ports

display igmp-snooping statistics

Syntax

display igmp-snooping statistics

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display igmp-snooping statistics command to display IGMP Snooping statistics.
This command displays the following information: the numbers of the IGMP general query messages,
IGMP group-specific query messages, IGMPv1 report messages, IGMPv2 report messages, IGMP
leave messages and error IGMP packets received, and the number of the IGMP group-specific query
messages sent.

When IGMPv3 Snooping is enabled, the device makes statistics of IGMPv3 messages as IGMPv2
messages.

Related commands: igmp-snooping.

1-3
Examples

# Display IGMP Snooping statistics.

<Sysname> display igmp-snooping statistics
Received IGMP general query packet(s) number:1.
Received IGMP specific query packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP V1 report packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP V2 report packet(s) number:3.
Received IGMP leave packet(s) number:0.
Received error IGMP packet(s) number:0.
Sent IGMP specific query packet(s) number:0.

The information above shows that IGMP receives:

z one IGMP general query messages
z zero IGMP specific query messages
z zero IGMPv1 report messages
z three IGMPv2 report messages
z zero IGMP leave messages
z zero IGMP error packets
IGMP Snooping sends:
z zero IGMP specific query messages

igmp-snooping

Syntax

igmp-snooping { enable | disable }

View

System view, VLAN view

Parameters

enable: Enables the IGMP Snooping feature.

disable: Disables the IGMP Snooping feature.

Description

Use the igmp-snooping enable command to enable the IGMP Snooping feature.
Use the igmp-snooping disable command to disable the IGMP Snooping feature.
By default, the IGMP Snooping feature is disabled.

1-4
z Before enabling IGMP Snooping in a VLAN, be sure to enable IGMP Snooping globally in system
view; otherwise the IGMP Snooping setting will not take effect.
z If IGMP Snooping and VLAN VPN are enabled on a VLAN at the same time, IGMP queries are
likely to fail to pass the VLAN. You can solve this problem by configuring VLAN tags for the IGMP
queries. For details, see igmp-snooping vlan-mapping.

Examples

# Enable the IGMP Snooping feature on the switch.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] igmp-snooping enable
Enable IGMP-Snooping ok.

igmp-snooping fast-leave

Syntax

igmp-snooping fast-leave [ vlan vlan-list ]

undo igmp-snooping fast-leave [ vlan vlan-list ]

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

vlan vlan-list: Specifies a VLAN list. With the vlan-list argument, you can provide one or more individual
VLAN IDs (in the form of vlan-id) and/or one or more VLAN ID ranges (in the form of vlan-id1 to vlan-id2,
where vlan-id2 must be greater than vlan-id1). The effective range for a VLAN ID is 1 to 4094 and the
total number of individual VLANs plus VLAN ranges cannot exceed 10.

Description

Use the igmp-snooping fast-leave command to enable fast leave processing.

With this function enabled, when the switch receives an IGMP leave message on a port, it directly
removes that port from the forwarding table entry for the specific group.
Use the undo igmp-snooping fast-leave command to disable fast leave processing.
By default, fast leave processing is disabled.

1-5
z The fast leave processing function works for a port only if the host attached to the port runs IGMPv2
or IGMPv3.
z The configuration performed in system view takes effect on all ports of the switch if no VLAN is
specified; if one or more VLANs are specified, the configuration takes effect on all ports in the
specified VLAN(s).
z The configuration performed in Ethernet port view takes effect on the port no matter which VLAN it
belongs to if no VLAN is specified; if one or more VLANs are specified, the configuration takes
effect on the port only if the port belongs to the specified VLAN(s).
z If fast leave processing and unknown multicast packet dropping or non-flooding are enabled on a
port to which more than one host is connected, when one host leaves a multicast group, the other
hosts connected to port and interested in the same multicast group will fail to receive multicast data
for that group.

Examples

# Enable fast leave processing on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in VLAN 2.

<Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] igmp-snooping fast-leave vlan 2

igmp-snooping general-query source-ip

Syntax

igmp-snooping general-query source-ip { current-interface | ip-address }

undo igmp-snooping general-query source-ip

View

VLAN view

Parameters

current-interface: Specifies the IP address of the current VLAN interface as the source address of
IGMP general queries. If the current VLAN interface does not have an IP address, the default IP
address 0.0.0.0 will be used as the source IP address of IGMP general queries.
ip-address: Specifies the source address of IGMP general queries, which can be any legal IP address.

Description

Use the igmp-snooping general-query source-ip command to configure the source address of IGMP
general queries.
Use the undo igmp-snooping general-query source-ip command to restore the default.
This command can take effect only if the IGMP Snooping querier function is enabled on the switch.

1-6
By default, the Layer 2 multicast switch sends general query messages with the source IP address of
0.0.0.0.
Related commands: igmp-snooping querier, igmp-snooping query-interval.

Examples

# Configure the switch to send general query messages with the source IP address 2.2.2.2 in VLAN 3.
<Sysname> system-view
System view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] igmp-snooping enable
[Sysname] vlan 3
[Sysname-vlan3] igmp-snooping enable
[Sysname-vlan3] igmp-snooping querier
[Sysname-vlan3] igmp-snooping general-query source-ip 2.2.2.2

igmp-snooping group-limit

Syntax

igmp-snooping group-limit limit [ vlan vlan-list ] [ overflow-replace ]

undo igmp-snooping group-limit [ vlan vlan-list ]

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

limit: Maximum number of multicast groups the port can join, in the range of 1 to 256.
overflow-replace: Allows a new multicast group to replace an existing multicast group with the lowest
IP address.
vlan vlan-list: Specifies a VLAN list. With the vlan-list argument, you can provide one or more individual
VLAN IDs (in the form of vlan-id) and/or one or more VLAN ID ranges (in the form of vlan-id1 to vlan-id2,
where vlan-id2 must be greater than vlan-id1). The effective range for a VLAN ID is 1 to 4094 and the
total number of individual VLANs plus VLAN ranges cannot exceed 10.

Description

Use the igmp-snooping group-limit command to define the maximum number of multicast groups the
port can join.
Use the undo igmp-snooping group-limit command to restore the default setting.
If you do not specify any VLAN, the command will take effect for all the VLANs to which the current port
belongs; if you specify a VLAN or multiple VLANs, the command will take effect for the port only if the
port belongs to the specified VLAN(s). It is recommended to specify a VLAN or multiple VLANs to save
memory.
The system default for Switch 4200G series is 256.

1-7
z To prevent bursting traffic in the network or performance deterioration of the device caused by
excessive multicast groups, you can set the maximum number of multicast groups that the switch
should process.
z When the number of multicast groups exceeds the configured limit, the switch removes its
multicast forwarding entries starting from the oldest one. In this case, the multicast packets for the
removed multicast group(s) will be flooded in the VLAN as unknown multicast packets. As a result,
non-member ports can receive multicast packets within a period of time.
z To avoid this from happening, enable the function of dropping unknown multicast packets.
z The keyword overflow-replace does not apply to IGMPv3 Snooping, that is, with IGMPv3 Snooping
enabled, even if the keyword overflow-replace is configured, a new multicast group will not replace
an existing multicast group when the number of multicast groups reaches the maximum value.
z If an Ethernet port is a static member port for a multicast group, the configuration of the maximum
number of multicast groups that can be joined does not take effect on the port.

Examples

# Configure to allow GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in VLAN 2 to join a maximum of 200 multicast groups.
<Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] igmp-snooping group-limit 200 vlan 2

igmp-snooping group-policy

Syntax

igmp-snooping group-policy acl-number [ vlan vlan-list ]

undo igmp-snooping group-policy [ vlan vlan-list ]

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameters

acl-number: Basic ACL number, in the range of 2000 to 2999.

Description

Use the igmp-snooping group-policy command to configure a multicast group filter.

Use the undo igmp-snooping group-policy command to remove the configured multicast group filter.
By default, no multicast group filter is configured.

1-8
The ACL rule defines a multicast address or a multicast address range (for example 224.0.0.1 to
239.255.255.255) and is used to:
z Allow the port(s) to join only the multicast group(s) defined in the rule by a permit statement.
z Inhibit the port(s) from joining the multicast group(s) defined in the rule by a deny statement.

z A port can belong to multiple VLANs, you can configure only one ACL rule per VLAN on a port.
z If no ACL rule is configured, all the multicast groups will be filtered.
z Since most devices broadcast unknown multicast packets by default, this function is often used
together with the function of dropping unknown multicast packets to prevent multicast streams from
being broadcast as unknown multicast packets to a port blocked by this function.
z The configuration performed in system view takes effect on all ports of the switch if no VLAN is
specified; if one or more VLANs are specified, the configuration takes effect on all ports in the
specified VLAN(s).
z The configuration performed in Ethernet port view takes effect on the port no matter which VLAN it
belongs to if no VLAN is specified; if one or more VLANs are specified, the configuration takes
effect on the port only if the port belongs to the specified VLAN(s).

Examples

# Configure a multicast group filter to allow receivers attached to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to access the
multicast streams for groups 225.0.0.0 to 225.255.255.255.
z Configure ACL 2000.
<Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] acl number 2000
[Sysname-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 225.0.0.0 0.255.255.255
[Sysname-acl-basic-2000] quit

z Create VLAN 2 and add GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to VLAN 2.

[Sysname] vlan 2
[Sysname-vlan2] port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-vlan2] quit

z Apply ACL 2000 on GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to allow it to join only the IGMP multicast groups defined
in the rule of ACL 2000.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] igmp-snooping group-policy 2000 vlan 2
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit

# Configure a multicast group filter to allow receivers attached to GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to access the
multicast streams for any groups except groups 225.0.0.0 to 225.0.0.255.
z Configure ACL 2001.
[Sysname] acl number 2001
[Sysname-acl-basic-2001] rule deny source 225.0.0.0 0.0.0.255
[Sysname-acl-basic-2001] rule permit source any

1-9
[Sysname-acl-basic-2001] quit

z Create VLAN 2 and add GigabitEthernet1/0/2 to VLAN 2.

[Sysname] vlan 2
[Sysname-vlan2] port GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
[Sysname-vlan2] quit

z Configure ACL 2001 on GigabitEthernet1/0/2 to it to join any IGMP multicast groups except those
defined in the deny rule of ACL 2001.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] igmp-snooping group-policy 2001 vlan 2

igmp-snooping host-aging-time

Syntax

igmp-snooping host-aging-time seconds

undo igmp-snooping host-aging-time

Syntax

igmp-snooping querier
undo igmp-snooping querier

View

VLAN view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the igmp-snooping querier command to enable the IGMP Snooping querier feature on the
current VLAN.
Use the undo igmp-snooping querier command to restore the default.
By default, the IGMP Snooping querier feature is disabled.
This command takes effect only if IGMP Snooping is enabled globally and also enabled in the current
VLAN.
Related commands: igmp-snooping enable, igmp-snooping query-interval, igmp-snooping
general-query source-ip

Examples

# Enable the IGMP Snooping querier in VLAN 3.

<Sysname> system-view
System view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] igmp-snooping enable

1-12
[Sysname] vlan 3
[Sysname-vlan3] igmp-snooping enable
[Sysname-vlan3] igmp-snooping querier

igmp-snooping query-interval

Syntax

igmp-snooping query-interval seconds

undo igmp-snooping query-interval

View

VLAN view

Parameters

seconds: IGMP query interval, ranging from 1 to 300, in seconds.

Description

Use the igmp-snooping query-interval command to configure the IGMP query interval, namely the
interval at which the switch sends IGMP general queries.
Use the undo igmp-snooping query-interval command to restore the default.
By default, the IGMP query interval is 60 seconds.
These commands are effective only after the IGMP Snooping querier feature is enabled. Otherwise, the
switch will not send general queries. The configured query interval must be longer than the maximum
response time in general queries.
Related commands: igmp-snooping enable, igmp-snooping querier, igmp-snooping
max-response-time, igmp-snooping general-query source-ip

Examples

# Configure the IGMP query interval to 100 seconds in VLAN 3.

<Sysname> system-view
System view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] igmp-snooping enable
[Sysname] vlan 3
[Sysname-vlan3] igmp-snooping enable
[Sysname-vlan3] igmp-snooping querier
[Sysname-vlan3] igmp-snooping query-interval 100

igmp-snooping router-aging-time

Syntax

igmp-snooping router-aging-time seconds

undo igmp-snooping router-aging-time

View

System view

1-13
Parameters

seconds: Aging time of router ports, in the range of 1 to 1,000, in seconds.

Description

Use the igmp-snooping router-aging-time command to configure the aging time of router ports.
Use the undo igmp-snooping router-aging-time command to restore the default aging time.
By default, the aging time of router ports is 105 seconds.
The aging time of router ports should be about 2.5 times the IGMP query interval.
Related commands: igmp-snooping max-response-time, igmp-snooping.

Examples

# Set the aging time of the router port to 500 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] igmp-snooping router-aging-time 500

igmp-snooping special-query source-ip

Syntax

igmp-snooping special-query source-ip { current-interface | ip-address }

undo igmp-snooping special-query source-ip

View

VLAN view

Parameters

current-interface: Specifies the IP address of the current VLAN interface as the source address to be
carried in IGMP group-specific queries. If the current VLAN interface does not have an IP address, the
default IP address 0.0.0.0 will be used as the source IP address of IGMP group-specific queries.
ip-address: Specifies the source address to be carried in IGMP group-specific queries, which can be
any legal IP address.

Description

Use the igmp-snooping special-query source-ip command to configure the source address to be
carried in IGMP group-specific queries.
Use the undo igmp-snooping special-query source-ip command to restore the default.
By default, the Layer 2 multicast switch sends group-specific query messages with the source IP
address of 0.0.0.0.
Related commands: igmp-snooping querier.

Examples

# Configure the switch to send group-specific query messages with the source IP address 2.2.2.2 in
VLAN 3.
<Sysname> system-view

1-14
System view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] igmp-snooping enable
[Sysname] vlan 3
[Sysname-vlan3] igmp-snooping enable
[Sysname-vlan3] igmp-snooping special-query source-ip 2.2.2.2

igmp-snooping version

Syntax

igmp-snooping version version-number

undo igmp-snooping version

View

VLAN view

Parameters

version-number: IGMP Snooping version, in the range of 2 to 3 and defaulting to 2.

Description

Use the igmp-snooping version command to configure the IGMP Snooping version in the current
VLAN.
Use the undo igmp-snooping version command to restore the default IGMP Snooping version.
This command can take effect only if IGMP Snooping is enabled in the VLAN.
Related commands: igmp-snooping enable.

Examples

# Set IGMP Snooping version to version 3 in VLAN 100.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] igmp-snooping enable
Enable IGMP-Snooping ok.
[Sysname] vlan 100
[Sysname -vlan100] igmp-snooping enable
[Sysname -vlan100] igmp-snooping version 3

igmp-snooping vlan-mapping

Syntax

igmp-snooping vlan-mapping vlan vlan-id

undo igmp-snooping vlan-mapping

View

System view

Parameters

vlan vlan-id: VLAN ID, in the range of 1 to 4094.

1-15
Description

Use the igmp-snooping vlan-mapping vlan command to configure to transmit IGMP general and
group-specific query messages in a specific VLAN.
Use the undo igmp-snooping vlan-mapping command to restore the default.
By default, the VLAN tag carried in IGMP general and group-specific query messages is not changed.

Examples

# Configure IGMP general and group-specific query messages to be transmitted in VLAN 2.

<Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] igmp-snooping enable
[Sysname] igmp-snooping vlan-mapping vlan 2

igmp host-join

Syntax

igmp host-join group-address [ source-ip source-address ] vlan vlan-id

undo igmp host-join group-address [ source-ip source-address ] vlan vlan-id

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

group-address: Address of the multicast group to join.

source-address: Address of the multicast source to join. You can specify a multicast source address
only when IGMPv3 Snooping is running in a VLAN.
vlan vlan-id: ID of the VLAN to which the port belongs, in the range of 1 to 4094.

Description

Use the igmp host-join command to configure the current port as a specified multicast group or source
and group member, namely configure the port as simulated member host for a specified multicast group
or source and group member.
Use the undo igmp host-join command to remove the current port as a simulated member host for the
specified multicast group or source-group.
Unlike a static member port, a port configured as a simulated member host will age out like a dynamic
member port.
Related commands: igmp-snooping enable, multicast static-group interface, multicast
static-group vlan

1-16
z Before configuring a port as a simulated host, enable IGMP Snooping in VLAN view first.
z The current port must belong to the specified VLAN; otherwise this configuration does not take
effect.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in VLAN 1 as a simulated member host for multicast source 1.1.1.1
and multicast group 225.0.0.1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]igmp-snooping enable
Enable IGMP-Snooping ok.
[Sysname]vlan 1
[Sysname-vlan1]igmp-snooping enable
[Sysname-vlan1]igmp-snooping version 3
[Sysname-vlan1]quit
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] igmp host-join 225.0.0.1 source-ip 1.1.1.1 vlan 10

multicast static-group interface

Syntax

multicast static-group group-address interface interface-list

undo multicast static-group group-address interface interface-list

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

group-address: IP address of the multicast group to join, in the range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
interface interface-list: Specifies a port list. With the interface-list argument, you can define one or more
individual ports (in the form of interface-type interface-number) and/or one or more port ranges (in the
form of interface-type interface-number1 to interface-type interface-number2, where interface-number2
must be greater than interface-number1). The total number of individual ports plus port ranges cannot
exceed 10. For port types and port numbers, refer to the parameter description in the “Port Basic
Configuration” part in this manual.

Description

Use the multicast static-group interface command to configure the specified port(s) under the current
VLAN interface as static member port(s) for the specified multicast group.
Use the undo multicast static-group interface command to remove the specified port(s) in the
current VLAN as static member port(s) for the specified multicast group.

1-17
By default, no port is configured as a static multicast group member port.

Examples

# Configure ports GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet 1/0/3 under VLAN-interface 1 as static

members ports for multicast group 225.0.0.1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] multicast static-group 225.0.0.1 interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
to GigabitEthernet 1/0/3

multicast static-group vlan

Syntax

multicast static-group group-address vlan vlan-id

undo multicast static-group group-address vlan vlan-id

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

group-address: IP address of the multicast group to join, in the range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
vlan vlan-id: Specifies the VLAN the Ethernet port belongs to, where vlan-id ranges from 1 to 4094.

Description

Use the multicast static-group vlan command to configure the current port as a static member port for
the specified multicast group and specify the VLAN the port belongs to.
Use the undo multicast static-group vlan command to remove the current port in the specified VLAN
as a static member port for the specified multicast group.
By default, no port is configured as a static multicast group member port.
Note that:
The impact of the configuration depends on whether the current port belongs to a multicast VLAN and
whether the port belongs to the specified VLAN.
z If the current port belongs to neither a multicast VLAN nor the specified VLAN, the configuration
does not take effect.
z If the current port does not belong to any multicast VLAN but it belongs to the specified VLAN, the
configuration takes effect in the specified VLAN.
z If the current port belongs to a multicast VLAN, the configuration takes effect only in the multicast
VLAN no matter the port belongs to the specified VLAN or not.

Examples

# Configure port GigabitEthernet1/0/1 in VLAN 2 as a static member port for multicast group 225.0.0.1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

1-18
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] multicast static-group 225.0.0.1 vlan 2

multicast static-router-port

Syntax

multicast static-router-port interface-type interface-number

undo multicast static-router-port interface-type interface-number

View

VLAN view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Specifies a port by its type and number.

Description

Use the multicast static-router-port command to configure the specified port in the current VLAN as a
static router port.
Use the undo multicast static-router-port command to remove the specified port in the current VLAN
as a static router port.
By default, a port is not a static router port.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in VLAN 10 as a static router port.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan 10
[Sysname-vlan10] multicast static-router-port GigabitEthernet1/0/1

multicast static-router-port vlan

Syntax

multicast static-router-port vlan vlan-id

undo multicast static-router-port vlan vlan-id

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

vlan-id: VLAN ID the port belongs to, in the range of 1 to 4094.

Description

Use the multicast static-router-port vlan command to configure the current port as a static router port
and specify the VLAN the port belongs to.
Use the undo multicast static-router-port vlan command to remove the current port in the specified
VLAN as a static router port.

1-19
By default, no port is configured as a static router port.
Note that:
The impact of the configuration depends on whether the current port belongs to a multicast VLAN and
whether the port belongs to the specified VLAN.
z If the current port belongs to neither a multicast VLAN nor the specified VLAN, the configuration
does not take effect.
z If the current port does not belong to any multicast VLAN but it belongs to the specified VLAN, the
configuration takes effect in the specified VLAN.
z If the current port belongs to a multicast VLAN, the configuration takes effect only in the multicast
VLAN no matter the port belongs to the specified VLAN or not.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in VLAN 10 as a static router port.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] multicast static-router-port vlan 10

reset igmp-snooping statistics

Syntax

reset igmp-snooping statistics

View

User view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the reset igmp-snooping statistics command to clear IGMP Snooping statistics.
Related commands: display igmp-snooping statistics.

Examples

# Clear IGMP Snooping statistics.

<Sysname> reset igmp-snooping statistics

service-type multicast

Syntax

service-type multicast
undo service-type multicast

View

VLAN view

1-20
Parameters

None

Description

Use the service-type multicast command to configure the current VLAN as a multicast VLAN.
Use the undo service-type multicast command to remove the current VLAN as a multicast VLAN.
By default, no VLAN is a multicast VLAN.
In an IGMP Snooping environment, by configuring a multicast VLAN and adding ports to the multicast
VLAN, you can allow users in different VLANs to share the same multicast VLAN. This saves bandwidth
because multicast streams are transmitted only within the multicast VLAN. In addition, because the
multicast VLAN is isolated from user VLANs, this method also enhances the information security.

z One port belongs to only one multicast VLAN.

z The port connected to a user terminal must be a hybrid port.
z The multicast member port must be in the same multicast VLAN with the router port. Otherwise, the
port cannot receive multicast packets.
z If a router port is in a multicast VLAN, the router port must be configured as a trunk port or a hybrid
port that allows tagged packets to pass for the multicast VLAN. Otherwise, all the multicast
member ports in this multicast VLAN cannot receive multicast packets.
z If a multicast member port needs to receive multicast packets forwarded by a router port that does
not belong to any multicast VLAN, the multicast member port must be removed from the multicast
VLAN. Otherwise, the port cannot receive multicast packets.

Examples

# Configure VLAN 2 as a multicast VLAN.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan 2
[Sysname-vlan2] service-type multicast

1-21
2 Common Multicast Configuration Commands

Common Multicast Configuration Commands

display mac-address multicast

Syntax

display mac-address multicast [ static [ { { mac-address vlan vlan-id | vlan vlan-id } [ count ] } |
count ] ]

View

Any view

Parameter

static: Displays static multicast MAC address entries.

mac-address vlan vlan-id: Displays multicast MAC address entry/entries in the specified VLAN.
count: Displays the number of MAC entries.
vlan vlan-id: ID of the specific VLAN.

Description

Use the display mac-address multicast command to display the multicast MAC address entry/entries
manually configured on the switch.
z Executing this command with neither mac-address vlan vlan-id nor vlan vlan-id will display the
information about all the multicast MAC address entries manually added on the switch, including
the multicast MAC address, VLAN ID, state of the MAC address, port number and aging time.
z Executing this command with vlan vlan-id but without mac-address will display the information
about all the multicast MAC address entries manually added in the specified VLAN, including the
multicast MAC address, VLAN ID, state of the MAC address, port number and aging time.
z Executing this command with both mac-address and vlan vlan-id will display the information about
the multicast MAC address entries manually added in the specified VLAN with the specified
multicast MAC address, including the multicast MAC address, VLAN ID, state of the MAC address,
port number and aging time.
z Executing this command with count will display the information about the number of multicast MAC
address entries added on the switch.

Example

# Display all the multicast MAC address entries manually added in VLAN 1.
<Sysname> display mac-address multicast static vlan 1
MAC ADDR VLAN ID STATE PORT INDEX AGING TIME(s)
0100-0001-0001 1 Config static GigabitEthernet1/0/1 NOAGED
GigabitEthernet1/0/2
GigabitEthernet1/0/3

2-1
GigabitEthernet1/0/4
--- 1 static mac address(es) found ---

Table 2-1 display mac-address multicast static command output description

Field Description
MAC ADDR MAC address
The VLAN in which the MAC address is manually
VLAN ID
added
State of the MAC address, which includes only
STATE Config static, indicating that the table entry is
manually added.
Ports out which the multicast packets destined
PORT INDEX
for the multicast MAC address are forwarded
State of the aging timer. The aging timer for
static multicast MAC addresses has only one
AGING TIME(s)
state: NOAGED, indicating that the entry never
expires.

mac-address multicast interface

Syntax

mac-address multicast mac-address interface interface-list vlan vlan-id

undo mac-address multicast [ mac-address [ interface interface-list ] vlan vlan-id ]

View

System view

Parameters

mac-address: Multicast MAC address, in the form of H-H-H.

interface interface-list: Specifies forwarding ports for the specified multicast MAC group address. With
the interface-list argument, you can define one or more individual ports (in the form of interface-type
interface-number) and/or one or more port ranges (in the form of interface-type interface-number1 to
interface-type interface-number2, where interface-number2 must be greater than interface-number1).
The total number of individual ports plus port ranges cannot exceed 10. For port types and port
numbers, refer to the parameter description in the “Port Basic Configuration” part in this manual.
vlan vlan-id: Specifies the VLAN to which the forwarding ports belong. The effective range for vlan-id is
1 to 4094.

Description

Use the mac-address multicast interface command to create a multicast MAC address entry.
Use the undo mac-address multicast interface command to remove the specified multicast MAC
address entry or all multicast MAC address entries.
Each multicast MAC address entry contains multicast address, forward port, VLAN ID, and so on.
Related commands: display mac-address multicast static.

2-2
Examples

# Create a multicast MAC address entry, with the multicast MAC address of 0100-5c0a-0805 and a
forwarding port of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in VLAN 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] mac-address multicast 0100-5c0a-0805 interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 vlan 1

mac-address multicast vlan

Syntax

mac-address multicast mac-address vlan vlan-id

undo mac-address multicast [ [ mac-address ] vlan vlan-id ]

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

mac-address: Multicast MAC address in the form of H-H-H.

vlan vlan-id: Specifies the VLAN the current port belongs to. The effective range for vlan-id is 1 to 4094.

Description

Use the mac-address multicast vlan command to create a multicast MAC address entry on the
current port.
Use the undo mac-address multicast vlan command to remove the specified multicast MAC address
entry or all multicast MAC address entries on the current port.
Each multicast MAC address entry contains the multicast address, forwarding port, and VLAN ID
information.
Related commands: display mac-address multicast static.

Examples

# Create a multicast MAC address entry on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 in VLAN 1, with the multicast address
of 0100-1000-1000.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] mac-address multicast 0100-1000-1000 vlan 1

unknown-multicast drop enable

Syntax

unknown-multicast drop enable

undo unknown-multicast drop enable

View

System view

2-3
Parameters

None

Description

Use the unknown-multicast drop enable command to enable the function of dropping unknown
multicast packets.
Use the undo unknown-multicast drop enable command to disable the function of dropping unknown
multicast packets.
By default, the function of dropping unknown multicast packets is disabled.

Examples

Enable the unknown multicast drop feature.

<Sysname> system-view
System view: return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] unknown-multicast drop enable

2-4
Table of Contents

1 NTP Configuration Commands ················································································································1-1

NTP Configuration Commands ···············································································································1-1
display ntp-service sessions············································································································1-1
display ntp-service status ················································································································1-2
display ntp-service trace··················································································································1-4
ntp-service access···························································································································1-4
ntp-service authentication enable····································································································1-5
ntp-service authentication-keyid······································································································1-6
ntp-service broadcast-client ············································································································1-6
ntp-service broadcast-server···········································································································1-7
ntp-service in-interface disable········································································································1-8
ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions ·································································································1-8
ntp-service multicast-client ··············································································································1-9
ntp-service multicast-server ············································································································1-9
ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid ·······················································································1-10
ntp-service source-interface ··········································································································1-11
ntp-service unicast-peer ················································································································1-11
ntp-service unicast-server ·············································································································1-12

i
1 NTP Configuration Commands

To protect unused sockets against attacks by malicious users and improve security, 3Com S4200G
series Ethernet switches provide the following functions:
z UDP port 123 is opened only when the NTP feature is enabled.
z UDP port 123 is closed as the NTP feature is disabled.
These functions are implemented as follows:
z Execution of one of the ntp-service unicast-server, ntp-service unicast-peer, ntp-service
broadcast-client, ntp-service broadcast-server, ntp-service multicast-client, and ntp-service
multicast-server commands enables the NTP feature and opens UDP port 123 at the same time.
z Execution of the undo form of one of the above six commands disables all implementation modes
of the NTP feature and closes UDP port 123 at the same time.

NTP Configuration Commands

display ntp-service sessions

Syntax

display ntp-service sessions [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameters

verbose: Displays the detailed information about all the sessions maintained by the NTP service.
Without this keyword, the command displays the brief information about all the sessions.

Description

Use the display ntp-service sessions command to display the information about all the sessions
maintained by local NTP services.

Examples

# View the brief information of all sessions maintained by NTP services.

<Sysname> display ntp-service sessions
source reference stra reach poll now offset delay disper
*************************************************************************
[12345]3.0.1.32 LOCL 1 95 64 42 -14.3 12.9 2.7

1-1
[25]3.0.1.31 127.127.1.0 2 1 64 1 4408.6 38.7 0.0
note: 1 source(master),2 source(peer),3 selected,4 candidate,5 configured
Total associations : 2

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display ntp-service sessions command

Field Description
source IP address of the synchronization source

Reference clock ID of the synchronization source

1) If the reference clock is the local clock, the value of this field is related to the
value of the stra field:
z When the value of the stra field is 0 or 1, this field will be “LOCL”;
reference
z When the stra field has another value, this filed will be the IP address of the
local clock.
2) If the reference clock is the clock of another switch on the network, the value
of this field will be the IP address of that switch.
stra Stratum of the clock of the synchronization source
Reachability count of the clock source. 0 indicates that the clock source is
reach
unreachable
Polling interval in seconds, that is, the maximum interval between two successive
poll
messages
now Time elapsing since the last NTP packet is sent

offset The offset of the system clock relative to the reference clock, in milliseconds
Network delay, that is, the roundtrip delay from the local switch to the clock
delay
source, in milliseconds
disper Maximum offset of the local clock relative to the reference clock
1: Clock source selected by the system, namely the current reference source,
with a system clock stratum level smaller than or equal to 15
2: Stratum level of this clock source is smaller than or equal to 15
[12345]
3: This clock source has passed the clock selection process
4: This clock source is a candidate clock source
5: This clock source was created by a configuration command
Total
Total number of associations
associations

An S4200G series switch does not establish a session with its client when it works in the NTP server
mode, but does so when it works in other NTP implementation modes.

display ntp-service status

Syntax

display ntp-service status

1-2
View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ntp-service status command to display the status of NTP services.

Examples

# View the status of the NTP service of the local switch.

<Sysname> display ntp-service status
Clock status: synchronized
Clock stratum: 4
Reference clock ID: 1.1.1.11
Nominal frequency: 60.0002 Hz
Actual frequency: 60.0002 Hz
Clock precision: 2^18
Clock offset: 0.8174 ms
Root delay: 37.86 ms
Root dispersion: 45.98 ms
Peer dispersion: 35.78 ms
Reference time: 16:30:46.078 UTC Mar 29 2007(C9689FB6.1431593E)

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display ntp-service status command

Field Description
Status of the local clock:
Clock status z Synchronized
z Unsynchronized
Clock stratum Stratum of the local clock
Address of the remote server or ID of the reference clock after the local
Reference clock ID
clock is synchronized to a remote NTP server or a reference clock
Nominal frequency Nominal frequency of the local hardware clock, in Hz.
Actual frequency Actual frequency of the local hardware clock, in Hz.

Clock precision Precision of the local hardware clock

Clock offset Offset of the local clock relative to the reference clock, in milliseconds.
Roundtrip delay between the local clock and the primary reference clock
Root delay
source, in milliseconds.
Maximum dispersion of the local clock relative to the primary reference
Root dispersion
clock, in milliseconds.
Peer dispersion Maximum dispersion of the remote NTP server, in milliseconds.

Reference time Reference timestamp

1-3
display ntp-service trace

Syntax

display ntp-service trace

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ntp-service trace command to display the brief information of each NTP time server
along the time synchronization chain from the local switch to the reference clock source.

Examples

# View the brief information of each NTP time server along the time synchronization chain from the local
switch to the reference clock source.
<Sysname> display ntp-service trace
server4: stratum 4, offset 0.0019529, synch distance 0.144135
server3: stratum 3, offset 0.0124263, synch distance 0.115784
server2: stratum 2, offset 0.0019298, synch distance 0.011993
server1: stratum 1, offset 0.0019298, synch distance 0.011993 refid 'GPS Receiver'

The above information displays the time synchronization chain of server4: server4 is synchronized to
server3, server3 to server2, server2 to server1, and server1 to the reference clock source GPS
receiver.

ntp-service access

Syntax

ntp-service access { peer | server | synchronization | query } acl-number

undo ntp-service access { peer | server | synchronization | query }

View

System view

Parameters

query: Control query right. This level of right permits the peer device to perform control query to the
NTP service on the local device but does not permit the peer device to synchronize its clock to the local
device. The so-called “control query” refers to query of state of the NTP service, including alarm
information, authentication status, clock source information, and so on.
synchronization: Synchronization right. This level of right permits the peer device to synchronize its
clock to the local switch but does not permit the peer device to perform control query.
server: Server right. This level of right permits the peer device to perform synchronization and control
query to the local switch but does not permit the local switch to synchronize its clock to the peer device.

1-4
peer: Peer right. This level of right permits the peer device to perform synchronization and control query
to the local switch and also permits the local switch to synchronize its clock to the peer device.
acl-number: Basic Access Control List (ACL) number, in the range of 2000 to 2999.

Description

Use the ntp-service access command to set the access control right from the remote device to the
local NTP server.
Use the undo ntp-service access command to remove the configured access control right to the local
NTP server.
By default, the access control right from the remote device to the local NTP server is peer.
NTP service access-control rights from the highest to the lowest are peer, server, synchronization,
and query. When a local NTP server receives an NTP request, it will perform an access-control right
match and will use the first matched right.
The ntp-service access command only provides a minimal degree of security measure. A more secure
way is to perform identity authentication.
Refer to the ntp-service authentication enable command for related configuration.

Examples

# Configure the access right from the remote device in ACL 2076 to the local NTP server as peer.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ntp-service access peer 2076

# Configure the access right from the remote device in ACL 2028 to the local NTP server as server.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ntp-service access server 2028

ntp-service authentication enable

Syntax

ntp-service authentication enable

undo ntp-service authentication enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the ntp-service authentication enable command to enable the NTP authentication.
Use the undo ntp-service authentication enable command to disable the NTP authentication.
By default, the NTP authentication is disabled.

1-5
Refer to the ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid and ntp-service authentication-keyid
commands for related configuration.

Examples

# Enable the NTP authentication.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ntp-service authentication enable

ntp-service authentication-keyid

Syntax

ntp-service authentication-keyid key-id authentication-mode md5 value

undo ntp-service authentication-keyid key-id

View

System view

Parameters

key-id: Authentication key ID, in the range of 1 to 4294967295.

value: Authentication key, a string comprising 1 to 32 characters. Up to 1024 keys can be configured.

Description

Use the ntp-service authentication-keyid command to configure an NTP authentication key.

Use the undo ntp-service authentication-keyid command to remove an NTP authentication key.
By default, no NTP authentication key is configured.
Currently, the system only supports the Message Digest 5 (MD5) algorithm.
After configuring the NTP authentication key, you need to use the ntp-service reliable
authentication-keyid command to specify the authentication key as a trusted key.
Related commands: ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid.

Examples

# Configure an MD5 authentication key, with the key ID being 10 and the key being BetterKey.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ntp-service authentication-keyid 10 authentication-mode md5 BetterKey

ntp-service broadcast-client

Syntax

ntp-service broadcast-client
undo ntp-service broadcast-client

View

VLAN interface view

1-6
Parameters

None

Description

Use the ntp-service broadcast-client command to configure an Ethernet switch to operate in the NTP
broadcast client mode and receive NTP broadcast messages through the current interface.
Use the undo ntp-service broadcast-client command to remove the configuration.
By default, no NTP operate mode is configured.

Examples

# Configure the switch to operate in the broadcast client mode and receive NTP broadcast messages
through VLAN-interface 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ntp-service broadcast-client

ntp-service broadcast-server

Syntax

ntp-service broadcast-server [ authentication-keyid key-id | version number ]*

undo ntp-service broadcast-server

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

authentication-keyid key-id: Specifies the key ID used for sending messages to broadcast clients. The
key-id argument ranges from 1 to 4294967295. You do not need to configure authentication-keyid
key-id if authentication is not required.
version number: Specifies the NTP version number which ranges from 1 to 3. The default version
number is 3.

Description

Use the ntp-service broadcast-server command to configure an Ethernet switch to operate in the
NTP broadcast server mode and send NTP broadcast messages through the current interface.
Use the undo ntp-service broadcast-server command to remove the configuration.
By default, no NTP operate mode is configured.

Examples

# Configure the switch to send NTP broadcast messages through VLAN-interface 1 and use
authentication key 4 for encryption, and set the NTP version number to 3.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1

1-7
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ntp-service broadcast-server authentication-key 4 version 3

ntp-service in-interface disable

Syntax

ntp-service in-interface disable

undo ntp-service in-interface disable

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the ntp-service in-interface disable command to disable the interface from receiving NTP
messages.
Use the undo ntp-service in-interface disable command to restore the default.
By default, the interface can receive NTP messages.

Examples

# Disable VLAN-interface 1 from receiving NTP messages.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ntp-service in-interface disable

ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions

Syntax

ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions number

undo ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions

View

System view

Parameters

number: Maximum number of the dynamic NTP sessions that can be established locally. This argument
ranges from 0 to 100.

Description

Use the ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions command to set the maximum number of dynamic NTP
sessions that can be established locally.
Use the undo ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions command to restore the default.
By default, up to 100 dynamic NTP sessions can be established locally.

1-8
Examples

# Set the maximum number of dynamic NTP sessions that can be established locally to 50.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions 50

ntp-service multicast-client

Syntax

ntp-service multicast-client [ ip-address ]

undo ntp-service multicast-client [ ip-address ]

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

ip-address: Multicast IP address, in the range of 224.0.1.0 to 224.0.1.255. The default IP address is
224.0.1.1.

Description

Use the ntp-service multicast-client command to configure an Ethernet switch to operate in the NTP
multicast client mode and receive NTP multicast messages through the current interface.
Use the undo ntp-service multicast-client command to remove the configuration.
By default, no NTP operate mode is configured.

Examples

# Configure the switch to receive NTP multicast messages through VLAN-interface 1, with the multicast
IP address being 224.0.1.2.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ntp-service multicast-client 224.0.1.2

ntp-service multicast-server

Syntax

ntp-service multicast-server [ ip-address ] [ authentication-keyid key-id | ttl ttl-number | version

number ]*
undo ntp-service multicast-server [ ip-address ]

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

ip-address: Multicast IP address, in the range of 224.0.1.0 to 224.0.1.255. The default IP address is
224.0.1.1.
1-9
authentication-keyid key-id: Specifies the key ID used for sending messages to multicast clients. The
key-id argument ranges from 1 to 4294967295.
ttl ttl-number: Defines the lifetime of multicast messages. The ttl-number argument ranges from 1 to
255 and defaults to 16.
version number: Specifies the NTP version number which ranges from 1 to 3 and defaults to 3.

Description

Use the ntp-service multicast-server command to configure an Ethernet switch to operate in the NTP
multicast server mode and send NTP multicast messages through the current interface.
Use the undo ntp-service multicast-server command to remove the configuration.
By default, no NTP operate mode is configured.

Examples

# Configure the switch to send NTP multicast messages through VLAN-interface 1, and set the
multicast group address to 224.0.1.2, keyid to 4, and the NTP version number to 2.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1]ntp-service multicast-server 224.0.1.2
authentication-keyid 4 version 2

ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid

Syntax

ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid key-id

undo ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid key-id

View

System view

Parameters

key-id: Authentication key ID, in the range of 1 to 4294967295.

Description

Use the ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid command to specify an authentication key as a

trusted key.
Use the undo ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid command to remove the configuration.
By default, no trusted key is configured.
When NTP authentication is enabled, a client can be synchronized only to a server that can provide a
trusted authentication key.
Related commands: ntp-service authentication-keyid.

Examples

# Enable NTP authentication. The encryption algorithm is MD5, the key ID is 37, and the trusted key is
abc.

1-10
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ntp-service authentication enable
[Sysname] ntp-service authentication-keyid 37 authentication-mode md5 abc

# Specify this key as a trusted key.

[Sysname] ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid 37

ntp-service source-interface

Syntax

ntp-service source-interface Vlan-interface vlan-id

undo ntp-service source-interface

View

System view

Parameters

vlan-interface vlan-id: Specifies an interface. The IP address of the interface serves as the source IP
address of sent NTP messages. The vlan-id argument indicates the ID of the specified VLAN interface,
ranging from 1 to 4094.

Description

Use the ntp-service source-interface command to specify a VLAN interface through which NTP
messages are to be sent.
Use the undo ntp-service source-interface command to remove the configuration.
If you do not want the IP addresses of the other interfaces on the local switch to be the destination
addresses of response messages, you can use this command to specify a specific interface to send all
NTP packets. In this way, the IP address of the interface is the source IP address of all NTP messages
sent by the local device.

Examples

# Specify the source IP addresses of all sent NTP messages as the IP address of VLAN-interface 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ntp-service source-interface Vlan-interface 1

ntp-service unicast-peer

Syntax

ntp-service unicast-peer { remote-ip | peer-name } [ authentication-keyid key-id | priority |

source-interface Vlan-interface vlan-id | version number ]*
undo ntp-service unicast-peer { remote-ip | peer-name }

View

System view

1-11
Parameters

remote-ip: IP address of the NTP symmetric-passive peer. This argument can be a unicast address only,
and cannot be a broadcast address, a multicast address, or the IP address of the local reference clock.
peer-name: Symmetric-passive peer host name, a string comprising 1 to 20 characters.
authentication-keyid key-id: Specifies the key ID used for sending messages to the peer. The key-id
argument ranges from 1 to 4294967295. By default, authentication is not enabled.
priority: Specifies the peer identified by the remote-ip argument as the preferred peer for
synchronization.
source-interface Vlan-interface vlan-id: Specifies an interface whose IP address serves as the source
IP address of NTP message sent to the peer. vlan-id is the VLAN interface number.
version number: Specifies the NTP version number. The version number ranges from 1 to 3 and
defaults to 3.

Description

Use the ntp-service unicast-peer command to configure an Ethernet switch to operate in the
symmetric-active peer mode.
Use the undo ntp-service unicast-peer command to remove the configuration.
By default, no NTP operate mode is configured.

If you use remote-ip or peer-name to specify a remote device as the peer of the local Ethernet switch,
the local switch operates in the symmetric-active peer mode. In this case, the clock of local Ethernet
switch and that of the remote device can be synchronized to each other.

Examples

# Configure the local switch to obtain time information from the peer with the IP address 128.108.22.44
and also to provide time information to the peer. Set the NTP version number to 3. The source IP
address of NTP messages is the IP address of Vlan- interface1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ntp-service unicast-peer 128.108.22.44 version 3 source-interface Vlan-interface
1

ntp-service unicast-server

Syntax

ntp-service unicast-server { remote-ip | server-name } [ authentication-keyid key-id | priority |

source-interface Vlan-interface vlan-id | version number ]*
undo ntp-service unicast-server { remote-ip | server-name }

1-12
View

System view

Parameters

remote-ip: IP address of an NTP server. This argument can be a unicast address only, and cannot be a
broadcast address, multicast group address, or IP address of the local clock.
server-name: NTP server name, a string comprising 1 to 20 characters.
authentication-keyid key-id: Specifies the key ID used for sending messages to the NTP server. The
key-id argument ranges from 1 to 4294967295.
priority: Specifies the server identified by the remote-ip or the server-name argument as the preferred
server.
source-interface Vlan-interface vlan-id: Specifies an interface whose IP address serves as the source
IP address of NTP packets sent by the local switch to the server.
version number: Specifies the NTP version number. The number argument ranges from 1 to 3 and
defaults to 3.

Description

Use the ntp-service unicast-server command to configure an Ethernet switch to operate in the NTP
client mode.
Use the undo ntp-service unicast-server command to remove the configuration.
By default, no NTP operate mode is configured.

The remote server specified by remote-ip or server-name serves as the NTP server, and the local
switch serves as the NTP client. The clock of the NTP client will be synchronized by but will not
synchronize that of the NTP server.

Examples

# Configure the local switch to be synchronized to the NTP server with the IP address 128.108.22.44,
and set the version number to 3.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ntp-service unicast-server 128.108.22.44 version 3

1-13
Table of Contents

1 SSH Commands·········································································································································1-1
SSH Commands ·····································································································································1-1
display public-key local····················································································································1-1
display public-key peer ····················································································································1-2
display rsa local-key-pair public ······································································································1-4
display rsa peer-public-key··············································································································1-5
display ssh server····························································································································1-6
display ssh server-info·····················································································································1-7
display ssh user-information············································································································1-8
display ssh2 source-ip ·····················································································································1-9
display ssh-server source-ip············································································································1-9
peer-public-key end ·······················································································································1-10
protocol inbound ····························································································································1-10
public-key local create ···················································································································1-11
public-key local destroy ·················································································································1-13
public-key local export rsa ·············································································································1-14
public-key local export dsa ············································································································1-15
public-key peer ······························································································································1-17
public-key peer import sshkey·······································································································1-18
public-key-code begin····················································································································1-19
public-key-code end ······················································································································1-20
rsa local-key-pair create ················································································································1-21
rsa local-key-pair destroy ··············································································································1-22
rsa peer-public-key ························································································································1-23
rsa peer-public-key import sshkey·································································································1-24
ssh authentication-type default······································································································1-25
ssh client assign ····························································································································1-26
ssh client first-time enable ·············································································································1-27
ssh server authentication-retries ···································································································1-28
ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable ·····························································································1-29
ssh server rekey-interval ···············································································································1-29
ssh server timeout ·························································································································1-30
ssh user ·········································································································································1-30
ssh user assign······························································································································1-32
ssh user authentication-type ·········································································································1-33
ssh user service-type·····················································································································1-34
ssh2 ···············································································································································1-35
ssh2 source-interface ····················································································································1-36
ssh2 source-ip ·······························································································································1-37
ssh-server source-interface···········································································································1-38
ssh-server source-ip ······················································································································1-38

i
1 SSH Commands

In this document, you can distinguish the local and peer as follows: if the local is an SSH server, the
peer is an SSH client; if the local is an SSH client, the peer is an SSH server.

SSH Commands
display public-key local

Syntax

display public-key local { dsa | rsa } public

View

Any view

Parameters

dsa: Displays the public key of the current switch’s DSA key pair.
rsa: Displays the public keys of the current switch’s RSA key pairs.

Description

Use the display public-key local command to display the public key information of the current switch’s
key pairs.
The displayed local public key can be configured as the public key on the remote peer for
authentication.
Related commands: public-key local create.

Examples

# Display the public key part of the current switch’s RSA key pair(s).
<Sysname> display public-key local rsa public

=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 23:48:18 2000/04/03
Key name: Sysname_Host
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:

1-1
30819F300D06092A864886F70D010101050003818D0030818902818100C7C4D2E1C59A75908417C660AD1D5E
B172AB6EE9AAF994DB7A1C31EB87F750EE12A57832C6070FC008A5EE2B6675FD6A430575D97350E300A20FEB
773D93D7C3565467B0CA6B95C07D3338C523743B49D82C5EC2C9458D248955846F9C32F4D25CC92D0E831E56
4BBA6FAE794EEC6FCDEDB822909CC687BEBF51F3DFC5C30D590203010001

=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 23:48:36 2000/04/03
Key name: Sysname_Server
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
307C300D06092A864886F70D0101010500036B003068026100BC86D8F08E101461C1231B122777DBE777645C
81C569C004EC2FEC03C205CC7E3B5DAA38DD865C6D1FB61C91B85ED63C6F35BAFBF9A6D2D2989C20051FF8FA
31A14FCF73EC1485422E5B800B55920FC121329020E82F2945FFAD81BE72663BF70203010001

# Display the public key of the current switch’s DSA key pair.
<Sysname> display public-key local dsa public

=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 08:01:23 2000/04/02
Key name:
Key type: DSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
308201B73082012C06072A8648CE3804013082011F02818100D757262C4584C44C211F18BD96E5F061C4F0A4
23F7FE6B6B85B34CEF72CE14A0D3A5222FE08CECE65BE6C265854889DC1EDBD13EC8B274DA9F75BA26CCB987
723602787E922BA84421F22C3C89CB9B06FD60FE01941DDD77FE6B12893DA76EEBC1D128D97F0678D7722B53
41C8506F358214B16A2FAC4B368950387811C7DA33021500C773218C737EC8EE993B4F2DED30F48EDACE915F
0281810082269009E14EC474BAF2932E69D3B1F18517AD9594184CCDFCEAE96EC4D5EF93133E84B47093C52B
20CD35D02492B3959EC6499625BC4FA5082E22C5B374E16DD00132CE71B020217091AC717B612391C76C1FB2
E88317C1BD8171D41ECB83E210C03CC9B32E810561C21621C73D6DAAC028F4B1585DA7F42519718CC9B09EEF
038184000281804B7E6A5D60A6B71C0B585ED495C36F82C17072C0446CE099F2C733171E8C014B6D4F91C54C
9998921CA35C7BD4385E55D39B324F04DBE9F4CC91DE8ED949C7007C160D129ECB54D6C39E697DAD5BFB56BA
F3281584B23CA7DFB46AAB5B8C56A5903F61B34A157022E68C6C2423D42B880FB20BA86135369F7CF3ACA46A
55BEF8

display public-key peer

Syntax

display public-key peer [ brief | name pubkey-name ]

View

Any view

Parameters

brief: Displays brief information about the locally saved public keys of all SSH peers.
pubkey-name: Name of the public key, a string of 1 to 64 characters.

1-2
Description

Use the display public-key peer command to display information about locally saved public keys of
the SSH peers. If no key name is specified, the command displays detailed information about the locally
saved public keys of all SSH peers.
The display public-key peer command on the SSH server displays the locally saved public keys of
SSH clients while the command on the SSH client displays the locally saved keys of the SSH servers.

Sometimes the public key modulus displayed with the display public-key peer command is one bit
smaller than the actual modulus. This is because the actually generated key pair is one bit smaller than
specified. For example, when you specify a 1024-bit key pair, the actually generated key pair may have
1024 or 1023 bits.

You can configure an SSH peer’s public key on the current switch by using the public-key peer
command or the public-key peer import sshkey command.

Related commands: public-key peer, public-key peer import sshkey.

Examples

# Display brief information about all peer public keys.

<Sysname> display public-key peer brief
Type Module Name
---------------------------
RSA 1023 idrsa
DSA 1024 127.0.0.1
RSA 1024 18

# Display the information about the public key named pubkey-name.

<Sysname> display public-key peer name pubkey-name
=====================================
Key name : pubkey-name
Key type : RSA
Key module: 1024
=====================================
Key Code:
30819D300D06092A864886F70D010101050003818B00308187028181009C46A8710216CEC0C01C7CE136BA76
C79AA6040E79F9E305E453998C7ADE8276069410803D5974F708496947AB39B3F39C5CE56C95B6AB7442D563
93BF241F99A639DD02D9E29B1F5C1FD05CC1C44FBD6CFFB58BE6F035FAA2C596B27D1231D159846B7CB9A775
7C5800FADA9FD72F65672F4A549EE99F63095E11BD37789955020123

1-3
display rsa local-key-pair public

Syntax

display rsa local-key-pair public

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display rsa local-key-pair public command to display the public keys of the current switch’s
RSA key pairs. If no key pair has been generated, the system displays a message, telling you that no
RSA keys are found..
Related commands: rsa local-key-pair create.

Examples

# Display the public keys of the current switch’s RSA key pairs.
<Sysname> display rsa local-key-pair public

=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 20:08:35 2000/04/02
Key name: Sysname_Host
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3047
0240
DE99B540 87B666B9 69C948CD BBCC2B60 997F9C18
9AA6651C 6066EF76 242DEAD1 DEFEA162 61677BD4
1A7BFAE7 668EDAA9 FB048C37 A0F1354D 5798C202
2253F4F5
0203
010001

=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 20:08:46 2000/04/02
Key name: Sysname_Server
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3067
0260
D6D70AE4 D2A900BE AC21B4E7 617CBEFA 2BAED61F
B637070C 093F43AF 9DB9D644 BCD921EF D056EF36
26825C2A 1FC0EFC3 E27B5110 3F20F790 6C83274B

1-4
D0FC303F 51072D6C B5D0054D 3673EBA0 A4748984
5EBF6EBE CF6A13B1 C7858241 A2A9AA79
0203
010001

After you complete the RSA key pair generation task:

z If the switch is working in SSH1-compatible mode, there should be two public keys generated (that
is, the host public key and the server public key), and the display rsa local-key-pair public
command should display those two public keys.
z If the switch is working in SSH2 mode, there should be only one public key generated (that is, the
host public key), and the command should display the public key.

display rsa peer-public-key

Syntax

display rsa peer-public-key [ brief | name keyname ]

View

Any view

Parameters

brief: Displays brief information about the public keys of all SSH peers.
keyname: Specifies a key by its name, which is a string of 1 to 64 characters.

Description

Use the display rsa peer-public-key command to display information about the locally saved public
keys of all SSH peers. If no key name is specified, the command displays detailed information about the
locally saved public keys of all SSH peers.
The display rsa peer-public-key command on the SSH server displays the locally saved public keys
of the SSH clients while the command on the SSH client displays the locally saved key of the SSH
servers.

Sometimes the public key modulus displayed with the display rsa peer-public-key command is one bit
smaller than the actual modulus. This is because the actually generated key pair is one bit smaller than
specified. For example, when you specify a 1024-bit key pair, the actually generated key pair may have
1024 or 1023 bits.

1-5
Examples

# Display brief information about all peer public keys.

<Sysname> display rsa peer-public-key brief
Type Module Name
---------------------------
DSA 1023 2
DSA 1024 a

# Display the information about public key “abcd”.

<Sysname> display rsa peer-public-key name abcd

=====================================
Key name : abcd
Key type : RSA
Key module: 1024
=====================================
Key Code:
30819F300D06092A864886F70D010101050003818D0030818902818100B0EEC8768E310AE2EE44D65A2F944E
2E6F32290D1ECBBFFF22AA11712151FC29F1C1CD6D7937723F77103576C41A03DB32F32C46DEDA68566E89B5
3CD4DF8F9899B138C578F7666BFB5E6FE1278A84EC8562A12ACBE2A43AF61394276CE5AAF5AF01DA8B0F33E0
8335E0C3820911B90BF4D19085CADCE0B50611B9F6696D31930203010001

display ssh server

Syntax

display ssh server { session | status }

View

Any view

Parameters

session: Displays SSH session information.

status: Displays SSH status information.

Description

Use the display ssh server command on an SSH server to display information about SSH status or
about sessions of active connections with SSH clients.
Related commands: ssh server authentication-retries, ssh server timeout, ssh server
compatible-ssh1x enable, ssh server rekey-interval.

Examples

# Display status information about the SSH Server.

<Sysname> display ssh server status
SSH version : 1.99
SSH connection timeout : 60 seconds
SSH server key generating interval : 0 hours

1-6
SSH Authentication retries : 3 times
SFTP Server: Disable
SFTP idle timeout : 10 minutes

z If you use the ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable command to configure the server to be
compatible with SSH1.x clients, the SSH version will be displayed as 1.99.
z If you use the undo ssh server compatible-ssh1x command to configure the server to be not
compatible with SSH1.x clients, the SSH version will be displayed as 2.0.

# Display information about sessions of active connection with SSH clients.

<Sysname> display ssh server session
Conn Ver Encry State Retry SerType Username
VTY 0 2.0 AES started 0 stelnet kk
VTY 1 2.0 AES started 0 sFTP abc

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display ssh server session command

Field Description
Conn Number of VTY interface used for user login

Ver SSH version

Encry Encryption algorithm used by SSH
State Session status

Retry Number of connection retries

SerType Service type
Username User name

display ssh server-info

Syntax

display ssh server-info

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ssh server-info command on an SSH client to display the mappings between SSH
servers and their public keys saved on the client.

1-7
If an SSH client needs to authenticate the SSH server, it uses the locally saved public key of the server
for authentication. In case the authentication fails, you can use the display ssh server-info command
to view whether the locally saved public key of the server is correct.

Related commands: ssh client assign, ssh client first-time enable.

Examples

# Display the mappings between SSH servers and their public keys saved on the client.
<Sysname> display ssh server-info
Server Name(IP) Server public key name
_________________________________________________________________________

192.168.0.90 192.168.0.90

display ssh user-information

Syntax

display ssh user-information [ username ]

View

Any view

Parameters

Description

Use the display ssh user-information command on an SSH server to display information about all
SSH users, including user name, authentication type, corresponding public key name and authorized
service type. If the username argument is specified, the command displays information about the
specified user.
Related commands: ssh authentication-type default, ssh user, ssh user authentication-type, ssh
user assign, ssh user service-type.

Examples

# Create an SSH user named client and specify publickey authentication as the authentication mode
for the SSH user.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.

1-8
[Sysname] ssh user client authentication-type publickey

# Configure SFTP as the service type for the SSH user.

[Sysname] ssh user client service-type sftp

# Assign the public key test for the SSH user.

[Sysname] ssh user client assign publickey test

# Display information about the SSH user configured on the SSH server.
[Sysname] display ssh user-information
Username Authentication-type User-public-key-name Service-type
client publickey test sftp

display ssh2 source-ip

Syntax

display ssh2 source-ip

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ssh2 source-ip command to display the current source IP address or the IP address
of the source interface specified for the SSH client. If neither source IP address nor source interface is
specified, the command displays 0.0.0.0.
Related commands: ssh2 source-ip.

Examples

# Display the current source IP address specified for the SSH Client.
<Sysname> display ssh2 source-ip
The source IP you specified is 192.168.0.1

display ssh-server source-ip

Syntax

display ssh-server source-ip

View

Any view

Parameters

None

1-9
Description

Use the display ssh-server source-ip command to display the current source IP address or the IP
address of the source interface specified for the SSH server. If neither source IP address nor source
interface is specified, the command displays 0.0.0.0.
Related commands: ssh-server source-ip.

Examples

# Display the current source IP address specified for the SSH Server.
<Sysname> display ssh-server source-ip
The source IP you specified is 192.168.1.1

peer-public-key end

Syntax

peer-public-key end

View

Public key view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the peer-public-key end command to return from public key view to system view.
Related commands: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code begin, public-key peer.

Examples

# Exit public key view.

protocol inbound

Syntax

protocol inbound { all | ssh }

View

VTY user interface view

Parameters

all: Supports both Telnet and SSH.

1-10
ssh: Supports only SSH.

Description

Use the protocol inbound command to configure specific user interface(s) to support specified
protocol(s). The configuration will take effect at next user login.
By default, both SSH and Telnet are supported.

As SSH clients access the SSH server through VTY user interfaces, you need configure the VTY user
interfaces of the SSH server to support remote SSH login.

z If you have configured a user interface to support SSH protocol, to ensure a successful login to the
user interface, you must configure AAA authentication for the user interface by using the
authentication-mode scheme command.
z For a user interface, if you have executed the authentication-mode password or
authentication-mode none command, the protocol inbound ssh command cannot be executed;
if you have executed the protocol inbound ssh command, neither of the authentication-mode
password and authentication-mode none commands can be executed.

Examples

# Configure vty0 through vty4 to support SSH only.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] user-interface vty 0 4
[Sysname-ui-vty0-4] authentication-mode scheme
[Sysname-ui-vty0-4] protocol inbound ssh

public-key local create

Syntax

public-key local create { dsa | rsa }

View

System view

Parameters

dsa: Specifies the DSA key pair.

rsa: Specifies the RSA key pair.

1-11
Description

Use the public-key local create command to create a local DSA key pair or RSA key pairs.
Note that:
z Generating the RSA and DSA key pairs on the server is prerequisite to SSH login.
z After entering this command, you will be prompted to provide the length of the key modulus. The
length is in the range 512 to 2048 bits and defaults to 1024 bits. If the key pair already exists, the
system will ask you whether you want to overwrite it.
z The key pair created by this command can survive a reboot. You only need to configure it once.
Related commands: public-key local destroy, display public-key local.

Examples

# Create local RSA key pairs.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] public-key local create rsa
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 1024]:
Generating keys...
...++++++
...................................................................++++++
...........................++++++++
.....++++++++
......

# Display the public key information of the local RSA key pairs.
[Sysname] display public-key local rsa public

=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 03:14:23 2000/04/06
Key name: Sysname_Host
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
305C300D06092A864886F70D0101010500034B003048024100D6665EFEC14F48A5B42A413E2FACCAA9F02C77
2AEDC4911E76AAEE55BA49C4A0233D2D80504068BD9C892C0DD9EBBBC7EB8842ED61CDB418A29CA1362BB48C
190203010001

=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 03:14:36 2000/04/06
Key name: Sysname_Server
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:

1-12
307C300D06092A864886F70D0101010500036B003068026100A3B63F5B0E5470D9FE2005450342011FEDE2A9
24C71EB19E28D257E43EF7E531D7C37FBB157712A2F2AF0F5BAF3E60595496C5B3EAFF25BFB56F1E1CC7A700
4D0FF048654BFEADB21C5AF3E24FB0516393BFEEF65A83B7416F170886904C8BE30203010001

# Create a DSA key pair.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] public-key local create dsa
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 1024]:
Generating keys...
.++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++*
........+......+.....+......................................+..+................
.......+..........+..............+.............+...+.....+...............+..+...
...+.................+..........+...+....+.......+.....+............+.........+.
........................+........+..........+..............+.....+...+..........
..............+.........+..........+...........+........+....+..................
.....+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++*
......

# Display the public key information of the local DSA key pair.
[Sysname]display public-key local dsa public

=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 03:17:33 2000/04/06
Key name:
Key type: DSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3081F03081A806072A8648CE38040130819C0241008DF2A494492276AA3D25759BB06869CBEAC0D83AFB8D0C
F7CBB8324F0D7882E5D0762FC5B7210EAFC2E9ADAC32AB7AAC49693DFBF83724C2EC0736EE31C80291021500
C773218C737EC8EE993B4F2DED30F48EDACE915F0240626D027839EA0A13413163A55B4CB500299D5522956C
EFCB3BFF10F399CE2C2E71CB9DE5FA24BABF58E5B79521925C9CC42E9F6F464B088CC572AF53E6D788020343
0002406FBDE6C9BD578722585CDF4F3BFB31DD739865D1EA0312EDF2BAF4841C0A963E400640E46720681729
2CDFE5D91D86FDB9C3A16141E675E6FFC6C2577E660FF1

public-key local destroy

Syntax

public-key local destroy { dsa | rsa }

View

System view

Parameters

dsa: Specifies the DSA key pair.

1-13
rsa: Specifies the RSA key pair.

Description

Use the public-key local destroy command to destroy the key pairs generated for the current switch.
If the key pair does not exist, the system displays a message, telling you no such key pair exists.
Related commands: public-key local create.

Examples

# Destroy the RSA key pairs of the current switch.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]public-key local destroy dsa
% Confirm to destroy these keys? [Y/N]:y
......

# Destroy the DSA key pair of the current switch.

<Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] public-key local destroy dsa
% Confirm to destroy these keys? [Y/N]:y
......

public-key local export rsa

Syntax

public-key local export rsa { openssh | ssh1 | ssh2 } [ filename ]

View

System view

Parameters

rsa: Specifies the host public key of the current switch’s RSA key pair.
openssh: Specifies the format of the exported public key as OpenSSH.
ssh1: Specifies the format of the exported public key as SSH1.
ssh2: Specifies the format of the exported public key as SSH2.
filename: Name of the file for saving the host public key, a string of 1 to 142 characters. For file naming
rules, refer to File System Management Command.

Description

Use the public-key local export rsa command to export the current switch’s RSA key pair to a
specified file.
If you specify a filename, the command exports the host public key to the specified file and saves the file;
otherwise, the command displays the host public key on the screen.

1-14
z SSH1, SSH2, and OpenSSH are three public key formats. You can choose one as required. For
example, if you want to export the RSA host public key to a file in the SSH1 format, use the
public-key local export rsa ssh1 filename command.
z The host public key displayed on the screen is in a format that is not transformed and cannot be
used as the public key data for public key configuration.

Related commands: public-key local create, rsa local-key-pair create.

Examples

# Generate RSA key pairs.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] public-key local create rsa
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 1024]:
Generating keys...
...............................................++++++
......++++++
.................++++++++
.....++++++++
.......

# Display the host public key in the OpenSSH format.

[Sysname]public-key local export rsa openssh
ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAgMSPi+xIkHkAo6E9LwLKWN+eN9EqW/6FIYEIlVKcpIa0
6IT4eSyq4OldeiZ9WorOiDqX3ROo4FmaTR/QCSK3C9whE1qz/4soVL1eHDdgzQCumKKsJCVaM5OdZ2sdNbEnhLuc
s8ZrfTgEkDB1hmbgzuDpWPokPfkQDD+8dC+hkFVV rsa-key

# Export the host public key in the format of OpenSSH and save the public key file as pub_ssh_file2.
[Sysname] public-key local export rsa openssh pub_ssh_file2

# Export the host public key in the format of SSH1 and save the public key file as pub_ssh_file3.
[Sysname] public-key local export rsa ssh1 pub_ssh_file3

public-key local export dsa

Syntax

public-key local export dsa { openssh | ssh2 } [ filename ]

View

System view

Parameters

dsa: Specifies the public key of the current switch’s DSA key pair.

1-15
openssh: Uses the format of OpenSSH.
ssh2: Uses the format of SSH2.
filename: Name of the file for saving the public key, a string of 1 to 142 characters. For file naming rules,
refer to File System Management Command.

Description

Use the public-key local export dsa command to export the current switch’s DSA key pair to a
specified file.
If you specify a filename, the command exports the public key to the specified file and saves it;
otherwise, the command displays the public key on the screen.

z SSH2 and OpenSSH are two public key formats. You can choose one as required. For example, if
you want to export the DSA host public key to a file in the SSH2 format, use the public-key local
export dsa ssh2 filename command.
z The host public key displayed on the screen is in a format that is not transformed and cannot be
used as the public key data for public key configuration.

Related commands: public-key local create.

Examples

# Generate a DSA key pair.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname]public-key local create dsa
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 1024]:
Generating keys...
.++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++*
........+......+.....+......................................+..+.......................+
..........+..............+.............+...+.....+...............+..+......+............
.....+..........+...+....+.......+.....+............+.........+.........................
+........+..........+..............+.....+...+........................+.........+.......
...+...........+........+....+.......................+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++*
.......

# Display the public key in the SSH2 format.

[Sysname] public-key local export dsa ssh2
---- BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ----
Comment: "dsa-key-20000406"
AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACA11cmLEWExEwhHxi9luXwYcTwpCP3/mtrhbNM73LOFKDTpSIv4Izs5lvmwmWFSIncHtvR
PsiydNqfdbomzLmHcjYCeH6SK6hEIfIsPInLmwb9YP4BlB3dd/5rEok9p27rwdEo2X8GeNdyK1NByFBvNYIUsWov

1-16
rEs2iVA4eBHH2jMAAAAUx3MhjHN+yO6ZO08t7TD0jtrOkV8AAACAgiaQCeFOxHS68pMuadOx8YUXrZWUGEzN/Orp
bsTV75MTPoS0cJPFKyDNNdAkkrOVnsZJliW8T6UILiLFs3ThbdABMs5xsCAhcJGscXthI5HHbB+y6IMXwb2BcdQe
y4PiEMA8ybMugQVhwhYhxz1tqsAo9LFYXaf0JRlxjMmwnu8AAACA04Cd4ccxNjCMWzPAzZhj65GjyxExYS72XKWt
0S0AUs51ttRCqOHV/G8LUcdQ4pkp7XK6YGvxS0m1RPb9cIOMQZSYdHiXOq45zFA3Y8ylnWWF6EiuVUstjN8RC8Vt
nTzzIbihwmSSR0R9OEGi1vnxCdA1l5wDhuEYJMgq9ipVXLA=
---- END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ----

# Export the public key in OpenSSH format.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] public-key local export dsa openssh key.pub

public-key peer

Syntax

public-key peer keyname

undo public-key peer keyname

View

System view

Parameters

keyname: Name of the public key, a string of 1 to 64 characters.

Description

Use the public-key peer command to enter public key view.

Use the undo public-key peer command to delete the configuration of peer public key.
After configuring this command, you enter public key view. You can use this command together with the
public-key-code begin command to configure the peer public key. This public key configuration
method requires that you obtain the public key in hexadecimal format in advance.

Only the public key whose module is of 512 to 2,048 bits can be configured on the device currently.

Related commands: public-key-code begin, public-key-code end.

Examples

# Enter public key view

<Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]public-key peer pub.ppk
PKEY public key view: return to System View with "peer-public-key end".
[Sysname-peer-public-key]

1-17
public-key peer import sshkey

Syntax

public-key peer keyname import sshkey filename

undo public-key peer keyname

View

System view

Parameters

keyname: Name of the public key , a string of 1 to 64 characters.

filename: Name of a public key file, a string of 1 to 142 characters. For file naming rules, refer to File
System Management Command.

Description

Use the public-key peer import sshkey command to import a peer public key from the public key file.
Use the undo public-key peer command to remove the setting.

z Only public key files in the format of SSH1, SSH2, or OpenSSH are supported.
z Currently, only public keys whose modules are in the range 512 to 2048 bits can be imported to the
switch.
z You may use this command to configure an SSH peer’s public key on the current switch. After you
issue this command, the system will automatically identify the format of the public key, transforms
the public key into the PKCS format, and saves the public key locally. This public key configuration
method requires that the public key file be uploaded to the current switch through FTP or TFTP.

Examples

Configure the devices so that an SSH connection can be set up between the SSH server and an SSH
client using publickey authentication. The following describes key configuration steps related to
publickey authentication only.
# On the SSH server, configure publickey authentication as the authentication mode for the client.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ssh user client authentication-type publickey

# On the SSH client, generate RSA key pairs and export the RSA host public key to a file.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] public-key local create rsa
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.

1-18
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 1024]:
Generating keys...
...............................................++++++
......++++++
.................++++++++
.....++++++++
.......
[Sysname] public-key local export rsa ssh2 pub

# Send the public key file of the SSH client to the SSH using FTP or TFTP. The configuration is omitted.
# On the SSH server, import the SSH client's public key from the public key file, and then assign the
public key to the SSH client.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] public-key peer publick import sshkey pub
[Sysname] ssh user client assign publickey publick

public-key-code begin

Syntax

public-key-code begin

View

Public key view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the public-key-code begin command to enter public key edit view.
Using the public-key peer command to enter public key view, and use the public-key-code begin
command to enter the public key edit view. Then you can input the key by pasting the copied characters
or pressing the keys on the keyboard. It must be a hexadecimal string that has been encoded complying
with PKCS. Spaces and carriage returns are allowed between characters.
Related commands: rsa peer-public-key, public-key peer, public-key-code end.

Examples

# Enter public key edit view and input a public key.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] rsa peer-public-key Switch003
RSA public key view: return to System View with "peer-public-key end".
[Sysname-rsa-public-key] public-key-code begin
RSA key code view: return to last view with "public-key-code end".
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] 308186028180739A291ABDA704F5D93DC8FDF84C427463
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] 1991C164B0DF178C55FA833591C7D47D5381D09CE82913
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] D7EDF9C08511D83CA4ED2B30B809808EB0D1F52D045DE4

1-19
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] 0861B74A0E135523CCD74CAC61F8E58C452B2F3F2DA0DC
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] C48E3306367FE187BDD944018B3B69F3CBB0A573202C16
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] BB2FC1ACF3EC8F828D55A36F1CDDC4BB45504F020125
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end
[Sysname-rsa-public-key]

public-key-code end

Syntax

public-key-code end

View

Public key edit view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the public-key-code end command to return from public key edit view to public key view and save
the public key you input.
After you use this command to end editing the public key, the system will check the validity of the public
key before saving the key.
z If there is any illegal character in the key, your configuration fails. In this case, a prompt is displayed
and the key is discarded.
z If the key is valid, it is saved in the local public key list.
Related commands: rsa peer-public-key, public-key peer, public-key-code begin.

Examples

# Exit public key edit view and save the public key you input.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] rsa peer-public-key Switch003
RSA public key view: return to System View with "peer-public-key end".
[Sysname-rsa-public-key] public-key-code begin
RSA key code view: return to last view with "public-key-code end".
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] 308186028180739A291ABDA704F5D93DC8FDF84C427463
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] 1991C164B0DF178C55FA833591C7D47D5381D09CE82913
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] D7EDF9C08511D83CA4ED2B30B809808EB0D1F52D045DE4
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] 0861B74A0E135523CCD74CAC61F8E58C452B2F3F2DA0DC
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] C48E3306367FE187BDD944018B3B69F3CBB0A573202C16
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] BB2FC1ACF3EC8F828D55A36F1CDDC4BB45504F020125
[Sysname-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end
[Sysname-rsa-public-key]

1-20
rsa local-key-pair create

Syntax

rsa local-key-pair create

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the rsa local-key-pair create command to generate an RSA key pair for the current switch.
Note that:
z After entering this command, you will be prompted to provide the length of the key modulus. The
length is in the range 512 to 2048 bits and defaults to 1024 bits. If the key pair already exists, the
system will ask you whether you want to overwrite it.
z The configuration of this command can survive a reboot. You only need to configure it once.
z After the RSA key pair is generated, the display rsa local-key-pair public command displays two
public keys (the host public key and server public key) when the switch is working in
SSH1-compatible mode, but only one public key (the host public key) when the switch is working in
SSH2 mode.
Related commands: rsa local-key-pair destroy, display rsa local-key-pair public.

Examples

# Generate local RSA key pairs.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] rsa local-key-pair create
The local-key-pair will be created.
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 1024]:
Generating keys...
........................++++++
.......++++++
.................................++++++++
...++++++++
........Done!

# Display the public keys of the current switch’s RSA key pairs.
[Sysname] display rsa local-key-pair public

=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 02:31:51 2000/04/09
Key name: Sysname_Host

1-21
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
308188
028180
F0C0EDA9 FA2E2FAC 4B16CA34 677F1861 A13E89BE
6AAAC326 4E17268D EFADED1A FCA39047 52F18422
B8C875DF 3626150D 4057EE12 371D5E62 57D34A16
5045A403 FA805F72 B2780C9A 041ED99E 2841F600
AB30DB10 821EF338 1FA54FE5 3DC79E46 74E45127
3D4CA70F 253645DA 57524DC3 513BAC53 2C1B7F8F
2481FA79 D4AA15C7
0203
010001

=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 02:32:06 2000/04/09
Key name: Sysname_Server
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3067
0260
C9BEF5C8 1AF3E457 AD007039 DDB21785 28B0204F
A9ED61A6 AD381860 9491B700 0286568F 4CAF27B1
1B17B1A2 0D516E74 8DAFA6C1 0F71624B B8BE6FB2
F550E7B9 BABD5B34 7D3E85C2 126B59DC 93BB4EA5
6A147737 E9CE41EB 1B31171C 142902AF
0203
010001

rsa local-key-pair destroy

Syntax

rsa local-key-pair destroy

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the rsa local-key-pair destroy command to destroy the current switch’s RSA key pair.
If the local RSA key pairs do not exist, the system displays a message, telling you no such key pairs
exist.
Related commands: rsa local-key-pair create.

1-22
Examples

# Destroy the current switch’s RSA key pairs.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] rsa local-key-pair destroy
% The local-key-pair will be destroyed.
% Confirm to destroy these keys? [Y/N]:y
.............Done!

rsa peer-public-key

Syntax

rsa peer-public-key keyname

undo rsa peer-public-key keyname

View

System view

Parameters

keyname: Name of the public key to be configured , a string of 1 to 64 characters.

Description

Use the rsa peer-public-key command to enter public key view.

Use the undo rsa peer-public-key command to remove the setting.
After using this command, you can use the public-key-code begin command to configure the peer
public key. This public key configuration method requires that you obtain the peer public key in
hexadecimal format in advance.

Currently, the switch supports only public keys of 512 to 2048 bits.

Related commands: public-key-code begin, public-key-code end.

Examples

# Enter Switch002 public key view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] rsa peer-public-key Switch002
RSA public key view: return to System View with "peer-public-key end".
[Sysname-rsa-public-key]

1-23
rsa peer-public-key import sshkey

Syntax

rsa peer-public-key keyname import sshkey filename

undo rsa peer-public-key keyname

View

System view

Parameters

keyname: Name of the public key to be configured, a string of 1 to 64 characters.

filename: Name of a public key file, a string of 1 to 142 characters. For file naming rules, refer to File
System Management Command.

Description

Use the rsa peer-public-key import sshkey command to import a peer public key from the public key
file.
Use the undo rsa peer-public-key command to remove the setting.
After execution of this command, the system automatically transforms the public key file into PKCS
format, and imports the peer public key. This requires that you get a copy of the public key file from the
peer through FTP/TFTP.

z Only public key files in the format of SSH1 or SSH2 are supported.
z Currently, only public keys with the modulues being in the range 512 to 2048 bits can be imported
to the switch.
z You may use this command to configure an SSH peer’s public key on the current switch. After you
issue this command, the system will automatically identify the format of the public key, transforms
the public key into the PKCS format, and saves the public key locally. This public key configuration
method requires that the public key file be uploaded to the current switch through FTP or TFTP.

The rsa peer-public-key import sshkey command can transform only RSA public keys. If you want
DSA public keys to be transformed and configured automatically, use the public-key peer import
sshkey command.

Examples

# Transform the format of client public key file abc and configure a public key named 123.
<Sysname> system-view

1-24
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] rsa peer-public-key 123 import sshkey abc

ssh authentication-type default

Syntax

ssh authentication-type default { all | password | password-publickey | publickey | rsa }

undo ssh authentication-type default

View

System view

Parameters

all: Specifies either the password authentication or the publickey authentication for SSH users.
password: Specifies the authentication mode for SSH users as password authentication.
password-publickey: Specifies that both the password and the publickey must be authenticated for
SSH users.
publickey: Specifies the authentication mode for the SSH user as publickey (RSA key or DSA key )
authentication.
rsa: Specifies the authentication mode for the SSH user as publickey (RSA key or DSA key )
authentication. The authentication modes specified by the rsa keyword and publickey keyword are
implemented in the same way.

Description

Use the ssh authentication-type default command to specify a default authentication mode for SSH
users. After this command is configured, when an SSH user is added by using the ssh user command,
the default authentication mode is adopted for the user if no authentication mode is specified by using
the ssh user authentication-type command.
Use the undo ssh authentication-type default command to remove the specified default
authentication mode. That is, no default authentication mode is specified for SSH users. In this case,
when an SSH user is added, you must specify an authentication mode for the user at the same time.
By default, no default authentication mode is specified.
The differences between password authentication, publickey authentication, and password-publickey
authentication are:
z Password authentication is vulnerable to attacks.
z Publickey authentication provides more secure SSH connections than password authentication
does. The mode is easy to use and prevents illegal operations such as malicious password guess.
After the configuration, the subsequent authentications are implemented automatically without
asking you to enter the password.
z Password-publickey authentication takes the advantages of both password authentication and
publickey authentication. An SSH user must pass both types of authentication before logging in.
The combination of password and publickey authentications eliminates the vulnerability of the SSH
server caused by the clients. You can use password-publickey authentication together with AAA for
authentication and authorization of users.
Related commands: display ssh user-information.

1-25
Examples

# Specify the publickey authentication as the default authentication mode.

<Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]ssh authentication-type default publickey

# Create an SSH user

[Sysname] ssh user user1

# Display information about configured SSH users.

[Sysname] display ssh user-information
Username Authentication-type User-public-key-name Service-type
user1 publickey null stelnet

ssh client assign

Syntax

ssh client { server-ip | server-name } assign { publickey | rsa-key } keyname

undo ssh client { server-ip | server-name } assign { publickey | rsa-key }

View

System view

Parameters

server-ip: IP address of the server.

server-name: Name of the server, a string of 1 to 184 characters.
keyname: Name of the public key of the server, a string of 1 to 64 characters.

Both the publickey and rsa-key keywords indicate specifying the publickey key. They are implemented
with the same method.

Description

Use the ssh client assign command to specify the name of the public key of the server on the client so
that the client can authenticate whether the server to be accessed is reliable.
Use the undo ssh client assign command to remove the mapping between the client and the public
key of the server.
By default, a client does not have the name of the server’s public key specified and it uses the IP
address or host name that it used to log in to the SSH server as the public key name.

1-26
If a client does not support first-time authentication, it will refuse to access any unauthenticated server.
In this case, you need to configure the public key of the server on the client and associate the public key
and the server so that the client can authenticate the server during login.

If a pair of SSH peers are both switches that support both DSA and RSA, you must configure the DSA
public key of the server on the client.

Related command: ssh client first-time enable.

Examples

# Specify the name of the DSA public key of the server (whose IP address is 192.168.0.1) as pub.ppk
on the client.
<Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ssh client 192.168.0.1 assign publickey pub.ppk

ssh client first-time enable

Syntax

ssh client first-time enable

undo ssh client first-time

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the ssh client first-time enable command to enable the client to run first-time authentication for
the SSH server it accesses for the first time.
Use the undo ssh client first-time command to disable the client from running first-time
authentication.
By default, the client is enabled to run first-time authentication.
Note that:
z With first-time authentication enabled, an SSH client that is not configured with the server’s host
public key can continue accessing the server when it accesses the server for the first time. The
SSH server sends its host public key to the client automatically, and the client saves the key for use

1-27
in subsequent authentications. In this mode, the client cannot ensure the correctness of the SSH
server's host public key.
z With first-time authentication disabled, you must configure the server’s host public key and specify
the public key name for authentication on the client in advance.
For details about first-time authentication, refer to corresponding section in SSH Operation.

Examples

# Disable the client to run first-time authentication on an SSH client.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] undo ssh client first-time

ssh server authentication-retries

Syntax

ssh server authentication-retries times

undo ssh server authentication-retries

View

System view

Parameters

times: Authentication retry times, in the range of 1 to 5.

Description

Use the ssh server authentication-retries command to set the authentication retry times for SSH
connections. This configuration will take effect for all users logging in later.
Use the undo ssh server authentication-retries command to restore the default authentication retry
times.
By default, the number of authentication retry times is 3.

If you have used the ssh user authentication-type command to configure the authentication type of a
user to password-publickey, you must set the authentication retry times to a number greater than or
equal to 2 (so that the user can access the switch).

Related commands: display ssh server.

Examples

# Set the authentication retry times to four.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ssh server authentication-retries 4

1-28
ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable

Syntax

ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable

undo ssh server compatible-ssh1x

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable command to make the server compatible with SSH1.x
clients.
Use the undo ssh server compatible-ssh1x command to make the server incompatible with SSH1.x
clients.
By default, the server is compatible with SSH1.x clients.
Related commands: display ssh server.

Examples

# Configure the server to be compatible with SSH1.x clients.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable

ssh server rekey-interval

Syntax

ssh server rekey-interval hours

undo ssh server rekey-interval

View

System view

Parameters

hours: Interval to update the server keys, ranging from 1 to 24 (in hours).

Description

Use the ssh server rekey-interval command to set the interval to update the RSA server keys
regularly.
Use the undo ssh server rekey-interval command to cancel the current configuration.
By default, the update interval is zero, which indicates the system does not update the server keys.

1-29
This command only takes effect on users whose client version is SSH1.x.

Related commands: display ssh server.

Examples

# Configure to update the server's keys every 3 hours.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ssh server rekey-interval 3

ssh server timeout

Syntax

ssh server timeout seconds

undo ssh server timeout

View

System view

Parameters

seconds: Authentication timeout time, ranging from 1 to 120 (in seconds).

Description

Use the ssh server timeout command to set the authentication timeout time for SSH connections.
Use the undo ssh server timeout command to restore the default timeout time (that is, 60 seconds).
The configuration here will take effect at next login.
Related commands: display ssh server.

Examples

# Set the authentication timeout time to 80 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ssh server timeout 80

ssh user

Syntax

ssh user username

undo ssh user username

View

System view

1-30
Parameters

Description

Use the ssh user command to create an SSH user.

Use the undo ssh user to delete a specified SSH user.
An SSH user is represented as a set of user attributes on the SSH server. This set is uniquely identified
with the SSH username. When a user logs in to the SSH server from the SSH client, a username is
required so that the server can looks up the database for matching the username. If a match is found, it
authenticates the user using the authentication mode specified in the attribute set. If not, it tears down
the connection.

An SSH user created with this command uses the default authentication type specified by the ssh
authentication-type default command. If no default authentication type is specified for SSH users, you
need to use the ssh user authentication-type command to create an SSH user and specify an
authentication mode for the user.

An SSH user is created on an SSH server for the purpose of specifying the authentication type, the SSH
service type, and the public key for the SSH user. An existing SSH user will be removed automatically if
it has none of the authentication type, the SSH service type, and the public key configured.

Related commands: ssh authentication-type default, ssh user authentication-type.

Examples

# Specify the default authentication type as password authentication. Create an SSH user with the
name “abc”.
<Sysname> system-view
Enter system view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ssh authentication-type default password
[Sysname] ssh user abc

# Display the SSH user information.

[Sysname] display ssh user-information abc
Username Authentication-type User-public-key-name Service-type

1-31
abc password null stelnet

ssh user assign

Syntax

ssh user username assign { publickey | rsa-key } keyname

undo ssh user username assign { publickey | rsa-key }

View

System view

Parameters

Description

Use the ssh user assign command to assign an existing public key to a specified SSH user on the SSH
server side.
Use the undo ssh user assign command to remove the association.
The public key of the client is subject to the one assigned last time.
The new public key takes effect when the user logs in next time.

z On an SSH server, you need to assign a public key to each SSH user using publickey
authentication.
z Both publickey and rsa-key indicate specifying the publickey key. They are implemented with the
same method.

Related commands: display ssh user-information.

Examples

# Assign a public key named 127.0.0.1 to SSH client 1.

<Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]ssh user 1 assign publickey 127.0.0.1

# Display SSH user information.

[Sysname] display ssh user-information 1
Username Authentication-type User-public-key-name Service-type

1-32
1 publickey 127.0.0.1 stelnet

ssh user authentication-type

Syntax

ssh user username authentication-type { all | password | password-publickey | publickey | rsa }

undo ssh user username authentication-type

View

System view

Parameters

username: SSH user name, a string of 1 to 184 characters. It cannot contain any of these characters:
slash (/), backslash (\), colon (:), asterisk (*), question mark (?), less than sign (<), greater than sign (>),
and the vertical bar sign (|). In addition, the @ sign can appear up to once, the username part (that is,
the string before the @ sign) cannot be more than 55 characters, and the domain name part cannot be
more than 128 characters.
all: Specifies that the authentication mode for the SSH user can be either password authentication or
publickey authentication.
password: Specifies the authentication mode for the SSH user as password authentication.
password-publickey: Specifies the authentication mode for the SSH user as password and publickey.
publickey: Specifies the authentication mode for the SSH user as publickey (RSA key or DSA key )
authentication.
rsa: Specifies the authentication mode for the SSH user as publickey (RSA key or DSA key )
authentication. The authentication modes specified by the rsa keyword and publickey keyword are
implemented in the same way

For the password-publickey authentication type:

z SSH1 client users can access the switch as long as they pass one of the two authentications.
z SSH2 client users can access the switch only when they pass both the authentications.

Description

Use the ssh user authentication-type command to specify the authentication mode for SSH users on
the server.
Use the undo ssh user authentication-type command to remove the configuration.
The differences between password authentication, publickey authentication, and password-publickey
authentication are:
z Password authentication is vulnerable to attacks.
z Publickey authentication provides more secure SSH connections than password authentication
does. The mode is easy to use and prevents illegal operations such as malicious password guess.

1-33
After the configuration, the subsequent authentications are implemented automatically without
asking you to enter the password.
z Password-publickey authentication takes the advantages of both the password authentication and
publickey authentication. An SSH user must pass both types of authentication before logging in.
The combination of password and publickey authentications eliminates the vulnerability of the SSH
server caused by the clients. You can use password-publickey authentication together with AAA for
authentication and authorization of users.

You need to specify the authentication mode for an SSH user. Otherwise, the user will not be able to log
in to the SSH server.

Related commands: display ssh user-information.

Examples

# Specify the publickey authentication for SSH users.

<Sysname>system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]ssh user kk authentication-type publickey

# Display the SSH user information.

[Sysname] display ssh user-information kk
Username Authentication-type User-public-key-name Service-type
kk publickey null stelnet

ssh user service-type

Syntax

ssh user username service-type { stelnet | sftp | all }

undo ssh user username service-type

View

System view

Parameters

1-34
Description

Use the ssh user service-type command to configure service type for a user so that the user can
access specified service(s).
Use the undo ssh user service-type command to remove the service type specified for an SSH user.
The default service type for an SSH user is stelnet.
Related commands: display ssh user-information.

Examples

# Specify that user kk can access SFTP service.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ssh user kk service-type sftp

# Display the SSH user information.

[Sysname] display ssh user-information kk
Username Authentication-type User-public-key-name Service-type
kk publickey null sftp

ssh2

Syntax

ssh2 { host-ip | host-name } [ port-num ] [ identity-key { dsa | rsa } | prefer_kex { dh_group1 |

dh_exchange_group } | prefer_ctos_cipher { 3des | des | aes128 } | prefer_stoc_cipher { 3des |
des | aes128 } | prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } | prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 |
sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] *

View

System view

Parameters

host-ip: Server IP address.

host-name: Server name, a string of 1 to 20 characters.
port-num: Server port number. It is in the range of 0 to 65,535 and defaults to 22.
identity-key: Specifies the algorithm for publickey authentication, either dsa or rsa. The default is rsa.
prefer_kex: Specifies the preferred key exchange algorithm. You can select one from the following two
algorithms.
z dh_group1: Diffie-Hellman-group1-sha1 key exchange algorithm. It is the default algorithm.
z dh_exchange_group: Diffie-Hellman-group-exchange-sha1 key exchange algorithm.
prefer_ctos_cipher: Specifies the preferred client-to-server encryption algorithm, which is AES128 by
default.
prefer_stoc_cipher: Specifies the preferred server-to-client encryption algorithm, which is AES128 by
default.

1-35
z 3des: 3DES_cbc encryption algorithm. Support for this keyword depends on the number of
encryption bits of the software version. The 168-bit version supports this keyword, while the 56-bit
version does not.
z des: DES_cbc encryption algorithm.
z aes128: AES_128 encryption algorithm.
prefer_ctos_hmac: Specifies the preferred client-to-server HMAC (Hash-based message
authentication code) algorithm, which is SHA1_96 by default.
prefer_stoc_hmac: Specifies the preferred server-to-client HMAC algorithm, which is SHA1_96 by
default.
z sha1: HMAC-SHA1 algorithm.
z sha1_96: HMAC-SHA1-96 algorithm.
z md5: HMAC-MD5 algorithm.
z md5_96: HMAC-MD5-96 algorithm.

z DES (data encryption standard) is a standard data encryption algorithm.

z AES (advanced encryption standard) is an advanced encryption standard algorithm.

Description

Use the ssh2 command to start the SSH client to establish a connection with an SSH server, and at the
same time specify the preferred key exchange algorithm, encryption algorithms and HMAC algorithms
between the server and client.
Note that when logging into the SSH server using publickey authentication, an SSH client needs to read
its own private key for authentication. As two algorithms (RSA or DSA) are available, the identity-key
keyword must be used to specify one algorithm in order to get the correct private key.

Examples

# Log into SSH server 10.214.50.51 with:

z dh_exchange_group as the preferred key exchange algorithm,
z aes128 as the preferred server-to-client encryption algorithm,
z md5 as the preferred client-to-server HMAC algorithm, and
z sha1_96 as the preferred server-to-client HMAC algorithm.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ssh2 10.214.50.51 prefer_kex dh_exchange_group prefer_stoc_cipher aes128
prefer_ctos_hmac md5 prefer_stoc_hmac sha1_96

ssh2 source-interface

Syntax

ssh2 source-interface interface-type interface-number

undo ssh2 source-interface

1-36
View

System view

Parameters

interface-type: Source interface type.

interface-number: Source interface number.

Description

Use the ssh2 source-interface command to specify a source interface for the SSH client. If the
specified interface does not exist, the command fails.
Use the undo ssh2 source-interface command to cancel the source interface setting. You can
configure an IP address by specifying the corresponding interface for the client to use to access the
SSH server. This improves the service manageability when the SSH client has multiple IP addresses
and interfaces.

Examples

# Specify source interface Vlan-interface 1 for the SSH client.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ssh2 source-interface Vlan-interface 1

ssh2 source-ip

Syntax

ssh2 source-ip ip-address

undo ssh2 source-ip

View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: Source IP address.

Description

Use the ssh2 source-ip command to specify a source IP address for the SSH client. If the specified IP
address is not an address of the device, the command fails.
Use the undo ssh2 source-ip command to cancel the source IP address setting.
You can specify a souce IP address for the client to use to access the SSH server. This improves the
service manageability when the SSH client has multiple IP addresses.

Examples

# Specify source IP address 192.168.1.1 for the SSH client.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ssh2 source-ip 192.168.1.1

1-37
ssh-server source-interface

Syntax

ssh-server source-interface interface-type interface-number

undo ssh-server source-interface

View

System view

Parameters

interface-type: Source interface type.

interface-number: Source interface number.

Description

Use the ssh-server source-interface command to specify a source interface for the SSH server. If the
specified interface does not exist, the command fails.
Use the undo ssh-server source-interface command to cancel the source interface setting.
You can specify a source interface that corresponds to the IP address for the SSH server to provide
SSH access services for the clients. In this way, the SSH clients can only access the SSH server using
the IP address of the specified interface as the destination. This improves the service manageability
when the SSH server has multiple IP addresses and interfaces,

Examples

# Specify Vlan-interface 1 as the source interface of the SSH server.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ssh-server source-interface Vlan-interface 1

ssh-server source-ip

Syntax

ssh-server source-ip ip-address

undo ssh-server source-ip

View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address to be set as the source IP address.

Description

Use the ssh-server source-ip command to specify a source IP address for the SSH server. If the
specified IP address is not an IP address of the device, the command fails.
Use the undo ssh-server source-ip command to cancel the source IP address setting.

1-38
You can configure a source IP address for the SSH server to provide SSH access service for the SSH
clients. In this way, the SSH clients can only access the SSH server using the specified IP address as
the destination. This improves the service manageability when the SSH server has multiple IP
addresses.

Examples

# Specify source IP address 192.168.0.1 for the SSH server.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ssh-server source-ip 192.168.0.1

1-39
Table of Contents

1 File System Management Configuration Commands ············································································1-1

File System Configuration Commands ···································································································1-1
cd ·····················································································································································1-1
copy ·················································································································································1-2
delete ···············································································································································1-3
dir·····················································································································································1-4
execute ············································································································································1-6
file prompt········································································································································1-6
fixdisk···············································································································································1-7
format···············································································································································1-8
mkdir ················································································································································1-8
more·················································································································································1-9
move ··············································································································································1-10
pwd ················································································································································1-11
rename ··········································································································································1-11
reset recycle-bin ····························································································································1-12
rmdir···············································································································································1-13
undelete·········································································································································1-14
File Attribute Configuration Commands ································································································1-14
boot attribute-switch ······················································································································1-14
boot boot-loader ····························································································································1-15
boot boot-loader backup-attribute ·································································································1-15
boot web-package ·························································································································1-16
display boot-loader ························································································································1-17
display web package ·····················································································································1-17
startup bootrom-access enable ·····································································································1-18

i
1 File System Management Configuration
Commands

3com switches 4200G allow you to input a file path and file name in one of the following ways:
z In universal resource locator (URL) format and starting with “unit1>flash:/”. or “flash:/” This method
is used to specify a file in the current Flash memory. For example, the URL of a file named text.txt
in the root directory of the switch is unit1>flash:/text.txt or flash:/text.txt.
z Entering the path name or file name directly. This method can be used to specify a path or a file in
the current work directory. For example, to access file text.txt in the current directory, you can
directly input the file name text.txt as the file URL.

File System Configuration Commands

Note to limit the lengths of device name, directory name, file path and file name within the following
ranges regulated for the switch.
z A directory name should be no more than 91 characters.
z A file name plus its local path name should be no more than 127 characters.
z A device name should be no more than 14 characters.
z A file name plus its complete path name should be no more than 142 characters.

Syntax

cd directory

View

User view

Parameter

directory: Target directory.

1-1
Description

Use the cd command to enter a specified directory on the Ethernet switch.

The default directory when a user logs onto the switch is the root directory of Flash memory.

Example

# Enter the directory named test from the root directory.

<Sysname> cd test

# Return to the upper directory. Note that keyword cd is followed by a space.

<Sysname> cd ..

After modifying the working directory using the cd command, you can use the pwd command to display
the current working directory.

copy

Syntax

copy fileurl-source fileurl-dest

View

User view

Parameter

fileurl-source: Name of the source file.

fileurl-dest: Name of the target file.

Description

Use the copy command to copy a file.

If the fileurl-dest argument identifies an existing file, the existing file will be overwritten after the
command is executed successfully.
If the path, rather than the name of the target file is specified, the source file name is used as the target
file name by default.

Example

# Copy file config.cfg from the root directory to directory test, and save the file using name 1.cfg.
<Sysname> copy flash:/config.cfg flash:/test/1.cfg
Copy unit1>flash:/config.cfg to unit1>flash:/test/1.cfg?[Y/N]:y
...
%Copy file unit1>flash:/config.cfg to unit1>flash:/test/1.cfg...Done.

# Copy file config.cfg from the root directory to directory test, and save the file using the original file
name.
<Sysname> copy flash:/config.cfg flash:/test
Copy unit1>flash:/config.cfg to unit1>flash:/test/config.cfg?[Y/N]:y
...
%Copy file unit1>flash:/config.cfg to unit1>flash:/test/config.cfg...Done.

1-2
delete

Syntax

delete [ /unreserved ] file-url

delete { running-files | standby-files } [ /unreserved ]

View

User view

Parameter

/unreserved: Specifies to delete a file completely.

file-url: Path name or file name of a file in the Flash memory. You can use the * character in this
argument as a wildcard. For example, the delete *.txt command deletes all the files with txt as their
extensions.
running-files: Specifies to delete all the files with the main attribute.
standby-files: Specifies to delete all the files with the backup attribute.

Description

Use the delete command to delete a specified file from the Flash memory on a switch.
If you execute the delete command with the /unreserved keyword specified, the specified file is
permanently deleted. That is, the file cannot be restored. If you execute the delete command without
the /unreserved keyword, the specified file is removed to the recycle bin, and you can use the undelete
command to restore it.
You can delete files based on file attribute.
z If you execute the delete running-files command, all the files with the main attribute will be
deleted.
z If you execute the delete standby-files command, all the files with the backup attribute will be
deleted.
For a file that has both the main and backup attributes:
z The delete running-files command only deletes its main attribute instead of the file itself.
z The delete standby-files command only deletes its backup attribute instead of the file itself.
When you use the delete running-files or delete standby-files command, you will be prompted to
confirm whether to delete all files with the main/backup attribute. If you choose yes, the corresponding
files are deleted. If you choose no, the system will further to prompt you to confirm the following items
orderly:
1) Delete the image files with the main/backup attribute?
2) Delete the configuration files with the main/backup attribute?
3) Delete the Web files with the main/backup attribute?
The corresponding messages are displayed as follows:
Delete the running image file? [Y/N]:
Delete the running config file? [Y/N]:
Delete the running web file? [Y/N]:

Delete the backup image file? [Y/N]:

1-3
Delete the backup config file? [Y/N]:
Delete the backup web file? [Y/N]:

The corresponding files will be deleted after you choose yes.

For deleted files whose names are the same, only the latest deleted file is stored in the recycle bin and
can be restored.

Example

# Delete the file test/test.txt.

<Sysname> delete test/test.txt
Delete unit1>flash:/test/test.txt?[Y/N]:y
.
%Delete file unit1>flash:/test/test.txt...Done.

# Delete the configuration files with the backup attribute in the Flash.
<Sysname> delete standby-files
Delete all the backup files? [Y/N]:n
Delete the backup image file? [Y/N]:n
Delete the backup config file? [Y/N]:y
Delete the backup web file? [Y/N]:n
Start deleting ...
Deleting ... done

dir

Syntax

dir [ /all ] [ file-url ]

View

User view

Parameter

/all: Specifies to display the information about all the files, including those stored in the recycle bin.
file-ur: Path name or the name of a file in the Flash memory. You can use the * character as a wildcard.
For example, the dir *.txt command displays the information about all the files with the extension of txt in
the current directory.

Description

Use the dir command to display the information about the specified files or directories in the Flash
memory on a switch.

1-4
z If executed with the /all keyword, the command will display information about all files, including the
files in the recycle bin. If executed without the /all keyword, the command will not display the files in
the recycle bin.
z If executed with the file-url argument, the command will display information about files and folders
in the specified directory. If executed without the file-url argument, the command will display
information about files and folders in the current working directory.
In the output information, files with the main, backup or main/backup attribute are tagged with special
characters:
z main: (*)
z backup: (b)
z main/backup: (*b)

In the output information of the dir /all command, deleted files (that is, those in the recycle bin) are
embraced in brackets. The displayed directory of a deleted file is the directory to which the file belongs
before it is deleted.

Example

# Display the information about all the files (including the files in the recycle bin) in the root directory of
the file system.
<Sysname> dir /all
Directory of unit1>flash:/

1 (*) -rw- 3579326 Mar 28 2007 10:51:22 switch.app

2 (*) -rw- 1235 Apr 03 2000 16:04:52 basic.cfg
3 -rw- 140709 Apr 04 2000 21:31:08 cmdtree_b01d015.txt
4 -rw- 1235 Apr 04 2000 23:03:08 test.txt
5 drw- - Apr 04 2000 23:04:21 test
6 -rw- 1235 Apr 04 2000 23:05:41 [1.cfg]

15367 KB total (3590 KB free)

(*) -with main attribute (b) -with backup attribute

(*b) -with both main and backup attribute

# Display the information about all the files whose names begin with the character t (including those in
the recycle bin) in the local directory unit1>flash:/test/.
<Sysname> dir /all test/t*
Directory of unit1>flash:/test/

1 -rw- 1235 Apr 04 2000 23:08:28 test.txt

15367 KB total (3590 KB free)

1-5
(*) -with main attribute (b) -with backup attribute
(*b) -with both main and backup attribute

execute

Syntax

execute filename

View

System view

Parameter

filename: Batch file, with the extension .bat.

Description

Use the execute command to execute the specified batch file. Executing a batch file is to execute a set
of commands in the batch file one by one.
Note that:
z A batch file cannot contain any invisible character. If any invisible character is found, the system
will abort the execution of the batch file, that is, the remaining commands in the batch file will not be
executed, but the executed operations will not be cancelled.
z Not every command in a batch file is sure to be executed. For example, if a certain command is not
correctly configured, the system omits this command and goes to the next one.
z Each configuration command in a batch file must be a standard configuration command, meaning
that the configuration information can be displayed with the display current-configuration
command after this command is configured successfully; otherwise, this command may not be
executed correctly.

Example

# Execute the batch file named test.bat under the directory flash:/.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] execute test.bat
<Sysname>
....
%Created dir unit1>flash:/test3.

file prompt

Syntax

file prompt { alert | quiet }

View

System view

1-6
Parameter

alert: Specifies to prompt for confirmation before performing file-related operations that have potential
risks.
quiet: Specifies to disable prompts for file-related operations.

Description

Use the file prompt command to configure the prompt mode for file-related operations.
By default, alert mode is used, by which a switch prompts for confirmation before performing file-related
operations that have potential risks.
If you set the prompt mode of the file-related operations to quiet, the switch does not prompt for
confirmation before performing file-related operations. In this case, the system is more likely to be
damaged due to some maloperations. For example:
z If the prompt mode is set to alert, the following messages will be displayed when you delete a file:
<Sysname> delete flash:/te.txt
Delete unit1>flash:/te.txt?[Y/N]:y
......
%Delete file unit1>flash:/te.txt...Done.

The system waits for you to confirm for 30 seconds. If you do not input any confirmation in 30 seconds,
the system cancels this file operation, as shown in the following:
<Sysname> delete flash:/tt.txt
Delete unit1>flash:/tt.txt?[Y/N]:
<Sysname>
z If the prompt mode is set to quiet, the following messages will be displayed when you delete a file:
<Sysname> delete flash:/te.txt
....
%Delete file unit1>flash:/te.txt...Done.

Example

# Set the prompt mode to quiet for file-related operations.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] file prompt quiet

fixdisk

Syntax

fixdisk device

View

User view

Parameter

device: Name of a device which must be “unit1>flash:” or “flash:” for the 3com switch 4200G.

1-7
Description

Use the fixdisk command to restore space on the Flash memory.

In case that space on the Flash memory may become unavailable for reasons such as abnormal
operations, you can run this command to restore the space.

Example

# Restore space on the Flash memory.

<Sysname> fixdisk unit1>flash:
Fixdisk flash: may take some time to complete.
%Fixdisk unit1>flash: completed.

format

Syntax

format device

View

User view

Parameter

device: Name of a device which must be “unit1>flash:” or “flash:” for the 3com switch 4200G.

Description

Use the format command to format the Flash memory.

The format operation clears all the files on the Flash memory, and the operation is irretrievable.

Example

# Format the Flash memory.

<Sysname>format unit1>flash:
All data on unit1>flash: will be lost , proceed with format ? [Y/N]:y
..............................
%Format unit1>flash: completed.

mkdir

Syntax

mkdir directory

View

User view

1-8
Parameter

directory: Name of a directory.

Description

Use the mkdir command to create a subdirectory in the specified directory of a Flash memory.
Note that:
z The name of the subdirectory to be created must be unique under the specified directory.
Otherwise, you will fail to create the subdirectory under the directory.
z To use this command to create a subdirectory, the specified directory must exist. For instance, to
create subdirectory flash:/test/mytest, the test directory must exist. Otherwise, you will fail to
create the subdirectory.

Example

# Create a directory in the current directory, with the name being test.
<Sysname> mkdir test
....
%Created dir unit1>flash:/test.

# Create subdirectory mytest in the directory test.

<Sysname> mkdir test/mytest
..
%Created dir unit1>flash:/test/mytest.

Syntax

more file-url

View

User view

Parameter

file-url: Path name or file name of a file in the Flash memory.

Description

Use the more command to display the contents of a specified file.

Currently, the file system only supports to display the contents of text files.

Example

# Display the content of the file named test.txt.

<Sysname> more test.txt
AppWizard has created this test application for you.
This file contains a summary of what you will find in each of the files that make up your
test application.
Test.dsp

1-9
This file (the project file) contains information at the project level and is used to build
a single project or subproject. Other users can share the project (.dsp) file, but they should
export the makefiles locally.

# Display the content of the file testcfg.cfg.

<Sysname> more testcfg.cfg

#
sysname Sysname
#
vlan 2
#
return
<Sysname>

move

Syntax

move fileurl-source fileurl-dest

View

User view

Parameter

fileurl-source: Name of the source file.

fileurl-dest: Name of the target file.

Description

Use the move command to move a file to a specified directory.

If the target file name is the same as an existing file, the existing file will be overwritten after the
command is executed successfully.
If the path, rather than the name of the target file is specified, the source file name is used as the target
file name by default.

Example

# Move the file named 1.txt from unit1>flash:/ to unit1>flash:/a/, with the name unchanged.
<Sysname>move unit1>flash:/1.txt unit1>flash:/a/
Move unit1>flash:/1.txt to unit1>flash:/a/1.txt?[Y/N]:y
.
%Moved file unit1>flash:/1.txt to unit1>flash:/a/1.txt.

# Move the file unit1>flash:/22.txt to unit1>flash:/test/, and overwrite the file in the directory
unit1>flash:/test.
<Sysname>move 22.txt unit1>flash:/test
Move unit1>flash:/22.txt to unit1>flash:/test/22.txt?[Y/N]:y
The file unit1>flash:/test/22.txt exists. Overwrite it?[Y/N]:y
The file will be permanently deleted from flash, please wait.
....

1-10
%Moved file unit1>flash:/22.txt to unit1>flash:/test/22.txt.

pwd

Syntax

pwd

View

User view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the pwd command to display the current working path of the login user.

Example

# Display the current working path.

<Sysname> pwd
unit1>flash:

rename

Syntax

rename fileurl-source fileurl-dest

View

User view

Parameter

fileurl-source: Original path name or file name of a file in the Flash memory.
fileurl-dest: Target path name or file name.

Description

Use the rename command to rename a file or a directory.

If the target file name or directory name is the same with any existing file name or directory name, you
will fail to perform the rename operation.

Example

# Rename the file named config.txt to config.bak.

<Sysname>rename config.txt config.bak
Rename unit1>flash:/config.txt to unit1>flash:/config.bak?[Y/N]:y
.
%Renamed file unit1>flash:/config.txt to unit1>flash:/config.bak.

1-11
reset recycle-bin

Syntax

reset recycle-bin [ file-url ] [ /force ]

View

User view

Parameter

file-url: Path name or file name of a file in the Flash memory. This argument supports the wildcard “*”.
For example, *.txt means all the files with an extension of txt.
/force: Specifies not to prompt for confirmation before deleting files.

Description

Use the reset recycle-bin command to permanently delete the files in the recycle bin in the current
directory.
Use the reset recycle-bin file-url command to permanently delete the files in the recycle bin in the
specified directory.
By default, the file operation reminding mode is alert, meaning that when you clear the files in the
recycle bin on the local unit, the system will ask for your confirmation for each file you want to delete.
However, if you specify the /force keyword in the command, the system will not ask for your
confirmation.
The files deleted by the delete command without the /unreserved keyword are moved to the recycle
bin. To delete them permanently, you can use the reset recycle-bin command.

Example

# There are three files flash:/a.cfg, flash:/b.cfg, and flash:/test/c.cfg in the recycle bin. Permanently
delete file flash:/a.cfg and flash:/b.cfg.
z Display all the files in the recycle bin in directory flash:.
<Sysname> dir /all
Directory of flash:/

0 -rwh 3080 Apr 26 2000 16:41:43 private-data.txt

1 -rw- 2416 Apr 26 2000 13:45:36 config.cfg
2 -rw- 4036197 May 14 2000 10:13:18 main.app
3 -rw- 2386 Apr 26 2000 13:30:30 back.cfg
4 drw- - May 08 2000 09:49:25 test
5 -rwh 716 Apr 24 2007 16:17:30 hostkey
6 -rwh 572 Apr 24 2007 16:17:44 serverkey
7 -rw- 2386 May 08 2000 11:14:20 [a.cfg]
8 -rw- 3608 Dec 03 2007 17:29:30 [b.cfg]

15367 KB total (1930 KB free)

//The above information indicates that in directory flash:, there are two files a.cfg and b.cfg in the
recycle bin.
z Delete the files in directory flash: that are already in the recycle bin.

1-12
<Sysname> reset recycle-bin
Clear flash:/~/a.cfg ?[Y/N]:y
Clearing files from flash may take a long time. Please wait...
....
%Cleared file flash:/~/a.cfg.
Clear flash:/~/b.cfg ?[Y/N]:y
Clearing files from flash may take a long time. Please wait...
......
%Cleared file flash:/~/b.cfg...
z In directory flash:, check whether all the files in the recycle bin are deleted.
<Sysname> dir /all
Directory of flash:/

0 -rwh 3080 Apr 26 2000 16:41:43 private-data.txt

15367 KB total (1934 KB free)

// The above information indicates that file flash:/a.cfg and flash:/b.cfg are deleted permanently.
z In directory flash:/test, see whether the file in the recycle bin is deleted or not.
<Sysname> cd test
<Sysname> dir /all
Directory of flash:/test/

0 drw- - Dec 03 2007 18:19:09 subtest

1 -rw- 2386 Dec 03 2007 18:43:41 [c.cfg]

15367 KB total (1934 KB free)

// The above information indicates that file flash:/test/c.cfg in directory flash:/test is not deleted and is
still in the recycle bin.

rmdir

Syntax

rmdir directory

View

User view

Parameter

directory: Name of a directory.

1-13
Description

Use the rmdir command to delete a directory.

As only empty directories can be deleted, you need to clear a directory before deleting it.

Example

# Delete the directory named dd.

<Sysname> rmdir dd
Rmdir unit1>flash:/dd?[Y/N]:y
....
%Removed directory unit1>flash:/dd.

undelete

Syntax

undelete file-url

View

User view

Parameter

file-url: Path name or file name of a file in the Flash memory.

Description

Use the undelete command to restore a deleted file from the recycle bin.
If the name of the file to be restored is the same as that of an existing file, the existing file will be
overwritten after the command is executed successfully.

Example

# Restore the deleted file named sample.bak.

<Sysname> undelete sample.bak
Undelete unit1>flash:/sample.bak ?[Y/N]:y
% Undeleted file unit1>flash:/sample.bak.

File Attribute Configuration Commands

boot attribute-switch

Parameter

webfile: Name of a Web file, a string comprising 5 to 127 characters (including the extension .web).
main: Specifies the file to be with the main attribute.
backup: Specifies the file to be with the backup attribute.

Description

Use the boot web-package command to configure a Web file in the device to be with the main or
backup attribute.

z The configuration of the main or backup attribute for a Web file takes effect immediately without
restarting the device.
z After you upgrade a Web file, you need to specify the new Web file in the Boot menu after restarting
the switch or specify a new Web file by using the boot web-package command. Otherwise, the
Web server cannot function normally.

Related commands: display web package

Example

# Specify to prompt users to use customized passwords to enter the BOOT menu.
<Sysname> startup bootrom-access enable
<Sysname> display startup
UNIT 1:
Current Startup saved-configuration file: flash:/config.cfg
Next main startup saved-configuration file: flash:/config.cfg
Next backup startup saved-configuration file: NULL
Bootrom-access enable state: enabled

1-18
Table of Contents

1 FTP and SFTP Configuration Commands·······························································································1-1

FTP Server Configuration Commands····································································································1-1
display ftp-server ·····························································································································1-1
display ftp-server source-ip ·············································································································1-2
display ftp-user ································································································································1-2
ftp disconnect ··································································································································1-3
ftp server enable······························································································································1-4
ftp timeout········································································································································1-5
ftp-server source-interface ··············································································································1-6
ftp-server source-ip··························································································································1-6
FTP Client Configuration Commands ·····································································································1-7
ascii··················································································································································1-7
binary ···············································································································································1-8
bye ···················································································································································1-8
cd ·····················································································································································1-9
cdup ·················································································································································1-9
close ··············································································································································1-10
delete ·············································································································································1-10
dir···················································································································································1-11
disconnect ·····································································································································1-12
display ftp source-ip·······················································································································1-12
ftp···················································································································································1-13
ftp { cluster | remote-server } source-interface ··············································································1-13
ftp { cluster | remote-server } source-ip ·························································································1-14
ftp source-interface························································································································1-15
ftp source-ip···································································································································1-15
get··················································································································································1-16
lcd ··················································································································································1-17
ls ····················································································································································1-17
mkdir ··············································································································································1-18
open···············································································································································1-19
passive ··········································································································································1-19
put··················································································································································1-20
pwd ················································································································································1-21
quit ·················································································································································1-21
remotehelp·····································································································································1-21
rename ··········································································································································1-22
rmdir···············································································································································1-23
user················································································································································1-23
verbose··········································································································································1-24
SFTP Server Configuration Commands ·······························································································1-24
sftp server enable ··························································································································1-24
sftp timeout ····································································································································1-25

i
SFTP Client Configuration Commands·································································································1-26
bye ·················································································································································1-26
cd ···················································································································································1-26
cdup ···············································································································································1-27
delete ·············································································································································1-27
dir···················································································································································1-28
display sftp source-ip·····················································································································1-29
exit ·················································································································································1-29
get··················································································································································1-30
help ················································································································································1-30
ls ····················································································································································1-31
mkdir ··············································································································································1-31
put··················································································································································1-32
pwd ················································································································································1-32
quit ·················································································································································1-33
remove···········································································································································1-33
rename ··········································································································································1-34
rmdir···············································································································································1-34
sftp ·················································································································································1-35
sftp source-interface ······················································································································1-36
sftp source-ip ·································································································································1-37

2 TFTP Configuration Commands ··············································································································2-1

TFTP Configuration Commands ·············································································································2-1
display tftp source-ip························································································································2-1
tftp { ascii | binary } ··························································································································2-1
tftp get··············································································································································2-2
tftp put··············································································································································2-3
tftp tftp-server source-interface ·······································································································2-4
tftp tftp-server source-ip···················································································································2-5
tftp source-interface·························································································································2-5
tftp source-ip····································································································································2-6
tftp-server acl···································································································································2-7

ii
1 FTP and SFTP Configuration Commands

FTP Server Configuration Commands

display ftp-server

Syntax

display ftp-server

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ftp-server command to display the FTP server-related settings of a switch when it
operates as an FTP server, including startup status, number of users, and so on.
You can use this command to verify FTP server-related configurations.
Related commands: ftp server enable, ftp timeout.

Examples

# Display the FTP server-related settings of the switch (assuming that the switch is operating as an FTP
server).
<Sysname> display ftp-server
FTP server is running
Max user number 1
User count 0
Timeout value(in minute) 30

Table 1-1 display ftp-server command output description

Field Description
The FTP server is started. If the FTP server is not started,
FTP server is running “% FTP server has been stopped” will be displayed, and
the three fields below will not be displayed.
Max user number 1 The FTP server can accommodate up to one user.
User count 0 The current login user number is 0.

Timeout value (in minute) 30 The connection idle time is 30 minutes.

1-1
The 3com switch 4200G supports one user access at one time when it serves as the FTP server.

display ftp-server source-ip

Syntax

display ftp-server source-ip

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ftp-server source-ip command to display the source IP address set for an FTP server.
z If a source interface is specified for the FTP server, the IP address of the source interface will be
displayed and the FTP client can only use this address as the destination address to connect to the
FTP server.
z If neither source interface nor source IP address is specified, 0.0.0.0 will be displayed. In this case,
the FTP client can use any reachable IP address on the FTP server as the destination address to
connect to the FTP server.
To set the source IP address for an FTP server, use the ftp-server source-interface or the ftp-server
source-ip command.

Examples

# Display the source IP address configured for the FTP server.

<Sysname> display ftp-server source-ip
The source IP you specified is 192.168.0.1

display ftp-user

Syntax

display ftp-user

View

Any view

Parameters

None

1-2
Description

Use the display ftp-user command to display the information of the FTP users that have logged in to
the switch, including the user name, host IP address, port number, idle timeout time, and authorized
directory.

For how to create an FTP user on an FTP server, refer to the AAA part of this manual.

Examples

# Display the information of the FTP users that have logged in to the switch.
<Sysname> display ftp-user
UserName HostIP Port Idle HomeDir
admin 192.168.0.152 1029 0 flash:

# If the username exceeds ten characters, characters behind the tenth will be displayed in the second
line with a left-aligning mode. Take username username@test for example, the result is:
<Sysname> display ftp-user
UserName HostIP Port Idle HomeDir
administra
tor 192.168.0.152 1031 0 flash:

Table 1-2 display ftp-user command output description

Field Description
HostIP IP address of the FTP client

Port Port used when the FTP client logs in

Idle Idle time of the FTP client
The initial work path configured for the FTP user, namely, the path
HomeDir
where the user locates after he logs in.

ftp disconnect

Syntax

ftp disconnect user-name

View

System view

Parameters

user-name: Name of the user to be disconnected from the FTP server, a string of 1 to 184 characters.

1-3
Description

Use the ftp disconnect command to terminate the connection between a specified user and the FTP
server.

With a 3com switch 4200G acting as the FTP server, if you attempt to disconnect a user that is
uploading/downloading data to/from the FTP server, the switch 4200G will disconnect the user after the
data transmission is completed.

Related commands: display ftp-user.

Examples

# Display the current online FTP users.

<Sysname> display ftp-user
UserName HostIP Port Idle HomeDir
admin 192.168.0.152 1029 0 flash:

# Disconnect the user named admin from the FTP server.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ftp disconnect admin
% The user connection will be disconnected after the data transfer finished
[Sysname]
%Apr 2 01:06:14:915 2000 Sysname FTPS/5/USEROUT:- 1 -User admin(192.168.0.152) logged out

ftp server enable

Syntax

ftp server enable

undo ftp server

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the ftp server enable command to enable the FTP server function of the switch.
Use the undo ftp server command to disable the FTP server function of the switch.
By default, the FTP server function is disabled on the 3com switch 4200G to avoid potential security
risks.

1-4
To protect unused sockets from being attacked by malicious users, the 3com switch 4200G provides
the following functions:
z TCP 21 is enabled only when you start the FTP server.
z TCP 21 is disabled after you shut down the FTP server.

Related commands: display ftp-server.

Examples

# Specify 192.168.1.1 as the source IP address of the FTP server.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ftp-server source-ip 192.168.1.1

FTP Client Configuration Commands

z In the examples of this section, if a command should be executed in FTP client view, the
configuration process for entering FTP client view will be omitted to avoid repetition. For the
configuration of the command for entering FTP client view, refer to ftp.
z When executing the FTP client configuration commands in this section, confirm whether the
corresponding access rights are configured on the FTP server, for example, query file lists under a
working directory, read/download the specified files, create a directory/upload a file, and
rename/delete a file on the server. For the configuration of user access rights, refer to the FTP
server software description.

ascii

Syntax

ascii

View

FTP client view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the ascii command to specify that files be transferred in ASCII mode, which is used for transferring
text files.
By default, files are transferred in ASCII mode.
Related commands: binary.

Examples

# Specify to transfer text files in ASCII mode.

[ftp] ascii

1-7
200 Type set to A.

binary

Syntax

binary

View

FTP client view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the binary command to specify that program files be transferred in binary mode, which is used for
transferring program files.
By default, files are transferred in ASCII mode.
Related commands: ascii.

Examples

# Specify to transfer files in binary mode.

[ftp] binary
200 Type set to I.

bye

Syntax

bye

View

FTP client view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the bye command to terminate the control connection and data connection with the FTP server and
return to user view.
This command has the same effect as that of the quit command.

Examples

# Terminate the connections with the remote FTP server and return to user view.
[ftp] bye
221 Server closing.
<Sysname>

1-8
cd

Syntax

cd path

View

FTP client view

Parameters

path: Path of the target directory.

Description

Use the cd command to change the working directory on the remote FTP server.
Note that you can use this command to enter only authorized directories.
Related commands: pwd.

Examples

# Change the working directory to flash:/temp.

[ftp] cd flash:/temp

# Display the current working directory.

[ftp] pwd
257 "flash:/temp" is current directory.

cdup

Syntax

cdup

View

FTP client view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the cdup command to exit the current working directory and enter the parent directory. The parent
directory must be a directory that a user is authorized to access; otherwise, the command cannot be
executed.
Related commands: cd, pwd.

Examples

# Change the working directory to flash:/temp.

[ftp] cd flash:/temp

# Change the working directory to the parent directory.

[ftp] cdup

1-9
# Display the current directory.
[ftp] pwd
257 "flash:" is current directory.

Syntax

View

FTP client view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the close command to terminate an FTP connection without quitting FTP client view.
This command has the same effect as that of the disconnect command.

Examples

# Terminate the FTP connection without quitting FTP client view.

[ftp] close
221 Server closing.
[ftp]

delete

Syntax

delete remotefile

View

FTP client view

Parameters

remotefile: Name of the file to be deleted.

Description

Use the delete command to delete a specified remote file.

Examples

# Delete the file temp.c.

[ftp] delete temp.c
250 DELE command successful.

1-10
dir

Syntax

dir [ filename [ localfile ] ]

View

FTP client view

Parameters

filename: Name of the file to be queried.

localfile: Name of the local file where the query result is to be saved.

Description

Use the dir command to query specified files on a remote FTP server, or to display file information in the
current directory. The output information, which includes the name, size and creation time of files, will
be saved in a local file.
If you do not specify the filename argument, the information about all the files in the current directory is
displayed.

You can use the dir command to display the file-related information such as file size, creation date, and
so on. To display only the names of all the files under the current directory, use the ls command.

Related commands: pwd.

Examples

# Display the information about all the files in the current directory on the remote FTP server.
[ftp] dir
227 Entering Passive Mode (192,168,0,152,4,0).
125 ASCII mode data connection already open, transfer starting for *.
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 377424 Apr 26 13:05 s3r01.btm
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 377424 Oct 10 2006 s3r01_15.btm
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 2833 May 11 17:58 config.cfg
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 225295 Apr 26 12:21 default.diag
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 377424 Apr 30 16:58 switch.btm
drwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 0 Apr 28 11:41 test
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 2145 Apr 28 13:13 test.txt
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 13 Apr 28 13:21 mytest.bak
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 9 Apr 28 13:24 a.txt
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 142 Sep 10 2006 myopenssh
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 5292802 Apr 30 17:02 switch2.app
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 15 Apr 26 17:45 public
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 15 Apr 26 17:56 temp.c

1-11
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 5286666 Oct 18 2006 switch5.app
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 306 May 13 11:17 swithc001
226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 1025 byte(s) received in 0.019 second(s) 53.00K byte(s)/sec.

# Display information about file config.cfg and save the information to file temp1.
[ftp] dir config.cfg temp1
227 Entering Passive Mode (192,168,0,152,4,3).
125 ASCII mode data connection already open, transfer starting for config.cfg.
.....226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 67 byte(s) received in 5.818 second(s) 11.00 byte(s)/sec.

disconnect

Syntax

disconnect

View

FTP client view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the disconnect command to terminate an FTP connection without quitting FTP client view.
This command has the same effect as that of the close command.

Examples

# Terminate the FTP connection without quitting FTP client view.

[ftp] disconnect
221 Server closing.
[ftp]

display ftp source-ip

Syntax

display ftp source-ip

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ftp source-ip command to display the source IP address that the current device
serving as an FTP client uses every time it connects to an FTP server. If a source IP address is specified

1-12
for the FTP client, the configured source IP address will be displayed. If neither a source IP address nor
source interface is specified for the FTP client, 0.0.0.0 will be displayed.
If no source IP address is specified for the FTP client, the switch searches the entry with the destination
as the subnet where the FTP server resides, and uses the IP address of the outbound interface in the
entry as the source IP address.

Examples

# Display the source IP address that the FTP client uses every time it connects to an FTP server.
<Sysname> display ftp source-ip
The source IP you specified is 192.168.0.1

ftp

Syntax

ftp [ cluster | remote-server [ port-number ] ]

View

User view

Parameters

cluster: Connects to the configured FTP server of a cluster. For the configuration of the FTP server of a
cluster, refer to the Cluster part of this manual.
remote-server: Host name or IP address of an FTP server, a string of 1 to 20 characters.
port-number: Port number of the FTP server, in the range 0 to 65535. The default is 21.

Description

Use the ftp command to establish a control connection with an FTP server. If you enter a correct
username and password, you can enter FTP client view.

Examples

# Connect to the FTP server whose IP address is 2.2.2.2.

<Sysname> ftp 2.2.2.2
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):admin
331 Password required for admin.
Password:
230 User logged in.
[ftp]

ftp { cluster | remote-server } source-interface

Syntax

ftp { cluster | remote-server } source-interface interface-type interface-number

remotefile: Name of a file to be downloaded.

localfile: File name used when a file is downloaded and saved to the local device. If this argument is not
specified, the source file name is used when a file is saved and downloaded to the local device.

Description

Use the get command to download a remote file and save it as a local file.

When using the get command to download files from a remote FTP server, note to limit the length of file
path and file name within the following ranges:
z A directory name should be no more than 91 characters.
z A file name plus its local path name should be no more than 127 characters.
z A device name should be no more than 14 characters.
z A file name plus its complete path name should be no more than 142 characters.

1-16
Examples

# Download file temp.c.

[ftp] get temp.c
227 Entering Passive Mode (2,2,2,2,4,12).
125 ASCII mode data connection already open, transfer starting for temp.c.
..226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 15 byte(s) received in 2.568 second(s) 0.00 byte(s)/sec.

lcd

Syntax

lcd

View

FTP client view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the lcd command to display the local working directory on the FTP client. If you have logged in to
the FTP server, you cannot modify the local working directory of the FTP client; to modify the local
working directory, you need to terminate the connection with the FTP server, quit FTP client view,
execute the cd command in user view, and reconnect to the FTP server.

Examples

# Display the local working directory on the FTP client.

[ftp] lcd
% Local directory now flash:/temp

Syntax

ls [ remotefile [ localfile ] ]

View

FTP client view

Parameters

remotefile: Name of the file to be queried.

localfile: Name of the local file where the querying result is to be saved.

Description

Use the ls command to display the information about a specified file on an FTP server.
If you do not specify the remotefile argument, names of all the files in the current remote directory are
displayed.

1-17
The ls command only displays file names on an FTP server. To query other file-related information, for
example, file size, creation date and so on, use the dir command.

Related commands: pwd.

Examples

# Display the names of all the files in the current directory on the remote FTP server.
[ftp] ls
227 Entering Passive Mode (2,2,2,2,4,4).
125 ASCII mode data connection already open, transfer starting for *.
s3r01.btm
s3r01_15.btm
config.cfg
default.diag
test
test.txt
mytest.bak
a.txt
myopenssh
public
temp.c
swithc001
226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 200 byte(s) received in 0.145 second(s) 1.00Kbyte(s)/sec.

mkdir

Syntax

mkdir pathname

View

FTP client view

Parameters

pathname: Name of the directory to be created.

Description

Use the mkdir command to create a directory on an FTP server.

Related commands: dir, rmdir.

Examples

# Create the directory flash:/lanswitch on the FTP server.

1-18
[ftp] mkdir flash:/lanswitch
257 "flash:/ lanswitch" new directory created.

open

Syntax

open { ip-address | server-name } [ port ]

View

FTP client view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address of an FTP server.

server-name: Host name of the FTP server, a string of 1 to 20 characters.
port: Port number on the remote FTP server, in the range 0 to 65535. The default value is 21.

Description

Use the open command to establish a control connection with an FTP server. If you have connected to
an FTP server, you cannot use the open command to connect to another server, and you need to
terminate the connection with the current FTP server and then execute the open command.
Related commands: close.

Examples

# Establish a control connection with the FTP server whose IP address is 1.1.1.1 in FTP client view.
[ftp]open 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):abc
331 Password required for abc
Password:
230 User logged in.

passive

Syntax

passive
undo passive

View

FTP client view

Parameters

None

1-19
Description

Use the passive command to set the data transfer mode to the passive mode.
Use the undo passive command to set the data transfer mode to the active mode.
By default, the passive mode is adopted.
The differences between the passive mode and the active mode are:
z When working in the active mode, an FTP client advertises a random port Port1 to an FTP server
through TCP port 21; upon receiving the advertisement, the FTP server initiates a connection with
Port1 on the client for data transmission.
z When working in the passive mode, an FTP client sends a passive request to the FTP server
before data transmission, the FTP server advertises a local random port Port2 to the FTP client,
and the FTP client establishes a connection with Port2 using a local random port.
If an FTP client initiates a connection with an FTP server through a firewall, the firewall may block the
connection request because the FTP server initiates the connection with Port1 through an external
network, and thus data transmission will be affected. Therefore, you are recommended to set the data
transmission mode of the FTP client to passive when accessing the FTP server through a firewall.

Examples

# Set the data transfer mode to the passive mode.

[ftp] passive
% Passive is on

put

Syntax

put localfile [ remotefile ]

View

FTP client view

Parameters

localfile: Name of a local file to be uploaded.

remotefile: File name used after a file is uploaded and saved on an FTP server.

Description

Use the put command to upload a local file on an FTP client to an FTP server.
If you do not specify the remotefile argument, the local file is saved on the FTP server with its original
name.

Examples

# Upload the local file named temp.c to the FTP server.

[ftp] put temp.c
227 Entering Passive Mode (2,2,2,2,4,13).
125 ASCII mode data connection already open, transfer starting for temp.c.
226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 15 byte(s) sent in 7.549 second(s) 1.00byte(s)/sec.

1-20
pwd

Syntax

pwd

View

FTP client view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the pwd command to display the working directory on an FTP server.
Related commands: cd, cdup, dir, ls.

Examples

# Display the working directory on the FTP server.

[ftp] pwd
257 "flash:/temp" is current directory.

quit

Syntax

quit

View

FTP client view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the quit command to terminate FTP control connection and FTP data connection and return to user
view.
This command has the same effect as that of the bye command.

Examples

# Terminate the FTP control connection and FTP data connection and return to user view.
[ftp] quit
221 Server closing.
<Sysname>

remotehelp

Syntax

remotehelp [ protocol-command ]

1-21
View

FTP client view

Parameters

protocol-command: FTP protocol command.

Description

Use the remotehelp command to display the help information about an FTP protocol command.
This command works only when the FTP server provides the help information about FTP protocol
commands.

z This command is always valid when a 3com switch operates as the FTP server.
z If you use other FTP server software, refer to related instructions to know whether the FTP server
provides help information about FTP protocol commands.

Examples

# Display the syntax of the user command.

[ftp] remotehelp user
214 Syntax: USER <sp> <username>

rename

Syntax

rename remote-source remote-dest

View

FTP client view

Parameters

remote-source: Name of a file on a remote host.

remote-dest: Destination file name.

Description

Use the rename command to rename a file on a remote FTP server.

If the destination file name conflicts with the name of an existing file or directory, you will fail to rename
the file.

Examples

# Rename file temp.c as forever.c.

[ftp] rename temp.c forever.c
350 Enter the name to rename it to...

1-22
250 File renamed successfully

rmdir

Syntax

rmdir pathname

View

FTP client view

[ftp] get test1.cfg

227 Entering Passive Mode (192,168,0,3,5,239)

150 "D:\FTP\test1.cfg" file ready to send (100 bytes) in ASCII mode
....226 Transfer finished successfully.
FTP: 100 byte(s) received in 5.109 second(s) 20.00 byte(s)/sec.

# Disable the verbose function.

[ftp] undo verbose

# Download the file with name test.cfg.

[ftp] get test.cfg
......FTP: 1740 byte(s) received in 9.367 second(s) 185.00 byte(s)/sec.

The above output indicates that if the verbose function is disabled, only execution information of users’
operations is obtained from the system of the switch, while the output information beginning with
three-digit numbers cannot be returned to the users.
For the description of the numbers at the beginning of FTP output information, refer to the
corresponding section in RFC 959.

SFTP Server Configuration Commands

sftp server enable

Syntax

sftp server enable

undo sftp server

1-24
View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the sftp server enable command to enable the SFTP server.
Use the undo sftp server command to disable the SFTP server.
By default, the SFTP server is disabled.

Examples

# Enable the SFTP server.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] sftp server enable
%Start SFTP server

sftp timeout

Syntax

sftp timeout time-out-value

undo sftp timeout

View

System view

Parameters

time-out-value: Timeout time, in the range 1 to 35,791, in minutes. The default value is 10.

Description

Use the sftp timeout command to set the idle timeout time on an SFTP server.
Use the undo sftp timeout command to restore the idle timeout time to the default value.
If the idle timeout time exceeds the specified threshold, the system disconnects the SFTP user
automatically.

Examples

# Set the idle timeout time to 500 minutes.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] sftp timeout 500

1-25
SFTP Client Configuration Commands
bye

Syntax

bye

View

SFTP client view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the bye command to terminate a connection with the remote SFTP server and return to system
view.
This command has the same effect as that of the commands exit and quit.

Examples

# Terminate the connection with the remote SFTP server.

sftp-client> bye
Bye
[Sysname]

Syntax

cd [ remote-path ]

View

SFTP client view

Parameters

remote-path: Path of the target directory on the remote server.

Description

Use the cd command to change the working path on the remote SFTP server. If no remote path is
specified, this command displays the current working path.

z Use the cd .. command to return to the parent directory.

z Use the cd / command to return to the root directory.

1-26
Examples

# Change the working path to new1.

sftp-client>cd new1
Received status: Success
Current Directory is:
/new1
sftp-client>

cdup

Syntax

cdup

View

SFTP client view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the cdup command to change the working path on the remote SFTP server and return to the parent
directory.

Examples

# Change the working path and return to the parent directory.

sftp-client>cdup
Received status: Success
Current Directory is:
/

delete

Syntax

delete remote-file&<1-10>

View

SFTP client view

Parameters

remote-file&<1-10>: Name of a file on the server. &<1-10> indicates that up to ten file names can be
input. These file names should be separated by spaces.

Description

Use the delete command to delete a specified file from the remote SFTP server.
This command has the same effect as that of the remove command.

1-27
Examples

# Delete the file named test.txt on the server.

sftp-client> delete test.txt
The following files will be deleted:
/test.txt
Are you sure to delete it?(Y/N):y
This operation may take a long time.Please wait...

Received status: Success

File successfully Removed

dir

Syntax

dir [ -a | -l ] [ remote-path ]

View

SFTP client view

Parameters

-a: Displays the file and folder names in a specified directory.

-l: Displays the details about files and folders in a specified directory in a list.
remote-path: Name of the path where the file and folders to be queried reside.

Description

Use the dir command to query a specified directory on the remote SFTP server.
If -a or -l is not specified, the command displays details about the files and folders in the specified
directory in a list.
If no remote path is specified, this command displays the files in the current working directory.
This command has the same effect as that of the Is command.

Examples

# Display the files in the current directory.

sftp-client> dir
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 1759 Aug 23 06:52 config.cfg
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 225 Aug 24 08:01 pubkey2
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 283 Aug 24 07:39 pubkey1
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 225 Sep 28 08:28 pub1
drwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 0 Sep 28 08:24 new1
drwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 0 Sep 28 08:18 new2
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 225 Sep 28 08:30 pub2
Received status: End of file
Received status: Success

1-28
display sftp source-ip

Syntax

display sftp source-ip

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display sftp source-ip command to display the source IP address specified for the current
SFTP client.
If you have specified a source interface for the SFTP client, this command displays the IP address of the
source interface; otherwise, this command displays the IP address 0.0.0.0.

Examples

# Display the source IP address for the current SFTP client.

<Sysname> display sftp source-ip
The source IP you specified is 192.168.1.1

exit

Syntax

exit

View

SFTP client view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the exit command to terminate a connection with the remote SFTP server and return to system
view.
This command has the same effect as that of the commands bye and quit.

Examples

# Terminate a connection with the remote SFTP server.

sftp-client> exit
Bye
[Sysname]

1-29
get

Syntax

get remote-file [ local-file ]

View

SFTP client view

Parameters

remote-file: Name of a file on the remote SFTP server.

local-file: Name of a local file.

Description

Use the get command to download a file from the remote server.
By default, the remote file name is used for the file saved locally if no local file name is specified.

Examples

# Download the file tt.bak and save it with the name tt.txt.
sftp-client>get tt.bak tt.txt....
This operation may take a long time, please wait...
Remote file:tt.bak ---> Local file: tt.txt..
Received status: End of file
Received status: Success
Downloading file successfully ended

help

Syntax

help [ all |command ]

View

SFTP client view

Parameters

all: Displays all the command names.

command: Command name.

Description

Use the help command to display the help information about SFTP client commands.
If no command is specified, this command displays all the command names.

Examples

# View the help information about the get command.

sftp-client> help get
get remote-path [local-path] Download file.Default local-path is the same
with remote-path

1-30
ls

Syntax

ls [ -a | -l ] [ remote-path ]

View

SFTP client view

Parameters

-a: Displays the file and folder names in a specified directory.

-l: Displays the details about files and folders in a specified directory in a list.
remote-path: Name of the path where the files and folders to be queried reside.

Description

Use the Is command to display files in a specified directory on the remote SFTP server.
If -a or -l is not specified, the command displays details about the files and folders in the specified
directory in a list.
If no remote path is specified, this command displays the files in the current working directory.
This command has the same effect as that of the dir command.

Examples

# Display the files in the current directory.

sftp-client> ls
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 1759 Aug 23 06:52 config.cfg
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 225 Aug 24 08:01 pubkey2
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 283 Aug 24 07:39 pubkey1
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 225 Sep 28 08:28 pub1
drwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 0 Sep 28 08:24 new1
drwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 0 Sep 28 08:18 new2
-rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 225 Sep 28 08:30 pub2
Received status: End of file
Received status: Success

mkdir

Syntax

mkdir remote-path

View

SFTP client view

Parameters

remote-path: Name of a directory on the remote SFTP server.

Description

Use the mkdir command to create a directory on the remote SFTP server.

1-31
Examples

# Create a directory named hj on the remote SFTP server.

sftp-client>mkdir hj
Received status: Success
New directory created

put

Syntax

put local-file [ remote-file ]

View

SFTP client view

Parameters

local-file: Name of a local file.

remote-file: Name of a file on the remote SFTP server.

Description

Use the put command to upload a local file to the remote SFTP server.
By default, the local file name is used for the remote file if no remote file name is specified.

Examples

sftp-client> remove temp.c
The followed File will be deleted:
/temp.c
Are you sure to delete it?(Y/N):y

1-33
This operation may take a long time.Please wait...

Received status: Success

File successfully Removed

rename

Syntax

rename oldname newname

View

SFTP client view

Parameters

oldname: Old file name.

newname: New file name.

Description

Use the rename command to rename a specified file on the remote SFTP server.

Examples

# Change the file name temp.bat to temp.txt.

sftp-client> rename temp.bat temp.txt
File successfully renamed

rmdir

Syntax

rmdir remote-path&<1-10>

View

SFTP client view

Parameters

remote-path&<1-10>: Name of a directory on the remote SFTP server. &<1-10> indicates that up to ten
file names can be input. These file names should be separated by spaces.

Description

Use the rmdir command to remove a specified directory from the remote SFTP server.

Examples

# Remove the directory hello on the SFTP server.

sftp-client>rmdir hello
The followed directory will be deleted
/hello
Are you sure to remove it?(Y/N):y
This operation may take a long time.Please wait...

1-34
Received status: Success
Directory successfully removed

sftp

Syntax

sftp { host-ip | host-name } [ port-num ] [identity-key { dsa | rsa } | prefer_kex { dh_group1 |

View

System view

Parameters

host-ip: IP address of the server.

host-name: Host name of the server, a string of 1 to 20 characters.
port-num: Port number of the server, in the range of 0 to 65535. The default value is 22.
identity-key: The public key algorithm used by the publickey authentication. rsa is the default.
z dsa: The public key algorithm is DSA.
z rsa: The public key algorithm is RSA.
prefer_kex: Specifies a preferred key exchange algorithm. You can select either of the two algorithms.
z dh_group1: Key exchange algorithm diffie-hellman-group1-sha1. It is the default key exchange
algorithm.
z dh_exchange_group: Key exchange algorithm diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1.
prefer_ctos_cipher: Preferred client-to-server encryption algorithm. The default algorithm is aes128.
prefer_stoc_cipher: Preferred server-to-client encryption algorithm. The default algorithm is aes128.
z 3des: 3des_cbc encryption algorithm. Support for this keyword depends on the number of
encryption bits of the software version. The 168-bit version supports this keyword, while the 56-bit
version does not.
z des: des_cbc encryption algorithm.
z aes128: aes_128 encryption algorithm.
prefer_ctos_hmac: Preferred client-to-server HMAC algorithm. The default algorithm is sha1_96.
prefer_stoc_hmac: Preferred server-to-client HMAC algorithm. The default algorithm is sha1_96.
z sha1: HMAC algorithm hmac-sha1.
z sha1_96: HMAC algorithm hmac-sha1-96.
z md5: HMAC algorithm hmac-md5.
z md5_96: HMAC algorithm hmac-md5-96.

Description

Use the sftp command to establish a connection with the remote SFTP server and enter SFTP client
view.

1-35
If you specify to authenticate a client through public key on the server, the client needs to read the local
private key when logging in to the SFTP server. Since both RSA and DSA are available for public key
authentication, you need to use the identity-key key word to specify the algorithms to get correct local
private key; otherwise you will fail to log in.

Examples

# Connect the SFTP server with the IP address 10.1.1.2. Use the default encryption algorithm.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]sftp 10.1.1.2
Input Username: kk
Trying 10.1.1.2...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 10.1.1.2 ...

The Server is not authenticated. Do you continue access it?(Y/N):y

Do you want to save the server's public key?(Y/N):y
Enter password:

sftp-client>

sftp source-interface

Syntax

sftp source-interface interface-type interface-number

undo sftp source-interface

View

System view

Parameters

interface-type: Type of a source interface. It can be loopback or VLAN interface.

interface-number: Number of a source interface.

Description

Use the sftp source-interface command to specify a source interface for the SFTP client. If the
specified interface does not exist, the system prompts that the configuration fails.
Use the undo sftp source-interface command to remove the specified source interface. Then the
client accesses the SFTP server with the local device address determined by the system.

Examples

# Specify VLAN-interface 1 as the source interface of the SFTP client.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] sftp source-interface Vlan-interface 1

1-36
sftp source-ip

Syntax

sftp source-ip ip-address

undo sftp source-ip

View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: Source IP address to be set.

Description

Use the sftp source-ip command to specify a source IP address for the SFTP client. If the specified IP
address is not the IP address of the local device, the system prompts that the configuration fails.
Use the undo sftp source-ip command to remove the specified source IP address. Then the client
accesses the SFTP server with the local device address determined by the system.

Examples

# Specify 192.168.0.1 as the source IP address of the SFTP client.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] sftp source-ip 192.168.0.1

1-37
2 TFTP Configuration Commands

TFTP Configuration Commands

When accessing a TFTP server configured with an IPv6 address, use the tftp ipv6 command. For
details, refer to the IPv6 Management part in this manual.

display tftp source-ip

Syntax

display tftp source-ip

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display tftp source-ip command to display the source IP address that a TFTP client uses
every time it connects to a TFTP server (use the tftp source-ip command). If a source interface is
specified for the TFTP client with the tftp source-interface command, the IP address of the source
interface is displayed. If neither source IP address nor source interface is specified for the TFTP client,
0.0.0.0 is displayed.
Related commands: tftp source-ip, tftp-source-interface.

Examples

# Display the source IP address that a TFTP client uses every time it connects to a TFTP server.
<Sysname> display tftp source-ip
The source IP you specified is 192.168.0.1

tftp { ascii | binary }

Syntax

tftp { ascii | binary }

2-1
View

System view

Parameters

ascii: Transfers data in ASCII mode, which is used for transferring text files.
binary: Transfers data in binary mode, which is used for transferring program files.

Description

Use the tftp { ascii | binary } command to set the TFTP data transfer mode.
By default, the binary mode is adopted.

Examples

# Specify to adopt the ASCII mode.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] tftp ascii
TFTP transfer mode changed to ASCII.

tftp get

Syntax

tftp tftp-server get source-file [ dest-file ]

View

User view

Parameters

tftp-server: IP address or the host name of a TFTP server, a string of 1 to 20 characters. If the switch
belongs to a cluster, the value cluster means to connect to the TFTP server of the cluster. For the
configuration of the TFTP server of a cluster, refer to the Cluster part in this manual.
source-file: Name of the file to be downloaded from the TFTP server.
dest-file: File name used when a file is downloaded and saved to the switch.

2-2
Description

Use the tftp get command to download a file from a TFTP server, and save it to the local storage
device.
Different from the FTP function, the working directory of a TFTP server cannot be changed or specified
on a TFTP client. To enter another working directory, you need to modify the working directory on the
TFTP server and relog in.
The 3com switch 4200G supports the TFTP file size negotiation function, namely, before downloading a
file, the switch requests the size of the file to be downloaded to the TFTP server, thus to ensure whether
there is enough space on the Flash for file downloading. If the TFTP server also supports the function,
when the file size is too large, the switch can know this in advance and stops the download operation to
save network resources; if the TFTP server does not support the function, the switch can only download
the file to its memory, and delete the file if it finds the file is too large when writing the file to the Flash.
Related commands: tftp put.

Examples

# Download file abc.txt from the TFTP server whose IP address is 1.1.1.1 and save it as efg.txt
(suppose free space of the flash memory is sufficient).
<Sysname> tftp 1.1.1.1 get abc.txt efg.txt
File will be transferred in binary mode.
Downloading file from remote tftp server, please wait......
TFTP: 35 bytes received in 0 second(s).
File downloaded successfully.

# Download file temp.txt from the TFTP server (1.1.1.1) and save it as test1.txt (suppose that free
space of the Flash is insufficient and the TFTP server does not support file size negotiation).
<Sysname> tftp 1.1.1.1 get temp.txt test1.txt
File will be transferred in binary mode.
Downloading file from remote tftp server, please wait......
Not enough space; Writing to device failed; Downloaded data will be deleted.............
Deleting file successful.

# Download file temp.txt from the TFTP server (1.1.1.1) and save it as test2.txt (suppose that free
space of the Flash is insufficient and the TFTP server supports file size negotiation).
<Sysname> tftp 1.1.1.1 get temp.txt test2.txt
File will be transferred in binary mode.
Downloading file from remote tftp server, please wait......
Not enough space; Quit writing to device; Created file will be deleted...
Deleting file successful.

tftp put

Syntax

tftp tftp-server put source-file [ dest-file ]

View

User view

2-3
Parameters

tftp-server: IP address or the host name of a TFTP server, a string of 1 to 20 characters. If the switch
belongs to a cluster, the value cluster means to connect to the TFTP server of the cluster. For the
configuration of the TFTP server of a cluster, refer to the Cluster part in this manual.
source-file: Name of the file to be uploaded to the TFTP server.
dest-file: File name used when a file is uploaded and saved to a TFTP server.

Description

Use the tftp put command to upload a file to a specified directory on a TFTP server.
When uploading files to a TFTP server, you can only select the files under the current working directory
of the device. To upload files in another directory, use the cd command to change to the specified
directory in user view before executing the tftp put command. For the execution of the cd command,
refer to the File System Management part in this manual.
Related commands: tftp get.

Examples

# Upload file config.cfg to the TFTP server whose IP address is 1.1.1.1 and save it as temp.cfg.
<Sysname> tftp 1.1.1.1 put config.cfg temp.cfg
File will be transferred in binary mode.
Copying file to remote tftp server. Please wait... /
TFTP: 962 bytes sent in 0 second(s).
File uploaded successfully.

tftp tftp-server source-interface

Syntax

tftp tftp-server source-interface interface-type interface-number { get source-file [ dest-file ] | put

source-file-url [ dest-file ] }

View

User view

Parameters

tftp-server: IP address or host name of the TFTP server to be connected to, a string of 1 to 20
characters. If the switch belongs to a cluster, the value cluster means to connect to the TFTP server of
the cluster. For the configuration of the TFTP server of a cluster, refer to the Cluster part in this manual.
interface-type: Type of the source interface.
interface-number: Number of the source interface.
get: Specifies to download a file from the TFTP server.
source-file: Name of the file to be downloaded.
dest-file: File name used when a file is downloaded and saved to the switch.
put: Specifies to upload a file to the TFTP server.
source-file-url: Path and name of the file to be uploaded to the TFTP server.
dest-file: File name used when a file is uploaded and saved to a TFTP server.

2-4
Description

Use the tftp tftp-server source-interface command to connect to a TFTP server through the specified
source interface, and perform download or upload operations. If the specified source interface does not
exist, a prompt appears to show the command fails to be executed.

Examples

# Connect to the remote TFTP server whose IP address is 192.168.8.8 through the source interface
VLAN-interface 1, and download the file named test.bin from it.
<Sysname> tftp 192.168.8.8 source-interface Vlan-interface 1 get test.bin

tftp tftp-server source-ip

Syntax

tftp tftp-server source-ip ip-address { get source-file [ dest-file ] | put source-file-url [ dest-file ] }

View

User view

Parameters

tftp-server: IP address or host name of the TFTP server to be connected to, a string of 1 to 20
characters. If the switch belongs to a cluster, the value cluster means to connect to the TFTP server of
the cluster. For the configuration of the TFTP server of a cluster, refer to the Cluster part in this manual.
ip-address: IP address to be set as the source IP address.
get: Specifies to download a file from the TFTP server.
source-file: Name of the file to be downloaded.
dest-file: File name used when a file is downloaded and saved to the switch.
put: Specifies to upload a file to the TFTP server.
source-file-url: Path and name of the file to be uploaded to the TFTP server.
dest-file: File name used when a file is uploaded and saved to a TFTP server.

Description

Use the tftp tftp-server source-ip command to connect to a TFTP server through the specified source
IP address, and perform download or upload operations. If the specified source IP address does not
exist, a prompt appears to show the command fails to be executed.

Examples

# Connect to the remote TFTP server whose IP address is 192.168.8.8 through the source IP address
192.168.0.1, and download the file named test.bin from it.
<Sysname> tftp 192.168.8.8 source-ip 192.168.0.1 get test.bin

tftp source-interface

Syntax

tftp source-interface interface-type interface-number

undo tftp source-interface
2-5
View

System view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Source interface that the switch uses every time it connects to the
TFTP server.

Description

Use the tftp source-interface command to specify the source interface of a TFTP client that the TFTP
client uses every time it connects to a TFTP server. The system prompts that the configuration fails if the
specified interface does not exist.
Use the undo tftp source-interface command to cancel the source interface setting. The switch uses
the IP address of the outbound interface in the local routing table as the source IP address to connect to
a TFTP server. The destination of the outbound interface is the subnet where the TFTP server resides
By default, no source interface is specified for the switch to connect to the TFTP server.

Examples

# Specify VLAN-interface 1 as the source interface that the TFTP client uses every time it connects to a
TFTP server.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] tftp source-interface Vlan-interface 1

tftp source-ip

Syntax

tftp source-ip ip-address

undo tftp source-ip

View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: The source IP address that the switch uses every time it connects to a TFTP server.

Description

Use the tftp source-ip command to specify the source IP address that a TFTP client uses every time it
connects with a TFTP server. The specified IP address must exist; otherwise, a prompt appears to show
the configuration fails.
Use the undo tftp source-ip command to cancel the source IP address setting. The switch uses the IP
address of the outbound interface in the local routing table as the source IP address to connect to a
TFTP server. The destination of the outbound interface is the subnet where the TFTP server resides.
By default, no source IP address is specified for the switch to connect to the TFTP server.

2-6
Examples

# Specify 192.168.0.1 as the source IP address that the TFTP client uses every time it connects to a
TFTP server.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] tftp source-ip 192.168.0.1

tftp-server acl

Syntax

tftp-server acl acl-number

undo tftp-server acl

View

System view

Parameters

acl-number: Basic ACL number, in the range 2000 to 2999.

Description

Use the tftp-server acl command to specify the ACL adopted for the connection between a TFTP client
and a TFTP server.
Use the undo tftp-server acl command to cancel all ACLs adopted.

Examples

# Specify to adopt ACL 2000 on the TFTP client.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] tftp-server acl 2000

2-7
Table of Contents

1 Information Center Configuration Commands ·······················································································1-1

Information Center Configuration Commands ························································································1-1
display channel································································································································1-1
display info-center ···························································································································1-1
display logbuffer ······························································································································1-3
display logbuffer summary ··············································································································1-4
display trapbuffer ·····························································································································1-5
info-center channel name················································································································1-6
info-center console channel ············································································································1-6
info-center enable····························································································································1-7
info-center logbuffer·························································································································1-8
info-center loghost ···························································································································1-8
info-center loghost source ···············································································································1-9
info-center monitor channel ···········································································································1-10
info-center snmp channel ··············································································································1-11
info-center source··························································································································1-11
info-center synchronous ················································································································1-13
info-center timestamp ····················································································································1-14
info-center timestamp loghost ·······································································································1-15
info-center timestamp utc ··············································································································1-16
info-center trapbuffer ·····················································································································1-17
reset logbuffer································································································································1-17
reset trapbuffer ······························································································································1-18
terminal debugging ························································································································1-18
terminal logging ·····························································································································1-19
terminal monitor·····························································································································1-19
terminal trapping····························································································································1-20

i
1 Information Center Configuration Commands

Information Center Configuration Commands

display channel

Syntax

display channel [ channel-number | channel-name ]

View

Any view

Parameters

channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, corresponding to the 10 channels of the system.
channel-name: Channel name, by default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is (in turn) console,
monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent, channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.

Description

Use the display channel command to display the settings of an information channel.
If no argument is specified in the command, the settings of all channels are displayed.

Examples

# Display the settings of information channel 0.

<Sysname> display channel 0
channel number:0, channel name:console
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning Y debugging Y debugging

display info-center

Syntax

display info-center [ unit unit-id ]

View

Any view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit ID of the device, the value is 1.

Description

Use the display info-center command to display the operation status of information center, the
configuration of information channels, the format of time stamp.

1-1
Related commands: info-center enable, info-center loghost, info-center logbuffer, info-center
console channel, info-center monitor channel, info-center trapbuffer, info-center snmp channel,
info-center timestamp

Examples

# Display the operation status of information center, the configuration of information channels, the
format of time stamp of the current system.
<Sysname> display info-center
Information Center: enabled
Log host:
the interface name of the source address : Vlan-interface1
192.168.0.2, channel number : 2, channel name : loghost
language : english, host facility local : 7
Console:
channel number : 0, channel name : console
Monitor:
channel number : 1, channel name : monitor
SNMP Agent:
channel number : 5, channel name : snmpagent
Log buffer:
enabled,max buffer size : 1024, current buffer size : 512,
current messages : 512, channel number : 4, channel name : logbuffer
dropped messages : 0, overwritten messages : 586
Trap buffer:
enabled,max buffer size : 1024, current buffer size : 256,
current messages : 5, channel number : 3, channel name : trapbuffer
dropped messages : 0, overwritten messages : 0
Information timestamp setting:
log - date, trap - date, debug - boot

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display info-center command

Field Description
Information Center Status of the information center: enabled/disabled
Information about the log host, including its IP address, name and
Log host
number of information channel, language and level of the log host
Information about the console port, including name and number of its
Console
information channel
Information about the monitor port, including name and number of its
Monitor
information channel
Information about SNMP Agent, including name and number of its
SNMP Agent
information channel
Information about the log buffer, including its state (enabled or disabled),
its maximum size, current size, current messages, information channel
Log buffer
name and number, number of dropped messages, and number of
overwritten messages

1-2
Field Description
Information about the trap buffer, including its state (enabled or
disabled), maximum size, current size, current messages, channel
Trap buffer
number and name, number of dropped messages, and number of
overwritten messages
Information timestamp Information about the time stamp setting, showing the time stamp format
setting: of the log, trap and debugging information

display logbuffer

Syntax

display logbuffer [ unit unit-id ] [ level severity | size buffersize ]* [ | { begin | exclude | include }
regular-expression ]

View

Any view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit ID of the device, the value is 1.

level severity: Specifies an information severity level. For the value of severity, refer to Table 1-2.

Table 1-2 Severity level defined in the information center

Severity Severity value Description

emergencies 1 The system is unavailable.

alerts 2 Information that demands prompt reaction

critical 3 Critical information
errors 4 Error information

warnings 5 Warnings
notifications 6 Normal information that needs to be noticed
informational 7 Informational information to be recorded

debugging 8 Information generated during debugging

size buffersize: Specifies the size of the log buffer (number of messages the log buffer holds) you want
to display. The buffersize argument ranges from 1 to 1,024 and defaults to 512.
|: Filters output log information with a regular expression. For detailed information about regular
expressions, refer to Configuration File Management Command in this manual.
begin: Displays the line that matches the regular expression and all the subsequent lines.
exclude: Displays the log information excluding the specified characters.
include: Displays the log information including the specified characters.
regular-expression: Regular expression.

1-3
Description

Use the display logbuffer command to display the status of the log buffer and the records in the log
buffer.

Examples

# Display the status of the log buffer and the records in the log buffer.
<Sysname> display logbuffer
Logging buffer configuration and contents:enabled
Allowed max buffer size : 1024
Actual buffer size : 512
Channel number : 4 , Channel name : logbuffer
Dropped messages : 0
Overwritten messages : 0
Current messages : 91

The rest is omitted here.

Table 1-3 display logbuffer command output description

Field Description
Logging buffer configuration Indicates the current state of the log buffer and its contents, which
and contents could be enabled or disabled.
Allowed max buffer size The maximum buffer size allowed
Actual buffer size The actual buffer size
Channel number The channel number of the log buffer, defaults to 4.

Channel name The channel name of the log buffer, defaults to logbuffer.
Dropped messages The number of dropped messages
The number of overwritten messages (when the buffer size is not
Overwritten messages big enough to hold all messages, the latest messages overwrite
the old ones).
Current messages The number of the current messages

display logbuffer summary

Syntax

display logbuffer summary [ level severity ]

View

Any view

Parameters

Level severity: Specifies an information severity level. For the value of severity, refer to Table 1-2.

Description

Use the display logbuffer summary command to display the statistics of the log buffer.

1-4
Examples

# Display the summary of the log buffer.

<Sysname> display logbuffer summary
EMERG ALERT CRIT ERROR WARN NOTIF INFO DEBUG
0 0 0 0 94 0 1 0

The above information indicates that there are 94 warnings and one informational information in the
log buffer.

display trapbuffer

Syntax

display trapbuffer [ unit unit-id ] [ size buffersize ]

View

Any view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit ID of the device, the value is 1.

size buffersize: Specifies the size of the trap buffer (number of messages the buffer holds) you want to
display. The buffersize argument ranges from 1 to 1,024 and defaults to 256.

Description

Use the display trapbuffer command to display the status of the trap buffer and the records in the trap
buffer.
Absence of the size buffersize argument indicates that all trap information is displayed.

Examples

# Display the status of the trap buffer and the records in the trap buffer.
<Sysname> display trapbuffer
Trapping Buffer Configuration and contents:enabled
Allowed max buffer size : 1024
Actual buffer size : 256
Channel number : 3 , Channel name : trapbuffer
Dropped messages : 0
Overwritten messages : 0
Current messages : 19

#Apr 1 23:55:35:859 2006 Sysname L2INF/2/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 -

Trap 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4(linkUp): portIndex is 4227762, ifAdminStatus is 1, ifOperStatus
is 1

#Apr 1 23:55:36:059 2006 Sysname L2INF/2/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 -

Trap 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4(linkUp): portIndex is 4227794, ifAdminStatus is 1, ifOperStatus
is 1
……
<Omitted>

1-5
info-center channel name

Syntax

info-center channel channel-number name channel-name

undo info-center channel channel-number

View

System view

Parameters

channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, corresponding to the 10 channels of the system.
channel-name: Channel name, up to 30 characters in length. The name must start with an English letter,
containing no special character but numbers and English letters only.

Description

Use the info-center channel name command to name the channel whose number is channel-number
as channel-name.
Use the undo info-center channel command to restore the default name of the channel whose
number is channel-number.
By default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is (in turn) console, monitor, loghost, trapbuffer,
logbuffer, snmpagent, channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.
Do not configure two different channels with the same name.

Examples

# Name channel 0 as “execconsole”.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] info-center channel 0 name execconsole

info-center console channel

Syntax

info-center console channel { channel-number | channel-name }

undo info-center console channel

View

System view

Parameters

1-6
Description

Use the info-center console channel command to set the channel through which information is output
to the console.
Use the undo info-center console channel command to restore the default channel through which
system information is output to the console.
By default, output of information to the console is enabled with channel 0 as the default channel (known
as console).
This command works only when the information center is enabled.
Related commands: info-center enable and display info-center.

Examples

# Configure to output information to the console through channel 0.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] info-center console channel 0

info-center enable

Syntax

info-center enable
undo info-center enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the info-center enable command to enable the information center.

Use the undo info-center enable command to disable the information center.
The switch can output system information to the log host, the console, and other destinations only when
the information center is enabled.
By default, the information center is enabled.
Related commands: display info-center, info-center loghost, info-center logbuffer, info-center
console channel, info-center monitor channel, info-center trapbuffer, info-center snmp channel.

Examples

# Enable the information center.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] info-center enable

1-7
info-center logbuffer

Syntax

info-center logbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | size buffersize ]*

undo info-center logbuffer [ channel | size ]

View

System view

Parameters

channel: Sets the channel through which information outputs to the log buffer.
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, corresponding to the 10 channels of the system.
channel-name: Channel name, by default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is (in turn) console,
monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent, channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.
size buffersize: Specifies the size of the log buffer (number of messages the buffer holds) you want to
display. The buffersize argument ranges from 0 to 1,024 and defaults to 512.

Description

Use the info-center logbuffer command to enable information output to the log buffer.
Use the undo info-center logbuffer command to disable information output to the log buffer.
By default, information output to the log buffer is enabled with channel 4 (logbuffer) as the default
channel and a maximum buffer size of 512.
This command works only when the information center is enabled.
Related commands: info-center enable, display info-center.

Examples

# Configure the system to output information to the log buffer with the size of 50.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] info-center logbuffer size 50

info-center loghost

Syntax

info-center loghost host-ip-addr [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | facility

local-number ]*
undo info-center loghost host-ip-addr

View

System view

Parameters

host-ip-addr: IP address of a log host.

channel: Sets the information channel for the log host.

1-8
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, corresponding to the 10 channels of the system.
channel-name: Channel name, by default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is (in turn) console,
monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent, channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.
facility: Configures the device name (facility value) for the log host.
local-number: Facility (device name) of the log host, ranging from local0 to local7, and the default
setting is local7.

Description

Use the info-center loghost command to enable information output to a log host through specifying
the IP address of the log host.
Use the undo info-center loghost command to disable information output to the log host.
By default, the switch does not output information to the log host. When it is enabled, the default
channel name will be loghost and the default channel number will be 2.
This command works only when the information center is enabled.

Be sure to set the correct IP address in the info-center loghost command. A loopback IP address will
cause an error message, prompting that the address is invalid.

Related commands: info-center enable, display info-center.

Examples

# Configure the system to output system information to the Unix log host whose IP address is
202.38.160.1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] info-center loghost 202.38.160.1

info-center loghost source

Syntax

info-center loghost source interface-type interface-number

undo info-center loghost source

View

System view

Parameters

interface-type: Specifies an interface type.

interface-number: Specifies an interface number.

1-9
Description

Use the info-center loghost source command to configure the source interface through which
information is sent to the log host.
Use the undo info-center loghost source command to cancel the source interface configuration.
Related commands: info-center enable, display info-center.

Examples

# Configure VLAN-interface 1 as the source interface through which information is sent to the log host.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] info-center loghost source Vlan-interface 1

info-center monitor channel

Syntax

info-center monitor channel { channel-number | channel-name }

undo info-center monitor channel

View

System view

Parameters

Description

Use the info-center monitor channel command to set the channel through which information is output
to user terminals.
Use the undo info-center monitor channel command to restore the default channel through which
information is output to user terminals.
By default, output of system information to the monitor is enabled with a default channel name of
monitor and a default channel number of 1.
This command works only when the information center is enabled.
Related commands: info-center enable, display info-center.

Examples

# Set the system to output information to user terminals through channel 0.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] info-center monitor channel 0

1-10
info-center snmp channel

Syntax

info-center snmp channel { channel-number | channel-name }

undo info-center snmp channel

View

System view

Parameters

Description

Use the info-center snmp channel command to set the channel through which information is output to
the SNMP agent.
By default, output of system information to the SNMP NMS is enabled with a default channel name of
snmpagent and a default channel number of 5.
Related commands: snmp-agent, display info-center.

Examples

# Set the switch to output information to the SNMP agent through channel 6.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] info-center snmp channel 6

info-center source

Syntax

info-center source { modu-name | default } channel { channel-number | channel-name } [ { log | trap

| debug } { level severity | state state } ]*
undo info-center source { modu-name | default } channel { channel-number | channel-name }

View

System view

Parameters

modu-name: Module name.

default: Defaults the settings of all modules.
channel-number: Number of information channel to be used.
channel-name: Channel name, by default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is (in turn) console,
monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent, channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.
log: Specifies to output log information.
trap: Specifies to output trap information.
1-11
debug: Specifies to output debugging information.
level severity: Specifies an information severity level. For the value of severity, refer to Table 1-2.
state state: Configures whether to output the system information. The value of state can be on (enabled)
or off (disabled).

Description

Use the info-center source command to specify the output rules of the system information.
Use the undo info-center source command to remove the specified output rules.
By default, the output rules for the system information are listed in Table 1-4.
This command can be used to set the filter and redirection rules of log, trap and debugging information.
For example, the user can set to output log information with severity higher than warnings to the log
host, and information with severity higher than informational to the log buffer. The user can also set to
output trap information of the IP module to a specified output destination.
Note that:
z If you do not use the module-name argument to set output rules for a module, the module uses the
default output rules or the output rules set by the default keyword; otherwise, the module uses the
output rules separately set for it.
z If you use the module-name argument to set the output rules for a module without specifying the
debug, log, and trap keywords, the default output rules for the module are as follows: the output of
log and trap information is enabled, with severity being informational; the output of debugging
information is disabled, with severity being debugging. For example, if you execute the command
info-center source snmp channel 5, the command is actually equal to the command info-center
source snmp channel 5 debug level debugging state off log level informational state on trap
level informational state on.
z After you separately set the output rules for a module, you must use the module-name argument to
modify or remove the rules. The new configuration by using the default keyword is invalid on the
module.
z You can configure to output the log, trap and debugging information to the trap buffer, but the trap
buffer only receives the trap information and discards the log and debugging information.
z You can configure to output the log, trap and debugging information to the log buffer, but the log
buffer only receives the log and debugging information and discards the trap information.
z You can configure to output the log, trap and debugging information to the SNMP module, but the
SNMP module only receives the trap information and discards the log and debugging information.

Table 1-4 Default output rules for different output destinations

Output LOG TRAP DEBUG

Modules
destinati
allowed Enabled/ Enabled/ Enabled/
on Severity Severity Severity
disabled disabled disabled
default
debuggin debuggin
Console (all Enabled warnings Enabled Enabled
g g
modules)
default
Monitor debuggin debuggin
(all Enabled warnings Enabled Enabled
terminal g g
modules)

1-12
Output LOG TRAP DEBUG
Modules
destinati
allowed Enabled/ Enabled/ Enabled/
on Severity Severity Severity
disabled disabled disabled
default
informatio debuggin debuggin
Log host (all Enabled Enabled Disabled
nal g g
modules)
default
Trap informatio debuggin
(all Disabled Enabled warnings Disabled
buffer nal g
modules)
default
debuggin debuggin
Log buffer (all Enabled warnings Disabled Disabled
g g
modules)
default
SNMP debuggin debuggin
(all Disabled Enabled warnings Disabled
module g g
modules)

Examples

# Set the output channel for the log information of VLAN module to snmpagent and to output
information with severity being emergencies. Log information of other modules cannot be output to this
channel.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] info-center source default channel snmpagent log state off
[Sysname] info-center source vlan channel snmpagent log level emergencies state on

# Set the output channel for the log information of VLAN module to snmpagent and to output
information with severity being emergencies. Log information of other modules and all the other
system information cannot be output to this channel.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] info-center source default channel snmpagent debug state off log state off trap
state off
[Sysname] info-center source vlan channel snmpagent log level emergencies state on

info-center synchronous

Syntax

info-center synchronous
undo info-center synchronous

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the info-center synchronous command to enable synchronous information output, so that if
system information (such as log information) is output when the user is inputting information, the

1-13
command prompt and the input information are echoed after the output (note that, the command prompt
is echoed in command edit state but is not echoed in interactive state).
Use the undo info-center synchronous command to disable synchronous information output.
By default, the synchronous information output function is disabled.

z The synchronous information output function is used in the case that your input is interrupted by a
large amount of system output. With this function enabled, the system echoes your previous input
and you can continue your operations from where you were stopped.
z Running the info-center synchronous command during debugging information collection may
result in a command prompt echoed after each item of debugging information. To avoid
unnecessary output, it is recommended to disable synchronous information output in such case.

Examples

# Enable synchronous information output.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]info-center synchronous
Current IC terminal output sync is on

info-center timestamp

Syntax

info-center timestamp { log | trap | debugging } { boot | date | none }

undo info-center timestamp { log | trap | debugging }

View

System view

Parameters

log: Specifies log information.

trap: Specifies trap information.
debugging: Specifies debugging information.
boot: Specifies to adopt the time elapsed since system boot, which is in the format of “xxxxxx.yyyyyy”,
where xxxxxx is the high 32 bits and yyyyyy the low 32 bits of the elapsed milliseconds.
date: The current system date and time, in the format of “Mmm dd hh:mm:ss:sss yyyy”.
z Mmm: The abbreviations of the months in English, which could be Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun,
Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, or Dec.
z dd: The date, starting with a space if less than 10, for example “ 7”.
z hh:mm:ss:sss: The local time, with hh ranging from 00 to 23, mm and ss ranging from 00 to 59, and
sss ranging from 0 to 999.

1-14
z yyyy: Represents the year.
none: Specifies not to include time stamp in the specified output information.

Description

Use the info-center timestamp command to set the format of time stamp included in the
log/trap/debugging information.
Use the undo info-center timestamp command to restore the default setting of time stamp format.
By default, the date time stamp is adopted for log and trap information, and the boot time stamp is
adopted for debugging information.

Examples

# Set the boot time stamp for debugging information.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] info-center timestamp debugging boot

info-center timestamp loghost

Syntax

info-center timestamp loghost { date | no-year-date | none }

undo info-center timestamp loghost

View

System view

Parameters

date: Specifies to adopt the current system date and time, in the format of Mmm dd hh:mm:ss:ms yyyy.
no-year-date: Specifies to adopt the current system date and time excluding the year, in the format of
Mmm dd hh:mm:ss:ms.
none: Specifies not to include time stamp in the output information.

Description

Use the info-center timestamp loghost command to set the format of time stamp for the output
information sent to the log host.
Use the undo info-center timestamp loghost command to restore the default setting of time stamp
format.
By default, the date time stamp is adopted.

Examples

# Set the no-year-date time stamp for the output information sent to the log host.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] info-center timestamp loghost no-year-date

1-15
info-center timestamp utc

Syntax

info-center timestamp utc

undo info-center timestamp utc

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the info-center timestamp utc command to configure to add UTC time zone to the time stamp of
the date type output in each direction of the information center.
Use the undo info-center timestamp utc command to restore the default.
By default, the information center does not add UTC time zone to the time stamp of the date type in any
output direction.
Related commands: display info-center, info-center timestamp, info-center timestamp loghost,
clock timezone.

Examples

# Configure to add UTC time zone to the time stamp of the output information of the information center.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] info-center timestamp utc

# Display the time stamp configuration of the information center.

[Sysname] display info-center
Information Center: enabled
Log host:
192.168.0.10, channel number : 2, channel name : loghost
language : english, host facility local : 7
Console:
channel number : 0, channel name : console
Monitor:
channel number : 1, channel name : monitor
SNMP Agent:
channel number : 5, channel name : snmpagent
Log buffer:
enabled,max buffer size : 1024, current buffer size : 512,
current messages : 153, channel number : 4, channel name : logbuffer
dropped messages : 0, overwritten messages : 0
Trap buffer:
enabled,max buffer size : 1024, current buffer size : 256,
current messages : 1, channel number : 3, channel name : trapbuffer
dropped messages : 0, overwritten messages : 0

1-16
Information timestamp setting:
with utc
log - date, trap - date, debug - boot

# If you configure to add the UTC time zone in the time stamp, the system information is output as
follows:
%Dec 8 10:12:21:708 2006 [GMT+08:00:00] Sysname SHELL/5/LOGIN:- 1 - VTY(1.1.0.2) in unit1
login

info-center trapbuffer

Syntax

info-center trapbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | size buffersize ]*

undo info-center trapbuffer [ channel | size ]

View

System view

Parameters

size: Sets the size of the trap buffer.

buffersize: Size of the trap buffer, represented by the number of messages it holds. It ranges from 0 to
1,024 and defaults to 256.
channel: Sets the channel through which information is output to the trap buffer.
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, corresponding to the 10 channels of the system.
channel-name: Channel name. By default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is (in turn) console,
monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent, channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.

Description

Use the info-center trapbuffer command to enable information output to the trap buffer.
Use the undo info-center trapbuffer command to disable information output to the trap buffer.
By default, information output to the trap buffer is enabled with channel 3 (trapbuffer) as the default
channel and a maximum buffer size of 256.
This command takes effect only after the information center function is enabled.
Related commands: info-center enable, display info-center.

Examples

# Enable the system to output trap information to the trap buffer, whose size is set to 30.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] info-center trapbuffer size 30

reset logbuffer

Syntax

reset logbuffer [ unit unit-id ]

1-17
View

User view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit ID of the device, the value is 1.

Description

Use the reset logbuffer command to clear information recorded in the log buffer.

Examples

# Clear information recorded in the log buffer.

<Sysname> reset logbuffer

reset trapbuffer

Syntax

reset trapbuffer [ unit unit-id ]

View

User view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit ID of the device, the value is 1.

Description

Use the reset trapbuffer command to clear information recorded in the trap buffer.

Examples

# Clear information recorded in the trap buffer.

<Sysname> reset trapbuffer

terminal debugging

Syntax

terminal debugging
undo terminal debugging

View

User view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the terminal debugging command to enable debugging terminal display.

Use the undo terminal debugging command to disable debugging terminal display.

1-18
By default, debugging terminal display is disabled.
You can execute the terminal debugging command to display debugging information on a user
terminal.
Related commands: debugging commands in the System Maintenance and Debugging module of the
manual.

Examples

# Enable debugging terminal display.

<Sysname> terminal debugging

terminal logging

Syntax

terminal logging
undo terminal logging

View

User view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the terminal logging command to enable log terminal display.

Use the undo terminal logging command to disable log terminal display.
By default, log terminal display is enabled for console users and terminal users.

Examples

# Disable log terminal display.

<Sysname> undo terminal logging

terminal monitor

Syntax

terminal monitor
undo terminal monitor

View

User view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the terminal monitor command to enable the debugging/log/trap information terminal display
function.
1-19
Use the undo terminal monitor command to disable the function.
By default, this function is enabled for console users and terminal users.
This command works only on the current terminal. The debugging/log/trap information can be output on
the current terminal only after this command is executed in user view.
z Disabling the function has the same effect as executing the following three commands: undo
terminal debugging, undo terminal logging and undo terminal trapping. That is, no
debugging/log/trap information will be displayed on the current terminal.
z If the function is enabled, you can run the terminal debugging/undo terminal debugging,
terminal logging/undo terminal logging or terminal trapping/undo terminal trapping
command to enable or disable debug/log/trap terminal output respectively.

Examples

# Disable terminal display.

<Sysname> undo terminal monitor

terminal trapping

Syntax

terminal trapping
undo terminal trapping

View

User view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the terminal trapping command to enable trap terminal display.

Use the undo terminal trapping command to disable trap terminal display.
By default, trap terminal display is enabled.

Examples

# Enable trap terminal display.

<Sysname> terminal trapping

1-20
Table of Contents

1 Basic System Configuration and Debugging Commands·····································································1-1

Basic System Configuration Commands ································································································1-1
clock datetime··································································································································1-1
clock summer-time ··························································································································1-1
clock timezone·································································································································1-2
quit ···················································································································································1-3
return ···············································································································································1-4
sysname ··········································································································································1-4
system-view·····································································································································1-5
System Status and Information Display Commands ··············································································1-5
display clock ····································································································································1-5
display debugging····························································································································1-6
display version·································································································································1-7
System Debugging Commands ··············································································································1-7
debugging········································································································································1-7
display diagnostic-information ·········································································································1-8
terminal debugging ··························································································································1-9

2 Network Connectivity Test Commands···································································································2-1

Network Connectivity Test Commands···································································································2-1
ping ··················································································································································2-1
tracert···············································································································································2-3

3 Device Management Commands ·············································································································3-1

Device Management Commands············································································································3-1
boot boot-loader ······························································································································3-1
boot bootrom ···································································································································3-1
display boot-loader ··························································································································3-2
display cpu·······································································································································3-2
display device ··································································································································3-3
display fan ·······································································································································3-4
display memory ·······························································································································3-5
display power···································································································································3-5
display schedule reboot···················································································································3-6
display transceiver alarm interface··································································································3-6
display transceiver diagnosis interface····························································································3-9
display transceiver interface··········································································································3-10
display transceiver manuinfo interface ··························································································3-11
port auto-power-down····················································································································3-12
reboot·············································································································································3-12
schedule reboot at ·························································································································3-13
schedule reboot delay ···················································································································3-14
schedule reboot regularity ·············································································································3-15
system-monitor enable ··················································································································3-16
xmodem get···································································································································3-17
i
ii
1 Basic System Configuration and Debugging
Commands

Basic System Configuration Commands

clock datetime

Syntax

clock datetime HH:MM:SS { YYYY/MM/DD | MM/DD/YYYY }

View

User view

Parameters

HH:MM:SS: Current time, where HH ranges from 0 to 23, MM and SS range from 0 to 59.
YYYY/MM/DD or MM/DD/YYYY: Current date, where YYYY represents year ranging from 2000 to 2099,
MM represents month ranging from 1 to 12, and DD represents day ranging from 1 to 31.

Description

Use the clock datetime command to set the current date and time of the Ethernet switch.
By default, it is 23:55:00 04/01/2000 when the system starts up.
In an implementation where exact absolute time is required, it is necessary to use this command to set
the current date and time of the Ethernet switch.
Related commands: display clock.

Examples

# Set the current date and time of the Ethernet switch to 0:0:0 2001/01/01.
<Sysname> clock datetime 0:0:0 2001/01/01
<Sysname> display clock
00:00:04 UTC Mon 01/01/2001
Time Zone : add 00:00:00

clock summer-time

Syntax

clock summer-time zone-name { one-off | repeating } start-time start-date end-time end-date

offset-time
undo clock summer-time

1-1
View

User view

Parameters

zone-name: Name of the summer time, a string of 1 to 32 characters.

one-off: Sets the summer time for only one year (the specified year).
repeating: Sets the summer time for every year starting from the specified year.
start-time: Start time of the summer time, in the form of HH:MM:SS.
start-date: Start date of the summer time, in the form of YYYY/MM/DD or MM/DD/YYYY.
end-time: End time of the summer time, in the form of HH:MM:SS.
end-date: end date of the summer time, in the form of YYYY/MM/DD or MM/DD/YYYY.
offset-time: Offset of the summer time relative to the standard time, in the form of HH:MM:SS.

Description

Use the clock summer-time command to set the name, time range and time offset of the summer time.
After the setting, you can use the display clock command to check the results.

Examples

# Set the summer time named abc1, which starts from 06:00:00 2005/08/01, ends until 06:00:00
2005/09/01, and is one hour ahead of the standard time.
<Sysname> clock summer-time abc1 one-off 06:00:00 08/01/2005 06:00:00 09/01/2005 01:00:00
<Sysname> display clock
00:02:36 UTC Mon 01/01/2001
Time Zone : add 00:00:00
Summer-Time : abc1 one-off 06:00:00 08/01/2005 06:00:00 09/01/2005 01:00:00

# Set the summer time named abc2, which starts from 06:00:00 08/01, ends until 06:00:00 09/01, and is
one hour ahead of the standard time every year from 2005 on.
<Sysname> clock summer-time abc2 repeating 06:00:00 08/01/2005 06:00:00 09/01/2005 01:00:00
<Sysname> display clock
00:01:25 UTC Mon 01/01/2001
Time Zone : add 00:00:00
Summer-Time : abc2 repeating 06:00:00 08/01/2005 06:00:00 09/01/2005 01:00:00

clock timezone

Syntax

clock timezone zone-name { add | minus } HH:MM:SS

undo clock timezone

View

User view

Parameters

zone-name: Name of the time zone, in length of 1 to 32 characters.

1-2
add: Specifies to add a time value based on the universal time coordinated (UTC) time to generate a
later time.
minus: Specifies to subtract a time value based on the UTC time to generate an earlier time.
HH:MM:SS: Time to be added or subtracted from the UTC time, in the form of HH:MM:SS.

Description

Use the clock timezone command to set the local time zone.
Use the undo clock timezone command to restore the local time zone to the default UTC time zone.
After the setting, you can use the display clock command to check the setting. The log information time
and the debugging information time adopts the local time after the time zone and the summer time have
been adjusted.
Related commands: clock summer-time, display clock.

Examples

# Set the local time zone named z5, which is five hours earlier than the UTC time.
<Sysname> clock timezone z5 add 05:00:00
<Sysname> display clock
05:03:17 z5 Mon 01/01/2001
Time Zone : z5 add 05:00:00
Summer-Time : abc1 one-off 06:00:00 08/01/2005 06:00:00 09/01/2005 01:00:00

quit

Syntax

quit

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the quit command to return from current view to a lower level view.
The following lists the three levels of views available on a switch (from lower level to higher level):
z User view
z System view
z VLAN view, Ethernet port view, and so on
If the current view is user view, this command is used to quit the system.
Related commands: return, system-view.

Examples

# Return from system view to user view.

Use the system-view command to enter system view from user view.
Related commands: quit, return.

Examples

# Enter system view from user view.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname]

System Status and Information Display Commands

display clock

Syntax

display clock

View

Any view

Parameters

None

1-5
Description

Use the display clock command to display the current date, time, timezone and summertime of the
system, so that you can adjust them if they are wrong.
The maximum date and time that can be displayed by this command is 23:59:59 9999/12/31.
Related commands: clock datetime, clock timezone, clock summer-time.

Examples

# Display the current date and time of the system.

<Sysname> display clock
18:36:31 beijing Sat 2002/02/02
Time Zone : beijing add 01:00:00
Summer-Time : bj one-off 01:00:00 2003/01/01 01:00:00 2003/08/08 01:00:00

Table 1-1 Field description of the display clock command

Field Description
18:36:31 beijing Sat 2002/02/02 Current date and time of the system

Time Zone Configured time zone information

Summer-Time Configured summer time information

display debugging

Syntax

display debugging [ unit unit-id ] [ interface interface-type interface-number ] [ module-name ]

View

Any view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, the value is 1.

interface-type: Interface type.
interface-number: Interface number.
module-name: Functional module name.

Description

Use the display debugging command to display enabled debugging on a specified device.

Examples

# Display enabled debugging on unit 1.

<Sysname> display debugging unit 1
ARP packet debugging switch is on
TCP:
TCP packet debugging switch is on for task any socket any
IP icmp debugging is on

1-6
display version

Syntax

display version

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display version command to display the version information about the switch system.
Specifically, you can use this command to check the software version and release time, the basic
hardware configuration, and some other information about the switch.

Examples

# Display the version information of the system.

<Sysname> display version
3Com Corporation
Switch 4200G 12-Port Software Version 3Com OS V3.02.01s168
Copyright (c) 2004-2008 3Com Corporation and its licensors, All rights reserved.
Switch 4200G 12-Port uptime is 0 week, 0 day, 11 hours, 30 minutes

Switch 4200G 12-Port with 1 Processor

64M bytes DRAM
16M bytes Flash Memory
Config Register points to FLASH

Hardware Version is REV.B

CPLD Version is 002
Bootrom Version is 2.00
[SubSlot 0] 12 GE ( 4 COMBO ) Hardware Version is REV.B

System Debugging Commands

debugging

Syntax

debugging module-name [ debugging-option ]

undo debugging { all | module-name [ debugging-option ] }

View

User view

Parameters

module-name: Module name.

1-7
debugging-option: Debugging option.
all: Specifies to disable all debugging.

Description

Use the debugging command to enable system debugging.

Use the undo debugging command to disable system debugging.
By default, all debugging is disabled for the system.
Note that:
z Enabled debugging will generate a great deal of debugging information and thus will affect the
efficiency of the system. Therefore, it is recommended not to enable debugging for multiple
functions at the same time. To disable all debugging at a time, you can use the undo debugging
all command.
z The specific debugging information can be displayed on a terminal only after you have configured
the debugging, terminal debugging, and terminal monitor commands.
z To display the enabled debugging types, use the display debugging command.
For information about the terminal monitor command, refer to Information Center Command.

Examples

# Enable packet debugging of the IP module.

<Sysname> debugging ip packet
<Sysname> display debugging
IP packet debugging is on

display diagnostic-information

Syntax

display diagnostic-information

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display diagnostic-information command to display system diagnostic information, or save
system diagnostic information to a file with the extension .diag in the Flash memory.

Examples

# Save system diagnostic information to the file default.diag.

<Sysname> display diagnostic-information
This operation may take a few minutes, continue?[Y/N]y
Diagnostic-information is saved to Flash or displayed(Y=save N=display)?[Y/N]y
Please input the file name(*.diag)[flash:/default.diag]:
The file is already existing, overwrite it? [Y/N]y

1-8
% Output information to file: flash:/default.diag.
Please wait......

# Display the diagnostic information of the system.

<Sysname> display diagnostic-information
This operation may take a few minutes, continue?[Y/N]y
Diagnostic-information is saved to Flash or displayed(Y=save N=display)?[Y/N]n

-------------------- display version --------------------

……
<Omitted>

terminal debugging

Syntax

terminal debugging
undo terminal debugging

View

User view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the terminal debugging command to enable terminal display for debugging information.
Use the undo terminal debugging command to disable terminal display for debugging information.
By default, terminal display for debugging information is disabled.
Note that:
z To display the debugging information on the terminal, you need to configure both the terminal
debugging and terminal monitor commands.
z If you execute the undo terminal monitor command, you will disable the monitoring of the log,
trap, and debugging information on the current terminal. Thereby, no log, trap, or debugging
information will be displayed on the terminal.
z The configuration of the terminal debugging command takes effect for the current connection
only. If the terminal re-establishes a connection, the terminal display for debugging information is
disabled.
Related commands: debugging.

Examples

# Enable terminal display for debugging information.

<Sysname> terminal debugging
% Current terminal debugging is on

1-9
2 Network Connectivity Test Commands

Network Connectivity Test Commands

ping

Syntax

ping [ -a ip-address ] [ -c count ] [ -d ] [ -f ] [ -h ttl ] [ -i interface-type interface-number ] [ ip ] [ -n ] [ - p

pattern ] [ -q ] [ -s packetsize ] [ -t timeout ] [ -tos tos ] [ -v ] host

View

Any view

Parameters

-a ip-address: Specifies the source IP address to send ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet. This IP address
must be a local interface IP address.
-c count: Specifies how many times the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet will be sent. The count
argument is the times, which ranges from 1 to 4,294,967,295 and defaults to 5.
-d: Specifies the socket to be in DEBUGGING mode. By default, the socket is in non-DEBUGGING
mode.
-f: Specifies to discard a packet directly instead of fragmenting it if its length is greater than the
maximum transmission unit (MTU) of the interface.
-h ttl: Specifies the Time To Live (TTL) value of the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packets in the range 1 to
255. By default, the TTL value is 255.
-i interface-type interface-number: Specifies the ICMP echo request sending interface by its type and
number. With the interface specified, the TTL of packets are set to 1 automatically to test the
directly-connected device (the IP address of the device is in the same network segment with that of the
interface).
ip: Specifies the device to support IPv4. By default, the device supports IPv4.
-n: Specifies to directly regard the host argument as an IP address without performing domain name
resolution. By default, the host argument is first regarded as an IP address; if it is not an IP address,
domain name resolution is performed.
-p pattern: Specifies the padding byte pattern of the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packets. The pattern
argument is a byte in hexadecimal. For example, -p ff fills a packet with all ffs. By default, the system fills
a packet with 0x01, 0x02, and so on, until 0x09; then it repeats this procedure from 0x01 again.
-q: Specifies to display only the statistics without the details. By default, all the information including the
details and statistics will be displayed.
-s packetsize: Specifies the size (in bytes) of each ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet (excluding the IP
and ICMP headers). The packetsize argument ranges from 20 to 32,000 and defaults to 56 bytes.

2-1
-t timeout: Specifies the timeout time (in milliseconds) before an ICMP ECHO-REPLY packet is received
after an ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet is sent. The timeout argument ranges from 0 to 65535 ms and
defaults to 2,000 ms.
-tos tos: Specifies the ToS value of the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packets in the range 0 to 255. By
default, this value is 0.
-v: Specifies to display other ICMP packets received (that is, non-ECHO-REPLY packets). By default,
other ICMP packets like non-ECHO-REPLY packets are not displayed.
host: Domain name or IP address of the destination host.

The ping command also supports the ipv6 keyword. For details, refer to IPv6 Management Command.

Description

Use the ping command to check the reachability of a host, and output the related statistics information.
The executing procedure of the ping command is as follows: First, the source host sends an ICMP
ECHO-REQUEST packet to the destination host. If the connection to the destination network is normal,
the destination host receives this packet and responds with an ICMP ECHO-REPLY packet.
You can use the ping command to check the network connectivity and the quality of a network line. This
command can output the following information:
z Response status of the destination to each ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet, including the number
of bytes, packet sequence number, TTL and response time of the response packet if the response
packet is received within the timeout time. If no response packet is received within the timeout time,
the message "Request time out" is displayed instead.
z Final statistics, including the numbers of sent packets and received response packets, the
irresponsive packet percentage, and the minimum, average and maximum values of response
time.
You can set a relatively long timeout time if the network transmission speed is slow.
Related commands: tracert.

Examples

# Check the reachability of the host whose IP address is 202.38.160.244.

<Sysname> ping 202.38.160.244
ping 202.38.160.244 : 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=1 ttl=255 time = 1ms
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=2 ttl=255 time = 2ms
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=3 ttl=255 time = 1ms
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=4 ttl=255 time = 3ms
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=5 ttl=255 time = 2ms
--202.38.160.244 ping statistics--
5 packet transmitted
5 packet received

2-2
0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/3 ms

The above output information indicates that the destination host is reachable. Each probe packet from
the source device has got a reply, with the minimum/average/maximum packet roundtrip time being
1ms/2ms/3ms.

tracert

Syntax

tracert [ -a source-ip ] [ -f first-ttl ] [ -m max-ttl ] [ -p port ] [ -q num-packet ] [ -w timeout ] string

View

Any view

Parameters

-a source-ip: Specifies the source interface IP address used by this command.

-f first-ttl: Specifies the initial TTL value of the packets to be sent, so as to only display the addresses of
those gateways on the path whose hop counts are not smaller than the hop count specified by the
first-ttl argument. For example, if the first-ttl argument is 3, the command displays the addresses of the
gateways from the third hop. The first-ttl argument ranges from 1 to 255 and defaults to 1.
-m max-ttl: Specifies the maximum TTL value of the packets to be sent. After the command sends a
packet with the maximum TTL, it will not send any more packets. With this argument, this command
only displays the addresses of those gateways from the source address to hop according to the hop
count specified by the argument. For example, if the max-ttl argument is 5, the command displays the
addresses of the gateways from the source to the fifth hop. The max-ttl argument ranges from 1 to 255
and defaults to 30.
-p port: Specifies the destination port of the packets to be sent. The port argument ranges from 0 to
65535 and defaults to 33434. Generally, you need not change the argument.
-q num-packet: Specifies the number of packets to be sent each time. The num-packet argument
ranges from 0 to 65,535 and defaults to 3.
-w timeout: Specifies the timeout time to wait for ICMP error packets. The timeout argument ranges
from 0 to 65,535 and defaults to 5,000 (in milliseconds).
string: IP address of the destination host, or host name of the remote system with 1 to 20 characters.

The tracert command also supports the ipv6 keyword. For details, refer to IPv6 Management
Command.

Description

Use the tracert command to trace the gateways that the test packets pass through from the source
device to the destination device. This command is mainly used to check the network connectivity and
help locate the network faults.

2-3
The executing procedure of the tracert command is as follows: First, the source sends a packet with the
TTL of 1, and the first hop device returns an ICMP error message indicating that it cannot forward this
packet because of TTL timeout. Then, the source resends a packet with the TTL of 2, and the second
hop device also returns an ICMP TTL timeout message. This procedure goes on and on until a packet
gets to the destination or the maximum TTL is reached. During the procedure, the system records the
source address of each ICMP TTL timeout message in order to offer the path that the packets pass
through to the destination.
If you find that the network is faulty by using the ping command, you can use the tracert command to
find where the fault is in the network.
The tracert command can output the IP addresses of all the gateways that the packets pass through to
the destination. It outputs the string "***" if the response from a gateway times out.

Examples

# Trace the gateways that the packets pass through to the destination with IP address 18.26.0.115.
<Sysname> tracert 18.26.0.115
tracert to 18.26.0.115 (18.26.0.115), 30 hops max,40 bytes packet
1 128.3.112.1 (128.3.112.1) 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms
2 128.32.216.1 (128.32.216.1) 19 ms 19 ms 19 ms
3 128.32.206.1 (128.32.206.1) 39 ms 19 ms 19 ms
4 128.32.136.23 (128.32.136.23) 19 ms 39 ms 39 ms
5 128.32.168.22 (128.32.168.22) 20 ms 39 ms 39 ms
6 128.32.197.4 (128.32.197.4) 59 ms 119 ms 39 ms
7 131.119.2.5 (131.119.2.5) 59 ms 59 ms 39 ms
8 129.140.70.13 (129.140.70.13) 80 ms 79 ms 99 ms
9 129.140.71.6 (129.140.71.6) 139 ms 139 ms 159 ms
10 129.140.81.7 (129.140.81.7) 199 ms 180 ms 300 ms
11 129.140.72.17 (129.140.72.17) 300 ms 239 ms 239 ms
12 * * *
13 128.121.54.72 (128.121.54.72) 259 ms 499 ms 279 ms
14 * * *
15 * * *
16 * * *
17 * * *
18 18.26.0.115 (18.26.0.115) 339 ms 279 ms 279 ms

2-4
3 Device Management Commands

Device Management Commands

boot boot-loader

Syntax

boot boot-loader [ backup-attribute ] { file-url | device-name }

View

User view

Parameters

backup-attribute: Specifies the backup attribute for a file.

file-url: Path plus name of a host software file in the Flash, a string of 1 to 64 characters.
device-name: File name, in the form of unit[NO.]>flash:, which is used to indicate that the specified file
is stored in the Flash memory of a specified switch.

Description

Use the boot boot-loader command to specify the host software that will be used when the switch
starts up next time.
You can use this command to specify a .app file in the Flash as the host software to be adopted at next
startup.

Examples

# Specify the host software that will be used when the current switch starts up next time.
<Sysname> boot boot-loader S4200G.app
The specified file will be booted next time on unit 1!

boot bootrom

Syntax

boot bootrom { file-url | device-name }

View

User view

Parameters

file-ulr: Path plus name of a Boot ROM file (that is, a .btm file) in the Flash, a string of 1 to 64 characters.
device-name: File name, beginning with a device name in the form of unit[NO.]>flash, used to
indicates that the specified file is stored in the Flash memory of a specified switch.

3-1
Description

Use the boot bootrom command to update the Boot ROM. The updated Boot ROM is used at next
startup.

Examples

# Update the Boot ROM of the switch using the file named S4200G.btm.
<Sysname> boot bootrom S4200G.btm
This will update Bootrom on unit 1. Continue? [Y/N] y
Upgrading Bootrom, please wait...
Upgrade Bootrom succeeded!

display boot-loader

Syntax

display boot-loader [ unit unit-id ]

View

Any view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, the value is 1.

Description

Use the display boot-loader command to display the host software (.app file) that will be adopted
when the switch starts up next time.

Examples

# Display the host software that will be adopted when the switch starts up next time.
<Sysname> display boot-loader
Unit 1:
The current boot app is: s4200G.app
The main boot app is: s4200G.app
The backup boot app is:

Table 3-1 Description for the fields of the display boot-loader command

Field Description
The current boot app is Boot file used for the current boot of the system
The main boot app is Main boot file to be used for the next boot of the system
The backup boot app is Backup boot file to be used for the next boot of the system

display cpu

Syntax

display cpu [ unit unit-id ]

3-2
View

Any view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, the value is 1.

Description

Use the display cpu command to display the CPU usage.

Examples

# Display the CPU usage of this switch.

<Sysname> display cpu
Unit 1
Board 0 CPU busy status:
12% in last 5 seconds
12% in last 1 minute
12% in last 5 minutes

Table 3-2 Description for the fields of the display cpu command

Field Description
CPU busy status CPU usage status.

12% in last 5 seconds The CPU usage in the last five seconds is 12%.
12% in last 1 minute The CPU usage in the last one minute is 12%.
12% in last 5 minutes The CPU usage in the last five minutes is 12%.

display device

Syntax

display device [ manuinfo | unit unit-id ]

View

Any view

Parameters

manuinfo: Specifies to display the manufacture information of the specified switch.

unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, the value is 1.

Description

Use the display device command to display the information, such as the module type and operating
status, about each board (main board and sub-board) of a specified switch.
You can use this command to display the following information about each board, including slot number,
sub-slot number, the number of ports, versions of PCB, FPGA, CPLD and Boot ROM software, address
learning mode, interface board type, and so on.

3-3
Examples

# Display board information of this switch.

<Sysname> display device
Unit 1
SlotNo SubSNo PortNum PCBVer FPGAVer CPLDVer BootRomVer AddrLM Type State
0 0 48 REV.B NULL 002 2.00 IVL MAIN Normal

Table 3-3 Description on the fields of the display device command

Field Description
SlotNo Serial number of the slot
SubSNo Serial number of the sub slot
PortNum Number of ports
PCBVer Version number of the PCB card
FPGAVer Version number of the FPGA encapsulation
CPLDVer Logical version number of the hardware CPLD
BootRomVer Version number of the Boot ROM

AddrLM MAC address learning mode

Type Card type
State Running state

display fan

Syntax

display fan [ unit unit-id [ fan-id ] ]

View

Any view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, the value is 1.

fan-id: ID number of a fan.

Description

Use the display fan command to view the working states of fans in a switch.

Examples

# Display the working states of the fans.

<Sysname> display fan
Unit 1
Fan 1 State: Normal
Fan 2 State: Normal
Fan 3 State: Normal

3-4
The above information indicates that the three fans work normally.

display memory

Syntax

display memory [ unit unit-id ]

View

Any view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, the value is 1.

limit: Specifies to display the memory configuration information of the switch.

Description

Use the display memory command to display the memory usage of a specified switch.

Examples

# Display the memory usage of this switch.

<Sysname> display memory
Unit 1
System Available Memory(bytes): 27460224
System Used Memory(bytes): 10900616
Used Rate: 39%

Table 3-4 Description for the fields of the display memory command

Field Description
System Available Memory(bytes) Available memory size of the system, in unit of bytes
System Used Memory(bytes) Used memory size of the system, in unit of bytes
Used Rate Percentage of the used memory

display power

Syntax

display power [ unit unit-id [ power-id ] ]

View

Any view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, the value is 1.

power-id: Power ID.

Description

Use the display power command to display the working state of the power supply of the switch.

3-5
Examples

# Display the working state of the power supply.

<Sysname> display power
Unit 1
power 1
State : Normal
Type : AC

The above information indicates that the power supply type is AC, and works normally.

display schedule reboot

Syntax

display schedule reboot

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display schedule reboot command to display information about scheduled reboot.
Related commands: schedule reboot at, schedule reboot delay.

Examples

# Display the information about scheduled reboot.

<Sysname> display schedule reboot
System will reboot at 16:00:00 2002/11/1 (in 2 hours and 5 minutes).

display transceiver alarm interface

Syntax

display transceiver alarm interface [ interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.

Description

Use the display transceiver alarm interface command to display the current alarm information of a
single or all transceivers.
If no error occurs, None is displayed.
Table 3-5 shows the alarm information that may occur for the four types of transceivers.

3-6
Table 3-5 Description on the fields of display transceiver alarm interface

Field Remarks
GBIC/SFP
RX loss of signal RX signal is lost.
RX power high RX power is high.
RX power low RX power is low.
TX fault TX fault
TX bias high TX bias current is high.
TX bias low TX bias current is low.
TX power high TX power is high.
TX power low TX power is low.
Temp high Temperature is high.
Temp low Temperature is low.
Voltage high Voltage is high.
Voltage low Voltage is low.
Transceiver info I/O error Transceiver information read and write error

Transceiver info checksum error Transceiver information checksum error

Transceiver type and port configuration
Transceiver type does not match port configuration.
mismatch
Transceiver type not supported by port
Transceiver type is not supported on the port.
hardware
XFP
RX loss of signal RX signal is lost.

RX not ready RX is not ready

RX CDR loss of lock RX clock cannot be recovered.
RX power high RX power is high.

RX power low RX power is low.

TX not ready TX is not ready.
TX fault TX fault

TX CDR loss of lock TX clock cannot be recovered.

TX bias high TX bias current is high.
TX bias low TX bias current is low.
TX power high TX power is high.
TX power low TX power is low.
Module not ready Module is not ready.

APD supply fault APD (Avalanche Photo Diode) supply fault

TEC fault TEC (Thermoelectric Cooler) fault

3-7
Field Remarks
Wavelength of optical signal exceeds the manufacturer’s
Wavelength unlocked
tolerance.
Temp high Temperature is high.
Temp low Temperature is low.
Voltage high Voltage is high.
Voltage low Voltage is low.
Transceiver info I/O error Transceiver information read and write error
Transceiver info checksum error Transceiver information checksum error
Transceiver type and port configuration
Transceiver type does not match port configuration.
mismatch
Transceiver type not supported by port
Transceiver type is not supported on the port.
hardware
XENPAK
WIS local fault WIS (WAN Interface Sublayer) local fault
Receive optical power fault Receive optical power fault
PMA/PMD (Physical Medium Attachment/Physical
PMA/PMD receiver local fault
Medium Dependent) receiver local fault
PCS receive local fault PCS (Physical Coding Sublayer) receiver local fault
PHY XS receive local fault PHY XS (PHY Extended Sublayer) receive local fault
RX power high RX power is high.
RX power low RX power is low.
Laser bias current fault Laser bias current fault
Laser temperature fault Laser temperature fault
Laser output power fault Laser output power fault
TX fault TX fault
PMA/PMD receiver local fault PMA/PMD receiver local fault
PCS receive local fault PCS receive local fault
PHY XS receive local fault PHY XS receive local fault
TX bias high TX bias current is high.
TX bias low TX bias current is low.
TX power high TX power is high.
TX power low TX power is low.
Temp high Temperature is high.
Temp low Temperature is low.
Transceiver info I/O error Transceiver information read and write error
Transceiver info checksum error Transceiver information checksum error
Transceiver type and port configuration
Transceiver type does not match port configuration.
mismatch

3-8
Field Remarks
Transceiver type not supported by port
Transceiver type is not supported on the port.
hardware

Examples

# Display the alarm information of the transceiver on interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/50.

<Sysname> display transceiver alarm interface gigabitethernet 1/0/50
GigabitEthernet1/0/50 transceiver current alarm information:
TX fault

Table 3-6 Description on the fields of display transceiver alarm interface

Field Description
transceiver current alarm information Current alarm information of the transceiver
TX fault TX fault

display transceiver diagnosis interface

Syntax

display transceiver diagnosis interface [ interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.

Description

Use the display transceiver diagnosis interface command to display the currently measured value of
digital diagnosis parameters of a single or all anti-spoofing transceivers customized by H3C.

Examples

# Display the currently measured value of digital diagnosis parameters of the anti-spoofing pluggable
optical transceiver customized by H3C on interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/50.
<Sysname> display transceiver diagnosis interface gigabitethernet 1/0/50
GigabitEthernet1/0/50 transceiver diagnostic information:
Current diagnostic parameters:
Temp(°C) Voltage(V) Bias(mA) RX power(dBM) TX power(dBM)
36 3.31 6.13 -35.64 -5.19

Table 3-7 Description on the fields of display transceiver diagnosis interface

Field Description
transceiver diagnostic
Digital diagnosis information of the transceiver carried by an interface
information

3-9
Field Description
Current diagnostic
Current diagnostic parameters
parameters
Digital diagnosis parameter-temperature, in °C, with the precision to
Temp.(°C)
1°C.
Voltage(V) Digital diagnosis parameter-voltage, in V, with the precision to 0.01 V.
Digital diagnosis parameter-bias current, in mA, with the precision to
Bias(mA)
0.01 mA.
Digital diagnosis parameter-RX power, in dBM, with the precision to
RX power(dBM)
0.01 dBM.
Digital diagnosis parameter-TX power, in dBM, with the precision to
TX power(dBM)
0.01 dBM.

display transceiver interface

Syntax

display transceiver interface [ interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.

Description

Use the display transceiver interface command to display main parameters of a single or all
transceivers.

Examples

# Display main parameters of the pluggable transceiver on interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/50.

<Sysname> display transceiver interface gigabitethernet 1/0/50
GigabitEthernet1/0/50 transceiver information:
Transceiver Type : 1000_BASE_LX_SFP
Connector Type : LC
Wavelength(nm) : 1310
Transfer Distance(km) : 10(9um)
Digital Diagnostic Monitoring : YES
Vendor Name : H3C
Ordering Name : N/A

Table 3-8 Description on the fields of the display transceiver interface command

Field Description
transceiver information Transceiver information of the interface
Transceiver Type Transceiver type

3-10
Field Description
Type of the connectors of the transceiver:
z Optical connectors, including SC (SC connector, developed by
Connector Type NTT) and LC (LC connector, 1.25 mm/RJ45 optical connector
developed by Lucent).
z Other connectors, including RJ-45 and CX4.
z Optical transceiver: central wavelength of the laser sent, in nm. If
the transceiver supports multiple wavelengths, every two
Wavelength(nm) wavelength values are separated by a comma.
z Electrical transceiver: displayed as N/A.
Transfer distance, with xx representing km for single-mode
transceivers and m for other transceivers. If the transceiver supports
multiple transfer medium, every two values of the transfer distance
are separated by a comma. The corresponding transfer medium is
included in the bracket following the transfer distance value. The
following are the transfer media:
Transfer distance(xx)
z 9 um: 9/125 um single-mode fiber
z 50 um: 50/125 um multi-mode fiber
z 62.5 um: 62.5/125 um multi-mode fiber
z TP: Twisted pair
z CX4: CX4 cable
Whether the digital diagnosis function is supported, where:
Digital Diagnostic
Monitoring z YES: supported
z NO: not supported
Vendor name or vendor name specified of the transceiver:
Vendor Name z The anti-spoofing transceiver customized by H3C: H3C is
displayed.
z Other transceivers: The original vendor name is displayed.
Ordering Name Ordering name of the transceiver

display transceiver manuinfo interface

Syntax

display transceiver manuinfo interface [ interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number.

Description

Use the display transceiver manuinfo interface command to display part of the electrical label
information of a single or all anti-spoofing pluggable transceivers customized by H3C.

Examples

# Display part of the electrical label information of the anti-spoofing pluggable transceiver customized
by H3C on interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/50.
<Sysname> display transceiver manuinfo interface gigabitethernet 1/0/50

3-11
GigabitEthernet1/0/50 transceiver manufacture information:
Manu. Serial Number : 213410A0000054000251
Manufacturing Date : 2007-07-28
Vendor Name : H3C

Table 3-9 Description on the fields of display transceiver manuinfo interface

Field Description
Manu. Serial Number Serial number generated during debugging and testing
Debugging and testing date.. The date takes the value of the system
Manufacturing Date
clock of the computer that performs debugging and testing.
Vendor Name Vendor name specified, that is, H3C.

port auto-power-down

Syntax

port auto-power-down
undo port auto-power-down

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the port auto-power-down command to enable auto power down on an Ethernet port.
Use the undo port auto-power-down to restore the default.
By default, auto power down is not enabled on an Ethernet port.
Note that, currently, in the S4200G series Ethernet switches, the auto power down configuration does
not take effect on SFP ports.

Examples

# Enable auto power down on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port auto-power-down

reboot

Syntax

reboot [ unit unit-id ]

3-12
View

User view

Parameters

unit-id: Unit ID of a switch, the value is 1.

Description

Use the reboot command to restart a specified Ethernet switch.

Before rebooting, the system checks whether there is any configuration change. If yes, it prompts
whether or not to proceed. This prevents the system from losing the configurations in case of shutting
down the system without saving the configurations.

Examples

# Directly restart this switch without saving the current configuration.

<Sysname> reboot
Start to check configuration with next startup configuration file,
please wait......
This command will reboot the device. Current configuration will be lost in next startup if
you continue. Continue? [Y/N] y
This will reboot device. Continue? [Y/N] y

<Sysname>
%Apr 2 00:06:01:148 2006 Sysname DEV/5/DEV_LOG:- 1 -
Switch is rebooting...

Starting......

schedule reboot at

Syntax

schedule reboot at hh:mm [ mm/dd/yyyy | yyyy/mm/dd ]

undo schedule reboot

View

User view

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] schedule reboot regularity at 10:00 thursday
Schedule reboot regularity, are you sure?[Y/N]:y
[Sysname]

system-monitor enable

Syntax

system-monitor enable
undo system-monitor enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

3-16
Description

Use the system-monitor enable command to enable real-time monitoring of the running status of the
system.
Use the undo system-monitor enable command to disable real-time monitoring of the running status
of the system.
This function enables you to dynamically record the system running status, such as CPU, thus
facilitating analysis and solution of the problems of the device.
By default, real-time monitoring of the running status of the system is enabled.

Enabling of this function consumes some amounts of CPU resources. Therefore, if your network has a
high CPU usage requirement, you can disable this function to save your CPU resources.

Examples

# Disable real-time monitoring of the running status of the system.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] undo system-monitor enable

xmodem get

Syntax
xmodem get { file-url | device-name }
View
User view
Parameters
file-url: Path plus name of a host software file in the Flash, a string of 1 to 64 characters.
device-name: File name, in the form of unit[NO.]>flash:, which is used to indicate that the specified file
is stored in the Flash of a specified switch.
Description
Use the xmodem get command to download files from the local device connected with the Console
port of a switch through XModem. This command can be configured only when the device logging onto
a switch through the Console port.
Note that, the communication parameter settings of the Console port of the switch and those of the
serial port of the local device must be consistent and, the interface type of the Console port must be
AUX.
Examples
# Download files through XModem.
<Sysname> xmodem get flash:/config.cfg
**** WARNING ****

3-17
xmodem is a slow transfer protocol limited to the current speed settings of the auxiliary
ports.
During the course of the download no exec input/output will be available!
---- ******* ----

3-18
Table of Contents

1 VLAN-VPN Configuration Commands ·····································································································1-1

VLAN-VPN Configuration Commands ····································································································1-1
display port vlan-vpn························································································································1-1
vlan-vpn enable ·······························································································································1-2
vlan-vpn tpid ····································································································································1-3
vlan-vpn uplink enable·····················································································································1-4

2 Selective QinQ Configuration Commands ······························································································2-1

Selective QinQ Configuration Commands ······························································································2-1
raw-vlan-id inbound ·························································································································2-1
vlan-vpn priority ·······························································································································2-2
vlan-vpn vid ·····································································································································2-3

i
1 VLAN-VPN Configuration Commands

VLAN-VPN Configuration Commands

display port vlan-vpn

Syntax

display port vlan-vpn

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the display port vlan-vpn command to display the information about VLAN-VPN configuration of
the current system. including current TPID value, VLAN-VPN ports, and VLAN-VPN uplink ports.

Example

# Display the information about VLAN-VPN configuration of the current system

<Sysname> display port vlan-vpn
VLAN-VPN TPID: 8100

GigabitEthernet1/0/4
VLAN-VPN status: enabled
VLAN-VPN VLAN: 1

GigabitEthernet1/0/11
VLAN-VPN uplink status: enabled

GigabitEthernet1/0/12
VLAN-VPN uplink status: enabled

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display port vlan-vpn command

Field Description
The operation status of the VLAN VPN feature
on the port
enabled indicates that VLAN VPN is enabled on
VLAN-VPN status
the port.
You can use the vlan-vpn enable command to
enable VLAN VPN on a port.

1-1
Field Description
The VLAN corresponding to the tag that the port
tags packets with, that is, the default VLAN of the
VLAN-VPN VLAN
port. For descriptions on default VLAN, refer to
VLAN Operation.

vlan-vpn enable

Syntax

vlan-vpn enable
undo vlan-vpn

View

Ethernet port view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the vlan-vpn enable command to enable the VLAN-VPN feature for a port.
Use the undo vlan-vpn command to disable the VLAN-VPN feature for a port.
By default, the VLAN-VPN feature is disabled.
With the VLAN-VPN feature enabled, a received packet is tagged with the default VLAN tag of the
receiving port no matter whether or not the packet already carries a VLAN tag.
z If the packet already carries a VLAN tag, the packet becomes a dual-tagged packet.
z Otherwise, the packet becomes a packet carrying the default VLAN tag of the port.

z If this port is a remote mirror reflection port, the VLAN-VPN function cannot be enabled on the port.
z If this port is a VLAN-VPN uplink port, the VLAN-VPN function cannot be enabled on the port.

You can use the display port vlan-vpn command to display the configuration information of
VLAN-VPN on the ports to verity your configuration.
After the VLAN-VPN function is enabled, you can use the vlan-vpn vid command and the raw-vlan-id
inbound command to configure the selective QinQ function. Refer to Selective QinQ Configuration
Commands for details.

Example

# Enable the VLAN-VPN feature for GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 port.

<Sysname> system-view

1-2
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] vlan-vpn enable

vlan-vpn tpid

Syntax

vlan-vpn tpid value

undo vlan-vpn tpid

View

System view

Parameter

value: User-defined TPID value (in hexadecimal format), in the range 0x0001 to 0xFFFF.

Description

Use the vlan-vpn tpid command to set the TPID value.

Use the undo vlan-vpn tpid command to restore the default TPID value.
The default TPID value is 0x8100.
The position of the TPID field in an Ethernet packet is the same as the position of the protocol type field
in a packet without VLAN Tag. Thus, to avoid confusion happening when the switch forwards or
receives a packet, do not configure the protocol type values listed in Table 1-2 as the TPID value.

Table 1-2 Common Ethernet frame protocol type values

Protocol type Value

ARP 0x0806
IP 0x0800
MPLS 0x8847/0x8848
IPX 0x8137
IS-IS 0x8000
LACP 0x8809
802.1x 0x888E

Example

# Set the TPID value to 0x9100.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] vlan-vpn tpid 9100

1-3
vlan-vpn uplink enable

Syntax

vlan-vpn uplink enable

undo vlan-vpn uplink

View

Ethernet port view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the vlan-vpn uplink enable command to configure a port to be a VLAN-VPN uplink port.
Use the undo vlan-vpn uplink command to remove the configuration.
By default, no port is configured to VLAN-VPN uplink port.
When sending a VLAN-VPN packet, a VLAN-VPN uplink port replaces the TPID value in the outer
VLAN tag of the packet with the customized TPID value. You can use the vlan-vpn tpid command to
set the TPID value used by the VLAN-VPN uplink port.

z A port cannot be configured to VLAN-VPN port and VLAN-VPN uplink port at the same time.
z With the TPID being 0x8100, every port can be configured as a VLAN VPN uplink port. However, if
the TPID value is not the default value, you need to use the vlan-vpn uplink enable command to
specify a VLAN VPN uplink port.

Example

# Configure GigabitEthernet1/0/2 port to be a VLAN-VPN uplink port.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] vlan-vpn uplink enable

1-4
2 Selective QinQ Configuration Commands

Selective QinQ Configuration Commands

raw-vlan-id inbound

Syntax

raw-vlan-id inbound vlan-id-list

undo raw-vlan-id inbound { all | vlan-id-list }

View

QinQ view

Parameter

vlan-id-list: Lists of VLAN IDs to be tagged as outer VLAN tags. You need to provide this argument in the
form of { vlan-id [ to vlan-id ] }&<1-10>, where the VLAN ID after the to keyword must be larger than or
equal to the VLAN ID before the to keyword and &<1-10> means that you can specify up to 10
VLANs/VLAN ranges for this argument.
all: Removes all configurations of encapsulating an outer VLAN tag for specified inner VLANs in the
current view.

Description

Use the raw-vlan-id inbound command to specify the outer tag for the packets with the specified inner
VLAN tags. This command must be configured on ports receiving packets from the private network.
Use the undo raw-vlan-id inbound command to remove the configuration.
By default, the switch does not encapsulate packets with any outer VLAN tag.

A packet cannot be tagged with different outer VLAN tags. To change the outer VLAN tag of a packet,
you need to remove the existing outer VLAN tag configuration and configure a new outer VLAN tag.

Before configuring this command in QinQ view, you need to use the vlan-vpn vid command to
configure the outer VLAN tag to be used in the selective QinQ policy.

Example

# Specify to add the tag of VLAN 20 as the outer tag to the packets with their inner VLAN IDs being 8
through 15 for GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view

2-1
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] vlan-vpn vid 20
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1-vid-20] raw-vlan-id inbound 8 to 15

vlan-vpn priority

Syntax

vlan-vpn priority old-priority remark new-priority

undo vlan-vpn priority old-priority

View

Ethernet port view

Parameter

old-priority: 802.1p priority of the inner VLAN tag in a packet. This argument can be in the range 0 to 7 or
a keyword listed in Table 2-1.
new-priority: Priority for the outer VLAN tag in a packet. This argument can be in the range 0 to 7 or a
keyword listed in Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Description on 802.1p priority

IP Precedence (decimal) Keyword

0 Best-effort
1 Background
2 Spare
3 Excellent-effort
4 Controlled-load
5 Video
6 Voice
7 Network-management

For the description on the priority values and the keywords listed in Table 2-1, refer to Qos-QoS profile.

Description

Use the vlan-vpn priority command to configure the mapping between the inner VLAN priority and the
outer VLAN priority. With the mapping configured, a port will encapsulate a packet with the specified
inner tag priority with an outer tag that has the corresponding priority.
Use the undo vlan-vpn priority command to remove the configuration.

2-2
By default, no mapping between the inner tag priority and the outer tag priority is configured, and the
switch uses the priority of the receiving port as the outer tag priority of packets. For descriptions on
receiving port priority, refer to QoS-QoS Profile Operation.

Example

# Enable the inner-to-outer tag priority mapping feature for GigabitEthernet 1/0/1. Insert outer tags with
the priorities being 5 to packets with the priorities of their inner tags being 3.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] vlan-vpn priority 3 remark 5

vlan-vpn vid

Syntax

vlan-vpn vid vlan-id

undo vlan-vpn vid vlan-id

View

Ethernet port view

Parameter

vlan-id: VLAN ID, in the range 1 to 4094.

Description

Use the vlan-vpn vid command to configure the outer VLAN tag for a selective QinQ policy (that is, the
outer VLAN tag to be used by a port to encapsulate received packets) and to enter QinQ view.
Use the undo vlan-vpn vid command to remove the configured outer VLAN tag. Note that this
command will also remove all configurations configured by the raw-vlan-id inbound command in QinQ
view.
Before configuring this command, make sure that the vlan-vpn enable command is configured.

z Before configuring this command, make sure that the vlan-vpn enable command is configured.
z You are not recommended to configure both the DHCP snooping and selective QinQ function on
the switch, which may result in the DHCP snooping to function abnormally.

By default, no selective QinQ policy is configured on a port.

After specifying an outer VLAN tag and enter QinQ view, you need to use the raw-vlan-id inbound
command to specify which VLANs’ packets will be encapsulated with the specified outer VLAN tag.
Otherwise, the configuration of the outer VLAN tag is of no use.
Related command: raw-vlan-id inbound.

2-3
Example

# Specify to add VLAN 20 tag as the outer tags to the packets with their inner VLAN IDs being 2 through
14 for GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] vlan-vpn vid 20
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1-vid-20] raw-vlan-id inbound 2 to 1

2-4
Table of Contents

1 remote-ping Commands ···························································································································1-1

remote-ping Client Commands ···············································································································1-1
adv-factor·········································································································································1-1
count ················································································································································1-1
datafill ··············································································································································1-2
datasize ···········································································································································1-3
description ·······································································································································1-4
destination-ip ···································································································································1-4
destination-port································································································································1-5
display remote-ping ·························································································································1-6
display remote-ping statistics ········································································································1-12
dns-server······································································································································1-15
dns resolve-target··························································································································1-15
filename ·········································································································································1-16
filesize············································································································································1-17
frequency·······································································································································1-18
ftp-operation ··································································································································1-18
history keep-time ···························································································································1-19
history-record enable·····················································································································1-20
history-records·······························································································································1-20
http-operation ································································································································1-21
http-string·······································································································································1-22
remote-ping ···································································································································1-22
remote-ping-agent clear ················································································································1-23
remote-ping-agent enable ·············································································································1-23
remote-ping-agent max-requests ··································································································1-24
jitter-interval ···································································································································1-25
jitter-packetnum ·····························································································································1-25
password ·······································································································································1-26
probe-failtimes ·······························································································································1-27
send-trap ·······································································································································1-28
sendpacket passroute ···················································································································1-28
source-interface·····························································································································1-29
source-ip········································································································································1-30
source-port ····································································································································1-31
statistics·········································································································································1-32
statistics keep-time ························································································································1-32
test-time begin ·······························································································································1-33
test-type·········································································································································1-34
test-enable·····································································································································1-35
test-failtimes ··································································································································1-36
timeout···········································································································································1-36
tos ··················································································································································1-37

i
ttl ····················································································································································1-37
username·······································································································································1-38
remote-ping Server Commands············································································································1-39
remote-ping-server enable ············································································································1-39
remote-ping-server tcpconnect······································································································1-40
remote-ping-server udpecho ·········································································································1-40

ii
1 remote-ping Commands

remote-ping Client Commands

adv-factor

Syntax

adv-factor adv-number
undo adv-factor

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

adv-number: Advantage factor, used to count Mos and ICPIF value in a jitter voice test. It is in the range
0 to 20 and defaults to 0.

Description

Use the adv-factor command to configure the advantage factor which is used to count Mos and ICPIF
value in a jitter voice test.
Use the undo adv-factor command to restore the default.

This command applies only to jitter voice test.

Examples

Parameters

size: Size of a test packet in bytes. The value range varies with the test types.

Table 1-2 Value range of the remote-ping test packets

Test Type Code Range Default value

Jitter None 68-8100 68
Jitter G.711 A-Law 16-1500 172
Jitter G.711 U-Law 16-1500 172
Jitter G.729 A-Law 16-1500 32
ICMP None 4-8100 56

1-3
Test Type Code Range Default value
UDP None 4-8100 100
Other None 4-8100 0

Description

Use the datasize command to configure the size of a test packet in a test.
Use the undo datasize command to restore the default.
The configuration of packet size is only supported by ICMP, UDP and jitter tests.

Examples

# Set the size of ICMP test packets to 50 bytes.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] datasize 50

description

Syntax

description string
undo description

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

string: Brief description about a test operation. By default, no description is configured.

Description

Use the description command to briefly describe a test operation.

Use the undo description command to delete the configured description.

Examples

# Describe a test group as “icmp-test”.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] description icmp-test

destination-ip

Syntax

destination-ip ip-address

1-4
undo destination-ip

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

ip-address: Destination IP address of a remote-ping test.

Description

Use the destination-ip command to configure a destination IP address of an remote-ping test.

Use the undo destination-ip command to remove the configured destination IP address.
By default, no destination IP address is configured for an remote-ping test.
Related commands: destination-port.

The destination address can be an IP address or a host name in HTTP test, while in other types of tests,
it must be an IP address.

Examples

# Set the destination IP address of an ICMP test to 169.254.10.3.

destination-port

Syntax

destination-port port-number
undo destination-port

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

port-number: Destination port number for an remote-ping test, in the range of 1 to 50000.

Description

Use the destination-port command to configure a destination port number for an remote-ping test.
Use the undo destination-port command to remove the configured destination port number.

1-5
By default, no destination port number is configured for a test.
Related commands: destination-ip.

z The destination-port command has effect on jitter, TCP-Private, and UDP-Private tests only.
z It is not recommended to perform a TCP, UDP, or jitter test on a well-known port (ports with a
number ranging from 1 to 1023) . Otherwise, the remote-ping test will fail or the corresponding
service of the well-known port will become unavailable.

Examples

# Set the destination port number for a tcpprivate test to 9000.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator tcp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-tcp] test-type tcpprivate
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-tcp] destination-port 9000

display remote-ping

Syntax

display remote-ping { results | history | jitter } [ administrator-name operation-tag ]

View

Any view

Parameters

results: Displays results of the last test.

history: Displays the history records of tests.
jitter: Displays the jitter test information.
administrator-name: Name of the administrator who created the remote-ping test operation, a string of 1
to 32 characters.
operation-tag: Operation tag, a string of 1 to 32 characters.

Description

Use the display remote-ping command to display the result of the last remote-ping test or the history
of remote-ping tests.
Without administrator-name test-operation-tag specified, the command displays the results of all test
groups; without administrator-name test-operation-tag specified, the command displays the results of
the specified test group.
Related commands: test-enable.

1-6
Examples

# Display the test results of the test group with administrator name administrator, and operation tag
icmp.
<Sysname> display remote-ping results administrator icmp
remote-ping entry(admin administrator, tag icmp) test result:
Destination ip address:10.2.2.2
Send operation times: 10 Receive response times: 10
Min/Max/Average Round Trip Time: 1/2/1
Square-Sum of Round Trip Time: 13
Last succeeded test time: 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
Extend result:
SD Maximal delay: 0 DS Maximal delay: 0
Packet lost in test: 0%
Disconnect operation number: 0 Operation timeout number: 0
System busy operation number: 0 Connection fail number: 0
Operation sequence errors: 0 Drop operation number: 0
Other operation errors: 0

Table 1-3 Description on the fields of the display remote-ping result command

Field Description
Destination ip address Destination IP address
Send operation times Number of probes made
Receive response times Number of received response packets
Minimum/maximum/average roundtrip time, in
Min/Max/Average Round Trip Time
milliseconds
Square-Sum of Round Trip Time Square sum of roundtrip time
Last succeeded test time Completion time of the last successful test
Maximum delay from the source to the
SD Maximal delay
destination
Maximum delay from the destination to the
DS Maximal delay
source
Packet lost in test Average packet loss ratio
Number of times the test was disconnected by
Disconnect operation number
the remote end
Number of times the test failed because the
System busy operation number
system was busy
Operation sequence errors Number of out-of-sequence packets received
Other operation errors Number of other errors
Operation timeout number Number of time-out occurrences in a test
Number of failures to connect with the remote
Connection fail number
end
Drop operation number Number of system resource allocation failures

1-7
# Display the history records of remote-ping tests.
<Sysname> display remote-ping history administrator icmp
remote-ping entry(admin administrator, tag icmp) history record:
Index Response Status LastRC Time
1 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
2 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
3 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
4 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
5 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
6 2 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
7 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
8 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.0
9 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.9
10 1 1 0 2004-11-25 16:28:55.9

Table 1-4 Description on the fields of the display remote-ping history command

Field Description
Roundtrip time in the case of a successful test, timeout time in the
Response case of test timeout, or 0 in the case of a test failure (in
milliseconds)
Test result values, including:
1: responseReceived: Response received
2: unknown: Unknown error.
3: internalError: System internal error
4: requestTimeOut: Request timed out
5: unknownDestinationAddress: Unknown destination address
6: noRouteToTarget: Destination unreachable
Status
7: interfaceInactiveToTarget: Interface to destination address
inactive
8: arpFailure: ARP operation failed.
9: maxConcurrentLimitReached: Maximum limit of concurrent
accesses reached
10: unableToResolveDnsName: Unable to resolve DNS domain
name
11: invalidHostAddress: Invalid host address
Response code in the last ICMP response packet received. (The
LastRC device does not support this field at present, so this field is always
displayed as 0.)
Time Test completion time

# Display the test results of the test group with administrator name administrator, and operation tag
http.
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-http] display remote-ping results administrator http
remote-ping entry(admin dns, tag 1) test result:
Destination ip address:192.168.0.73
Send operation times: 1 Receive response times: 1
Min/Max/Average Round Trip Time: 27/27/27

1-8
Square-Sum of Round Trip Time: 729
Last succeeded test time: 2000-4-2 3:45:36.8
Extend result:
SD Maximal delay: 0 DS Maximal delay: 0
Packet lost in test: 0%
Disconnect operation number: 0 Operation timeout number: 0
System busy operation number: 0 Connection fail number: 0
Operation sequence errors: 0 Drop operation number: 0
Other operation errors: 0
Http result:
DNS Resolve Time: 0 HTTP Operation Time: 7
DNS Resolve Min Time: 0 HTTP Test Total Time: 27
DNS Resolve Max Time: 0 HTTP Transmission Successful Times: 1
DNS Resolve Failed Times: 0 HTTP Transmission Failed Times: 0
DNS Resolve Timeout Times: 0 HTTP Transmission Timeout Times: 0
TCP Connect Time: 20 HTTP Operation Min Time: 7
TCP Connect Min Time: 20 HTTP Operation Max Time: 7
TCP Connect Max Time: 20
TCP Connect Timeout Times: 0

Table 1-5 Description on the fields of the display remote-ping result command

Field Description
DNS Resolve Time Time used for a DNS resolution
HTTP Operation Time Total time used to establish an HTTP connection
DNS Resolve Min Time Minimal time used for a DNS resolution
HTTP Test Total Time Total time used for an HTTP test
DNS Resolve Max Time Maximum time used for a DNS resolution
HTTP Transmission Successful Times Number of successful HTTP transmissions
DNS Resolve Failed Times Number of failed DNS resolutions
HTTP Transmission Failed Times Number of failed HTTP transmissions
DNS Resolve Timeout Times DNS resolution timeout times
HTTP Transmission Timeout Times HTTP transmission timeout times
TCP Connect Time Total time used to establish a TCP connection
Minimum time used to establish an HTTP
HTTP Operation Min Time
connection
Minimum time used to establish a TCP
TCP Connect Min Time
connection
Maximum time used to establish an HTTP
HTTP Operation Max Time
connection
Maximum time used to establish a TCP
TCP Connect Max Time
connection
TCP Connect Timeout Times TCP connection timeout times

1-9
# Display the test results of the test group with administrator name administrator, and operation tag
Jitter.
<Sysname> display remote-ping results administrator Jitter
remote-ping entry(admin administrator, tag Jitter) test result:
Destination ip address:10.2.2.2
Send operation times: 100 Receive response times: 100
Min/Max/Average Round Trip Time: 9/21/13
Square-Sum of Round Trip Time: 18623
Last succeeded test time: 2000-4-2 8:14:58.2
Extend result:
SD Maximal delay: 10 DS Maximal delay: 10
Packet lost in test: 0%
Disconnect operation number: 0 Operation timeout number: 0
System busy operation number: 0 Connection fail number: 0
Operation sequence errors: 0 Drop operation number: 0
Other operation errors: 0
Jitter result:
RTT Number:100
Min Positive SD:1 Min Positive DS:1
Max Positive SD:6 Max Positive DS:8
Positive SD Number:38 Positive DS Number:25
Positive SD Sum:85 Positive DS Sum:42
Positive SD average:2 Positive DS average:1
Positive SD Square Sum:267 Positive DS Square Sum:162
Min Negative SD:1 Min Negative DS:1
Max Negative SD:6 Max Negative DS:8
Negative SD Number:30 Negative DS Number:24
Negative SD Sum:64 Negative DS Sum: 41
Negative SD average:2 Negative DS average:1
Negative SD Square Sum:200 Negative DS Square Sum:161
SD lost packets number:0 DS lost packet number:0
Unkown result lost packet number:0

Table 1-6 Description on the fields of the display remote-ping result command

Field Description
RTT Number Number of received response packets
Minimum positive jitter delay from the source to
Min Positive SD
the destination
Minimum positive jitter delay from the destination
Min Positive DS
to the source
Maximum positive jitter delay from the source to
Max Positive SD
the destination
Maximum positive jitter delay from the
Max Positive DS
destination to the source
Number of positive jitter delays from the source
Positive SD Number
to the destination

1-10
Field Description
Number of positive jitter delays from the
Positive DS Number
destination to the source
Sum of positive jitter delays from the source to
Positive SD Sum
the destination
Sum of positive jitter delays from the destination
Positive DS Sum
to the source
Average of positive jitter delays from the source
Positive SD average
to the destination
Average of positive jitter delays from the
Positive DS average
destination to the source
Sum of the square of positive jitter delays from
Positive SD Square Sum
the source to the destination
Sum of the square of positive jitter delays from
Positive DS Square Sum
the destination to the source
Minimum absolute value of negative jitter delays
Min Negative SD
from the source to the destination
Minimum absolute value of negative jitter delays
Min Negative DS
from the destination to the source
Maximum absolute value of negative jitter delays
Max Negative SD
from the source to the destination
Maximum absolute value of negative jitter delays
Max Negative DS
from the destination to the source
Number of negative jitter delays from the source
Negative SD Number
to the destination
Number of negative jitter delays from the
Negative DS Number
destination to the source
Sum of absolute values of negative jitter delays
Negative SD Sum
from the source to the destination
Sum of absolute values of negative jitter delays
Negative DS Sum
from the destination to the source
Average of negative jitter delays from the source
Negative SD average
to the destination
Average of negative jitter delays from the
Negative DS average
destination to the source
Sum of the square of negative jitter delays from
Negative SD Square Sum
the source to the destination
Sum of the square of negative jitter delays from
Negative DS Square Sum
the destination to the source
Number of lost packets from the source to the
SD lost packets number
destination
Number of lost packets from the destination to
DS lost packet number
the source
Unknown result lost packet number Number of lost packets for unknown reasons

1-11
# Display the test results of the test group with administrator name administrator, and operation tag
dns.
<Sysname> display remote-ping results administrator dns
remote-ping entry(admin administrator, tag dns) test result:
Destination ip address:10.2.2.2
Send operation times: 10 Receive response times: 10
Min/Max/Average Round Trip Time: 6/10/8
Square-Sum of Round Trip Time: 756
Last succeeded test time: 2006-11-28 11:50:40.9
Extend result:
SD Maximal delay: 0 DS Maximal delay: 0
Packet lost in test: 0%
Disconnect operation number: 0 Operation timeout number: 0
System busy operation number: 0 Connection fail number: 0
Operation sequence errors: 0 Drop operation number: 0
Other operation errors: 0
Dns result:
DNS Resolve Current Time: 10 DNS Resolve Min Time: 6
DNS Resolve Times: 10 DNS Resolve Max Time: 10
DNS Resolve Timeout Times: 0 DNS Resolve Failed Times: 0

Table 1-7 Description on the fields of the display remote-ping result command

Field Description
DNS Resolve Current Time Time used for the current DNS resolution
DNS Resolve Min Time Minimum time used for a DNS resolution
DNS Resolve Times Number of DNS resolutions

DNS Resolve Max Time Maximum time used for a DNS resolution
DNS Resolve Timeout Times DNS resolution timeout times
DNS Resolve Failed Times Number of failed DNS resolutions

The description on a specific field is available for the test results of all types of tests, so that not the
description on the output information of all types of tests is provided here.

display remote-ping statistics

Syntax

display remote-ping statistics [ administrator-name operation-tag ]

View

Any view

1-12
Parameters

administrator-name: Name of the administrator creating the test.

operation-tag: Test operation tag.

Description

Use the display remote-ping statistics command to display test statistics.

After a test begins, if all the probes in the first test have not been finished, when you use the command
to view statistics, all statistics results will be 0.

Examples

# Display the statistics information for admin jitter test group, the test type of which is jitter.
<Sysname> display remote-ping statistics admin jitter
remote-ping entry(admin admin, tag jitter) statistics record:
No. : 1
Destination ip address: 169.254.10.3
StartTime: 2000/1 /2 3 :12:44
LifeTime: 21
Send operation times: 0 Receive response times: 0
Max Round Trip Time: 0 Min Round Trip Time: 0
Sum Round Trip Time: 0 Average Round Trip Time: 0
Square-Sum of Round Trip Time: 0 Packet lost in test: 0%
Disconnect operation number: 0 Operation timeout number: 0
System busy operation number:0 Connection fail number: 0
Operation sequence errors: 0 Drop operation number: 0
Other operation errors: 0
Jitter result:
Min Positive SD:0 Min Positive DS:0
Max Positive SD:0 Max Positive DS:0
Positive SD Number:0 Positive DS Number:0
Positive SD Sum:0 Positive DS Sum:0
Positive SD average:0 Positive DS average:0
Positive SD Square Sum:0 Positive DS Square Sum:0
Min Negative SD:0 Min Negative DS:0
Max Negative SD:0 Max Negative DS:0
Negative SD Number:0 Negative DS Number:0
Negative SD Sum:0 Negative DS Sum: 0
Negative SD average:0 Negative DS average:0
Negative SD Square Sum:0 Negative DS Square Sum:0
SD lost packets number:0 DS lost packet number:0
SD packet lost in test:0% DS packet lost in test:0%
Unknown result lost packet number:0

Table 1-8 Description on fields in the output of the display remote-ping statistic command

Field Description
Start time The time when a test starts

1-13
Field Description
Lifetime The time that a test lasts
Send operation times The number of the sent test packets.
Receive response times The number of successful test attempts
Roundtrip time in its minimum, maximum, and
Min/Max/Average Round Trip Time
average
Square-Sum of Round Trip Time The square sum of roundtrip time
Packet lost in test The number of lost packets in a test
The number of forcible disconnections
Disconnect operation number
performed by the opposite end
Operation timeout number The number of timeout in a test
System busy operation number The number of test failures due to busy system
The number of connection failures to the
Connection fail number
opposite end
Operation sequence errors The number of received disordered packets
The number of failures in allocating system
Drop operation number
resource
Other operation errors The number of other operation errors
The jitter value from source to destination
Min Positive SD (DS) (destination to source) is the minimum of positive
value
The jitter value from source to destination
Max Positive SD (DS) (destination to source) is the maximum of
positive value

The jitter value from source to destination

Positive SD (DS) number/sum/average/square (destination to source) is the
sum number/sum/average/square sum of positive
jitter values
The jitter value from source to destination
Min Negative SD (DS) (destination to source) is the minimum of
negative value
The jitter value from source to destination
Max Negative SD (DS) (destination to source) is the maximum of
negative value

The jitter value from source to destination

Negative SD (DS) number/sum/average/square (destination to source) is the
sum number/sum/average/square sum of negative
jitter values
The number of the lost packets from source to
destination (destination to source)
SD (DS) lost packets number
This value has nothing to do with NTP
synchronization.
Packet loss ratio from source to destination
(destination to source) in one test
SD (DS) packet lost in test
This value has nothing to do with NTP
synchronization.

1-14
Field Description
The number of the lost packets for unknown
Unknown result lost packet number
reason

dns-server

Syntax

dns-server ip-address
undo dns-server

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address to be assigned to a domain name server (DNS).

Description

Use the dns-server command to configure the IP address of a DNS server.

Use the undo dns-server command to remove the IP address of a DNS server.
By default, no DNS server IP address is configured.

z This command applies to DNS and HTTP tests only.

z For an HTTP test, if configuring the destination address as the host name, you must configure the
IP address of the DNS server to resolve the host name into an IP address, which is the destination
IP address of this HTTP test

Examples

# Set the IP address of the DNS server to 169.254.10.5.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator dns
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-dns] test-type dns
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-dns] dns-server 169.254.10.5

dns resolve-target

Syntax

dns resolve-target domain-name

undo dns resolve-target

1-15
View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

domain-name: Domain name to be resolved, in the range of 1 to 60 characters.

Description

Use the dns resolve-target command to configure a domain name to be resolved.

Use the undo resolve-target command to remove a domain name to be resolved.
By default, no dns resolve-target information is configured.

This command applies to DNS tests only.

Examples

# Configure the domain name to be resolved as www.test.com.

filename

Syntax

filename file-name
undo filename

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

file-name: Name of the file to be downloaded/uploaded in FTP tests, a string of 1 to 230 characters.

Description

Use the filename command to specify a file to be downloaded/uploaded in FTP tests.

Use the undo filename command to remove the configured file name.
By default, no file name is configured for FTP tests.
Related commands: username, password, ftp-operation.

1-16
The filename command applies to FTP tests only.

Examples

# Specify to transmit config.txt between remote-ping client and FTP server in an FTP test.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator ftp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] test-type ftp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] filename config.txt

filesize

Syntax

filesize size
undo filesize

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

size: File size, in the range 1 to 10000 Kbytes.

Description

Use the filesize command to configure the size of the file to be uploaded in an FTP test.
Use the undo filesize command to restore the default.
By default, the file size is 1000 Kbytes.
Related commands: username, password, ftp-operation.

This command applies only to the PUT operation of an FTP test.

Examples

# Configure the file to be uploaded in an FTP test as 2000 KByte.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator ftp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] test-type ftp

1-17
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] ftp-operation put
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] filesize 2000

frequency

Syntax

frequency interval
undo frequency

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

interval: Automatic test interval in seconds. It ranges from 0 to 65,535.

Description

Use the frequency command to configure the time interval of performing automatic tests.
Use the undo frequency command to restore the default.
If interval is configured greater than 0, the system performs automatic tests at this interval.
interval defaults to 0, which means no automatic test is performed by default.
Related commands: count.

z The frequency command does not apply to DHCP tests.

z The frequency command supports fabric only when the test type of this test group is ICMP. With
fabric enabled, you are allowed to configure the frequency command and use the display
command to check your configuration, but unless the test type is ICMP, your configuration does not
take effect until fabric is disabled.

Examples

# Set the automatic test interval to 10 seconds in an ICMP test.

ftp-operation

Syntax

ftp-operation { get | put }

1-18
View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

get: Specifies the test operation as download from the FTP server.
put: Specifies the test operation as upload to the FTP server.

Description

Use the ftp-operation command to configure the FTP operation mode, which can be get and put.
By default, the FTP operation mode is get.
Related commands: username, password.

The ftp-operation command applies to FTP tests only.

Examples

# Set the FTP operation mode to put in an FTP test.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator ftp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] test-type ftp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] ftp-operation put

history keep-time

Syntax

history keep-time keep-time

undo history keep-time

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

keep-time: Retaining time of the history record for a test group, which is in the range 1 to 1440 in
minutes and defaults to 120 minutes.

Description

Use the history keep-time command to configure the retaining time of the history record for a test
group.
Use the undo history keep-time command to restore the default.

1-19
Examples

# Configure the retaining time of the history record for a test group to 240 minutes.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] history keep-time 240

history-record enable

Syntax

history-record enable
undo history-record enable

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the history-record enable command to enable history record.

Use the undo history-record enable command to disable history record.
By default, history record is disabled. You should configure to save history record as needed.
z If you need to save history record, enable it.
z If you disable the history record after enabling it, the saved history record will be deleted and the
maximum number of the history record for you to save will not be changed.
z If you do not need to save history record, disable it. At this time you can also configure the number
of the history record to be saved, but the history record will not be saved.
Use the display remote-ping history command to view the history record.

Examples

# Enable history record saving.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] history-record enable

history-records

Syntax

history-records number
undo history-records

View

remote-ping test group view

1-20
Parameters

Number: Maximum number of history records that can be saved in a test group, in the range of 0 to 50,
and 50 by default.

Description

Use the history-records command to set the maximum number of history records that can be saved in
a test group.
Use the undo history-records to restore the default.
By default, up to 50 records can be saved in a test group.

Examples

# Set the maximum number of history records that can be saved to 10.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] history-records 10

http-operation

Syntax

http-operation { get | post }

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

get: Specifies the test operation to be download from the HTTP server.
post: Specifies the test operation to be uploaded to the HTTP server.

Description

Use the http-operation command to configure the HTTP operation mode.

By default, the HTTP operation mode is get.

The http-operation command applies to HTTP tests only.

Examples

# Set the HTTP operation mode to post in an HTTP test.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z

1-21
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator http
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-http] test-type http
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-http] http-operation post

http-string

Syntax

http-string string version

undo http-string

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

string: HTTP operation string used to specify the webpage to be accessed. It can consist of 1 to 230
characters.
version: HTTP version, a string of 1 to 12 characters. At present, this argument can be HTTP/1.0 or
HTTP/1.1, where HTTP must be capitalized.

Description

Use the http-string command to configure the HTTP operation string and HTTP version.
Use the undo http-string command to remove the configured HTTP operation string and version.
By default, no HTTP operation string and HTTP version are configured.
Note that the http-string command applies to HTTP tests only.
Related commands: http-operation.

Examples

# Configure the webpage to be accessed by an HTTP test as /index.htm and the HTTP version as
HTTP/1.0.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator http
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-http] test-type http
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-http] http-string /index.htm HTTP/1.0

remote-ping

Syntax

remote-ping administrator-name operation-tag

undo remote-ping administrator-name operation-tag

View

System view

1-22
Parameters

administrator-name: Name of the administrator to create a remote-ping test group, a string of 1 to 32

characters.
operation-tag: Operation tag, a string of 1 to 32 characters.

Description

Use the remote-ping command to create an remote-ping test group and enter remote-ping test group
view. If the specified remote-ping test group already exists, this command leads you to remote-ping test
group view directly.
Use the undo remote-ping command to delete an remote-ping test group.

Examples

# Create an remote-ping test group of which the administrator name is administrator and operation tag
is icmp.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp]

remote-ping-agent clear

Syntax

remote-ping-agent clear

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the remote-ping-agent clear command to clear all agents on the remote-ping client.

Examples

# Clear all currently configured agents.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping-agent clear

remote-ping-agent enable

Syntax

remote-ping-agent enable
undo remote-ping-agent enable

1-23
View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the remote-ping-agent enable command to enable the remote-ping client function.
Use the undo remote-ping-agent enable command to disable the remote-ping client function.
By default, the remote-ping client function is disabled.
You can perform tests only after you enable the remote-ping client function.
Related commands: remote-ping-server enable.

Examples

# Enable remote-ping client.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping-agent enable

remote-ping-agent max-requests

Syntax

remote-ping-agent max-requests max-number

undo remote-ping-agent max-requests

View

System view

Parameters

password: Password for logging in to an FTP server, a string of 1 to 32 characters.

Description

Use the password command to configure a password for logging in to the FTP server.
Use the undo password command to remove the configured password.
By default, the password for logging in to the FTP server is not configured.
Related commands: username, ftp-operation.

1-26
z To perform an FTP test successfully, the configured password must be consistent with the FTP
user password configured on the server.
z This command applies to FTP tests only.

Examples

# Set the password for logging into the FTP server as remote-ping in an FTP test.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator ftp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] test-type ftp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] password remote-ping

probe-failtimes

Syntax

probe-failtimes times
undo probe-failtimes

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

times: Number of consecutive failed probes, in the range of 1 to 15.

Description

Use the probe-failtimes command to configure the number of consecutive times the probe fails before
the switch sends out a trap message.
Use the undo probe-failtimes command to restore the default.
By default, the switch sends a trap about probe failure each time when a probe fails.

Examples

# Configure the switch to send a trap after the probe in an ICMP test fails for three consecutive times.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] probe-failtimes 3

1-27
send-trap

Syntax

send-trap { all | { probefailure | testcomplete | testfailure }* }

undo send-trap { all | { probefailure | testcomplete | testfailure }* }

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

probefailure: Sends a trap when a probe fails.

testcomplete: Sends a trap after a test is finished.
testfailure: Sends a trap when a test fails.
all: Sends a trap when any of the above-mentioned scenarios occurs.

Description

Use the send-trap command to enable debugging for a trap.

Use the undo send-trap command to disable debugging for a trap.
By default, no trap is output.

Examples

# Send a trap message after an ICMP test is finished.

sendpacket passroute

Syntax

sendpacket passroute
undo sendpacket passroute

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the sendpacket passroute command to enable routing table bypass.

Use the undo sendpacket passroute command to disable routing table bypass.
By default, routing table bypass is disabled.

1-28
With routing table bypass, a remote host can bypass the normal routing tables and send ICMP packets
directly to a host on an attached network. If the host is not on a directly connected network, an error is
returned. You can use this function when pinging a local host on an interface that has no route defined.

Examples

# Bypass routing table when sending ICMP packets.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] sendpacket passroute

source-interface

Syntax

source-interface interface-type interface-number

Syntax

statistics { interval interval | max-group number }

undo statistics { interval | max-group }

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

interval: Statistics interval, in the range 1 to 1440, in minutes, and defaults to 60 minutes.
number: Number of groups of statistics information, in the range 1 to 100 and defaults to 2.

Description

Use the statistics command to configure the statistics interval and the maximum number of the groups
of the retained statistics information according to the configuration.
Use the undo statistics command to remove your configuration and restore the default.
By default, the statistics interval for a test is once every 60 minutes and up to two groups of statistics
information can be retained.
Delete all statistics information when internet parameter changes.

Examples

# Set the statistics interval to 120 minutes and the maximum number of statistics groups to three.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] statistic interval 120
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] statistic max-group 3

statistics keep-time

Syntax

statistics keep-time keep-time

undo statistics keep-time

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

keep-time: Retaining time of the test statistics, which is in the range 1 to 1440 in minutes and defaults to
120 minutes.

1-32
Description

Use the statistics keep-time command to configure the retaining time of the test statistics.
Use the undo statistics keep-time command to remove your configuration and restore the default.

Examples

# Configure the retaining time of the test statistics to 180 minutes.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] statistics keep-time 180

test-time begin

Syntax

test-time begin { hh:mm :ss [ yyyy/mm/dd ] | now } lifetime lifetime

undo test-time

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

hh:mm:ss: Test start time.

yyyy/mm/dd: Test start time, yyyy is the year in the range 2000 to 2099, mm is the month in the range 1
to 12 and dd is the date in the range 1 to 31.
now: Specifies a test that starts from now.
lifetime: Lasting time of a test, in the range 1 to 2147483647 in seconds.

Description

Use the test-time begin command to configure the start time and the lasting time of a test.
Use the undo test-time command to stop the test and remove the configuration.
z When the test is not performed, the configuration information you input is saved, including test start
time and lasting time.
z If you set a start time earlier than the current system time or the test lasting time you configured is
0, the test will not be performed.
z When a test is being performed, you cannot perform any configuration; otherwise the system
prompts error.
z After you configure this command, if the test-related parameters are not complete, the system
prompts configuration error.
z The test starts until you execute the test-time begin command.
z If you set a start time earlier than the current system time, when you modify the current system time,
the test will not be performed.
z If lifetime of the test group expires, the test will stop and when you modify the current system time,
the test will not be performed.

1-33
Examples

# Set the test to start from 14:03 and last 3600 seconds.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] test-time begin 14:03:00 lifetime 3600

test-type

Syntax

test-type type [ codec codec-value ]

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

type: Test type. It can be any of the following keywords:

z dhcp: Indicates a DHCP test.
z dns: Indicates a DNS test.
z ftp: Indicates an FTP test.
z http: Indicates an HTTP test.
z icmp: Indicates an ICMP test.
z jitter: Analyzes the delay change of UDP packet transmission.
z snmpquery: Indicates an SNMP test.
z tcpprivate: Indicates a TCP test on a specified (unknown) port.
z tcppublic: Indicates a TCP test on port 7.
z udpprivate: Indicates a UDP test on a specified (unknown) port.
z udppublic: Indicates a UDP test on port 7.
codec-value: Coding type for a voice test, which can be configured for a Jitter test and can be the
following keywords:
z g711a: Specifies coding type to G.711 A-Law.
z g711u: Specifies coding type to G.711 muHmm-Law.
z g729a: Specifies coding type to G.729A-Law.

Description

Use the test-type command to configure the test type.

The default test type is icmp.

If you modify the test type, the parameter configuration, test results and history records of the original
test type will be cleared.

1-34
Examples

# Configure the test type as an FTP test.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator ftp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] test-type ftp

test-enable

Syntax

test-enable
undo test-enable

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

None

Parameters

value: ToS value in a remote-ping test packet header, in the range of 0 to 255.

Description

Use the tos command to configure the ToS value in a remote-ping test packet header.
Use the undo tos command to remove the ToS value in a remote-ping test packet header.
By default, no ToS value is configured.

This command does not apply to DHCP tests.

Examples

# Set the ToS value in the header of an ICMP test packet to 1.

ttl

Syntax

ttl number
undo ttl

1-37
View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

number: Time to live (TTL) value or lifetime of remote-ping test packets. It is in the range 1 to 255 and
defaults to 20.

Description

Use the ttl command to configure TTL of remote-ping test packets.

Use the undo ttl command to restore the default TTL of remote-ping test packets.
TTL is actually a hop count limit on how far a test packet can travel on a network. In a ping command, it
is defined using the argument “-h”.

z This command applies to all types of tests except for DHCP and tracert tests.
z The sendpacket passroute command voids the ttl command.

Examples

# Set the TTL of remote-ping ICMP test packets to 16.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator icmp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-icmp] ttl 16

username

Syntax

username name
undo username

View

remote-ping test group view

Parameters

name: Username for logging in to an FTP server, a string of 1 to 32 characters.

Description

Use the username command to configure a username for logging in to the FTP server.
Use the undo username command to remove the configured username.
By default, no username for logging in to the FTP server is configured.
Related commands: password, ftp-operation.

1-38
z To perform an FTP test successfully, the configured username must be consistent with the
username configured on the FTP server.
z This command applies to FTP tests only.

Examples

# Configure the username for logging into the FTP server in an FTP test as administrator.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping administrator ftp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] test-type ftp
[Sysname-remote-ping-administrator-ftp] username administrator

remote-ping Server Commands

z A remote-ping server is required for only jitter, TCP, and UDP tests.
z You are not recommended to configure remote-ping jitter/UDP/TCP servers on ports 1 through
1023 (well-known ports); otherwise, remote-ping probes may fail or the services corresponding to
these ports may be unavailable.

remote-ping-server enable

Syntax

remote-ping-server enable
undo remote-ping-server enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the remote-ping-server enable command to enable the remote-ping server function.
Use the undo remote-ping-server enable command to disable the remote-ping server function.
By default, the remote-ping server function is disabled.

1-39
Related commands: remote-ping-agent enable, remote-ping-server tcpconnect,
remote-ping-server udpecho.

Examples

# Enable a remote-ping server.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping-server enable

remote-ping-server tcpconnect

Syntax

remote-ping-server tcpconnect ip-address port-number

undo remote-ping-server tcpconnect ip-address port-number

View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address specified for a TCP listening service on the remote-ping server.
port-number: Port number specified for a TCP listening service on the remote-ping server. The value
ranges from 1 to 50000. It is not recommended to use some special ports (that is, those used for fixed
functions, such as port 1701). Otherwise, the remote-ping test may fail.

Description

Use the remote-ping-server tcpconnect command to create a TCP listening service on the
remote-ping server.
Use the undo remote-ping-server tcpconnect command to remove the created TCP listening
service.
When performing a TCP connection test on a specified port of a remote-ping client, you must create a
TCP listening on the remote-ping server if the server is an switch; otherwise, the TCP test may fail.
Related commands: remote-ping-server enable.

Examples

# Enable TCP listening, using 169.254.10.2 as the IP address and 9000 as the port number.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping-server tcpconnect 169.254.10.2 9000

remote-ping-server udpecho

Syntax

remote-ping-server udpecho ip-address port-number

undo remote-ping-server udpecho ip-address port-number

1-40
View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address from which a remote-ping server performs UDP listening.

port-number: Port from which a remote-ping server performs UDP listening. The value ranges from 1 to
49999. In is not recommended to use some special ports (that is, those used for fixed functions, such as
port 1701). Otherwise, the remote-ping test may fail.

Description

Use the remote-ping-server udpecho command to enable UDP listening on a remote-ping server.
Use the undo remote-ping-server udpecho command to disable UDP listening.
When performing a jitter test or a UDP connection test on a specified port of a remote-ping client, you
must enable UDP listening on the server if an Switch 4200G serves as a remote-ping server; otherwise,
the test may fail.
Related commands: remote-ping-server enable.

Examples

# Enable UDP listening, using 169.254.10.3 as the IP address and 9000 as the port number.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[Sysname] remote-ping-server udpecho 169.254.10.3 9000

1-41
Table of Contents

1 DNS Configuration Commands················································································································1-1

DNS Configuration Commands···············································································································1-1
display dns domain··························································································································1-1
display dns dynamic-host ················································································································1-1
display dns server····························································································································1-2
display ip host··································································································································1-3
dns domain ······································································································································1-4
dns resolve ······································································································································1-5
dns server········································································································································1-5
ip host ··············································································································································1-6
nslookup type ··································································································································1-6
reset dns dynamic-host ···················································································································1-7

i
1 DNS Configuration Commands

DNS Configuration Commands

display dns domain

Syntax

display dns domain [ dynamic ]

View

Any view

Parameters

dynamic: Displays DNS suffixes dynamically assigned through DHCP or other protocols.

Description

Use the display dns domain command to display the DNS suffixes.
Related commands: dns domain.

Examples

# Display DNS suffixes

<Sysname> display dns domain
No Domain-name
0 aaa.com

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display dns domain command

Field Description
No Sequence number
Domain-name DNS suffix

display dns dynamic-host

Syntax

display dns dynamic-host

View

Any view

Parameters

None

1-1
Description

Use the display dns dynamic-host command to display the information in the dynamic domain name
cache.

Examples

# Display the information in the dynamic domain name cache.

<Sysname> display dns dynamic-host
No Domain-name ---> Ipaddress TTL Alias
1 lm.test.abc 172.1.223.1 3564

No Domain-name <--- Ipaddress TTL Alias

1 aaaa 172.1.223.2 3594

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display dns dynamic-host command

Field Description
No Sequence number
Domain-name Domain name

Ipaddress IP address of the corresponding domain name

TTL Time for which an entry is cached in seconds.
Alias Alias for the domain name. There can be four aliases at most.

DNS resolution has two types:

--->
Forward resolution: domain name--->IP address
<---
Reverse resolution: IP address--->domain name

display dns server

Syntax

display dns server [ dynamic ]

View

Any view

Parameters

dynamic: Displays the DNS Server information dynamically obtained through DHCP or other protocols.

Description

Use the display dns server command to display the DNS Server information.
Related commands: dns server.

Examples

# Display the DNS Server information.

<Sysname> display dns server
Type:

1-2
D:Dynamic S:Static

IPv4 DNS Servers :

Domain-server Type IP Address
1 S 192.168.0.4

IPv6 DNS Servers :

Table 1-3 Description on the fields of the display dns server command

Field Description
Type of the DNS server. S indicates the DNS server is specified
Type manually, while D indicates the DNS server information is obtained
dynamically through DHCP or other protocols.
IPv4 DNS Servers IPv4 DNS server
IPv6 DNS Servers IPv6 DNS server
Number of the DNS server, which is assigned automatically by the
Domain-server system and starts from 1. Such numbering for IPv4 DNS servers is
independent of that for IPv6 ones.

For details about IPv6 DNS, refer to IPv6 Management Command.

display ip host

Syntax

display ip host

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ip host command to display mappings between host names and IP addresses in the
static DNS database.

Examples

# Display mappings between host names and IP addresses in the static DNS database.
<Sysname> display ip host
Host Age Flags Address
host.com 0 static 192.168.0.38

1-3
Table 1-4 Description on the fields of the display ip host command

Field Description
Host Host name
Time to live. 0 means that a static entry is never outdated.
Age You can only manually remove the mappings between host names and IP
addresses.
Indicates the type of mappings between host names and IP addresses, static
Flags or dynamic
Static indicates static mapping between host names and IP addresses
Address IP address of a host

dns domain

Syntax

dns domain domain-name

undo dns domain [ domain-name ]

View

System view

Parameters

domain-name: DNS suffix, a string of 1 to 60 characters which can be letters, numbers, hyphens (-),
underscores (_), and dots (.).

Description

Use the dns domain command to configure a DNS suffix. The system can automatically add the suffix
to part of the domain name you entered for resolution.
Use the undo dns domain command to delete the configured DNS suffix.
No DNS suffix is configured by default.
You can configure a maximum of 10 DNS suffixes. You must enter the DNS suffix before deleting it.
Otherwise, all configured DNS suffixes are deleted.
Related commands: display dns domain.

The DNS feature supported by S4200G series Ethernet switches should be used together with a DNS
server. DNS implementations vary with DNS servers. For example, S4200G serial Ethernet switches
support a domain name containing “_”, while a Windows 2000 Server may not be able to resolve the
domain name.

1-4
Examples

# Configure com as a DNS suffix.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dns domain com

dns resolve

Syntax

dns resolve
undo dns resolve

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the dns resolve command to enable dynamic domain name resolution.
Use the undo dns resolve command to disable dynamic domain name resolution.
Dynamic domain name resolution is disabled by default.

Examples

# Enable dynamic domain name resolution.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dns resolve

dns server

Syntax

dns server ip-address

undo dns server [ ip-address ]

Syntax

reset dns dynamic-host

View

User view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the reset dns dynamic-host command to clear information in the dynamic domain name cache.
Related commands: display dns dynamic-host.

Examples

# Clear the information in the dynamic domain name cache.

<Sysname> reset dns dynamic-host

1-7
Table of Contents

1 Smart Link Configuration Commands·····································································································1-1

Smart Link Configuration Commands ·····································································································1-1
display smart-link flush ····················································································································1-1
display smart-link group···················································································································1-2
flush enable control-vlan··················································································································1-3
link-aggregation group·····················································································································1-3
port···················································································································································1-4
port smart-link group························································································································1-5
reset smart-link packets counter ·····································································································1-6
smart-link flush enable·····················································································································1-6
smart-link group·······························································································································1-7

2 Monitor Link Configuration Commands··································································································2-1

Monitor Link Configuration Commands···································································································2-1
display monitor-link group················································································································2-1
link-aggregation group·····················································································································2-1
monitor-link group····························································································································2-2
port···················································································································································2-3
port monitor-link group·····················································································································2-4
smart-link group·······························································································································2-5

i
1 Smart Link Configuration Commands

Smart Link Configuration Commands

display smart-link flush

Syntax

display smart-link flush

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display smart-link flush command to view the information about how the Smart Link device
processes flush messages.

Examples

# Display the information about how the Smart Link device processes flush messages.
<Sysname> display smart-link flush
Flush interface :GigabitEthernet1/0/1

Count of flush packets received : 1

Time of last flush packet received : 22:52:23 2006/04/01
Source MAC of last flush packet received : 000f-e20f-5566
Device ID of last flush packet received : 000f-e20f-5566
Control VLAN ID of last flush packet received : 1

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display smart-link flush command

Field Description
Interface that receives the latest legal flush
Flush interface
message
Count of flush packets received Total number of flush messages received
Time when the last legal flush message is
Time of last flush packet received
received
Source MAC address in the last legal flush
Source MAC of last flush packet received
message received
Bridge MAC address of the device from which
Device ID of last flush packet received
the last legal flush message was received

1-1
Field Description
Control VLAN ID in the last legal flush message
Control VLAN ID of last flush packet received
received

A legal flush message refers to the message whose control VLAN ID is consistent with the receiving
control VLAN ID configured on the receiving port.

display smart-link group

Syntax

display smart-link group { group-id | all }

View

Any view

Parameters

group-id: Smart link group ID, in the range of 1 to 24.

all: Displays the information about all smart link groups.

Description

Use the display smart-link group command to display the information about the specific smart link
group or all the smart link groups.

Examples

# Display the information about smart link group 1.

<Sysname> display smart-link group 1
Smart Link Group 1 information:
Device ID: 000f-e212-3456 Control-VLAN ID: 1
Member Role State Flush-count Last-flush-time
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 MASTER ACTVIE 1 16:37:20 2006/04/21
AGG-1 SLAVE STANDBY 2 17:45:20 2006/04/21

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display smart-link group command

Field Description
Member Member of the smart link group
Role Port role of a smart link group member: master or slave.
Port status of a smart link group member when the link of this member port
Status
is up: active or standby.

Flush-count Number of sent flush messages

1-2
Field Description
Time when the last flush message is sent. If no flush message is sent, “NA”
Last-flush-time
will be displayed.

flush enable control-vlan

Syntax

flush enable control-vlan vlan-id

undo flush enable

View

Smart link group view

Parameters

vlan-id: Control VLAN ID, in the range of 1 to 4,094.

Description

Use the flush enable control-vlan command to enable the function of sending flush messages in the
specified control VLAN.
Use the undo flush enable control-vlan command to disable the function of sending flush messages
to the specified control VLAN.
By default, no control VLAN is specified.

Examples

# Configure to send flush messages within control VLAN 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] smart-link group 1
[Sysname-smlk-group1] flush enable control-vlan 1

link-aggregation group

Syntax

link-aggregation group group-id { master | slave }

undo link-aggregation group group-id

View

Smart link group view

Parameters

group-id: Link aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 50. Note that the specified link aggregation
group can only be a static or manual one.
master: Specifies the specified link aggregation group as the master port of the smart link group.
slave: Specifies the specified link aggregation group as the slave port of the smart link group.

1-3
Description

Use the link-aggregation group command to assign a link aggregation group to the smart link group.
Use the undo link-aggregation group command to remove the specified link aggregation group from
the smart link group.

Because Smart Link and STP cannot be enabled on an Ethernet port at the same time, you must make
sure that STP is disabled on the port before assigning the port to a smart link group.

Examples

# Configure link aggregation group 8 as the slave port of smart link group 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] smart-link group 1
[Sysname-smlk-group1] link-aggregation group 8 slave

port

Syntax

port interface-type interface-number { master | slave }

undo port interface-type interface-number

View

Smart link group view

Parameters

interface-type: Port type.

interface-number: Port number.
master: Specifies the specified port as the master port of the smart link group.
slave: Specifies the specified port as the slave port of the smart link group.

Description

Use the port command to assign the specified port to the smart link group.
Use the undo port command to remove the specified port from the smart link group.
The port you specified in this command cannot be a link aggregation group member port.
Besides assigning single ports to a smart link group, you can assign a link aggregation group (static or
manual, but not dynamic) to a smart link group with the link-aggregation group command in smart link
group view.

1-4
Because Smart Link and STP cannot be enabled on an Ethernet port at the same time, you must make
sure that STP is disabled on the port before assigning the port to a smart link group.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/6 as the slave port of smart link group 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] smart-link group 1
[Sysname-smlk-group1] port GigabitEthernet 1/0/6 slave

port smart-link group

Syntax

port smart-link group group-id { master | slave }

undo port smart-link group group-id

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

group-id: Smart link group ID, in the range of 1 to 24.

master: Specifies the port as the master port of the smart link group.
slave: Specifies the port as the slave port of the smart link group.

Description

Use the port smart-link group command to assign the current port to a smart link group.
Use the undo port smart-link group command to remove the current port from the specified smart link
group.
The port where you configure the command cannot be a link aggregation group member port.
Besides assigning single ports to a smart link group, you can assign a link aggregation group (static or
manual, but not dynamic) to a smart link group with the link-aggregation group command in smart link
group view.

Because Smart Link and STP cannot be enabled on an Ethernet port at the same time, you must make
sure that STP is disabled on the port before assigning the port to a smart link group.

1-5
Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/3 as the master port of smart link group 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/3
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/3] port smart-link group 1 master

reset smart-link packets counter

Syntax

reset smart-link packets counter

View

User view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the reset smart-link packets counter command to clear the flush message statistics of Smart
Link.

Examples

# Clear the flush message statistics of Smart Link.

<Sysname> reset smart-link packets counter

smart-link flush enable

Syntax

z In Ethernet port view:

smart-link flush enable control-vlan vlan-id
undo smart-link flush enable
z In system view:
smart-link flush enable control-vlan vlan-id port interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ]
undo smart-link flush enable port interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ]

View

Ethernet port view, system view

Parameters

vlan-id: Control VLAN ID, in the range of 1 to 4,094.

1-6
Description

Use the smart-link flush enable control-vlan command to enable the current/specified port to
process flush messages received on the specified control VLAN.
Use the undo smart-link flush enable command to disable the port from processing flush messages.
z The command executed in Ethernet port view has effect on the current port only.
z The command executed in system view has effect on the specified port only.
By default, no control VLAN is specified.
If you configure different control VLANs on the same port, only the last one takes effect.

The VLAN configured as a control VLAN for sending or receiving flush messages must exist. You
cannot directly remove the control VLAN. When a dynamic VLAN is configured as a control VLAN for
the smart link group, this VLAN will become a static VLAN, and related prompt information is displayed.

Examples

# Enable GigabitEthernet 1/0/4 to process flush messages received from control VLAN 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/4
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/4] smart-link flush enable control-vlan 1

# Enable GigabitEthernet 1/0/5 through GigabitEthernet 1/0/10 to process flush messages received
from control VLAN 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] smart-link flush enable control-vlan 1 port GigabitEthernet 1/0/5 to
GigabitEthernet 1/0/10

smart-link group

Syntax

smart-link group group-id

undo smart-link group group-id

View

System view

Parameters

group-id: Smart link group ID, in the range of 1 to 24.

1-7
Description

Use the smart-link group command to create a smart link group and enter smart link group view. If the
specified smart link group exists, this command leads you into smart link group view directly.
Use the undo smart-link group command to remove the specified smart link group.
After creating a smart link group, you must configure member ports for this smart link group.
Related commands: port smart-link group, link-aggregation group, port.

Make sure that the smart link group has no members before executing the undo smart-link group
command.

Examples

# Create a smart link group.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] smart-link group 1
New Smart Link Group has been created.
[Sysname-smlk-group1]

1-8
2 Monitor Link Configuration Commands

Monitor Link Configuration Commands

display monitor-link group

Syntax

display monitor-link group { group-id | all }

View

Any view

Parameters

group-id: Monitor link group ID, ranging 1 to 24.

all: Specifies all the monitor link groups.

Description

Use the display monitor-link group command to display monitor link group information.

Examples

# Display the information about monitor link group 1.

<Sysname> display monitor-link group 1
Monitor link group 1 information:
Member Role Status Last-up-time Last-down-time
----------------------------------------------------------------------
SMLK-2 UPLINK UP 16:37:20 2006/4/21 16:37:20 2006/4/20
AGG-1 DOWNLINK UP

Table 2-1 Description on the fields of the display monitor-link group command

Field Description
Member Member of the monitor link group
Role Role of monitor link group member port: UPLINK or DOWNLINK
Status Status of monitor link group member port: UP or DOWN
Last-up-time Last time the port is up
Last-down-time Last time the port is down

link-aggregation group

Syntax

link-aggregation group group-id { uplink | downlink }

2-1
undo link-aggregation group group-id

View

Monitor link group view

Parameters

group-id: Link aggregation group ID, ranging from 1 to 50 (A link aggregation group can be a manual or
static link aggregation group only).
uplink: Specifies the specified link aggregation group as the uplink port of the monitor link group
downlink: Specifies the specified link aggregation group as the downlink port of the monitor link group

Description

Use the link-aggregation group command to configure the specified link aggregation group as a
monitor link group member.
Use the undo link-aggregation group command to remove the specified link aggregation group from
the current monitor link group.
In Monitor Link, a monitor link group member can be a single port, a manual or static link aggregation
group, but not a dynamic link aggregation group. Uplink port can also be a smart link group.
Use this command only on the link aggregation groups that are not smart link group members.

A port or a link aggregation group cannot serve as a member port for two smart link groups. On the
other hand, a port or a link aggregation group cannot serve as a member of a smart link group and a
monitor link group at the same time. However, a smart link group can serve as the uplink member port
of a monitor link group.

Examples

# Configure link aggregation group 8 as the downlink port of the monitor link group.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] monitor-link group 1
[Sysname-mtlk-group1] link-aggregation group 8 downlink

monitor-link group

Syntax

monitor-link group group-id

undo monitor-link group group-id

View

System view

2-2
Parameters

group-id: Monitor link group ID, ranging from 1 to 24.

Description

Use the monitor-link group command to create a monitor link group and enter monitor link group view.
If the monitor link group has been created, you enter the monitor link group view directly.
Use the undo monitor-link group command to remove a monitor link group.
After the monitor link group is configured, member ports of the monitor link group need to be configured.
Related commands: port monitor-link group, link-aggregation group, smart-link group, port.

Make sure that the monitor link group has no members before executing the undo monitor-link group
command.

Examples

# Create a monitor link group.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] monitor-link group 1
New Monitor Link Group has been created.
[Sysname-mtlk-group1]

port

Syntax

port interface-type interface-number { uplink | downlink }

undo port interface-type interface-number

View

Monitor link group view

Parameters

interface-type: Port type.

interface-number: Port number.
uplink: Specifies the specified port as the uplink port of the monitor link group
downlink: Specifies the specified port as the downlink port of the monitor link group

Description

Use the port command to configure the specified port as a member of the monitor link group.
Use the undo port command to remove the specified port from the current monitor link group.

2-3
In Monitor Link, a monitor link group member can be a single port, a static link aggregation group, but
not a dynamic link aggregation group. The uplink port of a monitor link group can also be a smart link
group.
Do not use this command on member ports of a link aggregation group or a smart link group.

A port or a link aggregation group cannot serve as a member port for two smart link groups. On the
other hand, a port or a link aggregation group cannot serve as a member for a smart link group and a
monitor link group at the same time. However, a smart link group can serve as the uplink member port
of a monitor link group.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/7 as a downlink port of the monitor link group

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] monitor-link group 1
[Sysname-mtlk-group1] port GigabitEthernet 1/0/7 downlink

port monitor-link group

Syntax

port monitor-link group group-id{ uplink | downlink }

undo port monitor-link group group-id

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

group-id: Monitor link group ID, ranging 1 to 24.

uplink: Specifies the port as the uplink port of the specified monitor link group
downlink: Specifies the port as the downlink port of the specified monitor link group

Description

Use the port monitor-link group command to configure the current port as a member of the specified
monitor link group.
Use the undo port monitor-link group command to remove the current port from the specified monitor
link group.
In Monitor Link, a monitor link group member can be a single port, a static link aggregation group, but
not a dynamic link aggregation group. Uplink port can also be a smart link group.
Do not use this command on member ports of a link aggregation group or a smart link group.

2-4
A port or a link aggregation group cannot serve as a member port for two smart link groups. On the
other hand, a port or a link aggregation group cannot serve as a member for a smart link group and a
monitor link group at the same time. However, a smart link group can serve as the uplink member port
of a monitor link group.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/8 as a downlink port of monitor link group 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/8
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/8] port monitor-link group 1 downlink

smart-link group

Syntax

smart-link group group-id uplink

undo smart-link group group-id

View

Monitor link group view

Parameters

group-id: Smart link group ID, ranging 1 to 24.

uplink: Specifies the specified smart link group as the uplink port of the monitor link group

Description

Use the smart-link group command to configure the specified smart link group as the uplink port of the
monitor link group.
Use the undo smart-link group command to remove the configuration.
A smart link group can belong to only one monitor link group and can be configured only as an uplink
port of the monitor link group.

Examples

# Configure smart link group 1 as the uplink port of monitor link group 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] monitor-link group 1
[Sysname-mtlk-group1] smart-link group 1 uplink

2-5
Table of Contents

1 IPv6 Configuration Commands ················································································································1-1

Basic IPv6 Configuration Commands ·····································································································1-1
display dns ipv6 dynamic-host ········································································································1-1
display ipv6 fib ·································································································································1-2
display ipv6 host ······························································································································1-3
display ipv6 interface ·······················································································································1-4
display ipv6 neighbors ·····················································································································1-6
display ipv6 neighbors count ···········································································································1-8
display ipv6 route-table····················································································································1-8
display ipv6 socket ························································································································1-10
display ipv6 statistics ·····················································································································1-11
display tcp ipv6 statistics ···············································································································1-14
display tcp ipv6 status ···················································································································1-16
display udp ipv6 statistics ··············································································································1-17
dns server ipv6 ······························································································································1-18
ipv6 address ··································································································································1-19
ipv6 address auto link-local ···········································································································1-19
ipv6 address eui-64 ·······················································································································1-20
ipv6 address link-local ···················································································································1-22
ipv6 host ········································································································································1-22
ipv6 icmp-error·······························································································································1-23
ipv6 nd dad attempts ·····················································································································1-24
ipv6 nd hop-limit ····························································································································1-24
ipv6 nd ns retrans-timer·················································································································1-25
ipv6 nd nud reachable-time ···········································································································1-25
ipv6 neighbor ·································································································································1-26
ipv6 neighbors max-learning-num ·································································································1-27
ipv6 route-static ·····························································································································1-27
reset dns ipv6 dynamic-host··········································································································1-28
reset ipv6 neighbors ······················································································································1-29
reset ipv6 statistics ························································································································1-29
reset tcp ipv6 statistics ··················································································································1-30
reset udp ipv6 statistics ·················································································································1-30
tcp ipv6 timer fin-timeout ···············································································································1-31
tcp ipv6 timer syn-timeout ·············································································································1-31
tcp ipv6 window ·····························································································································1-32

2 IPv6 Application Configuration Commands ···························································································2-1

IPv6 Application Configuration Commands ····························································································2-1
ping ipv6 ··········································································································································2-1
telnet ipv6 ········································································································································2-3
tftp ipv6 ············································································································································2-3
tracert ipv6·······································································································································2-4

i
1 IPv6 Configuration Commands

Basic IPv6 Configuration Commands

display dns ipv6 dynamic-host

Syntax

display dns ipv6 dynamic-host

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display dns ipv6 dynamic-host command to display IPv6 dynamic domain name information
in the cache, including the domain name, IPv6 address, and TTL of the DNS entries.
You can use the reset dns ipv6 dynamic-host command to clear all IPv6 dynamic domain name
information from the cache.

Examples

# Display IPv6 dynamic domain name information in the cache.

<Sysname> display dns ipv6 dynamic-host
No. Domain-name IPv6 Address TTL
1 aaa 2001::2 6

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display dns ipv6 dynamic-host command

Field Description
No. Sequence number
Domain-name Domain name
IPv6 Address IPv6 address of the corresponding domain name

TTL Time-to-live of the domain name in the cache in seconds

1-1
When you use the display dns ipv6 dynamic-host command to check the IPv6 dynamic domain
names in the cache, the system will display the first 21 characters of the domain names if they contain
more than 21 characters. This is because the domain name displayed in the Domain-name field can be
up to 21 characters in length.

display ipv6 fib

Syntax

display ipv6 fib

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ipv6 fib command to display all the IPv6 FIB entries.
The switch looks up a matching IPv6 FIB entry for forwarding an IPv6 packet.

Examples

# Display all the IPv6 FIB entries.

<Sysname> display ipv6 fib
FIB Table:
Total number of Routes : 5
Flag:
U:Useable G:Gateway H:Host B:Blackhole D:Dynamic S:Static
Destination: ::1 PrefixLength : 128
NextHop : ::1 Flag : HU
TimeStamp : Date- 5/7/2006, Time- 14:35:32
Interface : InLoopBack0
Destination: FE80:: PrefixLength : 10
NextHop : :: Flag : BU
TimeStamp : Date- 5/7/2006, Time- 14:35:32
Interface : NULL0
Destination: 2008:: PrefixLength : 64
NextHop : 2008::5500 Flag : U
TimeStamp : Date- 5/7/2006, Time- 14:35:32
Interface : Vlan-interface1
Destination: 2008::5500 PrefixLength : 128
NextHop : ::1 Flag : HU
TimeStamp : Date- 5/7/2006, Time- 14:35:32
Interface : InLoopBack0

1-2
Destination: 2001:: PrefixLength : 64
NextHop : 2008::3610 Flag : GSU
TimeStamp : Date- 5/7/2006, Time- 14:35:32
Interface : Vlan-interface1

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display ipv6 fib command

Field Description
Total number of Routes Total number of routes in the FIB
Destination Destination address to which a packet is forwarded
PrefixLength Prefix length of the destination address
Next hop address when a packet is forwarded to the
NextHop
destination
Route flag:
“U” — Usable route
“G” — Gateway route
Flag “H” — Host route
“B” — Blackhole route
“D” — Dynamic route
“S” — Static route
TimeStamp Generation time of an FIB entry
Interface Interface from which a packet is forwarded

display ipv6 host

Syntax

display ipv6 host

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ipv6 host command to display the mapping between host name and IPv6 address.
Related commands: ipv6 host.

Examples

# Display the mapping between host name and IPv6 address.

<Sysname> display ipv6 host
Host Age Flags IPv6Address (es)
SWB 0 static 2002::1

1-3
Table 1-3 Description on the fields of the display ipv6 host command

Field Description
Host Host name
Time for the entry to live, displayed as 0 in the case of static
Age
configuration.
Flag indicating whether the entry is configured statically or
Flags
acquired dynamically
IPv6Address (es) IPv6 address corresponding to a host name

display ipv6 interface

Syntax

display ipv6 interface [ interface-type interface-number | brief ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-type: Interface type.

interface-number: Interface number.
brief: Displays the brief IPv6 information of an interface.

Description

Use the display ipv6 interface command to display the IPv6 information of a specified interface.
If no interface is specified, the IPv6 information of all interfaces for which IPv6 addresses can be
configured is displayed; if only interface-type is specified, the IPv6 information of the interfaces of the
specified type for which IPv6 addresses can be configured is displayed; if interface-type
interface-number is specified, the IPv6 information of the specified interface is displayed.
If the brief keyword is specified, the brief IPv6 information of the interface is displayed.

Examples

# Display the IPv6 information of a VLAN interface.

<Sysname> display ipv6 interface Vlan-interface 1
Vlan-interface1 current state :UP
Line protocol current state :UP
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::2E0:FCFF:FE00:C
Global unicast address(es):
2008::5500, subnet is 2008::/64
Joined group address(es):
FF02::1:FF00:5500
FF02::1:FF00:C
FF02::1
MTU is 1500 bytes
ND DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 5

1-4
ND reachable time is 30000 milliseconds
ND retransmit interval is 1000 milliseconds
Hosts use stateless autoconfig for addresses

Table 1-4 Description on the fields of the display ipv6 interface command

Field Description
VLAN interface link state:
z Administratively DOWN: Indicates the VLAN interface is
administratively down; that is, the interface is shut down using the
Vlan-interface1 current shutdown command.
state z DOWN: Indicates the VLAN interface is administratively up but its
physical state is down; that is, no ports in the VLAN are up, which
may be caused by a link failure.
z UP: Indicates the administrative and physical states of the VLAN
interface are both up.
Link layer protocol state of an interface:
z DOWN: Indicates the link layer protocol state of the VLAN
Line protocol current state interface is down, generally because no IP address is configured.
z UP: Indicates the link layer protocol state of the VLAN interface is
up.
IPv6 forwarding state of an interface (after an IPv6 address is
IPv6 is enabled configured for an interface, IPv6 is automatically enabled on it; IPv6 is
enabled in the example)
link-local address Link-local address configured on an interface

Global unicast address(es) Aggregatable global unicast address configured on an interface

Joined group address(es) Address of the multicast group that an interface joins
MTU Maximum transmission unit of an interface

Number of duplicate address detection (DAD) attempts, with DAD

enabled
z If DAD is enabled, the number of neighbor request messages is
ND DAD is enabled, also displayed (configured by using the ipv6 nd dad attempts
number of DAD attempts command)
z If DAD is disabled, “ND DAD is disabled” is displayed. (You can
set the number of neighbor request messages for DAD to 0 to
disable this function.)
Neighbor reachable time (which can be configured by using the ipv6
ND reachable time
nd nud reachable-time command)
Interval for retransmitting a neighbor solicitation (NS) message
ND retransmit interval (which can be configured by using the ipv6 nd ns retrans-timer
command)
Hosts use stateless Hosts use stateless auto-configuration mode to acquire IPv6
autoconfig for addresses addresses

#: View the brief IPv6 information of all interfaces.

<Sysname> display ipv6 interface brief
*down: administratively down
(s): spoofing
Interface Physical Protocol IPv6 Address
Vlan-interface1 up up 2008::5500

1-5
Table 1-5 Description on the fields of the display ipv6 interface brief command

Field Description
*down: administratively The interface is down, that is, the interface is disabled by using the
down shutdown command.
Spoofing attribute of the interface, that is, the link protocol state of the
(s) : spoofing interface is up, but the link does not exist, or the link is established on
demand, instead of being permanent.
Interface Name of the interface
Interface link state:
z *down: Indicates the VLAN interface is administratively down; that
is, the interface is shut down using the shutdown command.
Physical z down: Indicates the VLAN interface is administratively up but its
physical state is down; that is, no port in the VLAN is up, which
may be caused by a link failure.
z up: Indicates the administrative and physical states of the VLAN
interface are both up.
Link protocol state of an interface
z down: Indicates the link layer protocol state of the VLAN interface
Protocol is down, generally because no IP address is configured.
z up: Indicates the link layer protocol state of the VLAN interface is
up.
IPv6 address of the interface (If no address is configured for the
IPv6 Address
interface, “Unassigned” will be displayed.)

display ipv6 neighbors

Syntax

display ipv6 neighbors { ipv6-address | all | dynamic | static | interface interface-type

interface-number | vlan vlan-id } [ | { begin | exclude | include } regular-expression ]

View

Any view

Parameters

ipv6-address: IPv6 address whose neighbor information is to be displayed.

all: Displays information of all neighbors, including neighbors acquired dynamically and configured
statically.
dynamic: Displays information of all neighbors acquired dynamically.
static: Displays information of all neighbors configured statically.
interface interface-type interface-number: Displays information of the neighbors of a specified
interface.
vlan vlan-id: Displays information of the neighbors of a specified VLAN, in the range of 1 to 4094.
|: Uses a regular expression to match neighbor entries.
regular-expression: A case-sensitive string for matching.
z begin: Displays the first matching neighbor entry and all the neighbor entries following it.
z exclude: Displays the neighbor entries not matching the specified regular expression.
1-6
z include: Displays the neighbor entries matching the specified regular expression.
The regular expression supports various special characters. For details, refer to the display
current-configuration command in Configuration File Management Command.

Description

Use the display ipv6 neighbors command to display neighbor information.

You can use the reset ipv6 neighbors command to clear specific IPv6 neighbor information.
Related commands: ipv6 neighbor, reset ipv6 neighbors.

Examples

# View all neighbor information.

<Sysname> display ipv6 neighbors all
Type: S-Static D-Dynamic
IPv6 Address Link-layer VID Interface State T Age
2008::110 0015-e9ac-69b6 1 GE1/0/2 REACH S -
FE80::215:E9FF:FEAC:69B6 0015-e9ac-69b6 1 GE1/0/3 STALE D 22
FE80::20F:E2FF:FE00:2201 000f-e200-2201 1 GE1/0/4 STALE D 28
2008::3610 000f-e200-2201 1 GE1/0/5 STALE D 28

Table 1-6 Description on the fields of the display ipv6 neighbors command

Field Description
IPv6 Address IPv6 address of a neighbor

Link-layer Link layer address (MAC address of a neighbor)

VID ID of the VLAN to which the interface connected to a neighbor belongs
Interface Interface connected to a neighbor
State of a neighbor, which can be:
z INCMP: Address resolution is in progress, so the link layer address of
the neighbor is unknown yet.
z REACH: The neighbor is reachable.
z STALE: The reachability to the neighbor is unknown. The device
State does not verify the reachability to the neighbor unless it sends a
packet to the neighbor.
z DELAY: The reachability to the neighbor is unknown. The device will
send a neighbor request message after a delay time.
z PROBE: The reachability to the neighbor is unknown. The device
sent a neighbor request message to verify the reachability.
Type of neighbor information, including S (static configuration) and D
T
(dynamic acquisition).
z For a static entry, “-“ is displayed.
Age z For a dynamic entry, the time (in seconds) since it is reachable last
time is displayed, and if it is never reachable, “#” is displayed (for a
dynamic neighbor only).

1-7
display ipv6 neighbors count

Syntax

display ipv6 neighbors { all | dynamic | static | interface interface-type interface-number | vlan
vlan-id } count

View

Any view

Parameters

all: Displays the total number of all neighbor entries, including neighbor entries acquired dynamically
and configured statically.
dynamic: Displays the total number of all neighbor entries acquired dynamically.
static: Displays the total number of all neighbor entries configured statically.
interface interface-type interface-number: Displays the total number of neighbor entries of a specified
interface.
vlan vlan-id: Displays the total number of neighbor entries of a specified VLAN, in the range of 1 to
4,094.
count: Number of neighbor entries.

Description

Use the display ipv6 neighbors count command to display the total number of neighbor entries
satisfying the specified condition.

Examples

# Display the total number of neighbor entries acquired dynamically.

<Sysname> display ipv6 neighbors dynamic count
Total dynamic entry(ies): 3

display ipv6 route-table

Syntax

display ipv6 route-table [ verbose ]

View

Any view

Parameters

verbose: Displays detailed information about the IPv6 routing table.

Description

Use the display ipv6 route-table command to display brief information about the routing table,
including the destination IP address, prefix length, type of protocol, next hop, egress interface, and so
on. In this case, only the valid route entries are displayed,
Use the display ipv6 route-table verbose command to display detailed information about the routing
table. In this case, both valid routes and invalid routes are displayed.
1-8
Examples

# Display summary information about the routing table.

<Sysname> display ipv6 route-table

Routing Table:
Destinations : 4 Routes : 4

Destination: ::1/128 Protocol: Direct

NextHop : ::1
Interface : InLoopBack0

Destination: 2008::/64 Protocol: Direct

NextHop : 2008::32
Interface : Vlan-interface1

Destination: 2008::32/128 Protocol: Direct

NextHop : ::1
Interface : InLoopBack0

Destination: FE80::/10 Protocol: Direct

NextHop : ::
Interface : NULL0

Table 1-7 Description on the fields of the display ipv6 route-table command

Field Description
Destinations Number of reachable destination networks/hosts

Routes Number of routing entries

Destination network/host IPv6 address. The part following “/”
Destination
indicates the prefix length.
Protocol Routing protocol discovering the route
NextHop Next hop address

Interface Egress interface, through which a packet is sent.

# Display detailed information about the routing table.

<Sysname> display ipv6 route-table verbose

Routing Table:
Destinations : 2 Routes : 2

Destination: :: PrefixLength: 0
NextHop : 1:1:4::1 Protocol : Static
Interface : Vlan-interface1 State : Active

Destination: ::1 PrefixLength: 128

NextHop : ::1 Protocol : Direct

1-9
Interface : InLoopBack0 State : Active

Table 1-8 Description on the fields of the display ipv6 route-table verbose command

Field Description
Destinations Number of reachable destination networks/hosts
Routes Number of routing entries
Destination Destination network/host IPv6 address.
PrefixLength Prefix length of the destination IPv6 address
NextHop Next hop address
Protocol Routing protocol discovering the route
Interface Egress interface
Routing entry state: Active (valid route) or Inactive (invalid
State
route).

display ipv6 socket

Syntax

display ipv6 socket [ socktype socket-type ] [ task-id socket-id ]

View

Any view

Parameters

socket-type: Type of a socket, in the range of 1 to 3. The value “1” represents a TCP socket, “2” a UDP
socket, and “3” a raw IP socket.
task-id: ID of a task, in the range of 1 to 100.
socket-id: ID of a socket, in the range of 0 to 3072.

Description

Use the display ipv6 socket command to display information related to a specified socket.
With no argument specified, this command displays the information about all the sockets; with only the
socket type specified, the command displays the information about sockets of the specified type; with
the socket type, task ID and socket ID specified, the command displays the information about the
specified socket.

Examples

# Display information related to a specified socket.

<Sysname> display ipv6 socket
SOCK_STREAM:
Task = VTYD(43), socketid = 1, Proto = 6,
LA = ::->23, FA = ::->0,
sndbuf = 8192, rcvbuf = 8192, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,
socket option = SO_ACCEPTCONN SO_REUSEADDR SO_KEEPALIVE SO_REUSEPORT SO_SETKEEPALIVE,

1-10
socket state = SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC
SOCK_DGRAM:
SOCK_RAW:

Table 1-9 Description on the fields of the display ipv6 socket command

Field Description
Socket type, which can be:

SOCK_STREAM z SOCK_STREAM: Refers to TCP.

z SOCK_DGRAM: Refers to UDP.
z SOCK_RAW: Refers to raw IP.
Task Task name and ID of the created socket
socketid ID assigned by the kernel to the created socket
Proto Protocol ID
LA Local address and local port number
FA Remote address and remote port number
sndbuf Size of the sending buffer
rcvbuf Size of the receiving buffer
sb_cc Number of bytes sent by the sending buffer
rb_cc Number of bytes received by the receiving buffer

socket option Socket option set by the application

socket state State of the socket
SOCK_DGRAM UDP socket

SOCK_RAW Raw IP socket

display ipv6 statistics

Syntax

display ipv6 statistics

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ipv6 statistics command to display statistics of IPv6 packets and ICMPv6 packets.
You can use the reset ipv6 statistics command to clear all IPv6 and ICMPv6 packet statistics.

Examples

# View the statistics of IPv6 packets and IPv6 ICMP packets.

<Sysname> display ipv6 statistics

1-11
IPv6 Protocol:
Sent packets:
Total: 580
Local sent out: 550 forwarded: 0
raw packets: 30 discarded: 0
routing failed: 0 fragments: 0
fragments failed: 0
Received packets:
Total: 572
local host: 572 hopcount exceeded: 0
format error: 0 option error: 0
protocol error: 0 fragments: 0
reassembled: 0 reassembly failed: 0
reassembly timeout: 0
ICMPv6 protocol:
Sent packets:
Total: 132
unreached: 0 too big: 0
hopcount exceeded: 0 reassembly timeout: 0
parameter problem: 0
echo request: 30 echo replied: 17
neighbor solicit: 43 neighbor advert: 42
router solicit: 0 router advert: 0
redirected: 0
Send failed:
ratelimited: 0 other errors: 0
Received packets:
Total: 126
checksum error: 0 too short: 0
bad code: 0
unreached: 10 too big: 0
hopcount exceeded: 0 reassembly timeout: 0
parameter problem: 0 unknown error type: 0
echoed: 17 echo replied: 30
neighbor solicit: 34 neighbor advert: 35
router solicit: 0 router advert: 0
redirected: 0 router renumbering: 0
unknown info type: 0
Deliver failed:
bad length: 0 ratelimited: 0

Table 1-10 Description on the fields of the display ipv6 statistics command

Field Description
IPv6 Protocol: Statistics of IPv6 packets

1-12
Field Description
Sent packets:
Statistics of sent IPv6 packets, including:
Total: 580
z Total number of sent packets
Local sent out: 550
z Number of packets sent locally
forwarded: 0 z Number of forwarded packets
raw packets: 0 z Number of packets sent via raw socket
discarded: 0 z Number of discarded packets
routing failed: 0 z Number of packets with routing failure
fragments: 0 z Number of sent fragment packets
z Number of fragment sending failures
fragments failed: 0
Received packets:
Statistics of received IPv6 packets, including:
Total: 572
z Total number of received packets
local host: 572
z Number of packets received locally
hopcount exceeded: 0
z Number of packets exceeding the hops
format error: 0 z Number of packets in an incorrect format
option error: 0 z Number of packets with incorrect options
protocol error: 0 z Number of packets with incorrect protocol
fragments: 0 z Number of received fragment packets
reassembled: 0 z Number of reassembled packets
z Number of packets whose reassembly fails
reassembly failed: 0
z Number of packets whose reassembly times out
reassembly timeout: 0
ICMPv6 protocol: Statistics of ICMPv6 packets
Sent packets:
Total: 132 Statistics of sent ICMPv6 packets, including:
unreached: 0 z Total number of sent packets
z Number of packets whose destination is unreachable
too big: 0
z Number of too large packets
hopcount exceeded: 0
z Number of packets exceeding the hop limit
reassembly timeout: 0 z Number of packets whose fragmentation and
parameter problem: 0 reassembly time out
echo request: 30 z Number of packets with parameter errors
echo replied: 17 z Number of request packets
z Number of response packets
neighbor solicit: 43
z Number of neighbor solicitation packets
neighbor advert: 42 z Number of neighbor advertisement packets
router solicit: 0 z Number of router solicit packets
router advert: 0 z Number of router advertisement packets
redirected: 0 z Number of redirected packets
Send failed: z Number of packets failing to be sent because of rate
limitation
ratelimited: 0
z Number of packets with other errors
other errors: 0

1-13
Field Description
Received packets:
Total: 126 Statistics of received ICMPv6 packets, including:
checksum error: 0 z Total number of received packets
too short: 0 z Number of packets with checksum errors
bad code: 0 z Number of too small packets
unreached: 10 z Number of packets with error codes
z Number of packets whose destination is unreachable
too big: 0
z Number of too large packets
hopcount exceeded: 0
z Number of packets exceeding the hop limit
reassembly timeout: 0 z Number of packets whose fragmentation and
parameter problem: 0 reassembly time out
unknown error type: 0 z Number of packets with parameter errors
echoed: 17 z Number of packets with unknown errors
z Number of request packets
echo replied: 30
z Number of response packets
neighbor solicit: 34 z Number of neighbor solicitation messages
neighbor advert: 35 z Number of neighbor advertisement packets
router solicit: 0 z Number of router solicitation packets
router advert: 0 z Number of router advertisement packets
redirected: 0 z Number of redirected packets
z Number of packets recounted by the router
router renumbering: 0
z Number of unknown information type of packets
unknown info type: 0
z Number of packets with a incorrect size
Deliver failed: z Number of packets failing to be received because of
bad length: 0 rate limitation
ratelimited: 0

display tcp ipv6 statistics

Syntax

display tcp ipv6 statistics

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display tcp ipv6 statistics command to display statistics of IPv6 TCP packets.
You can use the reset tcp ipv6 statistics command to clear statistics of all IPv6 TCP packets.

Examples

# View the statistics of received and sent IPv6 TCP packets.

<Sysname> display tcp ipv6 statistics
Received packets:
Total: 436
packets in sequence: 182 (327 bytes)

1-14
window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 0
checksum error: 0, offset error: 0, short error: 0
duplicate packets: 0 (0 bytes), partially duplicate packets: 0 (0 bytes)
out-of-order packets: 3 (0 bytes)
packets with data after window: 0 (0 bytes)
packets after close: 0
ACK packets: 239 (6141 bytes)
duplicate ACK packets: 69, too much ACK packets: 0
Sent packets:
Total: 331
urgent packets: 0
control packets: 5 (including 0 RST)
window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 0
data packets: 306 (6135 bytes) data packets retransmitted: 0 (0 bytes)
ACK only packets: 20 (14 delayed)
Retransmitted timeout: 0, connections dropped in retransmitted timeout: 0
Keepalive timeout: 66, keepalive probe: 66, Keepalive timeout, so connections disconnected :
0
Initiated connections: 2, accepted connections: 3, established connections: 3
Closed connections: 5 (dropped: 0, initiated dropped: 2)

Table 1-11 Description on the fields of the display tcp ipv6 statistics command

Field Description
Statistics of received packets, including:
z Total number of received packets
Received packets:
z Number of packets received in sequence
Total: 436 z Number of window probe packets
packets in sequence: 182 (327 bytes) z Number of window size update packets
window probe packets: 0, window update z Number of packets with checksum errors
packets: 0 z Number of packets with offset errors
checksum error: 0, offset error: 0, short error: 0 z Number of packets whose total length is less
duplicate packets: 0 (0 bytes), partially than that specified by the packet header
duplicate packets: 0 (0 bytes) z Number of duplicate packets
out-of-order packets: 3 (0 bytes) z Number of partially duplicate packets
z Number of out-of-order packets
packets with data after window: 0 (0 bytes)
z Number of packets exceeding the receiving
packets after close: 0 window size
ACK packets: 239 (6141 bytes) z Number of packets after the connection is
duplicate ACK packets: 69, too much ACK closed
packets: 0 z Number of ACK packets
z Number of duplicate ACK packets
z Number of excessive ACK packets

1-15
Field Description

Sent packets: Statistics of sent packets, including:

Total: 331 z Total number of packets
urgent packets: 0 z Number of packets containing an urgent
indicator
control packets: 5 (including 0 RST)
z Number of control packets
window probe packets: 0, window update z Number of window probe packets
packets: 0
z Number of window update packets
data packets: 306 (6135 bytes) data packets z Number of data packets
retransmitted: 0 (0 bytes)
z Number of retransmitted packets
ACK only packets: 20 (14 delayed) z Number of ACK only packets
Number of packets whose retransmission times
Retransmitted timeout
out
Number of connections dropped because of
connections dropped in retransmitted timeout
retransmission timeout
Keepalive timeout Number of keepalive timeouts
Keepalive probe Number of keepalive probes
Number of connections dropped because of
Keepalive timeout, so connections disconnected
keepalive response timeout
Initiated connections Number of initiated connections
accepted connections Number of accepted connections
established connections Number of established connections
Closed connections Number of closed connections
Number of dropped connections (after receiving
dropped
SYN from the peer)
Number of connection failures (before receiving
initiated dropped
SYN from the peer)

display tcp ipv6 status

Syntax

display tcp ipv6 status

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display tcp ipv6 status command to display the IPv6 TCP connection status, including IP
address of the IPv6 TCP control block, local and peer IPv6 addresses, and status of the IPv6 TCP
connection.

1-16
Examples

# View the IPv6 TCP connection status.

<Sysname> display tcp ipv6 status
TCP6CB Local Address Foreign Address State
83a9fba4 ::->23 ::->0 Listening

Table 1-12 Description on the fields of the display tcp ipv6 status command

Field Description
TCP6CB IPv6 address of the TCP control block (hexadecimal)
Local Address Local IPv6 address
Foreign Address Remote IPv6 address
TCP connection status, including: Closed, Listening, Syn_Sent,
State Syn_Rcvd, Established, Close_Wait, Fin_Wait1, Closing, Last_Ack,
Fin_Wait2, Time_Wait

display udp ipv6 statistics

Syntax

display udp ipv6 statistics

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display udp ipv6 statistics command to display statistics of IPv6 UDP packets.
You can use the reset udp ipv6 statistics command to clear statistics of all IPv6 UDP packets.

Examples

# View statistics of IPv6 UDP packets.

<Sysname> display udp ipv6 statistics
Received packets:
Total: 10
checksum error: 0
shorter than header: 0, data length larger than packet: 0
unicast(no socket on port): 0
broadcast/multicast(no socket on port): 0
not delivered, input socket full: 0
input packets missing pcb cache: 0
Sent packets:
Total: 21

1-17
Table 1-13 Description on the fields of the display udp ipv6 statistics command

Field Description
Total Total number of received/sent packets
checksum error Total number of packets with an invalid checksum
Total number of IPv6 UDP packets whose total length is
shorter than header
less than that specified by the packet header
Total number of packets whose data length exceeds that
data length larger than packet
specified by the packet header
Total number of received unicast packets without any
unicast(no socket on port)
socket on a port
Total number of received broadcast/multicast packets
broadcast/multicast(no socket on port)
without any socket on a port
Number of packets not handled because of the receiving
not delivered, input socket full
buffer being full
Number of packets that do not match any entry in the PCB
input packet missing pcb cache
cache

dns server ipv6

Syntax

dns server ipv6 ipv6-address [ interface-type interface-number ]

undo dns server ipv6 ipv6-address [ interface-type interface-number ]

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

ipv6-address: IPv6 address of a DNS server.

interface-type interface-number: Interface type and interface number. It is required when the IPv6
address of the specified DNS server is a link-local address.

Description

Use the dns server ipv6 command to configure an IPv6 address for a DNS server.
Use the undo dns server ipv6 command to remove the configured DNS server.
By default, no DNS server is configured.

Examples

# Configure the IPv6 address 2002::1 for a DNS server.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] dns server ipv6 2002::1

1-18
ipv6 address

Syntax

ipv6 address { ipv6-address prefix-length | ipv6-address/prefix-length }

undo ipv6 address [ ipv6-address prefix-length | ipv6-address/prefix-length ]

View

Interface view

Parameters

ipv6-address: IPv6 address.

prefix-length: Prefix length of an IPv6 address, in the range of 1 to 128.

Description

Use the ipv6 address command to configure a site-local address or global unicast address manually
for an interface.
Use the undo ipv6 address command to remove the manually configured interface address.
By default, no site-local address or global unicast address is configured for an interface.
Note that:
z A 3com switch 4200G can have IPv6 unicast addresses configured on only one VLAN interface.
The total number of IPv6 global unicast addresses and site-local addresses configured on an
interface can be up to four.
z You will remove all IPv6 addresses except the automatically configured link-local address if you
carry out the undo ipv6 address command without any parameter specified.

Examples

# Set the aggregatable global IPv6 unicast address of VLAN-interface 1 to 2001::1 with prefix length 64.
Method I:
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ipv6 address 2001::1/64

Method II:
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ipv6 address 2001::1 64

ipv6 address auto link-local

Syntax

ipv6 address auto link-local

undo ipv6 address auto link-local

1-19
View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the ipv6 address auto link-local command to automatically generate a link-local address for an
interface.
Use the undo ipv6 address auto link-local command to remove the automatically generated link-local
address for an interface.
By default, a link-local address is generated automatically after a site-local IPv6 address or global
unicast address is configured for an interface.
Note that:
z After an IPv6 site-local address or aggregatable global unicast address is configured for an
interface, a link-local address is generated automatically. The automatically generated link-local
address is the same as the one generated by using the ipv6 address auto link-local command.
z The undo ipv6 address auto link-local command can be used only after the ipv6 address auto
link-local command is executed. However, if an IPv6 site-local address or aggregatable global
unicast address is already configured for an interface, the interface still has a link-local address
because the system automatically generates one for the interface. If no IPv6 site-local address or
aggregatable global unicast address is configured, the interface has no link-local address.
z Manual assignment takes precedence over automatic generation. That is, if you first adopt
automatic generation and then manual assignment, the manually assigned link-local address will
overwrite the automatically generated one. If you first adopt manual assignment and then
automatic generation, the automatically generated link-local address will not take effect and the
link-local address of an interface is still the manually assigned one. If you delete the manually
assigned address, the automatically generated link-local address is validated. For manually
assignment of an IPv6 link-local address, refer to the ipv6 address link-local command.

Examples

# Configure the VLAN-interface 1 to automatically generate a link-local address.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ipv6 address auto link-local

ipv6 address eui-64

Syntax

ipv6 address ipv6-address/prefix-length eui-64

undo ipv6 address ipv6-address/prefix-length eui-64

View

VLAN interface view

1-20
Parameters

ipv6-address/prefix-length: IPv6 address and IPv6 prefix. The ipv6-address and prefix-length
arguments jointly specify the prefix of an IPv6 address in the EUI-64 format. The prefix length of an
EUI-64 address cannot be greater than 64.

Description

Use the ipv6 address eui-64 command to configure a site-local address or global unicast address in
the EUI-64 format for an interface.
Use the undo ipv6 address eui-64 command to remove the configured site-local address or global
unicast address in the EUI-64 format for an interface.
By default, no site-local address or global unicast address in the EUI-64 format is configured on the
interface.
An IPv6 address in the EUI-64 format consists of a specific prefix and the MAC address of the local
device, which can be displayed using the display ipv6 interface command.
Note that:
The prefix length should not be more than 64 bits when a aggregatable global unicast address(es) or
site-local address(es) in the EUI-64 format is configured.

Examples

# Configure an IPv6 address in the EUI-64 format for the VLAN-interface 1. The prefix of the address is
2001::1/64, and the interface ID is generated based on the MAC address of the device.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ipv6 address 2001::1/64 eui-64

# Display the generated IPv6 address in the EUI-64 format.

[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] display ipv6 interface Vlan-interface 1
Vlan-interface1 current state :UP
Line protocol current state :UP
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::2E0:FCFF:FE00:3100
Global unicast address(es):
2001::2E0:FCFF:FE00:3100, subnet is 2001::/64
Joined group address(es):
FF02::1:FF00:3100
FF02::1
MTU is 1500 bytes
ND DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 1
ND reachable time is 30000 milliseconds
ND retransmit interval is 1000 milliseconds
Hosts use stateless autoconfig for addresses

# Configure VLAN-interface 1 to generate an IPv6 address in the EUI-64 format based on the prefix
3001::/64.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1

1-21
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ipv6 address 3001::/64 eui-64

ipv6 address link-local

Syntax

ipv6 address ipv6-address link-local

undo ipv6 address ipv6-address link-local

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

ipv6-address: IPv6 link-local address. The first ten bits of an address must be 1111111010 (binary), that
is, the first group of hexadecimals in the address must be FE80 to FEBF.

Description

Use the ipv6 address link-local command to configure a link-local address manually for a specified
interface.
Use the undo ipv6 address link-local command to remove the configured link-local address for an
interface.
Note that:
Manual assignment takes precedence over automatic generation. That is, if you first adopt automatic
generation and then manual assignment, the manually assigned link-local address will overwrite the
automatically generated one. If you first adopt manual assignment and then automatic generation, the
automatically generated link-local address will not take effect and the link-local address of an interface
is still the manually assigned one. If you delete the manually assigned address, the automatically
generated link-local address is validated. For automatic generation of an IPv6 link-local address, refer
to the ipv6 address auto link-local command.

Examples

# Configure a link-local address for the VLAN-interface 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ipv6 address fe80::1 link-local

ipv6 host

Syntax

ipv6 host hostname ipv6-address

undo ipv6 host hostname [ ipv6-address ]

View

System view

1-22
Parameters

hostname: Host name, a string of up to 20 characters. The character string can contain letters,
numerals, “_”, “-“, or “.” and must contain at least one letter.
ipv6-address: IPv6 address.

Description

Use the ipv6 host command to configure the mapping between host name and IPv6 address.
Use the undo ipv6 host command to remove the mapping between host name and IPv6 address.
Each host name can correspond to only one IPv6 address. A newly configured IPv6 address will
overwrite the previous one.
Related commands: display ipv6 host.

Examples

# Configure the mapping between host name and IPv6 address.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ipv6 host aaa 2001::1

ipv6 icmp-error

Syntax

ipv6 icmp-error { bucket bucket-size | ratelimit interval }*

undo ipv6 icmp-error

View

System view

Parameters

bucket-size: Number of tokens in a token bucket, in the range of 1 to 200. The default value is 10.
interval: Update period of the token bucket in milliseconds, in the range of 0 to 2,147,483,647.

Description

Use the ipv6 icmp-error command to configure the maximum number of IPv6 ICMP error packets sent
within a specified time.
Use the undo ipv6 icmp-error command to restore the update period and the capacity of the token
bucket to the defaults.
By default, the size is 10 and the update period is 100 milliseconds. That is, at most 10 IPv6 ICMP error
packets can be sent within 100 milliseconds.

Examples

# Set the capacity of the token bucket to 50 and the update period to 100 milliseconds. That is, at most
50 IPv6 ICMP error packets can be sent within 100 milliseconds.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ipv6 icmp-error bucket 50 ratelimit 100

1-23
ipv6 nd dad attempts

Syntax

ipv6 nd dad attempts value

undo ipv6 nd dad attempts

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

value: Number of attempts to send a neighbor solicitation message for duplicate address detection, in
the range of 0 to 600. The default value is “1”. When it is set to 0, the duplicate address detection is
disabled.

Description

Use the ipv6 nd dad attempts command to configure the attempts to send a neighbor solicitation
message for duplicate address detection.
Use the undo ipv6 nd dad attempts command to restore the attempts to send a neighbor solicitation
message for duplicate address detection to the default.
By default, the number of attempts to send a neighbor solicitation message for duplicate address
detection is 1.
Related commands: display ipv6 interface.

Examples

# Set the attempts to send a neighbor solicitation message for duplicate address detection to 20.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ipv6 nd dad attempts 20

ipv6 nd hop-limit

Syntax

ipv6 nd hop-limit value

undo ipv6 nd hop-limit

View

System view

Parameters

value: Number of hops, in the range of 0 to 255.

Description

Use the ipv6 nd hop-limit command to configure the hop limit of ICMPv6 reply packets.
Use the undo ipv6 nd hop-limit command to restore the default.

1-24
By default, the hop limit of ICMPv6 reply packets is 64.

Examples

# Set the hop limit of ICMPv6 reply packets to 100.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ipv6 nd hop-limit 100

ipv6 nd ns retrans-timer

Syntax

ipv6 nd ns retrans-timer value

undo ipv6 nd ns retrans-timer

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

value: Interval for retransmitting an NS message in milliseconds, in the range of 1,000 to 3,600,000.

Description

Use the ipv6 nd ns retrans-timer command to set the interval for retransmitting an NS message.
Use the undo ipv6 nd ns retrans-timer command to restore the interval for retransmitting an NS
message to the default.
By default, the local interface sends NS messages at intervals of 1,000 milliseconds
Related commands: display ipv6 interface.

Examples

# Specify the VLAN-interface 1 to send an NS message at intervals of 10,000 milliseconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ipv6 nd ns retrans-timer 10000

ipv6 nd nud reachable-time

Syntax

ipv6 nd nud reachable-time value

undo ipv6 nd nud reachable-time

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

value: Neighbor reachable time in milliseconds, in the range of 1 to 3,600,000.

1-25
Description

Use the ipv6 nd nud reachable-time command to configure the neighbor reachable time on an
interface.
Use the undo ipv6 nd nud reachable-time command to restore the default.
By default, the neighbor reachable time on the local interface is 30,000 milliseconds.
Related commands: display ipv6 interface.

Examples

# Set the neighbor reachable time on the VLAN-interface 1 to 10,000 milliseconds.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ipv6 nd nud reachable-time 10000

ipv6 neighbor

Syntax

ipv6 neighbor ipv6-address mac-address { vlan-id port-type port-number | interface interface-type

interface-number }
undo ipv6 neighbor ipv6-address interface-type interface-number

View

System view

Parameters

ipv6-address: IPv6 address in a static neighbor entry.

mac-address: Link layer address in a static neighbor entry (48 bits long, in the format of H-H-H).
vlan-id: VLAN ID corresponding to a static neighbor entry, in the range of 1 to 4094.
port-type port-number: Ethernet port type and port number corresponding to a static neighbor entry.
interface-type interface-number: VLAN interface type and interface number corresponding to a static
neighbor entry.

Description

Use the ipv6 neighbor command to configure a static neighbor entry.

Use the undo ipv6 neighbor command to remove a static neighbor entry.
Note that:
You can configure a static neighbor entry in two ways:
z Mapping a VLAN interface to an IPv6 address and a link-layer address. The entry state is INCMP.
After the switch get the layer 2 port information of the VLAN, the neighbor entry enters the REACH
state.
z Mapping a Layer 2 port in a VLAN to an IPv6 address and a link-layer address. The Layer 2 port
specified by the port-type port-number argument must belong to the VLAN specified by the vlan-id
argument, and the corresponding VLAN interface must exist. After you carry out the command, the

1-26
device relates the VLAN interface to the IPv6 address to uniquely identify a static neighbor entry
which is in REACH state.
You only need to specify the corresponding VLAN interface when removing a static neighbor entry
related to that VLAN interface.
Related commands: display ipv6 neighbors.

Examples

# Configure a static neighbor entry for GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 of VLAN 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ipv6 neighbor 2000::1 fe-e0-89 1 GigabitEthernet 1/0/1

ipv6 neighbors max-learning-num

Syntax

ipv6 neighbors max-learning-num number

undo ipv6 neighbors max-learning-num

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

number: Maximum number of neighbors that can be dynamically learned by an interface, in the range of
1 to 2048.

Description

Use the ipv6 neighbors max-learning-num command to configure the maximum number of neighbors
that can be dynamically learned on a specified interface.
Use the undo ipv6 neighbors max-learning-num command to restore the configuration to the default.
By default, the maximum number is 1024.

Examples

# Set the maximum number of neighbors that can be dynamically learned on the interface
VLAN-interface 1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] ipv6 neighbors max-learning-num 10

ipv6 route-static

Syntax

ipv6 route-static ipv6-address prefix-length [ interface-type interface-number] nexthop-address

undo ipv6 route-static ipv6-address prefix-length

1-27
View

System view

Parameters

ipv6-address prefix-length: Destination IPv6 address and prefix length.

interface-type interface-number: Type of egress interface and interface number.
nexthop-address: IPv6 address of the next hop.

Description

Use the Ipv6 route-static command to configure a static IPv6 route.

Use the undo ipv6 route-static command to remove a static IPv6 route.
By default, no IPv6 static route is configured.
If you specify the destination IP address of an IPv6 static route as ::/0, the route configured becomes a
default IPv6 route. If the destination IP address of a packet does not match any entry in the routing table,
the device will use a default IPv6 route to forward the IPv6 packet.
Related commands: display ipv6 route-table.

Examples

# Configure a static IPv6 route, with the destination address of 1:1:2::/48 and the next hop address of
1:1:3::1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ipv6 route-static 1:1:2:: 48 1:1:3::1

# Configure a static IPv6 route, with the next hop address of 1:1:4::1.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] ipv6 route-static :: 0 1:1:4::1

reset dns ipv6 dynamic-host

Syntax

reset dns ipv6 dynamic-host

View

User view

Parameters

None

1-28
Description

Use the reset dns ipv6 dynamic-host command to clear IPv6 dynamic domain name cache
information.
You can use the display dns ipv6 dynamic-host command to display the current IPv6 dynamic
domain name cache information.

Examples

# Clear IPv6 dynamic domain name cache information.

<Sysname> reset dns ipv6 dynamic-host

reset ipv6 neighbors

Syntax

reset ipv6 neighbors [ all | dynamic | interface interface-type interface-number | static ]

View

User view

Parameters

all: Clears the static and dynamic neighbor information on all interfaces.
dynamic: Clears the dynamic neighbor information on all interfaces.
interface interface-type interface-number: Clears all neighbor information of a specified interface.
static: Clears the static neighbor information on all interfaces.

Description

Use the reset ipv6 neighbors command to clear IPv6 neighbor information.
You can use the display ipv6 neighbors command to display the current IPv6 neighbor information.

Examples

# Clear all neighbor information on all interfaces.

<Sysname> reset ipv6 neighbors all

# Clear dynamic neighbor information on all interfaces.

Use the tcp ipv6 timer syn-timeout command to set the synwait timer of IPv6 TCP packets
Use the undo tcp ipv6 timer syn-timeout command to restore the synwait timer length to the default.
By default, the length of the synwait timer of IPv6 TCP packets is 75 seconds.

Examples

# Set the synwait timer length of IPv6 TCP packets to 800 seconds.

1-31
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] tcp ipv6 timer syn-timeout 800

tcp ipv6 window

Syntax

tcp ipv6 window size

undo tcp ipv6 window

View

System view

Parameters

size: size of IPv6 TCP receiving/sending buffer in KB (kilobyte), in the range of 1 to 32.

Description

Use the tcp ipv6 window command to set the size of IPv6 TCP receiving/sending buffer.
Use the undo tcp ipv6 window command to restore the size of IPv6 TCP receiving/sending buffer to
the default.
By default, the size of the IPv6 TCP packet buffer is 8 KB.

Examples

# Set the size of IPv6 TCP receiving/sending buffer to 4 KB.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] tcp ipv6 window 4

1-32
2 IPv6 Application Configuration Commands

IPv6 Application Configuration Commands

ping ipv6

Syntax

ping ipv6 [ -a source-ipv6-address | -c count | -m interval | -s packet-size | -t timeout ]* remote-system

[ -i interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

-a source-ipv6-address: Specifies source IPv6 address.

-c count: Specifies the number of packets sent for requesting ICMPv6 echo, ranging from 1 to
4294967295, with the default of 5.
-m interval: Specifies the time intervals in milliseconds to send packets for ICMPv6 echo, ranging from 1
to 65,535, with the default of 200 milliseconds.
z If a response from the destination is received within the timeout time, the interval to send the next
ECHO-REQUEST equals to the actual response period plus the value of interval.
z If no response from the destination is received within the timeout time, the interval to send the next
ECHO-REQUEST equals to the timeout value plus the value of interval.
-s packet-size: Specifies the size in bytes of packets sent for requesting ICMPv6 echo, ranging from 20
to 8,100, with the default of 56 bytes.
-t timeout: Specifies the timeout in milliseconds of receiving ICMPv6 echoes, ranging from 0 to 65,535,
with the default of 2,000 milliseconds.
remote-system: IPv6 address or host name (a string a 1 to 46 characters) of the destination device.
-i interface-type interface-number: Specifies the type and number of an outgoing interface. This
argument takes effect only when the destination address is a link-local address and the specified
outgoing interface has a link-local address.

Description

Use the ping ipv6 command to test whether the destination is accessible.
The following information will be output:
z A reply to each ICMPv6 echo request. If no ICMPv6 reply is received within the timeout time,
“Request time out” is displayed; otherwise, the number of data bytes of each reply, packet
sequence number, TTL, and round-trip response time are displayed.
z Statistics, including the numbers of sent packets, received packets, packet loss percentage, and
the minimum/average/maximum response time.
After you execute the ping ipv6 command, you can press Ctrl+C to terminate the ping operation.
2-1
Examples

# Test whether destination 2001::1 is accessible.

<Sysname> ping ipv6 2001::1
PING 2001::1 : 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break
Reply from 2001::1
bytes=56 Sequence=1 hop limit=64 time = 20 ms
Reply from 2001::1
bytes=56 Sequence=2 hop limit=64 time = 0 ms
Reply from 2001::1
bytes=56 Sequence=3 hop limit=64 time = 0 ms
Reply from 2001::1
bytes=56 Sequence=4 hop limit=64 time = 0 ms
Reply from 2001::1
bytes=56 Sequence=5 hop limit=64 time = 0 ms

--- 2001::1 ping statistics ---

5 packet(s) transmitted
5 packet(s) received
0.00% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 0/4/20 ms

Table 2-1 Description on the fields of the ping ipv6 command

Field Description
PING 2001::1 Verify whether the device at 2001::1 is reachable

56 data bytes Number of bytes in the ICMPv6 echo request

Press Ctrl + C to terminate the ping operation after the ping ipv6
press CTRL_C to break
command is executed.

An ICMPv6 reply message is received from the device at 2001::1.

Reply from 2001::1 If no ICMPv6 reply is received within the timeout time, “Request time
out” is displayed.
bytes= Number of data bytes in the ICMPv6 reply message

Sequence= Packet sequence number

TTL in the ICMP reply message, similar to the TTL in the output
hop limit=
information of IPv4 ping operations.
time = Round-trip response time
--- 2001::1 ping statistics --- Statistics obtained by pinging the IPv6 address 2001::1

5 packet(s) transmitted Number of sent packets

5 packet(s) received Number of received packets
0.00% packet loss Packet loss percentage

round-trip min/avg/max =
Minimum/average/maximum response time, in milliseconds.
0/4/20 ms

2-2
telnet ipv6

Syntax

telnet ipv6 remote-system [ -i interface-type interface-number ] [ port-number ]

View

User view

Parameters

remote-system: IPv6 address or host name (a string a 1 to 46 characters) of the destination device.
-i interface-type interface-number: Specifies the type and number of an outgoing interface. This
argument takes effect only when the destination address is a link-local address and the specified
outgoing interface has a link-local address.
port-number: Specifies the port number linked with a Telnet server, ranging from 0 to 65535, with the
default of 23.

Description

Use the telnet ipv6 command to log onto another device for remote management from the local device.
You can break Telnet logging-in by entering <Ctrl+K>.

Examples

# Connect to a remote Telnet server with IPv6 address of 3001::1.

<Sysname> telnet ipv6 3001::1
Trying 3001::1 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 3001::1 ...
*****************************************************************************
* Copyright(c) 2004-2008 3Com Corp. and its licensors. All rights reserved.*
* Without the owner's prior written consent, *
* no decompiling or reverse-engineering shall be allowed. *
*****************************************************************************

# Telnet to a remote Telnet server with IPv6 address of 2003::5. If the connection fails, “Can't connect to
the remote host!” is displayed.
<Sysname> telnet ipv6 2003::5
Trying 2003::5 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Can't connect to the remote host!

tftp ipv6

Syntax

tftp ipv6 remote-system [ -i interface-type interface-number ] { get | put } source-filename

[ destination-filename ]

2-3
View

User view

Parameters

remote-system: IPv6 address or host name (a string a 1 to 46 characters) of the destination device.
-i interface-type interface-number: Specifies the type and number of an interface. This argument takes
effect only when the address of the TFTP server is a link-local address and the specified outgoing
interface has a link-local address.
get: Specifies to download a file.
put: Specifies to upload a file.
source-filename: Specifies the name of a source file with a string of 1 to 64 letters.
destination-filename: Specifies the name of a destination file with a string of 1 to 64 letters. If no such
parameters are specified, then the destination file’s name will be the same as the source file’s.

Description

Use the tftp ipv6 command to perform the following operations:

z Download a file: Download a specified source file from TFTP server to local.
z Upload a file: Upload a specified source file from local to TFTP server.

Examples

# Download a file from TFTP server.

<Sysname> tftp ipv6 fe80::250:daff:fe91:e058 -i Vlan-interface 300 get filetoget
.
File will be transferred in binary mode
Downloading file from remote tftp server, please wait..... received: 4469 bytes in 1.243
seconds.

tracert ipv6

Syntax

tracert ipv6 [ -f first-ttl | -m max-ttl | -p port | -q packet-num | -w timeout ]* remote-system

View

Any view

Parameters

-f first-ttl: Specifies the first TTL, that is, the allowed number of hops for the first packet. Ranges from 1
to 255, defaults to 1, and must be less than the maximum TTL.
-m max-ttl: Specifies the maximum TTL, that is, the maximum allowed number of hops for a packet. The
value ranges from 1 to 255, defaults to 30. It must be greater than the first TTL.
-p port: Specifies the port number of the destination UDP, ranging from 1 to 65535, with the default of
33434.
-q packet-num: Specifies the maximum number of packets sent to a hop, ranging from 1 to 65535, with
the default of 3.

2-4
-w timeout: Specifies the timeout in milliseconds of waiting ICMPv6 echoes, ranging from 1 to 65,535,
with the default of 5,000 milliseconds.
remote-system: IPv6 address or host name (a string a 1 to 46 characters) of the destination device.

Description

Use the tracert ipv6 command to trace the route of the IPv6 packets from source to destination.
After using the ping command to detect a network problem, you can use the tracert command to locate
the failed network node.
Executing the tracert command displays the IP addresses of all the Layer 3 forwarding devices which
forward the packets to the destination on the path; if a device times out, “* * *” is displayed.
You can press Ctrl + C to terminate the tracert operation after the tracert ipv6 command is executed.

Examples

# Trace the route of the IPv6 packets from source to destination 3002::1.
<Sysname> tracert ipv6 3002::1
traceroute to 3002::1 30 hops max,60 bytes packet
1 3003::1 30 ms 0 ms 0 ms
2 3002::1 10 ms 10 ms 0 ms
3 * * *

Table 2-2 Description on the fields of the tracert ipv6 command

Field Description
traceroute to 3002::1 Traceroute the device at 3002::1 to view the passed route
Maximum hops, which can be configured using the -m
30 hops max
argument.
60 bytes packet Number of bytes in a probe packet
Press Ctrl + C to terminate the tracert operation after the tracert
press CTRL_C to break
ipv6 command is executed.
Probe result for sending packets with TTL 1, including IPv6
address of the device and round-trip response times of three
1 3003::1 30 ms 0 ms 0 ms probe packets.
The number of probe packets sent each time can be configured
using the -q argument.
3 * * * The device three hops away has no response.

2-5
Table of Contents

1 PoE Configuration Commands ················································································································1-1

PoE Configuration Commands ···············································································································1-1
display poe disconnect ····················································································································1-1
display poe interface························································································································1-1
display poe interface power·············································································································1-3
display poe powersupply ·················································································································1-4
display poe temperature-protection·································································································1-5
poe disconnect ································································································································1-5
poe enable·······································································································································1-6
poe legacy enable ···························································································································1-7
poe max-power································································································································1-7
poe mode·········································································································································1-8
poe power-management··················································································································1-8
poe priority·······································································································································1-9
poe temperature-protection ···········································································································1-10
poe update·····································································································································1-11

2 PoE Profile Configuration Commands ····································································································2-1

PoE Profile Configuration Commands ····································································································2-1
apply poe-profile ······························································································································2-1
display poe-profile ···························································································································2-2
poe-profile········································································································································2-3

i
1 PoE Configuration Commands

PoE Configuration Commands

display poe disconnect

Syntax

display poe disconnect

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display poe disconnect command to view the current PD disconnection detection mode of the
switch.

Examples

# Display the PD disconnection detection mode.

<Sysname> display poe disconnect
The PoE disconnect mode is AC.

display poe interface

Syntax

display poe interface [ interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-type interface-number: Port type and port number.

Description

Use the display poe interface command to view the PoE status of a specific port or all ports of the
switch.
If the interface-type interface-number argument is not specified, the command displays the PoE status
of all ports of the switch.
Related commands: poe enable, poe max-power, poe mode, poe power-management, poe
priority.

1-1
Example

# Display the PoE status of GigabitEthernet 1/0/10.

<Sysname> display poe interface GigabitEthernet1/0/10
Port power enabled :enable
Port power ON/OFF :on
Port power status :Standard PD was detected
Port power mode :signal
Port PD class :0
port power priority :low
Port max power :15400 mW
Port current power :460 mW
Port peak power :552 mW
Port average power :547 mW
Port current :10 mA
Port voltage :51 V

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display poe interface command

Field Description
Port power enabled PoE is enabled on the port
Port power ON/OFF The power on the port is on/off
PoE status on the port:
z user command set port to off: PoE to the port is turned off
Port power status by the user
z Standard PD was detected: A standard PD is detected
z detection is in process: PDs are being detected
PoE mode on the port:
Port power mode
signal: PoE through the signal cable

Port PD class Class of power to the PD

PoE priority of the port:

Port power priority z critical: The highest

z high: High
z low: Low
Port max power The maximum available power on the port
Port current power The current power on the port
Port average power The average power on the port

Port peak power The peak power on the port

Port current The current on the port
Port voltage The voltage on the port

# Display the PoE status of all ports.

<Sysname> display poe interface
PORT INDEX POWER ENABLE MODE PRIORITY STATUS
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 off disable signal low user command set port to off
GigabitEthernet1/0/2 off disable signal low user command set port to off

1-2
GigabitEthernet1/0/3 off disable signal low user command set port to off
GigabitEthernet1/0/4 off disable signal low user command set port to off
GigabitEthernet1/0/5 off disable signal low user command set port to off
GigabitEthernet1/0/6 off disable signal low user command set port to off

……
<Omitted>

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display poe interface command

Field Description
PORT INDEX Port index
POWER Power status on the port: ON/OFF
ENABLE PoE enabled/disabled status on the port
PoE mode on the port:
MODE z signal: PoE through the signal cable
z spare: PoE through the spare cable
PoE priority of the port:

PRIORITY z critical: Highest

z high: High
z low: Low
PoE status on the port:
z user command set port to off: PoE to the port is turned off by the user
STATUS z Standard PD was detected: A standard PD is detected
z Legacy PD was detected:A non-standard PD is detected
z PD detection is in process: PDs are being detected

display poe interface power

Syntax

display poe interface power [ interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameter

interface-type interface-number: Port type and port number.

Description

Use the display poe interface power command to view the power information of a specific port of the
switch. If the interface-type interface-number argument is not specified, the command displays the
power information of all ports of the switch.

Example

# Display the power information of GigabitEthernet 1/0/10.

<Sysname> display poe interface power GigabitEthernet1/0/10
Port power :12400 mW

1-3
# Display the power information of all ports.
<Sysname> display poe interface power
PORT INDEX POWER (mW) PORT INDEX POWER (mW)
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 0 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 0
GigabitEthernet1/0/3 0 GigabitEthernet1/0/4 0
GigabitEthernet1/0/5 0 GigabitEthernet1/0/6 0
GigabitEthernet1/0/7 0 GigabitEthernet1/0/8 0
GigabitEthernet1/0/9 0 GigabitEthernet1/0/10 12400
……

display poe powersupply

Syntax

display poe powersupply

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the display poe powersupply command to view the parameters of the power sourcing equipment
(PSE).

Example

# Display the PSE parameters.

<Sysname> display poe powersupply
Unit 1
PSE ID :0
PSE Legacy Detection :disable
PSE Total Power Consumption :0 mW
PSE Available Power :128000 mW
PSE Peak Value :0 mW
PSE Average Value :0 mW
PSE Software Version :501
PSE Hardware Version :000
PSE CPLD Version :001
PSE Power-Management mode :auto

Table 1-3 Description on the fields of the display poe powersupply command

Field Description
PSE ID Identification of the PSE
PSE Legacy Detection The enabled/disabled status of the nonstandard PD detection
PSE Total Power Consumption Total power consumption of the PSE

1-4
Field Description
PSE Available Power Available power of the PSE
Power Peak Value Peak power value of the PSE
Power Average Value Average power value of the PSE

Power Software Version Version of the PSE software

Power Hardware Version Version of the PSE hardware
Version of the PSE complex programmable logical device
PSE CPLD Version
(CPLD)
PoE management mode on the port when the PSE is
overloaded:
z The auto keyword indicates that the auto mode is adopted,
PSE Power-Management mode that is, the PoE management mode based on the PoE
priority of the port is adopted
z The manual keyword indicates that the manual mode is
adopted in the PoE management on the port

display poe temperature-protection

Syntax

display poe temperature-protection

View

Any view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the display poe temperature-protection command to display the enable/disable status of the
PoE over-temperature protection function on the switch.
Related commands: poe temperature-protection enable.

Example

# Display the enable/disable status of the PoE over-temperature protection function on the switch.
<Sysname> display poe temperature-protection
The temperature protection is enabled.

poe disconnect

Syntax

poe disconnect { ac | dc }
undo poe disconnect

View

System view

1-5
Parameters

ac: Specifies the PD disconnection detection mode as ac.

dc: Specifies the PD disconnection detection mode as dc.

Description

Use the poe disconnect command to configure a PD disconnection detection mode.

Use the undo poe disconnect command to restore the default.
The default PD disconnection detection mode is AC.
Note that change to the PD disconnection detection mode may lead to power-off of some PDs.

Examples

# Set the PD disconnection detection mode to DC.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] poe disconnect dc

poe enable

Syntax

poe enable
undo poe enable

View

Ethernet port view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the poe enable command to enable the PoE feature on a port.
Use the undo poe enable command to disable the PoE feature on a port.
By default, the PoE feature on a port is enabled by the default configuration file when the device is
delivered.
If you delete the default configuration file without specifying another one, the PoE function on a port will
be disabled after you restart the device.
You can use the display poe interface command to display whether PoE is enabled on a port.

Example

# Enable the PoE feature on GigabitEthernet 1/0/3.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/3
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/3] poe enable

1-6
poe legacy enable

Syntax

poe legacy enable

undo poe legacy enable

View

System view

Parameter

Description

Use the poe power-management command to configure the PoE management mode of port used in
the case of power overloading.
Use the undo poe power-management command to restore the default mode.
By default, the PoE management mode on port is auto.
You can use the poe priority command to set the PoE priority of a port.

Example

# Configure the PoE management mode on a port to auto, that is, adopt the PoE management mode
based on the PoE priority of the port.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] poe power-management auto
Auto Power Management is enabled

poe priority

Syntax

poe priority { critical | high | low }

undo poe priority

View

Ethernet port view

Parameter

critical: Sets the port priority to critical.

high: Sets the port priority to high.
low: Sets the port priority to low.

Description

Use the poe priority command to configure the PoE priority of a port.
Use the undo poe priority command to restore the default PoE priority.
By default, the PoE priority of a port is low.
When the available power of the PSE is too small, the PoE priority and the PoE management mode are
used together to determine how to allocate PoE power for the new PDs.
1) When the manual PoE management mode is adopted:

1-9
The switch will not supply power to the new PDs if the available power of the PSE is less than 19 W.
2) When the auto PoE management mode is adopted:
z If a PD is plugged into the port with higher priority when the available power of the PSE is less than
19 W, the power supply to the port with the biggest number in the port group with the lowest priority
is turned off, so that a part of power is released for the new PD.
z If the available power of the whole switch is less than 19 W and there is no port with low priority, the
port with the inserted PD cannot supply power.

Example

# Set the PoE priority of GigabitEthernet 1/0/3 to critical.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/3
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/3] poe priority critical

poe temperature-protection

Syntax

poe temperature-protection enable

undo poe temperature-protection enable

View

System view

Parameter

None

Description

Use the poe temperature-protection enable command to enable PoE over-temperature protection on
the switch.
Use the undo poe temperature-protection enable command to disable PoE over-temperature
protection on the switch.
The PoE over-temperature protection operates as follows:
The switch disables the PoE feature on all ports when its internal temperature exceeds 61°C for
self-protect, and restores the PoE feature settings on all its ports when the temperature drops below
56°C.
By default, PoE over-temperature protection is enabled on the switch.
You can use the display poe temperature-protection command to display whether PoE
over-temperature protection is enabled on the switch.

Example

# Disable PoE over-temperature protection on the switch.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] undo poe temperature-protection enable

1-10
The temperature protection is disabled.

poe update

Syntax

poe update { refresh | full } filename

View

System view

Parameter

refresh: The refresh update mode is used when the PSE processing software is available. The refresh
update mode is to upgrade the original processing software in the PSE.
full: The full update mode is used when the PSE processing software is damaged. The full update
mode is to delete the original damaged software in the PSE completely and then reload the PoE
processing software.
filename: Update file name, with a length of 1 to 64 characters and with the extension .s19.

Description

Use the poe update command to update the PSE processing software online.

z Use the full mode only when the refresh mode fails. In normal cases, use the refresh mode.
z When the PSE processing software is damaged (that is, all the PoE commands cannot be
successfully executed), you can use the full mode to update and restore the software.
z When the online upgrading procedure is interrupted for some unexpected reason, for example, the
device is restarted due to some errors. If the upgrade in full mode fails after restart, you must
upgrade in full mode after power-off and restart of the device, and then restart the device manually.
In this way, the former PoE configuration is restored.

Example

# Update the PSE processing software online.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] poe update refresh 0400_001.S19
Update PoE board successfully

1-11
2 PoE Profile Configuration Commands

PoE Profile Configuration Commands

apply poe-profile

Syntax

In system view use the following commands:

apply poe-profile profile-name interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ]
undo apply poe-profile profile-name interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ]
In Ethernet port view use the following commands:
apply poe-profile profile-name
undo apply poe-profile profile-name

View

System view, Ethernet port view

Parameter

profile-name: Name of a PoE profile, a string of 1 to 15 characters. It starts with a letter from a to z or
from A to Z, and it cannot be any of reserved keywords like all, interface, user, undo, and mode.
interface-type interface-number: Port type and port number. With this argument provided, you can
specify the Ethernet port on which the existing PoE profile configuration is applied in system view.

Description

Use the apply poe-profile command to apply the existing PoE profile configuration to the specified
Ethernet port.
Use the undo apply poe-profile command to cancel the PoE profile configuration for the specified
Ethernet port.
Only one PoE profile can be in use at any time for each Ethernet port.

2-1
PoE profile is a set of PoE configurations. One PoE profile can contain multiple PoE features. When the
apply poe-profile command is used to apply a PoE profile to a port, some PoE features can be applied
successfully while some cannot. PoE profiles are applied to Switch 4200G according to the following
rules:
z When the apply poe-profile command is used to apply a PoE profile to a port, the PoE profile is
applied successfully only if one PoE feature in the PoE profile is applied properly. When the
display current-configuration command is used for query, it is displayed that the PoE profile is
applied properly to the port.
z If one or more features in the PoE profile are not applied properly on a port, the switch will prompt
explicitly which PoE features in the PoE profile are not applied properly on which ports.
z The display current-configuration command can be used to query which PoE profile is applied to
a port. However, the command cannot be used to query which PoE features in a PoE profile are
applied successfully.

Example

# Apply the existing PoE profile (profile-test) configuration to GigabitEthernet1/0/1 through

GigabitEthernet1/0/9 ports of the switch.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] apply poe-profile profile-test interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to
GigabitEthernet1/0/9

display poe-profile

Syntax

display poe-profile { all-profile | interface interface-type interface-number | name profile-name }

View

Any view

Parameter

all-profile: Displays all PoE profiles.

interface-type interface-number: Port type and port number. With this argument provided, you can
display the created PoE profile on a specified port.
profile-name: Name of a specified PoE profile.

Description

Use the display poe-profile command to display detailed configuration information of the created PoE
profile for a switch.
Related commands: poe-profile, apply poe-profile.

2-2
Example

# Display detailed configuration information for the PoE profile by the name of profile-test.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] display poe-profile name profile-test
Poe-profile: profile-test, 3 action
poe enable
poe max-power 5000
poe priority critical

poe-profile

Syntax

poe-profile profile-name
undo poe-profile profile-name

View

System view

Parameter

profile-name: Name of PoE profile, a string with 1 to 15 characters. It starts with a letter from a to z or
from A to Z, and it cannot be any of reserved keywords like all, interface, user, undo, and mode.

Description

Use the poe-profile command to create a PoE profile and then enter PoE profile view. If the PoE profile
is already created, you will enter PoE profile view directly.
Use the undo poe-profile command to delete an existing PoE profile.
The following PoE features can be configured in the PoE profile mode:
poe enable
poe mode { signal | spare }
poe priority { critical | high | low }
poe max-power max-power
The maximum number of PoE profiles that can be configured for a Switch 4200G is 100.
Related commands: display poe-profile, apply poe-profile.

Example

# Create a PoE profile by the name of profile-test.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] poe-profile profile-test

2-3
Table of Contents

1 PKI Configuration Commands ·················································································································1-1

PKI Configuration Commands ················································································································1-1
attribute············································································································································1-1
ca identifier ······································································································································1-2
certificate request entity···················································································································1-2
certificate request from ····················································································································1-3
certificate request mode ··················································································································1-3
certificate request polling·················································································································1-4
certificate request url ·······················································································································1-5
common-name·································································································································1-6
country·············································································································································1-6
crl check ··········································································································································1-7
crl update-period······························································································································1-7
crl url ················································································································································1-8
display pki certificate ·······················································································································1-8
display pki certificate access-control-policy···················································································1-10
display pki certificate attribute-group·····························································································1-11
display pki crl domain ····················································································································1-12
fqdn················································································································································1-13
ip (PKI entity view)·························································································································1-13
ldap-server·····································································································································1-14
locality············································································································································1-15
organization ···································································································································1-15
organization-unit ····························································································································1-16
pki certificate access-control-policy·······························································································1-16
pki certificate attribute-group ·········································································································1-17
pki delete-certificate·······················································································································1-17
pki domain ·····································································································································1-18
pki entity ········································································································································1-18
pki import-certificate ······················································································································1-19
pki request-certificate domain ·······································································································1-20
pki retrieval-certificate····················································································································1-20
pki retrieval-crl domain ··················································································································1-21
pki validate-certificate ····················································································································1-21
root-certificate fingerprint···············································································································1-22
rule (access control policy view)····································································································1-22
state ···············································································································································1-23

i
1 PKI Configuration Commands

PKI Configuration Commands

attribute

Syntax

attribute id { alt-subject-name { fqdn | ip } | { issuer-name | subject-name } { dn | fqdn | ip } } { ctn |

equ | nctn | nequ} attribute-value
undo attribute { id | all }

View

Certificate attribute group view

Parameters

id: Sequence number of the certificate attribute rule, in the range 1 to 16.
alt-subject-name: Specifies the name of the alternative certificate subject.
fqdn: Specifies the FQDN of the entity.
ip: Specifies the IP address of the entity.
issuer-name: Specifies the name of the certificate issuer.
subject-name: Specifies the name of the certificate subject.
dn: Specifies the distinguished name of the entity.
ctn: Specifies the contain operation.
equ: Specifies the equal operation.
nctn: Specifies the not-contain operation.
nequ: Specifies the not-equal operation.
attribute-value: Value of the certificate attribute, a case-insensitive string of 1 to 128 characters.
all: Specifies all certificate attributes.

Description

Use the attribute command to configure the attribute rules of the certificate issuer name, certificate
subject name and alternative certificate subject name.
Use the undo attribute command to delete the attribute rules of one or all certificates.
By default, there is no restriction on the issuer name, subject name, and alternative subject name of a
certificate.
Note that the attribute of the alternative certificate subject name does not appear as a distinguished
name, and therefore the dn keyword is not available for the attribute.

1-1
Examples

# Create a certificate attribute rule, specifying that the DN in the subject name includes the string of abc.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki certificate attribute-group mygroup
[Sysname-cert-attribute-group-mygroup] attribute 1 subject-name dn ctn abc

# Create a certificate attribute rule, specifying that the FQDN in the issuer name cannot be the string of
abc.
[Sysname-cert-attribute-group-mygroup] attribute 2 issuer-name fqdn nequ abc

# Create a certificate attribute rule, specifying that the IP address in the alternative subject name cannot
be 10.0.0.1.
[Sysname-cert-attribute-group-mygroup] attribute 3 alt-subject-name ip nequ 10.0.0.1

ca identifier

Syntax

ca identifier name
undo ca identifier

View

PKI domain view

Parameters

name: Identifier of the trusted CA, a case-insensitive string of 1 to 63 characters.

Description

Use the ca identifier command to specify the trusted CA and bind the device with the CA.
Use the undo ca identifier command to remove the configuration.
By default, no trusted CA is specified for a PKI domain.
Certificate request, retrieval, revocation, and query all depend on the trusted CA.

Examples

# Specify the trusted CA as new-ca.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki domain 1
[Sysname-pki-domain-1] ca identifier new-ca

certificate request entity

Syntax

certificate request entity entity-name

undo certificate request entity

View

PKI domain view

1-2
Parameters

Description

Use the certificate request polling command to specify the certificate request polling interval and
attempt limit.

1-4
Use the undo certificate request polling command to restore the defaults.
By default, the polling is executed every 20 minutes for up to 5 times.
After an applicant makes a certificate request, the CA may need a long period of time if it verifies the
certificate request manually. During this period, the applicant needs to query the status of the request
periodically to get the certificate as soon as possible after the certificate is signed.
Related commands: display pki certificate.

Examples

# Specify the polling interval as 15 minutes and the maximum number of attempts as 40.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki domain 1
[Sysname-pki-domain-1] certificate request polling interval 15
[Sysname-pki-domain-1] certificate request polling count 40

certificate request url

Syntax

certificate request url url-string

undo certificate request url

View

PKI domain view

Parameters

url-string: URL of the server for certificate request, a case-insensitive string of 1 to 225 characters. It
comprises the location of the server and the location of CGI command interface script in the format of
http: //server_location/ca_script_location, where server_location must be an IP address and does not
support domain name resolution currently.

Description

Use the certificate request url command to specify the URL of the server for certificate request
through SCEP.
Use the undo certificate request url command to remove the configuration.
By default, no URL is specified for a PKI domain.

Examples

# Specify the URL of the server for certificate request.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki domain 1
[Sysname-pki-domain-1] certificate request url
http://169.254.0.100/certsrv/mscep/mscep.dll

1-5
common-name

Syntax

common-name name
undo common-name

View

PKI entity view

Parameters

name: Common name of an entity, a case-insensitive string of 1 to 31 characters. No comma can be

included.

Description

Use the common-name command to configure the common name of an entity, which can be, for
example, the user name.
Use the undo common-name command to remove the configuration.
By default, no common name is specified.

Examples

# Configure the common name of an entity as test.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki entity 1
[Sysname-pki-entity-1] common-name test

country

Syntax

country country-code-str
undo country

View

PKI entity view

Parameters

country-code-str: Country code for the entity, a 2-character case-insensitive string.

Description

Use the country command to specify the code of the country to which an entity belongs. It is a standard
2-character code, for example, CN for China.
Use the undo country command to remove the configuration.
By default, no country code is specified.

Examples

# Set the country code of an entity to CN.

1-6
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki entity 1
[Sysname-pki-entity-1] country CN

crl check

Syntax

crl check disable

undo crl check disable

View

PKI domain view

Parameters

disable: Disables CRL checking.

Description

Use the crl check command to disable CRL checking. Use the undo crl check command to restore the
defaults.
By default, CRL checking is enabled.
CRLs are files issued by the CA to publish all certificates that have been revoked. Revocation of a
certificate may occur before the certificate expires. CRL checking is intended for checking whether a
certificate has been revoked. A revoked certificate is no longer trusted.

Examples

# Disable CRL checking.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki domain 1
[Sysname-pki-domain-1] crl check disable

crl update-period

Syntax

crl update-period hours

undo crl update-period

View

PKI domain view

Parameters

hours: CRL update period, in the range 1 to 720 hours.

Description

Use the crl update-period command to set the CRL update period, that is, the interval at which the PKI
entity downloads the latest CRLs.
Use the undo crl update-period command to restore the default.

1-7
By default, the CRL update period depends on the next update field in the CRL file.
The CRL update period is the interval at which a PKI entity with a certificate downloads a CRL from
LDAP server.

Examples

# Set the CRL update period to 20 hours.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki domain 1
[Sysname-pki-domain-1] crl update-period 20

crl url

Syntax

crl url url-string

undo crl url

View

PKI domain view

Parameters

url-string: URL of the CRL distribution point, a case-insensitive string of 1 to 255 characters in the format
of ldap://server_location or http://server_location, where server_location must be an IP address and
does not support domain name resolution currently.

Description

Use the crl url command to specify the URL of the CRL distribution point.
Use the undo crl url command to remove the configuration.
By default, no CRL distribution point URL is specified.
Note that when the URL of the CRL distribution point is not set, you should acquire the CA certificate
and a local certificate, and then acquire a CRL through SCEP.

Examples

# Specify the URL of the CRL distribution point.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki domain 1
[Sysname-pki-domain-1] crl url ldap://169.254.0.30

display pki certificate

Syntax

display pki certificate { { ca | local } domain domain-name | request-status }

View

Any view

1-8
Parameters

ca: Displays the CA certificate.

local: Displays the local certificate.
domain-name: Name of the PKI domain, a string of 1 to 15 characters.
request-status: Displays the status of a certificate request.

Description

Use the display pki certificate command to display the contents or request status of a certificate.
Related commands: pki retrieval-certificate, pki domain and certificate request polling.

Examples

# Display the local certificate.

<Sysname> display pki certificate local domain 1
Certificate:
Data:
Version: 3 (0x2)
Serial Number:
10B7D4E3 00010000 0086
Signature Algorithm: md5WithRSAEncryption
Issuer:
[email protected]
C=CN
ST=Country A
L=City X
O=abc
OU=bjs
CN=new-ca
Validity
Not Before: Jan 13 08:57:21 2004 GMT
Not After : Jan 20 09:07:21 2005 GMT
Subject:
C=CN
ST=Country B
L=City Y
CN=pki test
Subject Public Key Info:
Public Key Algorithm: rsaEncryption
RSA Public Key: (512 bit)
Modulus (512 bit):
00D41D1F …
Exponent: 65537 (0x10001)
X509v3 extensions:
X509v3 Subject Alternative Name:
DNS: hyf.xxyyzz.net
X509v3 CRL Distribution Points:
URI:http://1.1.1.1:447/myca.crl

1-9
… …
Signature Algorithm: md5WithRSAEncryption
A3A5A447 4D08387D …

Table 1-1 display pki certificate command output description

Field Description
Version Version of the certificate
Serial Number Serial number of the certificate
Signature Algorithm Signature algorithm

Issuer Issuer of the certificate

Validity Validity period of the certificate
Subject Entity holding the certificate
Subject Public Key Info Public key information of the entity
X509v3 extensions Extensions of the X.509 (version 3) certificate
X509v3 CRL Distribution Points Distribution points of X.509 (version 3) CRLs

display pki certificate access-control-policy

Syntax

display pki certificate access-control-policy { policy-name | all }

View

Any view

Parameters

policy-name: Name of the certificate attribute-based access control policy, a string of 1 to 16 characters.
all: Specifies all certificate attribute-based access control policies.

Description

Use the display pki certificate access-control-policy command to display information about a
specified or all certificate attribute-based access control policies.

Examples

# Display information about the certificate attribute-based access control policy named mypolicy.
<Sysname> display pki certificate access-control-policy mypolicy
access-control-policy name: mypolicy
rule 1 deny mygroup1
rule 2 permit mygroup2

Table 1-2 display pki certificate access-control-policy command output description

Field Description
Name of the certificate attribute-based access
access-control-policy
control policy

1-10
Field Description
rule number Number of the access control rule

display pki certificate attribute-group

Syntax

display pki certificate attribute-group { group-name | all }

View

Any view

Parameters

group-name: Name of a certificate attribute group, a string of 1 to 16 characters.

all: Specifies all certificate attribute groups.

Description

Use the display pki certificate attribute-group command to display information about a specified or
all certificate attribute groups.

Examples

# Display information about certificate attribute group mygroup.

<Sysname> display pki certificate attribute-group mygroup
attribute group name: mygroup
attribute 1 subject-name dn ctn abc
attribute 2 issuer-name fqdn nctn app

Table 1-3 display pki certificate attribute-group command output description

Field Description
attribute group name Name of the certificate attribute group
attribute number Number of the attribute rule
subject-name Name of the certificate subject
dn DN of the entity
ctn Indicates the contain operations
abc Value of attribute 1
issuer-name Name of the certificate issuer
fqdn FQDN of the entity
nctn Indicates the not-contain operations
app Value of attribute 2

1-11
display pki crl domain

Syntax

display pki crl domain domain-name

View

Any view

Parameters

domain-name: Name of the PKI domain, a string of 1 to 15 characters.

Description

Use the display pki crl domain command to display the locally saved CRLs.
Related commands: pki retrieval-crl, pki domain.

Examples

# Display the locally saved CRLs.

<Sysname> display pki crl domain 1
Certificate Revocation List (CRL):
Version 2 (0x1)
Signature Algorithm: sha1WithRSAEncryption
Issuer:
C=CN
O=abc
OU=soft
CN=A Test Root
Last Update: Jan 5 08:44:19 2004 GMT
Next Update: Jan 5 21:42:13 2004 GMT
CRL extensions:
X509v3 Authority Key Identifier:
keyid:0F71448E E075CAB8 ADDB3A12 0B747387 45D612EC
Revoked Certificates:
Serial Number: 05a234448E…
Revocation Date: Sep 6 12:33:22 2004 GMT
CRL entry extensions:…
Serial Number: 05a278445E…
Revocation Date: Sep 7 12:33:22 2004 GMT
CRL entry extensions:…

Table 1-4 display pki crl domain command output description

Field Description
Version Version of the CRLs
Signature Algorithm Signature algorithm used by the CRLs
Issuer CA issuing the CRLs
Last Update Last update time

1-12
Field Description
Next Update Next update time
CRL extensions Extensions of CRL
CA issuing the CRLs. The certificate version is
X509v3 Authority Key Identifier
X.509v3.
ID of the public key
keyid A CA may have multiple key pairs. This field
indicates the key pair used by the CRL’s
signature.
Revoked Certificates Revoked certificates

Serial Number Serial number of the revoked certificate

Revocation Date Revocation date of the certificate

fqdn

Syntax

fqdn name-str
undo fqdn

View

PKI entity view

Parameters

name-str: Fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an entity, a case-insensitive string of 1 to 255
characters.

Description

Use the fqdn command to configure the FQDN of an entity.

Use the undo fqdn command to remove the configuration.
By default, no FQDN is specified for an entity.
An FQDN is the unique identifier of an entity on a network. It consists of a host name and a domain
name and can be resolved into an IP address.

Examples

# Configure the FQDN of an entity as pki.domain-name.com.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki entity 1
[Sysname-pki-entity-1] fqdn pki.domain-name.com

ip (PKI entity view)

Syntax

ip ip-address

1-13
undo ip

View

PKI entity view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address for an entity.

Description

Use the ip command to configure the IP address of an entity.

Use the undo ip command to remove the configuration.
By default, no IP address is specified for an entity.

Examples

# Configure the IP address of an entity as 11.0.0.1.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki entity 1
[Sysname-pki-entity-1] ip 11.0.0.1

1-15
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki entity 1
[Sysname-pki-entity-1] organization org-name

organization-unit

Syntax

organization-unit org-unit-name
undo organization-unit

View

PKI entity view

Parameters

org-unit-name: Organization unit name for distinguishing different units in an organization, a

case-insensitive string of 1 to 31 characters. No comma can be included.

Description

Use the organization-unit command to specify the name of the organization unit to which this entity
belongs.
Use the undo organization-unit command to remove the configuration.
By default, no organization unit name is specified for an entity.

Examples

# Configure the name of the organization unit to which an entity belongs as unit-name.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki entity 1
[Sysname-pki-entity-1] organization-unit unit-name

pki certificate access-control-policy

Syntax

pki certificate access-control-policy policy-name

undo pki certificate access-control-policy { policy-name | all }

View

System view

Parameters

policy-name: Name of the certificate attribute-based access control policy, a case-insensitive string of 1
to 16 characters. It cannot be “a”, “al” or “all”.
all: Specifies all certificate attribute-based access control policies.

Description

Use the pki certificate access-control-policy command to create a certificate attribute-based access
control policy and enter its view.

1-16
Use the undo pki certificate access-control-policy command to remove a specified or all certificate
attribute-based access control policies.
No access control policy exists by default.

Examples

# Configure an access control policy named mypolicy and enter its view.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki certificate access-control-policy mypolicy
[Sysname-pki-cert-acp-mypolicy]

pki certificate attribute-group

Syntax

pki certificate attribute-group group-name

undo pki certificate attribute-group { group-name | all }

View

System view

Parameters

group-name: Name for the certificate attribute group, a case-insensitive string of 1 to 16 character.
all: Specifies all certificate attribute groups.

Description

Use the pki certificate attribute-group command to create a certificate attribute group and enter its
view.
Use the undo pki certificate attribute-group command to delete one or all certificate attribute groups.
By default, no certificate attribute group exists.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki domain 1
[Sysname-pki-domain-1]

pki entity

Syntax

pki entity entity-name

undo pki entity entity-name

View

System view

1-18
Parameters

entity-name: Name for the entity, a case-insensitive string of 1 to 15 characters.

Description

Use the pki entity command to create a PKI entity and enter PKI entity view.
Use the undo pki entity command to remove a PKI entity.
By default, no entity exists.
You can configure a variety of attributes for an entity in PKI entity view. An entity is intended only for
convenience of reference by other commands.

Examples

# Create a PKI entity named en and enter its view.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki entity en
[Sysname-pki-entity-en]

pki import-certificate

Syntax

pki import-certificate { ca | local } domain domain-name { der | p12 | pem } [ filename filename ]

View

System view

Parameters

ca: Specifies the CA certificate.

local: Specifies the local certificate.
domain-name: Name of the PKI domain, a string of 1 to 15 characters.
der: Specifies the certificate format of DER.
p12: Specifies the certificate format of P12.
pem: Specifies the certificate format of PEM.
filename: Name of the certificate file, a case-insensitive string of 1 to 127 characters. It defaults to
domain-name_ca.cer, domain-name_local.cer, or domain-name_peerentity_entity-name.cer, the name
for the file to be created to save the imported certificate.

Description

Use the pki import-certificate command to import a CA certificate or local certificate from a file and
save it locally.
Related commands: pki domain.

Examples

# Import the CA certificate for PKI domain cer in the format of PEM.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki import-certificate ca domain cer pem

1-19
pki request-certificate domain

Syntax

pki request-certificate domain domain-name [ password ] [ pkcs10 [ filename filename ] ]

View

System view

Parameters

domain-name: Name of the PKI domain name, a string of 1 to 15 characters.

password: Password for certificate revocation, a case-sensitive string of 1 to 31 characters.
pkcs10: Displays the BASE64-encoded PKCS#10 certificate request.
filename: Name of the file for saving the PKCS#10 certificate request, a case-insensitive string of 1 to
127 characters.

Description

Use the pki request-certificate domain command to request a local certificate from a CA through
SCEP. If SCEP fails, you can use the pkcs10 keyword to save the local certificate request in BASE64
format and send it to the CA by an out-of-band means like phone, disk or e-mail.
This operation will not be saved in the configuration file.
Related commands: pki domain.

Examples

# Display the PKCS#10 certificate request information.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki request-certificate domain 1 pkcs10

pki retrieval-certificate

Syntax

pki retrieval-certificate { ca | local } domain domain-name

View

System view

Parameters

ca: Retrieves the CA certificate.

local: Retrieves the local certificate.
domain-name: Name of the PKI domain used for certificate request.

Description

Use the pki retrieval-certificate command to retrieve a certificate from the server for certificate
distribution.
Related commands: pki domain.

1-20
Examples

# Retrieve the CA certificate from the certificate issuing server.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki retrieval-certificate ca domain 1

pki retrieval-crl domain

Syntax

pki retrieval-crl domain domain-name

View

System view

Parameters

domain-name: Name of the PKI domain, a string of 1 to 15 characters.

Description

Use the pki retrieval-crl command to retrieve the latest CRLs from the server for CRL distribution.
CRLs are used to verify the validity of certificates.
Related commands: pki domain.

Examples

# Retrieve CRLs.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki retrieval-crl domain 1

pki validate-certificate

Syntax

pki validate-certificate { ca | local } domain domain-name

View

System view

Parameters

ca: Verifies the CA certificate.

local: Verifies the local certificate.
domain-name: Name of the PKI domain to which the certificate to be verified belongs, a string of 1 to 15
characters.

Description

Use the pki validate-certificate command to verify the validity of a certificate.

The focus of certificate validity verification is to check that the certificate is signed by the CA and that the
certificate has neither expired nor been revoked.
Related commands: pki domain.

1-21
Examples

# Verify the validity of the local certificate.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki validate-certificate local domain 1

root-certificate fingerprint

Syntax

root-certificate fingerprint { md5 | sha1 } string

undo root-certificate fingerprint

View

PKI domain view

Parameters

md5: Uses an MD5 fingerprint.

sha1: Uses a SHA1 fingerprint.
string: Fingerprint to be used. An MD5 fingerprint must be a string of 32 characters in hexadecimal. A
SHA1 fingerprint must be a string of 40 characters in hexadecimal.

Description

Use the root-certificate fingerprint command to configure the fingerprint to be used for verifying the
validity of the CA root certificate.
Use the undo root-certificate fingerprint command to remove the configuration.
By default, no fingerprint is configured for verifying the validity of the CA root certificate.

Examples

# Configure an MD5 fingerprint for verifying the validity of the CA root certificate.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki domain 1
[Sysname-pki-domain-1] root-certificate fingerprint md5 12EF53FA355CD23E12EF53FA355CD23E

# Configure a SHA1 fingerprint for verifying the validity of the CA root certificate.
[Sysname-pki-domain-1] root-certificate fingerprint sha1
D1526110AAD7527FB093ED7FC037B0B3CDDDAD93

rule (access control policy view)

Syntax

rule [ id ] { deny | permit } group-name

undo rule { id | all }

View

Access control policy view

1-22
Parameters

id: Number of the certificate attribute access control rule, in the range 1 to 16. The default is the smallest
unused number in this range.
deny: Indicates that a certificate whose attributes match an attribute rule in the specified attribute group
is considered invalid and denied.
permit: Indicates that a certificate whose attributes match an attribute rule in the specified attribute
group is considered valid and permitted.
group-name: Name of the certificate attribute group to be associated with the rule.
all: Specifies all access control rules.

Description

Use the rule command to create a certificate attribute access control rule.
Use the undo rule command to delete a specified or all access control rules.
By default, no access control rule exists.
Note that a certificate attribute group must exist to be associated with a rule.

Examples

# Create an access control rule, specifying that a certificate is considered valid when it matches an
attribute rule in certificate attribute group mygroup.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] pki certificate access-control-policy mypolicy
[Sysname-pki-cert-acp-mypolicy] rule 1 permit mygroup

state

Syntax

state state-name
undo state

View

PKI entity view

Parameters

state-name: State or province name, a case-insensitive string of 1 to 31 characters. No comma can be

included.

Description

Use the state command to specify the name of the state or province where an entity resides.
Use the undo state command to remove the configuration.
By default, no state or province is specified.

Examples

# Specify the state where an entity resides.

<Sysname> system-view

1-23
[Sysname] pki entity 1
[Sysname-pki-entity-1] state country

1-24
Table of Contents

1 SSL Configuration Commands ················································································································1-1

SSL Configuration Commands ···············································································································1-1
ciphersuite ·······································································································································1-1
client-verify enable···························································································································1-2
close-mode wait·······························································································································1-2
display ssl client-policy ····················································································································1-3
display ssl server-policy···················································································································1-3
handshake timeout ··························································································································1-5
pki-domain ·······································································································································1-5
prefer-cipher ····································································································································1-6
session ············································································································································1-7
ssl client-policy ································································································································1-7
ssl server-policy·······························································································································1-8
version ·············································································································································1-9

i
1 SSL Configuration Commands

SSL Configuration Commands

ciphersuite

Syntax

ciphersuite [ rsa_3des_ede_cbc_sha | rsa_aes_128_cbc_sha | rsa_aes_256_cbc_sha |

rsa_des_cbc_sha | rsa_rc4_128_md5 | rsa_rc4_128_sha ] *

View

SSL server policy view

Parameters

rsa_3des_ede_cbc_sha: Specifies the key exchange algorithm of RSA, the data encryption algorithm
of 3DES_EDE_CBC, and the MAC algorithm of SHA.
rsa_aes_128_cbc_sha: Specifies the key exchange algorithm of RSA, the data encryption algorithm of
128-bit AES_CBC, and the MAC algorithm of SHA.
rsa_aes_256_cbc_sha: Specifies the key exchange algorithm of RSA, the data encryption algorithm
256-bit AES_CBC, and the MAC algorithm of SHA.
rsa_des_cbc_sha: Specifies the key exchange algorithm of RSA, the data encryption algorithm of
DES_CBC, and the MAC algorithm of SHA.
rsa_rc4_128_md5: Specifies the key exchange algorithm of RSA, the data encryption algorithm of
128-bit RC4, and the MAC algorithm of MD5.
rsa_rc4_128_sha: Specifies the key exchange algorithm of RSA, the data encryption algorithm of
128-bit RC4, and the MAC algorithm of SHA.

Description

Use the ciphersuite command to specify the cipher suite(s) for an SSL server policy to support.
By default, an SSL server policy supports all cipher suites.
With no keyword specified, the command configures an SSL server policy to support all cipher suites.

Examples

# Specify the cipher suites for SSL server policy policy1 to support as rsa_rc4_128_md5 and
rsa_rc4_128_sha.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] ssl server-policy policy1
[Sysname-ssl-server-policy-policy1] ciphersuite rsa_rc4_128_md5 rsa_rc4_128_sha

1-1
client-verify enable

Syntax

client-verify enable
undo client-verify enable

View

SSL server policy view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the client-verify enable command to enable certificate-based SSL client authentication, that is, to
enable the SSL server to perform certificate-based authentication of the client during the SSL
handshake process.
Use the undo client-verify enable command to restore the default.
By default, certificate-based SSL client authentication is disabled.

Examples

# Enable certificate-based client authentication.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] ssl server-policy policy1
[Sysname-ssl-server-policy-policy1] client-verify enable

close-mode wait

Syntax

close-mode wait
undo close-mode wait

View

SSL server policy view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the close-mode wait command to set the SSL connection close mode to wait. In this mode, after
sending a close-notify message to a client, the server does not close the connection until it receives a
close-notify message from the client.
Use the undo close-mode wait command to restore the default.
By default, an SSL server sends a close-notify alert message to the client and close the connection
without waiting for the close-notify alert message from the client.

1-2
Examples

# Set the SSL connection close mode to wait mode.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] ssl server-policy policy1
[Sysname-ssl-server-policy-policy1] close-mode wait

display ssl client-policy

Syntax

display ssl client-policy { policy-name | all }

View

Any view

Parameters

policy-name: SSL client policy name, a case-insensitive string of 1 to 16 characters.

all: Displays information about all SSL client policies.

Description

Use the display ssl client-policy command to view information about a specified or all SSL client
policies.

Examples

# Display information about SSL client policy policy1.

<Sysname> display ssl client-policy policy1
SSL Client Policy: policy1
SSL Version: SSL 3.0
PKI Domain: 1
Prefer Ciphersuite:
RSA_RC4_128_SHA

Table 1-1 display ssl client-policy command output description

Field Description
SSL Client Policy SSL client policy name
Version of the protocol used by the SSL client
SSL Version
policy, SSL 3.0 or TLS 1.0.
PKI Domain PKI domain of the SSL client policy
Prefer Ciphersuite Preferred cipher suite of the SSL client policy

display ssl server-policy

Syntax

display ssl server-policy { policy-name | all }

1-3
View

Any view

Parameters

policy-name: SSL server policy name, a case-insensitive string of 1 to 16 characters.

all: Displays information about all SSL server policies.

Description

Use the display ssl server-policy command to view information about a specified or all SSL server
policies.

Examples

# Display information about SSL server policy policy1.

SSL Server Policy: policy1
PKI Domain: domain1
Ciphersuite:
RSA_RC4_128_MD5
RSA_RC4_128_SHA
RSA_DES_CBC_SHA
RSA_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
RSA_AES_128_CBC_SHA
RSA_AES_256_CBC_SHA
Handshake Timeout: 3600
Close-mode: wait disabled
Session Timeout: 3600
Session Cachesize: 500
Client-verify: disabled

Table 1-2 display ssl server-policy command output description

Field Description
SSL Server Policy SSL server policy name
PKI Domain PKI domain used by the SSL server policy
Ciphersuite Cipher suite supported by the SSL server policy
Handshake Timeout Handshake timeout time of the SSL server policy, in seconds
Close mode of the SSL server policy, which can be:
z wait disabled: In this mode, the server sends a close-notify message
to the client and then closes the connection immediately without
Close-mode waiting for the close-notify message of the client.
z wait enabled: In this mode, the server sends a close-notify message
to the client and then waits for the close-notify message of the client.
Only after receiving the expected message, does the server close the
connection.
Session Timeout Session timeout time of the SSL server policy, in seconds
Session Cachesize Maximum number of buffered sessions of the SSL server policy
Client-verify Whether client authentication is enabled

1-4
handshake timeout

Syntax

handshake timeout time

undo handshake timeout

View

SSL server policy view

Parameters

time: Handshake timeout time in seconds, in the range 180 to 7,200.

Description

Use the handshake timeout command to set the handshake timeout time for an SSL server policy.
Use the undo handshake timeout command to restore the default.
By default, the handshake timeout time is 3,600 seconds.
If the SSL server does not receive any packet from the SSL client before the handshake timeout time
expires, the SSL server will terminate the handshake process.

Examples

# Set the handshake timeout time of SSL server policy policy1 to 3,000 seconds.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] ssl server-policy policy1
[Sysname-ssl-server-policy-policy1] handshake timeout 3000

pki-domain

Syntax

pki-domain domain-name
undo pki-domain

View

SSL server policy view, SSL client policy view

Parameters

domain-name: Name of a PKI domain, a case-insensitive string of 1 to 15 characters.

Description

Use the pki-domain command to specify a PKI domain for an SSL server policy or SSL client policy.
Use the undo pki-domain command to restore the default.
By default, no PKI domain is configured for an SSL server policy or SSL client policy.

Examples

# Configure SSL server policy policy1 to use the PKI domain named server-domain.
<Sysname> system-view

1-5
[Sysname] ssl server-policy policy1
[Sysname-ssl-server-policy-policy1] pki-domain server-domain

# Configure SSL client policy policy1 to use the PKI domain named client-domain.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] ssl client-policy policy1
[Sysname-ssl-client-policy-policy1] pki-domain client-domain

prefer-cipher

Syntax

prefer-cipher { rsa_3des_ede_cbc_sha | rsa_aes_128_cbc_sha | rsa_aes_256_cbc_sha |

rsa_des_cbc_sha | rsa_rc4_128_md5 | rsa_rc4_128_sha }
undo prefer-cipher

View

SSL client policy view

Parameters

rsa_3des_ede_cbc_sha: Specifies the key exchange algorithm of RSA, the data encryption algorithm
of 3DES_EDE_CBC, and the MAC algorithm of SHA.
rsa_aes_128_cbc_sha: Specifies the key exchange algorithm of RSA, the data encryption algorithm of
128-bit AES_CBC, and the MAC algorithm of SHA.
rsa_aes_256_cbc_sha: Specifies the key exchange algorithm of RSA, the data encryption algorithm of
256-bit AES_CBC, and the MAC algorithm of SHA.
rsa_des_cbc_sha: Specifies the key exchange algorithm of RSA, the data encryption algorithm of
DES_CBC, and the MAC algorithm of SHA.
rsa_rc4_128_md5: Specifies the key exchange algorithm of RSA, the data encryption algorithm of
128-bit RC4, and the MAC algorithm of MD5.
rsa_rc4_128_sha: Specifies the key exchange algorithm of RSA, the data encryption algorithm of
128-bit RC4, and the MAC algorithm of SHA.

Description

Use the prefer-cipher command to specify the preferred cipher suite for an SSL client policy.
Use the undo prefer-cipher command to restore the default.
By default, the preferred cipher suite for an SSL client policy is rsa_rc4_128_md5.
Related commands: display ssl client-policy.

Examples

# Set the preferred cipher suite for SSL client policy policy1 to rsa_aes_128_cbc_sha.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] ssl client-policy policy1
[Sysname-ssl-client-policy-policy1] prefer-cipher rsa_aes_128_cbc_sha

1-6
session

Syntax

session { cachesize size | timeout time } *

Description

Use the ssl server-policy command to create an SSL server policy and enter its view.
Use the undo ssl server-policy command to remove a specified or all SSL server policies.
Note that you cannot delete an SSL server policy that has been associated with one or more application
layer protocols.

Examples

# Create an SSL server policy named policy1 and enter its view.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] ssl server-policy policy1
[Sysname-ssl-server-policy-policy1]

1-8
version

Syntax

version { ssl3.0 | tls1.0 }

undo version

View

SSL client policy view

Parameters

ssl3.0: Specifies SSL 3.0.

tls1.0: Specifies TLS 1.0.

Description

Use the version command to specify the SSL protocol version for an SSL client policy.
Use the undo version command to restore the default.
By default, the SSL protocol version for an SSL client policy is TLS 1.0.
Related commands: display ssl client-policy.

Examples

# Specify the SSL protocol version for SSL client policy policy1 as SSL 3.0.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] ssl client-policy policy1
[Sysname-ssl-client-policy-policy1] version ssl3.0

1-9
Table of Contents

1 Web Authentication Configuration Commands ·····················································································1-1

Web Authentication Configuration Commands·······················································································1-1
display web-authentication configuration ························································································1-1
display web-authentication connection····························································································1-2
web-authentication customize ·········································································································1-3
web-authentication cut connection ··································································································1-5
web-authentication enable ··············································································································1-6
web-authentication free-ip ···············································································································1-6
web-authentication free-user···········································································································1-7
web-authentication max-connection································································································1-8
web-authentication protocol ············································································································1-9
web-authentication select method···································································································1-9
web-authentication timer idle-cut···································································································1-10
web-authentication timer max-online·····························································································1-11
web-authentication web-server ·····································································································1-12

i
1 Web Authentication Configuration Commands

Web Authentication Configuration Commands

display web-authentication configuration

Syntax

display web-authentication configuration

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display web-authentication configuration command to display all Web authentication
configurations, including global configurations and configurations on individual ports.

Examples

# Display Web authentication configuration information.

<Sysname> display web-authentication configuration
Status: enabled
Web Server: IP=30.1.1.2 Port=80
Idle-cut time: 900 sec
Max-online time: 1800 sec
Max-connection of device is: 512
Customized authentication-page information :
Corp-Name: 3Com Corporation
Platform-Name: A leading global supplier of IP-based products and solutions
Phone-Num: 1-800-876-3266
Email-address: [email protected]
File:
Free IP:
1) IP=10.1.1.0 Net Mask=255.255.255.0
Free User:
1) IP=192.168.0.108 MAC=000d-88f6-44c1
Interface Configuration:
Interface_number method max-connection
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 shared 128
GigabitEthernet1/0/14 shared 128

1-1
Table 1-1 Description on the fields of display web-authentication configuration

Field Description
Status Global status of Web authentication
IP address and port number of the Web
Web Server
authentication server
Idle-cut time idle user checking interval
Maximum online time specified for Web
Max-online time
authentication users
Maximum number of Web authentication users
Max-connection of device
allowed on the device
Customized information to be displayed on
authentication pages, including company name,
Customized authentication-page information
subject, contact phone number, and E-mail
address.
Free IP Free IP address range information
Free User Authentication-free user information
Configuration information about
Interface Configuration
Web-authentication-enabled ports
Interface_number Index of a Web-authentication-enabled port
User access method on the port, Shared or
method
Designated.
Maximum number of online users allowed on the
max-connection
port

display web-authentication connection

Syntax

display web-authentication connection { all | interface interface-type interface-number | user-name

user-name }

View

Any view

Parameters

all: Displays information about all online Web-authentication users.

interface-type interface-number: Type and number of an interface.
user-name: Name of a user, a string of 1 to 184 characters.

Description

Use the display web-authentication connection command to display information about specified or
all online Web-authentication users.

Examples

# Display information about all online Web-authentication users.

1-2
<Sysname> display web-authentication connection all
Username: 1
MAC: 000d-88f6-44c1 Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/1
VLAN: 2 Method: Shared
State: ONLINE Online-Time(s): 8

Total 1 connection(s) matched

Table 1-2 Description on the fields of display web-authentication connection

Field Description
Username Name of an online Web-authentication user
MAC MAC address of the user
Interface Access port of the user
VLAN VLAN the user belongs to
Access method of the user, Shared or
Method
Designated.
State User status
Online-Time(s) Online time of the user

web-authentication customize

Syntax

web-authentication customize { corp-name corporation-text | email email-string | phone-num

phonenum-string | platform-name platform-text | file web-file }
undo web-authentication customize { corp-name | email | phone-num | platform-name | file | all }

View

System view

Parameters

corp-name: Specifies the company name to be displayed on Web authentication pages.

corporation-text: Company name, a string of 1 to 64 characters that can contain spaces.
email: Specifies the E-mail address to be displayed on Web authentication pages.
email-string: E-mail address, a string of 1 to 64 characters that can contain spaces. If it contains spaces,
it must be enclosed with a pair of double quotation marks.
phone-num: Specifies the phone number to be displayed on Web authentication pages.
phonenum-string: Phone number, a string of 1 to 32 characters that can contain spaces. If it contains
spaces, it must be enclosed with a pair of double quotation marks.
platform-name: Specifies the subject to be displayed on Web authentication pages.
platform-text: Subject introduction, a string of 1 to 128 characters that can contain spaces.
file: Specifies the custom web file.
web-file: Specifies the name of a web file with a string of 1 to 142 letters.

1-3
all: Restores all customized items to the defaults.

Description

Use the web-authentication customize command to customize the company name, subject, contact
phone number, and E-mail address to be displayed on authentication pages or to specify the custom
web file. After the configuration, the customized information will be displayed on all Web pages provided
during the authentication process.
Use the undo web-authentication customize command to restore the specified or all customized
items to the defaults.
By default, no customized information is configured to be displayed on Web authentication pages.

Examples

# Customize information to be displayed on Web authentication pages as follows:

z Company name: 3Com Corporation
z E-mail: [email protected]
z Phone number: 1-800-876-3266
z Subject: A leading global supplier of IP-based products and solutions
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] web-authentication customize corp-name 3Com Corporation
[Sysname] web-authentication customize email [email protected]
[Sysname] web-authentication customize phone-num 1-800-876-3266
[Sysname] web-authentication customize platform-name A leading global supplier of IP-based
products and solutions

After the above configuration, the customized information will be displayed on the Web authentication
page, as shown in Figure 1-1.

1-4
Figure 1-1 Web authentication page with customized information

web-authentication cut connection

Syntax

web-authentication cut connection { all | mac mac-address | user-name user-name | interface

interface-type interface-number }

View

System view

Parameters

all: Specifies all online users.

mac mac-address: Specifies an user by the user’s MAC address.
user-name user-name: Specifies a user by the user’s name, which is a string of 1 to 184 characters.
interface-type interface-number: Specifies all users on a port.

Description

Use the web-authentication cut connection command to forcibly log out the specified or all users.

Examples

# Forcibly log out all online users on GigabitEthernet 1/0/2.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] web-authentication cut connection interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2

1-5
web-authentication enable

Syntax

web-authentication enable
undo web-authentication enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the web-authentication enable command to enable Web authentication globally.

Use the undo web-authentication enable command to disable Web authentication globally.

Web authentication cannot be enabled when one of the following features is enabled, and vice versa:
802.1x, MAC authentication, port security and port aggregation.

Examples

# Enable Web authentication globally.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] web-authentication web-server ip 192.168.0.56 port 80
[Sysname] web-authentication enable

web-authentication free-ip

Syntax

web-authentication free-ip ip-address { mask-length | mask }

undo web-authentication free-ip { ip-address { mask-length | mask } | all }

View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address.
mask-length: Mask length, ranging from 1 to 32.
mask: Mask address.

1-6
Description

Use the web-authentication free-ip command to set a free IP address range, which can be accessed
by users before they pass Web authentication.
Use the undo web-authentication free-ip command to remove the setting or all such settings.
By default, no free IP address range is set.

z The to-be-set free IP address range cannot include the Web authentication server’s IP address.
z At most four free IP address range can be set.

Examples

# Set IP address range 10.1.1.0/24 as a free address range.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] web-authentication free-ip 10.1.1.0 24

web-authentication free-user

Syntax

web-authentication free-user ip ip-address mac mac-address

undo web-authentication free-user { ip ip-address mac mac-address | all }

View

System view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address of a user.

mac-address: MAC address of the user, in the format of H-H-H (for example, 000d-88f6-44c1).
all: Deletes all authentication-free user settings.

Description

Use the web-authentication free-user command to set an authentication-free user, so that a user
whose source IP and MAC addresses are both identical with those of the authentication-free user can
access the network without the necessary to pass the Web authentication.
Use the undo web-authentication free-user command to remove the setting or all such settings.
By default, no authentication-free user is set.

1-7
z You can set up to eight authentication-free users.
z After a user gets online in shared access method, if you configure an authentication-free user
whose IP address and MAC address are the same as those of the online user, the online user will
be forced to get offline.

Examples

# Set the user with IP address 192.168.0.108 and MAC address 0010-0020-0030 as an
authentication-free user.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] web-authentication free-user ip 192.168.0.108 mac 0010-0020-0030

web-authentication max-connection

Syntax

web-authentication max-connection number

undo web-authentication max-connection

View

System view, port view

Parameters

number: Maximum number of online Web-authentication users on the port, in the range of 1 to 128.

Description

Use the web-authentication max-connection command to set the maximum number of online Web
authentication users on the device or on the current port. When this threshold is reached, no more users
can pass the Web authentication on the device or port.
If configured in port view, this command can be configured on only the ports that can service multiple
users at a time.
By default, a port allows up to 128 online Web-authentication users, and a device allows up to 512
online Web-authentication users.

Examples

# Configure GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to allow at most 100 online Web-authentication users.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] web-authentication select method shared
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] web-authentication max-connection 100

1-8
web-authentication protocol

Syntax

web-authentication protocol { http | https server-policy policy-name }

undo web-authentication protocol

View

System view

Parameters

http: Specifies that clients use HTTP to access the authentication pages. Authentication information is
not encrypted in this mode.
https: Specifies that clients use HTTPS to access the authentication pages. Authentication information
is encrypted in this mode.
policy-name: Specifies the SSL server policy by its name, a string of 1 to 16 characters.

Description

Use the web-authentication protocol command to specify the access protocol for Web authentication.
If you specify the access protocol as HTTPS, authentication information exchanged between the switch
and its clients will be in ciphertext.
Use the undo web-authentication protocol command to restore the default.
By default, HTTP is used between the switch and its clients.
Note that:
z You must configure this command before enabling Web authentication. That is, after enabling Web
authentication, you cannot change the access protocol for Web authentication.
z Before configuring HTTPS access for Web authentication, be sure to configure the SSL server
policy and request a certificate for the PKI domain of the SSL server policy.
z After modifying the used SSL server policy, you need to disable Web authentication and then
enable it again in system view to make the changes take effect.
z Only SSL 3.0 and TLS 1.0 are supported. SSL 2.0 is not supported.
z With HTTPS access for Web authentication configured on the switch, clients need to use HTTP 1.1
to log in. Otherwise, the speed of opening the authentication page will be very low.

Examples

# Configure HTTPS access for Web authentication, specifying to use SSL server policy pt_ssl.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] web-authentication protocol https server-policy pt_ssl

web-authentication select method

Syntax

web-authentication select method { shared | designated }

undo web-authentication select

1-9
View

Port view

Parameters

shared: Sets the Web authentication access method on the port to shared.
designated: Sets the Web authentication access method on the port to designated.

Description

Use the web-authentication select command to enable Web authentication on the current port and set
the Web authentication access method on the port.
Use the undo web-authentication select command to disable Web authentication on the port.
There are two Web authentication access methods:
z shared: In this mode, the port allows multiple Web authentication users to be online at the same
time.
z designated: In this mode, the port allows only one Web authentication user to be online at a time.
This configuration takes effect only when Web authentication is enabled globally. If Web authentication
is not enabled globally, this configuration will only be saved.

You are not allowed to enable Web authentication on a port if:

z The port is an access port, or,
z The port belongs to an aggregation group.

Examples

# Set the IP address and port number of the Web authentication server to 192.168.0.56 and 80.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] web-authentication web-server ip 192.168.0.56 port 80

1-12
Table of Contents

1 LLDP Configuration Commands ··············································································································1-1

LLDP Configuration Commands ·············································································································1-1
display lldp local-information ···········································································································1-1
display lldp neighbor-information·····································································································1-5
display lldp statistics ······················································································································1-10
display lldp status ··························································································································1-12
display lldp tlv-config ·····················································································································1-14
lldp admin-status ···························································································································1-15
lldp check-change-interval·············································································································1-16
lldp compliance admin-status cdp ·································································································1-17
lldp compliance cdp ·······················································································································1-17
lldp enable ·····································································································································1-18
lldp encapsulation snap ·················································································································1-18
lldp fast-count ································································································································1-19
lldp hold-multiplier··························································································································1-20
lldp management-address-tlv ········································································································1-20
lldp notification remote-change enable··························································································1-21
lldp timer notification-interval·········································································································1-21
lldp timer reinit-delay ·····················································································································1-22
lldp timer tx-delay ··························································································································1-22
lldp timer tx-interval ·······················································································································1-23
lldp tlv-enable ································································································································1-23

i
1 LLDP Configuration Commands

LLDP Configuration Commands

display lldp local-information

Syntax

display lldp local-information [ global | interface interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

global: Displays the global LLDP information.

interface interface-type interface-number: Specifies a port by its type and number.

Description

Use the display lldp local-information command to display the global LLDP information or the
information contained in the LLDP TLVs to be sent to neighboring devices through a port.
If no keyword or argument is specified, this command displays all the LLDP information to be sent,
including the global LLDP information and the LLDP information about the LLDP-enabled ports.

Examples

# Display all the LLDP information to be sent.

<Sysname> display lldp local-information
Global LLDP local-information:
Chassis ID : 00e0-fc00-5500
System name : Sysname
System description : Sysname Switch
System capabilities supported : Bridge
System capabilities enabled : Bridge

MED information
Device class: Connectivity device

HardwareRev : REV.A
FirmwareRev : 109
SoftwareRev : 5.20 Alpha 2101
SerialNum : Unknown
Manufacturer name : Unknown
Model name : model
Asset tracking identifier : Unknown

1-1
LLDP local-information of port 1[GigabitEthernet1/0/1]:
Port ID subtype : Interface name
Port ID : GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Port description : GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Interface

Management address type : ipV4

Management address : 192.168.102.11
Management address interface type : IfIndex
Management address interface ID : 54
Management address OID : 0

Port VLAN ID(PVID): 1

Port and protocol VLAN ID(PPVID) : 1

Port and protocol VLAN supported : Yes
Port and protocol VLAN enabled : No

VLAN name of VLAN 1: VLAN 0001

Auto-negotiation supported : Yes

Auto-negotiation enabled : Yes
OperMau : speed(1000)/duplex(Full)

PoE supported: No

Link aggregation supported : Yes

Link aggregation enabled : No
Aggregation port ID : 0

Maximum frame Size: 1536

MED information
Media policy type : Unknown
Unknown Policy : Yes
VLAN tagged : No
Media policy VlanID : 0
Media policy L2 priority : 0
Media policy Dscp : 0

Table 1-1 display lldp local-information command output description

Field Description
Global LLDP local-information The global LLDP information
Chassis ID Device MAC address
System name System name of the device
System description System description

1-2
Field Description
Supported capabilities, which can be:

System capabilities supported z Bridge, indicating switching

z Router, indicating routing
z Repeater, indicating forwarding
Currently enabled capabilities, which can be:

System capabilities enabled z Bridge, indicating switching is currently enabled.

z Router, indicating routing is currently enabled.
z Repeater, indicating forwarding is currently enabled.
PoE device type PoE device type

MED information MED information

Device class MED device type
(MED inventory information of master
MED inventory information of the master board
board)
HardwareRev Hardware version
FirmwareRev Firmware version
SoftwareRev Software version
SerialNumber Serial number
Manufacturer name Device manufacturer
Model name Device model
Asset tracking identifier Asset tracking ID
LLDP local-information of port number
LLDP information about a port
interface-type interface-number
Port ID subtype Port ID type
Port ID Port ID
Port description Port description
Management address type Management address type
Management address Management address
Type of the interface identified by the management
Management address interface type
address
Management address interface ID ID of the interface identified by the management address

Management address OID Management address object ID

Port VLAN ID(PVID) Port VLAN ID
Port and protocol VLAN ID(PPVID) Port protocol VLAN ID
Indicates whether protocol VLAN is supported on the
Port and protocol VLAN supported
port.
Port and protocol VLAN enabled Indicates whether protocol VLAN is enabled on the port.
VLAN name of VLAN ID Name of the VLAN identified by the VLAN ID
Indicates whether auto-negotiation is supported on the
Auto-negotiation supported
port.
Auto-negotiation enabled State of auto-negotiation

1-3
Field Description
OperMau Current speed and duplex state of the port
PoE device type, which can be :
Power port class z PSE, indicating a power supply device
z PD, indicating a powered device
Indicates whether or not the device can operate as a
PSE power supported
PSE.
Indicates whether or not the device is operating as a
PSE power enabled
PSE.
Indicates whether or not the PSE-PD pair control is
PSE pairs control ability
available.
Power pairs PoE mode, which can be Signal or Spare.

Port power classification of the PD, which can be:

z Class0
Port power classification z Class1
z Class2
z Class3
z Class4
Link aggregation supported Indicates whether or not link aggregation is supported.
Link aggregation enabled Indicates whether or not link aggregation is enabled.
Aggregation group ID, which is 0 if link aggregation is not
Aggregation port ID
enabled.
Maximum frame Size Maximum frame size supported
MED information MED LLDP information
Media policy type, which can be:
Media policy type z Voice, indicating the device is capable of processing
voice data.
z Unknown, indicating the media policy is unknown.
Unknown Policy Indicates whether or not the media policy is unknown.
VLAN tagged Indicates whether packets of the voice VLAN are tagged.
Media Policy VlanID ID of the voice VLAN
Media Policy L2 priority Layer 2 priority
Media Policy Dscp DSCP precedence
Location format, which can be:
z Civic Address LCI, indicating normal address
Location format information.
z ECS ELIN, indicating telephone number for
urgencies.
Location Information Location information
PSE type, which can be:
PoE PSE power source z Primary, indicating a primary power supply
z Backup, indicating a backup power supply

1-4
Field Description
Port PSE priority, which can be :
z Unknown
Port PSE Priority z Critical
z High
z Low
Port Available power value PoE power

display lldp neighbor-information

Syntax

display lldp neighbor-information [ interface interface-type interface-number ] [ brief ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface interface-type interface-number: Specifies a port by its type and number.

brief: Displays the LLDP information in brief.

Description

Use the display lldp neighbor-information command to display the LLDP information about the
neighboring devices received through a port.
With no keyword/argument specified, this command displays the LLDP information received through all
the ports.

Examples

# Display the LLDP information received through all the ports.

<Sysname> display lldp neighbor-information
LLDP neighbor-information of port 1[GigabitEthernet1/0/1]:
Neighbor index : 1
Update time : 0 days,0 hours,1 minutes,1 seconds
Chassis type : MAC address
Chassis ID : 000f-0055-0002
Port ID type : Interface name
Port ID : GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Port description : GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Interface
System name : Sysname
System description : Sysname Switch
System capabilities supported : Repeater,Bridge,Router
System capabilities enabled : Repeater,Bridge,Router

Management address type : ipV4

Management address : 127.0.0.1
Management address interface type : IfIndex

1-5
Management address interface ID : Unknown
Management address OID : 0

Port VLAN ID(PVID): 1

Port and protocol VLAN ID(PPVID) : 1

Port and protocol VLAN supported : Yes
Port and protocol VLAN enabled : No

VLAN name of VLAN 1: VLAN 0001

Auto-negotiation supported : Yes

Auto-negotiation enabled : Yes
OperMau : speed(1000)/duplex(Full)

Power port class : PD

PSE power supported : No
PSE power enabled : No
PSE pairs control ability : No
Power pairs : Signal
Port power classification : Class 0

Link aggregation supported : Yes

Link aggregation enabled : No
Aggregation port ID : 0

Maximum frame Size: 1536

Neighbor index : 2
Update time : 0 days,0 hours,1 minutes,1 seconds
Chassis type : MAC address
Chassis ID : 000f-0055-0002
Port ID type : Interface name
Port ID : GigabitEthernet1/0/2
Port description : GigabitEthernet1/0/2 Interface
System name : Sysname
System description : Sysname Switch
System capabilities supported : Repeater,Bridge,Router
System capabilities enabled : Repeater,Bridge,Router

Management address type : ipV4

Management address : 127.0.0.1
Management address interface type : IfIndex
Management address interface ID : Unknown
Management address OID : 0

Port VLAN ID(PVID): 1

1-6
Port and protocol VLAN ID(PPVID) : 1
Port and protocol VLAN supported : Yes
Port and protocol VLAN enabled : No

VLAN name of VLAN 1: VLAN 0001

Auto-negotiation supported : Yes

Auto-negotiation enabled : Yes
OperMau : speed(1000)/duplex(Full)

Power port class : PD

PSE power supported : No
PSE power enabled : No
PSE pairs control ability : No
Power pairs : Signal
Port power classification : Class 0

Link aggregation supported : Yes

Link aggregation enabled : No
Aggregation port ID : 0

Maximum frame Size: 1536

Table 1-2 display lldp neighbor-information command output description

Field Description
LLDP neighbor-information LLDP information about a neighboring device
LLDP neighbor-information of Port
LLDP information received through a specific port
number interface-type interface number
Neighbor index Neighbor index
Time when the LLDP information about a neighboring
Update time
device is latest updated.
Chassis information, which can be:
z Chassis component
z Interface alias
Chassis type z Port component
z MAC address
z Network address
z Interface name
z Locally assigned (indicating the local configuration)
Chassis ID Value of chassis type

1-7
Field Description
Port information, which can be:
z Interface alias
z Port component
Port ID type z MAC address
z Network Address
z Interface name
z Agent circuit ID
z Locally assigned (indicating the local configuration)
Port ID Value of port ID type
Port description Port description

System name System name of the neighboring device

System description System description of the neighboring device
Capabilities supported on the neighboring device, which
can be:
System capabilities supported z Bridge, indicating switching
z Router, indicating routing
z Repeater, indicating forwarding
Capabilities currently enabled on the neighboring
device, which can be:
System capabilities enabled z Bridge, indicating switching is currently enabled.
z Router, indicating routing is currently enabled.
z Repeater, indicating forwarding is currently enabled.
Management address type Management address type
Management address Management address
Type of the interface identified by the management
Management address interface type
address
Management address interface ID Management address interface ID
Management address OID Management address object ID
Port VLAN ID Port VLAN ID
Port and protocol VLAN ID(PPVID) Port protocol VLAN ID
Port and protocol VLAN supported Indicates whether protocol VLAN is supported.
Port and protocol VLAN enabled Indicates whether protocol VLAN is enabled.
VLAN name of VLAN 1 Name of he port VLAN
Auto-negotiation supported Indicates whether auto-negotiation is supported.

Auto-negotiation enabled State of auto-negotiation

OperMau Current speed and duplex state
PoE device type, which can be:
Power port class z PSE, indicating a power supply device.
z PD, indicating a powered device.
Indicates whether or not the device can operate as a
PSE power supported
PSE.
Indicates whether or not the device is operating as a
PSE power enabled
PSE.

1-8
Field Description
Indicates whether or not the PSE-PD pair control is
PSE pairs control ability
available.
Power pairs PoE mode, which can be Signal or Spare.
Port power classification of the PD, which can be the
following:
z Class0
Port power classification z Class1
z Class2
z Class3
z Class4
Link aggregation supported Indicates whether or not link aggregation is supported.
Link aggregation enabled Indicates whether or not link aggregation is enabled.
Aggregation group ID, which is 0 if link aggregation is
Aggregation port ID
not enabled.
Maximum frame Size Maximum frame size supported
Device type, which can be:
z Connectivity device, indicating an intermediate
device.
z Class Ⅰ , indicating a normal terminal device. All
terminal devices that are LLDP-enabled are of this
type.
z Class Ⅱ , indicating a media terminal device. A
Device class device of this type is media-capable. That is, besides
the capabilities of a normal terminal device, it also
supports media stream.
z Class Ⅲ , indicating a communication terminal
device. A device of this type supports IP
communication systems of end user. A device of this
type supports all the capabilities of a normal terminal
device and a media terminal device and can be used
directly by end users.
Media policy type, which can be:
z unknown
z voice
z voiceSignaling
Media policy type z guestVoice
z guestVoiceSignaling
z softPhoneVoice
z videoconferencing
z streamingVideo
z videoSignaling
Indicates whether or not the device can acquire media
Unknown Policy
policy data
Indicates whether packets of the media VLAN are
VLAN Tagged
tagged.
Media Policy VlanID ID of the media VLAN
Media Policy L2 priority Layer 2 priority
Media Policy Dscp DSCP precedence
HardwareRev Hardware version

1-9
Field Description
FirmwareRev Firmware version
SoftwareRev Software version
SerialNumber Serial number

Manufacturer name Manufacturer name

Model name Module name
Asset tracking identifier Asset tracking ID

Location information format, which can be:

z Invalid, indicating the format of the location
information is invalid.
Location format z Coordinate-based LCI, indicating the location
information is coordinate-based.
z Civic Address LCI, indicating normal address
information.
z ECS ELIN, indicating a telephone for urgencies.
Location Information Location information
PSE type, which can be:
PoE PSE power source z Primary, indicating a primary power supply
z Backup, indicating a backup power supply
PoE service type PoE service type
Port PSE priority, which can be:
z Unknown
Port PSE Priority z Critical
z High
z Low
Available power value PoE power
Unknown basic TLV Unknown basic TLV
TLV type Unknown basic TLV type
TLV information Information contained in the unknown basic TLV type
Unknown organizationally-defined TLV Unknown organization-defined TLV
TLV OUI OUI of the unknown organization-defined TLV
TLV subtype Unknown organization-defined TLV subtype
Index Unknown organization index
Information contained in unknown organization-defined
TLV information
TLV

display lldp statistics

Syntax

display lldp statistics [ global | interface interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

1-10
Parameters

global: Displays the global LLDP statistics.

interface interface-type interface-number: Specifies a port by its type and number.

Description

Use the display lldp statistics command to display the global LLDP statistics or the LLDP statistics of
a port.
If no keyword/argument is specified, this command displays all the LLDP statistics.

Examples

# Display all the LLDP statistics.

<Sysname> display lldp statistics
LLDP statistics global Information :
LLDP neighbor information last change time : 0 days, 0 hours, 4 minutes, 40 seconds
The number of neighbor information inserted : 1
The number of neighbor information deleted : 0
The number of neighbor information dropped : 0
The number of neighbor information aged out : 1

LLDP statistics Information of port 1 [GigabitEthernet1/0/1]:

The number of LLDP frames transmitted : 0
The number of LLDP frames received : 0
The number of LLDP frames discarded : 0
The number of LLDP error frames : 0
The number of LLDP TLVs discarded : 0
The number of LLDP TLVs unrecognized : 0
The number of LLDP neighbor information aged out : 0
The number of CDP frames transmitted : 0
The number of CDP frames received : 0
The number of CDP frames discarded : 0
The number of CDP error frames : 0

Table 1-3 display lldp statistics command output description

Field Description
lldp statistics global information Global LLDP statistics

Neighbor information last change time Time the neighbor information is latest updated
The number of neighbors inserted Number of times of adding neighbor information
The number of neighbors deleted Number of times of removing neighbor information
Number of times of dropping neighbor information due
The number of neighbors dropped
to lack of available memory space
Number of the neighbor information entries that have
The number of neighbors aged out
aged out
lldp statistics Information of port number
LLDP statistics of a port
interface-type interface-number

1-11
Field Description
Total number of the LLDP frames transmitted through
The number of LLDP frames transmitted
the port
Total number of the LLDP frames received through the
The number of LLDP frames received
port
The number of LLDP frames discarded Total number of the LLDP frames dropped on the port
Total number of the LLDP error frames received through
The number of LLDP error frames
the port
The number of TLVs discarded Total number of the LLDP TLVs dropped on the port
Total number of the LLDP TLVs that cannot be
The number of TLVs unrecognized
recognized on the port
The number of neighbor information aged Number of the LLDP neighbor information entries that
out have aged out on the port
The number of CDP frames transmitted Total number of the CDP frames transmitted on the port
The number of CDP frames received Total number of the CDP frames received on the port
The number of CDP frames discarded Total number of the CDP frames dropped on the port
Total number of the CDP error frames received on the
The number of CDP error frames
port

display lldp status

Syntax

display lldp status [ interface interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface interface-type interface-number: Specifies a port by its type and number.

Description

Use the display lldp status command to display the LLDP status of a port.
If no port is specified, this command displays the LLDP status of all the ports.

Examples

# Display the LLDP status of all the ports.

<Sysname> display lldp status
Global status of LLDP: Enable
The current number of LLDP neighbors: 0
The current number of CDP neighbors: 0
LLDP neighbor information last changed time : 0 days, 0 hours, 4 minutes, 40 seconds
Transmit interval : 30s
Hold multiplier : 4
Reinit delay : 2s

1-12
Transmit delay : 2s
Trap interval : 5s
Fast start times : 3

Port 1 [GigabitEthernet1/0/1] :
Port status of LLDP : Enable
Admin status : Tx_Rx
Trap flag : No
Roll time : 0s

Number of neighbors : 5
Number of MED neighbors : 2
Number of CDP neighbors : 0
Number of sent optional TLV : 12
Number of received unknown TLV : 5

Table 1-4 display lldp status command output description

Field Description
Global status of LLDP Indicating whether or not LLDP is globally enabled
The current number of LLDP neighbors Total number of the LLDP neighbor devices
The current number of CDP neighbors The current number of CDP neighbors
Transmit interval Interval to send LLDPDU
Hold multiplier TTL multiplier
Reinit delay Initialization delay
Transmit delay Delay period to send LLDPDUs
Trap interval Interval to send traps
Number of the LLDPDUs to be sent successively
Fast start times
when a new neighboring device is detected
Port number interface-type
Port LLDP status
interface-number
Port status of LLDP Indicates whether or not LLDP is enabled on the port.

LLDP mode of the port, which can be:

z TxRx. A port in this mode sends and receives
LLDPDUs.
z Rx_Only. A port in this mode receives LLDPDUs
Admin status only.
z Tx_Only. A port in this mode sends LLDPDUs
only.
z Disable. A port in this mode does not send or
receive LLDPDUs.
Trap Flag Indicates whether or not trap is enabled.
LLDP polling interval. A value of 0 indicates LLDP
Roll time
polling is disabled.
Number of neighbors Number of the LLDP neighbors connecting to the port
Number of CDP neighbors Number of the CDP neighbors connecting to the port

1-13
Field Description
Number of the optional TLVs contained in an
Number of sent optional TLV
LLDPDU sent through the port
Number of the unknown TLVs contained in a received
Number of received unknown TLV
LLDPDU

display lldp tlv-config

Syntax

display lldp tlv-config [ interface interface-type interface-number ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface interface-type interface-number: Specifies a port by its type and number.

Description

Use the display lldp tlv-config command to display the TLVs that are currently sent through a port.
If no port is specified, this command displays all the TLVs that are currently sent through all the ports.

Examples

# Display all the TLVs that are currently sent through all the ports.
<Sysname> display lldp tlv-config
LLDP tlv-config of port 1 [GigabitEthernet1/0/1] :
NAME STATUS DEFAULT
Basic optional TLV :
Port Description TLV YES YES
System Name TLV YES YES
System Description TLV YES YES
System Capabilities TLV YES YES
Management Address TLV YES YES

IEEE 802.1 extend TLV :

Port VLAN ID TLV YES YES
Port And Protocol VLAN ID TLV YES YES
VLAN Name TLV YES YES

IEEE 802.3 extend TLV :

MAC-Physic TLV YES YES
Power via MDI TLV YES YES
Link Aggregation TLV YES YES
Maximum Frame Size TLV YES YES

LLDP-MED extend TLV :

1-14
Capabilities TLV YES YES
Network Policy TLV YES YES
Location Identification TLV NO NO
Extended Power via MDI TLV YES YES
Inventory TLV YES YES

Table 1-5 display lldp tlv-config command output description

Field Description
LLDP tlv-config of port number
TLVs that are currently sent through a port
interface-type interface-number
NAME TLV type
Indicates whether or not TLVs of a specific type are
STATUS
currently sent through a port
Indicates whether or not TLVs of a specific type are sent
DEFAULT
through a port by default

Basic TLVs, including:

z Port description TLV
Basic optional TLV z System name TLV
z System description TLV
z System capabilities TLV
z Management address TLV
IEEE 802.1 extended TLVs, including:

IEEE 802.1 extended TLV z Port VLAN ID TLV

z Port and protocol VLAN ID TLV
z VLAN name TLV
IEEE 802.3 extended TLVs, including:
z MAC-Physic TLV
IEEE 802.3 extended TLV z Power via MDI TLV
z Link aggregation TLV
z Maximum frame size TLV
MED related LLDP TLVs, including:
z Capabilities TLV
z Network Policy TLV
z Extended Power-via-MDI TLV
LLDP-MED extend TLV
z Location Identification TLV
z Inventory TLV, which can be hardware revision TLV,
firmware revision TLV, software revision TLV, serial
number TLV, manufacturer name TLV, model name
TLV, and asset id TLV.

lldp admin-status

Syntax

lldp admin-status { disable | rx | tx | txrx }

undo lldp admin-status

View

Ethernet interface view

1-15
Parameters

disable: Specifies the Disable mode. A port in this mode does not send or receive LLDPDUs.
rx: Specifies the Rx mode. A port in this mode receives LLDPDUs only.
tx: Specifies the Tx mode. A port in this mode sends LLDPDUs only.
txrx: Specifies the TxRx mode. A port in this mode sends and receives LLDPDUs.

Description

Use the lldp admin-status command to specify the LLDP operating mode for a port or all the ports in a
port group.
Use the undo lldp admin-status command to restore the default LLDP operating mode.
The default LLDP operating mode is TxRx.

Examples

# Configure the LLDP operating mode as Rx for GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] lldp admin-status rx

lldp check-change-interval

Syntax

lldp check-change-interval value

undo lldp check-change-interval

View

Ethernet interface view

Parameters

value: LLDP polling interval to be set, in the range 1 to 30 (in seconds).

lldp enable

Syntax

lldp enable
undo lldp enable

View

System view, Ethernet interface view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the lldp enable command to enable LLDP.

Use the undo lldp enable command to disable LLDP.
By default, LLDP is disabled globally, and is enabled on a port.
Note that LLDP takes effect on a port only when it is enabled both globally and on the port.

Examples

# Disable LLDP on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] undo lldp enable

lldp encapsulation snap

Syntax

lldp encapsulation snap

undo lldp encapsulation [ snap ]

View

Ethernet interface view

Parameters

None

1-18
Description

Use the lldp encapsulation snap command to configure the encapsulation format for LLDPDUs as
SNAP on a port or a group of ports.
Use the undo lldp encapsulation [ snap ] command to restore the default encapsulation format for
LLDPDUs.
By default, Ethernet II encapsulation applies.

The command does not apply to LLDP-CDP packets, which use only SNAP encapsulation.

Examples

# Configure the encapsulation format for LLDPDUs as SNAP on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] lldp encapsulation snap

lldp fast-count

Syntax

lldp fast-count value

undo lldp fast-count

View

System view

Parameters

value: Number of the LLDPDUs to be sent successively when a new neighboring device is detected.
This argument ranges from 1 to 10.

Description

Use the lldp fast-count command to set the number of the LLDPDUs to be sent successively when a
new neighboring device is detected.
Use the undo lldp fast-count command to restore the default.
By default, the number is 3.

Examples

# Configure to send four LLDP successively when a new neighboring device is detected.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] lldp fast-count 4

1-19
lldp hold-multiplier

Syntax

lldp hold-multiplier value

undo lldp hold-multiplier

View

System view

Parameters

value: TTL multiplier, in the range 2 to 10.

Description

Use the lldp hold-multiplier command to set the TTL multiplier.

Use the undo lldp hold-multiplier command to restore the default.
The TTL multiplier defaults to 4.
You can set the TTL of the local device information by configuring the TTL multiplier.
The TTL of the information about a device is determined by the following expression:
TTL multiplier × LLDPDU sending interval
You can set the TTL of the local device information by configuring the TTL multiplier. Note that the TTL
can be up to 65535 seconds. TTLs longer than it will be rounded off to 65535 seconds.
To enable local device information to be updated on neighboring devices before being aged out, make
sure the interval to send LLDPDUs is shorter than the TTL of the local device information.

Examples

# Set the TTL multiplier to 6.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] lldp hold-multiplier 6

lldp management-address-tlv

Syntax

lldp management-address-tlv [ ip-address ]

undo lldp management-address-tlv

View

Ethernet interface view

Parameters

ip-address: Management address to be set.

value: Initialization delay period to be set, in the range 1 to 10 (in seconds).

Description

Use the lldp timer reinit-delay command to set the initialization delay period.
Use the undo lldp timer reinit-delay command to restore the default.
By default, the initialization delay period is 2 seconds.

Examples

# Set the initialization delay period to 4 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] lldp timer reinit-delay 4

lldp timer tx-delay

Syntax

lldp timer tx-delay value

undo lldp timer tx-delay

View

System view

1-22
Parameters

value: Delay period to send LLDPDUs, in the range 1 to 8192 (in seconds).

Description

Use the lldp timer tx-delay command to set the delay period to send LLDPDUs.
Use the undo lldp timer tx-delay command to restore the default.
By default, the delay period to send LLDPDUs is 2 seconds.

Examples

# Set the delay period to send LLDPDUs to 4 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] lldp timer tx-delay 4

lldp timer tx-interval

Syntax

lldp timer tx-interval value

undo lldp timer tx-interval

View

System view

Parameters

value: Interval to send LLDPDUs, in the range 5 to 32768 (in seconds).

Description

Use the lldp timer tx-interval command to set the interval to send LLDPDUs.
Use the undo lldp timer tx-interval command to restore the default.
By default, the interval to send LLDPDUs is 30 seconds.
To enable local device information to be updated on neighboring devices before being aged out, make
sure the interval to send LLDPDUs is shorter than the TTL of the local device information.

Examples

# Set the interval to send LLDPDUs to 20 seconds.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] lldp timer tx-interval 20

lldp tlv-enable

Syntax

lldp tlv-enable { basic-tlv { all | port-description | system-capability | system-description |

system-name } | dot1-tlv { all | port-vlan-id | protocol-vlan-id [ vlan-id ] | vlan-name [ vlan-id ] } |
dot3-tlv { all | link-aggregation | mac-physic | max-frame-size | power } | med-tlv { all | capability |
inventory | location-id { civic-address device-type country-code { ca-type ca-value }&<1-10> |
elin-address tel-number } | network-policy | power-over-ethernet } }

1-23
undo lldp tlv-enable { basic-tlv { all | port-description | system-capability | system-description |
system-name } | dot1-tlv { all | port-vlan-id | protocol-vlan-id | vlan-name } | dot3-tlv { all |
link-aggregation | mac-physic | max-frame-size | power } | med-tlv { all | capability | inventory |
location-id | network-policy | power-over-ethernet } }

View

Ethernet interface view

Parameters

all: Sends all the basic LLDP TLVs, all the IEEE 802.1 defined LLDP TLVs, or all the IEEE 802.3 defined
LLDP TLVs; or sends all the MED related LLDP TLVs except location identification TLVs.
basic-tlv: Sends basic LLDP TLVs.
port-description: Sends port description TLVs.
system-capability: Sends system capabilities TLVs.
system-description: Sends system description TLVs.
system-name: Sends system name TLVs.
dot1-tlv: Sends IEEE 802.1 defined LLDP TLVs.
port-vlan-id: Sends port VLAN ID TLVs.
protocol-vlan-id: Sends port and protocol VLAN ID TLVs.
vlan-name: Sends VLAN name TLVs.
vlan-id: ID of the VLAN the TLVs (port and protocol VLAN ID TLVs or VLAN name TLVs) concerning
which are to be sent. This argument defaults to the least protocol VLAN ID.
dot3-tlv: Sends IEEE 802.3 defined LLDP TLVs.
link-aggregation: Sends link aggregation group TLVs.
mac-physic: Sends MAC/PHY configuration/status TLVs.
max-frame-size: Sends maximum frame size TLVS.
power: Sends power via MDI TLVs.
med-tlv: Sends MED related LLDP TLVs.
capability: Sends LLDP-MED capabilities TLVs.
inventory: Sends hardware revision TLVs, firmware revision TLVs, software revision TLVs, serial
number TLVs, manufacturer name TLVs, model name TLVs, and asset ID TLVs.
location-id: Sends location identification TLVS.
civic-address: Inserts the address information about the intermediate device in location identification
TLVs .
device-type: Device type value. A value of 0 specifies DHCP server; a value of 1 specifies switch, and a
value of 2 specifies LLDP-MED endpoint.
country-code: Country code, confirming to ISO 3166.
{ ca-type ca-value }&<1-10>: Configures address information, where ca-type represents the address
information type, in the range 0 to 255, ca-value represents address information, a string of 1 to 250
characters, and &<1-10> indicates that you can enter up to ten such parameters.
elin-address: Inserts telephone numbers for urgencies in location identification TLVs.

1-24
tel-number: Telephone number for urgencies, a string of 10 to 25 characters.
network-policy: Sends network policy TLVs.
power-over-ethernet: Sends extended power-via-MDI TLVs.

Description

Use the lldp tlv-enable command to enable the sending of specific TLVs for a port or all the ports in a
port group.
Use the undo lldp tlv-enable command to disable the sending of specific TLVs.
By default, all the TLVs except location identification TLVs are sent.
Note that:
z To enable MED related LLDP TLV sending, you need to enable LLDP-MED capabilities TLV
sending first. Conversely, to disable LLDP-MED capabilities TLV sending, you need to disable the
sending of other MED related LLDP TLV.
z To disable MAC/PHY configuration/status TLV sending, you need to disable LLDP-MED
capabilities TLV sending first.
z Specifying the all keyword for basic LLDP TLVs and organization defined LLDP TLVs (including
IEEE 802.1 defined LLDP TLVs and IEEE 802.3 defined LLDP TLVs) enables sending of all the
corresponding LLDP TLVs. For MED related LLDP TLVs, the all keyword enables sending of all
the MED related LLDP TLVs except location identification TLVs.
z Enabling the sending of LLDP-MED capabilities TLVs also enables the sending of MAC/PHY
configuration/status TLVs.
z You can specify to send multiple types of TLVs by executing the lldp tlv-enable command
repeatedly.

Examples

# Enable the sending of link aggregation group TLVs on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] lldp tlv-enable dot3-tlv link-aggregation

1-25
Table of Contents

1 Access Management Configuration Commands····················································································1-1

Access Management Configuration Commands ····················································································1-1
am enable········································································································································1-1
am ip-pool········································································································································1-1
am trap enable·································································································································1-2
display am ·······································································································································1-3

i
1 Access Management Configuration Commands

Access Management Configuration Commands

am enable

Syntax

am enable
undo am enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the am enable command to enable the access management function.

Use the undo am enable command to disable the function.
By default, Access management function is disabled.
Before enabling access management, you are recommended to cancel the static ARP configuration to
ensure that the binding of IP address and Ethernet switch can take effect.

Examples

# Enable the access management function.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] am enable

am ip-pool

Syntax

am ip-pool address-list
undo am ip-pool { all | address-list }

View

Ethernet port view

Parameters

all: Specifies all the IP addresses (or IP address pools).

1-1
address-list: IP address list. You need to provide this argument in the format of start-ip-address
[ ip-address-number ] & < 1-10 >, where start-ip-address is the start IP address of an IP address range
in the address pool, ip-address-number specifies the number of the successive IP addresses following
start-ip-address in the range, and & < 1-10 > means you can specify up to ten IP addresses/IP address
ranges.

Description

Use the am ip-pool command to configure the access management IP address pool on a port. For a
port with the access management IP address pool configured, only the hosts with their IP addresses
being in the access management pool can access external networks through the port.
Use the undo am ip-pool command to remove part of or all the IP addresses from the access
management IP address pool of a port.
By default, the access management IP address pool is null.
Note that:
z Before configuring the access management IP address pool of a port, you need to configure the
interface IP address of the VLAN to which the port belongs, and the IP addresses in the access
management IP address pool of a port must be in the same network segment as the interface IP
address of the VLAN which the port belongs to.
z If an access management address pool configured contains IP addresses that belong to the static
ARP entries of other ports, the system prompts you to delete the corresponding static ARP entries
to ensure the access management IP address pool can take effect.

Examples

# Configure the access management IP address pool on GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 to allow hosts with their
IP addresses being in the range 202.112.66.2 to 202.112.66.20 and 202.112.65.1 to access external
networks through the port.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] am ip-pool 202.112.66.2 19 202.112.65.1

# Remove all the IP addresses from the access management IP address pool of port GigabitEthernet
1/0/1.
[Sysname-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] undo am ip-pool all

am trap enable

Syntax

am trap enable
undo am trap enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

1-2
Description

Use the am trap enable command to enable the access management trap function.
Use the undo am trap enable command to disable the access management trap function.
By default, the access management trap function is disabled.

Examples

# Enable the access management trap.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] am trap enable

display am

Syntax

display am [ interface-list ]

View

Any view

Parameters

interface-list: Port list. You need to provide this argument in the format of { interface-type
interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where interface-type is port type,
interface-number is port number, and &<1-10> means that you can specify up to ten ports/port lists.

Description

Use the display am command to display the current access management configuration, including the
status (enabled/disabled), and the access management IP address pool configuration information.
If you do not specify the interface-list argument, this command displays the current access
management configuration of all the ports.

Examples

# Display the access management configurations of GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 and GigabitEthernet 1/0/2.
<Sysname> display am GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Status : enabled
IP Pools : 10.10.1.1(19) 10.10.1.30(1)
GigabitEthernet1/0/2
Status : enabled
IP Pools : (NULL)

Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display am command

Field Description
Status Access Management state of a port: enabled or disabled

1-3
Field Description
Access management IP pools. NULL means the access management IP
pool is not configured. Each IP address range is represented as X.X.X.X
IP Pools (number), among which “X.X.X.X” is the starting address and “number”
indicates the number of successive IP addresses contained in the IP
address range.

1-4
Table of Contents

1 UDP Helper Configuration Commands····································································································1-1

UDP Helper Configuration Commands ···································································································1-1
display udp-helper server ················································································································1-1
reset udp-helper packet···················································································································1-1
udp-helper enable····························································································································1-2
udp-helper port ································································································································1-2
udp-helper server ····························································································································1-4
udp-helper ttl-keep enable···············································································································1-4

i
1 UDP Helper Configuration Commands

UDP Helper Configuration Commands

display udp-helper server

Syntax

display udp-helper server [ interface Vlan-interface vlan-id ]

View

Any view

Parameters

vlan-id: VLAN interface number.

Description

Use the display udp-helper server command to display the UDP broadcast relay forwarding
information. The information includes the VLAN interface enabled with UDP Helper, IP address of the
destination server, and the number of UDP packets forwarded to the destination server. If a vlan-id is
specified, UDP broadcast relay forwarding information of the specified VLAN interface is displayed.

Examples

# Display the UDP broadcast relay forwarding information on VLAN-interface 1.

udp-helper port { port-number | dns | netbios-ds | netbios-ns | tacacs | tftp | time }

undo udp-helper port { port-number | dns | netbios-ds | netbios-ns | tacacs | tftp | time }

View

System view
1-2
Parameters

port-number: Number of the UDP port with which UDP packets are to be forwarded, in the range 0 to
65535 (except for 67 and 68).
dns: Forwards Domain Name System (DNS) data packets. The corresponding UDP port number is 53.
netbios-ds: Forwards NetBIOS data packets. The corresponding UDP port number is 138.
netbios-ns: Forwards NetBIOS name service data packets. The corresponding UDP port number is
137.
tacacs: Forwards terminal access controller access control system (TACACS) data packet. The
corresponding UDP port number is 49.
tftp: Forwards Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) data packets. The corresponding UDP port number
is 69.
time: Forwards time service data packets. The corresponding UDP port number is 37.

Description

Use the udp-helper port command to configure the UDP port with which broadcast packets are to be
forwarded.
Use the undo udp-helper port command to remove the configuration.
By default, the UDP Helper enabled device forwards broadcast packets with any of the six UDP port
numbers 53, 138, 137, 49, 69 and 37.
Note that:
z You need to enable the UDP Helper function before specifying any UDP port; otherwise, the
system prompts error information. When the UDP helper function is disabled, all configured UDP
ports are disabled, including the default ports.
z The relaying of BOOTP/DHCP broadcast packets is implemented through the DHCP relay agent
function using UDP port 67 and 68. That is, the UDP port number cannot be set to 67 or 68 for UDP
Helper.
z The dns, netbios-ds, netbios-ns, tacacs, tftp, and time keywords correspond to the six default
ports. You can configure the default ports by specifying port numbers or the corresponding
parameters. For example, udp-helper port 53 and udp-helper port dns specify the same port.
z When you view the configuration information by using the display current-configuration
command, information about default UDP ports is not displayed. Such information is displayed only
when a default port is disabled.
z Currently, you can configure up to 256 UDP ports on the device.

Examples

# Enable forwarding of UDP broadcasts with a destination UDP port number of 100.
<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] udp-helper port 100

# Disable forwarding of UDP broadcasts with a destination UDP port number of 53.
[Sysname] undo udp-helper port 53

1-3
udp-helper server

Syntax

udp-helper server ip-address

undo udp-helper server [ ip-address ]

View

VLAN interface view

Parameters

ip-address: IP address of the destination server, in dotted decimal notation.

Description

Use the udp-helper server command to specify the destination server to which the UDP packets are to
be forwarded.
Use the undo udp-helper server command to remove the specified destination server.
No destination server is specified by default.
Note that:
z Executing the undo udp-helper server command without specifying the ip-address argument
removes all the destination servers configured on the current interface.
z You can specify up to 20 destination server IP addresses on a VLAN interface.
Related commands: display udp-helper server.

Examples

# Specify the destination server at 192.1.1.2 for VLAN-interface 1.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] interface Vlan-interface 1
[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] udp-helper server 192.1.1.2

# Remove all the specified destination servers for VLAN-interface 1.

[Sysname-Vlan-interface1] undo udp-helper server

udp-helper ttl-keep enable

Syntax

udp-helper ttl-keep enable

undo udp-helper ttl-keep enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

1-4
Description

Use the udp-helper ttl-keep enable command to enable the UDP Helper TTL-keep function. With this
function enabled, the UDP Helper can forward broadcasts with the TTL field being 1 without
decrementing the TTL value by one.
Use the undo udp-helper ttl-keep enable command to restore the default.
By default, the UDP Helper TTL-keep function is disabled.
Note that you need to enable UDP Helper before enabling the TTL-keep function; otherwise, the
TTL-keep function does not take effect.

Examples

# Enable the UDP Helper TTL-keep function on the switch.

<Sysname> system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[Sysname] udp-helper ttl-keep enable

1-5
Table of Contents

1 HTTPS Configuration Commands············································································································1-1

HTTPS Configuration Commands ··········································································································1-1
display ip https·································································································································1-1
ip https acl ·······································································································································1-2
ip https certificate access-control-policy··························································································1-2
ip https enable ·································································································································1-3
ip https ssl-server-policy ··················································································································1-4

i
1 HTTPS Configuration Commands

HTTPS Configuration Commands

display ip https

Syntax

display ip https

View

Any view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the display ip https command to display information about HTTPS.

Examples

# Display information about HTTPS.

<Sysname> display ip https
HTTPS port: 443
SSL server policy: test
Certificate access-control-policy:
Basic ACL: 2222
Current connection: 0
Operation status: Running

Table 1-1 display ip https command output description

Field Description

HTTPS port Port number used by the HTTPS service

The SSL server policy associated with the

SSL server policy
HTTPS service
The certificate attribute access control policy
Certificate access-control-policy
associated with the HTTPS service
The basic ACL number associated with the
Basic ACL
HTTPS service

Current connection The number of current connections

Operation status, which takes the following

values:
Operation status
z Running: The HTTPS service is enabled.
z Stopped: The HTTPS service is disabled.

1-1
ip https acl

Syntax

ip https acl acl-number

undo ip https acl

View

System view

Parameters

acl-number: ACL number, in the range 2000 to 2999.

Description

Use the ip https acl command to associate the HTTPS service with an ACL.
Use the undo ip https acl command to remove the association.
By default, the HTTPS service is not associated with any ACL.
After the HTTPS service is associated with an ACL, only the clients permitted by the ACL can access
the device.
Related commands: display ip https.

Examples

# Associate the HTTPS service with ACL 2001 and only allow the clients within the 10.10.0.0/16
network segment to access the HTTPS server through the Web function.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] acl number 2001
[Sysname-acl-basic-2001] rule permit source 10.10.0.0 0.0.255.255
[Sysname-acl-basic-2001] quit
[Sysname] ip https acl 2001

ip https certificate access-control-policy

Syntax

ip https certificate access-control-policy policy-name

undo ip https certificate access-control-policy

View

System view

Default Level

3: Manage level

Parameters

policy-name: Name of the certificate attribute access control policy, a string of 1 to 16 characters.

1-2
Description

Use the ip https certificate access-control-policy command to associate the HTTPS service with a
certificate attribute access control policy.
Use the undo ip https certificate access-control-policy command to remove the association.
By default, the HTTPS service is not associated with any certificate attribute access control policy.
Association of the HTTPS service with a certificate attribute access control policy can control the
access rights of clients.

Examples

# Associate the HTTPS server to certificate attribute access control policy myacl.
<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] ip https certificate access-control-policy myacl

ip https enable

Syntax

ip https enable
undo ip https enable

View

System view

Parameters

None

Description

Use the ip https enable command to enable the HTTPS service.

Use the undo ip https enable command to disable the HTTPS service.
By default, the HTTPS service is disabled.
The device can act as the HTTP server and the users can access and control the device through the
Web function only after the HTTP service is enabled.
Note that enabling of the HTTPS service triggers an SSL handshake negotiation process. During the
process, if a local certificate of the device already exists, the SSL negotiation is successfully performed,
and the HTTPS service can be started normally. If no local certificate exists, a certificate application
process will be triggered by the SSL negotiation. Since the application process takes much time, the
SSL negotiation often fails and the HTTPS service cannot be started normally. Therefore, the ip https
enable command must be executed for multiple times to ensure normal startup of the HTTPS service.
Related commands: display ip https.

Examples

# Enable the HTTPS service.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] ip https enable

1-3
ip https ssl-server-policy

Syntax

ip https ssl-server-policy policy-name

undo ip https ssl-server-policy

View

System view

Parameters

policy-name: Name of an SSL server policy, a string of 1 to 16 characters.

Description

Use the ip https ssl-server-policy command to associate the HTTPS service with an SSL server-end
policy.
Use the undo ip https ssl-server-policy to remove the association between the HTTPS service and
an SSL server-end policy.
By default, the HTTPS service is not associated with any SSL server-end policy.
Note that:
z The HTTPS service can be enabled only after this command is configured successfully.
z You cannot modify an SSL server-end policy or remove the association between the HTTPS
service and an SSL server-end policy after the HTTPS service is enabled.

Examples

# Configure the HTTPS service to use SSL server-end policy myssl.

<Sysname> system-view
[Sysname] ip https ssl-server-policy myssl

1-4
Appendix A Command Index

The command index includes all the commands in the Command Manual, which are arranged alphabetically.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

A
access-limit 15-AAA 1-1

accounting 15-AAA 1-2

accounting optional 15-AAA 1-2

accounting optional 15-AAA 1-27

accounting-on enable 15-AAA 1-27

acl 01-Login 2-1

acl 19-ACL 1-1

active region-configuration 13-MSTP 1-1

add-member 23-Stack-Cluster 2-12

address-check 18-DHCP 1-1

administrator-address 23-Stack-Cluster 2-13

adv-factor 33-Remote-ping 1-1

am enable 42-Access Management 1-1

am ip-pool 42-Access Management 1-1

am trap enable 42-Access Management 1-2

am user-bind 10-Port Security-Port Binding 2-1

apply poe-profile 37-PoE-PoE Profile 2-1

apply qos-profile 20-QoS-QoS Profile 2-1

arp anti-attack valid-check enable 22-ARP 2-1

arp check enable 22-ARP 1-1

arp detection enable 22-ARP 2-1

arp detection trust 22-ARP 2-2

arp filter binding 22-ARP 2-3

arp filter source 22-ARP 2-2

A-1
arp max-learning-num 22-ARP 2-4

arp protective-down recover enable 22-ARP 2-4

arp protective-down recover interval 22-ARP 2-5

arp rate-limit 22-ARP 2-6

arp rate-limit enable 22-ARP 2-6

arp restricted-forwarding enable 22-ARP 2-7

arp static 22-ARP 1-1

arp timer aging 22-ARP 1-2

ascii 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-7

attribute 15-AAA 1-3

attribute 38-PKI 1-1

authentication 15-AAA 1-4

authentication super 15-AAA 1-6

authentication-mode 01-Login 1-1

authorization 15-AAA 1-6

authorization vlan 15-AAA 1-7

auto-build 23-Stack-Cluster 2-14

auto-execute command 01-Login 1-3

B
binary 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-8

black-list 23-Stack-Cluster 2-44

boot attribute-switch 28-File System Management 1-14

boot boot-loader 28-File System Management 1-15

boot boot-loader 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-1

boot boot-loader backup-attribute 28-File System Management 1-15

boot bootrom 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-1

boot web-package 28-File System Management 1-16

bpdu-drop any 13-MSTP 1-1

broadcast-suppression 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-1

build 23-Stack-Cluster 2-16

burst-mode enable 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-1

A-2
bye 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-8

bye 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-26

C
ca identifier 38-PKI 1-2

calling-station-id mode 15-AAA 1-29

cd 28-File System Management 1-1

cd 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-9

cd 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-26

cdup 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-9

cdup 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-27

certificate request entity 38-PKI 1-2

certificate request from 38-PKI 1-3

certificate request mode 38-PKI 1-3

certificate request polling 38-PKI 1-4

certificate request url 38-PKI 1-5

check region-configuration 13-MSTP 1-2

ciphersuite 39-SSL 1-1

client-verify enable 39-SSL 1-2

clock datetime 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 1-1

clock summer-time 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 1-1

clock timezone 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 1-2

close 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-10

close-mode wait 39-SSL 1-2

cluster 23-Stack-Cluster 2-18

cluster enable 23-Stack-Cluster 2-18

cluster switch-to 23-Stack-Cluster 2-19

cluster-local-user 23-Stack-Cluster 2-20

cluster-mac 23-Stack-Cluster 2-21

cluster-mac syn-interval 23-Stack-Cluster 2-22

cluster-snmp-agent community 23-Stack-Cluster 2-22

cluster-snmp-agent group v3 23-Stack-Cluster 2-23

A-3
cluster-snmp-agent mib-view included 23-Stack-Cluster 2-25

cluster-snmp-agent usm-user v3 23-Stack-Cluster 2-26

command-privilege level 01-Login 1-30

common-name 38-PKI 1-6

copy 28-File System Management 1-2

copy configuration 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-2

copyright-info enable 01-Login 1-3

count 33-Remote-ping 1-1

country 38-PKI 1-6

crl check 38-PKI 1-7

crl update-period 38-PKI 1-7

crl url 38-PKI 1-8

cut connection 15-AAA 1-8

D
databits 01-Login 1-4

datafill 33-Remote-ping 1-2

data-flow-format 15-AAA 1-30

data-flow-format 15-AAA 1-56

datasize 33-Remote-ping 1-3

debugging 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 1-7

delete 28-File System Management 1-3

delete 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-10

delete 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-27

delete static-routes all 04-Static Routing 1-1

delete-member 23-Stack-Cluster 2-27

description 03-VLAN 1-1

description 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-4

description 19-ACL 1-2

description 33-Remote-ping 1-4

destination-ip 33-Remote-ping 1-4

destination-port 33-Remote-ping 1-5

A-4
dhcp protective-down recover enable 18-DHCP 3-1

dhcp protective-down recover interval 18-DHCP 3-1

dhcp rate-limit 18-DHCP 3-2

dhcp rate-limit enable 18-DHCP 3-3

dhcp relay information enable 18-DHCP 1-1

dhcp relay information strategy 18-DHCP 1-2

dhcp-security static 18-DHCP 1-3

dhcp-server 18-DHCP 1-4

dhcp-server detect 18-DHCP 1-5

dhcp-server ip 18-DHCP 1-5

dhcp-snooping 18-DHCP 2-1

dhcp-snooping information enable 18-DHCP 2-1

dhcp-snooping information format 18-DHCP 2-2

dhcp-snooping information packet-format 18-DHCP 2-3

dhcp-snooping information remote-id 18-DHCP 2-3

dhcp-snooping information strategy 18-DHCP 2-4

dhcp-snooping information vlan circuit-id 18-DHCP 2-5

dhcp-snooping information vlan remote-id 18-DHCP 2-6

dhcp-snooping trust 18-DHCP 2-7

dir 28-File System Management 1-4

dir 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-11

dir 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-28

disconnect 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-12

display acl 19-ACL 1-3

display acl remaining entry 19-ACL 1-3

display am 42-Access Management 1-3

display am user-bind 10-Port Security-Port Binding 2-2

display arp 22-ARP 1-3

display arp | 22-ARP 1-4

display arp count 22-ARP 1-5

display arp detection statistics interface 22-ARP 2-8

A-5
display arp timer aging 22-ARP 1-5

display boot-loader 28-File System Management 1-17

display boot-loader 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-2

display bootp client 18-DHCP 4-3

display brief interface 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-5

display channel 30-Information Center 1-1

display clock 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 1-5

display cluster 23-Stack-Cluster 2-28

display cluster base-members 23-Stack-Cluster 2-45

display cluster base-topology 23-Stack-Cluster 2-46

display cluster black-list 23-Stack-Cluster 2-47

display cluster candidates 23-Stack-Cluster 2-29

display cluster current-topology 23-Stack-Cluster 2-48

display cluster members 23-Stack-Cluster 2-31

display connection 15-AAA 1-9

display cpu 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-2

display current-configuration 02-Configuration File Management 1-1

display current-configuration vlan 02-Configuration File Management 1-4

display debugging 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 1-6

display device 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-3

display dhcp client 18-DHCP 4-1

display dhcp-security 18-DHCP 1-6

display dhcp-server 18-DHCP 1-7

display dhcp-server interface 18-DHCP 1-8

display dhcp-snooping 18-DHCP 2-7

display dhcp-snooping trust 18-DHCP 2-8

display diagnostic-information 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 1-8

display dldp 11-DLDP 1-1

display dns domain 34-DNS 1-1

display dns dynamic-host 34-DNS 1-1

display dns ipv6 dynamic-host 36-IPv6 Management 1-1

A-6
display dns server 34-DNS 1-2

display domain 15-AAA 1-10

display dot1x 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-1

display fan 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-4

display fib 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-1

display fib | 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-4

display fib acl 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-3

display fib ip-address 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-2

display fib statistics 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-4

display ftp source-ip 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-12

display ftp-server 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-1

display ftp-server source-ip 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-2

display ftp-user 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-2

display garp statistics 06-GVRP 1-1

display garp timer 06-GVRP 1-2

display gvrp statistics 06-GVRP 1-6

display gvrp status 06-GVRP 1-7

display habp 14-802.1x and System Guard 3-1

display habp table 14-802.1x and System Guard 3-2

display habp traffic 14-802.1x and System Guard 3-2

display history-command 01-Login 1-33

display hwtacacs 15-AAA 1-57

display icmp statistics 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-5

display igmp-snooping configuration 25-Multicast 1-1

display igmp-snooping group 25-Multicast 1-2

display igmp-snooping statistics 25-Multicast 1-3

display info-center 30-Information Center 1-1

display interface 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-6

display interface Vlan-interface 03-VLAN 1-2

display ip host 34-DNS 1-3

display ip https 44-HTTPS 1-1

A-7
display ip interface 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 1-1

display ip interface brief 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 1-3

display ip routing-table 04-Static Routing 1-1

display ip routing-table acl 04-Static Routing 1-2

display ip routing-table ip-address 04-Static Routing 1-4

display ip routing-table ip-address1 ip-address2 04-Static Routing 1-6

display ip routing-table ip-prefix 04-Static Routing 1-6

display ip routing-table protocol 04-Static Routing 1-7

display ip routing-table radix 04-Static Routing 1-9

display ip routing-table statistics 04-Static Routing 1-9

display ip routing-table verbose 04-Static Routing 1-10

display ip socket 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-6

display ip source static binding 18-DHCP 2-9

display ip statistics 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-8

display ipv6 fib 36-IPv6 Management 1-2

display ipv6 host 36-IPv6 Management 1-3

display ipv6 interface 36-IPv6 Management 1-4

display ipv6 neighbors 36-IPv6 Management 1-6

display ipv6 neighbors count 36-IPv6 Management 1-8

display ipv6 route-table 36-IPv6 Management 1-8

display ipv6 socket 36-IPv6 Management 1-10

display ipv6 statistics 36-IPv6 Management 1-11

display ipv6-acl-template 19-ACL 1-4

display isolate port 09-Port Isolation 1-1

display lacp system-id 08-Link Aggregation 1-4

display link-aggregation interface 08-Link Aggregation 1-1

display link-aggregation summary 08-Link Aggregation 1-2

display link-aggregation verbose 08-Link Aggregation 1-3

display link-delay 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-10

display lldp local-information 41-LLDP 1-1

display lldp neighbor-information 41-LLDP 1-5

A-8
display lldp statistics 41-LLDP 1-10

display lldp status 41-LLDP 1-12

display lldp tlv-config 41-LLDP 1-14

display local-server statistics 15-AAA 1-30

display local-user 15-AAA 1-12

display logbuffer 30-Information Center 1-3

display logbuffer summary 30-Information Center 1-4

display loopback-detection 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-11

display mac-address 12-MAC Address Table Management 1-2

display mac-address aging-time 12-MAC Address Table Management 1-1

display mac-address multicast 25-Multicast 2-1

display mac-address security 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-1

display mac-authentication 16-MAC Address Authentication 1-1

display memory 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-5

display mirroring-group 21-Mirroring 1-1

display monitor-link group 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 2-1

display ndp 23-Stack-Cluster 2-1

display ntdp 23-Stack-Cluster 2-6

display ntdp device-list 23-Stack-Cluster 2-7

display ntdp single-device mac-address 23-Stack-Cluster 2-49

display ntp-service sessions 26-NTP 1-1

display ntp-service status 26-NTP 1-2

display ntp-service trace 26-NTP 1-4

display packet-filter 19-ACL 1-5

display pki certificate 38-PKI 1-8

display pki certificate access-control-policy 38-PKI 1-10

display pki certificate attribute-group 38-PKI 1-11

display pki crl domain 38-PKI 1-12

display poe disconnect 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-1

display poe interface 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-1

display poe interface power 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-3

A-9
display poe powersupply 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-4

display poe temperature-protection 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-5

display poe-profile 37-PoE-PoE Profile 2-2

display port 03-VLAN 1-9

display port combo 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-11

display port vlan-vpn 32-VLAN-VPN 1-1

display port-group 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-12

display port-security 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-2

display power 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-5

display protocol-priority 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-2

display protocol-vlan interface 03-VLAN 1-15

display protocol-vlan vlan 03-VLAN 1-16

display public-key local 27-SSH 1-1

display public-key peer 27-SSH 1-2

display qos cos-drop-precedence-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-2

display qos cos-dscp-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-3

display qos cos-local-precedence-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-3

display qos dscp-cos-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-4

display qos dscp-drop-precedence-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-6

display qos dscp-dscp-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-7

display qos dscp-local-precedence-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-9

display qos-global 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-11

display qos-interface all 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-12

display qos-interface mirrored-to 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-14

display qos-interface priority-trust 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-14

display qos-interface traffic-limit 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-15

display qos-interface traffic-priority 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-17

display qos-interface traffic-redirect 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-18

display qos-interface traffic-remark-vlanid 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-18

display qos-interface traffic-shape 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-19

display qos-interface traffic-statistic 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-21

A-10
display qos-port-group 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-21

display qos-profile 20-QoS-QoS Profile 2-2

display qos-vlan 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-22

display queue-scheduler 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-23

display radius scheme 15-AAA 1-31

display radius statistics 15-AAA 1-33

display remote-ping 33-Remote-ping 1-6

display remote-ping statistics 33-Remote-ping 1-12

display rmon alarm 24-SNMP-RMON 2-1

display rmon event 24-SNMP-RMON 2-2

display rmon eventlog 24-SNMP-RMON 2-3

display rmon history 24-SNMP-RMON 2-4

display rmon prialarm 24-SNMP-RMON 2-5

display rmon statistics 24-SNMP-RMON 2-7

display rsa local-key-pair public 27-SSH 1-4

display rsa peer-public-key 27-SSH 1-5

display saved-configuration 02-Configuration File Management 1-5

display schedule reboot 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-6

display sftp source-ip 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-29

display smart-link flush 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 1-1

display smart-link group 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 1-2

display snmp-agent 24-SNMP-RMON 1-1

display snmp-agent community 24-SNMP-RMON 1-1

display snmp-agent group 24-SNMP-RMON 1-3

display snmp-agent mib-view 24-SNMP-RMON 1-4

display snmp-agent statistics 24-SNMP-RMON 1-5

display snmp-agent sys-info 24-SNMP-RMON 1-8

display snmp-agent trap-list 24-SNMP-RMON 1-9

display snmp-agent usm-user 24-SNMP-RMON 1-9

display ssh server 27-SSH 1-6

display ssh server-info 27-SSH 1-7

A-11
display ssh user-information 27-SSH 1-8

display ssh2 source-ip 27-SSH 1-9

display ssh-server source-ip 27-SSH 1-9

display ssl client-policy 39-SSL 1-3

display ssl server-policy 39-SSL 1-3

display stacking 23-Stack-Cluster 1-1

display startup 02-Configuration File Management 1-7

display stop-accounting-buffer 15-AAA 1-34

display stop-accounting-buffer 15-AAA 1-58

display storm-constrain 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-13

display stp 13-MSTP 1-3

display stp abnormalport 13-MSTP 1-7

display stp portdown 13-MSTP 1-8

display stp region-configuration 13-MSTP 1-9

display stp root 13-MSTP 1-10

display system-guard attack-record 14-802.1x and System Guard 4-1

display system-guard state 14-802.1x and System Guard 4-1

display tcp ipv6 statistics 36-IPv6 Management 1-14

display tcp ipv6 status 36-IPv6 Management 1-16

display tcp statistics 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-9

display tcp status 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-11

display telnet source-ip 01-Login 1-6

display telnet-server source-ip 01-Login 1-5

display tftp source-ip 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 2-1

display this 02-Configuration File Management 1-8

display time-range 19-ACL 1-6

display transceiver alarm interface 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-6

display transceiver diagnosis interface 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-9

display transceiver interface 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-10

display transceiver manuinfo interface 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-11

display trapbuffer 30-Information Center 1-5

A-12
display udp ipv6 statistics 36-IPv6 Management 1-17

display udp statistics 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-12

display udp-helper server 43-UDP Helper 1-1

display unit 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-14

display user-interface 01-Login 1-6

display users 01-Login 1-9

display version 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 1-7

display vlan 03-VLAN 1-3

display vlan 05-Voice VLAN 1-3

display voice vlan error-info 05-Voice VLAN 1-1

display voice vlan oui 05-Voice VLAN 1-1

display voice vlan status 05-Voice VLAN 1-2

display web package 28-File System Management 1-17

display web users 01-Login 1-10

display web-authentication configuration 40-Web Authentication 1-1

display web-authentication connection 40-Web Authentication 1-2

dldp 11-DLDP 1-2

dldp authentication-mode 11-DLDP 1-3

dldp delaydown-timer 11-DLDP 1-7

dldp interval 11-DLDP 1-4

dldp reset 11-DLDP 1-5

dldp unidirectional-shutdown 11-DLDP 1-5

dldp work-mode 11-DLDP 1-6

dns domain 34-DNS 1-4

dns resolve 34-DNS 1-5

dns resolve-target 33-Remote-ping 1-15

dns server 34-DNS 1-5

dns server ipv6 36-IPv6 Management 1-18

dns-server 33-Remote-ping 1-15

domain 15-AAA 1-13

domain delimiter 15-AAA 1-14

A-13
dot1x 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-4

dot1x authentication-method 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-5

dot1x dhcp-launch 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-6

dot1x free-ip 14-802.1x and System Guard 2-1

dot1x guest-vlan 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-7

dot1x handshake 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-8

dot1x handshake secure 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-9

dot1x max-user 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-10

dot1x port-control 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-11

dot1x port-method 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-12

dot1x quiet-period 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-13

dot1x re-authenticate 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-15

dot1x retry 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-13

dot1x retry-version-max 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-14

dot1x supp-proxy-check 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-16

dot1x timer 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-18

dot1x timer acl-timeout 14-802.1x and System Guard 2-2

dot1x timer reauth-period 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-19

dot1x url 14-802.1x and System Guard 2-2

dot1x version-check 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-20

duplex 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-15

E
enable log updown 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-16

enable snmp trap updown 24-SNMP-RMON 1-11

execute 28-File System Management 1-6

exit 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-29

F
file prompt 28-File System Management 1-6

filename 33-Remote-ping 1-16

filesize 33-Remote-ping 1-17

A-14
fixdisk 28-File System Management 1-7

flow interval 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-17

flow-control 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-17

flush enable control-vlan 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 1-3

format 28-File System Management 1-8

fqdn 38-PKI 1-13

free user-interface 01-Login 1-10

free web-users 01-Login 2-1

frequency 33-Remote-ping 1-18

ftp 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-13

ftp { cluster | remote-server } source-interface 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-13

ftp { cluster | remote-server } source-ip 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-14

ftp cluster 23-Stack-Cluster 2-33

ftp disconnect 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-3

ftp server enable 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-4

ftp source-interface 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-15

ftp source-ip 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-15

ftp timeout 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-5

ftp-operation 33-Remote-ping 1-18

ftp-server 23-Stack-Cluster 2-34

ftp-server source-interface 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-6

ftp-server source-ip 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-6

G
garp timer 06-GVRP 1-3

garp timer leaveall 06-GVRP 1-4

get 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-16

get 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-30

gratuitous-arp-learning enable 22-ARP 1-6

gvrp 06-GVRP 1-7

gvrp registration 06-GVRP 1-8

A-15
H
habp enable 14-802.1x and System Guard 3-3

habp server vlan 14-802.1x and System Guard 3-4

habp timer 14-802.1x and System Guard 3-4

handshake timeout 39-SSL 1-5

header 01-Login 1-11

help 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-30

history keep-time 33-Remote-ping 1-19

history-command max-size 01-Login 1-13

history-record enable 33-Remote-ping 1-20

history-records 33-Remote-ping 1-20

holdtime 23-Stack-Cluster 2-35

http-operation 33-Remote-ping 1-21

http-string 33-Remote-ping 1-22

hwtacacs nas-ip 15-AAA 1-58

hwtacacs scheme 15-AAA 1-59

I
icmp redirect send 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-13

icmp unreach send 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-14

idle-cut 15-AAA 1-15

idle-timeout 01-Login 1-14

igmp host-join 25-Multicast 1-16

igmp-snooping 25-Multicast 1-4

igmp-snooping fast-leave 25-Multicast 1-5

igmp-snooping general-query source-ip 25-Multicast 1-6

igmp-snooping group-limit 25-Multicast 1-7

igmp-snooping group-policy 25-Multicast 1-8

igmp-snooping host-aging-time 25-Multicast 1-10

igmp-snooping max-response-time 25-Multicast 1-10

igmp-snooping nonflooding-enable 25-Multicast 1-11

A-16
igmp-snooping querier 25-Multicast 1-12

igmp-snooping query-interval 25-Multicast 1-13

igmp-snooping router-aging-time 25-Multicast 1-13

igmp-snooping special-query source-ip 25-Multicast 1-14

igmp-snooping version 25-Multicast 1-15

igmp-snooping vlan-mapping 25-Multicast 1-15

info-center channel name 30-Information Center 1-6

info-center console channel 30-Information Center 1-6

info-center enable 30-Information Center 1-7

info-center logbuffer 30-Information Center 1-8

info-center loghost 30-Information Center 1-8

info-center loghost source 30-Information Center 1-9

info-center monitor channel 30-Information Center 1-10

info-center snmp channel 30-Information Center 1-11

info-center source 30-Information Center 1-11

info-center synchronous 30-Information Center 1-13

info-center timestamp 30-Information Center 1-14

info-center timestamp loghost 30-Information Center 1-15

info-center timestamp utc 30-Information Center 1-16

info-center trapbuffer 30-Information Center 1-17

instance 13-MSTP 1-11

interface 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-18

interface Vlan-interface 03-VLAN 1-5

ip (PKI entity view) 38-PKI 1-13

ip address 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 1-4

ip address bootp-alloc 18-DHCP 4-4

ip address dhcp-alloc 18-DHCP 4-2

ip check dot1x enable 18-DHCP 2-9

ip check source ip-address 18-DHCP 2-10

ip host 34-DNS 1-6

ip http acl 01-Login 2-2

A-17
ip http shutdown 01-Login 1-15

ip https acl 44-HTTPS 1-2

ip https certificate access-control-policy 44-HTTPS 1-2

ip https enable 44-HTTPS 1-3

ip https ssl-server-policy 44-HTTPS 1-4

ip route-static 04-Static Routing 1-11

ip source static binding 18-DHCP 2-11

ip source static import dot1x 22-ARP 2-8

ip-pool 23-Stack-Cluster 2-35

ipv6 address 36-IPv6 Management 1-19

ipv6 address auto link-local 36-IPv6 Management 1-19

ipv6 address eui-64 36-IPv6 Management 1-20

ipv6 address link-local 36-IPv6 Management 1-22

ipv6 host 36-IPv6 Management 1-22

ipv6 icmp-error 36-IPv6 Management 1-23

ipv6 nd dad attempts 36-IPv6 Management 1-24

ipv6 nd hop-limit 36-IPv6 Management 1-24

ipv6 nd ns retrans-timer 36-IPv6 Management 1-25

ipv6 nd nud reachable-time 36-IPv6 Management 1-25

ipv6 neighbor 36-IPv6 Management 1-26

ipv6 neighbors max-learning-num 36-IPv6 Management 1-27

ipv6 route-static 36-IPv6 Management 1-27

ipv6-acl-template 19-ACL 1-7

J
jitter-interval 33-Remote-ping 1-25

jitter-packetnum 33-Remote-ping 1-25

jumboframe enable 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-19

K
key 15-AAA 1-35

key 15-AAA 1-59

A-18
L
lacp enable 08-Link Aggregation 1-5

lacp port-priority 08-Link Aggregation 1-5

lacp system-priority 08-Link Aggregation 1-6

lcd 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-17

ldap-server 38-PKI 1-14

level 15-AAA 1-16

link-aggregation group 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 1-3

link-aggregation group 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 2-1

link-aggregation group description 08-Link Aggregation 1-6

link-aggregation group mode 08-Link Aggregation 1-7

link-delay 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-19

lldp admin-status 41-LLDP 1-15

lldp check-change-interval 41-LLDP 1-16

lldp compliance admin-status cdp 41-LLDP 1-17

lldp compliance cdp 41-LLDP 1-17

lldp enable 41-LLDP 1-18

lldp encapsulation snap 41-LLDP 1-18

lldp fast-count 41-LLDP 1-19

lldp hold-multiplier 41-LLDP 1-20

lldp management-address-tlv 41-LLDP 1-20

lldp notification remote-change enable 41-LLDP 1-21

lldp timer notification-interval 41-LLDP 1-21

lldp timer reinit-delay 41-LLDP 1-22

lldp timer tx-delay 41-LLDP 1-22

lldp timer tx-interval 41-LLDP 1-23

lldp tlv-enable 41-LLDP 1-23

locality 38-PKI 1-15

local-server 15-AAA 1-36

local-server nas-ip 15-AAA 1-37

local-user 15-AAA 1-17

A-19
local-user password-display-mode 15-AAA 1-18

lock 01-Login 1-16

logging-host 23-Stack-Cluster 2-36

loopback 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-20

loopback-detection control enable 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-21

loopback-detection enable 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-22

loopback-detection interface-list enable 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-23

loopback-detection interval-time 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-23

loopback-detection per-vlan enable 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-24

loopback-detection shutdown enable 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-24

ls 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-17

ls 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-31

M
mac-address 12-MAC Address Table Management 1-3

mac-address max-mac-count 12-MAC Address Table Management 1-5

mac-address max-mac-count 0 12-MAC Address Table Management 1-6

mac-address multicast interface 25-Multicast 2-2

mac-address multicast vlan 25-Multicast 2-3

mac-address security 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-5

mac-address timer 12-MAC Address Table Management 1-6

mac-authentication 16-MAC Address Authentication 1-3

mac-authentication authmode 16-MAC Address Authentication 1-5

usernameasmacaddress

mac-authentication authmode usernamefixed 16-MAC Address Authentication 1-6

mac-authentication authpassword 16-MAC Address Authentication 1-7

mac-authentication authusername 16-MAC Address Authentication 1-7

mac-authentication domain 16-MAC Address Authentication 1-8

mac-authentication guest-vlan 16-MAC Address Authentication 1-10

mac-authentication interface 16-MAC Address Authentication 1-4

mac-authentication max-auth-num 16-MAC Address Authentication 1-11

mac-authentication timer 16-MAC Address Authentication 1-8

A-20
mac-authentication timer guest-vlan-reauth 16-MAC Address Authentication 1-12

management-vlan 23-Stack-Cluster 2-37

management-vlan synchronization enable 23-Stack-Cluster 2-37

mdi 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-25

messenger 15-AAA 1-18

mirrored-to 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-24

mirrored-to vlan 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-26

mirroring-group 21-Mirroring 1-2

mirroring-group mirroring-mac 21-Mirroring 1-3

mirroring-group mirroring-port 21-Mirroring 1-4

mirroring-group mirroring-vlan 21-Mirroring 1-5

mirroring-group monitor-port 21-Mirroring 1-6

mirroring-group reflector-port 21-Mirroring 1-6

mirroring-group remote-probe vlan 21-Mirroring 1-7

mirroring-port 21-Mirroring 1-8

mkdir 28-File System Management 1-8

mkdir 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-18

mkdir 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-31

monitor-link group 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 2-2

monitor-port 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-26

monitor-port 21-Mirroring 1-9

more 28-File System Management 1-9

move 28-File System Management 1-10

multicast static-group interface 25-Multicast 1-17

multicast static-group vlan 25-Multicast 1-18

multicast static-router-port 25-Multicast 1-19

multicast static-router-port vlan 25-Multicast 1-19

N
name 03-VLAN 1-5

name 15-AAA 1-19

nas-ip 15-AAA 1-38

A-21
nas-ip 15-AAA 1-60

ndp enable 23-Stack-Cluster 2-3

ndp timer aging 23-Stack-Cluster 2-4

ndp timer hello 23-Stack-Cluster 2-4

nm-interface Vlan-interface 23-Stack-Cluster 2-38

nslookup type 34-DNS 1-6

ntdp enable 23-Stack-Cluster 2-8

ntdp explore 23-Stack-Cluster 2-9

ntdp hop 23-Stack-Cluster 2-9

ntdp timer 23-Stack-Cluster 2-10

ntdp timer hop-delay 23-Stack-Cluster 2-11

ntdp timer port-delay 23-Stack-Cluster 2-12

ntp-service access 26-NTP 1-4

ntp-service authentication enable 26-NTP 1-5

ntp-service authentication-keyid 26-NTP 1-6

ntp-service broadcast-client 26-NTP 1-6

ntp-service broadcast-server 26-NTP 1-7

ntp-service in-interface disable 26-NTP 1-8

ntp-service max-dynamic-sessions 26-NTP 1-8

ntp-service multicast-client 26-NTP 1-9

ntp-service multicast-server 26-NTP 1-9

ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid 26-NTP 1-10

ntp-service source-interface 26-NTP 1-11

ntp-service unicast-peer 26-NTP 1-11

ntp-service unicast-server 26-NTP 1-12

O
open 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-19

organization 38-PKI 1-15

organization-unit 38-PKI 1-16

P
A-22
packet-filter 19-ACL 1-8

packet-filter 20-QoS-QoS Profile 2-3

packet-filter vlan 19-ACL 1-9

parity 01-Login 1-16

passive 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-19

password 15-AAA 1-20

password 33-Remote-ping 1-26

peer-public-key end 27-SSH 1-10

ping 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 2-1

ping ipv6 36-IPv6 Management 2-1

pki certificate access-control-policy 38-PKI 1-16

pki certificate attribute-group 38-PKI 1-17

pki delete-certificate 38-PKI 1-17

pki domain 38-PKI 1-18

pki entity 38-PKI 1-18

pki import-certificate 38-PKI 1-19

pki request-certificate domain 38-PKI 1-20

pki retrieval-certificate 38-PKI 1-20

pki retrieval-crl domain 38-PKI 1-21

pki validate-certificate 38-PKI 1-21

pki-domain 39-SSL 1-5

poe disconnect 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-5

poe enable 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-6

poe legacy enable 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-7

poe max-power 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-7

poe mode 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-8

poe power-management 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-8

poe priority 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-9

poe temperature-protection 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-10

poe update 37-PoE-PoE Profile 1-11

poe-profile 37-PoE-PoE Profile 2-3

A-23
port 03-VLAN 1-9

port 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-27

port 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 1-4

port 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 2-3

port access vlan 03-VLAN 1-10

port auto-power-down 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-12

port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan 03-VLAN 1-17

port hybrid pvid vlan 03-VLAN 1-11

port hybrid vlan 03-VLAN 1-12

port isolate 09-Port Isolation 1-1

port link-aggregation group 08-Link Aggregation 1-8

port link-type 03-VLAN 1-12

port monitor-link group 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 2-4

port smart-link group 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 1-5

port trunk permit vlan 03-VLAN 1-13

port trunk pvid vlan 03-VLAN 1-14

port-group 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-26

port-security authorization ignore 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-6

port-security enable 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-7

port-security guest-vlan 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-8

port-security intrusion-mode 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-9

port-security max-mac-count 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-11

port-security ntk-mode 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-12

port-security oui 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-13

port-security port-mode 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-14

port-security timer disableport 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-17

port-security timer guest-vlan-reauth 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-18

port-security trap 10-Port Security-Port Binding 1-19

prefer-cipher 39-SSL 1-6

primary accounting 15-AAA 1-39

primary accounting 15-AAA 1-61

A-24
primary authentication 15-AAA 1-39

primary authentication 15-AAA 1-62

primary authorization 15-AAA 1-62

priority 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-27

priority-trust 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-28

probe-failtimes 33-Remote-ping 1-27

protocol inbound 01-Login 1-17

protocol inbound 27-SSH 1-10

protocol-priority protocol-type 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-29

protocol-vlan 03-VLAN 1-18

public-key local create 27-SSH 1-11

public-key local destroy 27-SSH 1-13

public-key local export dsa 27-SSH 1-15

public-key local export rsa 27-SSH 1-14

public-key peer 27-SSH 1-17

public-key peer import sshkey 27-SSH 1-18

public-key-code begin 27-SSH 1-19

public-key-code end 27-SSH 1-20

put 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-20

put 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-32

pwd 28-File System Management 1-11

pwd 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-21

pwd 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-32

Q
qos cos-drop-precedence-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-30

qos cos-dscp-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-32

qos cos-local-precedence-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-33

qos dscp-cos-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-35

qos dscp-drop-precedence-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-36

qos dscp-dscp-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-37

qos dscp-local-precedence-map 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-39

A-25
qos-profile 20-QoS-QoS Profile 2-3

qos-profile port-based 20-QoS-QoS Profile 2-4

queue-scheduler 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-40

quit 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-21

quit 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-33

quit 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 1-3

R
radius client 15-AAA 1-40

radius nas-ip 15-AAA 1-41

radius scheme 15-AAA 1-42

radius trap 15-AAA 1-43

radius-scheme 15-AAA 1-21

raw-vlan-id inbound 32-VLAN-VPN 2-1

reboot 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-12

reboot member 23-Stack-Cluster 2-39

region-name 13-MSTP 1-11

remotehelp 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-21

remote-ping 33-Remote-ping 1-22

remote-ping-agent clear 33-Remote-ping 1-23

remote-ping-agent enable 33-Remote-ping 1-23

remote-ping-agent max-requests 33-Remote-ping 1-24

remote-ping-server enable 33-Remote-ping 1-39

remote-ping-server tcpconnect 33-Remote-ping 1-40

remote-ping-server udpecho 33-Remote-ping 1-40

remote-probe vlan enable 21-Mirroring 1-10

remove 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-33

rename 28-File System Management 1-11

rename 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-22

rename 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-34

reset arp 22-ARP 1-7

reset counters interface 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-27

A-26
reset dhcp-server 18-DHCP 1-9

reset dhcp-snooping 18-DHCP 2-11

reset dns dynamic-host 34-DNS 1-7

reset dns ipv6 dynamic-host 36-IPv6 Management 1-28

reset dot1x statistics 14-802.1x and System Guard 1-21

reset garp statistics 06-GVRP 1-5

reset hwtacacs statistics 15-AAA 1-63

reset igmp-snooping statistics 25-Multicast 1-20

reset ip routing-table statistics protocol 04-Static Routing 1-12

reset ip statistics 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-14

reset ipv6 neighbors 36-IPv6 Management 1-29

reset ipv6 statistics 36-IPv6 Management 1-29

reset lacp statistics 08-Link Aggregation 1-9

reset logbuffer 30-Information Center 1-17

reset mac-authentication 16-MAC Address Authentication 1-9

reset ndp statistics 23-Stack-Cluster 2-5

reset radius statistics 15-AAA 1-44

reset recycle-bin 28-File System Management 1-12

reset saved-configuration 02-Configuration File Management 1-9

reset smart-link packets counter 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 1-6

reset stop-accounting-buffer 15-AAA 1-44

reset stop-accounting-buffer 15-AAA 1-64

reset stp 13-MSTP 1-12

reset tcp ipv6 statistics 36-IPv6 Management 1-30

reset tcp statistics 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-15

reset traffic-limit 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-42

reset traffic-limit vlan 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-42

reset traffic-statistic 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-43

reset traffic-statistic vlan 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-43

reset trapbuffer 30-Information Center 1-18

reset udp ipv6 statistics 36-IPv6 Management 1-30

A-27
reset udp statistics 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-15

reset udp-helper packet 43-UDP Helper 1-1

retry 15-AAA 1-45

retry realtime-accounting 15-AAA 1-46

retry stop-accounting 15-AAA 1-47

retry stop-accounting 15-AAA 1-64

return 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 1-4

revision-level 13-MSTP 1-13

rmdir 28-File System Management 1-13

rmdir 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-23

rmdir 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-34

rmon alarm 24-SNMP-RMON 2-8

rmon event 24-SNMP-RMON 2-10

rmon history 24-SNMP-RMON 2-11

rmon prialarm 24-SNMP-RMON 2-12

rmon statistics 24-SNMP-RMON 2-14

root-certificate fingerprint 38-PKI 1-22

rsa local-key-pair create 27-SSH 1-21

rsa local-key-pair destroy 27-SSH 1-22

rsa peer-public-key 27-SSH 1-23

rsa peer-public-key import sshkey 27-SSH 1-24

rule (access control policy view) 38-PKI 1-22

rule (for Advanced ACLs) 19-ACL 1-12

rule (for Basic ACLs) 19-ACL 1-10

rule (for IPv6 ACLs) 19-ACL 1-20

rule (for Layer 2 ACLs) 19-ACL 1-18

rule comment 19-ACL 1-22

S
save 02-Configuration File Management 1-10

schedule reboot at 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-13

schedule reboot delay 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-14

A-28
schedule reboot regularity 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-15

scheme 15-AAA 1-21

screen-length 01-Login 1-18

secondary accounting 15-AAA 1-48

secondary accounting 15-AAA 1-65

secondary authentication 15-AAA 1-48

secondary authentication 15-AAA 1-66

secondary authorization 15-AAA 1-66

security-policy-server 15-AAA 2-1

self-service-url 15-AAA 1-22

send 01-Login 1-19

sendpacket passroute 33-Remote-ping 1-28

send-trap 33-Remote-ping 1-28

server-type 15-AAA 1-49

service-type 01-Login 1-20

service-type 15-AAA 1-23

service-type multicast 25-Multicast 1-20

session 39-SSL 1-7

set authentication password 01-Login 1-21

sftp 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-35

sftp server enable 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-24

sftp source-interface 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-36

sftp source-ip 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-37

sftp timeout 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-25

shell 01-Login 1-22

shutdown 03-VLAN 1-6

shutdown 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-28

smart-link flush enable 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 1-6

smart-link group 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 1-7

smart-link group 35-Smart Link-Monitor Link 2-5

snmp-agent 24-SNMP-RMON 1-11

A-29
snmp-agent calculate-password 24-SNMP-RMON 1-12

snmp-agent community 01-Login 2-2

snmp-agent community 24-SNMP-RMON 1-13

snmp-agent group 01-Login 2-3

snmp-agent group 24-SNMP-RMON 1-14

snmp-agent local-engineid 24-SNMP-RMON 1-16

snmp-agent log 24-SNMP-RMON 1-16

snmp-agent mib-view 24-SNMP-RMON 1-17

snmp-agent packet max-size 24-SNMP-RMON 1-19

snmp-agent sys-info 24-SNMP-RMON 1-19

snmp-agent target-host 24-SNMP-RMON 1-21

snmp-agent trap enable 24-SNMP-RMON 1-22

snmp-agent trap ifmib 24-SNMP-RMON 1-23

snmp-agent trap life 24-SNMP-RMON 1-24

snmp-agent trap queue-size 24-SNMP-RMON 1-24

snmp-agent trap source 24-SNMP-RMON 1-25

snmp-agent usm-user 01-Login 2-4

snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } 24-SNMP-RMON 1-26

snmp-agent usm-user v3 24-SNMP-RMON 1-27

snmp-host 23-Stack-Cluster 2-40

source-interface 33-Remote-ping 1-29

source-ip 33-Remote-ping 1-30

source-port 33-Remote-ping 1-31

speed 01-Login 1-23

speed 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-29

speed auto 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-30

ssh authentication-type default 27-SSH 1-25

ssh client assign 27-SSH 1-26

ssh client first-time enable 27-SSH 1-27

ssh server authentication-retries 27-SSH 1-28

ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable 27-SSH 1-29

A-30
ssh server rekey-interval 27-SSH 1-29

ssh server timeout 27-SSH 1-30

ssh user 27-SSH 1-30

ssh user assign 27-SSH 1-32

ssh user authentication-type 27-SSH 1-33

ssh user service-type 27-SSH 1-34

ssh2 27-SSH 1-35

ssh2 source-interface 27-SSH 1-36

ssh2 source-ip 27-SSH 1-37

ssh-server source-interface 27-SSH 1-38

ssh-server source-ip 27-SSH 1-38

ssl client-policy 39-SSL 1-7

ssl server-policy 39-SSL 1-8

stacking 23-Stack-Cluster 1-2

stacking enable 23-Stack-Cluster 1-3

stacking ip-pool 23-Stack-Cluster 1-4

startup bootrom-access enable 28-File System Management 1-18

startup saved-configuration 02-Configuration File Management 1-11

state 15-AAA 1-24

state 15-AAA 1-50

state 38-PKI 1-23

statistics 33-Remote-ping 1-32

statistics keep-time 33-Remote-ping 1-32

stop-accounting-buffer enable 15-AAA 1-51

stopbits 01-Login 1-23

storm-constrain 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-30

storm-constrain control 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-31

storm-constrain enable 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-32

storm-constrain interval 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-33

stp 13-MSTP 1-13

stp bpdu-protection 13-MSTP 1-15

A-31
stp bridge-diameter 13-MSTP 1-16

stp compliance 13-MSTP 1-16

stp config-digest-snooping 13-MSTP 1-18

stp cost 13-MSTP 1-20

stp dot1d-trap 13-MSTP 1-21

stp edged-port 13-MSTP 1-22

stp loop-protection 13-MSTP 1-23

stp max-hops 13-MSTP 1-25

stp mcheck 13-MSTP 1-25

stp mode 13-MSTP 1-27

stp no-agreement-check 13-MSTP 1-27

stp pathcost-standard 13-MSTP 1-29

stp point-to-point 13-MSTP 1-30

stp port priority 13-MSTP 1-32

stp portlog 13-MSTP 1-33

stp portlog all 13-MSTP 1-33

stp priority 13-MSTP 1-34

stp region-configuration 13-MSTP 1-35

stp root primary 13-MSTP 1-35

stp root secondary 13-MSTP 1-37

stp root-protection 13-MSTP 1-38

stp tc-protection 13-MSTP 1-39

stp tc-protection threshold 13-MSTP 1-40

stp timer forward-delay 13-MSTP 1-41

stp timer hello 13-MSTP 1-41

stp timer max-age 13-MSTP 1-42

stp timer-factor 13-MSTP 1-43

stp transmit-limit 13-MSTP 1-44

super 01-Login 1-33

super authentication-mode 01-Login 1-34

super password 01-Login 1-35

A-32
sysname 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 1-4

system-guard detect-threshold 14-802.1x and System Guard 4-2

system-guard enable 14-802.1x and System Guard 4-3

system-guard timer-interval 14-802.1x and System Guard 4-3

system-monitor enable 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-16

system-view 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 1-5

T
tcp ipv6 timer fin-timeout 36-IPv6 Management 1-31

tcp ipv6 timer syn-timeout 36-IPv6 Management 1-31

tcp ipv6 window 36-IPv6 Management 1-32

tcp timer fin-timeout 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-16

tcp timer syn-timeout 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-16

tcp window 17-IP Address and Performance Optimization 2-17

telnet 01-Login 1-24

telnet ipv6 01-Login 1-25

telnet ipv6 36-IPv6 Management 2-3

telnet source-interface 01-Login 1-26

telnet source-ip 01-Login 1-26

telnet-server source-interface 01-Login 1-27

telnet-server source-ip 01-Login 1-27

terminal debugging 30-Information Center 1-18

terminal debugging 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 1-9

terminal logging 30-Information Center 1-19

terminal monitor 30-Information Center 1-19

terminal trapping 30-Information Center 1-20

test-enable 33-Remote-ping 1-35

test-failtimes 33-Remote-ping 1-36

test-time begin 33-Remote-ping 1-33

test-type 33-Remote-ping 1-34

tftp { ascii | binary } 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 2-1

tftp get 23-Stack-Cluster 2-40

A-33
tftp get 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 2-2

tftp ipv6 36-IPv6 Management 2-3

tftp put 23-Stack-Cluster 2-41

tftp put 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 2-3

tftp source-interface 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 2-5

tftp source-ip 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 2-6

tftp tftp-server source-interface 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 2-4

tftp tftp-server source-ip 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 2-5

tftp-server 23-Stack-Cluster 2-42

tftp-server acl 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 2-7

timeout 33-Remote-ping 1-36

timer 15-AAA 1-52

timer 23-Stack-Cluster 2-43

timer quiet 15-AAA 1-52

timer quiet 15-AAA 1-67

timer realtime-accounting 15-AAA 1-53

timer realtime-accounting 15-AAA 1-68

timer response-timeout 15-AAA 1-54

timer response-timeout 15-AAA 1-69

time-range 19-ACL 1-23

topology accept 23-Stack-Cluster 2-51

topology restore-from 23-Stack-Cluster 2-52

topology save-to 23-Stack-Cluster 2-52

tos 33-Remote-ping 1-37

tracemac 23-Stack-Cluster 2-43

tracert 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 2-3

tracert ipv6 36-IPv6 Management 2-4

traffic-limit 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-44

traffic-limit 20-QoS-QoS Profile 2-5

traffic-limit vlan 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-46

traffic-priority 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-47

A-34
traffic-priority 20-QoS-QoS Profile 2-6

traffic-priority vlan 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-48

traffic-redirect 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-48

traffic-redirect vlan 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-49

traffic-remark-vlanid 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-50

traffic-shape 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-51

traffic-statistic 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-52

traffic-statistic vlan 20-QoS-QoS Profile 1-53

ttl 33-Remote-ping 1-37

U
udp-helper enable 43-UDP Helper 1-2

udp-helper port 43-UDP Helper 1-2

udp-helper server 43-UDP Helper 1-4

udp-helper ttl-keep enable 43-UDP Helper 1-4

undelete 28-File System Management 1-14

unknown-multicast drop enable 25-Multicast 2-3

user 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-23

user privilege level 01-Login 1-29

user-interface 01-Login 1-28

username 33-Remote-ping 1-38

user-name-format 15-AAA 1-55

user-name-format 15-AAA 1-69

V
verbose 29-FTP-SFTP-TFTP 1-24

version 39-SSL 1-9

virtual-cable-test 07-Port Basic Configuration 1-33

vlan 03-VLAN 1-7

vlan-assignment-mode 15-AAA 1-25

vlan-mapping modulo 13-MSTP 1-45

vlan-vpn enable 32-VLAN-VPN 1-2

A-35
vlan-vpn priority 32-VLAN-VPN 2-2

vlan-vpn tpid 32-VLAN-VPN 1-3

vlan-vpn tunnel 13-MSTP 1-46

vlan-vpn uplink enable 32-VLAN-VPN 1-4

vlan-vpn vid 32-VLAN-VPN 2-3

voice vlan 05-Voice VLAN 1-4

voice vlan aging 05-Voice VLAN 1-5

voice vlan enable 05-Voice VLAN 1-6

voice vlan legacy 05-Voice VLAN 1-7

voice vlan mac-address 05-Voice VLAN 1-7

voice vlan mode 05-Voice VLAN 1-8

voice vlan qos 05-Voice VLAN 1-9

voice vlan security enable 05-Voice VLAN 1-10

W
web-authentication customize 40-Web Authentication 1-3

web-authentication cut connection 40-Web Authentication 1-5

web-authentication enable 40-Web Authentication 1-6

web-authentication free-ip 40-Web Authentication 1-6

web-authentication free-user 40-Web Authentication 1-7

web-authentication max-connection 40-Web Authentication 1-8

web-authentication protocol 40-Web Authentication 1-9

web-authentication select method 40-Web Authentication 1-9

web-authentication timer idle-cut 40-Web Authentication 1-10

web-authentication timer max-online 40-Web Authentication 1-11

web-authentication web-server 40-Web Authentication 1-12

X
xmodem get 31-System Maintenance and Debugging 3-17

A-36
Z

A-37

Atoll 3.2.1 User Manual Microwave
100% (1)
Atoll 3.2.1 User Manual Microwave
338 pages
CCSA Class Slides
No ratings yet
CCSA Class Slides
285 pages
3com Switch 4800G 24-Port Configuration Manual
No ratings yet
3com Switch 4800G 24-Port Configuration Manual
1,246 pages
3com Switch 8800 Family Configuration Guide
No ratings yet
3com Switch 8800 Family Configuration Guide
883 pages
T24 Navigation and Environment
100% (1)
T24 Navigation and Environment
43 pages
A+ Cheat Sheet Best1
100% (2)
A+ Cheat Sheet Best1
7 pages
3com Switch 4500 Configuration Guide V03.02.00
No ratings yet
3com Switch 4500 Configuration Guide V03.02.00
400 pages
3com Switch 4500 Command Reference Guide
No ratings yet
3com Switch 4500 Command Reference Guide
466 pages
4800G Command Reference Guide (R2202)
No ratings yet
4800G Command Reference Guide (R2202)
2,256 pages
HTML & DHTML
No ratings yet
HTML & DHTML
187 pages
Command Ref in HUAWEI
No ratings yet
Command Ref in HUAWEI
1,150 pages
Manual 4510
No ratings yet
Manual 4510
1,334 pages
3com SuperStack 4 Switch 5500G-EI - Command Reference Guide v3.1.x
No ratings yet
3com SuperStack 4 Switch 5500G-EI - Command Reference Guide v3.1.x
530 pages
3com Switch 4200G Family: Configuration Guide
No ratings yet
3com Switch 4200G Family: Configuration Guide
902 pages
3com Switch 4210 Configuration Guide
No ratings yet
3com Switch 4210 Configuration Guide
627 pages
3com Switch 4510G Family: Configuration Guide
No ratings yet
3com Switch 4510G Family: Configuration Guide
1,166 pages
3com 4210 CLI Guide
No ratings yet
3com 4210 CLI Guide
921 pages
4500 Configuration Guide
No ratings yet
4500 Configuration Guide
739 pages
3com SuperStack 4 Switch 5500G-EI - Configuration Guide
No ratings yet
3com SuperStack 4 Switch 5500G-EI - Configuration Guide
432 pages
VMware PowerCli Get-Help
No ratings yet
VMware PowerCli Get-Help
63 pages
3com 3CRUS2475 Command Reference
No ratings yet
3com 3CRUS2475 Command Reference
522 pages
3com 7750 Config Guide
No ratings yet
3com 7750 Config Guide
940 pages
Advanced Configuration Guide: 3com Stackable Switch Family
No ratings yet
Advanced Configuration Guide: 3com Stackable Switch Family
336 pages
Switch 4800g 24port PDF
No ratings yet
Switch 4800g 24port PDF
1,246 pages
Configuration Guide-3Com-Switch 4210 Family
No ratings yet
Configuration Guide-3Com-Switch 4210 Family
567 pages
3com Switch 4210
No ratings yet
3com Switch 4210
720 pages
Comando Switch 3com 4200 PDF
No ratings yet
Comando Switch 3com 4200 PDF
901 pages
3com Switch 7750 Command Reference
No ratings yet
3com Switch 7750 Command Reference
1,140 pages
5500gei PDF
No ratings yet
5500gei PDF
530 pages
3com Stackable Switch Advanced Config Guide
No ratings yet
3com Stackable Switch Advanced Config Guide
475 pages
3com Switch 4500 Command Ref Guide
No ratings yet
3com Switch 4500 Command Ref Guide
446 pages
3com 7750 User Guide Config
No ratings yet
3com 7750 User Guide Config
830 pages
3com WX1200 Datasheet
No ratings yet
3com WX1200 Datasheet
646 pages
Superstack 4 Switch 5500G-Ei Family: Command Reference Guide
No ratings yet
Superstack 4 Switch 5500G-Ei Family: Command Reference Guide
530 pages
4200g 12port
No ratings yet
4200g 12port
422 pages
3com Stackable Switches Advanced Configuration Examples
No ratings yet
3com Stackable Switches Advanced Configuration Examples
220 pages
3com Stackable Switch Advanced Config Guide
No ratings yet
3com Stackable Switch Advanced Config Guide
336 pages
DBMS Profiler
No ratings yet
DBMS Profiler
4 pages
Quantum-Scalari40i80 I3 UserGuide
100% (1)
Quantum-Scalari40i80 I3 UserGuide
404 pages
Switch 4500 Family Configuration Guide
No ratings yet
Switch 4500 Family Configuration Guide
344 pages
E4800G Confguide
No ratings yet
E4800G Confguide
1,246 pages
Scilab Lecture NOtes
No ratings yet
Scilab Lecture NOtes
7 pages
3com Switch 4500 Command Reference Guide
No ratings yet
3com Switch 4500 Command Reference Guide
955 pages
3com Stackable Switches Advanced Configuration Examples
No ratings yet
3com Stackable Switches Advanced Configuration Examples
220 pages
Guia 3com Switch-4500G Configuration-Guide
No ratings yet
Guia 3com Switch-4500G Configuration-Guide
598 pages
Switch 4200G
No ratings yet
Switch 4200G
730 pages
Manual 3com 5500g Switch
No ratings yet
Manual 3com 5500g Switch
436 pages
08 PHP MYSQL Complex Queries Functions
100% (6)
08 PHP MYSQL Complex Queries Functions
16 pages
JavaScript Print Version - Wikibooks Open Books For An Open World PDF
No ratings yet
JavaScript Print Version - Wikibooks Open Books For An Open World PDF
60 pages
GEF Tutorial
No ratings yet
GEF Tutorial
82 pages
Scripting With RootDSE
No ratings yet
Scripting With RootDSE
18 pages
TCP Over Wireless
No ratings yet
TCP Over Wireless
92 pages
Accumulator Based 3-Weight Pattern Generation
No ratings yet
Accumulator Based 3-Weight Pattern Generation
15 pages
Interoperability For Enterprise Management Tools and Repositories
No ratings yet
Interoperability For Enterprise Management Tools and Repositories
16 pages
Operating System Lab - Manual
No ratings yet
Operating System Lab - Manual
70 pages
Vinno 5
No ratings yet
Vinno 5
4 pages
LP Duality
No ratings yet
LP Duality
37 pages
216205.1 - Database Initialization Parameters For Oracle Applications Release 11i
No ratings yet
216205.1 - Database Initialization Parameters For Oracle Applications Release 11i
21 pages
COMSATS Institute of Information Technology Registrar Office, Principal Seat, Islamabad
No ratings yet
COMSATS Institute of Information Technology Registrar Office, Principal Seat, Islamabad
4 pages
TA357 Asset MGMT v1.0 (IBM Edits)
No ratings yet
TA357 Asset MGMT v1.0 (IBM Edits)
21 pages
An Introduction To GUI Programming Using R
No ratings yet
An Introduction To GUI Programming Using R
25 pages
Backup in MAXDB
No ratings yet
Backup in MAXDB
3 pages
LPC2000 Secondary Bootloader
No ratings yet
LPC2000 Secondary Bootloader
21 pages
Openscape Business V1R2: Web Services Interface Manual Wsi Reference
No ratings yet
Openscape Business V1R2: Web Services Interface Manual Wsi Reference
55 pages
Snaptube For Windows PC
No ratings yet
Snaptube For Windows PC
1 page
Mca-501 Data Warehousing and Data Mining 2008 PDF
No ratings yet
Mca-501 Data Warehousing and Data Mining 2008 PDF
21 pages
Gesture Recognition
No ratings yet
Gesture Recognition
4 pages
Linux Bible
From Everand
Linux Bible
Christopher Negus
No ratings yet
OpenVPN Building and Integrating Virtual Private Networks
From Everand
OpenVPN Building and Integrating Virtual Private Networks
Markus Feilner
4.5/5 (2)
CompTIA A+ Complete Review Guide: Core 1 Exam 220-1101 and Core 2 Exam 220-1102
From Everand
CompTIA A+ Complete Review Guide: Core 1 Exam 220-1101 and Core 2 Exam 220-1102
Troy McMillan
5/5 (2)
The Complete Guide to Installing Parrot OS
From Everand
The Complete Guide to Installing Parrot OS
mehul kothari
No ratings yet
Oracle SOA Suite 11g Administrator's Handbook
From Everand
Oracle SOA Suite 11g Administrator's Handbook
Ahmed Aboulnaga
No ratings yet
Building Telephony Systems with OpenSER
From Everand
Building Telephony Systems with OpenSER
Goncalves Flavio E.
No ratings yet
Ubuntu Linux Bible
From Everand
Ubuntu Linux Bible
David Clinton
No ratings yet
Cisco Network Administration Interview Questions: CISCO CCNA Certification Review
From Everand
Cisco Network Administration Interview Questions: CISCO CCNA Certification Review
equitypress
4.5/5 (6)
MCSA Windows Server 2012 Complete Study Guide: Exams 70-410, 70-411, 70-412, and 70-417
From Everand
MCSA Windows Server 2012 Complete Study Guide: Exams 70-410, 70-411, 70-412, and 70-417
William Panek
No ratings yet
CISCO PACKET TRACER LABS: Best practice of configuring or troubleshooting Network
From Everand
CISCO PACKET TRACER LABS: Best practice of configuring or troubleshooting Network
Mulayam Singh
No ratings yet
Study Guide Cisco 300-535 SPAUTO Automating and Programming Cisco Service Provider Solutions
From Everand
Study Guide Cisco 300-535 SPAUTO Automating and Programming Cisco Service Provider Solutions
Anand Vemula
No ratings yet
Next-Generation switching OS configuration and management: Troubleshooting NX-OS in Enterprise Environments
From Everand
Next-Generation switching OS configuration and management: Troubleshooting NX-OS in Enterprise Environments
Mamta Devi
No ratings yet
Linux DevOps Tools Engineer (701) Practice Tests: 400 Questions to Ace Your Certification
From Everand
Linux DevOps Tools Engineer (701) Practice Tests: 400 Questions to Ace Your Certification
Steve Brown
No ratings yet
CCNA Certification Study Guide Volume 2: Exam 200-301 v1.1
From Everand
CCNA Certification Study Guide Volume 2: Exam 200-301 v1.1
Todd Lammle
5/5 (1)
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9 Essentials: Learn to Install, Administer and Deploy RHEL 9 Systems
From Everand
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9 Essentials: Learn to Install, Administer and Deploy RHEL 9 Systems
Neil Smyth
No ratings yet
Cisco CCNA Command Guide: An Introductory Guide for CCNA & Computer Networking Beginners: Computer Networking, #3
From Everand
Cisco CCNA Command Guide: An Introductory Guide for CCNA & Computer Networking Beginners: Computer Networking, #3
Ramon Nastase
4.5/5 (2)
LEARN MPLS FROM SCRATCH PART-B: A Beginners guide to next level of networking
From Everand
LEARN MPLS FROM SCRATCH PART-B: A Beginners guide to next level of networking
POONAM DEVI
No ratings yet
Network with Practical Labs Configuration: Step by Step configuration of Router and Switch configuration
From Everand
Network with Practical Labs Configuration: Step by Step configuration of Router and Switch configuration
Mulayam Singh
No ratings yet
First Hop Redundancy Protocol: Network Redundancy Protocol
From Everand
First Hop Redundancy Protocol: Network Redundancy Protocol
Mulayam Singh
No ratings yet
CCNA Exam Focus: Study Guide with Practice Tests
From Everand
CCNA Exam Focus: Study Guide with Practice Tests
SUJAN
No ratings yet
WAN TECHNOLOGY FRAME-RELAY: An Expert's Handbook of Navigating Frame Relay Networks
From Everand
WAN TECHNOLOGY FRAME-RELAY: An Expert's Handbook of Navigating Frame Relay Networks
Mamta Devi
No ratings yet
CCNA Exam Excellence: Study Guide & Practice Tests
From Everand
CCNA Exam Excellence: Study Guide & Practice Tests
SUJAN
No ratings yet